
1 ^V/^A\\V tt ^ -^v- 






•x- 



i 






* 0c 










v><^ 






% ° 






<*v (• 












^* 



', c 



% 








7%^* '- 



•*•/ v* 



- 



O, y , 


















*<*./ . 



." . 




'^> < 









\N ^ 









'^- V 









v 



ip°«* 






-<- 









V^ 









<H <»5 ^ 









y ^ 



- , 



!*• 









"%•. ^ 



V 












•^ ' / ., 



** 



.** * 






■ ^ 


















' °o 



_^ 









^v 



^ ^ 



s 



ANALYSIS AND CRITICAL INTERPRETATION 



HEBREW TEXT 



THE BOOK OF GENESIS, 



PBECEDED BY 



A HEBREW GRAMMAR, 



DISSERTATIONS ON THE GENUINENESS OF THE PENTATEUCH 
AND ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 



REV. WILLIAM PAUL, A.M., 

» i 

MINISTER OF BANCHORY DEVKNICK, N. B. 



WILLIAM BLACKWOOD AND SONS, 

EDINBURGH AND LONDON. 

M.DCCC.LII. 



^9 X ^K 



LONDON: 

PRINTED BY J. WERTHEIMER AND CO. 

CIRCUS PLACE, FINSBURY CIRCUS. 



9¥<f 



&* 



a 

PKEFACE 



While engaged in the study of the Hebrew language 
many years ago, it occurred to me that a very useful 
work might be composed, in order to facilitate its acqui- 
sition,, having the Hebrew text of Genesis for its basis. 
The excellent Hebrew Grammars and Lexicons published 
of late years, and such works on Hebrew philology, as the 
Pliilologia Sacra of Glassius, and Storrii Observationes, etc e , 
and such helps to the interpretation of the Hebrew text, 
as the Scholia of the younger Rosenmiiller, would, I 
thought, enable any one moderately qualified, to render 
such a work highly instrumental to the advancement of 
the student's progress in the Hebrew language, and to the 
profitable study of the Hebrew Scriptures. Under this 
impression, I commenced the Analytical part of this work, 
which, fortified by the favourable opinion expressed of it 
by competent judges, I now submit to the public. 

In this part of it, every word is analysed, numbered, 
and indexed. In the first chapter all the accents are 
marked, their names and powers given, and the reasons 
assigned when the words are accented contrary to the 
general rule. In the first three chapters, all the words 
are written in the English as well as in the Hebrew 
characters, and syllabled, in order to lessen the difficulty 
of reading the Hebrew text. Throughout the whole of 



IV PREFACE. 

this part of it, the principles of the structure of 
the language, laid down in the third part of the Intro- 
duction, are illustrated ; and likewise the principles which 
regulate the changes of the vowel points, contained 
in a Grammar which precedes it. I have freely availed 
myself of the assistance to be obtained in the admirable 
Lexicons of Simonis edited by Winer, Gesenius, and 
Dr. Lee, in settling the original meanings of the words, in 
deducing the logical connection between their secondary 
and primary senses; in pointing out cognate words in the 
same family of languages, and in tracing analogies existing 
between certain words, both in the Shemitic and Indo- 
European languages; and also in interpreting difficult 
passages of the Hebrew text. The great difficulty that 
the student meets with in the acquisition of the Hebrew 
language, arises from the fact, that all the words are new 
to him. This difficulty can only be mastered by attention 
and perseverance. There is no royal road by which it 
can be avoided. In the study of more modern languages, 
particularly those which are cognate, and which have 
common roots, a stock of vocables may be obtained with 
comparatively little difficulty. In Hebrew, however, every 
word may be said to be new to the learner ; its similarity 
to words in other languages being seldom obvious to him 
at the commencement of the study. He will likewise find 
words, previously known to him ; connected with fragments 
of pronouns, or other words, which modify or alter their 
meanings, and which greatly disguise their forms, and often 
prevent him from again recognizing them. Derivatives are 
few in Hebrew, compared with those in the Indo-European 
languages ; and compound words, that is, those which are 
made up of two or more distinct words, are almost un- 
known, so that the knowledge of one word helps the 



PREFACE. 



learner but to a very few others. It is the province of 
good Grammars and Lexicons to lessen these difficulties; 
the Grammars, by shewing the principles upon which the 
composition of words, and the alterations in their vowels 
and forms are regulated; the Lexicons, by tracing the 
logical connections between their primary and secondary 
meanings, and by pointing out analogies between words in 
different languages, which are not at first sight obvious to 
the learner, so that, by both these offices of the Lexico- 
grapher, the meanings of the words themselves are im- 
pressed upon his memory by an intellectual process, alike 
satisfactory and instructive. 

The Analysis is preceded by a short Grammar, which is 
specially designed for that part of the work, and which 
would be very incomplete without it. It contains little 
more than the general principles of the Hebrew grammar, 
which are illustrated in the Analysis. I have preferred 
pointing out the exceptions there, to the loading of the 
Grammar with them. I thought, if the general principle 
was well understood, that the learner would soon regard 
every case that appeared contrary to it as an exception, 
and treat it as such. The Grammar is formed upon the 
plan and principles of that of Dr. Lee, and the references 
are made to that admirable work in every case where the 
student is likely to feel the desirableness of more iu for- 
mation. I became early a convert to most of the important 
principles contained in the works on Hebrew Philology of 
that highly distinguished Oriental scholar; and I feel 
under great obligations to him for the benefit I have 
derived from his writings, and for the many excellent 
suggestions with which he has favoured me in the con- 
ducting of this work. 

In the Grammar, I have endeavoured to lay down as 



VI PKEFACE. 

briefly and as clearly as possible the general principles of 
syllabication, accentuation, contraction, changes of vowels, 
formation of words, and the like. In order to facilitate 
the learning of the verb, I have given the regular para- 
digm, both in the Hebrew and English characters; and I 
have numbered all the paradigms, and referred to them in 
the Analysis, to enable the student to ascertain at a glance 
the exact part of the verb he meets with, and to compare 
it with the paradigm to which it belongs. I do not recom- 
mend the student to commit any part of the Grammar to 
memory, but the paradigms of the verbs. It would be 
exceedingly desirable if he learned the whole of them, 
which would not occupy a long time ; and sure I am that the 
more thoroughly he masters them, the more rapid will be 
his progress in the language. 

In the study of Hebrew, which is very different in its 
form and structure from the Indo-European languages, 
the learner should avoid as much as possible the gram- 
matical phraseology of these languages. There are no 
cases in Hebrew nouns, and, according to my view of the 
subject, no declensions. A verb has its object either in 
immediate or mediate connection with it. The former is 
analogous to the connection of an active verb in other 
languages with a noun in the objective case; the latter to 
that of a verb which governs the dative, or which is 
separated from its object by a preposition. The inter- 
position of a preposition between the verb and its object, 
is the mark of what Dr. Lee very properly calls mediate 
construction. 

The Analysis and Grammar are the principal parts of 
the work ; but it is preceded by an introduction consisting 
of three parts, which I venture to hope will enhance its 
value. In the first part, arguments have been advanced, 



PREFACE. Vll 

shewing that the Mosaic account of the Creation is in no 
respect invalidated by modern geological discoveries; 
and establishing in various ways, the genuineness of the 
Pentateuch in general, and of the Book of Genesis in 
particular. In this part of the work I have considered 
the probable sources whence Moses derived the materials 
for the writing of the book of Genesis ; and in doing so, I 
have considered what weight in evidence, on this point, is 
to be given to what are called the Jehovah and Elohim 
documents. In this part of the work, I could not, within 
my limits, adduce the whole of the arguments usually 
advanced in favour of the genuineness of the Pentateuch. 
What I have adduced, I call contributions to the general 
arguments ; not that I pretend to have adduced none of 
the more common arguments, or that those less common 
are all new. I have endeavoured, however, to place the 
arguments which suggested themselves to me, in as brief 
and interesting a view as possible, in order to arrest the 
student's attention, and to carry conviction to his mind. 
Of a particular class of the arguments which I have 
adduced, I here subjoin an example, taken from the consi- 
deration of the forms observed in the sale of the cave of 
Machpelah to Abraham, by Ephron the Hittite, recorded 
in Gen. chap, xxiii. The possession, when purchased, is 
called *Dp ^tff\\& y a khuz-zath ke-bher, & possession or seizin 
of a burial-place. The word H-jntJ is derived from 1I1K 
(seized), and signifies: 1. Seizure. 2. Possession, seizure 
or appropriation, being probably the original mode of 
obtaining property. 3. The form of obtaining possession, 
which corresponds in derivation and meaning with our 
law-term seizin. At the period in question, the forms of 
the transference of property were very simple. The price 
was fixed, and the money weighed and paid in presence of 



Vlll PEEFACE. 

the elders that sat at the gate of the city ; and then the 
property was taken possession of by the purchaser, which 
is called the H-TH^, which may with propriety be rendered 
seizin. All this was done without the intervention of 
writing, and is a truly patriarchal mode of transference, 
and completely suitable to the period at which it is repre- 
sented to have taken place. Had Moses, in the description 
of this transaction, stated that there was an original written 
deed, signed by witnesses, and sealed, conformably to law, 
and a duplicate which was open, as was the case in the 
purchase of the field by Jeremiah, a short time before the 
Babylonish captivity, and described in the 34th chapter of 
his prophecies, should we not have had a description of 
manners and customs of a later date, quite unsuitable to 
the Abrahamic era, and serving as a foundation for an 
argument strongly affecting the genuineness of the docu- 
ment describing the transaction. 

In the second part of the Introduction, the genuineness 
of the Pentateuch is proved by arguments founded on a 
comparison of the styles of the earlier and later writers of 
the Old Testament. In this comparison have been pointed 
out the disappearance of old, and the rise of new words, 
idioms, and phrases; the extension of the meanings of 
existing words during the different periods of the Old 
Testament history ; and the corruption of the Hebrew style 
in the later writers, from an admixture with it of Chaldee 
words and idioms. I have thus, by an extensive induction 
of facts, proved that the books of Moses could not have 
been written at any other period than that usually assigned 
to them. From the proofs I have advanced in detail, 
a cumulative argument is raised^ which I conceive to be 
impregnable. In the third part, is contained an investi- 
gation of the principles and structure of the Hebrew 



PREFACE. ix 

language (embracing a dissertation upon the sequences 
of the tenses) which are developed and referred to in the 
Analysis. 

I have endeavoured to render the work as complete 
and perfect as possible, and in the plan, style, and subject 
matter to make it clear, interesting, and useful to the 
student. The Introduction has been re-written and 
greatly enlarged since the work went to press. This 
circumstance has placed me at some disadvantage in 
the execution of this part of it, which embraces many 
questions of great difficulty that have divided the opinions 
of the greatest Oriental scholars, and which was com- 
posed amidst the interruptions and distractions occasioned 
by professional duties, and unavoidable public and pri- 
vate engagements. No pains have been spared in the 
correction of the press ; and the typographical errors will, 
I trust, be found to be few and unimportant. 

I have to acknowledge, with much thankfulness, the 
kindness, encouragement, and aid, which I have received 
in the prosecution of the work, both from friends and 
strangers. It would be endless to particularize the names 
of ministers of my own persuasion, and others pre- 
viously known to me, who have expressed an interest in 
it and encouraged me to go on with it; but I cannot 
forbear mentioning the names of several distinguished 
individuals, who, previously to my communications with 
them on this subject, were entire strangers to me, and 
who either readily entered into correspondence with me, 
and gave me their valuable advice whenever I desired it, 
or, on a personal interview, by their kind encouragement, 
greatly stimulated me to exertion. I mention the names 
of Dr. Samuel Lee, late Professor of Hebrew in the 
University of Cambridge; Dr. A. M c Caul, Professor of 



X PREFACE. 

Eabbinical Literature, King's College, London; Dr. E. 
Henderson, late Professor of Biblical Literature, in High- 
bury College, London; Dr. Samuel Davidson, Professor 
of Biblical Literature in the Lancashire Independent Col- 
lege; Dr. John Brown and Dr. John Eadie, Theological 
Professors, in connexion with the United Secession Church 
in Scotland ; and Dr. James M c Culloch, Minister of the 
West Church, Greenock. 

I shall now conclude, in the hope that the work may 
be kindly welcomed by the public ; and with an anxious 
desire that it may conduce to the advancement of the 
study of the Hebrew language among students of theology 
of all denominations; — that it may tend to aid them in 
rightly dividing the word of truth; — and that it may 
contribute to the establishment of their faith in the 
genuineness of the Mosaic records, which contain the 
germ and the basis of the revelation by Jesus Christ. 



Manse of Banchory, Devenick, Nov. 1851, 



INTRODUCTION 



PART L— CHAPTER I. 

On the Mosaic Account of the Creation. 

The Book of Genesis has been chosen as an introduction to the 
study of the Hebrew Scriptures, on account of the intrinsic impor- 
tance of its contents, the variety of the subjects of which it treats; 
its great antiquity; and its claims as a genuine and faithful record 
of divine truth. It contains the only consistent and rational account 
that has ever been given of the creation of the world, of the origin 
of the human race, and of that earliest dispensation to Man upon 
which the others are based. It furnishes us with the earliest chro- 
nological, ethnographical, and historical accounts of our species; 
marks the rise and development of civil institutions, the progress of 
various arts of civilized life, and the state of manners and customs in 
the primitive stages of society. 

It assumes as a principle of religious belief, that there is one, and 
only one God, to whom all power and perfections are ascribed ; and 
it points out the relations in which he stands to his rational offspring; 
the consequent claims he has on them, and the duties and responsi- 
bilities thence arising. It makes us acquainted with man's original 
state of holiness and happiness, and with his subsequent condition of 
sin and misery; and records the first announcements of the method 
of his recovery by a Saviour, and of the Holy Spirit's work in his 
conversion and sanctincation. 

The view of the nature and perfections of God assumed by the 
sacred historian, removes all the difficulties raised by the ancient 

b 

h 



11 INTRODUCTION. 

philosophers on the subject of the creation of the world. Before 
such a being no difficulties can exist. " He spake, and it was done; 
he commanded, and all things stood fast." Holding such opinions 
as to his nature and perfections, we can " understand that the worlds 
were framed by the word of God, so that things which are seen 
were not made of things which do appear ; " or as it is expressed in 
2 Mac. vii. 28, that ov/c ef ovrcov eTroirjo-e avra. The principle 
maintained by certain of the heathen philosophers, "ex nihilo nihil 
fit," has nothing in it to stagger a believer in the God of the Bible ; 
nor with such an account of the creation as that given in the first 
chapter of Genesis, does he find it necessary to have recourse to the 
absurd and all but exploded doctrines of chance, of the eternity of 
matter, and the like. Many nations of antiquity have transmitted 
accounts of the creation of the world, either historical or traditionary, 
all of which appear to be based upon that given by Moses, and 
which are consistent and probable, only according to their approxi- 
mation to that of the sacred historian. 

The enemies of revealed truth at one time entertained hopes, and 
its friends were not without fears, that the Mosaic account of the 
creation would be shaken by the facts brought to light by recent 
geological discoveries. But for the hopes of the former, and the 
fears of the latter, there appear to be no solid grounds. The most 
eminent geologists indeed assign a much greater age to this earth 
than that of six thousand years. An excellent summary of the 
arguments usually adduced in proof of this point, is subjoined, in 
the words of Professor Hitchcock, of Amherst College, U. S. 

1. " More than two-thirds of existing continents are covered with 
fossiliferous rocks, which contain numerous remains of marine 
animals, so preserved as to prove incontestably that they died on the 
spot where they are now found, and became gradually enveloped in 
the sand, or other stony matter, which accumulated around them, 
their most delicate spines and processes being preserved. In fine, 
these rocks present every appearance of having been formed just as 
sand, clay, gravel, and lime-stone are now accumulating in the 
bottom of the ocean by a very slow process. Except in extraordi- 
nary cases, indeed, it requires a century to produce accumulations of 
this kind even a few inches in thickness. 



INTRODUCTION. ill 

2. " But geologists think they have ascertained that the fossiliferous 
strata in Europe are not less than eight or ten miles in thickness. 
How immense the period requisite for the production of such 
masses. 

3. "This mass is divided into hundreds of distinct strata; each 
group containing peculiar organic remains, and arranged in as much 
order, one above another, as the drawers of a well regulated cabinet. 
Such changes, not only of mineral composition, but of organic 
remains, shew that there must have been more or less of change of 
circumstances in the waters, from which the successive strata and 
groups were deposited. And such changes must have demanded 
periods of time of long duration, for they appear to have been for 
the most part extremely slow. We hence derive confirmatory evi- 
dence of the views that have been presented concerning the vast 
periods that have been employed in the production of the fossiliferous 
strata. 

4. " Another circumstance still farther confirms these views. In 
very many instances each successive group of the strata above 
referred to, contains rounded pebbles derived from some of the 
preceding groups. Those strata, then, from which such pebbles 
were derived, must not only have been deposited, but consolidated 
and eroded by water, so as to produce these pebbles before the rocks 
now containing them could have been formed. It is impossible that 
such changes, numerous as they must have been, could have taken 
place in short periods of time. There must certainly have been 
long intervals between the formation of the successive groups. 

5. " The history of the repeated elevations which the strata have 
undergone, conducts us to the same conclusion. Different unstrati- 
fied rocks have been intruded among the stratified ones of various 
epochs, and the strata have been elevated at each epoch. But the 
oldest strata were partially elevated before the newer ones were 
deposited; for the latter rest in an unconformable position upon the 
former. Indeed, we often find numerous groups of strata resting 
unconformably upon one another, the lowest being most tilted up, 
the next higher less so, and the third less, until the latest is fre- 
quently horizontal, having never been disturbed by any internal 
protruding agency. It is obvious, then, that after the first elevation 

b 2 



IV INTRODUCTION. 

of the lowest group, there must have been an interval of repose 
sufficiently long to permit the deposition of the second group, before 
the second elevation; then a second period of repose, succeeded by 
a third elevation; and so on to the top of the series. Here, then 
we have the same evidence of the slow formation of the stratified 
rocks, as is taught us by their lithological characters, and by their 
organic remains. 

6. " Finally, there appear to have been several almost entire 
changes of organic life upon the globe, since the deposition of the 
fossiliferous rocks began. And comparative anatomy teaches us, 
"that so different from one another were the successive groups which 
we find in the different strata, that they could not have been con- 
temporaries. But each group appears to have been adapted to 
the condition of the globe at the time; and it was continued appa- 
rently until, by the extremely slow process of refrigeration, the tem- 
perature was rendered unfit for their residence, when they became 
extinct, and a new creation arose. But they lived long enough 
for rocks thousands of feet in thickness to be deposited, which now 
contain their remains. Who can doubt that vast periods of time 
were requisite for such changes of organic life ; and who can believe 
that they have taken place since the creation of man? 

" We have dwelt long upon this point (continues the learned Pro- 
fessor) because of its importance. For if there is not the most con- 
clusive evidence in geology of the existence of the globe longer than 
the common interpretation of the Mosaic history admits, we need 
not surely spend time in reconciling the records. We cannot, 
however, but believe, that every impartial mind, which fairly 
examines this subject, will be forced to the conclusion that the facts 
of geology do teach us as conclusively as any science not founded on 
mathematics can teach, that the globe must have existed during a 
period indefinitely long, anterior to the creation of man. We are 
not aware that any practical and thorough geologist doubts this, 
whatever are his views in regard to religion. Some writers of 
geology, indeed, who have studied the subject only in books, and 
are little else than compilers, have taken different ground. But of 
how little weight must the opinion of such men be regarded, when 
set in opposition to the unanimous voice of such men as Cuvier, 



INTRODUCTION. V 

Humboldt, Brogniart, Jameson, Buckland, Sedgwick, Murchison, 
Conybeare, Greenough, Bakewell, Lyell, Mantel], De la Beclie, and 
many more; who not only stand among the most distinguished 
philosophers of the present day, but many of them at least are 
equally well known as decided friends of revelation. Unless the 
evidence were very strong, there would be found among so many of 
different education and professions, at least one dissenting voice; 
but there is none." — Connection between Geology and the Mosaic 
history of the Creation, p. 18, seq. 

A method has been resorted to for reconciling the above-mentioned 
geological facts with the narrative in the Mosaic records, by regard- 
ing the days of creation as periods of indefinite length, instead of 
periods of twenty-four hours. This meaning of the word "day" was 
held by Josephus and Philo among the Jews; by Origen, St. 
Augustine, and Bede among the early Christians; and has been 
maintained by AVhiston, De Luc, Faber, and others, in modern 
times, who hold that during these indefinite periods those great 
changes were effected, and the phenomena produced in the crust of 
the earth which have been just described. For assigning such a 
meaning to the word in the first chapter of Genesis, there appears 
to be no warrant, and no itecessity. It is true that the words day, 
and days have, in many passages of the Hebrew Scriptures, a figu- 
rative meaning, indicative of an indefinite period. This is the 
case in our own, and probably in all other languages. Of this no 
proof can be necessary. The only question is whether a figurative 
sense is admissible here. The principal use of figurative language 
is to enliven the style, and to supersede the unnecessary multipli- 
cation of words ; but it is very obvious that the literal meaning of 
words cannot be abandoned, unless where the sense or context 
requires a figurative interpretation. It will thus clearly appear 
whether the literal meaning is admissible or not, and this may 
be ascertained in the works of any good author with a precision 
which excludes all doubt. The literal and figurative meanings of 
words may be thus as clearly distinguished, as if different words 
had been used. Were it otherwise, the use of figures would 
destroy all perspicuity and precision in language, and introduce 
ambiguity, perplexity, and confusion. Now there is no rule of 



VI INTRODUCTION. 

grammar, or rhetoric, that can warrant a figurative application 
of the word u day" in the first chapter of Genesis. There is, 
perhaps, no chapter within the Sacred Record that is plainer, and 
freer from figurative language. It contains a narrative of facts, 
conveyed for the instruction of mankind in all ages, and designed 
to acquaint them with the power, wisdom, and providence of God 
in the creation and government of the world, and to point to the 
relations in which all creation stands to him, and the responsibilities 
under which his rational creatures lie in regard to him. It was 
consequently necessary that the revelation should be communicated 
in the plainest and most perspicuous language. We accordingly 
find that there is nothing throughout the whole chapter that gives 
the slightest warrant for the figurative interpretation of the word 
" day." To avoid all ambiguity, the sacred historian teaches us 
that the evening and the morning were the first day, i. e., that the 
day consisted of the ordinary periods of light and darkness, which 
it was one of the offices of the sun to distinguish, as is stated in 
verse fourteenth. The length of all the seven days is the same, and 
in the fourth commandment, in which allusion is made to the time 
occupied in the creation, it is clearly implied that natural days were 
meant, and that each of the six days was of the same length as 
the Sabbath, which was to be kept holy to God. The forcing of the 
text, by the figurative interpretation of the word " day," is happily 
unnecessary in order to reconcile the Mosaic records with geolo- 
gical facts, since this reconciliation can be effected without any 
violence being done to the acknowledged principles of Hebrew 
philology ; and as little is it necessary upon the ground, that the suc- 
cession of geological beds, with respect to organic remains, exhibits 
a correspondence with the contents of the Sacred narrative in 
describing the operations of divine power on the several days 
referred to. Upon this subject Dr. Pye Smith remarks: — "More 
accurate investigations have proved that the correspondence just 
mentioned does not exist. Though to a superficial view some 
plausible appearances of this kind present themselves, the scheme 
fails when it is attempted to be carried into detail." — Relation 
between the Holy Scriptures and some parts of Geological Science, 
2nd. Ed. p. 201. It is extremely rash and dangerous to have 



INTRODUCTION. vii 

recourse to unnatural and forced interpretations of Scripture, with a 
view to the resolution of seeming difficulties, and to the obviating 
of seeming objections. If the universally acknowledged principles 
of philological interpretation are to be forsaken either for supporting 
theories of our own, or for answering the objections of others, then 
may the Scriptures be made to say anything, and all confidence in 
their plainest declarations will be destroyed. I shall now dismiss 
this subject in the words of the younger KosenmiUler, whose 
authority as a Hebrew philologist is entitled to the highest consi- 
deration " Diem intelligendum naturalem, neque vero plurium sive 
dierum sive annorum spatium vix disertius declarari potuit hac 
formula." — Scholia in Gerc.cap.i.v.5. 

It has been supposed by some "that the fossiliferous rocks were 
deposited during the 1600 years that intervened between the creation 
and the deluge, and that the non-fossiliferous rocks were produced 
in a moment." As this supposition has no support from Scripture, 
and as it has no other foundation to rest upon, and as it is besides 
compassed with innumerable and insuperable difficulties, I shall 
pass it over — satisfying myself with referring the reader to the 
works of Professor Hitchcock, and Dr. Pye Smith, already quoted. 

That the geological phenomena referred to are not ascribable to 
the deluge in the days of Xoah is equally clear. There is no inti- 
mation given of such changes in the Mosaic history, where the 
cause, progress and effects of the deluge are minutely described. 
The waters arose so gradually that the ark, as it should seem, without 
rudder, oars, sails, or other means of guiding or propelling it, could 
ride on the waters in safety, and without being dashed against pro- 
jecting rocks, while the waters were increasing, or afterwards 
foundered by the violent agitation occasioned by the convulsions to 
which many of the phenomena conspicuous in the earth's surface 
must owe their origin. The sea and land did not on that occasion 
change places ; it is not said that any of the inhabitants of the deep 
were destroyed. Leaves continued on the trees, and the animals when 
dismissed from the ark must soon have found their appropriate food on 
the earth's surface. When the sun had dried and warmed the ground, 
agricultural and pastoral pursuits were resumed. The earth seems to 
have soon regained its wonted appearance, and the destruction of the 



Vlll INTRODUCTION. 

enemies of the Lord, and of those animals which were not preserved 
by a special providence, was the only remarkable memorial of this 
signal judgment of Jehovah. On these and other grounds, scarcely 
any one now ascribes the geological phenomena at present existing, 
to the effects of the deluge, to say nothing of the strong probability 
of a conjecture now adopted by many men distinguished alike for 
their scientific attainments and attachment to revealed religion, that 
the waters of the deluge extended over only that part of the earth's 
surface which was the residence of the human species. Under this 
view, the animals taken into the ark were only such as were 
necessary for man's immediate use after the deluge, and for the 
propagation of their kind in that district of the earth which had 
been the scene of that memorable catastrophe. 

The mode which has been adopted in the analysis for reconciling 
the apparent discrepancies between the account of the creation, 
and the phenomena of geology, is very simple, and may be stated 
in very few words: — 

In verse first, the sacred historian announces the general and 
independent proposition, — "In the beginning God created the 
heavens and the earth." In this proposition the word "beginning" 
designates a period, antecedently to which, neither the universe, 
nor the elements of which it is composed, were in existence. That 
period, however, is quite indefinite, and the sacred writer has 
furnished us with no clue to its discovery. He simply announces 
the fact, that the universe had a beginning and a Creator, and in 
the few words which have been quoted, he gives an authoritative 
solution of the problem of the creation of the world, leaving us to 
infer that the Creator is the only Almighty and Eternal God, alone 
uncreated, independent, and self- existent. 

The second verse represents the earth as existing in a diffe- 
rent form from that in which it originally proceeded from the 
hands of its Creator, and as having become dreary, dark, and 
desolate. The particle \ prefixed to T**1KPl at the commencement, 
signifies and, but, moreover, etc. The word nrVM is sometimes, 
rendered by the LXX. as fy, fuit, was, and sometimes by iyevero 
factum est, became. The words ^lPlft and )T\% are nearly synony- 
mous, and when used together, serve to add strength, or to give a 



INTRODUCTION. IX 

superlative sense to either expression taken singly. The expression 
may signify that the earth became, or had become, a waste and desert, 
or completely waste. In the subsequent part of the verse, it is said 
that ' ' darkness was upon the face of the deep." This verse, and 
the verses which follow, lead us to believe that the earth was then 
without light — that it was overflowed with water — that its surface 
was not clothed with grass, plants, or trees — and that it was destitute 
of animal life. What period of time elapsed between the state of 
the earth, as described in the first verse, and its state as described 
in the second, and how long it continued in each of these states ; 
or whether it was subject to intermediate revolutions and convul- 
sions, or to how many, the sacred record furnishes no means 
whatever of deciding. As to the duration between these periods, 
our conjectures may range within any supposable period of time. 
Intimation, however, is given in the third verse, that it was brought 
into its present state of existence when God said, " Let there be 
light: and there was light." According to this view, the original 
creation, in the highest sense of the word, is described in verse 
first. In the second, intimation is given that, at some period unde- 
fined, and from some cause from us concealed, the earth became 
waste, dark, and desolate. In the third and following verses, the 
account is given of the formation from this confused mass, of the 
earth which we inhabit, and all that it contains. 

On philological grounds, therefore, it appears that the Mosaic 
account of the creation has been established, and not invalidated, 
by geological phenomena; and not only so, but from these pheno- 
mena arguments have been adduced of a very powerful kind, to 
enhance the wonders of God's creation, and the wisdom of His 
providence. 



CHAPTER II. 

On the Genuineness of the Pentateuch. 

Br the genuineness of the Pentateuch, I understand that the five 
books of Moses which go under that name were actually written 



X INTRODUCTION. 

by him, and at the period, in which he is said in these books to 
have flourished. In the limits which I have prescribed to myself, 
it was impossible for me to discuss this subject at length. What I 
have brought forward is by way of contribution to the common 
stock of arguments, usually advanced in proof of the point in 
question. 

There is something in the civil and ecclesiastical polity of the 
Jews which cannot fail to strike every reflecting mind. The civil 
and religious institutions and laws, contained in their sacred records, 
are widely different from those of any other nation under heaven : 
and their manners, habits, modes of thinking, and national character 
formed under these institutions, mark them out as a peculiar 
and extraordinary people. Priding themselves in the favour shewn 
them by Jehovah — buoyed up, even in the midst of calamity 
and degradation, by the expectation of promises to be fulfilled, 
which, as they erroneously imagined, would raise their nation to the 
highest pitch of earthly power and greatness, they were but too 
much inclined to despise all other nations. While their laws war- 
ranted the reception of proselytes to their own faith, they prevented 
the slightest amalgamation of their religion with that of foreigners. 
The strictness of their ceremonial, in a great measure, debarred 
them from social intercourse with strangers, and rendered it necessary 
for them, whithersoever they went, to regulate their conduct, in 
many important particulars, by their own laws. From such causes, 
the Jews were at all times exceedingly disliked by foreigners; and 
it was said of them by their enemies, throughout their whole history, 
as well as in the times of the Apostles, that " they were contrary to 
all men." 

Long before the period of the Christian era, the canon of the Old 
Testament scriptures had been completed. At that period they were 
held in the highest veneration, as inspired records of divine truth. 
They were read and explained in the synagogues every Sabbath-day, 
and they were the foundations of the religious faith and practice, 
and of the national institutions and ordinances of the Jews, both 
civil and religious. Orders of men, called at that period fypafjufiarel^ 
and vofiLKol, were appointed for the transcription and interpretation 
of the Scriptures. The office of ypa/jb^arev^, or scribe, was the 



INTRODUCTION. XI 

more necessary then, owing to the advancement of intellectual cul- 
tivation both among Jews and Gentiles, and to the necessity of copies 
of the Scriptures for the synagogues, and for private individuals in 
Judea, and throughout the other countries in which Jews and Jewish 
proselytes were settled. The office of the vojuukos, or interpreter of 
the law, became the more necessary when the Hebrew ceased to be a 
living language ; and was known only to the better educated of the 
community, 

The facts which have been stated, are in accordance with earnest 
and repeated injunctions in the laws of Moses to make the whole 
of the people thoroughly acquainted with the revelation which had 
been given them. The contrast between the conduct of the Israelitish 
law-giver, in this respect, and that of the heathen philosophers, is 
particularly striking. Among the Hebrews there was no distinction 
between secret and public doctrine — there were no mysteries con- 
cealed from the vulgar — there was not one part of the revelation 
which could be made known only to the initiated, and the other to 
the uninitiated. Everything was done in the sight and hearing of 
the people— the whole of the law was publicly read at stated periods, 
and there could be nothing added to, or detracted from it, which 
would not be immediately discovered and detected. 

The effects of the circulation, public reading, and explanation of 
the Scriptures, which have been adverted to, were remarkably 
evident in the course of Christ' s ministry. The Jews of all classes 
of the community, seem to have been intimately acquainted with 
the contents of their sacred records. In as far as we can perceive 
from the New Testament scriptures, their opinions, modes of think- 
ing, and conversation were of a religious cast. Every one with 
whom Christ conversed displayed an acquaintance with the con- 
tents of the sacred volume. Of some the faith was strong, of 
others weak, of some the religious knowledge was completely mis- 
directed or perverted — many had eyes, but saw not; ears, but heard 
not ; a heart, but understood not. But however destitute they were 
of the spirit and power of religion, the Scriptures seem to have been 
generally read and studied. All seem to have been acquainted with 
the early history of their nation, with the promises made to the 
fathers, and with the laws of Moses, political, religious, and moraL 



Xll INTRODUCTION. 

We find them accordingly, in compliance with the Mosaic law, 
observing the stated festivals there enjoined, keeping the Sabbath, 
offering the prescribed sacrifices, circumcising their children, ob- 
serving the purifications necessary in the case of ceremonial defile- 
ment, strictly attending to the distinctions of meats, and paying 
tithes with scrupulous exactness. 

Moses is ever spoken of with the highest reverence — his law is 
appealed to for the final settlement of all controversies — and is 
regarded as the basis of the Jewish polity both civil and religious. 
There seemed to be no desire to be freed from its most irksome 
restraints, restraints which were rendered more burdensome still by 
the traditions of the elders. For these traditions, it is well known, 
the Jews had the highest respect; still they are always specifically 
mentioned as traditions, and never confounded with those laws 
which are contained in the writings of Moses, the man of God. 

These remarks are applicable likewise to Jews and proselytes who 
were at this period settled in the Gentile cities in different parts 
of the world. The history of the opposition to the gospel in these 
cities, recorded in the Acts of the Apostles, and the allusion made to 
that opposition in the Epistles, particularly in those of the Apostle 
Paul, often show an intimate acquaintance with the contents of the 
Hebrew Scriptures, a familiarity with, and skill in religious contro- 
versy, an overweening attachment and zeal for the laws of Moses, 
which occasioned that bigotry, and that enmity to the cause of 
Christ, which so materially obstructed the progress of the gospel 
at its outset, and which gave rise to the bitterest persecutions of 
its adherents. 

It is true that the knowledge which the Jews at this period pos- 
sessed of their religion was mixed up with much hypocrisy, and 
with much secret and open wickedness. But it is one thing to have a 
theoretical knowledge of religion, another to be really religious. 
And the greatest religious bigotry and persecution have been often 
found among the most profligate of the professors of religion. It 
cannot, however, be imagined that the state of things to which we 
have adverted could have been of rapid growth or of recent origin. 
It cannot be imagined that their Scriptures upon which the charac- 
ters, habits, and even peculiarities of the nation had been formed, 



INTRODUCTION. xiii 

and by which they had been characterized both by their own and 
by heathen historians, could have been introduced among them at a 
recent date. These Scriptures then, in the hands of the Jews, were 
precisely the same as those which we now possess. Since the 
Christian era, the jealousy subsisting between Jews and Christians 
has been an effectual check against mutilation, interpolation, or 
forgery on either side. The translation of the Hebrew Scriptures 
into Greek for the benefit of the numerous Jews in Alexandria who 
were incapable of understanding them in their original language, 
nearly three hundred years before Christ, shows that not only the 
books of Moses, but also the whole of the Hebrew Scriptures were 
in existence at that time, and likewise that they had attained cele- 
brity as the religious records of the Jews ; had it been otherwise, 
they would not have attracted the notice of an Egyptian king, nor 
would that king have given them a place in his celebrated library at 
Alexandria. By means of this translation, the Jewish Scriptures 
were rendered accessible, not only to all the Jews and proselytes to 
Judaism scattered throughout the world who understood the Greek 
language, but also to all acquainted with that language, whether 
proselytes to the Jewish religion or not. From the period at which 
that translation was executed, every important alteration in the 
Jewish Scriptures must have been detected, so that from that time 
the Hebrew Scriptures and the Septuagint translation became checks 
upon each other. 

That the Pentateuch was not composed and received by the 
Jewish nation subsequently to the Babylonish captivity is obvious 
for the following reasons : — 

. I premise by remarking that the captivity of the whole of the 
Jewish people was predicted in the writings of Moses. The destruc- 
tion of a whole nation, or their perfect subjugation, or the occupa- 
tion of their cities and lands by their invaders and conquerors, or the 
slavery of a portion of them in their own country or elsewhere is not 
an unusual fate; but a complete /jLerolfCTjcn,*;, or transportation of a 
nation into the land of their conquerors, although not unheard of in 
ancient times, is, to say the least of it, an extraordinary prediction. 
It was also predicted by Moses that during the captivity the land 
should enjoy her Sabbaths — i.e., that it should neither be tilled nor 



XIV INTRODUCTION. 

sown, in order to compensate for its cultivation and cropping during 
a course of Sabbatical years, contrary to Moses' express injunction, 
which was consequently regarded as a national sin. Now, it is an 
astonishing fact, that in accordance with this prediction, the king of 
Babylon, during the seventy years of the captivity, neither occupied 
the cities of Judea, nor cultivated, nor cropped the land, notwith- 
standing the apparent political advantages which would have accrued 
to him from doing so. The other remarkable feature in connection 
with the prophecy, is the restoration of all the people who desired it, 
upon their repentance, to their native country, by the assistance and 
co-operation of those to whom they had been captives and slaves. 
These are surely facts of a very remarkable nature. The prediction 
and its fulfilment are equally extraordinary. 

I now observe that the Pentateuch could not have been composed 
or received by the Jews at any period subsequently to the Babylonish 
captivity upon the following grounds :— 

In the first place, only a portion of the Jewish people returned 
from that captivity. We have evidence that during the reign of 
Ahasuerus, Jews were scattered over the whole of the Persian em- 
pire, and were then living according to their own laws. It is stated 
in the book of Esther, that in addition to those living in the capital, 
there were Jews dispersed over the hundred and twenty seven 
provinces of the Persian empire. Supposing then, that the books of 
Moses had been by a fraud foisted upon the Jews of Palestine, and 
provided that thereby the great fundamental principles of their re- 
ligion and ecclesiastical polity had been altered, how was the con- 
sent of the other Jews throughout the world to be obtained to such an 
innovation? This must have created a revolution in opinion, and 
in the whole of the Jewish polity, which surely could not have been 
carried out, without opposition in Judea, without remonstrances from 
the other Jews scattered over the whole face of the earth, or without 
allusion to it by any historian, whether Jew or Gentile. Such a sup- 
position is surely extremely improbable, and it is utterly destitute of 
foundation ; indeed so far is this from being the case, that all evidence 
external and internal lies the other way . Keligion was the great 
and almost only bond of union between the Jews of Palestine and 
those of other countries. It was their religion that kept them from 



INTRODUCTION. XV 

amalgamating with other nations — it was their religion that brought 
them from time to time to Jerusalem — it was that bond that brought 
the dwellers in Libya, in Parthia, in Koine, and in Arabia together — 
and who can doubt that had that bond been broken by a radical 
change in religion, worship and national habits, the Jews in foreign 
lands would have protested against it? 

Such a supposition would likewise be completely at variance with 
all the facts recorded in ancient history connected with religion. 
Until the conversion of the world to the Christian faith, there is no 
instance of any radical change having taken place in the religion of 
any nation, from the remotest periods of its history. Indeed, the 
difficulties in the way of effecting such a change appear to have 
been so great, that even the Romans in the plentitude of their power 
never attempted a radical change in the religious faith of the weak- 
est and most inconsiderable of the nations which they had subdued. 
It was a part of their policy never to interfere with the religious 
opinions of those whom they had conquered; but this policy was 
founded upon an intimate acquaintance with the principles of human 
nature, and upon the increased difficulty which such interference 
would have occasioned in the government of their conquered 
provinces. 

If the books of Moses had been forged at this date, (and the same 
question may be asked in regard to every other period from the days 
of Moses himself), who was to forge them ? Could the Jews go to 
Egypt, Persia, Greece, or Rome, and borrow a religion based upon 
the fundamental principle, that there is one God only, infinite, 
eternal, and unchangeable in holiness, justice, goodness, and truth, 
and whom none durst worship under the image or likeness of 
any thing that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or 
in the waters under the earth, and whose laws are spiritual and holy 
like his own nature? It appears that the Jews were possessed of 
rery little learning or philosophy, but what was connected with 
their religion. Their speculations apart from it, seem to have been 
of the most frivolous kind. The Jews are great only when they 
hold the doctrines of their religion, and continue stedfast in obe- 
dience to the commands of their God. The laws which they 
acknowledge to be of their own making, and which go under the 



XVI INTRODUCTION. 

name of the traditions of their elders, are puerile and contemptible 
in the extreme. 

Another argument against the books of Moses having been 
written after the Babylonish captivity, arises from the fact, that 
during that period the Hebrew language became greatly corrupted, 
and was unintelligible to a great portion of the community. The 
corruptions in Hebrew style, after the return from the captivity, will 
be particularly set forth in the second part of this introduction, and 
the result of the comparisons between the style of Moses and that of 
Ezra, will, I trust, satisfy every competent and candid judge, that 
the Pentateuch could have scarcely been written by Ezra without a 
miracle, and it cannot fail to excite surprise that the assertion should 
have been so frequently hazarded of late years that the Pentateuch, 
or any part of it was written by him. That the Hebrew language 
as written by Moses, was unintelligible to the great body of the 
people after the captivity, is manifest from the statement made in 
Nehemiah, where it is said that certain of the Levites " read to the 
people in the book, in the law of God distinctly, and gave the sense, 
and caused them to understand the reading/' (Neh. viii. 8.) 

It was on this account, as has been already stated, that the 
Septuagint was translated, and that the Targums or Chaldee versions 
of the Hebrew Scriptures were subsequently used. We therefore 
conclude that the great corruption of the Hebrew language after 
the Babylonish captivity, and the inability of a great portion of the 
community to understand it, created almost insuperable difficulties 
in the way of the composition or the introduction of the writings of 
Moses among the Jews after that period. The composition of the 
books of Moses at that period, would have argued a skilfulness in 
imposture, which we believe could not have been exhibited in any 
age of the world. 

• There are many strong objections against the supposition that the 
Pentateuch was composed or introduced into the Jewish nation $t 
any time between the revolt of the ten tribes under Kehoboam and 
the period of the Babylonish captivity. 

The books of Moses have a prospective reference to a change of 
government. Moses supposes that the people would desire to have 
a kingl ike other nations; but he never contemplates the division 



INTRODUCTION. XV11 

of the nation into separate kingdoms, or the reign of two kings 
at the same time. One civil and one ecclesiastical polity is all that 
is thought of. Two separate kingdoms could not exist without 
a breach of the divine law. There was only one high priest and 
one temple to which the people could resort to celebrate the stated 
festivals, and to join in the stated sacrifices and other rites and 
ceremonies of their religion. The services of the priesthood were 
restricted to the tabernacle or temple, and sacrifices could only be 
offered by the authorised priesthood and upon the authorised altar. 
By their revolt, the ten tribes were prevented from enjoying the 
services of the legal priests, and from joining in the religious 
exercises at the temple. This regular mode of worship was for- 
bidden by Jeroboam on political grounds, lest the people, by their 
return to Jerusalem at the stated festivals, should be withdrawn 
from their allegiance to him; and what is called the " sin of 
Jeroboam the son of Nebat, wherewith he made Israel to sin," 
was the setting up of calves at Dan and Bethel, in express 
violation of the Mosaic injunctions, and the causing the people 
to perform the religious duties in these places, which should have 
been performed at the temple at Jerusalem. If the ten tribes then 
had not received the books of Moses previously to their revolt, what 
could have induced them to do so afterwards? Would they have 
then connived at a fraud devised by their enemies, by which they 
were proved to be rebels against their awful king, and to be living in 
open and daring violation of the statutes and ordinances of their God? 

A copy of the books of Moses, used by the Samaritans, written 
in the Old Hebrew character, which goes under the name of the 
Samaritan Pentateuch, was discovered in the year 1625, by Petro 
Delia Valle, after it had been lost sight of for about 1000 years. 
Theologians, and critics of the highest authority, are now of opinion, 
that the Samaritan Pentateuch must have been in the possession of 
the ten tribes since their revolt under Jeroboam ; and there are indeed 
insuperable objections against their reception of it at a later date. 
The Samaritan copy differs in no material points from the Hebrew, 
the discrepancies existing between them arising from the introduc- 
tion into the text of marginal glosses or explanations, from ignorance 
and mistakes of transcribers, and from changes intentionally intro- 

c 



XVlll INTKODUCTION. 

duced by the Samaritans, in support of certain opinions held by them 
in their controversies with the Jews. If, however, the ten tribes 
had received the Pentateuch before their revolt, it does not follow 
that they would have afterwards rejected it because it condemned 
that revolt, and many of the national practices arising from it. 
Jews and Christians now, as well as of old, practise many things 
which their Scriptures condemn, while their reverence for these 
Scriptures continues unabated. It is one thing to adhere to a 
religious faith, previously recognised as true, although, in many 
important particulars, it condemns our practice; and another, to 
admit a religion, without the most unquestionable evidences of its 
truth, which is adverse to our political interests and national pros- 
perity, which lays a restraint upon our ruling passions, and condemns 
our whole conduct. 

From the time of the revolt of the ten tribes under Jeroboam , 
almost continual wars, national rivalries, and religious jealousies 
combined to engender the most hostile feelings between the two 
nations, which apparently pervaded all classes of society. Such 
hostility between them seems to have subsisted in the time of our 
Saviour's ministry; and hence the woman, at the well of Sychar, 
expressed her surprise that Christ, who was a Jew, should ask to 
drink of her who was a Samaritan; and the inhabitants of a 
Samaritan city, on another occasion, did not receive him because his 
face ivas as though he would go to Jerusalem" — Luke ix. 53. 

That the Samaritans received the books of Moses only, is not to 
be wondered at; had they received the Scriptures written after their 
revolt, they would have received additional materials for their own 
condemnation. That this was the case is extremely probable, 
from the brief narrative which arose out of the meeting of Christ 
with the woman at the well of Sychar. It appears that both this 
woman and her countrymen had formed, in so far, correct notions of 
Messiah's office and character. The woman said — " I know that 
when Messias cometh, he shall teach us all things"; i. <?., she seemed 
to regard him simply as a prophet; and, it is probable, that this 
limited view of his office, was founded upon the Mosaic prediction 
applied to Christ by Stephen — " The Lord your God shall raise up 
to you, from the midst of your brethren, a prophet like unto me, 



INTRODUCTION. XIX 

him sliall ye hear." In accordance with this view, no sooner did 
Christ give evidence of his prophetic character, in connection with 
his claims to the Messiahship, than the woman ran to the city, and 
exclaimed, " Behold, a man that told me all things that ever I 
did, is not this the Christ?" Christ was afterwards heard, and his 
claims were scrutinized by others of the inhabitants of Sychar. 
" And many more believed because of his own word; and said unto 
the woman, Now we believe, not because of thy saying: for we 
have heard him ourselves, and know that this is indeed the Christ, the 
Saviour of the world." The rejection of the other parts of the 
writings of the Old Testament by the Samaritans, was a great bar 
to their full understanding of the nature and offices of the Messiah. 
During the Mosaic era, the mediatorial scheme had not been so 
clearly developed, as after the Evangelical prophets had declared 
that the Messiah, the Mighty God, the everlasting Father, the 
Emanuel, God with us, was to be cut off, but not for himself, that 
he was to be led as a lamb to the slaughter, and that the Lord was to 
lay on him the iniquity of us all. 

The inference that may be fairly drawn from this interesting 
narrative, is that the Samaritans of all classes, in Christ's time, 
were intimately acquainted with the writings of Moses, but with 
them only. Now, the question recurs, at what period subsequently 
to their revolt under Jeroboam, could the ten tribes have been 
induced to receive the writings of Moses, supposing them to be of a 
date posterior to that period ? What can be more improbable than 
that they would have received, retained, and reverenced, as the 
records of their religion, books introduced by their enemies, without 
divine sanction, which were a standing reproof of their schism, 
image- worship, idolatry, and vices. It hence appears, by means of 
the severance of the ten tribes from the rest of the people of Israel, 
that a check was furnished against interpolation, mutilation, or 
forgery of any part of the Mosaic records, and an evidence afforded 
that these records were in existence, and acknowledged to be of 
divine authority previously to their revolt. 

But, supposing the books of Moses had been introduced at any 
period subsequently to the introduction of the kingly government, 
is it not extremely probable that the form of Government prescribed 

c2 



XX INTRODUCTION. 

in these books would have been regal? — See Graves on the Penta- 
teuch, sect. i. Is it likely that the Kings of Judah would have toler- 
ated that which did not confirm and strengthen their own authority, 
which did not directly recognise the kingly government, and which 
only contemplated its introduction in times of religious declension 
and national corruption? Would the kings have thus furnished 
the people with a plea for radical changes in the constitution founded 
upon the divine pattern ? 

Farther, it is most improbable that the Jews, at any period of 
their history, would, under pretext of divine authority, of which 
they had no evidence, have received and submitted to laws which con- 
demned, under the strongest sanctions, their vices, both personal and 
national, and denounced their strong propensity to idolatry, and 
punished their lapses into it; institutions which, by the many re- 
straints laid upon their intercourse with foreigners, appeared to check 
their national prosperity; and which contained accounts of their un- 
tractableness, ingratitude, chastisements, defeats, and degradation, 
which were in many respects anything but flattering to their national 
vanity. Would they have submitted to a burdensome ritual — to the 
painful sacrifices to which the violation of Moses' laws often subjected 
them ; and submitted to the reproofs which their prophets adminis- 
tered, and listened with patience to denunciations for the violation 
of Moses 1 laws, had there been the slightest question as to their 
divine authority ? The gods of heathen nations have always been of 
like passions with their worshippers, and their religion generally has 
been so moulded as rather to countenance and encourage, than to 
check and condemn their ruling passions and vices; and so would it 
have been with the religion of the Israelites, had it not been of 
heavenly origin. 

I now proceed to show, that the Pentateuch could not have been 
written at any period between the eras of Solomon and Moses. The 
only remark which I shall make in reference to Solomon's reign is 
this — If the Pentateuch was foisted upon the Israelites during the 
reign of Solomon, Solomon must have been privy to the imposture. 
On this supposition, the Israelites must have then heard for the first 
time of the Mosaic tabernacle. If such is the case, is it not ex- 
tremely probable that Solomon would have erected a tabernacle and 



INTRODUCTION. XXI 

not a temple ; and that, if he had wished to erect a temple in the 
forged work ascribed to Moses, a description would have been given 
of a temple, and not of a tabernacle. The erection of a moveable 
tabernacle by Moses, on the supposition of the genuineness of the 
Pentateuch, and the subsequent erection of the temple by Solomon, 
under the altered circumstances of the nation, is at once natural, 
consistent, and probable. 

The chief argument which I mean to adduce, to prove that the 
books of Moses were written previously to the era of David, is drawn 
from the contents of many of the Psalms written by him. That 
the great proportion of the Psalms was written by David himself, 
and by his contemporaries, is apparent from their titles (which 
should not be rashly set aside), from their style, and from their con- 
tents. There are few of the Psalms that bear allusion to historical 
events subsequent to the era of David, so distinct as can tie them 
down with any precision to a later date. Many of them distinctly 
refer to historical events previously to his own times, and contain 
indirect and delicate allusions to these events, which could have 
been intelligible only to those who were well acquainted with the 
facts alluded to. 

If any considerable portion of the Psalms had been composed 
after David's time, there would have doubtless been references in 
them to the history of the Jews subsequently to that period; but 
comparatively few such references are made. Xo king of Israel is 
named in the Psalms but David. In some, distinct allusions are 
made to events in Solomon's history, in others to the Babylonish 
captivity. With these exceptions, scarcely any fragments of Jewish 
history can be gleaned from the Psalms ; whereas the events described 
in the Pentateuch are so frequently and minutely mentioned, that 
they might almost of themselves furnish materials for an historical 
narrative from the earliest times. We may then fairly conclude, 
that had any considerable portion of the Psalms been composed 
after the age of David, there would have been more frequent and 
express allusions in them to the events of Solomon's reign; and 
that specific mention would have been made of such signal events 
as the revolt of the ten tribes under Jeroboam, the image- worship 
at Dan and Bethel, and the idolatry established by Ahab, Athaliah, 



XXII INTRODUCTION, 

Ahaz, and others ; the captivity of the people of Israel, the piety 
of some of the kings, and the wickedness of others; and such as 
seasons of victory and defeat, of oppression and deliverance. There 
would, doubtless, in the course of a period ranging between the 
eras of David and Malachi, have been found songs of gratitude for 
victory and deliverance, penitential strains on a return to God after 
national backslidings and corruptions, and solemn dirges of lamenta- 
tion in seasons of national calamity, in all which the special causes of 
triumph, thankfulness, repentance, suffering, and chastisement would 
have been distinctly set forth. That this would have been the 
case is rendered more than probable, from the circumstance, that 
historical facts are referred to, and allusions made, in those 
Psalms which mark distinctly a later era than that of David. 
In the 137th Psalm, a very affecting account is given of the 
sufferings of God's people during the captivity, and of other circum- 
stances connected with that event. In that psalm the Jewish people 
are described as sitting and weeping by the rivers of Babylon " when 
they remembered Zion;" as calling upon the Lord to "remember 
the children of Edom in the day of Jerusalem, who said, Ease it, 
rase it, even to the foundations thereof;" and as triumphing in 
imagination over the fate of their cruel oppressors, in the solemn 
strains: — " daughter of Babylon, who art to be destroyed; happy 
shall he be that rewardeth thee as thou hast served us; happy shall 
he be that taketh and dasheth thy little ones against the stones." 

Psalm 126 seems evidently to be a hymn of gratitude composed after 
the people's return from Babylon, which thus commences: — " When 
the Lord turned again the captivity of Zion, we were like them that 
dreamed. Then was our mouth filled with laughter, and our tongue 
with singing; then said they among the heathen, The Lord hath 
done great things for them." 

If we read the psalms attentively, we shall find many allusions 
to circumstances connected with David's own history, to his mercies, 
to his troubles, to his sins, to his chastisements, to his dangers, and 
to his deliverances. There are, however, special reasons for his not 
there naming the persons to whom he refers. His great persecutor 
was the father of his wife, and of his dearest friend. Many of his 
sorrows arose out of the misconduct of his own family, and most of 



INTRODUCTION. XXlll 

tlie actors in tlie scenes to which lie refers, were alive at the time. 
There were not, however, any reasons, for delicacy in regard to facts 
of anterior date. Of these accordingly frequent mention is made. 
In psalm cxxxvi. there is reference to the Lord making the heavens 
— to His stretching out the earth over the waters — to His making 
great lights, the sun to rule the day, and the moon to rule the 
night — to His smiting the first-born of Egypt — to His dividing the 
Ked Sea, and to His making Israel pass through it — to His overthrow 
of Pharaoh — to His leading the people through the wilderness — to 
His destruction of Sihon, king of the Amorites, and Og, king of 
Bashan, and to the establishment of his people in the promised land. 
In some of the Psalms the references are still more minute and 
special. See particularly Psalms lxxviii., cv., cvi., cxv. These 
Psalms refer principally to the events recorded in the Books of 
Moses and Joshua. The references to those in the Book of Judges 
are much less frequent. And this may be accounted for on the 
following grounds. The first is,, that the records of that period are 
little else than accounts of the backslidings, idolatry, and degradation 
of the chosen people. The second is, that there is no certainty that 
the records preserved of these events as they occurred, were, in 
David's time, compiled and reduced into the form in which we 
now have them; or if they were so, that they were publicly read 
and taught to the people, as the books of Moses were. That the 
people of Israel in David's time were familiar with the historical 
events recorded in the books of Moses, may be regarded as certain, 
from the frequent allusions made to them in the historical Psalms 
which have been referred to ; for we cannot imagine that a writer of 
David's taste and judgment, guided too by the Spirit of God, would 
have composed the national poetry, which was to be used in the service 
of God, and which we must believe was designed to be understood 
by the whole nation, and stored it with facts which were generally 
unknown, and with allusions which, as they were unintelligible, 
could neither be expected to impart instruction nor to inspire 
devotional feeling. By the Mosaic institutions it had been pro- 
vided that the people should be made thoroughly acquainted with the 
whole of the contents of the Mosaic records. Parents are enjoined 
to teach their children the statutes and ordinances of the Lord, and 



XXIV INTRODUCTION. 

to make known to them all the Lord's gracious dealings with his 
chosen people (Deut. xi. 18, 19). The law was publicly read every 
seventh year; and, by means of the dispersion of the Levites in forty- 
eight cities assigned to them in different parts of the country 
(Numb. xxxv. 7, 8), by their transcription of copies of the law 
and by their teaching it to the people, which were evidently 
duties enjoined upon them, a knowledge of the contents of the 
Mosaic records must have been kept up, such as it may be fairly 
argued from the contents of the Psalms they possessed. 

It would have indeed been absurd to introduce into the histo- 
rical Psalms, facts of which the generality of those for whose 
behoof they were written were ignorant; but much more absurd 
would it have been to make allusions to these in such a way as 
would have been utterly unintelligible without a knowledge of the 
facts alluded to. For example, in Psalm civ. 6 — 9, allusion is made 
to the deluge in the following terms. " Thou coveredst the deep as 
with a garment, the waters stood above the mountains. At thy re- 
buke thy fled. They go up by the mountains, they go down by 
the valleys, unto the place which thou hast founded for them. 
Thou hast set a bound that they may not pass over, that they turn 
not again to cover the earth. - " The following passage bears reference 
to Abraham's sojourn in Egypt. " When they were but a few men 
in number, yea very few, and strangers in it (the land of Canaan); 
when they went from one nation to another, from one country to 
another people, he suffered no one to do them wrong, yea, he re- 
proved kings for their sakes " — see Psalm cv. 12 — 14, Genesis xii. 
17 — 20. The following are allusions to the crossing of the Ked Sea 
and of the river Jordan through the miraculous intervention of 
Jehovah. " Thou art the God that hast done wonders, thou hast 
declared thy strength among thy people ; thou hast with thine arm 
redeemed thy people, the sons of Jacob and Joseph. The waters 
saw thee, God, the waters saw thee, they were afraid; the depths 
also were troubled." — Ps. lxxvii. 16. That the following is an allu- 
sion to the deliverance of the Israelites from Egypt, and after the dis- 
possession of the Canaanites, to their settlement in their land, is very 
obvious. " Thou hast brought a vine out of Egypt, thou hast cast 
out the heathen and planted it.' ; — Psalm lxxx. 8. If, then, we are to 



INTRODUCTION. XXV 

suppose that the sacred poetry of the Hebrews was designed to be 
intelligible to those for whose behoof it was written, we cannot but 
infer that the facts explained in the Mosaic history, were, in David's 
time, familiar to the generality of the Jewish nation ; and certainly 
the supposition that these facts were obtained from any other 
source than the Mosaic writings is most improbable in itself, and 
entirely destitute of any kind of support. 

Generally speaking, the Psalms may be said to abound with refe. 
rences, more or less direct to the books of Moses. In no case is 
there any discrepancy as to the historical facts; and the doctrines, 
the morality, the ordinances, the forms of worship, the rites and 
ceremonies, which are distinctly set forth, or which are merely allu- 
ded to in the Psalms, exactly coincide with what is found in these 
books. Indeed, the whole strain of the Psalms, whether later or 
earlier, shews that their authors had before them the writings of 
Moses, and that these writings were the foundation of the civil and 
ecclesiastical institutions of the Jews, and the basis of the faith, 
morals, habits, and even peculiarities of that people. 

Under the Mosaic dispensation, as framed originally, the govern- 
ment was different from any that ever before existed — it was a 
Theocracy. " It will easily appear (says Lowman), that the general 
union of the tribes as one body, may be conceived after this man- 
ner — that the congregation of Israel, or the whole people enacted by 
themselves or their representatives; that the great council advised, 
consulted, and proposed; that the judge presided in their councils 
and had the chief hand in executing what was resolved in them ; 
and that Jehovah by the oracle was to assent to and approve what 
was resolved, and authorize the execution of it in matters of the 
greatest importance to the whole state. So that the general union 
of the whole nation may not improperly be thus expressed. It 
was by the command of the people, and advice of the senate; 
the judge presiding and the oracle approving" {Lowman on the Civil 
Government of the Hebrews, chap. vii.). Moses, however, anticipates 
the people's desire to have a king like other nations ; but this change 
did not take place without strong remonstrances on the part 
of the prophet Samuel. And when a proposal was made, at an 
earlier period, for conferring the crown upon Gideon, he repudiated 



XXVI INTRODUCTION. 

the offer, holding that the establishment of the regal government 
was a rejection of Jehovah; " I shall not," said he, " reign over yon; 
nor shall my son reign over you ; but Jehovah shall reign over 
you." My reason for referring at present to the change from the 
purely theocratical to the regal form of government, is to shew that 
this and every other change of the original institutions of Moses is 
expressly mentioned, and that mention is made, likewise, of the 
authority and reasons upon which the change was effected. The 
change to the regal form of government was, as we have said, antici- 
pated by Moses, and after an ineffectual remonstrance by Samuel, 
the Lord allowed him to authorize the change, and directed him, 
at the same time, to shew the people the manner of the king that 
should reign over them (1 Samuel x. 25); that is, to lay down the 
basis of the new constitution. Under this constitution, new officers 
were appointed for the king's government and household, of whom 
no mention is made in the writings of Moses. Similar changes took 
place in the ecclesiastical arrangements, some of which the final 
settlement of the ark on Mount Zion, and the building of the 
Temple, rendered necessary. Thus, according to the appointment 
of Moses, one of the offices of the Levites was to carry the taber- 
nacle and the vessels thereof (Numbers iv. 24, seq.) That service was 
discontinued by David; but not without intimation of the change, 
and of the reason of it. For David said, " The Lord God of Israel 
hath given rest unto his people, that they may dwell in Jerusalem 
for ever. And, also, unto the Levites, that they shall no more 
carry the tabernacle, nor any vessels of it for the service thereof" 
(1 Chron. xxiii. 25, 26). After the building of the temple, the 
Levites were chosen by Lot as porters for the several gates 
(1 Chron. xxvi. 1 seq.) These and other changes were made by 
David under divine authority. Another change made by him was 
the division of the Levites into courses (1 Chron. xxiii. 3, seq.) " Of 
those that were numbered from the age of thirty years and upwards 
twenty and four thousand were to set forward the work of the Lord, 
and six thousand were officers and judges. Moreover, four thousand 
were porters, and four thousand praised the Lord with the instru- 
ments which I made", said David, " to praise therewith. And he 
divided them into courses, among the sons of Levi." An institution 



INTRODUCTION, XXV11 

of David, which was superadded to the institutions of Moses, was 
that of singers and players upon instruments. These, as appears from 
the above quotation, were chosen from among the Levites; and 
music, both vocal and instrumental, was introduced into the seivice 
of Jehovah. It appears that at this period were composed psalms or 
religious hymns, which were sung by the choir. The singers and 
players on musical instruments were the sons of Asaph, He mam, and 
Jeduthun, who were divided by Lot into twenty-four orders 
(1 Chron. xxv. 1, seq.) who were "for singws in the house of the Lord, 
with cymbals, psalteries, and harps for the service of the house of 
God, according to the King's order to Asaph, Jeduthun, and Heman, 
so the number of their brethren that were instructed in the songs of 
the Lord, even all those that were cunning, were two hundred four- 
score and eight." The Priests were likewise divided into twenty-four 
courses, by David, and their various duties were assigned them 
(1 Chron. xxiv. 1, seq.). What has been above mentioned will make 
apparent what was already stated as to certain changes that were 
made upon the Mosaic institutions, which times and circumstances 
rendered necessary. The times and reasons of these changes are ex- 
pressed; and the persons by whom, and the authority under which, 
they were made, are distinctly mentioned. It is to be observed, 
however, that there was no change effected in doctrine, duty, or in 
the general principles of the Mosaic constitution. The whole of the 
subsequent Scriptures mark it out as the great basis of religious faith 
and polity ; and the innovations which only related to certain outward 
forms are expressly mentioned as not of Mosaic institution, but of a 
later date, so that there is no confusion whatever between what was 
established by Moses, and what by Samuel, David, Solomon, or 
others. Accordingly, Hezekiah, in the course of his restoration of 
the true religion, agreeably to the law of Moses, in assigning duties 
to the Levites, which were not found in the books of Moses, gives 
the authority upon which these offices were instituted, thus — " And 
he set the Levites in the House of the Lord, with cymbals, with 
psalteries, and with harps, according to the commandment of David and 
of Gad, the king's seer, and of Nathan the prophet ; for so was the 
commandment of the Lord by his prophets. And Hezekiah com- 
manded to offer the burnt- offering upon the altar. And when the 



XXV111 INTRODUCTION. 

burnt-offering began, the song of the Lord began also, with the 
trumpets, and with the instruments ordained by David, king of 
Israel" (2 Chron. xxix. 25-27). I conceive, that from these facts and 
arguments, it clearly appears that the books of Moses must have 
been in existence long before the reign of David. There is not an 
expression in the Psalms, or in the contemporary or subsequent 
history to prove the contrary. There is not the slightest hint given 
there, as to any radical change effected or contemplated upon the 
national religion. 

The period that elapsed between the death of Joshua, and the era 
of Samuel seems to have been one of great corruption. " After the 
death of Joshua, and after the generation that were contemporary 
with him were gathered to their fathers, there arose another genera- 
tion after them which knew not the Lord, nor yet the works which 
he had done for Israel. And the children of Israel did evil in the 
sight of the Lord, and served Baalim. And they forsook the God 
of their fathers, which brought them out of the land of Egypt, and 
followed other gods of the gods of the people that were round about 
them, and bowed themselves unto them, and provoked the Lord to 
anger; and they forsook the Lord and served Baal and Ashtaroth" 
( Jud. ii. 8, seq.) At a subsequent period of their history, after the 
death of J air, one of their judges, it is said that the children of 
Israel " did evil in the sight of the Lord, and served Baalim and 
Ashtaroth, and the gods of Syria, and the gods of Sidon, and the 
gods of Moab, and the gods of the children of Ammon, and the 
gods of the Philistines, and forsook the Lord, and served not him " 
(Jud. x. 6). It is likewise stated, that, after the death of Gideon, 
the children of Israel went a whoring after Baalim, and made Baal- 
berith their God (viii. 33). At this period, there was a temple at 
Shechem dedicated to Baal, which had been enriched by the offerings 
of the people, and from which Ahimelech, the son of Gideon, received 
three hundred pieces of silver, with which he hired " light and vain 
persons to follow him" (Jud. ix. 4, 5). The most dreadful instance 
of national corruption, however, is that described in Jud. xx. 2, seq., 
from which it appears that the inhabitants of Gibeah in Benjamin, 
surpassed, if possible, in wickedness, those of Sodom, described in 
Gen. xix. 1, seq., and that their brethren abetted them in it. It was 



INTRODUCTION. XXIX 

this appalling condition of immorality that induced the Lord to 
annihilate almost the whole of that tribe. Indeed, during the whole 
of the period between the death of Joshua, and the era of David, 
the history is little else than a record of wars, defeats, oppression, 
servitude, and national degradation, interspersed only with occa- 
sional seasons of repentance, uniformly followed by relapses into 
former besetting sins. The examples of Eli and Samuel were v insuf- 
ficient to restrain the wickedness even of their own families, and to 
check the corruptions which extended to the priesthood, even in the 
persons of their own sons. How, then, it may be asked, could the 
books of the Pentateuch have been introduced, and received at such 
a period? Who within that period had influence or authority to 
induce the people to receive a book purporting to contain the laws 
and religious records of their nation, which would have been a 
standing memorial of their own corruption and degradation, and 
which every man in the nation must have known to be untrue ? 

In the history of the period that elapsed between the eras of 
Moses and David, we not only find direct and special references to 
the laws of Moses, but likewise indirect allusions, which prove in no 
unsatisfactory manner the existence of institutions, rites, and cere- 
monies, which are clearly the same as those found in the Mosaic 
records. In the book of Joshua, there is an apportionment of the land 
of Canaan by lot among the tribes, there being a double portion 
assigned to Joseph in the persons of Ephraim and Manasseh, agree- 
ably to the provision made by Jacob in Gen. xlviii. 5 and 22. 
There is no portion assigned to the tribe of Levi (Deut. xviii. 1 ; 
Josh. xiii. 14 — 33), because, as it was said, the Lord God of 
Israel was their inheritance ; they have, however, assigned to them 
forty-eight cities, with their suburbs, in different parts of the country. 
Reference is made to the High Priest and other priests, as well as to 
the Levites — to judges and prophets, and to the oracle which was 
consulted on every occasion of importance. 

Frequent mention is made of the tabernacle and ark of the 
covenant erected by Moses; and incidental allusions 'are often made 
to the ceremonial law, which carry more weight than even references 
of a more direct kind. Of these may be noticed the " morning and 
evening sacrifice" (Psalm cxli. 2); with which compare Exodus 



XXX INTRODUCTION, 

xxix. 38, 39; the sprinkling of the blood of the red heifer with 
hyssop, in the words, " Purge me with hyssop, and I shall be 
clean" (Psalm li. 7; and Numb. xix. 18); the frequent allusions to 
burn t-offe rings and peace-offerings (1 Sam. xiii. 8), etc. ; the 
custom of going yearly to the house of God, and of sacrificing to 
the Lord of Hosts in Shiloh, where the tabernacle stood (1 Samuel 
i. 2, compare Deut. xvi. 16). The first-born brought to appear 
before the Lord with the appointed offering (1 Sam. i. 22, compare 
Exod. xxii. 29, and xxxiv. 19); the Levites taking down the ark 
of the covenant (1 Sam. vi. 15, compare Numb. i. 50, 51); the 
men of Bethshemesh smitten because they had looked into the ark 
of the Lord (1 Sam. vi. 19., compare Numb. ii. 10); the con- 
demnation of sacrificing burnt- offerings and peace-offerings by 
Saul, which could only have, according to the law, been offered by a 
priest (1 Sam. xiii. 8 — 11); the eating of oxen and sheep with 
the blood (1 Sam. xiv. 32, 33, seq.; Lev. vii. 26; xix. 26); the 
shew-bread in the holy place, which could only be eaten by the 
priests (1 Sam. xxi. 4 — 6, compare Levit. xxiv. 5 — 9); the 
Lord's answering by Urim (Ibid, xxviii. 6 ; compare Numb, 
xxvii. 21); the ark of God described as dwelling between the 
cherubim (2 Sam. vi. 2; Exod. xxv. 22); the horns upon the altar 
(1 Kings i. 30, compare Exod. xxvii. 2); the law of the Nazarites 
(Jud. xiv. 13; comp. Numb. vi. 2, seq.); the consequences of cere- 
monial defilement in a man (1 Sam. xx. 26; compare Lev. xv. 18); 
and the purification of women (2 Sam. xi. 4; comp. Lev. xv. 19; 
xviii. 19). Under this class of allusions may be noticed the contemp- 
tuous epithet of uncircumcised to the Philistines, which certainly im- 
plies that the rite of circumcision was within this period universally 
performed among the Israelites, according to the laws of Moses. 

The cases that follow prove the observance of the civil laws of 
the Mosaic code within the period referred to; viz., "the prohibition 
of the gleaning of the corn-fields, which was a privilege vested in the 
poor" (Ruth ii. 7, comp. Lev. xix. 9, 10.) The right of the redemp- 
tion of land by the nearest male kinsman, and the deceased widow's 
right of being married by the person who had the right of redemp- 
tion, in case the deceased had been childless, and to the ceremony of 
loosing the shoe, in case the nearest of kin should fail to avail him- 



introduction;. XXXI 

self of his privileges (Ruth iv. 7, seq.; comp. Levit. xix. 9, 10); the 
taking of bribes by Samuel's sons for the perversion of judgment 
(1 Sam. viii. 3; Dent. xvi. 19); the order to banish those who had 
familiar spirits (1 Sam. xxviii. 3; comp. Lev. xix. 31; xx. 27; and 
Deut. xviii. 10, 11); the law regarding the distribution of the spoil 
between those who went out to the battle, and those who tarried 
with the stuff (1 Sam. xxx. 24, comp. Numb. xxxi. 27); the quad- 
ruple restoration of a lamb stolen (2 Sam. xii. 6 ; comp Exod. xxii. 1). 

I cannot but think, that these and similar allusions to the laws of 
Moses, found between the era in which the Pentateuch professes to 
be written and the era of David, give undoubted evidences of a 
basis upon which the whole of these laws and ceremonies rest, 
and distinctly exhibit the constitution of the Jewish state, its civil 
and religious institutions, its civil and ecclesiastical rulers, with their 
respective duties, as found in the writings of Moses. All this is in 
accordance with the direct testimony of others of the sacred 
writings, which show that in David's time, and subsequently, the 
laws of Moses, civil, ceremonial, religious, and moral, were in exist- 
ence, and were held to be obligatory, as the laws of God. These 
laws are classed under the various heads in which they are enume- 
rated by Moses himself, when the whole body of his writings are 
referred to in general terms. These we find referred to in David's 
dying charge to his son Solomon, " Be thou strong, and shew thyself 
a man; and keep the charge of the Lord thy God, to walk in 
his ways, to keep his statutes and his commandments, and his 
judgments, and his testimonies, as it is written in the law of Moses " 
(1 Kings ii. 3; Deut. xvii. 18, 19). 

I reserve the arguments arising from the difference of style be- 
tween the Pentateuch and the other writings of the Old Testament, 
for a separate dissertation. I trust the arguments already adduced 
will carry conviction to the minds of most readers, of the genuine- 
ness of the Mosaic records. The external and internal evidence 
are alike confirmatory of the genuineness of these records. They 
are ascribed to Moses by the uniform voice of antiquity. All the sa- 
cred writings of subsequent date, either directly or by implication, 
attest their existence and their truth. All the theology, religious 
worship, forms and ceremonies of the Jews; — the constitution of the 



XXX11 INTRODUCTION. 

priestly and Levitical orders; — the statutes regarding life, liberty, 
and property; all the police and fiscal regulations, excepting in 
the cases where the Mosaic laws and institutions were changed to 
suit new times and circumstances, and of which changes intimation 
is expressly made as has been already observed — are those which are 
recorded in the books of Moses, under the express command and 
authority of God. 

The great fundamental principles of the Mosaic dispensation, are 
the belief in the one living and true God, the prevention of idolatry, 
and the preservation of a belief in the Saviour, until the appearance 
of Christ in the fulness of time. In order to preserve the knowledge 
and maintain the worship of the true God among the Israelites, 
various restraints were used, otherwise unnecessary, against inter- 
course with other nations; and in order to effect the latter object 
viz., the keeping up of a faith in the promised Kedeemer, all the 
types and shadows of the ceremonial law were instituted, which ap- 
pear frivolous, unmeaning and burdensome, unless when regarded 
in connection with Christ the substance. When we consider the 
age at which the Pentateuch was written, the low state of morals 
and intellectual culture, the universal tendencies to idolatry with all 
its abominations, and the extreme difficulty of procuring obedience 
to the Mosaic institutions, even under a theocracy where every trans- 
gression and disobedience received its just recompence of reward, how 
are we to account for the existence of such a work, at such an age, and 
in such a state of society, irrespectively of a divine revelation? How 
could it otherwise have happened, that in the nation of Israel alone 
there should exist wise institutions, a pure creed, and a pure code of 
morals. It seems to be impossible, that such a work could have 
found its way into the world, or kept its ground in it, without a 
series of miracles; and this can only be an objection to it on the 
part of those who deny miraculous agency in God's dealings with 
mankind, and consequently the existence of any revelation from God 
to man. If, then, it can be proved, that the Pentateuch contains a 
divine revelation, no weight can be attached to the objection against 
its genuineness advanced by certain German writers, on the ground 
that certain of its moral precepts, such as those contained in the 
second and tenth commandments, and that which requires us u to 



INTRODUCTION. XXX1U 

love our neighbours as ourselves," must be referable to a later age 
than that of Moses. Vatke says, that the " second commandment 
must have been the offspring of an age in which the thought of 
abstract ideality must have been a living one. But this thought 
pre-supposes a prodigious abstraction in a far higher degree than is 
commonly supposed, and cannot be compared with the imageless 
worship of other nations. We cannot give the Mosaic age credit 
for such a stride" (p. 233). Of the tenth, he says, " that the pro- 
hibition of criminal desire after the property of others appears to us 
to be improbable 1 ' (p. 239). According to the same author, the com- 
mand " Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself" belonged probably 
to the times of the captivity ; but surely was not given till centuries 
after Moses; for the moral sentiments of men must have passed 
through many stages before that great commandment could be ex- 
pressed in this simple universality" (p. 245). 

We are willing to go farther than Vatke, and to affirm that we 
cannot give credit to any era that preceded that of the Christian 
dispensation, for such giant strides in morals as these three com- 
mandments indicate. No such morality is to be found in the works 
of the greatest sages of antiquity ; and had there been no revelation 
from God to man, these commandments probably would not have 
belonged even to the age in which we now live. If, however, the 
genuineness of the books of Moses can be satisfactorily proved on 
other grounds, the purity of the religion and morality which they 
contain cannot fairly be urged as an objection against them. And 
if they contain what the objectors allow the unassisted reason 
of man could not at the time have discovered, the truth of 
their claims, as a divine revelation, is the natural and necessary 
consequence. 



CHAPTEE III. 
Of the Genuineness of the Book of Genesis. 

I NOW proceed to the consideration of the Book of Genesis itself. 
A question here arises which is inapplicable to any of the other 

d 



XXXIV INTRODUCTION. 

books of Moses. From what sources did he receive the materials 
necessary for the composition of that book ? He neither was an eye 
nor an ear witness of any of the facts there recorded, nor could he 
have received his information either from eye or ear- witnesses. What 
is contained in that book must have either been communicated to him 
by immediate inspiration, or by tradition, written or oral, corrected 
and confirmed by revelation, or by public monuments or written 
documents, by means of which the facts necessary for his purpose 
were preserved till his own times, in a more or less perfect state, and 
arranged or recast and edited by him under the infallible guidance 
of the Divine Spirit. I am inclined to think, that Moses drew his 
information partly from tradition, and partly from early documents, 
which were preserved among the Israelites till his own times ; and 
that the means of information he so obtained were turned to account 
under the direction of the Spirit, so that the Book of Genesis is, like 
all the other Scriptures, " given by the inspiration of God." I should 
have no difficulty in supposing that Moses received the whole of his 
materials for composing the Book of Genesis by immediate inspiration, 
were there no probable means of accounting for the fact otherwise : 
I know of no instance in Scripture, where either miracles of 
knowledge or power were performed without necessity; or in other 
words, where the same results could be obtained by ordinary means. 
No claim of this kind is made by Moses, and no authority is given 
for the supposition in Holy writ. The longevity of the antedilu- 
vians seems to be favourable to the facility of traditionary transmission 
of the facts of antediluvian history, and the subsequent history being 
principally confined to the concerns of a single family, we can con- 
ceive that they might, from their remarkable nature, have been 
more carefully and easily preserved, than historical events in other 
circumstances spreading over such a long period of time. This 
supposition is, however, only applicable to the leading facts. 
Tradition could hardly have preserved the minute details found in 
the Book of Genesis, comprising long genealogical tables with the 
names, dates of the births and deaths, and characters of the persons 
spoken of, and in some cases, with historical references to the per- 
sons named; nor the minute and complicated accounts found in 
Chapters x. and xxv ; the promise made to Eve in chap, iii; the 



INTRODUCTION. XXXV 

several promises made to Abraham ; the particulars respecting Isaac 
and Ishmael, with many other delicate points of distinction; and 
likewise the minute domestic occurrences and private conversations 
recorded in that book. These could have hardly been kept clear 
and exact by tradition, whereas any kind of writing, hieroglyphic, 
etc., would have preserved all. I can see no difficulty that lies in 
the way of the supposition that written documents, or other mo- 
numents of the history of the early ages of the world, were in exist- 
ence previously to the times of Moses. The advances made by the 
antediluvians in the arts of civilized life cannot be accounted for, 
but upon the supposition of a certain amount of knowledge of these 
arts directly communicated by God. Had man after his creation 
been left in a savage state, and without the immediate gift of speech, 
and left to the exercise of his own reason and ingenuity alone, for 
the provision for the wants and comforts of life, it is impossible to 
say how long he would have continued in that state, nor can we see 
how in such a state he could have answered the ends of his creation. 
The difficulty of imparting religious truth, or a sense of moral obli- 
gation to a savage, or of instructing him in the arts of civilised life 
is well known. To obviate such difficulties, Man, we are informed, 
was created in knowledge, as well as in righteousness and true 
holiness. It is not probable that he completely lost his original 
knowledge along with his original righteousness, and that he was 
left after the fall in no better than the savage state. That this was 
not the case is attested in the clearest manner, from the accounts of 
antediluvian history found in the Book of Genesis. We hear much 
of the great wickedness that prevailed in these times, but nothing 
of the manners and habits of savage life. The pursuits of husbandry 
and pastoral life were not only followed from the earliest ages of 
the world, but these occupations were then kept separate, and held 
by different individuals; for Moses says that Cain was a tiller of the 
ground, and Abel a keeper of sheep. The city which Cain built, 
however rude, supposes some scientific knowledge and the use of 
some mechanical implements; the invention of the harp and organ 
by Jubal, and the working in brass and iron by Tubal Cain, shew 
an advancement in the arts and sciences, which could not have been 
expected at that early period had man been left entirely to his own 

d 2 



XXXVI INTRODUCTION. 

resources. The building of Noah's ark proves the same thing. 
Where then is the improbability of there having been monuments 
even in these times, which were generally intelligible, or even written 
records, by which the facts of antediluvian history contained in the 
books of Moses might have been transmitted to distant ages. The 
facts that occurred between the period of the deluge and the call of 
Abraham, are very few, and might have been preserved in the 
same way; and the history of Abraham, and his immediate de- 
scendants, and of the collateral branches of his family, might have 
been preserved by Isaac, Jacob, and members of the family of the 
latter, most probably by Joseph. These documents probably came 
into Moses' hands in a more or less perfect state of preservation, 
and received from him the alterations or additions of which they 
stood in need; those that were perfect being left as he found 
them, and those that were not so having been rendered perfect by 
him. Some of the materials consequently would require no alter- 
ation, and some more and some less, according to the condition 
they were in when they were put into his hands, and in the lat- 
ter case, tradition, supplemented by immediate revelation, would sup- 
ply all that was wanting. In this way the whole of the Book of 
Genesis might have been compiled, arranged, altered, or re-written 
by Moses under the immediate inspiration of God. It is no bar to 
the authenticity of the Book of Genesis, that Moses, in its composi- 
tion, availed himself of documents previously in existence, or that 
the book itself is interspersed with original documents, furnished to 
him, which were the writings of eminent servants of God who pre- 
ceded him. It does not affect the genuineness of the works of any 
profane author, that there are embodied in them, certain public docu- 
ments preserved from the periods to which they refer, or frag- 
ments from authors who were contemporary with the characters, 
and had personal knowledge of the facts which they describe. It 
does not affect the genuineness of the Book of Ezra, that instead 
of describing the purport of the decrees of the king of Persia in 
favour of the Jews, he inserts in it the originals, nor to that of the 
Gospel of Luke, that he received the whole of its contents from eye 
and ear witnesses. 

The next question to be asked is, whether there is any evidence in 



INTRODUCTION. XXXV11 

the Book of Genesis itself of the documents referred to? An argu- 
ment has been raised in favour of the existence of such evidence, 
upon what have been called the Jehovah and Elohim documents. 
The first person who attempted to trace in this way the source 
whence Moses derived his materials for writing the Book of Genesis, 
was Astruc, a Belgian physician, in a work entitled " Conjectures 
sur les Memoires Originaux dont il paroit que Moyse s'est servi 
pour composer le livre de la Genese, etc., Brux., 1753." This wri- 
ter assumed, that the Book of Genesis, as it at present exists, had 
been composed from ten original records, which he designates 
Jehovah and Elohim documents. Eichhorn adopted Astruc's opin- 
ions, but with very considerable modifications and changes, assuming 
only two different documents, characterised respectively under the 
names of Jehovah and Elohim. Ilgen in his work " Urkunden des 
Jerusalem Tempel-Archivs, 1798," and Gramberg " Adumbratio 
libri Geneseos secundum fontes, etc., 1828," went still further, and 
presupposed three different documents. Vater went further than 
Eichhorn, and attempted to combat the authenticity of the Penta- 
teuch by the assumption of a " fragment hypothesis." According to 
this opinion, Genesis, as well as the greater part of the Pentateuch, 
contains a great number of very small detached fragments internally 
unconnected with each other, but transcribed seriatim, although 
originating in very different times, and from different authors. — 
See Kitto's Encyc. of Bib. Lit. under the word Genesis. 

From the commencement of the first chapter to the end of the 
3rd verse of the second, the word Jehovah is not once mentioned. 
From the 4th verse of the second, to the end of the third chapter, 
Jehovah Elohim is used with three exceptions. In chapter iv. 
Jehovah is found ten times, and Elohim only once. In chapter v. 
Elohim is found five times, and Jehovah only once. In chapter 
vi. 1 — 8 inclusive, Jehovah and Elohim appear to be used indis- 
criminately. From verse ninth to the end, apparently an original 
document Elohim only is used. In some of the passages of the sub- 
sequent history Jehovah is found, Elohim in others ; while in other 
passages both seem to be used without any marked distinction. 
But what I have particularly to observe is, that, from the thirty- 
third chapter to the end of the book, Jehovah is only found eleven 



XXXV111 INTKODUCTION". 

times — twice in chapter xxxviii., eight times in chapter xxxix., and 
once in chapter xlix. 

It would lead me further into this question than my limits will 
allow, to give any further history of this question, and of the various 
opinions which have been held regarding it ; with none of which I 
entirely concur. I shall satisfy myself with stating my own views 
^as briefly as possible. I argue that the passages in which the name 
of Jehovah is not found at all, are original documents, which came 
into Moses' hands in such a state of perfection as to require no such 
addition — that those passages in which it is incidentally found, mark 
the revision by Moses of original documents, — and that those in 
which it is as often used as in the subsequent writings of Moses, are 
his own compositions. 

From the passages in Exodus iii. 11, seq., and vi. 2, 3, 1 conclude 
that the name of Jehovah was not known until it was specially re- 
vealed to Moses, and that in every passage where Jehovah is found 
in Genesis, the hand of Moses is traceable. I have carefully read and 
attentively considered the able and ingenious arguments of Heng- 
stenberg and Havernick to prove the contrary, but these have failed 
to carry conviction to my mind. The passages above cited, are 
so clear, that, had it been Moses' intention to state that the name 
of Jehovah was not known previously to the time of God's ap- 
pearance to him in Horeb, I can scarcely imagine what words 
more appropriate could have been chosen for the purpose, than 
those which are found in these passages. I believe no ordinary 
reader understands these passages in any other way, and that a 
different view is only adopted for the purpose of getting rid of ap- 
parent difficulties, supposed to arise out of the literal meaning. I 
should, indeed, pause before adopting a view of this subject which 
would militate against the genuineness of the Book of Genesis 
with any tolerably plausible solution before me ; but I adopt the 
plain and ordinary sense of the word with the greater readiness, 
because it appears to me to be calculated to confirm and not to 
weaken the divine authority of that book. Through the view I 
have taken, I see Moses the editor, and documents likewise earlier 
than Moses, which bear proof of their. being the earliest records 
in existence. The simplicity of the style of the first chapter 



INTRODUCTION. XXXIX 

carries with it internal evidences of great antiquity; and the style 
of chapter xxiii. describing the purchase of the cave of Machpelah, 
and other descriptions of patriarchal manners and usages, have 
always appeared to me to savour of a very remote antiquity. And 
the fact that the name of Jehovah is so seldom introduced into 
the last seventeen chapters, where the events recorded approach 
nearest to the Mosaic era, and where the art of writing or other 
sure mocie of transmission was more probably in use than at an 
earlier period, and where the family documents of the Israelites 
were likely to be preserved with peculiar care, is to my mind a 
strong evidence that the history of Jacob and his family has reached 
us nearly in the same state as when it was put into Moses' hands. 

The whole of the argument I have been endeavouring to estab- 
lish will fall to the ground, if it can be proved according to Heng- 
stenberg, Havernick and others, that the names of Jehovah and Elohim 
are used by Moses discriminately, and in strict conformity with the 
theological idea he wished to express in the immediate context. It 
is said that " pursuing the Pentateuch nearly line by line, it is asto- 
nishing to see that Moses never uses any of the names at mere ran- 
dom, or arbitrarily, but is throughout consistent in the application 
of the respective terms." " Elohim (it is said) is the abstract ex- 
pression of absolute deity, apart from the notions of unity, holiness, 
substance, etc. It is more a philosophical than a devotional term, 
and corresponds with our term deity in the same way as state or 
government is abstractedly expressive of a king, or monarch. Jehovah, 
however, is considered to be the revealed Elohim, the manifold, only, 
personal and holy Elohim. Elohim is regarded as the Creator, Jehovah 
the Bedeemer." — Kitto's Encijc. of Bib. Lit., under the word 

God - L . L 

The word Q\*n ?X is the plur. of 57& ; which is the construct 
form of the inf. kal of JH/fct, obsolete in Hebrew, but still in use in 
Arabic, which signifies, 1. was terrified, astonished. 2. Adored, 
worshiped. The infinitive or abstract noun, upon which the present 
tense of the Hebrew verb is formed, has always originally an abstract 
meaning. Accordingly 5/K would signify 1. Astonishment, fear, 
dread. 2. Worship, adoration ; hence by metonymy the object of 
fear, dread, worship, adoration — the Supreme God. Agreeably to this 



xl INTRODUCTION. 

view, in Gen. xxxi. 42, 53, God is called the/ear of Isaac, i. e., the 
Great Being whom Isaac feared. This is all that can be drawn from the 
etymology of the word. It is from the acts ascribed to the Supreme 
Being, and not from the etymology of the word D^n'/K that his 
power, wisdom, holiness, justice, goodness and truth are inferred. 
The word 7& with the vowel immutable, is founded upon an entirely 
different root, of the form of ;V£, 7*X or 7^, the inherent idea in 
all which is power, strength, might, and the word 7$ denotes strength, 
or might in the abstract ; and by metonymy Him in whom all strength 
and might reside, the Almighty. Such were the principal appella- 
tions by which God originally revealed himself to man, and by 
which he manifested himself to his rational offspring, until he made 
himself known as Jehovah in Mount Horeb. 

Jehovah, Isaac, and Jacob, and many other proper names are forma- 
tions upon the 3 sing. m. pres. kal of their respective verbs, and these 
three signify respectively existence, laughter, supplanting. J"li!T is the 
3rd sing. m. pres. kal of T\)T\, the old form of j"|Vl was, existed, of which 
ancient form various traces are still found in the language. The old 
form was probably chosen to distinguish the sacred name of God 
from PlW, the 3rd sing. pres. kal of the foregoing verb, the com- 
monest form of one of the commonest verbs in the Hebrew language. 
It is well known, to all Hebrew scholars, that the word JTiJT has 
not the vowels peculiar to the tense of the verb from which it is 
formed, but those of ''TlR, owing to a superstitious feeling of the 
Jews, which prevented them from uttering the august name of 
Jehovah; inconsequence, when reading the scriptures, they always 
uttered the word ^2*1^5 where Jehovah was found in the text. This 
feeling seems to have been shared by the translators of the LXX. 
version, who uniformly render HliT by the Greek word Kvpios. 
Its own vowels from analogy would be T\)T\\ as in !TfV; but were 
the first radical to take a compound sliva according to the rule applica- 
ble to gutturals it would be T\)T[\, or according to what is called the 
rough enunciation, T\)T\\ According to analogy the vowel points 
mio-ht be of any of these three forms ; but this is really a question of 
little or no practical importance, and which has probably met with 
more attention than it merits. The literal meaning of the word 
JlirP is he is; being the ordinary pronominal prefix of the 3rd 



INTRODUCTION. xli 

sing. m. present of verbs of all forms, and the TV\T\, trie inf. kal or 
abstract noun, or ground form of the present tense of the verb 
H^n or JTn. Nouns formed upon the 3 sing, present kal of verbs, 
have consequently primarily an abstract sense; the meaning of the 
word Jehovah therefore is existence in the abstract ; and by metonymy 
he of whom existence may be predicated as past, present, and future. 
Jehovah is consequently the 6 cov, 6 rjv, koX 6 e^o/xevo? — The Self 
Existent, The Eternal. This seems to be the only meaning which is 
warranted by the etymology. 

At the time that the Lord appeared to Moses in Horeb, the Is- 
raelites were groaning under the cruel bondage to which they were 
subjected in Egypt, and " they sighed by reason of their bondage, 
and the Lord heard their groaning, and he remembered his covenant 
with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob." And the appearance of the Lord 
to Moses at Horeb was to intimate to him his design of carrying 
out the provisions of that covenant. With this view Moses is cho- 
sen as the instrument of the Israelites' deliverance from Egypt, and 
on his asking credentials for his mission to Pharaoh, he is assured 
that God will be with him, and is desired to tell the people that 
Jehovah had sent him ; and he is again reminded in Exodus vi. 2 
that he was known to their fathers as **•}$ 7K, " The God Almighty" 
but that by his name Jehovah was he not known to them. He had been 
specially revealed to them as the God Almighty, but not as the God 
Eternal. At the time the Israelites were in Egypt, the whole world 
was overspread with idolatry, and the beings served went under the 
general name of D^H ?X; so that that name was not only applicable 
to the true God, but was the common appellation given to the gods 
of the heathen. It was therefore necessary to assign a name peculiar 
to the true God, involving an essential attribute, not common to him 
with heathen deities, which admitted of no degrees, and which 
could neither be shared with, nor delegated to another. Whether 
the Israelites were addicted to idolatry during the period of their 
sojourn in Egypt, or to what extent, it is impossible to say; idolatry 
however, is not at that period charged against them as a national 
sin ; but even although not charged with that sin, there can be little 
doubt, considering what we know of their character and tendencies 
immediately afterwards (Exod. chap, xxxii.), that their notions of 



xlii INTRODUCTION. 

the power and spirituality of God, and their feelings of piety must 
have been greatly weakened, if not in a great measure destroyed, 
during their cruel bondage, by the example around them ; and with 
such feelings, their confidence that God would fulfil his promises to 
them, after so long a period of apparent neglect, must have been 
greatly shaken. God's revelation to them under the name of Jeho- 
vah, would naturally and necessarily confirm their faith and elevate 
their hopes of deliverance. The revelation of himself under the 
name of the Self-existent God, in connection with assurances of the 
fulfilment of his covenant engagements, and with the subsequent 
exhibitions of miraculous agency in their deliverance, must have 
suggested other attributes and perfections as possessed by the Eternal, 
and other relations in which they stood to him, which must have 
inspired new sentiments of adoration, gratitude and love, and new 
motives and inducements to obedience, and which, during the sub- 
sistence of their dispensation, must have led them in a peculiar 
manner to recognise him under the title of their God. Such seem to 
be the circumstances under which the name Jehovah was given to 
the Israelites, and such probably the reasons for its having been 
given. That this should be a cherished name among the sacred 
writers under the Jewish dispensation, and very commonly found in 
the Jewish records, is what might be reasonably expected. It is a 
name of solemn import in itself, and was doubtless received as a 
complex term, embracing other and very important ideas, besides 
those to which its etymology naturally points. But although these 
ideas were attached to it at its first annunciation, and frequently 
were so afterwards, I cannot believe that these ideas were so univer- 
sally associated with it in the minds of the sacred writers, and that 
it retained so much of its appellative signification, that generally 
speaking, where it is used, the other name of God would be inappro- 
priate. I have never been able to see why the word Elohim in Gen. 
chap, i., and in the first three verses of chap, ii., would have been 
inapplicable in chap, iii., and in the remaining verses of chap, ii., 
nor why Elohim in chapter first was used in preference to Jehovah. 
Havernick assigns the following reason: — " As the creation taken 
in its visible appearance is a revelation of God in general, a reflection 
of his majesty and glory, this relation became altered after the fall, 



INTRODUCTION. xliii 

and the curse pronounced by God upon the earth. The revelation 
of God is now one that is to train man, viewed in reference to his 
sinful condition. This special guidance and training is connected 
with a particular race (JH?) and confined to it. With the fall is 
given the commencement of the development of the Theocracy, 
since God here shews himself to be one who will not abandon fallen 
man to his helplessness and misery. Therefore God reveals himself 
specially as Jehovah. By the help of Jehovah Eve bears a son, iv. 1. 
Jehovah speaks with Cain and drives him out of his presence ; the 
name of Jehovah is invoked by the pious Sethites." — Clark's For. 
Theol. Library, pp. 64, 65. I have already said that in the face of the 
declarations contained in Exod. iii. 13, seq. and vi. 2, I cannot bring 
myself to believe that God was known, previously to the period at 
which these declarations were made, under the name of Jehovah. 
The language is so explicit, that to an ordinary reader, there can 
be no doubt of its purport, and I confess I have always doubted the 
soundness of an interpretation of a passage of scripture describing a 
fact in plain and simple language, in a way which gives it a view 
directly the reverse of what to an ordinary reader the words appear 
to convey. In the second place, I cannot discover the development 
of the theocratic principle in the second chapter any more than in 
the first. In the second chapter, additional particulars are given of 
the creation, in order to enhance its wonders and the goodness of 
the Creator, together with the test of man's obedience, and the 
penalty of disobedience. There is here a development of God's 
works of creation and providence, and of his moral government; 
but I can see no speciality in the revelation as applied to any par- 
ticular race or seed. I next object to this view, because it does not 
appear to be founded on fact, there being no such uniformity in the 
use of the name of God as is contended for. In Psalm civ. where 
the works of creation are celebrated, the sacred writer uses the word 
Jehovah, and not Elohim, as in the first chapter of Genesis. Eeferring 
to the quotation just made from Hiivernick, and to the reasons 
assigned for the use of the term Jehovah, I would direct the reader's 
attention to a few cases, out of multitudes that might be selected, in 
which Elohim is found where Jehovah according to Havernick's 
principle might be expected, and in which these names are used 



xliv INTRODUCTION. 

indiscriminately. Gen. chap. vi. 8, " Noah found grace in the eyes 
of Jehovah." vi. 9, "Noah walked with Elohim" vii. 1, "And 
Jehovah said unto Noah, Come thou and all thy house into the Ark." 
vii. 5, "And Noah did according to all that Jehovah commanded 
him." vii. 9, " There went in two and two, etc., as Elohim had com- 
manded Noah." vii. 16, " And they that went in, went in male 
and female of all flesh as Elohim had commanded him, and Jehovah 
shut him in." viii. 1, "And Elohim remembered Noah, etc." 
viii. 15, " And Elohim spake unto Noah, saying, Go forth of the 
Ark, etc." viii. 20, 21, " And Noah builded an altar unto Jehovah, 
etc., and Jehovah smelled a sweet savour, and Jehovah said in 
his heart, etc." ; in which latter quotation indeed Jehovah might be 
expected according to Havernick's principles ; but as well might it 
be expected in the following quotations where Elohim is used, 
ix. 1, "And Elohim blessed Noah and his sons." ix. 8, "And 
Elohim spake unto Noah and to his sons with him saying, And 
I, behold I establish my covenant with you, etc." ix. 12, " And 
Elohim said, This is the token of the covenant which I make between 
me and you, etc." ix. 17, "And Elohim said unto Noah, This is 
the token of the covenant, etc." If the word Jehovah is applica- 
ble in reference to Abraham in what follows, should it not be as 
much so in the passages cited below in reference to Jacob, xii. 1, 
" Now Jehovah had said unto Abraham, Get thee out of thy country, 
etc." xii. 7, " And Jehovah appeared unto Abraham, and said, 
Unto thy seed will I give this land, etc." If I understand Haver- 
nick's principle, Jehovah should have been used in the quotations 
from chap. ix. as well as in those preceding and following from chap, 
xii. 1, xii. 17, " And Jehovah plagued Pharaoh and his house with 
great plagues, etc." xiii. 18, "And (Abraham) built there (in 
Mamre) an altar unto Jehovah" xxxv. 1, "And Elohim said 
unto Jacob, Arise, go up to Bethel and dwell there, and make 
there an altar unto Elohim, etc." xxxv. 3, " And let us arise and go 
up to Bethel, and I (Jacob) will make there an altar unto Elohim. 
xxxv. 9, 10, " And Elohim appeared unto Jacob again when he 
came out of Padan-aram and blessed him. And Elohim said 
unto him, thy name is Jacob; thy name shall not be called 
any more Jacob, but Israel shall be thy name." xlvi. 1, " And 



INTRODUCTION. xlv 

Israel took his journey witli all that he had, etc., and offered sacrifices 
to the Elohim of his father Isaac. And Elohim spake unto Israel in 
the visions of the night, and said, Jacob ! and he said, Here am I. 
And he said, I am Elohim, the Elohim of thy father," etc. xlviii., 15, 
" And he [Jacob] blessed Joseph, and said, Elohim, before whom my 
fathers Abraham and Isaac did walk, the Elohim which fed me all my 
life long unto this day, the angel which redeemed me from all evil, 
bless the lads." For the reasons I have given, and from a comparison of 
the passages above quoted, such a distinction does not appear to be 
observed between the names of God in the book of Genesis, as to 
prevent the substitution of the one for the other without impropriety, 
or to show from the necessity of the case that God must have been 
known by the name of Jehovah under the patriarchal dispensation. 
I shall take an illustration of what I have been endeavouring to 
prove from the name originally given to Jacob, which signifies 
" supplanter" or " he supplant eth." Now, can it be imagined, that 
on every occasion on which that name was used, the circumstances 
which justified that appellation were present to the mind of the 
speaker or writer, although this would naturally happen when he 
was guilty of any act which showed a connection between his cha- 
racter and name. This connection accordingly suggested itself to 
Esau after he had been craftily deprived of his blessing, and he said 
" Is he not rightly named Jacob [supplanter] for he hath supplanted 
me these two times ; he took away my birthright, and' behold now 
he hath taken away my blessing" (Gen. xxvii. 36.) But after 
Jacob received his new name which bore reference to the covenant 
relation subsisting between God and himself, it might have been 
supposed that the latter would have been the only appropriate 
appellation, in connection with his faith, piety, and privileges. We 
might have expected that the name Israel would have been em- 
ployed, when God signified his covenant-relation to Abraham, Isaac, 
and Jacob, on his appearance to Moses at the bush in Horeb, and that 
he would have said, " I am the God of Abraham, Isaac, and Israel," 
and not of Jacob. I cannot doubt then that the offensive idea 
inherent in the name of Jacob was lost sight of, and that in its 
ordinary use it conveyed only ideas associated with the faith, virtues, 
and privileges of the patriarch. I believe that the terms Jehovah 



xlvi INTRODUCTION. 

and Elohim are generally used in Scripture as proper names, and 
without reference to their etymology; but, considering the circum- 
stances under which the name Jehovah was revealed to the Israelites, 
it is very natural to suppose that that name would be highly reve- 
renced, and generally cherished, and that it would be much more 
frequently employed by the writers of the Old Testament than that 
of Elohim. If the two names were used with such discrimination 
as is contended for by Havernick and others, and if the notion 
which he affirms is uniformly connected with the name of Jehovah, 
I cannot account for the fact that the name of Jehovah is so seldom 
found in the last seventeen chapters of Genesis, where the Theocratic 
principle was acquiring greater and greater development; why some 
of the writers of the Old Testament use the one name much more 
frequently than others, and that, too, in the same style of writing, 
(compare Proverbs and Ecclesiastes) — why it is so seldom used in the 
New Testament, and only by its Greek representative Kvpcos, and 
principally in quotations from the writings of the Old, after the 
covenant relation between God and his sinful children had been 
established in Christ as Prophet, Priest, and King. And further, if 
the name Jehovah was known under the patriarchal dispensation, 
I cannot perceive why it should not be connected with the 
names of men and places as Elohim was, and as is so frequently 
the case in the subsequent books of the Old Testament. The 
best of the Lexicographers deny that Moriah is a compound of yah ; 
and that Jehovah in Jehovah Jireh was introduced by Moses, is 
easily supposable upon the same principle, that the original 
names of many places were changed by him for the names assigned 
to them in his own time. It is, however, to be observed, that no 
such changes were made upon the names of men. My general con- 
clusion is, that the absence of the name of Jehovah in certain portions 
of the book of Genesis, marks an antiquity greater than the era of 
Moses, and proves that book to be the most ancient historical record 
in the world. And, on the other hand, that the name of Jehovah 
in the book of Genesis brings down its compilation, arrangement, and 
editorship, to the era of Moses, and beyond the period when the 
Lord appeared to him in Horeb. 

Another proof of the antiquity of the materials from whence the 



INTKODUCTION. xlvii 

book of Genesis is derived, and which I shall briefly advert to, 
arises from the ancient names of places and nations found in it. 
Hence have arisen many geographical difficulties in regard to the 
places and nations named. Of these may be mentioned Eden, and 
the rivers Pison and Gihon, in the second chapter. See also the 
names of many nations and places mentioned in chapter tenth, and 
referred to in the analysis of that chapter. Mesopotamia goes under 
the name of Padan-aram in Genesis, but in no other part of scrip- 
ture. See also Zuzims, and Ham their residence, chap. xiv. 5, Bered 
in chap. xvi. 1 4, and Ellasar in chap. xiv. 1, unless we adopt the doubt- 
ful conjecture, that this is the same with Thelasar or Telassar, of 
which mention is made in Isaiah xxxvii. 12, and 2 Kings xix. 12. 

There are other cases in which both the old and new names are given, 
with the reasons generally, but not always assigned for the change. 
Of these, may be noticed Luz the earlier, and Bethel, chap, xxviii. 
19, the later name; and Kirjath Arba and Hebron, chap, xxiii. 2, 
Bela and Zoar, chap. xiv. 2, En-Mishpat and Kadesh, chap. xiv. 7. 

Had Moses availed himself of pre-existing materials, the great 
probability is, that he would have preserved the names there found; 
but had the history been written independently of these materials, 
it is not probable that he would have assigned names to places and 
nations under which, for centuries before he wrote, they had ceased 
to be known. 

One remark which I would make in regard to the changes of names 
in Genesis, is, that these changes, and the reasons of them, furnish in 
themselves, strong presumptive evidence of the truth of the impor- 
tant facts out of which the changes arose. Thus, the change of 
Bela into Zoar, is a memorial of the destruction of the cities of the 
plain, and of Lot's escape from Sodom ; and the change of Luz into 
Bethel, of the fact of Jacob's vision there. And the same may be 
said of the transaction at Jabbok, which was perpetuated by the 
change of Jacob's name into Israel. 

It has been argued, that if Moses had drawn the materials for 
writing the book of Genesis from ancient documents, he would have 
made reference to these, as he does in Numbers xxi. 14, to the " Book 
of the Wars of the Lord," and that his not having done so is fatal 
to the document hypothesis. It is alleged that " if he had copied 



xlviii. INTRODUCTION. 

from any previously existing memoirs into the book of Genesis, is it 
likely that such a historian, every page of whose writings is stamped 
with every possible mark of authenticity, would have omitted the 
sources whence he derived his history." — Homes Introduction, chap, 
ii. sect. 1. p. 52. Ed. 9. 

This, however, would prove too much. Moses claims the author- 
ship of the other books which go under his name, and states that they 
were written by the command of God; and mentions what portions 
of their contents were communicated by immediate revelation. 
In the book of Genesis no such information exists. Might it not 
hence be argued with equal plausibility, upon the same grounds as in 
the former case, that Moses was not the author of the book of 
Genesis, and had no connection with that book at all. As he lived 
at a period far remote from the most recent of the facts recorded in 
Genesis, he could not have been personally cognisant of any of these 
facts. Why then, it may be asked, does he not state that the book was 
written by him, and mention the authority by which it was written, 
and the sources, whether from immediate revelation or otherwise, 
whence he derived the information communicated in it. If the objec- 
tion above-stated by Mr. Home is fatal to the document hypothesis, I 
cannot see why the absence of the other information just referred to, 
would not be equally fatal to Moses' being the author of Genesis at 
all. I conceive, however, that there is no weight in any of the 
objections. 

That Moses is the author of the book of Genesis, in the sense I 
have contended for, there cannot be the slightest doubt. The 
authorship of it is ascribed to him by the uniform voice of antiquity, 
and no tenable argument can be adduced in proof of the contrary. 
Such a work as Genesis was indispensable as a basis for the Mosaic 
dispensation, and without the former the latter would be unintelligible ; 
and this will, I trust, clearly appear from what follows. 

I now proceed to shew the connection between the book of 
Genesis and the other four books of Moses, and the connection 
generally between the patriarchal and Mosaic dispensations. The 
former is evidently the basis of the latter, as regards what is histo- 
rical, theological, moral, and ceremonial. The history of a godly 



INTRODUCTION. xlix 

and a godless race is preserved from trie time of the fall. From the 
former, Abraham and his seed sprang, who were chosen by God 
as the depositaries of his promises, through whose means his name 
and worship were to be preserved; through whose instrumentality a 
faith in the promised Saviour was to be kept up, and through whom, 
as concerning the flesh, Christ was to come. The history of Abra- 
ham, and of his family, and of the divine revelations and promises 
made to him, is given in the book of Genesis with great minuteness. 
In connection with the fulfilment of these promises, the Israelites 
leave Egypt; and all the civil and ecclesiastical polity which was 
established through Moses in the wilderness, was for the same object. 
In the history of Abraham and his seed, we discover institutions 
purely patriarchal, a nomadic mode of life, a pilgrimage in a land 
not theirs. In the other books of Moses, and during the journey of 
the Israelites to the land of promise, we mark a course of training 
for the new circumstances in which they were to be placed in 
Canaan, and great advancement in ecclesiastical and civil polity. By 
Moses are established two distinct religious orders, embracing priests 
and Levites; supreme and subordinate judges — representations of 
the people in the assemblies through the heads of the tribes, and of 
the fathers — and a final appeal, in all cases of importance and diffi- 
culty, to Jehovah, who was consulted through the supreme judge or 
high priest. Before Moses' death, the promise made to Abraham of 
the land of Canaan had been partially fulfilled. The whole of the 
district on the east side of Jordan was in the possession of the tribes 
of Gad, Keuben, and half the tribe of Manasseh; and after that 
period the other tribes took possession of the part on the west side 
under Joshua. The great fundamental law of their religious polity 
contained in their first commandment " that there is but one God," 
infinite, eternal, and unchangeable, and to whom all perfection is 
ascribed, is likewise the fundamental principle of the patriarchal 
dispensation ; and the mode in which that God was to be worshipped, 
the conduct of which he approves, the way in which he can be 
approached by sinful beings fully developed in the former, are based 
upon a pre-existing revelation, and upon antecedent laws, and 
consuetudinary usages, to be found in the latter. The sabbath, chap, 
ii. 3; sacrifices, chap. iv. 4; circumcision, chap. xvii. 10 — 12; the 

e 



1 INTRODUCTION. 

priestly office, chap. xiv. 1 9 ; trie division of beasts into clean and 
unclean, vii. 2, were patriarchal institutions, ordained by God, and 
consequently observed under trie divine sanction. Other rites and 
ceremonies of a less prominent kind, which were observed under the 
patriarchal dispensation, were established with greater formality by 
the laws of Moses. Of these may be mentioned, (xxxv. 2) the wash- 
ing of the body; and (xxxv. 2) change of garments in the removal of 
ceremonial uncleanness by contact with idols and otherwise ; xiv. 20, 
xxviii. 22, the payment of tithes for the maintenance of religion; 
xxviii. 20 — 22, xiv. 22, xxi. 53, the making of vows and oaths; 
xv. 9, seq., the ceremonies on the ratification of covenants; xv. 10, 
comp. Leviticus i. 17, the prohibition of the cutting in twain of the 
bodies of birds, as was done on particular occasions in the case of 
beasts sacrificed; and the forms adopted for the consecration of 
places destined for religious purposes (chap, xxviii. 18). To these 
may be added the Levirate marriage, of which an instance is given 
m the case of Tamar, Judah's daughter-in-law, who, after the death 
of her first husband, without children, claimed Onan, the immediate 
younger brother; and after his death without children, Shelah the 
youngest (xxxviii. 8). Of the separation of women in a state of 
ceremonial defilement we see traces in Eachael's stratagem, to 
conceal her father's gods (see Gen. chap. xxxi. 35). The younger 
Michaelis thinks that traces of the Goel or Blood-avenger are dis- 
coverable in chap, xxvii. 45, where Kebekah is described as sending 
away Jacob in consequence of Esau's threat to kill him. " Why," 
said she, " should I be deprived of you both also in one day "? which 
words Michaelis thinks allude to Esau's death by the Blood-avenger, 
should he carry his threat into execution. It is evident that the 
office, the rights, and the privileges of the Blood-avenger were not 
established by Moses, and that his laws on this subject were intended 
to restrict and not to extend previous rights and privileges so liable 
to abuse. This restriction was effected by means of the cities of 
Refuge, and of certain judicial procedure to be observed, before the 
murderer was delivered over to the Blood-avenger (see Numb. xxxv. 
7, seq.) After slaying his brother, Cain dreaded that " every one that 
found him would kill him ;" but afterwards the right of avenging 
blood was confined to the nearest male relation (not the father) who 



INTRODUCTION. H 

was held to be dishonoured so long as his kinsman's blood remained 
unavenged. Of this custom, applicable only to society in its primi- 
tive state, and where there was no public magistrate for the punish- 
ment of crimes, Moses, at the time his laws were given, could only 
mitigate the evil; the point of honour involved in it was too strong 
to be rashly interfered with. 

In most cases consuetudinary usages were confirmed; in others, 
however, they were abolished by the laws of Moses. Under the 
patriarchal dispensation, there was no distinct order of priests, and 
sacrifices might be offered at any place, and, as it should seem, with- 
out any special authority. The patriarchs planted groves, erected 
altars, and offered sacrifices to the Lord as they were moved by de- 
votional feeling (xii. 7, xxi. 33). By the laws of Moses no private 
sacrifices were allowed, and, without the special authority of Jehovah, 
they could only be offered at the place where the tabernacle or 
temple stood, and only by a duly consecrated priest. These injunc- 
tions were necessary for the prevention of idolatry, to which private 
sacrifices by an unauthorized priesthood presented great temptations 
to a people so prone to it as the Israelites were after their deliver- 
ance from their Egyptian bondage. Similar prohibitions seem to 
have existed among other nations, but on different grounds. Alci- 
biades was accused by the Athenians of celebrating the mysteries 
(of Ceres) in private, and the charge is aggravated in respect that 
his doing so was not on religious grounds, but for the furtherance of 
treasonable practices. " Aspergebatur etiam infamia, quod in domo 
sua facere mysteria dicebatur, quod nefas erat more Atheniensium ; 
idque non ad religionem, sed ad conjurationem pertinere existima- 
batur." — Corn. Nep. in vita Alcib. (cap. iii.) 

The offering of sacrifices in groves allowed in Abraham's time 
(Gen. xxi. 33), was prohibited by Moses (Deut. xvi. 21), owing to 
the idolatrous abuses which had arisen out of that practice. 

It will be observed from what has been said, that although the 
patriarchal and Mosaic dispensations are quite distinct, there is an 
intimate connection between them. When the careful reader attends 
to the simplicity of the earlier — to the incidental notices in it, of 
rites and ceremonies, which in the later were formed into a con- 
nected system of which they were prominent features — to the 

e2 



Hi INTRODUCTION. 

absence in the earlier of any allusion to previous dispensations and 
revelations — while in the later the doctrines, the facts, and in most 
cases, the usages are assumed, very strong evidence is furnished of 
the antiquity of the book of Genesis, of its having preceded the other 
books of Moses, and of its being the earliest record of the divine 
dispensations to man. 

Another strong evidence of the great antiquity of the book 
of Genesis, is, that upon the historical facts contained in it the tradi- 
tions and mythology of the heathens are to a great extent founded. 
In these, indeed, we find the true incorporated with the false, the 
rational with the irrational, the probable with the extravagant, yet 
all indicating a common basis — a true foundation. 

Most heathen nations had their written or traditionary accounts of 
the creation — of man's estate of innocence during what is called 
the Golden Age, and of his fall from that condition. In the pre- 
valence of sacrifices throughout the whole world, the general prin- 
ciple laid down by the Apostle Paul " that without the shedding 
of blood there is no remission" (Heb. ix. 22) is virtually recognized, 
amidst all the errors and corruptions of heathen worship. Of the 
early traditions and mythology of the heathens founded upon facts 
recorded in Genesis, may be enumerated the formation of the first 
man by Prometheus, the Golden Age, and the opening of Pandora's 
box ; the ascribing of the invention of working in brass and iron to 
Vulcan, the Tubal-Cain of Scripture — the intermarriages between 
heathen gods and mortals, whence sprang a progeny of demigods, 
and giants, founded upon the intermarriages between the family of 
Seth and Cain referred to in the 6th chapter — the deluge in Thessaly 
from which Deucalion and Pyrrha were preserved, of which the 
deluge in Genesis is the proto-type. The visits from Gods to men, 
founded upon the visit of the angels to Abraham, recorded in chap, 
xviii. 1 seq., and other similar divine communications. The stones 
called Baitulia evidently referred to the pillar erected by Jacob at 
Bethel (see chap, xxviii. 18, 19). Other instances have been pointed 
out in the Analysis, all conspiring to prove the extreme antiquity of 
the book of Genesis, as these traditions extended far beyond the 
periods in which any written records of them were preserved. 

I now direct the reader's attention to the genealogical tables 



INTRODUCTION. liii 

found in the book of Genesis, which commence with the name of 
Adam, extend throughout the antediluvian period, and the whole of 
the patriarchal dispensation, which form an important feature in the 
Mosaic economy, and continue in an unbroken chain till the final 
destruction of the Jewish State. These genealogical tables are im- 
portant, in the first place, in a chronological and historical point of 
view, at least during the earlier dispensations. Through this means, 
the dates of the creation, of the deluge, of the call of Abraham, and 
of other important events are precisely determined. And the ages 
of the antediluvians, and of the most eminent of the patriarchs, with 
incidental historical references interspersed, as to their characters and 
fortunes, and the countries they inhabited, are inserted in these 
documents, and furnish materials for tracing their subsequent history. 
These genealogical tables place the Mosaic records on a different 
footing from that of the early records or traditions of other nations, 
which always merge into the fabulous. In the case of Moses, there 
are facts, names and ages of individuals, lines of different families, 
places of habitation, modes of life, habits, occupations, etc. All 
this is given with such precision and simplicity, and with such an 
air of truth, that it can scarcely fail to carry conviction along with 
it, and there cannot be a doubt, that had not the facts been true, the 
imposture would long since have been detected and exposed. 
Throughout the whole range of profane history, no fact occurs so 
extraordinary as that of the Bible genealogies extending from the 
creation throughout a period of upwards of four thousand years, and 
only discontinued when their ends were accomplished. Some of 
their ends have been already pointed out, others I shall now advert 
to, which, though perhaps not immediately bearing upon the subject 
in hand, I trust my readers will not find fault with me for intro- 
ducing in this place. After the fall, a promise is given that the seed 
of the woman should bruise the head of the serpent, which promise 
1 believe is universally understood by Jews, as well as Christians, to 
refer to the Redeemer. In the genealogical tables, a godly and a 
godless line is preserved — the former through Seth, ISToah, Shem. 
Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. To Abraham's seed the original pro 
mise is confined, and afterwards confirmed to Isaac and Jacob, 
thereafter limited to the tribe of Judah, and thereafter to the 



liv INTRODUCTION. 

family of David. The genealogical tables were kept, under the 
Mosaic dispensation, with particular care, and the duty of keep- 
ing them was assigned to the Levites, who, being dispersed 
throughout the whole land, were in peculiarly favourable cir- 
cumstances for doing so. These registers, or genealogical tables 
answered various purposes. ihrough them all the tribes were 
kept completely distinct, and they were used for marking the 
successions in the office of high priest, and subsequently for 
preserving distinct the different courses of the inferior priests,, and of 
the Levites. After the entrance of the Israelites into Canaan, they 
served to prove the right of every family to its ancestral inheritance ; 
to settle all disputed points in regard to property; and after the 
introduction of the kingly government, to mark the line, and right 
of succession to the throne. These records, as establishing the right 
of succession to property, were particularly important after the return 
of the Jews from Babylon. Many disputes must have arisen about 
the 'succession to property, after an absence of seventy years, among 
the people in general ; and as to the rights and privileges of the tribe 
of Levi in particular. For the settlement of these disputes, every 
one was called upon to prove his case from the genealogical tables, 
and if he could not from these " shew his father's house (Ezra ii. 59), 
he was found not entitled to the property claimed; and if a priest, he 
was removed, as " polluted from the priesthood" (Ezra ii. 62, 
Neh. vii. 64). As these tables were, so to speak, the title deeds by 
which every Israelite held his right to his patrimonial inheritance ; 
and as every one had a personal interest in their accuracy, there 
were the strongest reasons for their being preserved with the greatest 
care. A Jew's patrimonial inheritance was inalienable ; it might be 
attached for debt, it could not be sold ; it always returned free to him 
at the year of the Jubilee ; and although it was out of his family for 
fifty years, it was claimed by and restored to him at the expiry of 
that term ; and all doubts as to his rights were removed by an appeal 
to the public records. 

By means of these tables, the lineage of any Jew could be proved 
from the earliest period. Josephus states that he could trace his own 
descent from the tribe of Levi by public registers ; and he further 
states, that however dispersed or depressed the Jewish people were, 



INTRODUCTION. lv 

they never failed to have exact genealogical tables preserved from 
the authentic documents which were kept at Jerusalem. — Kitto's 
Bib. Encyc. — v. Genealogy. It will hence appear obvious, how clearly 
the fulfilment of the promise of a Saviour made to Abraham could be 
proved, and in a way which no Jew could gainsay, without denying 
the validity of his own title to his patrimonial inheritance ; accord- 
ingly, St. Matthew and St. Luke, in different ways, trace his lineage 
from these tables. By a political arrangement, therefore, affecting 
the people's most important temporal interests, and thus securing the 
accuracy of these tables, which among that people, who were so 
prone to idolatry, could not have been easily effected had only a reli- 
gious purpose been ostensibly set forth, evidence has been furnished 
of the fulfilment of the promise of a Saviour, made after the fall, 
and renewed through Abraham, Isaac, Jacob, Judah and his tribe, 
David and his line, which it is impossible for the unbelieving Jews 
to produce, now that the distinction of tribes has been lost, and that 
the national registers have been necessarily discontinued, were they 
to assert the claims of a false Christ. 

Let me now advert to the progress of civil institutions observable 
in the book of Genesis. These are just such as might be looked for 
during the period in question. Man having been created in know- 
ledge, no indications of a savage or barbarous condition were to be 
expected; at the same time great simplicity of manners might be 
looked for. The facts of the antediluvian history are very few, and 
any information we may glean in regard to the state of society at 
that period is rather to be obtained inferentially than positively, 
rather from what we do not, than what we do find, upon this point 
in the Scriptures. We are, indeed, told that Cain builded a city, 
probably from the fear that u every one that found him would kill 
him," which the Divine assurance of protection had not dissipated; 
and there is reference to the working in brass and iron, and to the 
invention of certain musical instruments. There is likewise reference 
to the nomadic mode of life having been reduced into a systematic 
form in the days of Jabal, who was " the father of those who dwell 
in tents, and of such as have cattle." There are, however, no traces 
of civil institutions in a complicated form, before the deluge. No 
allusion is made to rulers or magistrates of any kind, in the modern 



VI INTRODUCTION. 

sense of these terms; and hence it is probable, that the civil institu- 
tions then existing were purely patriarchal, sole and absolute 
authority as ruler, judge and lawgiver having been vested in the 
head of the family or tribe. Patriarchal institutions were probably 
universally prevalent for some time after the deluge ; but, on the 
increase of a tribe in numbers, or on its union with others, we may 
suppose, what actually took place, that a ruler or chief magistrate 
would be chosen who was qualified to guide and govern the commu- 
nity, to protect his subjects when attacked, and to lead them out to 
battle and to conquest, irrespectively of those rights which belonged 
to heads of families or of tribes, where the government was purely 
patriarchal. The ruler thus elected was invested with the title of 
king, and was likewise, in all probability in those early times, the 
priest of the community, as was the case with Melchizedek. In 
later times, Yirgil alludes to such a union of offices in the case of 
one Annius, who was at the same time a king and priest of Apollo. 
During the residence of Abraham in Canaan, the kings of that 
country reigned over only single cities, and the immediately adjoin- 
ing territories, which were employed for agricultural purposes, with 
certain uncultivated districts at a distance which were used for 
pasturage. Canaan was at that time overspread with such govern- 
ments, which made war upon one another, or upon the kings of the 
adjoining countries, to whom they sometimes became tributary. 
Upon the small territory now covered by the Dead Sea, stood the 
cities of Sodom, Gomorrah, Admah. and Zeboim, with their respec- 
tive kings. The same system existed in the days of Joshua, who 
conquered thirty-one kings on the west side of the Jordan. When 
the Lord engaged to make the Israelites a great nation, we are to 
understand the word great in a relative sense, and not according to 
more modern notions of extent of territory. They were to possess 
and rule over the land of Canaan and certain adjoining districts, 
which had been inhabited by various nations, and governed by a 
multitude of kings. The power and pomp of kings in those early 
times, were very different from what were afterwards attached to the 
kingly office. The original meaning of the word *?HJb melech, which 
we render king is akin to the Latin word consul. In Chaldee, *7pl2 
mlach signifies counsel] hence one that gives counsel, in Latin consul. 



INTRODUCTION, lvii 

At first kings had no state, and no court composed of officers with 
gradations of rank. They had, however, a council of old men, who 
sat at the gate of the city, and assisted them with their advice in 
times of difficulty and danger, and who also took part with them in 
the administration of justice. We may hence perceive that the 
office of consul at Rome, with the patres or senators, bears traces of 
institutions of very remote antiquity. After the expulsion of their 
kings, the Romans preferred the title of consuls to their chief 
magistrates; the title of the latter being less offensive and more 
conformable to their notions of liberty; their limited period of 
office rendering them less the objects of jealousy and fear. 

If we turn our attention from Canaan and the adjacent countries 
to Egypt, the contrast is very striking. Various causes conspired in 
order to its early advancement in power and civilization. The small 
portion of the country that was adapted for pasturage, and the bar to 
the pursuit of the nomadic mode of life, arising from the annual 
overflowings of the Nile and other causes ; the fertility of the soil and 
the facilities thence afforded for agricultural pursuits; the commer- 
cial relations which their surplusage of corn created with neighbour- 
ing nations; a very early trade, as is supposed, with India through 
Arabia, across the Red Sea to Meroe, and thence down the Nile; 
the facilities of obtaining stone and brick for their cities and public 
buildings, and a natural ingenuity, energy of character, and political 
sagacity in the inhabitants themselves, may have been conspiring to 
account for their taking the lead of all the surrounding nations in 
civilization, in wisdom, in literature, in the arts and sciences^ and in 
the procuring of the comforts of social life. 

The country of Egypt was of great comparative extent, and the 
government was conducted under a more systematic form than that 
of the surrounding nations. Intimation is given in Genesis of various 
classes of officers in the government and king's household when 
Joseph was in Egypt. Of these may be mentioned priests as a caste, 
or distinct class of the community (chap, xlvii. 22); a prime minister 
or vizier, who rode in the second chariot, and was entrusted with the 
king's ring as a symbol of delegated authority (chap. xli. 41, 
43) — a chief of the guards in Hebrew D^H^ri ^&? wn0 
was also governor of the state prison with a deputy under him 



lviii INTRODUCTION". 

(chap, xxxix. 1, 22, xl. 3), writers of the hieroglyphic characters in 
Hebrew D^t^H (chap. xli. 8), chief butler and chief baker (chap, 
xl. 2). It appears likewise that horses and chariots were used in Egypt 
in the state processions (chap. xli. 43), and for warlike and other 
purposes (chap, xlvii. 17, 1. 9; comp. Exod. xiv. 9), at a time when 
the horse formed no part of the possessions of the patriarchs, or, as 
far as appears, of any of the inhabitants of Canaan. Modern researches 
have also shown the great progress that the Egyptians had made in 
Joseph's time in architecture, painting, mechanics, and other arts 
indicative of a high state of civilization as compared with that of the 
surrounding nations. We cannot but be surprised at the exactness 
of the representation in the book of Genesis, of Egyptian institutions, 
arts, sciences, manners, customs, and general habits. The whole of 
the accounts of that country found there, evidently prove the author's 
intimate knowledge of it — a knowledge so minute as can only be 
accounted for by opportunities from long residence, and by a high 
position in the country such as both Joseph and Moses possessed. 
The fact is, notwithstanding the multifarious subjects treated of in 
the book of Genesis, irrespective of those which bear upon doctrine 
and duty — notwithstanding allusions made to forms of government, 
and to manners and customs in different nations, and widely differ- 
ing from one another, the sacred historian is never in error. The 
most exact researches of ancient and modern times confirm the 
correctness, not only of the leading facts, but also of the minutest 
and apparently most trifling details. The more carefully this book 
is examined, the more strongly are we convinced of its truth and 
genuineness, and of the validity of its claims as a work of divine 
inspiration. 

For our more complete conviction in this respect, let us direct 
attention to the sacred historian's accuracy in his allusions to manners 
and customs. For example, he describes Hagar, who was an Egyp- 
tian, carrying her bottle of water upon her shoulder, and Pharaoh's 
butler, carrying his burden upon his head. In referring to Egyptian 
manners and customs, Herodotus says, ra aydea ol [iev avepes iirl 
rcov icefyaXewv cf)opiov(Ti at Be <yvval/ce$ eVl twv cofjuwv. — Herod, lib. ii. 
35. " The men bear their burdens upon their heads, the women upon 
their shoulders." In compliance with Egyptian customs, Joseph, 



INTRODUCTION. lix 

when a subject of Pharaoh, shaved himself before his admission into 
his presence (chap. xli. 14). Had Joseph been represented as doing 
so in Canaan, the sacred historian would have betrayed ignorance of 
the manners of that country, where the male inhabitants were 
ashamed to appear in public with their beards shaved; hence a 
neighbouring king shaved the beards of David's ambassadors (2 Sam. 
x. 4, seq.) which was a studied and sorely felt insult. 

The translation of the Hebrew word Uplift by butler, by which 
we commonly understand one who has the charge of wine, might 
lead to the presumption of the sacred historian's ignorance of Egyp- 
tian customs, since it can be proved that wine, that is, the fermented 
juice of the grape, was at that period prohibited in Egypt. By 
attending, however, to the literal meaning of the word ilp^ft viz. 
11 one who gives to drink" a "cup-bearer" and to the mode of 
executing that office, the difficulty is solved. It appears that it was 
not wine that that officer gave to Pharaoh, but the fresh and unfer- 
mented juice of the grape squeezed into the king's cup (chap. xl. 11); 
and this exactly agrees with the manner in which the grape is 
said to have been used as a beverage at that period by the Egyptians. 
The attentive reader will observe more instances of the same kind , 
and all tending towards the same conclusion. 

In the book of Genesis, allusions are made to a great variety of 
manners and customs which are known to have existed among the 
Jews in later periods of their history, and many of which are found 
to prevail among Abraham's descendants by Ishmael and other 
inhabitants of the East, even in the present day. Among these may 
be mentioned the meeting of the Elders at the gates of their respec- 
tive cities, for consulting upon the affairs of state, and for the 
administration of justice (Gen. xxiii.); the presentation of raiment by 
superiors to inferiors (xlv. 22); the point of honour of laying aside 
enmity against one from whom a present has been received (xxxiii. 
8 — 11) or with whom one has eaten a social meal (xxxi. 54, 55); the 
purchase of wives by money, other property, or labour (xxix. 18); 
the bestowal by parents of note, of one or more female attendants 
over whom the husband had no control (unless when voluntarily 
given up to him) as companions to their daughters, who, when their 
husbands had more wives than one, were greatly dependent upon 



lx INTRODUCTION 

such society (of these Hagar, Deborah, Bilhah, and Zilpah are 
instances) — the residence of the wives in separate tents with these 
companions (chap. xxxi. 33); the various ornaments used by women, 
such as heavy bracelets, nose-jewels, etc. (chap. xxiv. 22); the use of 
jewels as amulets and for idolatrous purposes (chap. xxxv. 4, and 
Analysis No. 2657); the wearing of veils by women married (xx. 16) 
and betrothed (xxiv. 65), and by harlots (xxxviii. 14, and Analysis 
No. 1706), but not by widows or virgins; the perfuming of garments 
(xxvii. 27) ; the rending of clothes, and the wearing of sackcloth in 
seasons of affliction (chap, xxxvii. 34); festivities at the weaning of 
children (chap. xxi. 8), and birth-days (chap. xl. 20), making of 
covenants (chap. xxvi. 28 — 30), and the like. These and other cases 
will be noticed by the attentive reader, who will obtain a greater 
amount and variety of important information from the careful study 
of this book, than he had calculated upon previously to its perusal. 

The reader of the book of Genesis will be likewise interested and 
benefited by tracing manners and customs from the meanings of 
words. The existence of these words proves the existence of such 
manners and customs previously to the date at which the word 
appears. 

From the coin that afterwards went under the name ;p$ shekel, 
literally weight, it is inferred that current money was originally bul- 
lion weighed, and that it was only coined at an after period ; and 
that the coin denominated the shekel was so called from its being of 
the same weight as that originally used for weighing bullion. That 
coined money was also weighed is well known, but the weighing of 
it then was for the purpose of ascertaining whether the coin was of 
the just value. 

The Hebrew word 111D sokher, signifies — 1. one who travels 
about — 2. A merchant. Hence it may be inferred that when that 
name was given, merchants perambulated the country in the disposal 
of their wares, and did not sell them in booths. At least their per- 
ambulation of the country is implied in the word. The same infer- 
ence may be drawn from the Greek word ecpwopoq — 1. One that 
passes through — 2. A merchant. 

The word JJ5&?3 nishbak, ordinarily rendered swore, is in the 
passive voice, and hence the form of swearing may be inferred. The 



INTKODUCTIOtf. lxi 

oath was administered in tne words " I adjure thee." It should seem, 
therefore, that the word literally means was adjured; in conformity 
with our phraseology, it is rendered swore. When Abraham volun- 
teers an oath, he says, in reference to this matter, i" have lifted up my 
hand, a form used in swearing, in the present day. 

The word H&Hp Kdeshah, fem. from $*}p was holy — signifies 

1. A holy, or consecrated female — 2. A harlot, or prostitute ; the 

Hebrew term having reference to the Canaanitish practice of female 

prostitution, regarded as a religious duty, in the temple of an impure 

idol. The same connection is observable between the masculine 

form KHp — 1. Sanctus — 2. Cinaedus. 
• "' T 

^nl2 mokhar signifies — 1. Sale, price — 2. Price of a woman, dowry, 

not given by the father with the daughter, but to the father for the 
daughter (Gen. xxxiv. 12). The equivalent was sometimes given 
in money, sometimes in other property, and sometimes in labour 
exacted by the bride's father from his future son-in-law, as appears 
from the compact between Jacob and Laban, for Leah and Rachel. 

njp£ mikneh signifies — 1. Acquisition — 2. Property — 3. Cattle. A 
very natural connection in the minds of a pastoral people, whose 
property consisted principally of flocks and herds. There is a similar 
connection between the Latin words pecu, cattle, and pecunia, money. 

HTHK akhuzzah signifies — 1. Seizure from JHX akhaz, seized — 

2. Possession, bearing reference to the mode of acquisition — 3. The 
manner or form of taking possession, which is equivalent to our law 
term seizin. In the 34th chapter of Genesis, Hamor, in order to 
induce the sons of Jacob to give him their sister in marriage, pro- 
mises them — 1. The privilege of intermarriage with the Shechemites, 
a mark of peculiar favour and distinction. — 2. The privilege of 
travelling over the land, either for the purposes of pasturage or trade. 

3. The right of holding property in it — on which occasion the expres- 
sion Wn&n is used, which implies the right of purchasing and holding 
landed property, according to the established legal forms of the 
country. The same expression was used when the land of Goshen 
was given over to the Israelites. The original form of the trans- 
ference of property, seems to have been very simple. In Abraham's 
purchase of the cave of Machpelah from Ephron the Hittite, it 
appears that the price was settled, the money weighed, and paid, in 



lxii INTKODUCTION. 

presence of the Elders at the gate of the city — and that the title was 
completed by seizin — in other words, by immediate possession, which 
was probably attended with some formalities. This is what is called 
*)3p njTfJJ a seizure, or seizin of a burial place. In these times 
property was conveyed without the instrumentality of writing, and 
the form of conveyance, as appears in the purchase of the cave of 
Machpelah, was extremely simple, and exactly suited to the state of 
society at the period when the transaction took place. Had the 
sacred historian, in the description of that transaction, stated that 
there was an original deed sealed according to law and custom, and 
subscribed in presence of witnesses, and that there was likewise a 
duplicate which was open, as was the case in the purchase of the 
field described in the 32nd chapter of Jeremiah, verse 7, seq., should 
we not have had irresistible evidence of usages and forms of a later 
date, and adapted to a different state of society? 

It is to be hoped, that the remarks that have been made in the 
preceding pages of this chapter, may be useful in stimulating the 
student in the prosecution of the study of the Hebrew Scriptures, 
and in convincing him of the importance of attending to the most 
minute particulars recorded in the word of God ; of the bearing of 
such minutice in evidence of its truth and genuineness ; and of the 
additional interest and instruction thereby to be obtained from the 
critical study of it. 



PAET II. 

On the Difference between the Style of the Penta- 
teuch AND THAT OF THE LATER BOOKS OF THE OLI> 

Testament. 

If the man, whose business it is to interpret the sacred Scriptures? 
can read them only through the medium of a translation, he cannot 
form a confident judgment upon any interpretation which is founded 
upon a peculiar rendering of the original ; and he is, in consequence, 
in a great measure, at the mercy of others ; and even when his views 
are correct, he cannot submit them to those whom it is his business 
to instruct with that satisfaction which one skilled in the original 
language can do. 

Another advantage of the perusal of the Scriptures in the original 
arises from the close attention requisite for that purpose. For a long 
time the attention of the Hebrew student must be directed to every 
word, phrase, and sentence; and he thus becomes more thoroughly 
acquainted with the contents of the sacred volume than is ordinarily 
acquired by reading a translation. The English reader often passes 
carelessly, or entirely over portions of the word of God which appear 
to him less interesting or profitable than others, but the student 
who would master the whole of the Hebrew Scriptures, can pass over 
nothing. He must read the whole over and over again, and he is 
thus likely to possess a thorough knowledge of their contents, and to 
direct attention to, and to derive instruction from, what the reader 
of a translation would either overlook or fail to appreciate. 

If the student views the principles and structure of the Hebrew 
language with a philosophical eye, he will be able to analyse the 
various operations of mind among the Hebrews by its various ex- 
pressions of thought — to investigate the manner in which it forms 
its conceptions from the means which it employs to convey them, 



lxiv INTRODUCTION. 

and thus to trace back the stream of language to the fountain from 
which it flows. Attention to the principles of the Hebrew language, 
will likewise contribute greatly to the student's advancement in the 
study of universal grammar, and by a comparison of its structure 
with that of other languages, the study will become an exercise of 
the judgment, and not as it frequently is, little else than a mere 
exercise of memory. 

By the perusal of the Scriptures in the original, the student will 
be enabled to form a judgment upon the peculiarities of style of the 
different writers. The Scriptures are professedly written by different 
individuals, and at widely distant periods of time, and hence there 
are differences of style which are not discernible in a translation. 
There are, indeed, differences of style which arise out of differences 
of subject, which are quite perceptible to an English reader. There 
are others, however, of which an English reader has no conception. 
By attention to the Hebrew style of the Scriptures, the student can 
institute a comparison between the books of Moses and those of suc- 
ceeding periods, and particularly those of the era of the Babylonish 
captivity. In this exercise, he will find in the Pentateuch, and parti- 
cularly in Genesis, examples of early forms which go under the name 
of Archaisms, which are unknown among the later writers — words 
there used which afterwards fell into desuetude, and great variations 
of meaning in the same words in the earlier and later writers. He 
will discover in Genesis many words of Egyptian origin, descriptive 
of objects peculiar to Egypt, and illustrative of Egyptian manners 
and customs, which show the writer's intimate and thorough know- 
ledge of that country. The difference between the style of Moses 
and the later writers of the Old Testament, is, indeed, not so great as 
that between authors in a modern language, during the same, or 
even a much shorter period of time. The language itself is much 
less plastic than those of Greece and Rome, or of those of modern 
times, which the Greek and Latin languages have so highly contri- 
buted to extend and refine ; from this cause, and from the tenacity 
of Eastern nations to old forms and usages, and from the bar that 
their religious polity presented to free and unrestrained intercourse 
between the Jews and other nations, the language remained more 
stationary than it would have done in other circumstances. Not- 



INTRODUCTION. lxv 

withstanding all this, the attentive student will perceive in the later 
Hebrew style, the rise of words, idioms, and phrases unknown in the 
times of Moses, the necessary result of the advancement in civiliza- 
tion, political changes, commercial enterprise, intercourse with 
foreigners, and other causes. A difference of style may hence be 
expected, and is accordingly found, in the writings of those who 
lived posterior to Moses, even long before the period of the Baby- 
lonish captivity. But during that period and afterwards, the Hebrew 
style generally becomes so corrupt, that neither the book of Genesis, 
nor indeed any part of the Pentateuch can, with any show of reason, 
or probability, be ascribed to Ezra or any of Ms contemporaries (as 
has been maintained in several recent German publications), or 
indeed, any of the books professedly written previously to the Baby- 
lonish captivity. A critical examination of the style of Isaiah, will, 
I think, prove it to have been written a considerable time posterior 
to the Pentateuch, and previously to the captivity; and, upon these 
grounds, a very powerful argument may be raised to prove that 
Isaiah's predictions were uttered and recorded long anterior to their 
fulfilment, and that he spake as " he was moved by the Spirit of 
God." The same argument is applicable to the other prophecies in 
the same circumstances, and the same conclusion necessarily follows. 
In conducting such investigations, great attention should be paid to 
the chronology of words, in which I include not only the eras at 
which new words arose, and old ones fell into desuetude, but also 
the dates or periods, in which old words acquired modifications and 
changes in their original meanings. By means of the careful study of 
the Hebrew style, which indeed cannot be fully mastered without an 
acquaintance with some of the cognate languages (a very easy task 
after the acquisition of the Hebrew), arguments may be raised of a 
very satisfactory kind in favour of the genuineness of the different 
books of Scripture, and by which the composition of many of the 
books may be confined to particular periods, out of which they can- 
not be removed. 

The style of Genesis is extremely simple. Considering the pro- 
bable sources from which Moses received the materials for writing it, 
and its extreme antiquity, w T e may expect indications of that anti- 
quity in old forms of words and syntax indicative of language in a 

/ 



lxvi INTRODUCTION. 

state of infancy. These peculiarities go under the name of Archa- 
isms. If there were family records kept by the patriarchs, which is 
probably the case, and if from these Moses drew his materials for 
writing the book of Genesis, certain varieties of style may be 
expected from the circumstances in which the writers were placed, 
and the subjects of which they were treating. On the one hand we 
have particular allusions to manners and customs in Mesopotamia, 
and to the habits and usages of nomadic life in that country ; on the 
other, references are made to the constitution of the government, to 
the policy, and to the manners and customs of Egypt. Hence might 
be expected, in both these cases, the introduction of words applicable 
only to such descriptions as are not likely to be found elsewhere, and 
of words entirely foreign. From these causes, the style of Genesis 
has acquired a peculiar character which may be called patriarchal. 

Of the archaisms that are to be noticed, are 7W7\ be thou, for PlVl; 
n|?1 a child, for I^J ; J^Hft they are, fern, for rfrW); |$j£l they 

T 

draw near, fern, for njB^F) ; fcOH she, for KVl. These are archa- 
isms as respects forms of words. 

In the third part of this Introduction, I have shewn traces of the 
Hebrew language without distinction of gender, which could in that 
case be only ascertained by the context. These traces may be 
expected and are found in the earliest Hebrew writings. Vestiges 
of this may be seen in the Hebrew, and indeed in all languages in 
nouns of the common gender, such as yJbH a male or female camel ; 
*\)& a bull or cow, etc. The inconvenience from the want of dis- 
tinction of gender, is, however, felt more strongly in the Hebrew 
than in languages which abound in adjectives, whose terminations 
mark the gender of the substantives. Owing to the poverty of the 
Hebrew in adjectives, perspicuity required such distinctions, which 
were marked in two ways. The first, and probably the earliest, by 
separate words for the masculine and feminine, thus *))tiH a male ass, 
pfJX a female ass ; ^tf a father, DK a mother, etc. As this mode of 
the distinction of sex would necessarily increase the number of voca- 
bles, it probably on that account fell into disuse, and the distinction by 
termination was substituted in its stead. It is scarcely proper to speak 
of such words as 7^ a female camel, and |in& as archaisms; they 
do, however, exhibit grounds for the support of the theory in 



INTRODUCTION. Ixvii 

regard to gender, which is given in the third dissertation. The 
violations of concord between nouns and verbs of different genders, 
of which many instances are found in Genesis, are generally accounted 
for by grammarians per archaismum. Thus f]l a garden, masc. has 
the pronominal affix referring to it in the fern, in Gen. ii. 15. In 
like manner, the fern, personal pronoun fc^Pl she, is often to be read 
for the masc. fr^M he. — See Schrced. lnstit , sect. viii. reg. 123 (b.). 
Many such anomalies have been pointed out in the Analysis. 

Another peculiarity, exhibiting a difference between the earlier and 
the later Hebrew style, is the frequency in the former, and particu- 
larly in the book of Genesis, of the usage of the affix called Pi locale. 
That affix has the meaning of ward=towa?*ds, to, into, and the like; 
e. g. POTTI to Dothan, Pl-p^V^ towards, to, into Egypt ; H^K to, 
into, towards the land. For this primitive usage, found in the book of 
Genesis about one hundred and thirty times, are occasionally substituted 
the prepositions 7K and *7£ ; and sometimes the word is without either 
a preposition or Pi locale. The latter usages are found in Genesis but 
very seldom when compared with that of the PJ locale. I have here to 
observe that the preposition 7 which was afterwards substituted for 
the PI locale, is not once found in Genesis ; and further, that the 
usage of the P| locale is much more frequent in Genesis than in any 
other book of the Old Testament. With some of the later writers, 
indeed, it seems to have fallen into desuetude. It is not found once 
in Ezra, although there are many places in that book where it might 
have been expected (see chapters i. 11, iii. 1, iii. 8, viii. 31, 
viii. 32, etc.). 

In the English language three different forms are used when two 
substantives come together, signifying different things. We either 
place the former noun in the possessive case, as Cicero's orations ; or 
we transpose the words and use a preposition, as the orations of Cicero, 
or we place the two nouns in juxta-position without any change 
whatever upon their forms, and hence make a sort of compound 
words, as iron-side, sheep-shank, butter-milk, etc. In Hebrew, the 
nouns are either placed in juxta-position sometimes with, and some- 
times without any change in the word that precedes, or a preposition 
is used, as in English. The former is what is called the construct 
state, and the tendency is to run both words into one, so as to present 

/2 



lxviii INTRODUCTION. 

one definite idea, which is nearly equivalent to a compound word in 
the Indo-European languages, as in the case of Agricola in Latin, 
and (&otti$^md)t, fear of God, in German. In Hebrew, the vowels 
of the word said to be restricted or in regimen, are shortened or lost, 
as far as perspicuity will allow (see Gram. arts. 55, 92, 93). Thus, 
niJT ^5^ (d'bhar yhovah), word of God, from "\^ (dd-bhar), and 
PliiT ^yi (dibh-re yhovah), words of God, from D^l^.. In these 
cases, the latter noun is added for the purpose of defining, or other- 
wise qualifying that preceding it (Professor Lee's Gram. art. 143); 
and their combination affords the idea of proprietorship, materiality, 
peculiarity, or the like, that exists between them (id. art. 217, 8). It is 
here to be observed that the changes of the vowels and final letters in 
the former or specified noun, are simply the result of the close con- 
nection between the two words, and are by no means essential to the 
relations which they bear to each other, since this is accomplished by 
position alone, and without any change whatever in the specified 
noun. — See Nordheimer's Grammar, art. 794. 

This construct state I consider the earliest and simplest mode of 
pointing out the relations of property, etc. between the nouns; but 
the same objects are attained likewise in Hebrew, and in some cases 
with greater precision by the preposition 7 to, for, in reference to, as 
respects, etc. ; thus, the expression T^Sibn *Q signifies waters of the 
deluge, which covered the earth; while yfotj? D^!l is the waters 
for producing a deluge (Gen. ix. 15); and there is likewise more 
precision in the expression pfft&T) sttfo&fo to the left hand, or to 
the north of Damascus than in p&fifl /Nfc^p; the prep. 7 marking 
the relative position of the places more distinctly than is done when 
the words are in the construct state, and pointing out that Hobah was 
situated to the north as regards Damascus (Gen. xiv. 15). In such ex- 
pressions as day of the month, year, etc., the prep. 7 and not the con- 
struct state is used as $*YPD DV day to (of) the month. The relation 
of property, etc., usually expressed by words in the construct state, is 
not in this case so obvious, and hence the other form is used. In many 
cases, however, there is no perceptible difference between the two forms 
of expression. Thus 7K7 JIlJD (Gen. xiv. 18), and 7N }Jl2 express 
exactly the same idea, namely, a priest of God. So '1-11 JVJ/ DPH 
(Gen. xx. 18), is exactly equivalent to JT3 DJV) wombs of the house; 



INTRODUCTION. lxix 

andlb^> 13ty(Gen.xli. 12), to^l ^ff TJlJi [servant of 'the captain. In 
those cases where there is no difference of meaning between the forms, 
the preference of the one to the other would doubtless be frequently 
regulated by the taste of the writer ; still, from a very extensive in- 
duction of facts, I am led to the conclusion, that the use of the prep. 
7, instead of the construct state, is found to be much more frequent 
when the ideas intended to be conveyed are precisely the same, in 
the later than in the earlier books of the Old Testament, and that 
this is a mark of the later style. The following are usages with the 
preposition, taken from the book of Ezra, in all of which cases I 
apprehend Moses would have used the construct state. Thus fc^fc^ 
iTTirvS a prince to (of) Judah (Ezra i. 8), for TT\T\\ NW and 
aniSD^a the vessels to (of) gold (Ezra i. 11), for Zfth ^3, which 
see in Ex. xi. 2. DH2j? ""^£ ^ a hundred as regards talents, i. e. 
a hundred talents (Ezra viii. 26, 27), for D*")33 T\#fo or T\tifo, see 
Analysis No. 562. 7^7 vJDGPM by the weight to (of) every (one), 
(Ezraviii.34)for ^n S^ft?, and T\\2th D^fcO heads to (of) the 
fathers is used very frequently in the later writers for JTQ&n ^fcO. 
The examples already quoted from Genesis prove, that both forms 
are there used without any difference in meaning. My argument 
rests upon the extension of the usage of the preposition 7 5 and upon 
its frequency in the later writers, where in Genesis and even 
throughout the whole of the Pentateuch the construct state is found, 
and I have no desire to press any argument beyond its legitimate 
extent. 

As a further proof of the genuineness of the book of Genesis, 
drawn from its style, I shall point out words contained in it, expres- 
sive of common ideas, which are not elsewhere found in the Old 
Testament scriptures. Thus ^H^ window of the Ark(vi. 16) expres- 
sed by }1?PI (in chapter viii. 6) which is the ordinary word, see 
Analysis, No. 675. ^)T] trained, a military term, in xiv. 14 ; the root 
is not uncommon, but not in this sense. 7tiH a young pigeon (xv. 9). 
This word is used in Deut. xxxii. 11 to express the brood, i. e.. the 
unfledged brood of eagles, but no where else. fi£?n a leathern bottle 
for holding wine, etc. (xxi. 15, 19); ^jlbft drawers of (a bow) 
(xxi. 16); &W¥ a woman's veil, (xxiv. 65); ^fcp^jHil cause, or give 
me to eat (xxv. 30); E^J^ a sort of dry measure, (xxvi. 12), 



lxx INTRODUCTION. 

no doubt then well known; )p&yjyn contended (xxvi. 20), p^J?. 
contention (id) ; Pn35 a swor d> Greek fid^atpa, see Analysis, 
No. 3265. v vDPl refreshed, by some rendered red (xlix. 12) ; 
WfiBWfo borders, 'boundaries (xlix. 14).— See Anal. 3318 and 3319. 
These words express ideas so common, and so frequently occurring 
in the other parts of the Old Testament, that I cannot help thinking 
that they must have fallen into desuetude even as early as the days 
of Moses, and that they are peculiar to what has been called the 
patriarchal style. 

The following words which are peculiar to Genesis are expressive 
of objects less common; and the words are consequently less likely 
to be found elsewhere — thus, p$ti with }3 filius possessionis, he 
who was about to possess or inherit Abraham's property, xv. 2. — 
See Anal. Nos. 1267 and 1268. D^D a ladder (xxviii. 12); Sfr 
hot springs, according to Professor Lee, water (xxxvi. 24) ; HfcO} 
storax (xxxvii. 25); £)/ ladanum (xxxvii. 25), and (xliii. 11); D\5tDS 
nuts (xliii. 11). 

The words which follow are peculiar only in form or meaning, 
cognate forms and the same words with different meanings being 
found in other books of the Old Testament. One or two of these, 
however, are found in the other books of Moses, e. g. E)p\ substance 
(vii. 4); also in (Deut. xi. 6), root D^lp to stand ; *lp cold (viii. 22) ; 
cognate and common word, /Tip; p?*1 and drew out (xxiv. 14), only 
used as a military term in Genesis, as is remarked by Havernick; 
)fe>V purposed, determined, of the form DP (xi. 6) ; cognate and common 
word QfoT ; T^Tty pleasure, Gr. r)$6vn, (Gen.xviii. 12), root HJ? Eden, 
delight. J&^JJ a furnace (xix. 28, also Exod. xix. 8, 10, and xix. 18), 
root B05 subdued, because it melts or subdues metals. Tlvfi thy 
quiver, according to some a sword (xxvii. 3), root Pi /ft suspended. 
rn)bT signifies, 1. song — 2. What is celebrated in song, Gr. aol$Lfjuo$ — 
3. choicest productions of a country, in which last sense it is found in 
xliii. 11, but no where else; root "ifoT sang. JVlD covering (xlix. 11), 
usual form JV|D5. root HD5 covered, the first radical being removed 

; " T T ° 

by aphaeresis. The above I regard as forms and meanings of words 
peculiar to the patriarchal style. 

The following are words found only in Genesis, and are descriptive 
of incidents in Jacob's life during his connection with Laban, and of 



INTRODUCTION. lxxi 

manners and customs in Padan Aram. These are D v'lWM wrestlings, 
from trie Hebrew root 7H3 twisted (Gen. xxx. 8) ; "Df endowed, and 
H3.T a dowry (xxx. 20) ; 75] cohabited with (xxx. 20) ; *\h]} striped, 
streaked (xxx. 35, 39, xxxi. 8, 10, 12) ; compare *7pJJ bound 
(xxii. 9); *\$K happiness (xxx. 13), other forms of this word are 
quite common ; D^lPl dark coloured — in the Auth. Vers, broivn, 
(xxx. 32) ; XO the almond tree (xxx. 37) ; 7¥£ Peeled, and M17^5 
peelings (xxx. 37); tOPH a watering trough (xxx. 38, [41), also in 
(Exod.ii.16); fill^p^? bound, wellknit, comp act, firm, strong (xxx. 41). 
The root Ifc^D bound, is not uncommon, but the word is only used 
here in the sense of strong ^ D\3/& divisions, parts, times (xxxi. 7). 
The root H^fo numbered, is not uncommon. *\% tne handaj, sella 
camelina (xxxi. 34); and H^ the ischiatic nerve (xxxii. 33). *\tf 
NnHn^ acervus testimonii, are Chaldee words used by Laban where 
Jacob uses *T$? 7^ Galeecl (xxxi. 47). 

The following are words used only in Genesis in the description 
of incidents in Egypt, which are either of Egyptian origin, or 
Hebrew roots, and forms which subsequently fell into desuetude, 
thus 1HD prison or round-house (xxxix. 20) ; toPlt? squeezed (xl. 11); 
fite^n^' blighted (xli. 6, 23), there exist, however, compounds 
of &TW, of which this is the pass. part, kal, in other parts of Scrip- 
ture. fi1J&3¥ dry, blighted (xli. 23) ; *T)^ incline the head 
(xli. 43)— see Prof. Lees Lex.; MnntoX a sack (xlii. 27) ; fc^Pt 
embalmed, and D^tpjH embalmed, past participle of the former (1. 2, 3) ; 
*\&\ a river, in the singular, with one exception, applied to 
the Nile, and its plur. always to its tributaries, and fctflPltf Nile 
grass (xli. 2), are doubtless Egyptian words, but are not confined to 
Genesis. 

The words and other peculiarities of style which have been point- 
ed out, form, I conceive, the basis of an argument which has yet to 
be more fully developed, in proof of the genuineness of the book of 
Genesis. Let the intelligent reader judge whether, from the peculiarity 
of the expressions used in describing the incidents in Mesopotamia 
and Egypt, recorded in Genesis, a good argument might not be 
raised corroborative of the truth of the facts related, namely, that 
the individuals referred to did reside in Egypt and Mesopotamia, as 
there recorded, and that the incidents mentioned are true. 



lxxii INTRODUCTION. 

The following observations are designed to shew, that between the 
era of Moses and David the style of the Hebrew language underwent 
a manifest change. The manners and customs of the Israelites must 
have been, to a certain extent, altered, as the nation advanced in 
civilization. The Hebrew language must have likewise been, to a 
certain extent, affected by the situation and circumstances of the 
Canaanitish nations, by whom the Israelites were surrounded ; with 
whom they were almost continually engaged in war ; by whom they 
were frequently kept under military subjection; by whose idolatries 
they were so often corrupted ; and with whom they so often kept up 
a forbidden and demoralising intercourse. The Canaanitish nations 
seem to have made considerable improvements in their political and 
social condition, between the periods in which allusions are made to 
them in Genesis, and those in which they are spoken of in the other 
books of the Old Testament, up to the era of David. Their proximity 
to the great and flourishing cities of Tyre and Sidon, their commercial 
relations with these cities, and with Babylon and the East, and probably 
too with Egypt, must have greatly tended to their improvement, both 
political and social. We find them accordingly dwelling in fenced ci- 
ties, using horses and chariots of iron as instruments of war, and with 
evidently well equipped and well disciplined armies. There are in- 
cidental circumstances mentioned in the history, which make it appear 
that they had made considerable advancement in architecture and 
the fine arts, and that they possessed many of the luxuries of life, 
which there is no probability that they did at the time they are 
referred to in the book of Genesis. There is also reference made to 
their wealth in gold, silver, raiment, and jewels, and to their advance- 
ment in husbandry, in vine-raising, in fencing their fields (Numb. xxii» 
14) and the like. The connection between the Israelites and these 
nations, which has been adverted to, rendered frequent allusions to 
them in the sacred writings indispensable, in the period to which I at 
present refer; and the new circumstances in which the Israelites 
were placed after their settlement in the land of Canaan, gave rise 
in consequence to new ideas and to new expressions, which I contend 
constitute a difference between the style of the Pentateuch and that 
of the books of Judges and Samuel. 

The following expressions are given in illustration of what has 



INTRODUCTION. lxxiii 

been now advanced. They relate in the first place to ornaments for 
the person. Thus, *)}?}$ JVn&? a Babylonish garment (Josh. vii. 21); 
W5*lXn "H^l? the purple garments worn by the kings of Midian 
(Jud. viii. 26); J?5¥ a dyed garment, cog. yj^ dipped (Jud. v. 30); 
TttfoWn the coverlet which Jael spread over Sisera (Jud. iv. 18); 
this is a new word nowhere else used; but whether it is expressive 
of the same article as that expressed in the Pentateuch by PH/p^H 
the Hyke or plaid, or an article of superior quality, it is perhaps 
impossible to say. D^"lP!&? crescent-shaped ornaments, small moons 
(Jud. viii. 21, 26, also Isaiah iii. 18). Hl^t?} ear drops, or round 
ornaments, drops attached to the ear, or fastened together like strings 
of pearls, from C]fcp3 dropped as dew (Jud. viii. 26, Isa. iii. 19). 
fiipJS some sort of chains, described as worn about camel's necks by 
way of ornament (Jud. viii. 26). 

The following are architectural allusions; thus, PTlpfcSPl n*7ty # 
chamber of cooling, refreshing — a summer parlour (Jud. iii. 20, 24 
only); JTTTpjSn the porch of the palace of Eglon, king of Moab 
(Jud. iii. 23), so called from the rows of columns supporting it, see 
D*TTD rows, ranks, and cog. T\TT)P id. ^$Nt a latticed window 
(Jud. v. 28) ; the words used in Genesis for apertures for the admis- 
sion of light are *H¥ and |1wl ; PI3$/ a supper chamber (1 Sam.ix. 
22) afterwards commonly used to express a chamber or cell in the 
temple. IT^V a tower, some part of the T^Jp tne generic word 
(Jud.ix. 46— 49). 

The following are words expressive of articles of food and of 
household furniture, not used by Moses. p^Jjp broth (Jud. vi. 19,20) 
and only there; 7T?¥ or /vV some kind of cake (Jud. vii. 13); 
7£DD some kind of bowl or dish (Jud. v. 26, vi. 38); feSTOJp a mortar 3 
also a hollow place (xv. 19); 1t§ a flask for oil (1 Sam. x. 1 ; 
'II^X some sort of cup (2 Sam. vi. 19). 

The following are common ideas expressed in the books written 
between the eras of Moses and David, for which different expressions 
are used in the Pentateuch, thus, ^toPH 7$?p HJVPl an ^ s ^ e 
alighted from the ass (Jud. i. 14), with which compare 7^/p /hft) 
7/BHn and she alighted from the camel (Gen. xxiv. 64); D^D^' spoilers 
from DpS^ spoiled (Jud. ii. 14), earlier word TT^l (Deut. iii. 7, Gen. 
xxxiv. 29), and also in the later books ; *lfcO a skin for wine, milk, etc., 



Ixxiv INTRODUCTION. 

(Josh, ix., 13). probably a word learned by Joshua from the Canaan - 
ites; H5n id. (Gen. xxi. 15, 19) and there only; ^QgJ a breaking of 
a dream, an interpretation (Jud. via. 15), p^HS is the word nsed by 
Moses from "TflS interpreted (Gen.xl. 5); pjjjfcj was gathered together, 
was summoned (Jud. vii. 23, 24). This is the niph. form of pj?¥ 
cried, called out, and the above meaning of the niphal arises very 
naturally out of the primary idea in the word. I mention it here 
simply because Moses never uses it when he speaks of summoning 
the congregation of the children of Israel, but always the word 
bnp} tne niph. of /tip assembled, while he frequently uses pj£¥ and 
its compounds in their primary acceptation. Un? signifies a flame, 
fern, form n^H? (Numb. xxi. 28). In Jud. iii. 22, 2n? signifies a 
species of short pointed knife or weapon, so called from its similarity 
of appearance to a point of flame. )%T\\ celebrate (Jud. v. 11 and 
xi. 40), and no where else in the Old Test., !flV id. (Gen. xlix. 8); 
D^H the sun (Jud. viii. 13), $12$ id., the word always used by 
Moses. JT*13 /cW, mea/ (2 Sam. xiii. 5) ; 75& and 7pK£ are the 
words used in the Pentateuch; TFPMfft a present (1 Sam. ix. 4) only, 
}flJb, njFlfc and PD^S id. (Gen. xxxiv. 12, Numb, xviii. 6, 7, and 
Gen. xxxiii. 11); ^$ an error (2 Sam. vi. 7), Ptt3E? id. (Lev. iv. 2, 
Numb. xxv. 27), etc., and T\$ti id. once (Gen. xliii. 12); H^p 
lamentation (2 Sam. i. 17), 7^ id. (Gen. xxvii.41, and 1. 10), and 
}Jp? lamented (2 Sam. iii. 33), Hgp id. (Gen. xxiii. 2); Hpl^ a bough 
(Jud. ix. 48, 49), niS3 pi. of J|3 id. (Lev. xxiii. 40), and tJJJJ 
id. (Lev. xxiii. 40). 

I only notice one other usage which is unknown in the patriarchal 
style, and which is only found once in the Pentateuch, but which is of 
frequent occurrence in the other books of the Old Testament. I 
allude to the usage of the numeral ^111^ one, as an indefinite article. 
Thus— nn^ I? a heap (Josh. iii. 13); ^PIK Tfif? a torch (Jud. 
xv. 4); nn^ B^JTlS a fl ea (1 Sam. xxiv- 14) etc. This idiom has 
been frequently introduced into the New Testament, e.g. ctvktjv 
fjbiav, a fig tree for, nva (Matt. xxi. 19); /nia Traihicncr), a maid 
servant for Tt? (Matt. xxvi. 69); /ila yj]pa, a widow for rt? (Mark 
xxiL 42), etc. 

I could without difficulty multiply such instances, but what has 
been advanced appears to me to be sufficient to prove the rise of new 



INTRODUCTION. lxxv 

words and alterations in the meanings of old ones during the period 
intervening between the eras of Moses and David; and, likewise, 
that a considerable advancement in civilization must have taken 
place in the Land of Canaan subsequently to the eras of the 
Patriarchs and of Moses ; and that between the style of the books of 
Moses and the styles of Judges and Samuel, there is a marked 
difference. 

I shall now illustrate the difference between the earlier and the later 
Hebrew styles by a comparison of the books of Moses and Ezra. If 
the result is successful, the assertion made by some of the recent 
objectors against the genuineness of the Pentateuch — namely, that 
the whole or the greater part of it was written by Ezra, will be shown 
to be groundless. The book of Ezra consists of only ten chapters, 
and about the half of it is written in Chaldee. The Hebrew part of 
it treats of subjects which furnish little scope for such an investiga- 
tion ; still sufficient materials will be furnished to show the extreme 
improbability of Ezra being the author of the books referred to 
Moses. Ezra himself disclaims their authorship several times, referr- 
ing to the " law written by Moses, the man of God" (chap. iii. 4, 
vi. 18); and appeals to that law and makes quotations from it, as his 
warrant for compelling the priests, the princes of Israel, and others, 
to put away their strange wives, and the children begotten by 
them. 

I am to observe, in the comparison between the usages of Ezra 
and those of Moses, that the names of certain weights, coins, vessels 
of the tabernacle, or utensils for ceremonial observances, and of 
rulers and magistrates are different; and also that the grammatical 
forms, and certain idioms, and the meanings of words and phrases 
are likewise different; and that this book contains many words of 
Chaldee origin, unknown in the language previously to the Baby- 
lonish captivity. 

In Ezra we have D^M*T5 d ? ' ac h ms i Gr. Bpd^fir] (ii. 69) Q*J3*YTO 
id. (viii. 27); D^ft pounds, Gr. fivd, Lat. mina (ii. 69). These 
words, the names of weights or coins, are unknown in the Scriptures 
in Moses' time. So XHEHnn the Tirshatha — the name of an office 

t t ; ■ — 

held by Nehemiah (ii.63, Neh. vii. 65, 70); niin3#ot;eni0rs(viii.36), 
D\3-lp (ix. 2) rulers are names of offices applied only during the era 



lxxvi INTRODUCTION. 

of the Babylonish captivity, and unknown in the times of Moses, 
being evidently words of foreign origin. The following are words 
expressive of the names of vessels or implements connected with the 
temple service, unknown in the days both of Moses and Solomon. 
v£p*)j£$ chargers, probably vessels for receiving the blood of the 
slaughtered victims (i. 9), D^JD/Plft slaughtering knives (i. 9), and no- 
where else. The earlier word is 1t?3X$ (Gen. xxii. 10), ^IM 
vessels of some kind, probably with covers, from ^§3 covered (viii, 27). 
The word ^iM is used by Moses to signify hoar frost, from its 
covering the surface of the ground. 

I have already adverted to certain grammatical forms common in 
the writings of Moses, that either are not found in the book of 
Ezra, or shew a tendency towards desuetude. Of these is the Pi 
locale, which is found about one hundred and thirty times in the 
book of Genesis, and not once in the book of Ezra, although there 
are about fifteen cases in which this form might have been looked 
for. In all these cases the simple form of the word, or the preposi- 
tions 7 or 7$ are used instead of the old form n ; thus, instead of 
PlJbvK^*V to, unto, or towards Jerusalem, are found D/fe^T (iii. 8), 
B^T% (vii. 9), or thmyh (i. 3, ll), but never Tg as in 
Genesis. Indeed, from the book of Genesis downward, there seems 
to be a tendency towards the disuse of the Pi locale. The tendency 
of the style of Ezra towards the less frequent usage of what is called 
the construct state of nouns, and the substitution of the prep. 7 in 
its stead, have already been pointed out, as in the case of ^H-P Dv5 
the vessels to (of) gold (i. 11), instead of ^PI-TPl *73. 

The following are forms of words, grammatical forms, and idioms, 
different from those in use in the time of Moses. fn^S service, 
slavery (ix. 8) ; old form JTlhg. ^H^? of a gold colour (viii. 27), 
only used here, from SPl¥, cogn. 2^1 gold, the old form; JVJPI HT 
this house (iii. 12), old grammatical form PlJPl JV3P7 > D^w-Jil DTlKft 
(viii. 4), lit. two hundred the males, two hundred males, for DTlND 
DnDT. The form D^^S PlKfc (viii. 26) for ilRB or 0^33 'flKib 
a hundred talents, has been already pointed out. ^fcO Pi /]$? / ^2T\ 
(our iniquities) have increased over (our) head (ix. 6); this use of 
TD^fu? as a prep, is, I believe, unknown in the earlier books of 
Scripture. 



INTRODUCTION. lxxvii 

The following expressions are idiomatical. ')%) HjY ^7 TTD 
to give us a nail or pin in his holy place, i. e. a sure interest, or a firm 
and settled habitation (ix. 8); H|"^ nZft from mouth to mouth, 
i. e. from extremity to extremity, from one end to the other (ix. 13). 
Moses uses the term. nXjPfc Ujigft PlBfcS Fpbn thou hast with- 
held beneath our iniquities, i. e. hast punished us less than we deserve 
(ix. 13); TH *T"^2 lit- according to the hands, i. e. ordinance of 
David (iii. 10> 

The following are alterations in the meanings of words and ex- 
pressions. With Moses K£0 signifies to bear, to raise, take away, 
and as applied to sin, to forgive. In Ezra in its pi h. form, it sionifies 
to help (i. 4), and to further (viii. 36). Ezra and the later writers 
use N2?J to express the taking of a wife (ix. 2 — 12). Moses in every 
case uses J"|p7- ")T\ £H.nn J,'ij*5 aw^ wfow Me seventh month was come, 
arrived (iii. 1), earlier meaning, touched, touched so as to hurt, struck, 
injured, etc. 

The following are words and expressions in Ezra not found at all 
in Moses. ^JTriPl the being registered, registration (viii. 1 — 3); al- 
most always used in the later, but never in the earlier writers. 
TTI fearing, expressive of a religious emotion (ix. 4); N^* is the 
earlier word to express this emotion. JVJJJJl self-humiliation (ix. 4), 
the root common, but this form is only used here. Jl7i! signifies 1. 
Laid bare, as the ear to receive instruction, or information. 2. Laid 
bare, open, a city, or country, and so conquered it, per. metonom. 3. 
went into captivity, in hiph. carried captive. — Prof Lee's Lex. The 
3rd meaning, extremely common afterwards, was unknown in Moses' 
times. The word used by him is pQgJ; fctfSF] $21$ (ii. 64), four 
myriads, forty thousand. fctflH is not found in the writings of 
Moses, who expresses forty thousand by 5HNJ D^J^HNj $fc$*Vl p^Pl 
the head (the high) priest (vii. 5), called by Moses 711511 jrGH ; 
*V$¥ a he-goat (viii. 35), earlier wordt^fi; ny*}fo jurisdiction, pro- 
vince, from the earlier word |^ to judge, is a form that is not found 
in the earlier writers (Esth. i. 1, 22). 

The following are words and forms which were borrowed from 
Chaldea.— ^Sk or rVDSft rwfe(viii.l); JVBh grant (iii. 7); tfijfzSb 
harassing (iv.4) ; JJBH3 copy (vii. 11); j]fi^ letter, epistle (vii. 11); 
*£H commissions, laws (viii. 36); D^ift appointed (x. 14) from jDj 



lxxviil INTRODUCTION. 

time, season, a Chaldee word; D^nb interpreted (iv. 7); ta )|?3 
treasurer (i. 8) ; D^T^IlfrS chief satraps (viii. 36). The two latter 
are names of Persian officers. 

I might have pursued this subject further, and have shewn that 
the styles of Moses and Ezra, as exhibited in the order and arrange- 
ment of words, and in the general manner of the language, are so 
different, as to prove that the Pentateuch and the book of Ezra 
could not have been the works of the same author. I consider this 
unnecessary, it being my conviction that the case has been already 
fully made out. What has been advanced in this and the preceding 
part of the Introduction, in my judgment, forms a cumulative argu- 
ment in favour of the genuineness of the Pentateuch which is impreg- 
nable, and which affords as strong conviction, at least, to my own 
mind, as if the case had been proved by mathematical demonstration. 
How thankful should I be, should my humble efforts prove equally 
instrumental in strengthening the convictions of others on this vital 
question. 



PAET III. 

On the Structure of the Hebrew Language. 

To a philologist the study of the Hebrew language is a subject of 
great interest. It is very simple in its parts, and inartificial in its 
structure. It exhibits many traces of language in its infancy, and 
shews the basis upon which improvements in language generally 
have been constructed; and may hence be rendered instrumental to 
the confirmation, or confutation of the theories of those who have 
philosophized upon the origin and progress of language. 

It is extremely probable that language was originally God- given ; 
and if so, it is conformable to the analogy of God's other proceed- 
ings with his rational creatures that it was bestowed only to such 
an extent as was necessary for man in the circumstances in which he 
was placed; and that the language given was formed upon principles 
of reason, and similar to those which would have commended them- 
selves to human reason, and which would have been adopted by man, 
had language been entirely an invention of his own. 

The principles upon which the Hebrew language appears to be 
founded justify the conjecture that all words were at first names of 
things, and that the noun is the root from whence the verb springs. 
We may readily believe that the parts of speech were at first few, 
and that the methods of expressing the qualities of substances and 
actions would be as simple as possible ; that such words only would 
be adopted, at first, as were indispensably necessary ; that these would 
be constructed upon analogies,, which in some cases, together with 
their reasons, it may now be impossible to trace; and that these 
words, at the outset, would be made to serve as many purposes as 
possible. 

According to this supposition, names would be given to those 
objects which were necessary to man's subsistence, comfort, and 
safety ; to those with which he was most familiar, such as the members 



lxxx INTRODUCTION. 

and organs of the human body; to the irrational animals which most 
engaged his attention ; to the trees and plants with which he was sur- 
rounded, and the like. In some cases, the reasons for assigning names 
to certain objects are not now discoverable; in others, names were as- 
signed from assimilation of the sound of the word to the cry, for exam- 
ple, of the inferior animals, or to other sounds which the words were 
intended to express. Of the former kind may be mentioned such 
words as fcOp (hare), partridge; *))&£ (tsippor), sparrow, or young bird, 
called in the Scottish dialect a cheeper. yy$ (horebh), rnven, the first 
letter of which is pronounced with a very strong guttural sound; of 
the latter kind may be mentioned the English words — rush, crash, 
clatter, groan, growl, shriek, clash, etc. Other words derived new 
meanings either without any, or with slight alterations, from words 
already in existence from analogies, either as regards quality or 
appearance. Thus TJJ the eye, from its moist and pellucid appear- 
ance, is likewise used to designate a fountain ; and Jl^^ the lip (the 
edge or extremity of the mouth); 2. the lip, extremity or border (of 
a garment); 3. the lip, the extremity or shore of the sea. 

The names of qualities, in many cases, are formed only by a slight 
change either in the accent, or form of the word, expressive of the 
substance; and the name of the substance is often used to express 
the name of its quality, by metonymy or other grammatical figure. 
The necessity of the introduction of new words into the Hebrew, 
and most probably into all other languages, is frequently avoided by 
means of the figures metaphora, synecdoche, and metonymia (see Storrii 
Observations, etc., p. 3, et seq.) It may, however, be here remarked, 
that these figures of speech are not grammatical or rhetorical arti- 
fices, but promptings and necessities of nature. 

After names were given to substances and their qualities, means 
must have been adopted for restricting or modifying the names 
common to a variety of objects. This is accomplished, in the first 
place, by new words, as in the case of proper names of men, towns, 
countries, rivers, etc.; in the second place, by the classification of 
animals, plants, etc., into genera and species ; and in the third place, 
by placing words signifying the same thing in juxta-position, in 
order to the limitation of a general term, as the city Jerusalem, the 
prophet Moses ; and by placing words in juxta-position which signify 



INTRODUCTION. lxxxi 

different things, wliicli position is called in the Hebrew, the construct 
state. This construct state is sometimes found without any variation 
whatever in the form of the words so placed, sometimes it exhibits 
a change of the vowel points, and sometimes an alteration in the last 
consonant, apparently for the purpose of euphony; thus, D^^/b *p& 
(erets Mitsrayim), land of Egypt ; E\T?^ pg (lien- e lohim), eye of 
God; PI1!T rniD (torath y'hovah), laio of Jehovah. The absolute 
form of each of these words is, Y*S$, W, and JTliM. 

A similar method is used almost in all cases in Hebrew for de- 
scribing such accidents, qualities, and properties of nouns as are 
described in languages of later origin and of higher refinement, by 
means of adjectives. In describing, for example, accidents, pro- 
perties, or qualities of a horse, such as country, colour, speed, 
strength, etc., the name of the country, etc., is placed immediately 
after the word horse; thus, horse Egypt , horse blackness, horse swift- 
ness, horse strength ; according to our idiom, Egyptian horse, black 
horse, etc. Adjectives, as expressive of the qualities of substances, 
are refinements upon language, and are, comparatively speaking, 
unknown in Hebrew. The feminine gender of what are called 
adjectives, is probably nothing else than another form of the abstract 
noun, adopted either for the sake of variety, or in order to suit the 
termination of the feminine forms of nouns, when gender became 
distinguishable by termination. When the feminine termination T\ — 
is added to *"]& (Sar), a prince, it becomes ftlW (Sarah), a princess. 
The word y\\2 (tobh), is, strictly speaking, an abstract noun, sig- 
nifying goodness-, to which, when the feminine termination Pi — is 
added, as PftltD, it still signifies goodness, and is in many places of 
Scripture construed as an abstract noun ; thus, *FQ1ti3 my goodness, 
Ps. xvi. 2; and PlNHft T^lS lit. goodness of countenance, i.e. of a fair 
countenance (Gen. xxiv. 16). While, therefore, yfiO ^ means lite- 
rally prince goodness, i.e. good prince, PQto TV0 is princess goodness, i.e. 
good princess. The feminine form is generally, though by no means 
always, connected with the feminine noun, so that in those cases 
where abstract nouns have two forms, they bear a close resemblance 
to adjectives of the more cultivated languages, and are probably 
their foundation. 

In the Hebrew language many nouns, both abstract and concrete, 

9 



lxxxii INTRODUCTION. 

have two forms, viz. a masculine and feminine, in many cases 
without any perceptible difference in meaning, and were probably 
introduced for trie sake of variety. Of these we may notice, y*W 
and ny^ hoary hairs, old age ; iy& and Pnj$5> hair ; *T^fi and 
tT)ti&!2 that which guards, a watch, guard; D7P! and »lp?D a 
portion ; U*3p and H^5D a circuit ; plW and i\TF\W a choice vine; 
*Jtf and n*5&$ a ship; 1j*jj and PD^ a mfe; Dip. and 7\1T§> front 
part, the east, Anal. No. 257 ; IfoK and JTT??^ d won?, Anal. No. 538. 
Many other double forms are mentioned in the Analysis. My 
impression is, that anomalies in the" formation of the plurals of 
nouns, arise out of circumstances connected with these double forms 
of words with the same shades of meaning. In some cases, the 
masculine, and in others, the feminine, fell into desuetude ; and, 
in some cases, the masculine singular of the one, and the feminine 
plural of the other, and nice versa. Upon this ground I would 
account for the masc. noun *1K3 a well, having for its plur. nilNQ 
fern., the masc. plur. D'H&S, ana the fern. sing. rTl^5^ having been 
lost ; so also Pltpri ivheat, fern., D^ft plur. masc. ; so W a name, 
masc, and TufoW plur. fern. ; HJJfo the bowels, fern., D*J?£ plur. 
masc. ; TIJ? shin, masc, HIIIJ? plur. fern. In some cases the fern, 
sing, only is lost, while both forms of the plur. remain ; as, D5f J? a 
bone, masc, D*233fJ} plur. masc, and fflD^S! plur. fern. Upon the 
principle that many words with two forms ordinarily designated 
as adjectives are in reality nouns, many apparent anomalies in 
concord may be accounted for. See HPl^? rest, fern., and HffcD 
good, masc, in Analysis, No. 3321; Gen. xlix. 15. 

The view just given in regard to the mode generally adopted in 
Hebrew of qualifying nouns without adjectives, acquires additional 
probability from the circumstance that several languages have been 
discovered in modern times which are said to have no adjectives. 
Of the same peculiarity traces are discoverable in our own, where 
the same words are used sometimes as adjectives, and sometimes 
as substantives ; in which cases the probability is, from the analogy 
of the Hebrew, that the noun, and not the adjective, was the 
original. Of this usage the following are instances : gold ring, 
coal fire, sea water, ship stores, etc. ; to which may be added such 



INTRODUCTION. lXXXlll 

words as Christian, cold, cunning, divine, liquid, etc. See Mac- 
culloch's English Grammar, p. 26, edit. ix. 

The probability of the correctness of the foregoing theory is 
increased by the fact, that many English nouns of very common 
use have no corresponding adjectives of Saxon origin, the adjectives 
being derived from the Latin. Thus : dog, canine ; breast, pec- 
toral; cow, vaccine; end, final; etc. etc. Ibid. p. 119. 

The following are a few of the examples, pointed out in the 
Analysis, of the method of compensation, by means of substantives, 
for the want of adjectives as qualifying words, viz. : !"©$$ "HTI? 
in a way of truth, i. e.ina true wag, Anal. No. 1969, chap. xxiv. 48, 
*$$? fTTHX? like a garment of hair, i. e. a hairy garment, No. 2039, 
chap. xxv. 25. MfcO?? f\& IKft Jl§^ beauty of figure, beauty of 
countenance, i.e. of a beautiful figure, of a beautiful countenance. 
No. 2289, chap.xxix. 17. n&n§ J"Dfc3 goodness of countenance, 
i.e. of a good, or fair countenance, No. 1905, chap. xxiv. 16. "1JV 
tj£ ^F?!\ ^$? excellency of dignity, and excellency of strength, i. e. 
excelling, etc., No. 3252, chap. xlix. 3. 

The following are similar idioms, taken from the Greek Testa- 
ment : 6 KpiTT\^ tt}? aZuciaS) the judge of injustice, i. e. the unjust 
judge, Luke xviii. 6 ; vlb? rfjs a^airt]^, son of his love, beloved son, 
Coloss. i. 13 ; ahrfKoTT)? ttXovtov, uncertainty of riches, uncertain 
riches, 1 Tim. vi. 17. The following expressions are all founded 
upon Hebrew idioms : ol viol tt)? a7ret#e/a?, the sons of disobedience 
= ol aireiOovvTes, the disobedient, Eph. ii. 2, v. 6 ; ol viol c/xwro? = 
ol irecfxDTLcrfjbevoi, those enlightened, Luke xvi. 8. So a/coros, dark- 
ness, for eaKorco-fiivoL, and (££>?, light, for 7re(f>coTicr/JLevos, Eph. v. 8 ; 
and fj 7T6pirofjLr], the circumcision, for ol TrepiTeTfirnxevoL, Gal. ii. 7, 
8,9. 

Number. 

Hebrew nouns have three numbers, the singular, dual, and 
plural. The dual number does not extend to verbs, as in Greek. 
There are two genders, the masculine and the feminine. A great 
number of cases have been pointed out in the Analysis, in which 
the singular is used instead of the plural, and in which the dis- 
tinctions of gender are not observed. Hence arises the probability 

9 % 



lxxxiv INTRODUCTION. 

that there was originally no distinction by termination between 
either gender or number, and the same is said to be the case with 
several languages of uncultivated nations. " There are only (says 
Lord Monboddo) three barbarous languages, so far as I know, of 
which we have any account published that can be depended upon, 
the Huron, the Galibi, and the Caribbee, of which we have dic- 
tionaries and grammars, so far as it is possible to make a grammar 
of them. With respect to Syntax, the Hurons appear to have 
none at all, for they have not prepositions or conjunctions. They 
have no genders, or cases for their nouns, nor moods for their 
verbs." Origin and Progress of Language, vol. i., book iii. In 
many cases, a plural form is not at all necessary for perspicuity. 
Thus the Hebrew expression, WW D*")^J£ twenty man, is as in- 
telligible as t^SJOK DHBPJJ tiventy men. In all such cases, the 
plurality of the noun is necessarily indicated by the plurality 
inherent in the numeral ; and where there is no numeral, the 
plurality of nouns, without any alteration of their form, may be 
generally ascertained with sufficient clearness from the context. 
The same thing is seen in the vulgar English expression, twenty 
horse, for txoenty horses. As their language improved, the Hebrews, 
in some cases in connection with numerals, gave the plural termina- 
tion ; in others, retained the singular. Thus the numerals between 
two and ten inclusive, take the nouns connected with them in the 
plural ; and those above eleven, take them in the singular ; e. g. 
D^JK y%W seven men, but WW £]7& tifySljS forty thousand man 
(men). I regard the latter as the early, the former as the more 
recent usage. 

Gender. 

There is no distinct form for the gender of the first personal 
pronoun ; in other words, it is of the common gender. The second 
person has a separate form for masculine and feminine, and so has 
the third. In English, the first pers. / is common ; so is the 
second, thou ; but the third has three forms in the singular, he, 
she, it, but only one for the plural, they. We, however, find no 
difficulty from the want of separate forms for the distinction of 
the gender of thou, you, and they, theirs, them. The common 



INTRODUCTION. lxxxv 

gender in all languages, I regard to be a vestige of language 
without gender. In the expression, HDItO jil a good garden, there 
is nothing illogical any more than in 21b jil, for it is as logical to 
call [3 feminine as masculine ; nor is there any thing ambiguous in 
the expression J-ftlD ||, every one knows that it means, a good 
garden. It is, however, ungrammatical if J"l21tD is regarded as an 
adjective. There can be little doubt, however, that grammatical 
concord is a refinement upon original language. In like manner, 
multi res, though ungrammatical, is as logical and intelligible as 
multae res. In English, there is no distinction of gender in 
adjectives or verbs, and no formal distinction in nouns. The dis- 
tinction of gender is only known in English by means of the 
possessive and personal pronouns. 



Case. 
There are no cases in the Hebrew language. 



Comparison. 

Comparison is generally effected in Hebrew by the preposition 
}£? from, which was originally a noun, with the meaning of cutting, 
separation, distinction ; thus, nn^H JVH /2£? E^HJ? lit. cunning 
distinction of every beast of the field , i.e. cunning as distinguished 
from every beast of the field, or cunning from every beast of the 
field, i.e. more cunning than any, the most cunning of all. Gen. iii.l. 
W?J$?. titfbfo Dfc/ 5 ) and a people shall be strong from (as distin- 
guished from) a people, i.e. and one of the two peoples shall be 
stronger than the other. Gen. xxv. 23. Sometimes a comparison 
is made without any intimation of it but what may be gathered 
from the context; thus, TJ?¥ 1%$\ 2*fi lit. and the great shall 
serve the small. Great and small are here used in the sense of 
ma-gnus and parvus in Latin, with natu, i. e. old and young. The 
expression therefore means, and the old (in reference to the other) 
shall serve the young (in reference to the other), i.e. and the elder 
shall serve the younger, there being only two brothers mentioned. 
Gen. xxv. 83. So ?\IT\ 132 his son the old, as distinguished from 
the other, his elder son. 



IxXXvi INTRODUCTION. 



Mode of expressing the Superlative Degree. 

The following are the methods, adopted in Hebrew, for the 
formation of the superlative degree. Sometimes this is done, as in 
the case of the comparative last mentioned, without any change of 
form, the superlative degree being only inferential from the context. 
It can only be known from the context whether T1|Pl i^3 signify 
his elder son, the comparison being made between him and a 
younger, he having only two ; or whether it may mean his eldest 
son, he having more than two. Thus, 71ilPl VFtltf his old, i.e. 
oldest brother, referring to the oldest of Jesse's sons. 1 Sam. xvii. 28. 
In such cases no ambiguity can arise, as the context will always 
shew which degree of comparison is intended. A similar idiom 
is occasionally found in the New Test. ; e. g. irola ivroXy /leydXT], 
which (is) the great commandment, as compared with all the others, 
i. e. fjLeyiaTT], the greatest. There is another form in the New 
Testament which, however, does not resemble the Hebrew idiom, 
in which the comparative is used for the superlative ; thus, 6 Be 
fxel^cov v/jlcdv, Matt.xxiii.il, for fie<yl(TTO^. See also Matt. xiii. 32, 
where the mustard plant is said to become [xel^ov, greater than all 
herbs, i. e. the greatest. It should seem that here the comparative 
is used, because there are, as it were, but two things compared, 
viz., the mustard plant on the one hand, and all other plants on 
the other. 

A superlative sense is expressed in Hebrew sometimes by 
synonymous words in juxtaposition; as, M?§^ **]^ft tenebrae 
obscuritatis; i.e. very thick darkness, Exod. x. 22; sometimes by 
putting the noun to be compared in the plural number, as Hl^D 
sing, death, D^lft plur. very terrible death, Isa. liii. 9 ; WlP sing. 
holiness, Q^k£HD plur. holinesses, most holy; sometimes by the 
repetition of the word, as HID DltD good good, i.e. very good; T\^j}_ 
PttJJ H^ corruption, corruption, corruption, i.e. most corrupt, Ezek. 
xxi. 32 ; nilH^ JTnrn (by reason of) the attacks, attacks, i. e. the 
very violent attacks, Jud. v. 22; DH^S *©J?. « slave of slaves, a 
most abject slave, Gen. ix. 25 ; with which compare 6 (SaaiXevs 
tcov /3aai\eu6vTcov, koi /cvpios tcov KvpievovTcov, Supreme King and 



INTRODUCTION, lxXXVli 

Lord, 1 Tim. vi. 15. Sometimes by the addition of a word signify- 
ing excess, or very, exceedingly, as H&p ^1'tO bonum valde, very good, 
Gen. i. 31 ; sometimes by means of the word "fiD^ firstborn, as 
D*^H ^YDlp firstborn of the poor, in the most abject poverty ; comp. 
TrpcoTOTOKos €K twv veicpcov, firstborn of the dead, i. e. the most 
eminent of all who shall rise from the dead, as it is explained 
immediately afterwards, that he may be in all things irpwrevcov; 
see Col. i. 18; see also ver. 16, and Apoc. i. 5; and Glass. Phil. 
Sac. p. 43. Sometimes by means of words expressive of what is 
rich or fat, as D^PI HI vj J?H the fat of the kidneys of wheat, 
i.e. the richest ox finest of the wheat, Dent, xxxii. 14 ; j&^"j5 a son 
of oil, very fertile, Isa. v. 1. Sometimes by the addition of one of 
the names of God, as /^"TlH ^mountains of God, i. e. very high 
mountains, Psalm xxxvi. 7 ; DTl /5S? J^CW a pri?ice of God, a very 
eminent prince, Gen. xxiii. 6; TWT\\ TVC\ a icind of Jehovah, a very 
strong zcind, Isa. xl. 7, lix. 19 ; see aarelo^ tm ®e<£, fair to God, 
exceedingly fair , Acts vii. 20 ; and Svvara tw Qecu, powerfid to God, 
exceedingly powerful, 2 Cor. x. 4; and Anal. No. 16. Sometimes by 
the addition of the termination H — , as r\fo s $ terror, Jin^^ very 
great terror-, sometimes by means of K prosthetic, as ^J-5 cruel, 
1T5^ most cruel; sometimes by the use of the abstract for the con- 
crete, as njXFl desire, i.e. most desirable, Anal. No. 332; sometimes 
by the prep. 3, as D^J5 i"^*"!? the beautiful among women, i. e. most 
beautiful t Cant. i. 8 ; with which comp. ev\o<yr) /mevr] <rv ev jwat^ly, 
blessed (art) thou among women, i.e. most blessed, Luke i. 28. Some- 
times by words in the construct state, as *VJ?Pl v1*Tll the great 
(ones) of the city, i. e. the greatest ; with which idiom compare 
&2a Oedcov, divine of the goddesses, i. e. most divine, Horn. Iliad, and 
" Sequimur te sancte deorum," i. e. sanctissime. Virg. Eneid. In 
the later style, the superlative was sometimes formed by means of 
the words tt? 1HV, which is equivalent to the Greek fiaKkov r\ ; 

thus, "laa nnv y; : ni^S j?ftr\ yhry_ nh to whom does the 

king delight to do honour more than to me, Esth. vi. 6 ; with which 
idiom compare fia/cdpLov icrri StSovai, fiaXKov tj Xafi/Sdveiv, it is 
blessed to give rather than to receive, i.e. it is more blessed, etc. 
Acts xx. 35. 



lxxxviii INTRODUCTION. 

Pronouns. 

Pronouns are regarded by some grammarians as primary parts 
of speech ; I am inclined to think that this is not the case, but 
their history and derivation, in all languages, are extremely 
obscure. Many passages of Scripture, however, appear to give 
evidence of language without pronouns, which may be regarded 
as traces of the clumsy expressions which the use of pronouns has 
superseded. Of these the following are examples : " They went 
forth to go into the land of Canaan, and into the land of Canaan 
they came," i. e. into it, Gen. xii. 5 ; " And Abram was four- 
score and six years old when Hagar bare Ishmael to Abram," i. e. 
to him, Gen. xvi. 16; "Then Solomon assembled the elders of 
Israel, .... unto king Solomon," i. e. to himself, 1 Kings viii. 1 ; 
" So the king died and was brought to Samaria, and they buried 
the king in Samaria," i.e. him there, 1 Kings xxii. 37 ; " And Abra- 
ham was old, and well stricken in years, and the Lord had blessed 
Abraham," i. e. him, Gen. xxiv. 1 ; " Ye wives of Lamech," i. e. 
my wives, Gen. iv. 23. 

The possessive pronouns in Hebrew are fragments of the per- 
sonal pronouns affixed to words, and are all inseparable. The 
article and the demonstrative and other pronouns are noticed in 
the Grammar, Arts. 98, 99, 100, 101, 127. 

Of the Verb. 

According to our theory, the noun is the root and not the verb ; 
in other words, the noun is prior, in its origin, to the verb. 
Though this position may be disputed, I take it for granted, and 
I think there is much in the Hebrew language to support it. In 
the choosing of terms for expressing action or state of being, we 
may readily conceive that new words would not be employed 
unless when absolutely necessary. We find, accordingly, a very 
simple method resorted to, for the formation of the Hebrew verb, 
which is nothing else but a noun in juxtaposition with another 
noun or pronoun, or connected with an inseparable personal pro- 
noun, so as to express action, suffering, or state of being. This 



INTRODUCTION. lxxxix 

may be illustrated by English examples ; as, man stone, the former 
word expressing the actor, the latter the action. And in man 
stone man, we have the subject, man ; the action, stone ; and the 
object, man. And with personal pronouns, i" stone, we stone, ye 
stone, they stone, I stone John. In the last example, I represents 
the agent, stone the action, and John the object acted upon, or the 
sufferer. It is probable that the suffering of an action was ex- 
pressed in this way in the infancy of language, and not by any 
form similar to what is called the passive voice. In the English, 
German, French, and many other languages, there is no distinct 
form for the passive voice, which is formed by the aid of the 
substantive verb and the past participle, and sometimes by other 
circumlocutions ; as in French, on a out dans Rama des cris, one 
hath heard cries in Rama, i. e. cries were heard. The same was 
probably the case originally in all languages, the passive sense 
coming from a fragment of a word, added to the active form, which 
is not now traceable, or at least not very manifest. In Hebrew, 
the passive voice is often expressed without the aid of the passive 
form ; thus, ^j? ^{3 |5 'J£ wherefore (one) called the well, i. e. 
the well was called, Gen. xvi. 14; compare, koX KaXiaovcri to ovo\xa 
avrov 'Efi/juavov/jX, and (they) shall call his name Emmanuel, i. e 
and his name shall be called, Matt. i. 23. 

In expressing states of being, the same method is employed as 
in the expression of action, namely, by placing the subject in 
juxtaposition with the quality ; as, / cold, implying that I am in 
a state of cold. We find, accordingly, that the Hebrew verbs are 
simply nouns in juxtaposition with other nouns, or incorporated 
with fragments of pronouns, used as their subjects. Between the 
Hebrew verb in its simplest form and the noun, when unconnected 
either with pronominal affixes or prefixes, there was originallv no 
difference but what arose from emphasis or accent, sufficiently 
obvious in spoken language, and, in process of time, from distinc- 
tions required by perspicuity, which were reduced into a regular 
system by means of the vowel points. In English, many nouns 
and verbs are of precisely the same form, and are pronounced 
exactly in the same way; thus, noun hand, verb I hand; noun eye, 
verb I eye; noun look, verb Hook; noun love, verb Hove; etc. 



XC INTRODUCTION. 

Of the Tenses of Verbs. 

The Hebrew verb has two tenses, the present and the past. 
The past tense, according to Prof. Lee, is the concrete noun, con- 
nected with another noun as its subject, or with pronouns affixed. 
There may be said to be no inflection in the Hebrew tenses, 
because the ground form or root undergoes no change. There is, 
however, an appearance of inflection, because the fragments of the 
personal pronouns, which are full and separate in many other 
languages, are here so closely united that the verb and pronoun 
appear to make but one word. 

Of the Preterite Tense. 
Singular. 

The third person singular masculine of the preterite tense of the 
hat or ground form, is the root, as 13$ servant ; as a verb, served. 

The 3 fern, is the ground form, with the ordinary fern, termina- 
tion PI — , as rn3J? Qia-bKdali). 

The 2 masc. is the ground form with a fragment of the pronoun 
MMK thou, masc, as FH3J? (ha-bhad-ta). 

The 2 fern, is the same with a fragment of the pronoun fttf thou, 
fern., as FH3J? (lia-bhadt). 

The 1 com. is the same, with a fragment of the pronoun *JX, or 
of some obsolete form of the first personal pronoun, as *J!H3J£ 
(lia-bhad-ti). 

Plural. 

The third pers. plur. common is the ground form as above, with 
a fragment, J*l, \ or )T\, an almost obsolete form of a plural termi- 
nation of the noun, as ^H^JJ (ha-bh'du). See Prof. Lee's Gram. 
art. 188; Storrii Obs. p. 139 ; and Nordheimer's Hebrew Gram, 
art. 160, p.lll. 

The 2 masc. is the same, viz. the ground form, and a fragment 
of the pronoun QJ^ V e » masc., as DfTDS (Ji a bhad-tem). 

The 2 fern, the same, with a fragment of the pronoun priX ye, 
fern., as ]J!H38 (h< a bhad-ten). 



INTRODUCTION. 



XC1 



The 1 com. the same, with a fragment of the pronoun UlTj ice, 
com., as ^yQS. (h a bhad-nu), 

The form of the preterite is accordingly as under. The ground 
form is given without points, to shew more clearly the principle 
we have been endeavouring to establish. 

Concrete noun, 12$ a servant ; and with nouns or pronominal 
affixes as nominatives, used as a verb, in its simplest form in the 
past tense. 

Singular. 



p» *& 


3 m. 


servant Canaan 


i. e. Canaan served. 


w n-nny 


3f. 


servant Hagar 


i.e. Hagar served. 


T Jjh-nw 


2 m. 


servant thou 


i.e. thou servedst. 


fnxff 


2f. 


servant thou 


i.e. thou servedst. 


tfv-^Dj? 


1 com. 


servant I 
Plural. 


i.e. I served. 


HBO si-nip 


3 com. 


{ the Egyptians 
) servants 


) i. e. the Egyptians 
\ served. 


Dn-nnj; 


2 m. 


servant ye 


i.e. ye served. 


|n-iny 


2f. 


servant ye 


i. e. ye served. 


M-Tiy 


1 com. 


servant ice 


i.e. ice served. 



From the foregoing examples it is evident that the ground form 
of the verb undergoes no change whatever — that it is the same in 
the plural, with the exception of the 3 person, as in the singular 
(the plural pronoun marking the plurality of the verb) — that the 
noun and verb contain the same radical letters, and that it is only 
in consequence of the vowel points that any perceptible difference 
appears between them. In the unpointed system there is none. 
The student, however, is reminded that the 3 pers. plur. common 
is the plur. form of the noun, and has no nominative contained 
within itself, as in the case of the first and second persons, both 
singular and plural. 



Of the Present, commonly called the Future tense. 

The ground form of the present tense is, according to Prof. Lee, 
the abstract noun connected with fragments of the personal 



XC11 INTRODUCTION. 

pronouns as nominatives. In the case of the preterite tense, the 
pronouns are affixed to the ground form, while they are prefixed 
to the present, with this exception, that when the prefixing of the 
whole is inconvenient, part of the fragment is prefixed and part is 
affixed. It is also to be observed, that the pronouns are connected 
with all the persons and numbers of the present tense. 

The ground form of the present is made up of the same radical 
letters as that of the preterite, the difference of form being shewn 
by the vowel points. The abstract noun is also used as the in- 
finitive of the verb. According to the vowel points, the form of 
the preterite is ^35?, that of the present is 1^1$ . 

The 3 sing. masc. of the present is compounded of the ground 
form and a pronominal fragment, so disguised that Professor Lee 
regards it as unknown. Storr, however, holds it to be a fragment 
of &On, of which the ) only is prefixed, and which as a preformative, 
according to Gr. arts. 44, 131 (7/), becomes *; thus, first *T^5> and 
then *D2* {ija- a bhod}. The original letter is retained in |£¥1 ^ e 
hides, Prov. ii. 7, for ]b)£\ ; T?J is likewise considered the old form 
of \?l a boy. 

The 3 sing. fern, is the ground form, with a pronominal prefix, 
which Prof. Lee likewise regards as unknown. It has been held 
by others to be a fragment of the pronoun WT\ she, the first letter 
of which is hardened into Fl, according to a very common principle 
in Hebrew grammar ; thus, ""D5?.5 (ta-h a bhod). 

The 2 sing. masc. is the ground form, with a fragment of the 
pronoun fitf thou, masc. prefixed, as ""D^P (ta-h a bhod). 

The £ sing. fern, is the same, with a fragment of the pronoun 
?ftfc$ thou, fern., part being prefixed and part affixed, as H?yft 
(ta-habh-di). 

The first sing. com. is the same, with a fragment of the pronoun 
*JK /, com., as 1R8& {a-lfbhod). 

Plural. 

The third plur. masc. is supposed to be made up of the third 
sing. masc. *lp?1 , and the almost obsolete plur. termination ) or p, 
as *nt)£\ (yiph-k'du). 

The 3 sing. fern, is supposed to be made up of the 3 sing. fern. 



INTRODUCTION. 



XC111 



*li$?.n and a fragment of the pronoun Pl|n they, affixed; as fiyfatfft 
(ta-h a bhod-?iah). 

The 2 sing, inasc. is supposed to be made np of the plur. termi- 
nation ) or p appended to the 2 sing. fern. *7S2JH, thus ^525. 

The 2 plur. fern, consists of the ground form of the tense and 
fragments of the pron. affix ("DH^ ye, fern., prefixed and affixed, as 
51^122^ (ta-h a bhod-nah). 

The 1 plur. is the ground form, and a fragment of the pronoun 
^X we, as H22j (na-h a bhod). 

It must be owned that the foregoing analysis of the present 
tense is in some cases conjectural. Although, however, there is 
considerable difficulty in tracing the affixes and prefixes, of which 
certain of the persons of this tense are made up, there can be no 
doubt whatever that the tense consists of the ground form we have 
given, and fragments of pronominal affixes, and plural forms. The 
whole is exhibited in the following table. 

Present Tense, 



Of which the abstract noun ^Q2. is 


the ground form. 






Singular. 




"DIM* 


1 com. 


I a serving 


i.e. I serve. 


nny-n 


2 m. 


thou a serving 


i.e. thou servest. 


♦-nsy-n 


if. 


thou a serving 


i.e. thou servest. 


Try-* 


3 m. 


he a serving 


i. e. he serveth. 


nny-n 


3f. 


she a serving 
Plural. 


i. e. she serveth. 


my-) 


1 com. 


we a serving 


i.e. we serve. 


i-n^y-n 


2 m. 


ye a serving 


i. e. ye serve. 


ru-nny-n 


2f. 


ye a serving 


i.e. ye serve. 


l-n^-' 


3 m. 


they a serving 


i.e. they serve. 


m-najMi 


3f. 


they a serving 


i. e. they serve. 



It will be observed, that setting aside the vowel points, the 
concrete noun, the past tense of the simple form of the verb, the 
abstract noun, and the present tense, are all of the same form; for 



XC1V INTRODUCTION. 

the sake of perspicuity, however, they are pointed 15S| concrete 
noun, ^5^ P ast tense, *"D2 abstract noun, and ground form of the 
present tense. The Hebrew corresponds with the English and 
with many other languages, in its having only two simple tenses, 
a past and a present. These tenses were supplemented in the case 
of these languages in the process of cultivation, by means of other 
verbs commonly called auxiliaries, by means of which, time has been 
expressed with much greater precision than by the original tenses. 
The same method has been adopted in the modal formations of 
verbs. From the circumstance that there are only two simple 
tenses in the English language, and no simple forms of moods, 
there can be little doubt that, when that language was in its infancy, 
the offices discharged in the expression of time, by means of the 
auxiliary verbs, were performed by means of these two tenses 
alone ; and even as it is, there would be more propriety in calling 
had loved, shall love, and may love, parts of distinct and separate 
verbs than compound tenses of the same verb. That what we 
have called the present tense in Hebrew, serves all the purposes 
which that tense does in other languages, is what no person at all 
familiar with the Hebrew language can question. It is used for 
the purpose of expressing universal truths, present action, suffer- 
ing, or state of being, and likewise purpose inferring futurity. 
We accordingly regard present time as that which is originally 
connected with the action, suffering, or state of being expressed 
by this tense. The future meaning given to it is purely infer- 
ential, and is ascertained by the general scope of the context, 
or by expressions in it indicating futurity. Thus, I go to town, 
may either express a present act or a future purpose, to be deter- 
mined by the context. If, however, I say, I go to town to-morrow, 
the present form with the word to-morrow expresses future time 
as clearly as if an express form were used. I may be told that, i" 
go to town, when indicating future time, is an elliptical expression 
for, I shall go to town. I shall or will go, however, expresses no 
more than present intention ; the futurity is not expressed, it is 
merely matter of inference. This subject will be further noticed 
when we come to treat of the sequences of the tenses. 



INTRODUCTION. XCV 

The Imperative Mood. 

The 2 sing. masc. of what is called the imperative mood, is the 
abstract noun, or the ground form of the present tense without 
any nominative expressed, as *"Qy. (Ji a bliod). 

The 2 sing. fern, is composed of the above with a fragment of a 
pronoun affixed, as ^.5J?. 

When the masculine form, which, as has been said, is the abstract 
noun, and the same with the ground form of the present, is pro- 
nounced with emphasis, it has an imperative meaning. The same 
is the case in English; as, love, grasp, fight. In both languages 
the imperative precedes its nominative, while the present is pre- 
ceded by its nominative. 

There are two forms of the 2 plur. of the imperative, a masc. 
and fern., compounded of the ground form T31? and pronominal 
fragments, or the old forms of the plural number affixed. 

The Imperative is as follows : — 

Singular. 

2 masc. H^tf a serving = serve (thou). 

2 fern. * — *]5J? a serving thou = serve thou. 

Plural. 
2 masc. \— *"fty a serving ye = serve ye. 
2 fern. HJ— *D1? a serving ye — serve ye. 

It will hence be perceived that the verb is the abstract, or con- 
crete noun, with pronouns affixed or prefixed, or with plural 
terminations, which affixes or prefixes occasion all its variations in 
inflection, there being no change whatever upon the ground form. 
This is probably the case in all other languages, but in many cases 
it is impossible to trace the words of which the affixes and prefixes 
are fragments. In some languages, the words affixed represent 
the time of the action, as in French and Latin ; in others, they only 
mark the persons of the verb, as in Hebrew. 

Infinitive. 
The infinitive is the abstract noun, or ground form of the present 
tense, and of the imperative mood. The Hebrew infinitives are 
used both in the construct and absolute forms, and with prepo- 
sitions, in the same way as nouns. Thus, H/bTXH *1^25 *n the 



XCV1 INTRODUCTION. 

tilling of the ground, or in the cultivation of the ground, or in tilling 
the ground. It hence appears, that in Hebrew the abstract noun 
is not only the ground form of the present tense, and of the im- 
perative, but also fulfils the office of the infinitive, and gerund in 
other languages. 

Of the Participles. 

The present participle is made up of the abstract noun, with the 
servile letter ) inserted between the first and second radicals; 
thus, IJiy (ho-bed), server, i. e. a man a serving. 

The past participle is the concrete form of the noun, with the 
servile letter ) introduced between the second and third radicals ; 
as I^JJ served. 

In the former of these cases, the additional letter has the same 
influence in modifying the meaning of the simple word as the 
terminations er, or, and ing, in the English words server, visitor, 
visiting ; and in the latter, as ed in served. 

" No such thing (says Dr. Lee) exists in the Shemitic dialects 
as participles. Certain forms of words have indeed been techni- 
cally termed participles, and it has been fashionable to argue as if 
they were really so. The truth, however, is, these forms exhibit 
either agents or patients in verbs termed active ; and nouns im- 
plying habit or the like in those said to be neuter ; and as such 
the grammarians of the East very properly and universally treat 
them." Prof. Lee's Examination of the Principles of Prof. Yon 
Ewald on the subject of the Hebrew Tenses. 

It has been generally held by grammarians, who regard futurity 
as the primary idea in what we have designated the present tense, 
that present time in Hebrew is expressed by means of the par- 
ticiple ; thus, *l31J?n he who serveth, PlJ^nPl he who feedeth. Upon 
the same ground we might argue, that the present tense is ex- 
pressed in Greek by the participle, as 6 (nreipcov, he that serveth, 
6 iroiQiv, he that doeth, etc. It might as well be said, in the case 
of the Greek as in that of the Hebrew, that as present time is ex- 
pressed by the participles there can be no necessity for any other 
form for the expression of that time ; and therefore, since the Greek 
tense usually called the present, often, as the same does in Hebrew, 
expresses both past and future time, it is erroneously designated a 



INTRODUCTION. XCV11 

present tense, and should obtain some other name. In the examples 
above quoted, the expressions according to the Hebrew idiom 
should be rendered, the server, or the serving man, the feeder, the 
sower, the doer. It is to be borne in mind, that the Greek quota- 
tions here are not Hellenistic, but classical Greek usages. It is 
ordinarily held to be a universal principle in grammar, that no 
independent proposition can be expressed without a verb ; and 
that, consequently, where propositions are enunciated by means of 
a participle, the office of the Hebrew participle in such cases is to 
express the assertion in the present time. I believe the principle 
to be generally but not universally true, and that it is not rightly 
applied to the case of the Hebrew participle; for if it be affirmed, 
that in the proposition PHPl* rVlPl^n jjfi the participle pfi must 
be rendered weigheth, thus, God weigheth spirits, what becomes of 
the copula, or of any direct assertion whatever, in the following 
proposition, V^J£j *HT B^K * J^vS all the ivays of a man purity 
(pure) in his own eyes, Prov. xvi. 2. Can it be said that the word 
"HI comprehends both the copula and predicate ? But it will be 
said that the copula is understood. But why? If the presence of 
the copula is indispensable, why is it not expressed ? Does not 
its absence shew that, according to the idiom of the Hebrew 
language it is not necessary ? And every one can see that the ex- 
pression, all the ways of a man pure in his own eyes, but Jehovah 
a weigher of spirits, expresses the sentiments intended to be con- 
veyed by the sacred writer with sufficient perspicuity, though 
perhaps not, according to our views of language, with the same 
precision. Such propositions, without a verb or even a participle, 
are to be found everywhere in the scriptures, particularly in the 
book of Proverbs. A great many instances will be found in the 
chapter cited above; thus, "^ VntoVfe HIPP? &$#& 'XXh) D^| 
D^"^?^ a just weight and balance the Lord's ; all the weights of 
the bag his work (Prov. xvi. 11); SJ£j WirVl D*?PI ^-^"71 K? 
E?ip7& *» the light of the king's countenance life-, and his favour 
as a cloud of the latter rain (Prov. xvi. 15). 



The other species of the verb are formed exactly in the same 
way as the first or kal. For example, the past tense of the second 

h 



XCV111 INTRODUCTION. 

or niphal species has a j prefixed to the concrete noun, thus 
*7^y~3, which prefix is a fragment of some word not now easily 
traceable, which gives this species a passive signification. To this 
tense the pronouns are affixed in the same manner as in the pre- 
terite active. 

The present tense of this species is likewise a derivative word, 
with pronominal fragments connected with it, as in the active form. 
And it may be stated generally, that the first species or conjugation 
of the Hebrew verb, is formed from the primitive nouns, and 
that the others are formed from nouns augmented by fragments 
of words which so modify or alter the meaning of their primitives 
as to give the sense expressed by these conjugations respectively. 
To these words, so augmented, pronominal fragments are prefixed, 
or affixed, as has been already exemplified in the simple forms. 

Pluperfect Tense. 

There is no pluperfect tense in Hebrew expressed either by a 
separate form of the verb, as amaveram in Latin, and heTvfyeiv in 
Greek, or by means of a circumlocution, as i" had loved, in English, 
or Tavois fini, or Je m'etois resolu, in French. What is called 
pluperfect time is ascertained inferentially, and may be known 
from the context. 

There may indeed be said to be only two tenses in the English 
verb, the present and the past ; an imperative and infinitive mood, 
as they are called; and a present and past participle. Thus the 
present, love, and the past, loved, with nominatives before them; 
the imperative, love, with nominatives after it. The infinitive, love, 
is the ground form of the whole verb, from which the past tense, 
and present and past participles are formed, by a coalition with 
words or fragments of words now obsolete. The forms, have loved, 
had loved, shall love, will love, may love, might love, cannot properly 
be considered parts of the verb, to love, any more than the verbs 
/b^ teas able, or coidd, and HllK was willing, would, when similarly 
connected with Hebrew verbs, can be said to be parts of these 
verbs. May, might, shall, should, will, toould, etc., are principal 
verbs. 



INTRODUCTION. XC1X 

The pluperfect tense marks an event perfected antecedently to 
an event also perfected ; thus, " and it came to pass before he had 
done speaking, Rebekah came out" (Gen. xxiv. 15, Auth. Yers.) 
According to the Hebrew idiom, the rendering would be, " and it 
came to pass before he finished" etc., the verb Pl?3 being in the 
past tense. " And the woman (was) of a beautiful countenance, a 
virgin, and no man HJJ^ knew her," i. e. had known her (Gen. 
xxiv. 16). " To know whether the Lord ll vVD prospered his 
way," i.e. had prospered (Gen. xxiv. 21). IftKfrl \T\T^Ty) 72ft) 
lit. "and she finished giving him to drink and said"; according 
to our idiom, "when she had finished giving him to drink she 
said" (Gen. xxiv. 19). In these expressions there is no ambiguity, 
but there is less precision than in English and other languages 
which have distinct forms for the expression of pluperfect time. 
A great many more examples will be pointed out in the Analysis. 
It may here be observed, that the Greek aorist is very frequently 
used instead of the pluperfect tense. The use of the past instead 
of the pluperfect is also common in other languages. 

On the Potential and Subjunctive Moods. 

In Hebrew there is no peculiar form for the potential or sub- 
junctive moods. " The verb to be" says Dr. M'Culloch in his 
admirable English grammar, " is the only one in the English lan- 
guage which has a conditional form. In the case of all other verbs 
the form, when it occurs, is purely elliptical. Thus, if he say so 
it is well, is an ellipsis for, if he shall say so. Though he slay me 
yet will I trust in him, is an ellipsis for, though he slioidd slay me " 
p. 65, edit. ix. The verb to be, however, is no exception to the 
universal rule, as be and ivere are old forms of the present and 
past tenses of the indicative of the substantive verb, of which they 
are remaining traces. The words, may, might, can, coidd, will, 
ivould, shall, should, must, as has been already observed, are prin- 
cipal verbs. 

In Hebrew, liberty, power, will, inclination, are sometimes ex- 
pressed by such words as 7^ xoas able, J"Qv> ivas willing, etc. ; but 
what is expressed by our potential mood is generally accomplished 

h2 



INTRODUCTION. 



in Hebrew by tbe past and present tenses of the indicative, without 
any change of the form whatsoever. Of the latter method the 
following are examples : ")%) &^?3H do toe, or shall we, find such 
a one (Gen. xli. 38) ; can toe find (Auth. Vers.) ^H^Pl 'tQfiS 
^55 that my soul bless thee (Gen. xxvii. 4) ; that my soul may bless 
thee (Auth. Vers.) ^5N» ^Wb) v^lX peradventure my father feel 
me(Gen.xxvii.l2); should feel (Auth. Vers.) ^3 ^pbH) KjTn#3 
come near, I pray thee, and I handle thee (Gen. xxvii. 21); that I 
may handle thee (Auth. Vers.) ^nfc *T*&\ ^W s$\ an ^ Almighty 
God bless thee (Gen. xxviii. 3) ; and may Almighty God bless thee 
(Auth. Vers.) T\V2*§\ «? pi for so it is not done (Gen. xxxiv.T) ; for 
so it should not be done (Auth. Vers.) ^n*?TMK il^g* TttOX\ 
does he treat our sister as a harlot? (Gen.xxxiv.31); i.e. shoidd he 
treat, etc. (Auth.Vers.) T^7 (TH^l j§ lit. lest toe be for contempt 
(Genesis xxxviii. 23) ; i. e. lest toe should become contemptible. 
^P§Tfl 5^*5m'^ bring her forth and let her be burned (Gen. xxxviii. 
24) ; or, bring her forth that she may be burned. The rendering of 
the copulative conjunction ) by that, and the giving to the following 
verb a potential meaning, as is generally done in such cases by the 
translators of the English version, though in accordance with our 
idiom, often destroys the energy and beauty of the expression in 
the original. Thus the following expressions, which have been 
already quoted, are more nervous in the Hebrew idiom than when 
they are accommodated to ours : " Does he treat our sister as a 
harlot ?" " For so it is not done," i.e. such a thing is unheard of, 
viz. the seduction of a virgin in the circumstances in which Dinah 
was placed. " Bring her forth and let her be burned." In these 
cases the simplicity and idiom of the Hebrew language are both 
preserved. 

The nicety of the distinction between the indicative and the 
subjunctive and potential moods, and the difficulty of ascertaining 
with precision, in those languages where there are different forms 
for these moods, when the one and when the other should be used, 
may convince us that the subjunctive and potential moods could 
be easily dispensed with in the infancy of language. 

In the earliest stages of the progress of language, sentences must 
have been very simple and inartificial, and the clauses short and 



INTRODUCTION. CI 

connected by copulative conjunctions. In these circumstances, 
from the nature of the subjects treated of, and from their mode of 
treatment, from the writers having to do with facts rather than 
with arguments, and trains of reasoning deduced from these facts, 
the more modern refinements suggested by a regard to elegance, 
perspicuity, or other causes, were unnecessary. 

On the Sequences of the Hebrew Tenses. 

It has been already observed, that in the Hebrew language 
there are only two tenses, the present and the past, and that by 
means of these the same purposes are served as in those languages 
of higher refinement and of later origin, by means of a full com- 
plement of tenses and moods. Notwithstanding the completeness 
of the tenses of the Greek verb, and the precision with which 
every variation of time can be expressed by them, it is wonderful 
to find, for how many purposes some of them are employed, and 
how capriciously they are often used. This is particularly the 
case with the present and the aorist. In what follows, I purpose, 
in the first place, to point out some of the principles which 
regulate the tenses of the Greek and other languages, and to shew 
in what cases the best writers are governed by these principles, 
and in what cases they are left to their own discretion in the use 
of the tenses. These will serve as analogies, to prepare us for the 
profitable consideration, in the second place, of the doctrine of the 
Hebrew tenses. 

The Greek, Latin, English, etc., have a present tense, which 
expresses a point of time actually present, as the house falls ; 
present time, with the idea of duration, as the man fights ; a 
general principle, true in past, present, and future time, as all men 
are mortal-, a purpose implying present intention, but futurity in 
execution, as i" go to toion, which implication of futurity can be 
ascertained either by the general scope of the context or by 
qualifying words, such as to-morroio, hereafter, etc. The present 
tense is likewise used in narrating past events, and in describing 
past circumstances, when an author, by a vivid representation, 
wishes the past to appear to his readers as actually present. When 



Cli INTRODUCTION. 

tlius used, this tense is called the historic present, which, though 
present in form, and thus used for the reason just given, is virtually 
a past tense, inasmuch as it is employed in the description of 
events that are past. In the description of past events by means 
of historic presents, it is not extraordinary that these should be 
interchanged with real past tenses, inasmuch as both the tenses do 
in these circumstances express time actually past. When the 
reader clearly understands that it is the historic present with which 
the writer sets out, the interchange of that tense with the past, 
while it may often conduce to euphony and give variety to the 
style, can create no ambiguity or difficulty. This use of the present, 
and its interchange with the past in the narrative of past events, 
is common to the Greek, Latin, English, and probably to all other 
languages. Good writers, accordingly, can express past events 
by historic presents alone, or by historic presents interchanged 
with actual past tenses, or by past tenses alone. The following 
are instances of the interchanges of the historic presents with past 
tenses, which have just been referred to, in a narrative of past 
events : Aapeiov ical Uapvoarihos <y[yyovraL TratSe? Svo, Darius and 
Parysatis have (had) two sons, etc. ; then follow past tenses, 
eVel Se Aapeios rjaOevei, but token Darius was ill, etc. ; Kvpov 8e 
ILeTeire/jbTreTo, and he sent for Cyrus, etc. ; avajSaivei ovv 6 Kvpos, 
Cyrus in consequence goes (went) up (Xen. Anab. B. i. chap. i. 1). 
Such examples are without number in the Greek classics. The 
following is an instance of the same usage, which is extremely 
common in the Greek Testament : "Etc avrov \a\ovvros epyovrai, 
tvhile he was yet speaking there come (came), etc. ; 6 Se 'J770-0O? 
evOecos . . . Xiyei, saith (said) ; /cal ovk affi/cev, and he permitted 
not; KObi cpyerai, and he cometh (came); /cal . . . Xeyec, and he 
saith (said) ; ical Kare^eXcov avrov, and they derided him ; ical 
elcnropever.ai, and he entereth (entered); /cal \eyei avrj}, and saith 
(said) to her; teal evOiw^ avearr) rb Kopdcriov ical irepueirdrei, and 
immediately the damsel arose and walked ; ical e^ecnrjcrav, and they 
were astonished ; /cal SieareCkaro, and he charged (them) ; /cal elire, 
and commanded, etc. (Mark v. 85 — 43). The numerous class of 
illustrations of this principle found in the New Testament, are by 
many, called pure Hebraisms ; it may, however, be proved from 



INTRODUCTION. Clll 

an extensive induction of facts from the classical authors, and 
especially from the Greek, that this is not the case. But even 
admitting them to be pure Hebraisms, will any one pretend to 
say that there is any ambiguity whatever in their usage in the 
Greek Testament ? Is it reasonable, then, when we find the same 
usage in Hebrew, that we should be met with vapid declamation 
about the poverty and uncertainty of the Hebrew language ? 

The following are examples of the same usage from the Latin 
classics : " Postero die castra ex eo loco movent ; idem facit 
Caesar ; equitatumque omnem . . . praemittit, qui videcmt, quas in 
partes hostes iter faciant . Qui . . . praelium committunt ; et pauci 
de nostris cadiint. . . . Caesar suos a praeb'o continebat et satis 
habebat, etc. . . . Ita dies circiter quindecim iter fecemmt" etc. 
(Caesar De Bell. Gall., lib. i. cap. 16.) " Postquam id animum ad- 
vertit [perceives], copias suas Caesar inproximum collem, subducit. 
equitatumque, qui sustineret hostium impetum misit" (Id. cap. 24), 

" Interea Tuinum in Silvis saevissimus implet 
JNTuntius, et juveni ingentem fert Acca tumultum : 

Sic ambo ad muros rapidi totoque feruntur 
Agmine, nee longis inter se passibus absunt. 
Ac sinml iEneas fimiantes pulvere campos 
Prospexit longe, Laurentiaque agmina vidit ; 
Et saevum iEnean agnovit Turnus in armis. 
Adventumque pedum flatusque audivit equorum, 
Continue- pugnas meant, et praelia tentent ; 
Ni roseus fessos jam gurgite Phoebus Ibero 
Tingat equos, noctemque die labente reduced. 
Considunt castris ante urbem, et moenia valiant.' 1 '' 

Virg. En. lib. xi. vv. 896—915 . 

There is another very frequent usage of the present tense, com- 
mon in Latin and Greek, viz. the commencement of a narrative of 
past events with a past tense, and the connecting of that tense with 
presents, which do not designate present time actually, but only 
in relation to that of the event or action indicated by the leading 
verb. The writer carries back the reader's mind to a past event, 
which he introduces by a past tense, and then continues the 
narrative by means of present tenses, which mark time present not 
absolutely but relatively. As these presents express time really 



CIV INTRODUCTION. 

past, it is not surprising that they can be interchanged with past 
tenses at the writer's pleasure, and that without creating any am- 
biguity. This idiom may be illustrated by the following example, 
an idiom which though not very common in our language, is at 
least perfectly legitimate. « I met John yesterday, who tells me 
of the ship's arrival, and bids me proceed no farther, and I ivent 
home accordingly." The following is an example of the same 
idiom, taken from Par. Lost, iii. at the close. 

" Thus said, he turned; and Satan bowing low 
Took leave, and toward the coast of earth beneath, 
Throws his steep flight in many an aery wheel, 
Nor staifd till on Niphates' top he lights." 

With these compare the under-cited instances of this usage common 
in Classical and Hellenistic Greek, and also in Classical Latin : 
Kvpos Se — (hp/jbaro airb HdpBecov, issued forth from Sardis ; koX 
ijjeXavvet and marches (to the river Meander), <ye<j>vpa Se eirrjv and 
there was a bridge over it (which having crossed), i^eXavvet he 
marches (through Phrygia to Colosse); ivravOa efieivev there he 
remained (five days), Kal rj/cet Mev&v 6 QerraXos and Menon the 
Thessalian cometh ; evrevOev e^eXavvei thence he marcheth (to 
Celaenae), ivravOa Kvpp (SaalXeia rjv there Cyrus had a palace 
(and a park, in which) eQripevev he hunted. And a little further 
on, in the same connection : ean Se /col fieydXov fiacrikews jSaalXeca 
there is likewise a palace belonging to the great king, etc. Xen. 
Anab., lib. i. cap. ii. 5, 6, 7, 8. Kal ScaTrepdcravTOS rod 'Itjctov and 
Jesus having crossed over, etc. ; crvvrj^Or] o^Xo? 7roXi)<; a great mul- 
titude was assembled, /cal ep^erac and there cometh (one of the 
rulers of the synagogue), koX irlirTei and falleth, Kal irapetcaXei 
and entreated (him) ; /cal airrjXdev and he (Jesus) departed. Mark 
v. 21, seq. "Caesar Pemos cohortatus . . . obsides ad se adduci 
jussit. Quae omnia ab his diligenter ad diem facta sunt. Ipse 
Divitiacum iEduum magno opere cohortatus, docet, quanto opere 
reipublicae communisque salutis intersit, . . . His mandatis, eum 
ab se dimittit. Postquam omnes Belgarum copias . . . ad se venire 
vidit ... et ab Pemis cognovit, numen Axonam . . . exercitum 
transducere maturavit atque ibi castra posuit. In eo flumine pons 
erat. Ibi praesidium ponit, et . . . Quintum Titurium Sabinum 



INTRODUCTION. CV 

legatum cum sex cohortibus reliquit : castra in altituclinem pedum 
duodecim vallo, fossaque duodeviginti pedum, munire Jubet." 
Caes. De Bell. Gall., lib. ii. cap. v. 

It will hence appear, that in animated narration an author may 
commence a narrative of past events with a present tense, and 
continue the narration with presents ; or he may, in such a narra- 
tion, intermix present and past tenses together according to his 
taste or pleasure. Or an author may commence his narrative with 
a past tense, and continue it by presents used in a relative sense, 
or join past and present tenses together as he proceeds. This 
variation or intermixture of the tenses which follow the leading 
verbs, appears to depend upon no principle, but is regulated by 
the taste or will of the writer. What has been said has an im- 
portant bearing upon the sequences of the Hebrew tenses, as will 
afterwards appear. It would seem, from the examples adduced, 
that although the Greek and Latin languages have a full comple- 
ment of tenses, by which time may be expressed absolutely, with 
much more precision than in Hebrew, still the tenses are not used 
for the fulfilment of their distinct offices, with the uniformity and 
regularity which might a priori be expected. The historic present 
is used in English, as well as in Latin and Greek ; but, generally 
speaking, the English tenses are less employed in the expression 
of time relatively than in either of these languages. In English, 
we say, " He says that I write." " He says that I wrote," " He 
says that I have written." " He said that I had written." In all 
these cases, time is expressed absolutely. The leading and the 
following verbs express of themselves the time intended to be 
marked. So in dicit me scribere, he says that / write ; dicit me 
scripsisse, he says that I wrote or have icritten; both verbs express 
time absolutely. But in dixit me scribere, he said that i" wrote ; 
and dixit me scripsisse, he said that / had written — the scribere 
and scripsisse express time relatively ; they express time not as in 
the former cases, in their own right, if such an expression may be 
used, but under the influence of their leading verbs, which are in 
the past tense. Scribere has here a past instead of a present 
meaning, and scripsisse a pluperfect instead of a past. In the latter 
cases, therefore, scribere and scripsisse express time not absolutely 



CV1 INTRODUCTION. 

but relatively. This relative expression of time is analogous to 
the second rule laid down in. regard to the relative use of the 
Greek and Latin tenses. The following is analogous to the cases 
laid down under the first rule. The general principles of the 
sequences of the Latin tenses require, that, if the leading verb be 
a present, the verb following it with ut, qui, etc., should likewise 
be a present, unless the following is expressive of a different time 
from that of the leading verb ; thus, sunt qui eant, there are people 
who go ; sunt qui iverint, there are people who have gone. This 
rule seems to be violated in such cases as, persuadet Castico ut 
conaretur, he persuades Casticus that he should endeavour, instead 
of conetur, the regular attendant of the present. This irregularity 
is only found in the case of the historic presents, which expressing 
under a present form time actually past, are sometimes regarded 
grammatically as past tenses, and influence the following verb as 
if they were so. This form, however, is rare even in regard to 
historic presents, for such presents have generally the ordinary 
sequences ; thus, persuadet ut conetur. 

I have already, in another place, shewn the affinity between the 
present and future tenses of a verb, and pointed out the methods 
of expressing future time by the present tense, in languages which 
have no peculiar form for the future, by means of circumlocutions, 
or words attached to it implying futurity. This is frequently done 
both in Greek and Latin, where there are distinct forms of the 
future ; and this is peculiarly the case, when it is the author's 
intention to mark the certainty of the future event. Upon this 
principle, as well as in conformity with the Hebrew idiom, this use 
of the present might be expected, and is accordingly found in the 
Hellenistic Greek, where the future event rests upon the declara- 
tion and authority of God. The following examples are adduced 
from the Greek classics : od jSao-tXev ovre aXKore irapei'&es avBpl 
rcoSe a^apt ovBev, ^vXaaaofieda Se e? ae teal es tov fiereireira ygbvov 
jjbTj^ev e^afiaprelv, king, thou hast never yet discovered any want 
of gratitude in this man [in me], and we take care [I shall take 
care] never to offend you in time to come; where ^vKaaao^eOa is 
used for (pvXa^ofieOa ; the futurity of the action beginning from 
the present time is shewn by the use of /neT67reiTa (Herod, i. 108). 



INTRODUCTION. CV11 

Also, tjv . . . airohe^Ow (TTpaTrjybs, etc., earl rot ra crv fiovXeai, 
whether . . . I be appointed general . . . you have ivhat you wish 
(everything toill turn out as you wish); where earc is used for 
ecrrcu (Ibid. i. 124; see also Thucydides, i. 121, and i. 143 ; and 
Soph. Phil. 113). It is worthy of remark, that this enallage or 
change of tenses is more common in the early than in the later 
classical authors, particularly in Homer and Herodotus, who em- 
ployed the most pliant of the Greek dialects, and whose writings 
besides, bear by far the greatest resemblance to those of the Oriental 
writers, the former from the manners he pourtrayed in the simple 
scenes of primitive and patriarchal life, and the latter from his 
cast of thought, no doubt imbibed in his wanderings among the 
nations of the East (see Pococke's Life of Herod, in the Encyclop. 
Metropolitana). The following are examples from the New Testa- 
ment : Tore Svo eaovrat then shall tiao be [in the field], 6 et9 irapa- 
\afj,/3dverai koX 6 eh a^lerat the one is [shall be] taken, and the 
other is [shall be] left (Matt. xxiv. 40) ; 6 icaipos fiov iyyvs iarr 
irpos ae ttoIoo, for ttoitjctcd, my time is at hand, I keep [will keep 
the passover] (Matt. xxvi. 18); Let us see tohether Elias (ep^erac) 
cometh [will come] (Matt, xxvii. 49 ; see also Matt, xxviii. 20 ; 
Mark i. 2; Matt, xxvii. 63 ; Luke iii. 9 ; Gal. iii.8; John xxi. 23). 
Examples of this idiom are very common in the English ; the fol- 
lowing are a few examples of it from the Latin classics : « Sin 
metu cesserimus eaclem ilia advorsa^w^^" (Sallust Cat. chap. 58). 
" Quod nisi facts in vincula te ire jubebo" (Liv. vi. 15). " Hie 
(sc. Scipio) erat juvenis penes quern perfecti hujusce belli laus est," 
for erit (Liv. xxi. 46). " Piso abire se et cedere urbe testabatur," 
for abiturum, etc. (Tac. Annal. ii. 34). 

While duration is, for the most part, included in the present and 
imperfect tenses of the Greek verb, that idea is generally excluded 
in the aorist, the principal office of which is to express an act in an 
undefined period of past time, as in the example, etcreivov rrjv 
%elpa aov, koI e'f eVetve, fcal aTrofcaTearddr] rj ^elp avrov (Mark iii. 5) . 
We find the aorist, however, sometimes used in the narration of 
events, where duration is implied; but this is generally done in 
those cases in which it is not the author's intention to give promi- 
nence to that idea. Such is the reason generally assigned for the 



CV111 INTRODUCTION. 

use of the aorist instead of the imperfect. In these cases, however, 
the imperfect might be used without impropriety ; it may, there- 
fore, be stated in general terms, that the aorist in Greek is often 
used instead of the imperfect. Of this usage, the following are 
examples: irlaTet irapwicrjcrev eU rrjv <yrjv. This is what grammarians 
call a constructio prcegnans. By faith he went into the land, and 
sojourned in it ; where nrap(pic7]<jev is used for iraptpKec (Heb. xL 9). 
Also, 7)yr/aaro for rjyelro, she counted, it was her faith (ver. 11). 
Also, ifcpv/37) (ver. 23) ; and eKapreprjcre in ver. 27 of the same chap- 
ter. See also, efiecve in connection with SceSe^ero in Acts xxviii. 30. 

The Greek aorist is likewise used as a present, in the enunciation 
of general principles, which are true in respect to past, present, and 
future time, as may be seen from the examples which follow : 
ko\\o<; yap rj %p6vos avrfkcoaev rj voaos IjJbdpave, for either time 
destroys beauty, or disease makes it fade (Isocr. ad. Dem. p. 2) . 
Unless any one abide in me, if3\r]6r) efor, he is cast forth as a branch, 
and i^r)pdv07] is withered (John xv. 6. See Matt, xxiii. 2) . The 
example from John xv. 6, just quoted, and others similar to it, have 
been adduced by some grammarians, to shew that the Greek aorist 
has occasionally a future signification. It is, however, more correct 
to consider such examples in the light of general truths, which the 
aorist is frequently used to express. The Latin preterite tense is 
likewise sometimes used for the same purpose. 

• Fugit ante omnes exterritus Arruns, 

Laetitia, mixtoque metu : nee jam ampliiis hastae 
Credere, nee telis occurrere virginis audet. 
Ac velut ille, prius quam tela inimica sequantur, 
Continue- in montes sese avius dbdidit altos 
Occiso pastore, lupus, magnove juvenco, 
Conscius audacis facti, caudamque remulcens 
Subjecit pavitantem utero, silvasque petivit ; 

Virg. uEn. xi. 806. 

The preterites in italics do not refer to any particular case, but to 
the general habits of the wolf. The Greek aorist is likewise very 
frequently used in classical and Hellenistic Greek, instead of the 
perfect and pluperfect tenses, thus: Think not that r)\6ov I have 
come (Matt. v. 15) ; e^vXa^dfju^v I have kept (Matt. xix. 20). See 
also, as instances of the aorist used in the sense of the pluperfect, 



INTEODUCTION. ClX 

€T€fce had brought forth (Matt. i. 25) ; and ore iriXecrev, when (Jesus) 
had finished (Matt. xi. 1). The same is the case with the participles 
of the aorist; as 6 fiaOcbv, he who learned or has learned, 6 Oavcov, he 
who died or has died: ava^copTjcrdyrcov Be avrcov, after they had 
departed (Matt. ii. 13). Upon the use of the aorist for the perfect 
and pluperfect, Buttmann observes: " In every discourse in which 
there is much mention made of the past, and always in such a way 
that the mind connects it with the present, the Greeks most generally 
use the aorist instead of the perfect, which is generally used alone in 
our modern languages; and it is only when the speaker lays a par- 
ticular stress on the time of an occurrence, that the Greek employs 
the perfect, and in a narrative the plu-perfect. All this is, however, 
greatly influenced by euphony. The uncertainty, or indefinite notion, 
from which the aorist derives its name, is properly limited to the 
time past." — Intermediate Grammar, § 137. 3. In Latin there is 
only one form for the aorist and the perfect tense ; and the distinc- 
tion between them can only be ascertained by the context. When 
dixit means said, or, in other words, is used as an aorist, it is called 
the perfect indefinite; when it means hath said, it is called the 
perfect definite. The distinction is often obvious by the tense of 
the following verb, since the pe? feet definite is regarded as a present, 
according to the laws which regulate the sequences of the Latin 
tenses. Thus, in the examples, "factum est ut sim miser," and 
" factum ut essem miser," factum est is in both cases the same in 
form, but different in meaning; it being, in the former case, the 
perfect definite, and, in the latter, the perfect indefinite. The meaning 
of the former expression is, " It hath happened that I am miserable;" 
of the latter, " It happened that I was miserable." What has been 
advanced is with a view to set forth some of the principles that regu- 
late the use of the Greek and Latin tenses, in order to a comparison 
between these, and those which regulate the tenses of the Hebrew 
language. The completeness of the tenses of the Greek and Latin 
verbs, might have enabled the authors to employ these tenses in 
their absolute meanings, and without making them answer so many 
different purposes, and without connecting different tenses together 
in the same context, where the same end could have been equally 
well, and, as some might think better, answered by the same 



CX INTRODUCTION. 

tenses. These usages may have arisen out of antiquated forms of 
expression employed antecedently to the period in which the verb 
obtained its full complement of tenses ; or, for the purpose of giving 
to the style greater variety, energy, and vivacity. This is effected, 
however, without creating uncertainty or ambiguity. No one who 
understands the language complains that it is thereby rendered 
uncertain, ambiguous, or unintelligible. 

I might have mentioned many anomalies in the use of the Greek 
tenses and moods, which, hoAvever, are found to create no practical 
difficulty. For example, every one knows as well, that in the con- 
text in which it is found %alpeiv fiera ^atpovrcov, means rejoice 
with them that rejoice, as if the Apostle had used ^alpere, (Eom. 
xii. 15). Compare *TDT an infinitive, used as the imperative *"DT 
remember (the Sabbath day), Exod. xx. 8. It will hence be seen that 
great latitude is allowed in the use of the Greek tenses; and that in 
employing them the best authors seem to have been guided by a 
regard to euphony, variety, energy, and vivacity of style. " Differ- 
ent tenses (says Vigerus de Idiotismis Grsecis) are often promiscu- 
ously used by the best Greek writers ; this is so remarkably the case 
with regard to the tragedians, that Porson (ad Hecub. 21) says that 
they seem to have studied variety in using them indiscriminately," 
chap. v. § iii. rule ix. (x.), Seagers Translation. 

As the Greeks, by means of their present tense and aorist, can, 
and do, express every variety of time, the Hebrew writers do the 
same with their past and present tenses. I believe the general 
principles which regulate the use of the tenses, in both languages, 
are the same; although, considering the genius of the Hebrew 
language itself, and the manner in which it must have been affected 
by the peculiar cast of mind of the nation that used it, and the 
peculiarity of the eastern modes of thinking and feeling, it need 
excite no surprise that greater latitude is allowed in that language, 
in the use of the tenses even than in Greek. From what has been 
said, it will not be expected that I shall attempt to account for the 
particular cases in which one tense is used in Hebrew in preference 
to another. 

The primary office of the Hebrew past tense, is to express past 
events in the same way as the Greek aorist, e.g. &OS DTPNfc God 



INTRODUCTION. CXI 

created. It is also used as the Greek perfect, and serves to connect 
the past with the present, as 'H* T\j£nP] I have lifted up my hand 
(Gen.xiv.22); also as the Greek pluperfect, as, And all their substance 
^D^ IjSW which they had acquired in Haran, Gen. xii. 5 ; also past 
time with the notion of duration, like the Greek imperfect, as, And the 
waters )12Z prevailed exceedingly (Gen. vii. 19). Also, as a present, 
used in the expression of general truths ; as, Blessed is the man who 
*sj?n walketh not .... and who ^$* sitteth not .... and who 1fc$ 
standeth not" The use of the past tense in the expression of general 
truths, which apply not only to past and present, but also to future 
time, and also in the expression of habit, custom, and the like, may 
naturally extend, through the aid of certain expressions, or the general 
strain of the context, to a habit, custom, or state, supposed to com- 
mence and to continue in time future, and even to a future event, 
without any idea of duration involved in it. The past tense, in such 
circumstances, is thought to express future time with greater certainty 
than the present, used in the expression of futurity. It is, accord- 
ingly, often employed in the expression of Jehovah's predictions, 
purposes, and determinations, and of the confidence of his servants 
in the accomplishment of his promises. Of the past tense, applied 
in the expression of the divine predictions, we give the following as 
an example : ]"!^-Tn T**l^rrn& W"0 W*!i? t° thy seed have I given 
(will I give) this land (Gen. xv. 18), i.e. I have determined to put 
them in possession of it, and it is as certainly theirs, as if it were 
already in their possession; *£QK^ an d I have dwelt in the house 
of the Lord for ever, i.e. I shall dwell (Psal. xxiii. 6). The Psalmist, 
being as certain that the Lord's promises would be performed, 
as if the whole had been fulfilled, and as if everything had been 
past instead of future. No ambiguity can arise from such uses of 
the past tense; for, in the former case, Abraham had no posterity at 
the time the promise was made ; and, in the latter, the futurity is 
clearly implied by the words " for ever," lit. " to length of days." 

The present tense of the Hebrew verb, is used in the same way 
as in Greek, and, probably, in all other languages. It expresses a 
present act, a general principle, state, or habit ; a purpose to be 
executed in future time ; and a future either clearly indicated by the 
general scope of the context, or by expressions which place the 



CX11 INTRODUCTION. 



matter beyond doubt. It is likewise used as the historic present in 
Greek, Latin, etc, and also as a pluperfect. 

Keeping in view what has already been advanced, the reader will 
attend to three important principles, which regulate the sequences 
of the Hebrew tenses, It has been already said that the Hebrew 
past and present tenses, like the Greek aorist and present, are fre- 
quently used in the enunciation of general propositions, and in the 
expression of habit, state and condition. I observe, then, that when 
a writer uses either the one or other tense in the enunciation of a 
general proposition, to be followed by others, he according to his 
pleasure varies the tense, using the past or present as a mere matter 
of taste. An excellent illustration of this is furnished in the first 
Psalm, where we have first the past tenses ^OT\ walketh, *15J? stand- 
eth, y^* sitteth, ; then HJliT meditateth a present, and IT!"! is, a 
past as before; then JjTp yieldeth ; /£\ wither eth ; T\WW_ doeth; 
FT /¥- P r °spereth ; ^jD^JFI scattereth it ; VXP stand, presents, and 
J£V an approver, approveth, the active participle kal ; and 13KD 
perisheth, a present. All these words are expressive of fixed and 
immutable truths, and should be rendered as presents according to 
our idiom, and none of them by futures, which do not express with 
sufficient precision the established characters of the truths, as be- 
longing to time past, time present, and time to come : thus — " the 
happiness of the man that walketh not in the counsel of the ungodly, 
and standeth not in the way of sinners, and sitteth not in the seat of 
scorners, but his delight (is) in the law of Jehovah, and on his law 
he meditateth day and night. He is like a tree planted by streams 
of water, that yieldeth its fruit in its season, whose leaf fadeth not; 
and all that he doeth, prospereth. Not so the ungodly, but (they 
are)like the chaff which the wind driveth away. Therefore the wicked 
do not stand in the judgment, nor sinners in the congregation of the 
righteous: for Jehovah (is) an approver of the way of the righteous, 
but the way of the ungodly perisheth." It appears that the past 
tenses, in the foregoing Psalm, express precisely the same ideas as 
the presents; they both enunciate the great general truths contained 
in it, and the transitions from the one tense to the other, cannot, in 
as far as I can see, be reduced to any fixed principles, and are only 
resolvable into the writer's will and pleasure. It cannot, however, 



INTRODUCTION. CXlll 

be said tliat the commencing enunciations by means of the preterites, 
or the transition into presents ; or the transition again into a pre- 
terite; or the return to the presents, occasions either difficulty or 
ambiguity. There is, evidently, no risk of misunderstanding the 
meaning of the preterites here; no one, probably, ever mistranslated 
them. There is no more difficulty in such cases, than in the render- 
ing of the Greek aorists in the following passage: avereCke <yap 6 
rjXto? aw tc3 fcavccovi,, real etypave rbv yopTov, real to avOos avrov 
e^eireo-e. ical 7) evirpeireia tov irpoo-oaizov avrov airayXero. For the 
sun riseth up, with his scorching heat and withereth the grass, and the 
flower thereof fadeth, and its comeliness is destroyed (James i. 11). 

The quotations from Psalm i. illustrate what was said in another 
place, in regard to the original and essential meaning of what has 
been denominated the present tense. The instances given coincide 
with the usages of the present tense, in all languages, and the 
rendering of IT PI in Psalm i. which is a past tense, and of several of 
the presents as futures, expresses the Psalmist's sentiments, with less 
truth and vigour, while it accords less with the genius and sim- 
plicity of the Oriental style. I can very easily understand how a 
future can have a present tense, as its foundation; but I cannot see 
from the nature of the thing itself, or from the analogy of any 
language with which I am acquainted, how a present can be founded 
upon a tense in which futurity inheres as a primary and essential 
idea. In those languages, for example, the Greek and Latin, which 
are possessed of two distinct forms for the expression of the present 
and future, we find many instances, as has been already shewn, of a 
present for a future; but we might safely challenge the whole of 
classical antiquity to produce an instance of a future form represent- 
ing a present. Indeed, it seems to be extremely absurd to suppose 
a future to exist in the human mind antecedently to a present, foras- 
much as our whole life is but an ever-shifting present. Conscious- 
ness embracing our feelings from within, and our sensations from 
without, is now admitted, by all sound philosophy, to furnish the 
only knowledge which is in itself necessary and absolute. It is the 
indestructible principle of the human mind, without which it would 
have no existence; and the region of its exercise is the present, 
not the past, of which the exponent is memory; certainly not the 



CX1V INTK0DUCTI02T. 

future, of which hope and imagination, in one of its forms, are the 
representatives in the human mind. Our earliest notions, if they 
were expressed in words, would be cogito, ergo sum, not cogitabo, ergo 
ero. The man would have been regarded as mad who laid down 
the latter as a fundamental principle of mental philosophy. I am 
confident that erroneous views, as to the present tense, have often 
warped the minds of the translators of the scriptures, and have 
given rise to renderings which have injured the sense, and greatly 
destroyed the beauty, spirit, and vigour of the original. 

The second principle which I would lay down in regard to the 
sequences of the Hebrew tenses, is, as well as the third that follows, 
precisely the same as those that have been pointed out and illus- 
trated as applicable to Greek, Latin, etc., viz. : when a present, used 
in the description of past events, called by grammarians, in the case 
of other languages, the historic present is the leading verb in a 
sentence, it may be connected with past tenses which actually denote 
the same time as the leading verb, which, though in form a present, 
actually denotes time past. Examples of this principle are to be 
found in every page of the Hebrew scriptures. I only select the 
following: t^ftfc^/3 ^pfc?!l Now the Philistines gather (gathered) 
together their armies to battle, *|£DN*i and are (were) gathered at 
Shochoh which (belongeth) to Judah, ^5*5 an d pitch (pitched) 
between Shochoh and Azekah, and Ephes-dammim. And Saul and the 
men of Israel *l£p&0 were gathered together, ^5*1 and pitch 
(pitched) in the valley of Elah, ^1$) and set the battle in array 
against the Philistines' 1 (1 Sam. xvii. 1, 2). With the exception of 
^DKJ which is a past tense, all the rest are presents. I know of no 
reason why the tense is here changed. The time is precisely the 
same as that expressed by the presents. In such cases, indeed, where 
the copulative conjunction 1 is severed from the verb by intervening 
words, so as apparently to interrupt the sequence, the preterite is 
used instead of the historic present. But why does the writer make 
this separation, unless on the ground of euphony, variety, or the 
like? Might he not have as well said, Wt^'B^K J|fiDK*1 as fctyjfl 
teD&O 7^i^\. I confess I can see no reason for the change, but 
the will and pleasure of the writer. 

The third principle to which I direct attention is, that, after 



INTRODUCTION. CXV 

commencing the narration of an event in past time, by the past 
tense, a writer uses presents for describing the events in connection 
with it; these are not to be regarded as presents absolutely, that is, 
in reference to the periods in which they actually took place, but in 
reference to the time of the leading verb. But as these relative 
presents actually denote past time, no impropriety or ambiguity is 
occasioned by the writer's recurrence, at his pleasure, to the absolute 
time with which he set out. Of this principle the following is an 
illustration : After these things the word of the Lord (TH was {came) 
to Abraham, etc. ; D15H ""©^l an & Abraham saith (said) , etc. ; 
in& Klri? and he (the' Lord) bringeth (brought) him forth \J2^T\) 
niiTS and he believed in Jehovah, TO$W\ and (one) accounteth it, 
(it was accounted) , etc. (Gen. xv. 1 — 6) . In this sentence the leading 
verb is in the past tense, and ^JbN^J and &*£)*) are relative presents, 
and }^Xn*l is a past ; the writer returning to the time at which he 
set out ; and n3^D*1 is a relative present. I confess myself under 
great obligations to the works of Dr. Lee, for many of the ideas 
which I have brought forward here; and I heartily concur in his 
general principle, " ... in which (he says) the writer, — setting out 
from the period in which he commences his narrative — follows the 
different circumstances of it, as if himself and his reader were present ; 
and hence dates the tenses of his verbs from the different periods in 
which he places himself; still, however, reserving the right of 
returning to his original position whenever he chooses." — Grammar, 
art. 240. p. 364. 

Another common sequence in Hebrew syntax is that of presents 
after an imperative, where the presents are used imperatively. I 
have already mentioned that the English imperative is the present 
tense, or ground form of the English verb, with a nominative 
after it ; as, love ye, instead of ye love. In Latin, there are two 
forms of the imperative, namely, the imperative mood, properly 
so called, and the present subjunctive ; and in rendering be ye, 
they say either este or sitis. The double forms of the imperative 
are necessary in Hebrew, and likewise in other languages, from the 
want of some of the persons in that mood. The translators of the 
Authorised Version, regarding what we have called the present 
tense as a future, generally render the imperative expressed by a 



CXV1 INTRODUCTION. 

present, by the English word shall. This may be seen by a reference 
to the language used in the prohibitions in the decalogue, where no 
advantage is to be gained by a future form, even although implying 
duty, in the enunciation of commands of eternal obligation. I 
conceive that the following rendering of the prohibitions in the 
decalogue is preferable to that in the Authorised Version: " Make 
not to thyself a graven image . . . ; bow not thyself to them . . . nor 
serve them . . . Take not the name of the Lord thy God in vain, 
for Jehovah holdeth not him guiltless that taketh his name in vain." 
The words, holdeth and taketh, are presents in the original, and 
express general truths, as has been already shewn. The former verbs, 
expressive of prohibitions, are likewise in the present form. From 
what has been said, it will not excite any surprise that in the sequences 
of the Hebrew tenses, a present used imperatively may naturally 
follow an imperative. This usage is of such frequent occurrence 
that no examples of it are necessary. There is, however, another 
usage in the sequences of the Hebrew tenses, from which indeed no 
difficulty arises in the understanding of the original, but which 
seems to be peculiar to the Hebrew language, as distinguished from 
the languages of the West, and to bear scarcely any analogy to that of 
any of these. I refer to a past tense with an imperative meaning, 
coupled with an imperative or present, used imperatively. Thus, TW^ n 
(an imperative), make for thyself an ark of gopher wood apartments ; 
hb^f] (a present) make in it ft^lD) (a past tense coupled to the 
preceding with \\ and pitch it within and without with pitch (Gen. 
vi. 14). If literally rendered, the last verb would signify, and thou 
hast pitched. I can see no difference here as to the nature of the 
commands given, nor can I see very well why the past tense is 
chosen here and in similar cases, unless for the sake of variety. As 
has been shewn, the relative use of the tenses is very common in 
Hebrew, and the leading verb seems to be almost omnipotent in 
subjecting those that follow it to its own time. The following are 
additional examples : ftpft (a present) take a heifer of the herd 
PFfotih (a past tense) and say, lit. and thou hast said (1 Sam. xvi. 1). 
*bfcrtij! KTSfr . . . frlj? D31J33 D3 D$*& DS take (imperative) 
both your flocks and your herds . . . and bless (pret.) me also (Exod. 
xii. 32. See also Deut. x. 1 ; Ezek. iv. 1, 3, 4; Psa. xxii. 22). 



INTRODUCTION. CXV11 

A somewhat analogous usage is occasionally found in Latin, where 
the perfect is found in place of the present subjunctive, used im- 
peratively, with the particle ne. Thus, " Ne longius abierim" (Tac. 
Ann. vi. 22); " Secreto hoc audi, tecum habeto, ne Appellae quidem 
liberto tuo dixeris'' (Cic. ad Fam. vii. 25) ; " Tu vero ista ne asciveris 
nevefueris commenticiis rebus assensus" (Cic. Acad. ii. 40). 

Such appear to be the leading principles which regulate the 
Hebrew tenses. They might be much more fully developed ; but 
this, my limits and the plan of my work prevent me from under- 
taking. What has been advanced in the preceding pages in re- 
gard to the Hebrew tenses, is the only rational explanation of 
this difficult question which I have to offer, but upon a subject 
which has exercised the talents, and divided the opinions of the 
ablest scholars, I venture not to express myself with unbecoming 
confidence. It will appear, that I no more attribute a conversive 
power to the Hebrew copulative conjunction ) in connecting different 
tenses together, than I do to the Greek and Latin copulatives, kcli 
and et, in the performance of the same office. If the principles 
which have been brought forward, and the usages thence arising are 
generally correct, the student will have no difficulty in prosecuting 
the subject for himself. He will find the leading principles analogous 
to those which exist in other languages ; and he will find the ob- 
jection, that all is uncertainty in the Hebrew language, futile in 
itself, inconsistent with the wisdom and goodness of the Being by 
whom the revelation was given, and an evil report, brought up 
against the language by those who have either but a superficial 
knowledge of it, or who are enemies of the truth. 

Of Adyerbs. 

In most languages, adjectives are used to qualify nouns, and 
adverbs to qualify verbs, etc. Strictly speaking, there are no 
adjectives in Hebrew, and verbs as well as nouns are qualified by 
substantives, those which go under the name of adverbs being 
actually substantive nouns. For example, BHPI silence according to 
our idiom silently ; HtpJ confidence confidently ; HDil kindness, 
kindly ; JlfcNt truth, truly ; *7Kft vehemence, excess, vehemently, very ; 
Jl 7*2 perfection, perfectly, thoroughly. These so-called adverbs are 



CXV111 INTRODUCTION. 

often placed in the objective case after the verbs which they qualify; 
and sometimes they obtain their adverbial sense by means of 
prepositions by which they are governed. Of the former construc- 
tion, the following are examples: HTO fyfy they have made consum- 
mation, i.e. they have done (it) entirely, or really (Gen. xviii. 21). 
T)tit$) *lpn H^J? IViPyi and thou shalt do with me kindness and truth, 
i.e. thou shalt deal with me kindly and truly (Gen. xlvii. 29). Of the 
latter Htp^/ with respect to confidence, securely, *1p^/ in reference 
to falsehood, falsely ; DX7 in reference to gentleness, gently ; pHQS 
in justice, justly. 

" Adverbs, prepositions and conjunctions/' says Dr. M'Culloch, 
" do not seem to form, as far as import is concerned, distinct species 
of words, but to be merely abbreviations of nouns, adjectives, or 
verbs." — Eng. Gram. p. 34. " Some words, from the different ways 
they are used, belong sometimes to one part of speech, and some- 
times to another. The same word must originally have been both 
in import and use only one part of speech. Present usage, however, 
gives laws to grammar, not original import. Such words are as, 
but, either, neither, much, more, most, that!' — lb. p. 34. 

There are other words in Hebrew for supplying the place of ad- 
verbs, which furnish additional evidence of a desire not to increase 
either the number of words or of parts of speech. These forms of 
expression likewise give vivacity and vigour to the style. The 
following are examples: ^fcjH ^IfcO in seeing we have seen-, i.e. 
we have indeed seen (Gen. xxvi. 28). HIDl 7 ) Tw2 in dying thou 
shalt die, i. e. thou shalt surely die (Genesis ii. 17). 11DH1 "H sT\ 
going and decreasing, i. e. gradually decreasing, like the waves of the 
returning tide (Gen. viii. 5). TJiftl IHSfll and she hastened and 
let down, i.e and she quickly let down (Gen. xxiv. 18). T\\7? flDfol 
and she added to bring forth, i.e. she brought forth again (Gen. iv. 2). 
This idiom is sometimes transferred to the Greek by the writers of 
the New Testament, as well as by the Septuagint translators: 
teal irpoo-eOero irkyb^ai erepov BovXov, and he added to send another 
servant, i.e. he sent again (Luke xx. 11), with which compare kclL 
irakiv aireo-TeCkev aXXov BovXov (Mark xii. 4) ; see also evXoywv 
€v\oyrjcrco, k. t. \. (Heb. vi. 14) ; IBoov elSov (Acts vii. 34) ; see the 
same expression in Lucian's Dialogues, Men. and Protes.; cocoy 



INTEODTJCTION. * CX1X 

aKovaere (Matt. xiii. 14); eiriOvfila iireOv^irjaa (Lukexxii. 15), and 
Oavarco rekevrdro (Matt. xv. 14). 

Peepositions. 

A preposition is a word which shews the relation which one 
object bears to another; and as the word marking that relation 
generally precedes, it has received the name of preposition. That 
relation in Hebrew is pointed out by nouns; but from their being 
chiefly confined to the office of pointing out that relation, they are, 
in conformity with the classification of the parts of speech in the 
grammars of Latin, Greek, and other languages, called prepositions. 
In pointing out the relation of the waters to the earth in a state of 
chaos, as above or below it, nouns signifying superiority and in- 
feriority, precede the word earth, and are placed in juxta-position 
with it, as Tl^n /J? superiority the earth, i.e. above the earth; and 
T**)Xn nnjT) inferiority the earth, i. e. under the earth. The former 
word was originally a noun written in full TrT$ ascension, superiority ; 
and likewise the latter HIlJ? inferiority, and they are still found in 
the construct form of the plural number. This is the case with 
many others, which have all the characteristic marks of nouns, e.g. 
T3 distinction ; construct sing. T J^ fern. pi. H1^3, construct pi. masc. 
VP3 This noun is translated into our language by the preposition 
between. So j£p a noun signifying separation, cutting, is translated 
by the English preposition from', and DJ? a noun, signifying com- 
pany, communion, by the English preposition with ; and "ljy crossing, 
passage, beyond-, and "lPlX subsecutio, end, after, behind-, construct pi. 
masc. ^HX; its form and original meaning as a noun appear from 
the following example : n^HIl ^HX? «wVA the after parts (end) 
of the spear (2 Sam. ii. 23). When the relation is obvious, the word 
used to point it out is often omitted in Hebrew, as, God made man 
dust of the earth, i. e. of or from the dust of the earth. 

Conjunctions. 

Conjunctions, as they are called, are likewise nouns, as, Q3 addition 
also; ^VQJ? passage, cause, with the preposition I'DyS by -cause 
because. See the subject of the particles fully treated in Professor 
Lee's Grammar, Art. 171. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 



3 or 3 
J or it 
fori 

n . . 
i . . 

T . . 

n . . 



CHAPTER I. 

ALPHABET. 

Letters and their Representatives. 

. . . . H unaspirated 



Names of the Letters. 
. Alef 



Bh, B Beth 

Gh, G Gimel 

Dh, D Daleth 



H 

y 
z 



Kh, a strong guttural . 

T 

Y 

3 land ?J or *|l Ch (guttural), K . . 

I when final J 

L 

. . M 

. . N 

. . S Samech 

. . H a strong guttural . Hayin 



3 
b 

ft and D final 
J and J final 

D . . . . 

V • ■ • 



He 

Yaw 

Zayin 

Kheth 

Teth 

Yodh 

Kaph 

Lamedh 

Mem 

Nun 



2 or 3, and *\ final . Ph, P Pe 



\ and V nna l 
P ' 

Doi-n 



Ts Tsadhe 

K Koph 

R Resh 

Sh Shin 

S Sin 

Th, T Taw 

B 



2 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

£. These letters, which, are all consonants, are divided as follows, 
according to the different organs of speech by which they are pro- 
nounced. 

Gutturals 

Palatals . 



Linguals 

Dentals 

Labials 



K 


n 


n 


J> 


*i 


3 


D 


P 


1 


n 


to 


s 


T 


D 


B> 


¥ 


) 


a 


fi 


& 



The letter 1 partakes of the character of a guttural and dental. 
The letters 7, lb, X 1, are liquids. 

(a) The student should pay particular attention to the fore- 
going division, as it exerts an important influence upon the 
Hebrew, and upon every other language. From the general 
principle of the substitution of letters of the same organs for one 
another, have arisen what are called cognate or kindred words ; 
as 111! (gabk), 13 {gav), and ?|| (gaph), the hack. It would be a 
matter of considerable importance and interest, could it be ascer- 
tained, at what periods such varieties originated; whether they 
were peculiar to certain districts of Palestine, or whether the 
period or district in which an author lived could be discovered 
from the preference given by him to certain forms of cognate 
words. In the days of Jephthah, the Ephraimites could not pro- 
nounce the letter fc? in the word ft 73^ (Shibboleth), see Judges 
xii. 6 ; and by their inability to pronounce that letter the members 
of their tribe were recognised. 

(&) The principles of substitution of letters of the same organ 
for one another, have had an important influence in the formation 
of cognate languages, both of the Shemitic and Indo-European 
families- — such, for example, as the Syriac, Chaldee, Hebrew, 
Arabic, etc. ; the Anglo-Saxon, German, Dutch, English, etc. ; 
and the Italian, Erench, Spanish, and Portuguese. 

(c) The same principles are conspicuous in the case of words 
transferred from one language to another; as, for example, in 
forming the English word receive, from the Latin recipio, there is 
an interchange of the labials p and v. The p however is preserved 
in the noun receipt, and reception. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. S 

(d) The same thing takes place in the variations of words in the 
same language by conjugation, declension, gender, etc. ; as, bereft, 
from bereave ; cleft, from cleave ; rectum (to rule), from rego, 
instead of regtum; knife, plur. knives; duke, duchess; illiberal, for 
inliberal; this last generally takes place in the case of the liquids, 
and is called assimilation. 

(e) Upon the same principles seem to have proceeded many of 
the variations of dialect in the Greek language. 

(f) It appears that in different countries in which cognate 
languages were spoken, a preference was given to certain vowels 
and consonants over others ; which preference may have arisen 
from a peculiarity of the organs of speech, in consequence of the 
temperature of the climate, or other cause. Some nations cannot 
pronounce the strong guttural letters ; others cannot give utterance 
to the sound of th in such words as that, think, etc., and substitute 
the letter d in its place. The broad sound of the vowel a seems 
to have been preferred by the Northern ; while the vowels, e, i, 
and o, were preferred by the Southern nations of Europe and 
Asia. 

(g) It often happens that consonants of different organs are 
interchanged, in which case the interchange is made from letters 
of the adjacent organs - r thus, Unguals from dentals, as 71 for W. 
It is to be observed, however, in regard to this example, that 
some grammarians rank s and t as letters of the same organ. See 
the Classification of Consonants in Thiersch's Greek Grammar. 

(h) When infants cannot pronounce those letters of more 
difficult utterance, they use others of the same class or organ; as, 
for example, Loman for Roman, the L and R being liquids ; and 
wath for wash. The same is the case with adults who lisp in 
speaking. 

3. (ct) Four of the letters, owing to the feebleness of their 
sound, lose their consonantal powers and are said to be quiescent 
or silent. These are *, 1, H, tf, technically called ^HX ehevi letters. 
A similar quiescence takes place in the case of some of the weaker 
consonants in our own language, as in the letter h in the interjec- 
tion, bah ! Some of them have occasionally so feeble a sound 

b2 



4 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

that they approach very nearly to the nature of vowels, as w in 
the word tow, y in the words they, stray, and the like. In some 
cases they are actually used as vowels, as y in the words syllable 
and fully. 

(b) These letters, however, do not become quiescent with all the 
vowels, but only with those with which they are said to be homo- 
geneous in sound. & and H may become quiescent after any vowel, 
as &|1 (ba), (13 (beh) ; ) will be quiescent after kholem or shureh 
only, as 13 (bo), ^ (bu) ; and * after hhirih, tsere, segol, and 
occasionally after kamets, as TyJJ (ha-le-cha), and V7JJ (ha-lav). 
See Prof. Lee's Gr., Arts. 37 et seq. This subject will be further 
illustrated in Arts. 34 et seq., which treat of the contractions of 
vowels. 

(c) Those letters which occasionally have a point inscribed, to 
remove their aspiration, are fi§3 ^5?j technically called Vgad 
k'phath. In writing the aspirates in English characters, we shall 
give the 1 and 1 always the hard sound of g and d ; but those 
who prefer giving them the aspirated sound, may pronounce them 
as gh and dh, when they have not the point inscribed. 

(d). Those letters which vary in form when final are compre- 
hended in the word V§3®3 (kam-nC nap-pets), like the disperser. 

4. The roots in Hebrew we regard as triliteral. "When they 
appear to be biliteral, it is in consequence of a contraction upon 
principles to be afterwards laid down. These roots are often 
increased by other letters. Those letters which are only found 
in the roots are called radicals ; those which are employed in 
inflection, derivation, and otherwise, are called serviles. The 
servile letters are comprehended in the following words : H^S 
T?5^ 10^ (Mosheh e-than v'cha-lebh), Moses, Ethan, and Caleb. 
All the others are radicals. The serviles are often used as radicals, 
but the radicals are never used as serviles. 



CHAPTER II. 



ON THE VOWELS. 



5. The Hebrew vowels are represented by characters placed 
sometimes above, sometimes below, and sometimes in the middle 
of the consonants. 



Figure. 



VOWELS NATURALLY LONG. 

Name. Power. 

Kamets . . . . a as in Latin and Erench 

Tsere e ibid. 

Khirik Gadol . . I ibid. 

Kholem .... 6 long. 

Shurek .... u as in Italian, Scotch & German. 



VOWELS NATURALLY SHORT 

Pathakh . . . 
Segol .... 
Khirik Katon . 



Kamets Khateph 
Kibbuts . . . 



Sounded as the short 
Italian vowels. 



SHVA AND ITS SUBSTITUTES. 



Sheva e 

Khateph Pathakh . a 

Khateph Segol . . e 

Khateph Kamets . 6 



Used to assist in the 
enunciation of con- 
sonants which have 
no vowels. 



6. The principal vowels are a> i, and u ; e is intermediate be- 
tween a and i, and o between a and a. Thus, ai = e, as in the 
English -word, fail, pronounced as the long e in French ; and au = b, 
as in the word maul. 



6 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

7. A pure syllable in Hebrew is composed of a consonant and a 
long vowel, both, of which are fully enounced ; as ^ IS, ^3, $> ^> 
(ba, be, bi, bo, bit). The syllable is likewise regarded as pure when 
one of the letters, 1PIX No. 3, when quiescent is added ; as 
fc$5, ^5 (°a, be) ; and also when the vowel is preceded by two 
consonants, the former of which has sh'va, whether simple or 
compound under it, these not being ranked as vowels ; e. g. 
73 (Via), and ttS? (lie), 7K (do). 

In Hebrew, a syllable must always be begun by a consonant. 

8. A consonant and a short vowel do not form a syllable. For 
this purpose an additional consonant is necessary, and the syllable 
thus formed is sometimes called a mixed syllable ; as 1%, 13, 12, 
13, 1|l (bad, bed, bid, bod, bud). 

9. In the formation of syllables, after a short vowel, the voice 
must have something else to rest upon ; and for this purpose an 
additional consonant is necessary. The voice, on the contrary, 
rests so firmly on the long vowel that it cannot without assistance 
lay hold of the following consonant. 

10. These difficulties are avoided by means of an accent. For 
example, a short vowel may dispense with the following consonant 
if sustained by an accent as 3 (ba). And the voice may pass 
from a long vowel to a following consonant by the same means ; 
as 13 (bad). If however the accent is removed to another syllable, 
then the vowel in the first case must be lengthened, as 3 ; and in 
the second shortened, as 13 (bad). 

11. These principles of syllabification sometimes appear to be 
violated while they are not really so. Short vowels are sometimes 
long by position ; in which case the vowel apparently short will 
form a pure syllable, without the aid of an accent. As in the 
word fl$fi1/b, see Art. 19, and Analysis, No. 18, which is thus 
syllabled, nSrh"1JJ (m'ra-khe-pheth), where the pathakh in the 
ante-penult, syllable is long by position. The penult, syllable, 
though containing only a consonant and short vowel, is rendered 
pure by means of the accent, Nos. 9 and 10; and the ultimate 
is a mixed syllable, No. 8. 

12. It is to be observed that although in the foregoing table of 
vowels hholem and shurek are connected with the consonant 1, 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 7 

thus ), ), and hhirik gadol with *, thus \, the ) and * form no parts 
of these vowels. They are actually either radical letters or con- 
nected with the words in which they are found by grammatical 
accidence, and coalesce with the vowels in question in a way that 
will afterwards be pointed out. See Arts. 56 et seq. Strictly 
speaking, then, the points or dots are the vowels, and not the 
points and fulcra taken together. This view, to which the 
student's consideration should be carefully directed, will receive 
more particular attention in the sequel. 

(a) When hholem is found without las a fulcrum, and is thus 
connected with &? or W, which have a point on the right or left 
hand side respectively, that mark will stand for its own point and 
for the hholem likewise, in the following circumstances : thus, 
when W has no other vowel mark, e. g. i"Q&^ (so-neh); and when a 
consonant precedes W , which has no vowel of its own, as £'3 
(bosh). See Prof. Lee's Gr. Art. 52. 

sh'va and its substitutes. 

13. Sh'va at the commencement of a syllable is employed to 
assist in the enunciation of the former of two consonants which 
has not a vowel of its own, and has the sound of a very short e, 
much the same as is indispensable to the enunciation of the 
English consonant b when uttered by itself. When sh'va is at the 
end of a syllable, it is not pronounced, and is only used in that 
situation to shew that no vowel has been omitted. It is seldom, 
however, placed under a letter which is in the last syllable of a word. 

14. It hence follows that sh'va can only stand at the beginning 
or end of a syllable. In the former case it is pronounced, or 
vocal ; in the latter it is silent. Attention to the rules of sylla- 
bification already laid down will enable the learner to ascertain 
when it is vocal and when it is not. The general rule is that when 
it is preceded by a short vowel it is silent, as l^ti/fo (inal-mld) ; 
and when by a long one it is vocal, as D^TpIS (po-k'dim). See 
Prof. Lee's Gr. Art. 40, et seq. 

Note. — As neither sh'va nor its substitutes are regarded as 
vowels, they have no influence in the formation of syllables. 



8 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

15. The gutturals and 1 do not generally admit of sttva, but 
take one of its substitutes in its stead. Erom the circumstance 
that 1 in Hebrew is ranked as a guttural,, and that the letter p in 
Greek always has a spiritus asper, it is probable that this letter 
was pronounced by the Jews and Greeks with a guttural sound, 
similar to the Northumbrian burr. 

16. The substitutes of sh'va always commence a syllable, and 
like sh?va assist in the enunciation of the consonant with which 
they are connected, and which has not a vowel of its own. Prof, 
Lee's Gr. Art. 46. 



PATHAKH FURTIVE. 

17. Pathakh furtive is a mark of the same form as the vowel 
pathakh, and is occasionally placed under the gutturals Pi, ]}, H 
when final, and preceded by any of the long vowels but kamets, 
and is used to facilitate the enunciation of the consonant with which 
it is connected, as ITfc^ (ma-shi a kh), anointed. Pathakh furtive 
is however pronounced before its consonant, contrary to the rule 
applicable to vowels, among which it is not ranked. Pathakh 
furtive, however, is lost when a syllable is postfixed to a word in 
which it is found, as 5 7$ sing., D^H/K plur. Analysis, No. 3. 



DAGESH FORTE. 

18. Dag esh forte is a point inscribed in any letter but the 
gutturals, and doubles that letter. It is distinguished from dagesh 
lene, which is of the same form, in that it is always immediately 
preceded and followed by a vowel, or is preceded by a vowel and 
has stiva ; as *15|? (shib-ber), he broke in pieces-, T\%W {shib-Vru), 
they broke in pieces, shivered. Dagesh forte can never be found 
in a consonant which is the first or last of any word. Prof. Lee's 
Gr. 47. 

19. The gutturals and 1 do not admit of dagesh forte. In those 
cases therefore, where from analogy these letters should be doubled, 
the naturally short vowel immediately preceding is either regarded 
as long by position, or is actually lengthened; e.g. in Jl5£n9 the 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 9 

pathakh is known to be long by position, according to the rules of 
syllabification laid down in Arts. 8, 9, 10, 11. It is lengthened to 
compensate for the absence of dagesh forte in Ft, which that letter 
being a guttural does not receive, but which the pihel conjugation 
requires. See Analysis, No. 18, and the Paradigms of Verbs. In 
like manner the compensation is made by changing the short 
vowel into a long one ; as EI^H (ha-Ha-dam), the man, instead of 
D*"J'Xn (ha&-tta-dairi), the article being pointed with pathakh and 
dagesh, thus -Fl. In this case the kamets under T\ compensates for 
the absence of dagesh forte in the guttural X. In like manner 
\1}}fo (me-he-den), from Eden, for J*1J$? (mih-he-den), for HJ$?, 
compounded of |& from, and }TJ£ Eden. 



DAGESH LENE. 

20. Dagesh lene is a point inscribed only in the letters 1, 3, ^, 
T\, iD, D, Art. 3, to remove their aspiration. This generally takes 
place when they commence a syllable. 

(a) When preceded by any of the ^FlfcS letters, these aspirates 
do not admit of dagesh lene, although they do commence a syllable 
(Analysis, No. 10), unless the **)FIX letters are followed by a dis- 
junctive accent. See Prof. Lee's Gr., Arts. 109 et seq. 



MAPPIK. 

21. Mappik is a point inscribed only in the letter he, thus Ft, to 
shew that it is not quiescent, but that it still retains its power as a 
consonant. 



KAMETS AND KAMETS KHATEPH. 

22. Kamets and kamets khateph have the same form — . The 
general rule for distinguishing them is, that when — is in a mixed 
unaccented syllable it is short, or kamets khateph, as FtMFl 
(khoch-mah), toisdom, ^^ (ron-nu); otherwise it is kamets, as 
*Tp7 (la-mad), JHXFl (hd-d-rets). See the exceptions in Prof. Lee's 
Gr./ Arts. 5-4, 55 ; Ges. Gr., sec. 9, 12. 



10 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

23. The following is given as a brief exemplification of the rules 
already laid down, which will be further exemplified in the 
Analysis. 

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

| V|T T >•• J .v- T - ;.. A . V ; .ITT v.- •• J 

hd-d-rets v'eth hash-sha-ma-yim 'eth e lo-him ba-rd B're-shUfi 

1. K^.5 a pure syllable, Art. 7, with sA'pa pronounced, Art. 14, 
and dagesh lene in 3, Art. 20. fVfe? a mixed syllable with a long 
vowel, in consequence of its having an accent. Art. 9, 10. 

2. 3 a pure syllable, Art. 7, with dagesh lene in 3, Art. 19 ; 
fcO a pure syllable, fc$ being quiescent. 

3. /tf a pure syllable, Art. 7, with one of the substitutes of 
sftva, khateph segol, which has no effect in the formation of 
syllables, Art. 15, 16. DV7 a mixed syllable with a long vowel, 
owing to the accent, Art. 9, 10. 

4. HNt a mixed syllable with a long vowel, on account of the 
accent, Art. 9, 10. 

5. k^H a mixed syllable, Art. 8 ; W a pure syllable, 7, with 
dagesh forte in the &^, thereby doubling it, Art. 18 ; fo a pure 
syllable with a short vowel, rendered pure by the accent, Art. 10; 
D* a mixed syllable, Art. 8. The vowel here is not long khirik, 
but short khirik with god, and is yim, not Im. 

6. T\^\ an impure syllable with a long vowel and accent, Art. 10, 
the sh"va not being reckoned, Art. 14, Note. 

7. H a pure syllable, Art. 7; a, or Xa, a pure syllable, Art. 7; 
j*^. a mixed syllable, Art. 8.. 



CHAPTER III 



ACCENTS. 

24. Accents are divided into two great classes, in as far as they 
are serviceable to punctuation, viz. those which are disjunctive 
and those which are conjunctive. The former disjoin sentences 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 11 

and members of sentences, the latter shew what words or clauses 
of a sentence should be conjoined. In this respect the accents 
may be said to be the Masoretic commentary upon the Scriptures, 
in as far as the punctuation of a book can shew the meaning of 
an author. The accents likewise mark the tone-syllables of words ; 
and are also supposed to have been serviceable for regulating the 
cantillation of the Scriptures. 

25. The following Table exhibits the forms, names, and classi- 
fication of the accents. The conjunctive accents have all the same 
power. The accents peculiar to prose have f prefixed; those 
peculiar to poetry, *. 



I. DISJUNCTIVES. 

1. Pause Accents, or Disjunctives of the first class. 

1. : ~ Silluk. 

2. ~ Athnakh. 

*3. —1 Merka mahpach. 

2. Occasional Pause Accents, or Disjunctives of the second class. 

f4. r~ Tiphkha (posterins). In poetry it is merely a con- 
junctive, No. 30. 
*5. ~~ : Tiphhha (anterius), prepositive. 
f6. 1_ Zakeph katon. 
f7. H_ Zakeph gadol. 
f8. ^_ Segolta, postpositive. 

3. Lesser Disjunctives, or Disjunctives of the third class. 

*9. — Tbhir. 

10. -_ Wbkiah. 

*11. i_i B?bhi a h geresh. Geresh prepositive, 
f 12. — Pashta, postpositive. 

13. 2L. Zarka, postpositive. 
fl4. ~ Y'thibh, prepositive. 



\% HEBREW GRAMMAR, 

*15. L_ Geresh. 

fl6. "__ Garshayim. 

f 17. _J_ Telisha gedola, prepositive. 

fl8. 2L Karne phara. 

19. ^ Pa^er. 

20. I Pm£. 



II. CONJUNCTIVES. 

21. 7- Munakh. In poetry both superius and inferius, 

22. '_ Kadma. 

23. ~ Merka. 

f 24. ~ Merka kephula. 

25. — Mahpach. In poetry, superius or inferius\ in prose, 

inferius. 

26. 1_ Shalsheleth. 
f27. — Jta^tf. 

f28. 1_ Telisha ketanna, postpositive. 
29. — YemM. 

*30. ~ Tiphkha, posterius ; in poetry, a conjunctive. 
*31. _^ Zarka, in poetry a conjunctive, when not postpositive, 

26. Those accents which are called postpositive are always 
placed on the last syllable of the word, whether the tone-accent 
be on that syllable or not. Those which are called prepositive are 
always placed on the first syllable of the word, without reference 
to the situation of the tone accent, which in both cases can only 
be ascertained from analogy. 

27. Many words have two accents. If both accents are of the 

same form, that on the penult, syllable is the tone-accent, as ^fltt 
(to-hu), Analysis, No. 10 ; if of different forms, that on the last 

syllable is the tone-accent, as DHy.lp/^l (u-Vmo-h a dini), Analysis, 
No. 99. See Prof. Stewart's Grammar, Art. 93, seq. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 13 

TONE SYLLABLE. 

£8. The tone must either be on the ultimate or penultimate 
syllable. In the former case, the word is said to be JH/£? (?nil-rah), 
from beloio ; in the latter, 7$? 7ft (mil-hel), from above. 

29. The general rule is that the tone is on the last syllable. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

The exceptions to the above general rule arise out of the follow- 
ing reasons. 

(a) From the general principles of syllabification which have 
been already laid down. In such words as D?T| (ifda-yim), two 
hands, the accent must be on the penult, syllable, otherwise the 
syllabification instead of D?~ T must be D~ ^T, m which latter case 
the ultimate syllable would begin with a vowel, contrary to the 
general rule. See Articles 7, 8, 9, 10. 

(b) From the position of the letters, which prevent the utter- 
ance of the word without laying a stress upon the penult, syllable, 
as JJ7??7 Qu-mad-tcL). This is principally applicable to verbs, with 
the exception of those parts which take what are called the verbal 
grave affixes DH, and jPl, which always have the accent. It may 
be, perhaps, for the same reason, that all the persons of the hiphil 
conjugation which have yod characteristic in the penult, syllable, 
take the accent on that syllable, as IT^/H (liil-ml-dii), PlTfo/Pl 
(Jiil-ml-dah). The voice here cannot well pass over the yod with- 
out accenting it. The same is the case with yod introduced into 
certain persons of verbs whose last radical is he, as W/Jl [cja-li-thi), 
P0 v3H (tig-le-nali), from Pi 73 parad. 13 ; and also in such cases as 
^D (sab-bu), and PlISD (sab-bo-tha) ; also in such words as Pl^ 
{yam-mali), PlftPl Qiem-mali), and T\1pW {sham-mali), TIJ^ {^hha- 
re-clia) ; so with J epenthetic in such words as P^HD (ka-hhen-nah). 
In none of these cases can the voice pass over the accented syllable 
without a rest. 

(c) To mark the absence of one of the radical letters of the 
word, as Hftp (kd-mahy, from Dip, the accent making a sort of 
compensation for the absence of the ) ; so *D3, from p3 to under- 
stand; but ^3 they ouilt, from POS he built, has the accent on the 
last syllable, according to the general rule. 



14 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

(d) To mark a distinction between words of the same form, 
e. g. PHfo (md-rah), with, the accent on the penult., is the 3 pers. 
sing. f. of the pret. kal of the verb *")*}£ (ma-rar), to be Utter, 
whereas, PH^ (mah-raJi), with the accent on the ultimate syllable, 
is the 3 pers. sing. masc. of the pret. kal of PHfo (ma-rah), to rebel. 
The H, which marks the termination of the feminine gender, takes 
the accent, as ilt^K (l-shah), a woman, while words having PI 
paragogic, or T\ locale, take the accent on the penult. 

(e) To mark the stress laid upon a syllable from any sudden 
emotion of the speaker, as in the case of prohibitions with /5S> (al) 
not, as nSlfcTvJS (al-tochakh), do not reprove. In such cases, the 
accent, naturally on the ultimate, is removed to the penult., pro- 
bably because the stress of the voice, from the eagerness of the 
speaker, is laid on that syllable. 

(f) To mark classes of words having furtive or adopted vowels, 
i. e. vowels not naturally belonging to them, but introduced eu- 
phonice causa, as ^T\T\ (tohu) emptiness, the ground form of which 
is }nn, eupli. causa IPlH, and contracted ^\P\ ; so also, 1SD (se- 
pher) a book, from the ground form 1§D. The accent on the 
penult, syllable of these words shews them to belong to a nume- 
rous class, to be afterwards noticed, called segolates. The penult, 
vowel of these, however, being generally short, they must be 
accented on the penult, syllable, for the reasons stated in (a) of 
this article, as 15^. (de-bher) pestilence, ^Dfo (me-lek) a king, /J* 
(yi-gel) he reveals. See this subject fully treated in Prof. Lee's 
Gram., Art. 117 et seq. 



SHIFTING OF THE TONE-SYLLABLE. 

30. The accent is sometimes removed from its natural syllable 
to another for various reasons. 

(a) Vaw prefixed to the preterite of verbs makes a word Milrah 
which, according to the principles just laid down, would be 
Milhel, thus *fn3# (sha-bhar-ti) W^l- See 29 (b). 

(£) And vice versa. Vaiv prefixed to the present, generally 
makes a word Milhel which was Milrah, as "l£&\ IftXl. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 15 

(c) A word regularly milrah, if immediately followed by a tone- 
syllable, becomes milhel, as X2, *ti\T], regularly accented H u\T\ 9 
From this rule there are many exceptions. See Prof. Lee's Gr., 
Art. 120. 

{d) Pause accents frequently cause the tone to be shifted, as 
Iffi} (liish-sha-mer), for TpBTI. 

PAUSE ACCENTS. 

31. Pause-accents have the eifect of lengthening the vowels 
with which they are connected, as ti s fo, in pause U]f2. See Analysis, 
No. 50. The principles upon which vowels in pause are length- 
ened are as follow: — 1. The short vowels are changed into their 
corresponding long ones, viz. pathakh becomes kamets, as in the 
above examples, and segol, tsere. 2. When the syllable of a word, 
upon which a pause-accent falls, has lost a vowel in the course of 
inflection, the lost vowel is restored, and, if short, it is lengthened, 
thus )1u? in pause becomes )1u7, with the accent shifted from the 
ultimate to the penultimate syllable. See 28 (d). ^iti? is the 
3 pers. plur. pret. kal of 1£?7; in inflection the pathakh is lost, but 
in .pause it is resumed and lengthened, hence )1u? ; so ^lu? from 

F & ' itt » i ; • v 

Ifo/ 3 pers. pi. -pret.pih. of the same verb becomes in pause ^H©/. 
3. The class of words called segolates, which have segol substituted 
for the vowel of their ground form, euphonies causa, do not when 
in pause lengthen the segol into its corresponding long vowel, 
tsere, but lengthen the vowel of the ground form, as T?& a king, 
ground form *Zpti, in pause \?ft, and not ^[7??. See Arts. 105, seq. 

Note. Segolates, generally having the penult, vowel short, take 
kamets in pause, whatever may be the vowels of their ground 
forms. 

The accents are very fully treated of in Prof. Lee's, Nordheimer's, 
Gesenius's, and Stewart's Grammars, to which the student is 
referred. 



METHEG. 



32. Metheg ( — ) is a mark preceding the tone syllable, and at a 
greater or less distance from it, according to rules laid down in 
the Grammars of Prof. Lee, 125 et seq., Nordheimer, 62, 63, and 



16 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

Stewart, 85 et seq. It is a sort of secondary or half accent, similar 
to that in the first syllable of the English word undertake. 

MAKKAPH. 

33. Mahhaph is similar in form to our hyphen, and connects two 
or more words together, as j*^<1 /5 (hol-haarets) all the earth. 
From the circumstance that the word preceding Mahhaph has 
never a tone accent, it has been inferred by some that it is an accent 
itself. Prof. Lee's Grammar, 64 et seq. 132. Mahhaph and Metheg 
have been called euphonic accents. The use of Mahhaph depends 
chiefly on the principle that two conjunctive accents cannot be 
written in succession. If the sense requires that several words 
should be connected, it is done by Mahhaph. Ges. Gr., Art. 15; 
Rem. II. 5. 



CHAPTER IV. 



ON THE GENERAL PRINCIPLES CONNECTED WITH 
EUPHONY WHICH AFFECT THE ETYMOLOGY 
OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 

Attention to the following rules for the contraction of vowels 
and consonants, will greatly assist the student in tracing the arcana 
of the forms of words, in discovering their etymologies, and in ac- 
counting for the differences between the regular and irregular 
Paradigms of the Hebrew verbs. Indeed, without attention to these 
rules, the student will meet with difficulties on every hand. I 
believe Prof. Lee was the first who treated this subject in a distinct 
and satisfactory manner ; and from his Grammar almost the whole of 
the following rules have been abridged. The student will see many 
of these rules exemplified in Article 131, and likewise in thf, 
Analysis, passim. See Prof. Lee's Gr., Arts. 72 et seq. 

34. The *1P1&$ letters (Art. 3) occasionally lose their consonantal 
power, and become quiescent in the sound of the preceding vowel, 
so that the pronunciation of the word will continue the same, 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 17 

whether these letters be written or not, and they are consequently 
often omitted, as HpS for "iDlfi « visitor, in both cases pronounced 
po-ked, and HD^ for H1H1K in both cases pronounced 6-thoth 
signs. 

35. Hence, when sh'va, or one of its substitutes, happens to be 
initial, and to precede one of the ^PIN letters, a contraction takes 
place, by which both the sh'va and the ^P!X letter are rejected, 
and the vowel of the rejected letter is substituted in the place of 
the rejected sh'va, as W (seth) for J"lNb> (s'eth), TlK? for "flNPlS 
(Vha-or), and 7^35 (mabh-dil) for T^SPlfo (m'habh-dil). Ana- 
lysis 52. 

36. When any of the ^HK letters terminating a word has no 
vowel either immediately preceding or following, it is often 
rejected; as, ^3^ (sha-bhi), for PP3GP a captive. When not rejected, 
it is said to be otiose, as K^ (jge), a valley. 

37. Hence it is, that PI standing as the third letter of a root and 
losing its vowel, is rejected; as, /}\ for Pi 7.JP, originally TwT, and 
MT! euph. causa SO* for P1XT, originally ' HN7. , and 1J£ for jljjf*. 
Anal. No. 264. This is termed apocope, and takes place in the 
presents of verbs, in consequence of the accent having been 
drawn backward, as in Art. 30 (b). See also Analysis, No. 26. 

38. Any of the letters t> 3 ), Pi, when preceded and followed by 
a vowel, will occasionally be dropped; as, D^HP? for DHWl&B 
i" visited them ; Dp for Dip he stood. Lee's Gr., 75. 

39. Either of the letters yod or nun, when initial, and nun 
generally when terminating a syllable not the last, and having a 
sh'va, will be dropped ; as, JIT? for TFD\ bearing a child ; fc^ij for 
$yi approach, 2 pers. sing, imperat. kal of £03, and $R for $ft\ 
3 sing. pres. kal of the same ; and ^PlPD for Wnj, Anal. No. 171. 
In this latter case the absence of the nun is compensated by dagesh 

forte. The same thing happens when / in Ptp7 he took, is in a 
similar situation ; as Pip? for Tiu7\ he takes ; and Pip for ftp*? take. 

40. In the cases of * and 3 initial with sffva, referred to in 
Article 39, the sound is so feeble that these letters can be easily 
dispensed with, and the utterance besides is somewhat difficult; 
and the 3 and / are omitted in the latter case, on account of the 
harshness of sound which they produce in such situations. 

c 



18 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

41. When the last two letters of any root, and occasionally of 
derivatives, happen to be the same, one of them is dropped; as 
!1D for ^3? he surrounded i U7 for Sj?, Analysis, No. 624; DJJ 
for DftJ? a people. The dropped radical, however, will be virtually 
restored by dagesh forte, on the addition of a pronominal or other 
affix; as ^D they surrounded, Wjl Ms people. So in English, 
instil, instilled. 

42. Letters of the same organ are occasionally exchanged for 
one another ; see Art. 2, note. As — 

1. Gutturals . . . F\T\$ or HM^ he tvas weak. 

T T T T 

2. Palatals .... I^D or IDD he shut up. 

3. Linguals . . . WOT or £jHh he robbed. 

4. Dentals .... T>% pJJ, or D7JJ he exidted. 

5. Labials . . . . U, 3j, or t|5 £/*e 5ac^. 

43. In a few instances, letters of different organs, but in some 
respects similar in sound, are exchanged for one another. This 
generally takes place in the case of letters of adjacent organs. 

1. Gutturals for Palatals; as TIP! or /^ to whirl round; ^tl, 
^3|j or *D5 he combined; ^Pl or U¥D he cut; JHT or p*T? Ae 
scattered. 

2. Dentals for Linguals ; as, H5? or FDb, Chald. H3&? ^e s^, 
or sacrificed; ^J or ^fcDj Ae watched; D^fi, BHFju HlPl Ae 
scratched, or engraved; Chald. *1^£, Heb. ^3 A<? interpreted. 
The organs of speech of some persons are so formed, that they 
cannot utter the letter s, and in attempting to do so they enunciate 
th. This marks the approximation between the linguals and 
dentals or sibilants. 

3. Liquids for one another, as ^117 or VPlJ he oppressed. 

44. The *1)1K letters, considered either as consonants or 
quiescents, will be occasionally changed for one another, par- 
ticularly when the pronunciation of the word is not materially 
affected; as, M^fe? or Wfb$ rags; &n| or ttjfc Ae cratferf; N£ 
or K^l Ae we?z£ ow£. 

In like manner 3 is occasionally found in place of one or 
other of the ^IPltf letters ; as, !W3 or i¥* Ae se£ «p. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 19 

45. The letters of a word are sometimes transposed ; as, /DJZ) 
for /Dp he was foolish. 

Note. — These changes in the letters do not otherwise affect the 
grammar of the language than that they point out to the student 
what roots, etc., are said to be cognate; i.e. are related to one 
another in their radical letters, and have the same, or nearly the 
same signification. 

46. When the T\ of the hithpahel species, or conjugation, pre- 
cedes any of the dental letters, a transposition and occasionally a 
change of that letter will take place ; as in the first case, ySJ^pH 
for ?3pnn he loaded himself-, in the second, p^.t^!"! for p^HH 
he justified himself. 

47. But when a letter of the same organ with H follows it, both 
will coalesce with dagesh ; as, "I^Pl for ^3*1^^? 3 sing. pret. hith. 
of ^3^ he spoke. 

This coalescence is called assimilation, which sometimes extends 
to other letters; as, *l5Jn for ^?fin, from HD| he was pure. In 
this case it is to be observed, that the T) and T are letters of 
adjacent organs. 

48. Letters are sometimes prefixed to facilitate the pronuncia- 
tion ; as, /^ftfitf for 7^Fl yesterday. Sometimes for modifying 
the significations of words ; as *lp^ most cruel, from "ITS cruel. 

49. Letters are occasionally dropped, as in the case of D ter- 
minating the plurals of nouns, when they happen to be in the 
construct, state; as, DH¥£ 'B© for DH¥£ E^D horses of Egypt; 
and also when accompanied by pronominal affixes, thus, *£?2 my 
hones, from D*£¥& Analysis, No. 298. 

ON THE CONTRACTIONS WHICH TAKE PLACE IN THE VOWELS. 

50. Whenever any vowel not homogeneous in sound with either 
of the letters \ ) (see Ait. 3 (b), and Prof. Lee's Gr., Art. 37), 
happens to precede such letter, a contraction will be formed from 
the combination partaking of the sound of both. 

1. Pathakh preceding ) will become ') ; as, 3*OT for H*#V for 
SMSfyT, Art. 85, 3 sing. pres. hiph. of 1^ or 2W) he sat, parad. 8; 
and rfi/b, contracted T\\t2 death. 

c 2 



20 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

2. Vav preceded by kamets khatef, kibbuts, segol, or tsere, will 
become ); as, T?V for lh)l or T?V, from ibw or nSflT, Art. 35, 
Ae ts begotten ; D*lp for Dip standing ; ft\j?fe for fip??? reigning, 
kingdom ; tflft&\ for 111^ 3 sing. pret. MA. of rih'^ or W A<? 
was &tt# ; ^iPlS for 1FQ emptiness. Analysis, Nos. 10 and 11. 

3. In like manner, god preceded by pathakh or sKm will 
become quiescent in tsere ; as, JVJ for fV5 house ; so ^^ ^ e shall 
sit, for SB?* 

4. When segol or feere precedes \ the contraction will take place 
in \; as, fWSO for JW&T) beginning, and ^H for ^H Aa{f. 

5. In like manner, when sh?va initial precedes any long or short 
vowel, or a substitute for sh'va follows a short one, a contraction 
may take place, in which sh'va or its substitute will disappear ; 
as __l. n&b> for fW elevation; fiKtlj?? for W1(h meeting; 
TV&tiT) for JVJ^H beginning, Analysis, No.l; and— 2. *\btib for 
*)h$h saying, Analysis, No. 133. 

6. Either pathakh or kamets preceding a guttural letter that has 
kamets, is frequently changed into segol, for the sake of euphony; 
as, D*T)5 f° r E^lin the mountains ; D^Pl the cities, for S^H. 

7. On the other hand, segol is sometimes changed into kamets, 
for the sake of euphony, when another kamets precedes; as, 
pNh for p$n, Analysis, No. 7. 



CHAPTER V. 



ON THE CHANGES OF VOWELS. 

51. Two circumstances are to be observed in regard to the 
changes of vowels. 

The first is the place of the accent. 
The second, the etymology of the word. 

52. Prefixes, with oiie exception (Art. 30), have no influence 
upon the place of the accent, or consequently upon the vowel 
changes. These changes only take place in words augmented by 
affixes, or by a change in the situation of the accent. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 21 

53. Changes of vowels take place only in the ultimate and 
penultimate syllables of words, but sometimes in both at the same 
time. 

54. The vowels in Hebrew are either mutable or immutable; 
i.e. some of them may be changed or lost when the words in 
which they stand are augmented by affixes. Some of them, on 
the contrary, are never so, whatever additions may be made to 
the words. 

55. The general principle by which the changes of vowels are 
regulated, is thus excellently stated by Prof. Lee, Gr., Art. 52. — 
"Were words augmented in addition to their primitive vowels, 
they would become inconveniently long ; and, on the other hand, 
as those vowels which have been termed immutable constitute the 
distinctive character of the word in which they are found, per- 
spicuity forbids that any change should take place in them ; other- 
wise the peculiar forms of such words would be lost, and with 
them the sense intended by the writers." What follows is intended 
to illustrate this general principle. 

56. The vowels called kholem, shurek, and long khirik, are, 
properly speaking, dots or points, above, below, or in the bosom 
of the letters with which they are connected ; and they are con- 
joined with vaw and yod by a sort of coalescence or contraction. 
See Arts. 12, 50. 

In such cases the vaw and yod are actually consonants, either 
constituting radical letters of the word, as D^lD a horse, of which ) 
is the second radical (all radical words when uncontracted being 
triliteral) ; or are serviles, used for the purpose of altering or 
modifying the sense of the primitive word, as in *1uw and *V&?ti. 

57. It is upon this principle that the vowels kholem, shurek, and 
long khirik, are immutable when they have vaw and yod as fulcra ; 
thus, ), 'I, \ : the ) and * in these cases being consonants and com- 
ponent parts of the word. 

These fulcra, however, sometimes disappear, Art. 34 ; in that 
case they are represented by the original vowels, which never do 
so. Thus, *V5 falloio, contracted 1), with khirik long and im- 
mutable ; and 1f$w learner, contracted *!&/, with kholem long and 
immutable. The points in the contracted forms are the real 
vowels. 



22 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

When the fulcrum of shurek disappears, Art. 34, the point in its 
bosom is never introduced into that of the preceding consonant, 
but hibhuts vicarious, as it is called, which is immutable, is sub- 
stituted in its place ; thus, *T\1j7 on the disappearance of the 1 
becomes "]u), not 1-^7. 

58. It hence follows as a geneial rule, that 1, \ and ), are always 
immutable when found in triliteral roots ; as in T))f2 death, D^lD a 
horse, and Tp a wall; thus, ID^ID his horse, "p^D my horse, DDD^lD 
your horse. 

59. The same is the case when ) and * are serviles, Art. 56. The 
alteration or modification, in this case, made in the primitive word 
in Hebrew by means of servile letters introduced into its bosom, 
is generally accomplished in English by a termination. Thus, 
from visit we have visitor, visiting, and visited. In Hebrew, by 
the insertion of the servile letter between the first and second 
radical of 1p^ we nave *f jj3 visitor or visiting ; by its insertion 
between the second and third, we have *Tlp|) visited. It will hence 
appear, that the ) ^nd ^ can no more be dispensed with in these 
words without destroying their peculiar meanings, than the ter- 
minations, or, ing, or ed, can be dropped from the word visit 
without destroying the characters of the words formed by these 
terminations. 

60. Another illustration of Prof. Lee's principle may be taken 
from the word B^M?, the participle of the hiphil form of &5H& 
was holy ; in hiph. ^^Dm made holy ; in the part. &*^iT}fo 9 contr. 
by Art. 35 into B^pD one that makes holy, one sanctifying, a 
sanctifler. It is to be observed, that the characteristics of this 
word are \ and 11, which are, when taken together, equivalent to 
our terminations fier an&fying. When contracted into W*ljpti 9 the 
absence of H is marked by the vowel pathakh under £D, and no 
further contraction can take place without destroying the character 
of the word. For these reasons, both the vowels in this word are 
immutable, and consequently remain unaltered be the affix what it 
may ; thus, D^pft sanctifler, IB^pfc his sanctifler, &5f ^j?£ 
your sanctifler. 

These principles are applicable to all similar cases ; the apparent 
exceptions will be pointed out and explained in the Analysis. 



HEBEEW GRAMMAR. 23 

61. It may likewise be laid clown as a general rule, that the 
vowels in all contracted syllables are immutable. Thus, the 
pathakh in Tfo/tt, contr. for TO/L^ Art. 35, is immutable ; and 
so is khirik in *0^?, contr. for "OipltD, Art. 39. An acquaintance 
with the forms and analogies of words is necessary, to enable the 
student to understand all the cases in which these contractions 
take place. Upon this subject see Art. 34, et seq. 

62. All short vowels followed by stiva or dagesh in mixed 
penult, syllables are immutable, as in the penult, syllables of 1D?\ , 

t ; • 9 " — 

(a) In most of these cases, there is probably a sort of contrac- 
tion ; thus, the 3 sing. pres. kal of *"!??/ he learned, is 1ft /\ The 
ground form of the present is *To?, which, with the pronominal 
prefix, becomes HoT, which, according to a general principle of 
contraction, when two sh'vas stand together at the beginning of a 
syllable, becomes *lu?\ The khirik, which is a substitute for 
sh'va, which is not reckoned as a vowel, cannot disappear. See 
Art. 14, note. 

63. It may be laid down as a general rule, that the long vowels, 
kamets, tsere, and kholem (which by analogy has not 1 for its 
fulcrum), are immutable. Thus, 1*2*1 a zvord, construct form 1^\, 
HpiiS a visitor, pi. D'HpiS visitors ; 1u?\ he learneth, or shall learn, 
^ntfp*! they learn, or shall learn. 

The student must here observe, that when sli'va takes the place 
of any vowel in a word, that vowel is said to be lost. 

64. To these rules there are apparent exceptions ; thus, tsere in 
P5 between, is immutable, being a contraction for j?5- The kamets 
in the penult, syllable of ffi~)& a horseman, is immutable, being a 
compensation for the absence of dagesh in 1, the real form of the 
word being 8H|) ; see Arts. 19 and 61. And the kholem in *H*12 
was blessed, is immutable, being in like manner a compensation for 
the absence of dagesh, Gr. 19 ; the natural form of the word being 
*H^2l (bor-racli). 

A certain acquaintance with the language is necessary in order 
to the recognition of these exceptions. 

65. When a word is augmented by an affix, one or more of its 



24 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

vowels may be lost ; when that is the case, sh'va is substituted in 
the place of the lost vowel, as "fpiiS, plur. DHpiS). Art. 63. 

66. Affixes to words are either syllabic or asyllabic. A syllabic 
affix is that which of itself forms an additional syllable to a word 
without the aid of any letter in the word to assist in its enunciation. 
An asyllabic affix is one commencing with a vowel, and which 
only forms a syllable by the help of the last consonant of the word 
to which it is affixed. Of the former kind is the pron. affix DD 
your ; of the latter, the plur. termination l^— • 

67. If then the asyllabic affix DV* is joined to such words as DJ? 
a people, or 13 pure, the last letters of these words respectively 
must be taken to enounce it. Thus, if it is added to *)§, ground 
form 1115, Arts. 36, 37 ; it becomes DH|l (ba-rim), pure ones. In 
the case of D& contr. for DftJJ or D/bJ£, Art. 41, the plur. is not 
D*£?J? (ha-mim), but D^2 (ham-mim), peoples ; the point dagesh 
marking the original character of the word. 

68. If, however, the syllabic augment D3 be added to these 
words, the case will be different. In the former case, we shall 
have not W"&, but MIS. See Art. 10. 

69. "When the affix is joined to DJ2, the case is different ; in the 
first place, because the syllable is impure, with or without the 
accent ; in the second place, because the third radical, dropped in 
the simple form (Art. 41), reappears through dagesh forte in the 
compound word, which becomes &5^?5? (ham-m'chem), your people. 

It hence appears, that the changes of vowels in these cases 
depend upon the original forms of the words, with which the 
affixes are connected. See Prof. Lee's Gr., Arts. 93, 94, 95. 

70. On a change of vowels, the general rule is that short vowels 
will be changed for their corresponding long ones, and vice versa ; 
thus, HJ? a cloud, with the accent removed to the pron. affix Q35J? 
your cloud; and 15 pure, masc, TXl^ fern., and [5 a son i constr. 
from j3. This is termed direct correspondence. 

71. When this is not the case, the correspondence is termed 
oblique, which is comparatively rare. The oblique correspondence 
is that of kamets or pathakh, with tsere or segol ; tsere or segol, 
with long or short khirik; and kholem, with kibbuts, 



HEBEEW GEAMMAE. 25 

72. Oblique correspondence, however, seems to be rather ap- 
parent than real. For example, TJ) a fleece, with the pronominal 
affix j, becomes TT3, where TU might have been expected. The 
correspondence, in this case, appears to be oblique ; the ground 
form of this word is, however, ?T3, contracted into U, Art. 41 ; 
which euphonies causa, or by-way of compensation for the absence 
of the third radical, becomes T5. On the annexation of the pro- 
nominal affix, there is merely a resumption of the original vowel 
with dagesh, which marks the original character of the word, 
hence T?il. So that the oblique correspondence is rather apparent 
than real. 

73. A great many words in Hebrew lose their original vowels 
and substitute others in their place, for the sake of euphony ; 
but when these words are augmented by pronominal or other 
affixes, the new vowels, then unnecessary on the ground of 
euphony, disappear, and the original vowel is resumed. Thus, 
the original form V1^ earth, land, becomes, euphonies causa, T*1$, 
vid. inf. Art. 105; to which, if the pron. aff. ) is added, the addition 
is made not to the new but to the old form, and hence IXIK his 
land-, so the original form *P5 a garment, becomes, euph. causa, 
1-55, and with pron. aff. 11-?5 his garment ; and so \?tl age, be- 
comes in like manner H/H, and with pron. aff. Il/Pl his age. 
Hence it appears that an acquaintance with ihe analogy of the 
word, which can only be gained by a certain amount of knowledge 
of the language, is indispensable in order to ascertain the changes 
that the vowels undergo in such circumstances. 

74. When any affix, taking the accent, is joined to a word, the 
penult, vowel, if mutable, is lost, and sh'va is substituted, to assist 
in the enunciation of the consonant which lost its vowel, as "Dl a 
word, PTEft her word. 

tt ; 

To the foregoing general rule there are certain exceptions, 
which seem to be called for on the ground of perspicuity. Thus, 
I^H he spoke, on the annexation of the fern, termination, which 
takes the accent, becomes ftl^ s ? w s P°he, where the ult. vowel is 
lost instead of the penult., as required by Art. 71. According to 
that article, it would be M1!2l. In that case, however, there 

TT • 



26 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

would be no distinction in sound between the words indicating 
she spoke and her word. 

75. But if the penultimate vowel is immutable, the ultimate, if 
mutable, is lost on the postfixing of an augment, which takes the 
accent; thus, Xfe visitor, Art. 59; f. PHplS, pi. DHj^B visitors. 

76. But if both vowels of the word are immutable, or if the 
word is a monosyllable with an immutable vowel, then no change 
takes place, be the affix what it may ; thus, £?^M?, plur. D^^p^ 
sanctifiers, Art. 60; and D^lD a horse, plur. D^D^D horses, Art. 58. 



CHAPTER VI. 

GENDERS OF NOUNS. 

77. Nouns have two genders in Hebrew, the masculine and the 
feminine. Those words which are of both are said to be of the 
common gender. 

78. Words masculine are known either by their termination or 
meaning, and are — 

1 . Names and offices of men. 

2. Words signifying people, as S^to, D"T$ Edomite, Moabite, 
rivers, mountains, and months. 

3. All nouns not ending in T\ — or T\ servile. 

79. Words feminine are — 

1. Names and offices of women; names of regions, as iTJIIV 
Judea, and of cities ; and nouns signifying the double members 
of the body, whatever be the termination. 

2. Nouns terminating in H~ or D servile. 

80. A considerable number of nouns are of the common gender, 
such as names of birds, beasts, metals, etc. 

Formation of the Feminine from the Masculine Gender. 

81. The feminine is formed from the masculine gender by the 
terminations JT— or H — , in which latter case the gutturals have fV~. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 27 

82. The termination Pi — is the more common; the other is 
chiefly found in participles of the hiphil conjugation, and is the 
alternate form of participles of the other conjugations. See this 
subject minutely treated in Prof. Lee's Gr., Art. 136. 

83. The termination Pt~ takes the accent in the one case, and 
the penult, segol in the other. 

84. It will hence follow, that when the vowels of a word are 
mutable, on the annexation of the feminine termination a change 
will take place, upon the principles already laid down. Thus, the 
penult, vowel of 7l1| a great man, being mutable, the feminine is 
PPTTll a great woman, the ult. vowel being lost according to Art.74. 
But the penult, vowel of *7Dli3 being immutable, Arts. 56, 59, and 
the ultimate mutable, the fern, is JTlpiB, Art. 75. Lee's Gr. 136, 137. 

The other form is PfTplSD. 
•• It- 
Formation of Duals. 

85. The dual number is formed from the singular by the addi- 
tion to it of the termination D\— , as DV a dag, D?DV {ijo-ma-ijini), 
two dags. The accent, as required by the general laws of sylla- 
bification, is always on the penult, syllable. See Art. 10. 

When the vowels are mutable, the changes will be regulated 
according to the principles already laid down. 

86. All feminine nouns endinar in Pi — , chansre the Pi into Pi be- 
fore receiving the dual termination ; as, PljD?? a queen, D?Pl3/D 
two queens. See Lee's Gr., Art. 138. 

The principles of the formation of the feminines of segolate 
nouns will be shewn in Art. 110. 

Formation of the Plural Number of Nouns. 

86*. Nouns of the masculine gender form the plural number by 
the addition of D^— to the singular, as D^lD a horse, ^D^l) horses. 
As the affix takes the accent, the changes of vowels take place 
according to the principles already laid down ; as, ""Q^I a word, 
tFTjl words, Art.74; and 1^3 a visitor, DHpl3 visitors, Art.75. 
Prof. Lee's Gr., Art. 139. 



28 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

Formation of the Plural Number of Nouns Feminine. 

87. The termination used to designate the plural of nouns 
feminine is T\) ; as, "TH a generation, plur. fiilH generations. 

88. When the termination of the singular is H— , or ft— , or T\~, 
these terminations are rejected before the plural affix as h^TplS or 

rnjjjs sing., rvhjpte P iur. 

89. Feminine nouns ending in IV— or ft)—, have T\) in the plur. ; 
but in the former case the god is doubled, as TV135? « Hebrew 
ivoman, has, in the plural, filHlJ? Hebrew toomen ; in the latter, \ 
is prefixed, and the vowel hibbuts is substituted for shurek, as 
n^7^ a kingdom, J"lVj?fo kingdoms. 

90. The plural of a considerable number of nouns masculine is 
found with the feminine termination T\\—, and vice versa. Ex. 
of the former case, IN "father , fVQN plur. fathers ; of the latter, 
rHN fern. «/r tree, DvN plur.^r frees. See Prof. Lee's Gram., 
Art. 140; and Introduction, Part III., on the subject of Gender. 

Cases. 

91. There are no cases of nouns in Hebrew as in Latin and 
Greek. The variation of meaning expressed by cases in these 
languages, is expressed in Hebrew by words, or fragments of 
words prefixed. 

Of the Definite State of Construction. 

92. By the definite state of construction is meant the juxta 
position of two nouns not signifying the same thing ; the latter is 
added for the purpose of defining, or otherwise qualifying that 
immediately preceding it, as niTV T hand of Jehovah. 

93. As such words are intended to represent one definite idea, 
they seem to have been regarded in the light of one compound 
word only, and hence the governing tone accent has been sup- 
posed to rest upon the last of the words so construed ; the vowels 
of the preceding word have, in consequence, been contracted or 
rejected as far as possible. Lee's Gr., Art. 143. 

(a) It is upon a similar principle that compound words have 
been formed in other languages ; as, HIIT HN*V fear of God, in 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 29 

German, ©Otte^furcfyt; PlilT H^7 taught of God, in Greek, 
QeohLhaicTOL ; HPQt? jN¥ sheep of slaughter, in German, <Sd)laci)t- 
<Sd)afe ; PlD*7KPl fc^K maw of the field, in German, Hermann, in 
Latin, agricola. Storrii Analogia, p. 105-6. 

94. Norms having mutable vowels in their ultimate and penult. 
syllables, will generally change that in the ultimate, if long, into 
its corresponding short vowel, and reject that in the penult.; as, 
fiJH? ^3^ word of Jehovah, from ^^H- Sometimes both vowels 
are lost, as DPPK ^1 words of God. ^he plur. of W is Dm^r, 
where only one of the vowels is lost, Art. 74 ; with both vowels 
lost, it becomes D^S^ and according to Art. 63, D* > * , ]3* ? L an( i 
according to Art. 49, ^3^!- 

95. All feminine nouns ending 1 in Pi — will, when in the construct 
state, change the Pi— into tlr? ; as DTI 7$ TYlift laic of God, from 
Pni'Pl, the penult, vowel of which is immutable. Art. 56. 

96. All masculine sinondars in Pi — have Pi — in the construct 
state, as DPH3^$ Pljptt cattle of Abraham, from Pljpft. 

97. That class of nouns denominated segolates, is not subject to 
any change when hi the construct state, as {$713 j**]^? land of 
Canaan. Those nouns which are classed under the segolates, but 
which are not properly so (see infra, Art. 112 seq.), are contracted 
in the construct state when susceptible of contraction, as HIPP JV3 
house of God, contracted for TV|1 or fftl Art. 50, (3). 



CHAPTEK VII. 

OF THE PRONOUNS SEPARABLE 
AND INSEPARABLE. 

98. The separable pronouns are the following. 

Sing. Com. Gender. 

*}N or "±X /. 

1 rERSON I ' '• T 

j Plural. 

ttPtitf sometimes ^Ptt . . . We. 



30 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 





f Sing. Masc. 




jlfitt sometimes ft& for FOK . 

t - t - t : - 




Plural. 


2 Person 


dm for x$m 


< 


Sing. Fem. 




fifc? sometimes ^flK for fi)K . 




Plural. 




}fi& sometimes i"tifiK for JJ-IJIK 




Sing. Masc. 




«n 




Plural. 


3 Person { 


DPI occasionally TlfpH . . . 




Sing. Fem. 




fcTPl anciently K1H .... 




Plural. 




jPl occasionally Pl|Pl . . . 



Thou. 



You. 



Thou. 



You. 



He. 



They. 



She. 



They. 



Note. The many cases which occur in which personal pronouns 
of the one gender are used instead of those of the other, have 
given rise to the supposition that anciently all pronouns were 
considered of the common gender. 

Inseparable Pronouns. 

99. These are abbreviations of the foregoing pronouns, and are 
always attached to some preceding word. They may be attached 
to nouns, particles, or verbs. When attached to nouns or par- 
ticles, their forms are as follow. When connected with verbs 
they are somewhat different, as will afterwards appear. 

1. Table or Inseparable Pronouns. 



For the 

1 Person 



ng. Com. Gen. For Nouns Sing. 

\K or *2!M we have *-,'".. 



Plur. 

aroa or urn 



«- or a- 

i r 



For Nouns Plur. 
*— my, mine. 



^y , ~ our, ours. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 



31 



For the 

2 Person 



Sing. Masc. For Nouns Sing. For Nouns Plur. 

Pltttf or JJX we have "*J or *?K PO~ or *th *?p- ^?/ or ^Awe. 
Plur. 

D£l& . . „ D3 • • • • &y~Z your ox yours. 

Sing. Fern. 
Plur. 



^J or *sf— IP— • or *5fc" £% or ^/w'we. 



3 Person 



Sing. Masc. 

Wn Ave have VA^A h or ST- V~, ^Poet.^-^, 

Plur. [«^. 

DH „ DPI, D-, Poet. 1i&- DPP- Poet, itf- 
Sing.Fem. [their , theirs . 

KTlorKlPl n-,n— H- . . ST— Aer*,Aer. 

I' • T * |T ^ T |V T |V ^ 

Plur. 

|p or Pl|p \T\, }p, }— rU- . fpV tifetr, tf*fo. 

2. In affixing these inseparable pronouns to singular nouns not 
ending with a vowel, the form must be taken which is preceded 
by one, here called the vowel of Union, and vice versa. 

3. The affixes, D?, |3, DPI, JPI, are termed grave, because they 
always take the tonic accent. The others are termed light. 

4. The general rules already laid down will regulate the change 
of vowels in the cases of all words to which pronominal affixes are 
attached. 

5. A word connected with any of these pronominal affixes, may 
be said to be in a state of construction with it. The only difference 
is, that instead of the latter word (here the pronoun) being written 
at length, it has been abbreviated. See Prof. Lee's Gr., Art. 144. 

On the Demonstrative Pronouns. 

100. The demonstrative pronouns are, PIT masc, HIT fern., PPl 
or *lT this, sing, com., PlpK sometimes 7^ these, plur. com. 

On the Relative Pronoun. 

101. There is but one relative pronoun in the Hebrew Ian- 



S2 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

guage, viz., 1$K who, which, that, which is common to every 
gender and number. 

(a) This pronoun is frequently prefixed to other words in an 
abbreviated form ; as, ■#, •#; W or &, as «ttti tfW for nS 1^ 
^£0 ivho hath not given us. 

Note. This contracted form of the relative is hardly ever used 
except by the later Hebrew writers, but by them so frequently 
that it forms a peculiarity of the later style. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OE THE FORM OF THE NOUN. 

102. Nouns are simple, derivative, or compounded. Simple 
nouns consist of three radical letters, which, however, may be 
contracted according to rules already laid down. Art. 41. Deriva- 
tive nouns are those which have additional letters in the beginning, 
end, or middle of the word, in order to modify the meaning of the 
simple or primitive noun. These letters are one, or more of those 
that go under the technical name of VfO&^ri. Compounded 
nouns are those which are made up of one or more separate words. 
This last class of words, however, is very uncommon in the Hebrew 
language. 

103. The simple forms may be divided into two classes, the 
former of which, from their peculiarities, are termed segolates ; the 
latter primitive nouns only. 

104. Segolate nouns are those which, in their ground form, have 
but one primitive vowel followed by two consonants, forming a 
harsh sound, in consequence of which they adopt another vowel, 
for the sake of euphony. The new vowel thus introduced being 
generally segol, the name of segolates has hence been given to this 
class of words. 

105. These segolates are said to be of the (a), (e), (i), or (o) 
class, according as one or other of these letters is found in the 
ground form of the word. As an example of each of these classes, 



HEBREW GRAMMAR, 3$ 

we have — 1. 1J7& a king; 2. T7H an age; S. *]33 a garment; 
4. $!p holiness. 

106. For the sake of euphony, the first of these becomes ifrfo; 
and for further euphony, the original vowel conforms to the 
assumed one, and becomes ^I/ft. If the second radical be a 
guttural, as in *]jp, the assumed, or furtive vowel, as it is some- 
times called, is pathahh, as ^y} ; sometimes the latter vowel only 
takes pathahh, as JHT. Analysis, No. 85. This peculiarity arises 
from the circumstance that the (a) is a guttural sound. 

107. In regard to the (e) class, l/H becomes 1 /H. There is 
another form of this class, viz. p/H, which becomes p/T\ a portion ; 
the accent being still upon the penult., though not required by 
the rules of syllabication. 

108. The word *"03, 0I * the third or (i) class, becomes first 1^, 
and then "l??. 

109. The word VHp, of the fourth or (o) class, becomes Wlp, 
no other change taking place. 

109*. The ground form of the plural of all these four classes 
may be said to be the same, inasmuch as they have all pathahh 
under the second radical, and sh'va simple or compound under 
the first. The fourth class has always hhateph hamets under its 
first radical, as representing its hholem, and indicating its class. 
The plural ground forms are these : — 1. T?ft; 2. *1/H, other form, 
p/D ; o. H^3 ; 4. BHD. And the plurals founded upon these 
ground forms are — 1. D^ft; 2. D^PI and D*pSn ; 3. DH^ ; 

4. D'Bhjj, 

110. It will be observed that the new forms of three of these 
classes are the same, viz. — 1. T?£? ; 2.\)T\; and, 3.1^3. Their 
original forms, and consequently the classes to which they respec- 
tively belong, are only known when they are connected with 
pronominal or other suffixes, which are attached not to their new 
but to their ground forms. For example, the pronominal suffix 1 
his, is not attached to T%, "PH, and ""03, the new. but to ^Hfo, 
T?H, and H33, the old or ground forms ; and hence we have 13% 
his king, iTpH 7ms «(7^, and 1^3 7*/s garment. The same rule is 
adopted in regard to Wlp, only the hholem must be shortened on 



34 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

the removal of the accent, which the suffix takes ; hence we have 
Ifc^Hp (kod-sho), his holiness. 

The reason of this is, that on the addition of a syllable to the 
ground form, the second and third radicals are separated, and the 
harsh sound is thus avoided; as, ^pfo a king, 113/fo (mal-chah), 
a queen. 

111. The segolates undergo no change in the construct state ; 
thus, D^V£ ^|?J? king of Egypt. 

112. Such words as the following have likewise been classed 
among the segolates, ex. gr. : T\)J2 death, of which the ground form 
is rflJb, in the construct state filft, Art. 50, 1 ; and /)$ 9 of which 
the fern, is Tlb))l, contracted ("H1J?, Art. 50, 1 ; the ground form 
being {)])_; an( l likewise 1p.Fl middle, *?pFl ground form, in the 
construct state ^Ift ; and so IHX, contracted ^IPIX, Art. 50, 2 ; 
ground form 5Plfc$ Nile grass. 

113. Under the same order may be reckoned such words as the 
following, having god for their second radical, and taking khirik 
as their furtive vowel instead of segol, e. g. : ground form, 1*¥ 
hunting-, new form, *T)V; construct form, T¥; so ground form, 
rV3 ; new form, fY3 a house ; construct state, J"P3. 

114. The following examples may be ranked under the third or 
(i) class; in these, the harsh sound is removed by a sort of 
coalescence, as ground form *VJ? a city, new form TJ?. The ground 
form of the plural is the same as that of the segolates generally; 
e. g. TS, the plur. of which is D^JJ, Art. 109, 3; and contracted 
D^JJ, Art. 50, 5. In words of this class, the harsh sound is some- 
times obviated by a transposition of the vowel ; thus, ground form 
?")§ fruit; new form ^5, with pronominal affix 1^? his fruit, 
according to the principle laid down in Art. 110. So ^3, plur. 
E^5 kids, the pi. of which is formed upon the principle applicable 
to the segolates generally. Art. 109. In verbs whose futures are 
apocopated, that is, which lose the last radical and the vowel pre- 
ceding it, the same sort of transposition takes place; thus, HW 
3 pers. sing. pres. kal of PVFI he was, becomes when apocopated 
W, and by transposition W. See Analysis, No. 2S. 

114 (a). The following words seem to belong to the fourth class 
of segolates ; as, ground form )riP\ desolation, new form l^ft, and 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 35 

contracted by Art. 50, 2, 'HR Precisely similar is the word V13, 
of kindred meaning ; ground form ]fD, new form lrj3, ail d con- 
tracted )?]%. See Analysis, No. 10 and 11. These words are known 
to be segolates from their having the accent on the penult, syllable. 
Art. 29 (/). 

114(5). In many nouns one of the radicals disappears. This 
occurs — 1. when the third radical is one of the ^HN letters, where 
the sound is so weak that its absence is scarcely perceptible when 
the word is pronounced ; 2. when the second and thud radicals 
are the same ; 3. by the disappearance of the second radical 
when it happens to be nun ; thus — 

1. N)g* vanity, becomes )W, Hg or )!£, becomes HJ7. See Art. 36 

2. JJij a garden, becomes jil and t]§5 a body, P]il. Art. 41. 

3. C]3K anger, becomes SW. Art. 39. 

115. In monosyllabic nouns, where the vowel of the ground 
form is short, and particularly when it is khirik, the short vowel, 
on the disappearance of one of the radicals^ according to Art. 114, 
is either lengthened or regarded as long by position ; as, TT3 a fleece, 
by Art. 114 (b) 2, Ti3, and euph. causa, T3 ; so, DD} a banner, be- 
comes, first D3 and then DJ ; so T\H, ground form fifiPl ; and 1¥, 
ground form *H¥ ; and Dft, ground form Dp£?, plur. D^Dft. Anal. 
No. 3325. So in verbs, the khirik is generally changed into tsere; 
thus, H35! 3 sing. pres. leal of ("Oil he wept ; when apocopated, 
becomes — 1. ^IlT ; and, 2. *!p\ Sometimes the new vowel is 
pathakh, as HN'T, wliich, when apocopated, becomes — 1. NT; and, 
2. NT, Analysis, No. 21 ; and HS'in, apoc. ^Hn, and further HTHR 
Anal. 3077. Sometimes the khirik is retained, as in J3^ 3 sing, of 
the apocopated future kal of T\^2 he built. The original form is 
njl*!, when apocopated J?*., with a furtive segol |3^, with the 
accent on the penult., as is the case with all segolates. Art. 29, f. 
Analysis, No. 279 and 143. 

116. In all the cases mentioned where any of the radical letters 
or original vowels have been dropped, on an affix being added to 
the word, the original vowel will reappear ; the lost radical will 
do so virtually by a compensating dagesh forte, thus, ground form 
|T3, new form T5, and with an affix 1-T5 his fleece. Many words in 
English appear in like manner to lose one of the radical letters of 

D 2 



86 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

their final syllable, which, is restored on the addition of another 
syllable ; as, rub, rubbing ; nap, napping ; commit, committed ; 
expel, expelled. See Macculloch's English Grammar, p. 19, 4. 

117. When the last radical is one of the ^IPlX letters, it does 
not reappear when an affix is attached to the word ; as, J3 a son, 
from the ground form /"Q3 ; with an affix, ^p5 thy son ; without 
any compensation by dagesh, or the reappearance of the lost 
radical T\. 

118. The latter class of words has probably no connection with 
the segolates, but they have been introduced here as the most 
convenient place for noticing the methods of avoiding the harsh- 
ness of sound arising from the concurrence of two consonants 
preceded by one vowel. 

II. Class of Primitive Words. 

119. The forms of these are six, namely — 1. *"[&§; 2. *TpS ; 
3. np| ; 4. *lj2$ < 5. 1p! ; 6. np3. As,— 1. "ljj value ; 2. 1|Ttf 
word; 3. Tl| a fence; 4. 77? howling. To these Prof. Lee adds 
the five following forms as primitives, viz. — 1. *Tp$ ; 2. *Vp|D ; 

3. •npfi ; 4. n^pfi ; 5. npis. 

My reason for regarding these as augmented, and not as pri- 
mitive words, naturally arises from the views I have already 
expressed in regard to what are ordinarily called the vowels, 1, ), 
and \ In the above examples, the 1 and * are actually consonants 
introduced into the words to modify the meaning of the simple 
forms, in the same manner as the word love is modified or altered 
by the terminations ed or ing ; as, loved, loving. Art. 59. 

Augmented Words. 

120. Augmented words are of five kinds ; — 1. Those which 
have ) or * introduced into the body of the word comprehending 
the five forms referred to in the preceding article. 2. Those 
which have any letter or syllable doubled. 3. Those which are 
augmented by one or more of the letters *£0£?Kp. 4. Nouns 
compounded of two or more words. 5. Foreign words. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 37 

The plan of this Grammar prevents me from enlarging upon 
this part of the subject, which is treated in a philosophical and 
very satisfactory manner by Prof. Lee in his Grammar, Lect. vii. 
Art. 154, to which excellent work the reader is referred. The 
learned Doctor distributes the words augmented as above described 
into classes, and shews the influence which the augments have in 
altering or modifying the meaning of the words in question. He 
shews how, by fragments of words prefixed to the simple forms, 
and by letters incorporated with them, the compound forms of the 
conjugations of verbs arise. For example, from the noun ^H?? a 
king, we have the simple form of the verb ^wfo he hinged, i. e. 
reigned. To which simple forms, when certain of the Vfl55S»n 
letters are added, we have *sJ/??3 was reigned, T/^/l caused to 
reign, TO /fin caused himself to reign, etc. 

From what has been said in the Introduction, Part III., it 
appears that the simple, or leal form of the verb, arises out of the 
primitive noun with pronominal affixes or prefixes ; and that the 
other conjugations are formed from the simple noun doubled or 
augmented, which doubled or augmented nouns, united with pro- 
nouns, form the basis of the other conjugations. Art. 129. 



CHAPTER IX. 



ON THE SEPARABLE AND INSEPARBLE PARTICLES. 

121. All that is necessary to be said upon the separable par- 
ticles will be found in the Introduction, Part III. The student 
will find the subject fully treated in Prof. Lee's Gr., Art. 171. 

On the Inseparable Particles. 

122. These have been so named because many of them are no 
longer extant in their original and complete forms, but present one 
letter only, and are always prefixed to some other word. They 
are comprehended in the terms l"?2) H^D (Mosheh v'chalefih). 



38 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

123. The first of these, 23, is prefixed with the short hhirik and 
dagesh forte, and is a fragment of {£?, the ground form of which is 
!!)£?, which signifies portion, something separated from the whole ; 
hence separation, from which it has passed into the inseparable 
preposition signifying from, as w?fefofrom a king. 

(a) Before sh'va the dagesh is often omitted ; in which case, 
however, it is implied, as n*TQ3ft (mi-g'bhu-rah), from greatness, 
not mig-bhu-rah. 

(b) Before letters not admitting of dagesh, the absence of the 
dagesh is either compensated by the change of the short khirik 
into tsere, or the short khirik is lengthened by position, the dagesh 
being implied in the following letter. Of the former case we have 
an example in £^&D, not ffi'ttfe, from a man ; of the latter, in 
fo)Dti (mi-khut), from a thread. 

124. The second, &, generally pointed with segol and dagesh, 
thus 'V? ; sometimes with pathakh and dagesh, thns -ffi ; and twice 
with sKva, thus £^, is a fragment of the pronoun 1EW. See Art. 101. 

125. The inseparable particle 1, is probably a fragment of the 
verb H1K joined, connected, and signifies add, join. Hence it is 
used as a conjunction, with the meanings of and, but, then, more- 
over, etc., as the context may require. 

(a) This particle is regularly prefixed to words with sh'va, as 
y?y\ TWfo Moses and Caleb. To this general rule there are the 
folio wing exceptions. 1. Before words beginning with another 
sh'va it takes the form *!, as )j?) and go ye. The same change 
takes place, with a few exceptions, when it follows any of the 
labial consonants W^S, as 133 5 ) and a garment. 3. When the 
word to which 1 is prefixed commences with god having sh*va 
under it, a contraction will take place ; thus, if ) is added to TV, 
it is contracted into VTV 4. When 1 is prefixed to any word 
having one of the substitutes of sh'va under its first consonant, the 
1 will take the corresponding short vowel; thus, *Ji$ /, *JN] and I; 
nDX truth, T\12$\ and truth. 5. Monosyllables and dissyllables 
having the accent on the penult., generally prefix this particle 
with kamets. as D*lD1 and a horse : 7 W and a ram. 6. ) before PI 

7 T ' '\~ T '. 

with sh'va becomes ), as DIV^I. Anal. 327. 7. Vau is prefixed 
to the present tense of verbs with pathakh and dagesh, thus "l&X* 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 39 

he says, ""l/bfc^J and he says. If the preformative letter has sli'va 
under it, then the dagesh is implied but not expressed, as /£?P?1 
and he slew (slays). This is commoanlly called vau conversive, be- 
cause it is supposed to convert present into past tenses. But this 
change probably does not depend upon the vau, but upon a 
general principle, which regulates the sequence of the tenses in 
Hebrew and other languages. Tenses mark time sometimes ab- 
solutely, and sometimes relatively. Thus, in the English phrase, 
He said that I wrote ; the saying and writing, which are both past 
events, are expressed by past tenses ; but in the Latin phrase, 
Dixit me scribere, the saying is past, and the writing is present, 
i. e. the saying being tied down to past time, the writing is present, 
in reference not to the present time but to that in which the 
assertion was made. We do not, however, say that the word 
dixit has a conversive power, so as to change the present infinitive 
scribere into a past tense. In allusion to the creation of man, in 
Genesis iv. 2, it is said of God, that DH& 'TIlP) DfcO^ he created 
and blesses them ; agreeably to our idiom, blessed. According to 
the Hebrew idiom, the blessing is present in reference to the 
creation. The same idiom is sometimes used by the Scottish 
peasantry in animated discourse ; thus, " I went to his house 
and he informs me of the whole matter." There is a general 
tendency in the Hebrew language to connect the time of the pre- 
ceding and following words together ; thus, JJH3J£! HVT fifcS ^Htf, 
which, if translated according to the ordinary meaning of the 
tenses, would be, love Jehovah and thou hast served (him). It 
should, however, be rendered, love and serve Jehovah. See a very 
able, and ingenious discussion upon the Hebrew tenses in Lee's 
Gram., Lecture xvii. 

126. The particles 7> 5j ?> signifying in, according to, to, or the 
like respectively, are probably fragments of words, the forms of 
which are traced by Prof. Lee in his Grammar, Art. 174. 

(a) These fragments are regularly prefixed with sh\a, as ^Tl? 
in a way ; W3 like a tree ; Y*)$/ to earth. 

(b) But if the word to which any of them is prefixed has sh'va, 
the particle will take short khirik, according to a rule already laid 
down (Art. 62), as H /3~5 •# a book. 



40 HEBREW GRAMMAR, 

(c) When they precede any of the substitutes of sh'va, they 
then take the corresponding short vowel, as D1/PI3 in a dream. 

(J) When ft happens to be the first letter, a contraction 
generally takes place, as 'OHft? for ^jv? to my lord; D^H /fty 
for DWftS to God. Art. 50 (5). 

(e) When prefixed to monosyllables, they generally take kamets, 
as "AM into a pit; and this also often happens in the case of dis- 
syllables having the accent on the penult., as PM/. 

(f) When these particles are prefixed to a noun with the definite 
article, the article is generally rejected and the particle takes its 
vowel, as T^ftS ^ or fl^C? in the earth. 

(<;) This contraction sometimes takes place with infinitives which 
commence with a servile PI, thus /^^5 f° r 7JP3PF1D in being caused 
to stumble; $£*£?$/ f° r V-Q^u? f or the causing to hear. See 
Art. 35. 

(A) To these particles the pronominal affixes are often attached, 
as *3 in me; ^[3 in thee ; w? to thee. See the whole of this subject 
in Art. 174 of Prof. Lee's Grammar, to w^hich work the reader is 
likewise referred for an account of the Paragogic Affixes. Art. 175. 



Of the Definite Article PI. 

127. The definite article T\ seems to be a fragment of a word 
now obsolete, about which the grammarians greatly differ in opinion. 
The most probable account of it is that given by those who regard 
it as a fragment of the pron. fc^M he. Lee, 180, 2. See likewise 
the view given by Storr., Analogia, etc., chap, xxvii. page 118. 
According to him, it is a fragment of /Pi, an old form of the 
demonstrative pronoun /ft, traces of which remain in the forms 
PI? /Pi and ? /PI this. It is hence used sometimes as a demonstrative 

VT " X — 

pronoun, as D1*Pl this day ; DJ^SPl this time. 

It also has a meaning akin to that of the relative pronoun, as 
S^^tpPin which he had consecrated, 1 Chron. xxvi. 28. 

It is also used as a definite article, much in the same way as the 
article is used in Greek, and is similar to /ft the Arabic definite 
article, as T*1ftPl the earth. 

(a) This particle is regularly prefixed with pathahh and dagesh, 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 41 

as KTIiri the serpent ; where the dagesh appears to compensate for 
the lost consonant. 

(b) Before a guttural, it generally takes kamets to make up for 
the absence of the dagesh, as T* 1 "]^!! the earth. Before F! and PI, 
it takes pathakh without dagesh, the pathakh in that case being of 
the same length with kamets. 

(c) Sometimes before another kamets it takes segol euph. causa, 
as tnpTl the cities, for DnjM. 

(*?) Before J, /, £p, )f, the dagesh is omitted, owing probably to 
the difficulty of its enunciation in these situations. The pathakh, 
however, is actually long. 

The interrogative particles are *ti who ? for persons ; T\fo, T\l2, 
or T\f2 which, tvhat ? T\, PI, PI what, tvhether ? and ^ where, how ? 
for things ; all which are invariable and of the common gender. 
See Prof. Lee's Gr. Art. 178. 



CHAPTER X. 
ON THE NUMERALS. 



128. Numerals are of two kinds in Hebrew, the cardinal and 
the ordinal, and both are substantive nouns. The former are 
placed either in apposition or in the construct state, with other 
words designating the persons or things to be numbered; and 
they have this peculiarity, that those which designate the numbers 
from 3 to 10 inclusive, generally take the feminine form with 
masculine nouns, and vice versa the masculine form with feminine 



nouns. 



(a) The cardinal numbers from S to 10 inclusive, require the 
word designating the thing numbered to be put in the plural 
number ; all the others require the singular, thus, D^JBP J?IH^ 
four years ; Fti&y D^J?5^ seventy year (years). 

(b) The number twenty is formed by affixing the plur. termina- 
tion to the number ten ; thus, ^1^5?. ten, D^GJ^ twenty ; the number 
thirty by adding the same termination to &7& three, thus, W$ /$ 
thirty ; and so on till ninety inclusive. 



42 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

(c) When the decimal number takes the precedence, the con- 
junction ) is used, as, nj^HBh ^5??^ seventy and seven. 

(d) When the numerals are to be used distributively they are 
repeated like other nouns, as D?^ ^1W two, two, i. e. by twos. 

See Prof. Lee's Gr., Art, 181, where tables of both cardinal and 
ordinal numbers will be found. 



CHAPTER XI, 
OF THE VERB. 



129. The reader is referred to what is said upon the verb in 
Introduction, Part III. In addition to what is there stated, it is 
to be observed, that verbs have seven forms or species, as they are 
sometimes called. The first is called the /p kal, i. e. the light or 
simple form, as /Dp he slew. The second is the passive form of 
kal, ordinarily called /J?_§J niphal, as /DM he tvas slain. The 
third is called 7$?J3 pihel, and gives an intensive meaning to the 
simple or kal form, as /Dp he slew eagerly. From examples 
pointed out in the Analysis, there appears reason to believe that 
the pihel is a reduplication of the kal form, and gives a sort of 
superlative meaning to that form, in the same way as a superlative 
meaning is given to a noun by its repetition, as HID good, HID HID 
very good. The 4th, or /J?9 puhal form, is the passive of the 
preceding, as /DP he was eagerly slain. The 5th, or 7^§n hiphil, 
gives a causative meaning to the kal form, as VDpn he caused to 
slay. A causative meaning is sometimes given to an English 
word, by the insertion of a letter in the bosom of the simple form, 
thus, raise = cause to rise. The 6th, or /J?§il hophal, is the passive 
of the 5th form, as *7DpPl he was caused to slay. The 7th, /J^JHil 
hithpahel, has a reflexive meaning, as /Dpnn he slew himself. 
There are other forms which some of the verbs have, which are 
considered irregular, and which will be found in the Lexicons 
and larger Grammars. 

130. The first conjugation takes its name from the word 7p 
light, because it consists of the simple word without the addition 



HEBREW GKAMMAK 43 

of any other words or letters ; this form is sometimes called 7j?3, 
because the verb /£& was adopted by the old Hebrew grammarians, 
as the example for declining the verb ; and hence the passive of 
the kal form of all verbs is called /J?% the third form /J?3, the 
fourth /J?% an( l so on - 

131. We have given thirteen paradigms, or conjugations of 
verbs. The difference between the regular form and the others 
arises principally from the peculiarities of the guttural and w i"lfc$ 
letters (which include two of the gutturals) and the concurrence 
of two of the same consonants. By attending to what has been 
observed in regard to these letters, the intelligent student will 
discover the reasons of almost all the variations between the 
regular paradigm and the other conjugations. 

(a) For example, if we take the second paradigm, 1!t$]} stood, 
we find that the irregularity arises in those parts which, in con- 
formity with the general paradigm, would have sh'va under the 
first radical, which is a guttural. In all such cases, according to 
the general rule, Art. 15, the guttural must have a compound 
sh'va ; thus, 2 pi. m. pret. kal, instead of QFHM we have DJjTtbJJ ; 
inf. constr. kal, instead of HfoJJ we have *lttj7 ; in 3 sing. m. pres. 
kal, instead of HfcJT, ^2!, the khirik under yod conforming to 
the compound sh'va. When this rule is violated, which it is in 
the case of certain parts of verbs which have a guttural for the 
third radical, it is called the rough enunciation ; as, 1 sing. pret. 
kal of ^feW heard, "Ftyfoffi. This is principally the case when the 
guttural stands at the end of an impure syllable, and has the tonic 
accent. 

(5) Again, upon the principle that the gutturals and resh do 
not admit of dagesh forte, we have ^"l? instead of T^.5> Art. 19, 
3 sing. pret. pih. of ^HS blessed. 

(c) The 3 sing. m. fut. of pJJ] is p))Jt\ instead of p)f]\ 9 owing to 
the gutturals preferring the a sound. Some forms of verbs 
without gutturals likewise take pathakh or other vowel instead 
of kholem in the last syllable of the present kal, without any 
apparent reason. 

(d) Verbs beginning with 3 or 7 in Hp/ he took, lose the J and 
7 when concluding a syllable not the last and having sh'va ; thus, 



44 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

for $1? and fij^. we have &fr and hj5>* 3 sing. pres. £«J of #3} 
(7re^ ^e&r, and Hp7 foo^, Art. 39. By the same Article we have 
nm for ngto inf. constr. M of 0M, and fYlS for MIT inf. constr. 

V |V f V|V : -T? V|V V|V : 

£#/ of *!?* begot. 

(e) So we have 2D for MD 3 sing. pret. ^«£ of UD A# sz^r- 
rounded, and ^D for MD inf. constr. of the same. In the former 
case the latter vowel is retained. Art. 41, parad. (6). 

(f) So Dip, inf. absolute kal, to rise, is contracted for Dip ; and 
Dp 3 sing. pret. kal of the same is contracted for DIP; so D^pH 
3 sing. pret. hiph. for D^jT!, Art. 38, parad. 10. 

(£) So IW for n^V 3 sing. pres. /h>A. of 3# t or Sg*i Ae 
dwelt, Art. 50 (1), parad. (8). These verbs always adopt the form 
ife?^ when there is no prefix, but the form 2&) when there is ; as 
%%y\F\ 2 sing. m. fat. niph. The yod, when not initial, is, however, 
sometimes absorbed by contraction, as !l£^ for 2&)\ 3 sing. pres. 
kal, Art. 50 (3). 

(h) In those verbs whose third radical is Pi, that letter, on the 
annexation of an affix, is changed into T\, upon the same principle 
as niin with the aff. 7\— becomes PtfVto, not HHIiri : thus 3 sing. 

T )T T T ^ TTJ" 7 TO 

fern. pret. kal of Tw% he revealed, becomes JlH/^, not PlPTO, 

r xt ? t;t 7 tit- 7 

parad. 13. 

These are only a few of the general principles of the variation 
of verbs from the regular paradigm. The student can trace the 
others for himself. 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 



45 



PARADIGM I., 

Or Regular Form of the Hebrew Verb 7frp he slew. 



Past. 

Sing. 3 m. ka-tal . 
3f. ka-flah 
2m. ka-tal-ta 
2 f. ka-talt 

1 com. ka-tal-ti 
Plur.3com. ka-tflu 

2 m. k'tal-tem 
2 f. k'tal-ten 
lcom. ka-tal-nu 



Inf. abs. ka-tbl 
Inf. constr. tttol 



Sing. m. 



Imperative 

hHol . . 
hit-li . . 



KAL. 

. S^J Plur.m. 

. W?£p Sing. 3 m. 
Vn9&p 8£ 

' :i-|t 

2m. 



. &fcp 

:r|r 

• ^p 



Sbp 

^DP 



8£ 

lcom. 
Plur.Sm. 

3f. 
2m. 
21 
1 com. 

Act- 
Pass. 



kit-lu . 
kHol-nah . 

Present. 
yik-tol . . 

tik-tol . . 

tik-tol . . 

tik-tfli . . 

yik-tflu 
tik-tol-nah 
tik-flu 
tik-tol-nah 
nik-tol . . 



Participles 
ko-tel . 

ka-tul . 



roSbp 

t : »l : 
' ^p- 

. Sbpn 
. Sbpfl 

. bbps* 

• ^P- 

6bpn 



^P 
^top 



Past. 

Sing. 3 m. ?iik-tal . 
3 f. nih-flah 

2 m. nik-tal-ta 
2 f. nik-talt 

1 com. nik-tal-ti 
Pkir.3com. nik-flu 

2 m. nik-tal-tem 



NIPHAL. 

. Stop} Sing. 2 f. nik-tal-ten . 
PDfcpPJ lcom. nih-tal-nu 

JT?fc3p3 Infinitive, hik-ka-tel . . 



Imperative. 



Sing. m. hik-ka-tel 









46 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 



f. 

Plur. m. 

f. 


hik-ka-fli 
hik-ka-flu 
hik-ka-tel-nah 


t; i- It ■ 


lcom 
Plur. 3. m. 
3f. 


. ek-ka-tel . 
yik-ka-t-lu 
tik-ka-tel-nah 


T- |" |t • 


Sing. 3 m. 


Present. 
yik-ka-tel . 


..J r . 




2 m. 

2f. 


tik-ka-flu 
tik-ka-tel-nah 


t; |"|t • 


81 

2 m. 
2f. 


tik-ka-tel . . 
tik-ka-tel . . . 
tik-ka-fli . . 


' :|t • 




1 com 


. nik-ka-tel . 
Participli 
nik-tal . . 




Past. 




PIHEL 








Sing. 3 m. 


kit-tel . . . 


• ^j? 


Plur. m. 


kat-flu 


. • • &?|2 


3f. 
2 m. 
21 


kit-flah . . 
kit-tal-ta . . . 
kit-talt . . 


. rf?ap 


f. 

Sing. 3 m. 


kat-tel-nah 

Present. 
y'kat-tel . 


. . nfasp 
. . . ^|T. 


lcom 


. kit-tal-ti . 


• .: r J • 




SI 


f kat-tel . 


. • -^ptf 


Plur.3 com 


. kit-flu . . . 


• • ^p 




2 m. 


f kat-tel . 


. .%p$ 


2 m. 


kit-tal-tem 


D^j5 




2f. 


f kat-fli . 


. ^t?pji 


21 
1 com 

Infinitive. 


kit-tal-ten 
. kit-tal-nu . . 

kat-tel . . . 


■ ^p 


Plui 


lcom 
\3m. 
3f. 
2m. 


. akat-tel . 
y'kat-flu . 
f kat-tel-nah 
f kat-flu . . 


. .^pa 

. nj^pfi 
. &&pJ? 




Imperative. 






f. 
lcom 


f kat-tel-nah 
. n' kat-tel . 




Sing. m. 
f. 


kat-tel . . . . 
kat-fli . . . 


. ^p 

• ^&p 






Participle 

nf kat-tel . 


. . ^jS? 


Past. 




PUHAL 


. 






Sing. 3 m. 
3f. 
2 m. 

2f. 


kut-tal . 


. htop 


lcom 
Plur.3 com 
2 m. 
2f. 


. kut-tal-ti . 
. kut-flu 

kut-tal-tem . 

kut-tal-ten 


• *^R 


kut-flah . . . 
kut-tal-ta . . 
kut-talt . . . 







HEBREW GRAMMAR. 



47 



Icom 
Infinitive. 


. kut-tal-nu 
kut-tal. . . 


. .afop 

: r|\ 


2 m. 

2f. 

Icom 


fkut-tal . . 

fkut-tli . . 

. akut-tal . . 


. ^t?pn 


Sing. m. 


Imperative. 




Plur. 3 m. 
St 


y'kut-fhi . . 
f -kut-tal-nah 


. njS&pri 


f. 
Plur. m. 
f. 


v none 
Present. 




2 m. 

2f. 

Icom 


fkut-flu . . 

fkut-tal-nah . 

. rfkut-tal . . 




Sing. 3 m. 
3f. 


y'kut-tal . . 
f kut-tal . . 






Participle. 
m 9 kut-tal . . 


. .^pa 

T 1 \ : 


Past. 




HIPHIL. 






Sing. 3 m. 


hik-til . . . 


• ^t?pH 


Plur. m. 


hak-ti-lu . 


. 6npj?n 


2f. 
2 m. 
21 


hik-ti-lah . . 
hik-tal-ta . . 
hik-talt . . 


. nbtDpn 

T ,: r 1 : ■ 


f. 
Sing. 3 m. 


hak-tel-nah . 

Present 
yak-til . , . 




Icom 


. hik-tal-ti . . 


. ^jPpn 


3f. 


tak-til . . . 


. Vtppii 


Plur. 3 com 


. hik-ti-lu . 


1* 1: * 


2 m. 


tak-til . . . 


• ^?f?fi 


2 m. 

2.1 

Icom 


hik-tal-tem . 
hik-tal-ten 
. hik-tal-nu 


. DJT?£?j?n 


2f. 

Icom 
Plur. 3 m. 
3f. 


tak-ti-li . . 

. ak-til . . . 

yak-ti-lu , . 

tak-tel-nah . 


. ^*&pn 

. n^bpn 

y : r| : - 


Infinitive. 


hak-til . . . 
Imperative. 


. ^tpprt 


2 m. 

2f. 

Icom 


tak-ti-lu . . 

tak-tel-nah . 

. nak-til. . . 


. >s?p3 


Sing. m. 


hak-tel . . 


• -H 5 !?* 


Pres. apoc. 


yak-tel . . 


• -^ 


f. 


hak-ti-U . . 


. h'topn 

• r 1 : - 


Participle. 


mak-til 


. S^pa 


Past. 
Sing. 3 m. 
3f. 


hok-tal . .' 
hob-flak . . 


HOPHAL. 

. . SjOpH 2 m. 

. nS&pn 2f. 


hok-tal-ta 
hok-talt . . 





48 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 



Icom. hok-tal-ti . . 

Plur.3com. hok-tflu . . 

2 m. hok-tal-tem . 

2i. hok-tal-ten . 
Icom. hoh-tal-nu 

Infinitive, hok-tal . . 
Imperative 



none 



Past. 

Sing. 3. m. hith-kat-tel . 
3 f. hith-kat-flah 
2 m. hith-kat-tal-ta 
2 f. hith-kat-talt . 

1 com. hith-kat-tal-ti 
Plur.3 com. hith-kai-flu . 

2 m. hith-kat-tal-tem 
2 f. hith-kat-tal-ten 
1 com. hith-kat-tal-nu 




6fc?jXl Sing. 3 m. 

dft^jpn 3 f. 
jrfopn 2 m. 



. hwn 



Present. 
yok-tal 
tok-tal . 
tok-tal. . 
tok-tfli. . 

1 com. ok-tal . . 
Plur. 3 m. yok-flu . 

3 f. tok-tal-nah 

2 m. tok-flu ' 
2 f. tok-tal-nah 
1 com. nok-tal 

Pres. apoc 

Participle, mok-tal . 



m. 



f. 



HITHPAHEL. 

. ^fcpnri piur. 

. rfepnn 
. ??f?pnn 

.rfepJVl Sing. 

♦fi^pnn 
. fepnn 



Dri 



^pnn 



om. 

3f. 

2 m. 

8f. 



n 



1 com. 



.UTgpnn Plur. 3 m. 

3f. 



Infinitive, hith-kat-tel . . /tepHJl 



Imperative. 
Sing. m. hith-kat-tel . 
f. hith-kat-fli . 



. ^gpnn 



2 m. 
2f. 
1 com. 



hith-kat-tflu . 
hith-kat-tel nah 

Present. 

yith-kat-tel . 

tith-kat-tel . 
tith-kat-tel . 
tith-kat-fli . 
eth-kat-tel 
yith-kattflu . 
tith-kat-tcl-nah 
tith-kat-flu . 
tith-kat-tel-nah 
nith-kat-tel . 

Participle. 
mith-kat-tel . 



^t?pn 

• rP*J 

. ™?pj 
rr^ippJi 

siSipjpn 

rl:* 



nbtopra 

t: r J- : ' 

. ^epjy. 

. ^pnn 
. ^pnn 
. ^rspnn 

. ^pn« 
. taspn* 

. ^pw 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 



L— vekbs : 


EN 


KAL. 


n.- „ , 




NIPHAL. 


in.— „ 




PIHEL. 


IV.- „ , 




PUHAL. 


v.- „ , 




HIPHIL. 


vl- „ , 




HOPHAL. 


m.- „ , 




HITHPAHEL 



Prefer. 

Sing. 3 m. . 
3f. . . 
2 m. . 
2f. . . 

1 com. 
Plur. 3 com . 

2 m. . 
2f. . . 

1 com. 

Inf. abs. . . 
Inf. const. . 
Imperative . 
Sing. m. . . 

f . . . . 
Plur. m. . . 

f . . . . 
Present. 
Sing. 3 m. . 

3f. . . 

2 m. . 
2f. . . 

1 com. 
Plur. 3 m. . 

3 f . . . 

2 m. . 
2f. . . 
1 com. 

Part act. . . 
Pass 



Regular. 

rbbp 
rbpp T 

ffep 



V&p* 
hbpfii 

Sbpn 

^pa 







i.- 


-rAKAJjj 


LliJMS of 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


1 Gwtf. 


2 Gu«. 


3G«ft. 


'3 tn&. 


"ii 


18B 


psi 


vw 


0tt 

-T 


*9 


iTjae 


np T 8i 


r\ypf 




USD 

T l~ 


TO 


Jpl 


ttypp 


t : i~t 


X 1 — 


TO 


ipj 


pi$bv) 


: : — t 


rvteD 


'J?*PJ 


♦ftWJ 

• I:'-t 


**J?£# 


• : i-t 


Tte5 


"W 


w 


Hjj&tf 




tig 


Q?i9a 


oripyr 


DJjSfttf 


drtBto 


DrtSD 



hbn nby 



Sbp nby : 
^pp nw 

T : i J ; t : . - : 



nfass 



6t?pri 
rcfcbpn 

r: .!:■ 

^i'p 



itrtb&n 
T . , -. - 

nbyj 



?p ^ajj wp}?T ttj?&g> upgj 



pijtt jto$ 
plft J!bf 



p8T j^. 
p!W3 jjs^s 



'p2.W W#n 

Jipsr. ww\ 

njpgjri n^ra 
*p8ffii W%) 

pS?H i^j 



X 

nxtak 
T . i- . 

t ; •— ■ 



no* 

T 

sbn 

T 
X 

♦abfi 

SDK 

T 

tab* 

IT 

m*3DR 

t iv % ; 

tebft 

I X 

x iv ". ; 

X 

MID 



VERBS 


IN 


KAL. 


7 




8 


'H init. 




'" init. 


<72K 




M8H 






o 
ctq 



I- 1 



9 


10 


ii 


12 


13 


'* init. 


'1 med. 


*" med. 


'N final. 


'n final. 


2& 

- T 




1? 


T T 






nap 

W|2 




ntra& 

T |TT 


nfa 

T 1 • T 


CO 

crq 






• |T T 

; T 


T 


£ 
3 


BW&3 




t ; 


tao^| 


• 


WP 


D 

TCI 


;nx¥£ 


§ ■ 




UQ^ 




vxtxxb 

IT T 


1* T 



Sdk ni&r ate; tfp P Mtaffl rfr| 

SbN nis? sb* tnp pa *&o ni^ 



Saa a# Bh> mp pi km? n^ 

♦baai *a&r *ft? ^ t&p va ♦$¥& ^ 

foytji ftp «h! I ^p o*? *W &4 

rfikiw roatf rojsN map — n»«fi nr^ 

t : i -; t ; I- t: i-j t ; J i t iv : T |v : 

hw aft #r aw tftp; pa; **¥?' n( ?^. 

Saxn a&>n eh*n ab^n EApn pan K^n rfan 

.... - . - | t I • t t ; • " : ' 

ba^n atfn Bh'n ab*n onpn pan xxibn rtan 

*Saxn *a#n *Bh*n *a&*n wpn van •swan ^n 

baa ap« Bnw atD % « ap& pax «*&&* n?a« 

tox* ^ap* ism" >iab" *ap* u*a* a«D* w 

: :•• : • : ■ | it rt : :■ •• 

rwaxn n^n rwTn ^?b^n nyjyipn - ruspn n:ran 

6a«n *aipn tir?n ^13 «jpn *yan ^an tan 

njSoan nja^n njftj^ rcejbvii rv#ipn n^ipn rto^ip 

Sa*o a#j wy\ ab^ wpj paj rfe; 

baiK aft* abv Dp ja a^to n^ia 

^aa aift a^ d« km& *fca 











ii- 


-PARADIGMS of 




1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


Preter. 


Regular. 


1 Gutt. 


2 Gtttt. 


3 (rtttt. 


"3 mi*. 


"Tl 


Sing. 3 m. . 


■ 7bj?3 


ntogj 


ps» 


V&Pl 


0|J 


SD3 

— T 


81 . 


t : | ; • 


nnjbw 


nps?w 

Jt — ;; • 


ft$P#l 


m& 


T |~T 


2 m. . 


T .: rJ: * 


t ; |- v;|v 


rij^B 


Wpti} 




t i - ; 


21 . 


■ J^Tpp! 


Fn&Jtt 


JpM 


i$bw 


r#y 


i - : 


1 com 




^T8iv 


'^p 


^J?^3 




*ni:3D} 


Plur. 3 com 


tojS 


sn&SjJ 


^P8B 


^afj 


*>$} 


EM 

— T 


2 m.. 




D CH£^ 


&fifffi» . 


fa^SW 


D$#aj 


dfnaDj 


2 1 . 




PJH£$$ 


]k®tt) 


|?j?5^j 


Jfi#l3 


10^5? 


1 com 


«?ep3 


UTpSJJ 


^pfJW 


«SpW 


WB}*} 


i - : 


Infinitive. . 


*w 


*£sh 


pfe 


jwn 


"T * 


nan 


Imperative. 














Sing. m. . . 


^ 


^m 


pSJii 


yjbf'ri 


"T * 


iDn 


f. . . . 




H5K5 




^RfiBTI 


♦Eton 


^dh 


Plur. m. . . 




ttfiJJB 


*pffip 


Jij?^"n 




^dpi 


f. .. . 




njlpjpl 


mv 


^p^'n 


t ; |" T ' 


ny§Dfi 


Present. 














Sing. 3 m. . 


•■ |t- 


"*t" 


pw 


j»&r 


WW 

"T • 


i& 


3f. . 


"It • 


ifflee 


P8B 


ybfpi 


" T • 


nsn 


2 m.. 


?topn 


Tfigfl 


pfifli 


V2&5 


■*T * 


5BJ3 


2f. . 


^topn 


nw^u 


'pStfl 


ypm 


. ; t • 


♦5@I!| 


1 com 


" 1 T V 


•tsss 


pfi» 


y&fa 


"T "• 


iss$ 


Plnr. 3 m. 


. TO 


ftfflp. 


^ 


WV&\ 


tt^ 


m\ 


3f. . 


t : i" Jt • 


WTpRi3 


n T P^ 


njSp?fa 


x . j.. T . 


T IV - • 


2 m.. 


. 6bpn 

. : It * 


^TO 


npay? 


SBptffl 


; t • 


te&n 


2f. . 


t ; j- ) t • 


HJIpSCi 


t|:i-t • 


njap^p 


T . |-. T " 


ni^api 


1 com 


. hn® 


•ib 


m 


poaq 


••t • 


a&3 



Participle. 



hop* 



nDy.;5 pjjp yago 



Wtt 



is) 



VERBS in NIPHAL. 



'N init. 



o 






crq 



8 

x ; 

roBha 

DMK>to 



s 



dxh 






9 

'1 med. 

t ii t 

t i I : 

ntop} 

Dpittpa 
jOtwpj 

Di&n 



10 



o 



—K 



11 

'x final. 

T ; ' 

t ; ; ■ 

nKMM 

T J.. . . 



pan 



,.. . . 



12 

n final. 
t ; ; • 

T |.. . . 
DtvSi? 



etc. 



■• X • 

• : x • 

; x • 

n:n^n 



Dipn 
^ipn 

ttflpfl 



jisri 



a wi&n fen 



^ 



£ 



•• X * 
•• X * 
•• x • 

• : x • 

.. T v 

: t • 

n^n^n 

T : i" t * 



dip* 
Dip)? 

Dipn 

DipK 

ttrip! 

njjbpn 

fcfipfi 

Diw 



p^ 



g. 
■^1 



" X • 
•• x • 

K¥ftn 

.. T . 
■ ; t • 

•• x V 

; x • 

X |V x • 

listen 

; x • 

X |V x • 



nSan 

V x • 

V X • 

rfea 

n x' ( ?^ 

fen 
nafen 



fe 



«i 



n&m 



DIM 



R 



NttM 



n^i 



Prefer. 

Sing. 3m... 

3f. . . 

8 m.. . 

»f. .. 

1 com. 
Plur. 3 com. 

2 m.. . 
2f. .. 
1 com. 

Infinitive. . . 
Imperative. 
Sing. m. . . . 

f . 

Plur. m. . . . 

f . 

Present. 
Sing. 3m... 

at... 

2 m. . . 
21 . . 

1 com. 
Plur. 3m... 

3f. . . 

2 m.. . 

it .. 

1 com. 
Participle. . . 



1 

Regular. 

wPP 

*Efep 



^p 

^p 

^pJ? 
^fcptf 

^£?pft 
^pS 

&&pi 






2 
1 Gtott. 






t9E 



T8B 



crq 



*®JF 



2 Crwtt. 



rma 
wis 

X ; I- •• 



mis 

: r- 



; t 

purra 



oinn 



III.— PARADIGMS of 
6 



4 

3 <3wtf. 






5 

'3 mmY. 






^tf etc. 



IpSft JflStffi etc. 



CD 


rm 


J©$f 


^DK 




mi* 
• t i 


Wt. 


i&3to» 


hi 


ftJ5$J3 


niggtfj? 


t : r : 




: t ; 


$g>$ji 


ttSIDfl 






njj^fi 


T . i- . 




TW 


jjg#) 


*3to) 


WQ 


TW 


y§ra Btoa :*3ta& 



VERBS in PIHEL. 



7 


8 


9 


10 


n 


12 


13 


'H init. 


* or 


'i m& 


"i mec?. 


'» wierf. 


'x final. 


'7i final. 


^m 


a#. 


3§! 


Wafito 


pia 


t ; • 

T |" • 


rft 
nft 

T |" • 








wabip 


HH 


na^O 


rvW 


fed 

CD 


CD 

ctq 


CD 

CfQ 


W$p 


CD 


i" • 


W^d 




p 


p 

l->J 


ffltfp 


CD 


*)&¥£ 


ft 








l^^ip 


p" 

GO 


UNitf? 


loft 



t* 



air 



nt$: D8ip pte 



N¥fc 



rfa 



f?* 


Ztfl 


38! 


B&lp 


pi* 


tfto 


nk 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


Wtfp 
fctfp 

wabto 

t : i- i 


etc. 


W8 


ft 

ft 

T |V - 


^aj* 


^ 


asm 


B#p*. 


pfr. 


K^ 




etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


obipri 
atfpiji 

DJbips 

t : i- | : 

toftipfi 
nja&iprt 


etc. 


NSW 
WOP 

T |v - : 


rft« 
ft* 

T| r : 
rftj 



Sgxfc s&sty? nt?!& tatfpp pta?? 



x^ttib 



rtaa 











IV- 


-PARADIGMS oi 




1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


Preter. 


Begular. 


1 Gwtf. 


2 Gw«. 


3 Gm«. 


'3 i»i£ 


'tt imY. 


Sing. 3m... 


^ 


3* 


Jfc)B> 


^ 


S3to 


3f. . . 


rfasp 




ni-jSi 


nj>&# 




HMID 


2 m.. . 






^ 


!$&$ 




EO?to 


2f. .. 


Wtep 




Wis 


?W&0 




M3to 


1 com. 


♦rfejp 


CfQ 


*Wp* 


'S8p* 


CD 
OQ 


W?to 


Plur. 3 com. 


^R 




«nsi 


ty## 


a 
S 


«5to 


2m... 


o^j? 




Dft?^ 


D£l?g)B> 




D$33to 


21 . . 






$313 


tw? 




l#33i& 


1 com. 




: i- 


»Sp^ 




msiD 


Infinitive . . 


bej3 


^ 


T* 


$?&# 


tr|3 


MID 


Imp. sing. m. 

n 


^ 












1 


V none. ' 












Pltir. m. . . . 
f. . . . 
Present. 


























Sing. 3m... 


^i?? 


*1§R! 


t& 


Jfl&B* 


^ 


S31&! 


3f. . . 


^^ 


etc. 


phj? 


5tf?^Fi 


etc. 


ajtafi 


2m.. . 


Stejjj? 




iph^ 


y^n 




n3iD^ 


2£. . . 


.^jap 




TO 


<S5^jji 




*33iDJ? 


1 com. 


Sej5« 




^S 


j^f 




^3iDK 


Plur. 3m... 


^|T* 


CTQ 


mii 


^^! 




miD* 


3f. .. 


nj^jtfi 


^ 
p" 


t ; j- : 


n}Sp#rji 




t j p ; 


2 m. . . 


^j$i 




tonhn 


Jijb^ri 




^jiori 


2f. . . 








nU^ft 




ri}3J}taji 


1 com. 


S8R) 




T^ 


JJS^J 




*3iB5 


Participle . . 


btepe 


^5?0 


TO 


$?£$£ 


t •., ; 


M1D& 



VERBS in PUHAL 



7 


8 


9 


10 


11 


12 


13 


N init. 


" or 


'i wiifc 


i me<f. 


'" med. 


'x final. 


n final. 


^ 


stjh 


S&J 


m&ip 


m 


T "• 


T 1 " ••. 


1 


en; 




n&fcip 
♦ttgbip 


s- 














CO 






b« 


3# 


&& 


O&lp 


ffia 


N¥fc 


rfei 



*?3W 



etc. 



a!** 


3g» 


fibtp. 


pty 




nW 


etc. 


etc. 


Drtpn 


etc. 


K^?Pl 


nW) 






Dfcipn 




t v ; 








*etrtpji 




w?bi? 


^ri 






DJbipa 






rtaa 






tt#ipj 




*¥$ 








roaaipn 

T : i~ 1 : 










tttfpfl 




fc&j&fi 


»^ 






njbjtfpiji 




ruxMbfi 


ny^iji 






D&ipj 






r&w 



^to 



a^a 



DibipJb 



K¥£& 



rtaft 











V. 


-PARADIGM or 




1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


Prefer. 


Regular. 


1 Gutt. 


2 C?wft. 


3 Gutt. 


'3 /fttt. 


»~\ i 


Sing. 3m... 


S^pn 


T£Sp 


?yp 


WWfti 


bh#j 


nDri 


3 f . . . . 


rbwpn 

t r l • • 


HTJbap 




njrato 


T |- • 


T |" '• 


2 m. . . 


rbbpn 


EHp8P 




5Sp^rj 


t ; |~ • 




2f.. . . 


fcTepfl 


n^W 


& 


fij?fc#n 


)3#in 


ntapn 


1 com. 


'^ppn 


wpsn 


CD 


v$£#n 


• : r • 


VtePD 


Plur. 3 com. 


&&pn 


Jin^pyp 




ty^n 


i* * 


toon 


2 m. . . 


DflSbpn 


Drnyn 




DljEWfti 


Dwri 


Dntopn 


2f.. . . 


|W?epn 


f^eap 




;pj?5^n 


$#s 


jjnfta*P3 


1 com. 


vTpjW 


tiTIMtD 




ttjpftr 


: r • 


t • -: 


Infinitive. . . 


^tpjpn 


TWp 


P^Ili 


JPWftj 


BH|5 


son 

" X 


Imperative 














Sing. m. . . . 


^ 


i©an 


iW 


j##n 


^n 


SDH 

" T 


f . 


*b*&pn 

." il : ~ 


'TP?D 


etc. 


Tp^n 


'#VO 


' |" T 


Plur. m. . . . 


r 1: ~ 


n^pan 




V*P#D 


^n 




f . 


T : rl: _ 


njTSSJD 




HJSp^j 


n^3?j 


nyspn 


Present. 














Sing. 3 m. . 


^\?1 


i*tt? 


pSC 


JW?#! 


0*1! 


no* 

" T 


SI... 


^£?pn 


T98JD 


etc. 


SM#8 


0*|ft 


•• X 


2 m. . . 


^t?pn 


i*fifip 




S?0^6 


B*|n 


son 

" X 


21... 


^JPfS? 


T£8B 




yjp^e 




♦3DM 

• |» X 


1 com. 


^ep8 


T£8JS 




8!&#K 


B*&J 


SDK 

" X 


Plur. 3 m. . . 


^f?! 


^W 




^ibV! 






3f . . 


j: r 1: - 


njlliffiis 




n^p^ri 


t : i- - 


x iv • : 


2 m... 


JiTt?pn 


^psn 




tywp 


tt^#3 


I" T 


2f.. . . 


T ,: i" 1 : ~ 


wpBP 




nJJ?pBto 




t ,v • : 


1 com. 


?^l?3 


T&Stt 




SftW 


B^U 


" X 


Participle. . . 


^topa 


T988 


pvje 


JM#8 


B^IO 


3P£ 



VERBS 


in HIPHIL. 










7 


8 


9 


10 


ii 


12 


13 


'X Init. 


'» or 


'i /nit 


'i JUfccf. 


* Jferf. 


N Final. 


n Final. 


^W 


y&n 


nwi 


D^j?*Ci 


pw 


K*¥W 






rwvftn 

T !• 


T |- " 


n#pn 




T |. . . 


nrtan 

t : : • 




T . ( _ 


T • 1— 


ri\frpr\ 

t I | • -; 




t 1" ; • 


r\hr\ 

t |" : ■ 


CD 


ra#in 


WSW3 


rtopn 


tri 


fiK#?ri 


H7^ 


_| 


■ : r 


^W&*5 


*tf^j?a 


kT 1 

CD 


TnjPW 


*fl'j?OT 


g 


iiypin 


ttp^g 


uypri 

lr „•■ 


CD 


wy&n 


^n 


:II 


Dittghn 


Dm^n 


orji&'prj 


CO 


nnx^n 


D0^.n 




lEQBhn 


HJW1 


Itfto'fXJ 




IOksOT 


jn^in 




«5|ghn 


. i— 


aitfjEJ 




,.. . . 


ti^n 



^«n 



^Bnn 



y&r\ 



dw 



pn p3n «^n 



rfc 



^n 



^ESP 


sgnn 


2&kI 


D*pn 


130 


N#?n 


n^n 


etc. 


• I* 


•ytwj 


wpn 

* f |" T 


etc. 




^n 




tt^n 


wpft 


Jitfppi 

lr T 




arjfttj 


•i^n 






nnwn 


t :|,-T 




t |v : - 


wj?#! 


^3*£ 


. nw 


w: 


Vpr 


re 


«*¥&! 


n^4! 


etc. 


rwjtei 


mp»8 


Q'pri 


etc. 


wrjab 


n^n 




n*Bhn 


ntrtg 


trp$ 




K-jan 


nS^n 




fyjgfal 


•V&'fi 


»S»j$i 




•fcnpwD 


4#) 




y&H 


**&♦& 


D*pK 




M^8 


rtaiN 




mpv 


awj 


^IPC 




W$T 


&« 






T . |.. .. 


T ' II" X 




n T «^n 


t |v : — 




r 


a^e 


1 • |l 

^pn 




^^e 


hii? 




T ; l" 




nitopn 
x ^ ii" x 




^tftofi 


t |v : - 




y&h 


s^ 


D"pJ 




«-vw 


rhn 



S^Kfc 



rmte 



yip*e C3^e r?o «*#?? 



pfa& 



Preter. 

Sing. 3 m. . 

SI . 

2 m.. 

2f. . 

1 com. 
Plur. 3 com. 

2 m.. 
2f. . 
1 com. 



1 

Regular. 

P^pD 

^PO 



2 

1 Gwtt. 



2 Gutt. 



TOgJ 



[0 5W3 

npyjn j^yp^n 
lOpKin j^^n 



man 

ran 



Drawn 

v : -t;|t 



VI.— PARADIGMS of 
4 5 6 

3 Gutt. '3 init. il *r 

ap^n 
nawn 



pan 
ni^in 

t ; |— *♦, 



«Wl 



ttj^n 



rtap^n 
niapn 
"niawn 

papain 
wiawri 



Infinitive . . bfcfS? Ififfi PB? W#5j ^*J *6«1 



Imp. sing. m. 

f.. . . 
Plur. m. . . 

f . . . 
Present. 3 m 
Sing. 3 f. . 

2 m.. 

2f. . 

1 com. 
Plur. 3 m. . 

3f. . 

2 m.. 
2f. . 
1 com 



None. 

^tppn 

%J5M 

n^topn 
#t?pfi 

v- |:t 



- t;|t 

— T'|T 

• : tit 

HbV IT 

t :i~t:it 



pK!* 
'pfi© 






99#l 

nu$»Eto 

T : i~ ! T 



mi 



apv 
apto 
apto 
*Spto 
apw 
«p* 

nyapvi 
apm 

nyapin 
T 'ao^ 



Participle.. ^f?«J ^ p3$? W#& ^ ^ 



^ERBS in HOPHAL. 



Sa^n 



n 

-I 
U 

■•If 



8 9 

'* or 'i init. 

aghn a&in 
naB*in 

t ; 

town 

fiaaftn 



• : r 

onagri 



K 3 

CD 
CD 



hwn 



ttttWl 



awn awn 



10 

DPP 



U 

ii 



own 



n 

'* wee?. 

[Ml 



CD 



CO 



(an 



i2 

t : \ 

nxx^n 

t i • ; s 

ntfjfibn 
♦n^j&n 

jnxran 
wg$?n 

Kxan 



13 

'rt ,/wiaf. 

thin 
nn*?in 
n4^n 
n^n 

»in 

: t 

r - : t 



- t;|t 



etc. 



a£>to 
aeto 
♦agto 

*a#* 
njagto 

t • i~ 



atDV 



etc, 



■!> 



etc. 



P* 



etc. 



K5p£ 


rbx 


Ktt&n 


rhlk 


Kpn 


rtan 


^¥&n 


4^3 


x¥ftK 


n 1 ?^ 


«*5j 


% 


n^bn 


n^a 


ttssfcfi 


^ 


pbhs&b 


n^fi 




nSa 



Sawa 



aw& awa tm& 



}a*& 



j«»b 



rtaa 



Prefer. 

Sing. 3 m. . 
3f. . . 
2 m. . 
2f. . . 

1 com. 
Plur. 3 com . 

2 m. . 
2f. . . 

1 com- 

Infinitive. . . 
Imperative. 
Sing. m. . . 

f . . . . 
Plur. m. . . 

f . . . . 
Present. 
Sing. 3 m. . 

3f. . , 

2 m. , 
2f. . . 

1 com 
Plur. 3 m. , 

3f. . 

2 m. 
2f. . 
1 com 



1 2 

Regular. 1 Gutt. 



2 Gutt. 



rtepnn °s 

:: rl-: • ^ 






nmnn 

T -J T J " 

wmnn 

• : i-t : • 



VII.- 

4 

3 Gutt. 






S&pnri Tggpi •sjnni^n' nknn 



^pnn etc. ^TJDJi 
teprin ^l?nn 

t; I- J- : • t : -t : • 

^pnn etc. 

▼ : c|- : • 



>:mnn 



mint 

; t ; • 

mrnn 

t : r : : * 






Participle. . bt$ffib TJgfiW ^.?W? H^W 





'in 


-PARADIGMS of 


5 


6 


'3 init. 


S "* L 


mxp 


Sbwn 




n9?unn 


w 


ri^W 


CD 


^Suprt 




^Si^iri 




h^m 




m%)^n 




}D^i^n 




u9?i:^n 


tf&TO 


y?unn 


#3JOT 


hh)^r\ ' 




¥?^W 


etc. 


h^ryn r 




t : i- : • 


BteJTK 


^W 




Sbtonfi 


etc. 


S^w? 




^^ 




%iwj 




ttfan* 




nj^flW 




6^™ 




n^unri 




T^JftJ 


043W 


SSi^a 







fERBS in HITHPAHEL. 



7 8 9 10 

'x init, '" init. or h init. h med. 

bsson laatyw a«wi Dbipnn 

nbbipnn 
wbrtpnn 

t : r I : ■ 

wppipnn 

totfptti 

Dpbeipnn 

jflpfcipW 

datfenri 



ii 

/s med. 



w 


fed 


w 


a> 


05 


CD 


CfQ 


CfQ 


Oq 


£, 


£, 


si 








g 


p" 


p" 


R 


n 


H 



CD 
CfQ 



12 

'a final. 

T ._.. 



13 

»n final. 

nnknn 






a#W 3&M D^pW U^TO k*6W r&inri 



f?3«W n^nri s^nn Djgiprwi jji^in 



etc. 



etc. 



etc. 



etc. 






^5W! a#W WE B&iprv 

art wift 



ect. 



etc. 



taffipW 

^?ipnn 

p#pos 

ttatfpTV! 

ruepipnfi 
tistfpnri 

t : i- | : • 

obipro 



etc. 



\$QW. 



etc. 



«2?tonn 


nknn 


*»¥0W 


'k^ri 


to¥&rin 


iiknri 


T |v _ . . 


ro^nn 

t iv - : • 


tigayt 


nW^ 


N3?bnri 


n^rin 


NSbnn 


n^nri 


^bnri 


4iw 


Ntfbntf 


nkriK 


^?£jv 


5iWn! 


njK$&np 


nyknri 


JiNybnn 


fririe 


n^enri 


T |v - . . 


K2fibro 


rbzr\) 



wyp 2®™ DDiprw? piahfc ^5?bnb n 



^nb 



64 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 



TABLE OF FRAGMENTS OF PRONOUNS 
AFFIXED TO VERBS. 



Singular. 



1 pers. com. 

2 pers. masc. 

2 pers. fern. 

3 pers. masc. 
3 pers. fern. 



1 pers. com. 

2 pers. masc. 

2 pers. fern. 

3 pers. masc. 
3 pers. fern. 



Form for the Pret. Tense. 


Forms for the Pres. 


. v>^- 


. 


*7 


. t| — , in pause ^J— or ^\— 


■?[- or ro- 
«T- or i- 


• ^T' » 


T ,7 T 


n- 

T |V 



. «p,Ur- tt- 

• B»- D ^~ 

• ir • • • • • tr 

. D- D-, Poet. 1»- . . D- or D-, Poet. )fr 

•I- It }t 



Fragments of Pronouns affixed to the Present Tense 
when preceded by an epenthetic nun. 

Singular. Plural. 

. *$- *3- for ^5-/33- Wrr for ^~ 

. v%ni- for •?!>-, nii- 



1 pers. com. 

2 pers. masc. 

3 pers. masc. 
3 pers. fern. 



ti-r for in>7, 1> 

ni- for ni- 

t|V x: |v 



Examples of the Third Person Singular of the Verb, 
with its various affixed pronouns. 



\31p3 he visited me : ^1p3 ... us ; 
tJt: > it| t : » 

^[*Jj5§ • • . ^00, fern. ; D31P3 . . . you, masc 
VTJ8&, or contr. ^(53 or HDfi, . . . him ; FHjp& 
poet. tojJfJS • • • ^Aem, m. ; }HP$ . . . them, f. 



£Ae£, masc. ; 

. . . you, fern. ; 

..her; D^fJ?, 



HEBREW GRAMMAR. 65 

Third person singular Feminine. 

^rnD3 she visited me, com.; 'OrnpSD . . . us, com. ; |?jrnp$ . . . 
thee,'m. T ; ^Hlp? . ■ ■ thee, f. ; MnnjJS . . . you, m. ; JJDrnj5$ . . . 
you, f. ; 5innpp3 or VnjJB . . . /i^ / hn^5 or ^m^* . . \'her ; 
Dn*lD3 . . . £&0»j m. ; jtnp? . • • them, f. 

Second person Masculine. 

^JTTp^ ^° w visitedst me, com. ; ^Jj'lpB . . . ws, com. ; ^nJTTpl? 
or imp5 . . . him ; PT£nj29 . . . her] Djjl^ fa, m. ; jSlpQ 
. . . ^em ; f. 

Second person Feminine. 
^)TTj2$ 2A0M (fern.) visitedst me, com. ; ^J^npSj . . . t/s, com. ; 

^n^Sp§'or vrnpa . . . ftm; n^np? . . . /Jn b'rnpa . . . ^ 

m - i I^IP? • • • them, f. 

First person Singular, com. 

^^1(23 J nsttaZ £fce, m. ; ^Wp9 • • • thee > f - 5 ^^1*59 • • • 
you, masc. ; j^JTTp? • • • you, fern. ; ^fTFnpiD or VFHpip . . . him ; 
nWp? . . . her; DWJ33 . . them, m.; 'j^lpS. 

Third person Plural, com. 

^HpS they visited me, com. ; ^"IpS) . . . us, com. ; Tp'lpB . . . 
thee, m. ; 1p*]p$) thee, f. ; DS^HPiS) . . . you, m. ; JJ'npiS . . . you, f. ; 
^n^1|P5 • <■ • him ; H^npS) . . . her ; Dl'lp? . . . them, masc, or poet. 
itfqjJS ; jHjP? . . "fa, fern. 

Second person Plural, co?n. 

^J*np3 ye (com.) visited me ; ^JjfJpS . . . ws, com. ; ^PflJ^PTM 
. . . him; 'PlV-npS . . . Aer ; D^filp? . '. . 'them, masc. ; \)PH^ '. . '. 
^em, fern. 

First person Plural, com. 

^*Tp5 we (com.) visited thee, m. ; *?pjnp$ tfAee, f. ; M^p? 
. . . yow, m. ; JJD^np? . . . you, f. ; }TO*7P§ . . . him ; F\^\¥lD§ . . . 
her; U^10$ them, m. ; WIDS them, L 



66 HEBREW GRAMMAR. 

Examples or the Present Tense with the affixed 
Pronouns. 

Third person Singular Masculine. 

^*S?I^ he visits me, com. ; ^*1&§* . . . us, com. ; ^HP^ . . . 

thee, m. ; ^pp& . . . thee, f. ; D^ijjs? . . . you, m. ; f^pi^ . . . you, 

fern.; VHpk* or Flpfi* . . . him; 'f\lp^ or JTTpfi* .'.' .'her; tnp&* 
9 . ii: : • •): : • t ,v| : : • it) : : • r |: : • 

or poet. to*lp$^ . . . them, masc. ; |*1P9*. • • • them, fern. With the 
Epenthetic or Paragogic j : ^liTlp^ he visits him; fi3*"|p§* . . . Aer; 
;Pj?9 % . . . . thee ; |V]j?§* tf% Ww'tf 5 *MjKM?* *% >k* we, Prov. 
i. 28 ; ^FVl^ they serve thee, f. ; u^i?/* ^^ ^^' e ^ww ; etc. 

From the principles previously laid down, the learner will be 
able to discover how the inseparable pronouns may be affixed to 
the other paradigms. 



ANALYSIS. 



The letter L., so frequently found in the first chapter, refers to 
Professor Lee's Hebrew Grammar, 3rd Edition. The work of Storr, 
to which reference is made, is entitled, Storrii Observations ad 
Analogiam et Syntaxin Hebraicam pertinentes. Tubingae, 1779. The 
quotations from the Philologia Sacra of Glassius, are from the Edition 
of Dathe, Lipsiae, 1776. The quotations from Rosenmiiller's Scholia 
upon the Old Testament, are from the Edition published in 1778, 
and from the Abridgement published in 1828. 



ANALYSIS AND CRITICAL INTERPRETATION. 



1. — Chap. i. 1. )"Vfe?Wn5 Qfre-shiili), at first, in the beginning} 
compounded of (a) 3 a prep, with most of the meanings of the 
Lat. prep. in. Prof. Lee understands it to be a fragment of the 
verb fc$13 to enter, and makes its leading idea that of entering into. 
L. Art. 174. Gr. 126. It is ordinarily pointed with sKva, L. 174. 3. 
Gr. 126. a. 

(b) JW*n contr. for W&g) L. 87. 5. Gr. 50. 5 ; subs. fern, first 
time, or state, beginning; opp. to JV^Pltf last time, or state, end, 
(Prof. Lee's Lex.); from fcWl the head. The design of the sacred 
writer here appears to be to mark a period, antecedently to which 
neither the heavens nor earth, nor the elements of which they are 
composed were in existence. The expression is quite indefinite, 
and though it is designed to shew that both the heavens and earth 
had a beginning and a Creator, it affords no information as to the 
period at which the creation took place. Accent, tiphhha disjunc- 
tive, upon the last syllable, according to the general rule, Gr. 29. 

2. ^5 (ba-ra), 3. sing. m. pret. hal, parad. 12. 1. Created, 
brought into existence ; 2. formed, made, constituted. The most 
eminent Hebrew scholars are now of opinion that the idea of 
creation out of nothing, cannot be shewn to be inherent in the word 
fcOS- This idea, however, is deduced from it in this passage by 
fair and legitimate inference, as may be shewn from a great variety 
of passages of Scripture. In particular see Ps. xc. 2; Prov. viii. 
26; Heb.xi. 3. And there cannot be a doubt that the Sacred 
writer here intends to teach us, that God at first or in the beginning 
brought the heavens and the earth into existence by his creative and 
sovereign power. " One thing more " (to quote Prof. M. Stewart's 
words) "may be said, which is, that if the word fcOS does not mean 

1 



2 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. i. 

to create, in tlie highest sense, then the Hebrews had no word by 
which they could designate this idea." In its secondary meaning, 
£021 is equivalent to M^J£ compare verses 26, 27. See Prof. M. 
Stewart's Philological View of the Modern Doctrines of Geology 
pp. 15 et seq. and Prof. Hitchcock's connection between Geology 
and the Mosaic history of the Creation, pp. 24. et seq. Accent, 
munakh conjunctive on the ult. syllable. , 

3. ty7p& (eh-him), written in full lMT|Sk Gr. 34; pi. of $6$ 
subs. m. with kholem immutable, Gram. 56. The supposed root, 
which is obsolete in Hebrew but preserved in Arabic, is T\ /&. 
1. worshipped, adored ; 2. was astonished, confounded. tf)/$ sig- 
nifies — 1. ivorship, adoration; 2. religious fear, or dread ; and by 
met. the object of worship or adoration, or of religious fear or dread, 
the supreme being, God. After the introduction of idolatry, this 
word was used to designate also false gods. In designating the 
true God, the plural of this word is generally used, and construed 
with a singular noun or verb; this is what grammarians call the 
pluralis excellentice, or pluralis majestaticus. According to Heng- 
stenberg, the plural form " calls attention to the infinite riches and 
inexhaustible fulness contained in the one divine being." Dissert, on 
the Genuineness of the Pentateuch, vol. i, p. 273 ; Kyland's Trans- 
lation. The pause accent athnakh is on the ult. syllable, but without 
any disjunctive effect. 

4. fi& (etli), a particle generally placed before a noun which is 
the object of some verb in the sentence, and used apparently for the 
purpose of pointing out that connection. It appears in three different 
forms when connected with the pronouns, which Schrcederus thinks 
has arisen from the root's originally presenting the three cognate 
forms — <*tr^, Fin^, or T))$ to come ; and coming, touching, as it 
respects, or the like, will give the exact sense of this particle. L. 171. 
11,12; and Lex. pp. 63, 64; see also Storrii Analogia, p. 263. 
Accent, merka conjunctive. 

5. D^^H (hash-sha-ma-yini), comp. of the def. art. -T\, which is 
probably an abbreviation of the pron. fc^/l he, this man, and is used 
hi much the same way as the Greek article 6, rj, rb. Its derivation 
from the pronoun is probable, from the analogy of the derivation 
from pronouns of the definite articles of many other languages, as 



Ver. 1—2.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 3 

Greek, English, French, Italian, etc. The Italian forms its clef, 
art. il, from the former, and the French le, from the latter syllable 
of the Latin pronoun ille ; thus il re, le roi, the king. See L. 180(2). 
Gr. 127. See also another view adopted by Storr, " Analogia," 
pp. 118, 121, et seq. It is prefixed with pathakh and dagesh, the 
latter compensating for the absence of some of its original letters. 

D?5?£^ a plur. form, the sing, of which is obsolete ; the heights, 
heavens, the shy. The accent, tiphkha disjunctive, is on the penult, 
syllable. Gr. 29. a. 

6. F\tf) (y'eth), comp. of the cop. conj. ) and fiK No. 4. The ) is 
probably a fragment of the imperative of ("HK connected, joined, 
added, etc. T**"!^! S^^H may therefore signify literally, the 
heavens add (or join) the earth, i. e. the heavens and the earth. L.173. 
It is generally pointed with sh'va. Gr. 125. a. Accent, merka 
conjunctive. 

7. T*T$n Qia-a-rets), comp. of !l, see No. 5; pointed with kamets 
to compensate for the absence of the dagesh, which the guttural 
letter X does not admit of. L. 109, and 180. 4. Gr. 19, and 127. b. 
And p$ enph. causa pro pN> a segolate of the (#) class ; ground 
form pK. L. 148. 4. Gr. 104. 105. 106. Subs. fern. Sansc. dhara; 
Pehlev. arta, from whence per metath. terra; Germ, erde ; Scot. 
yird; Goth, airtha; Eng. earth. Ges. Lex. Pause accent, silluk 
on the penult. Gr. 29. f. 

8.— Ver. 2. pHPl 1 ] (v'ha-a-rets), comp. of) No. 6, PI Nos. 5 and 
7, andp.JSt No. 7. Accent, r'bhiah disjunctive on the penult., 
No. 7. 

9. <"ir^ri (ha-ifthali), 8 sing. fern. pret. hal of /"PPl was, became, 
parad. 13. 

In the^rs^ verse the sacred writer gives an account of the original 
creation of the heavens and the earth. In the second he shews 
that at some subsequent period, left quite indefinite, the earth be- 
came waste and desolate. In the third and following verses he 
describes its transformation into its present state. There is no 
pluperfect tense in Hebrew ; but the past, aided by the context, 
marks the time, expressed by the pluperfect in other languages, with 
sufficient perspicuity though with less precision. If the view just 
given is correct, the Mosaic account of the creation is confirmed, 



4 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. i. 

and not invalidated, by modern geological discoveries. Accent, 
merka conjunctive upon the ult. syllable. 

10. ^inn (tho-hii), subs. m. emptiness, a ivaste, desolation. To 
suit our idiom this word is rendered waste, empty, desolate. Contr. 
for lPrK L. 87. 2. Gr. 50. 2. Ground form )fih L. 152. 9. Gr. 
112. No dagesh lene in T\, because preceded by M, the last letter 
of trie foregoing word. L. 109, et seq. Gr. 20. Known to be a 
segolate by the position of the accent. Gr. 29. f. The accents are 
pashtas disjunctive, that on the penult, being the tonic accent. Gr. 27. 

11. ^in^l (va-bho-hu), compounded of the cop. conj. ) pointed 
with kamets, because it immediately precedes a tonic syllable. 
L. 173. 9. Gr. 125. 5. 

^("Q subs. m. a seg. of the (o) class, as the preceding word, No. 10. 
This word is almost synonymous with ^T\T\, and is connected with 
it for the sake of emphasis; the meaning is, completely ivaste, 
or desolate. This is one of the methods adopted in the Hebrew 
language for expressing intensity of meaning, and for supplying the 
want of a particular form for the superlative degree ; and likewise 
is an example of what was stated in the Introduction, Part III., of 
the poverty of the Hebrew language in adjectives. The accent, 
sakeph katon disjunctive, is on the penult, syllable. See No. 10. 

12. ^$11) (fkho-shecli), comp. of ) No. 6, and IJgTT subs. m. 
darkness, a seg. (o) class. L. 152. Gr. 109. The accent, tiphkha 
disjunctive, is on the penult. See No. 10. 

13. /$ (lial), originally a noun, the ground form of which is 
0?y. constr. plur. vj£ ascent, superiority, verb Jl7j? ascended. 
Generally used as a prep, above, upon, against, etc. Superiority (in 
reference to anything below), i. e. above it. See Introduction, Part 
III., on the subject of the Prepositions. No accent but makkaph. 
Gr. 33. 

14. \J5 (p' ne )) constr. of D^JlD, Gr. 49, a plur. form ; face, coun- 
tenance, surface. The expression, upon the face of '= upon, over, is a 
Hebraism sometimes used by the writers of the N.T., as in Luke ii. 
31, Kara irpbawirov irdvrcov rcov \acov; in Heb. *Jp?, coram omnibus 
populis ; Acts iii. 13, Kara irpoacoirov UiXdrov; Heb. ^2?, coram 
Pilato ; and Acts xxv. 16, and xiii. 24. See also Glass. Phil. Sacra 



Ver. 2.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 5 

Ed.Dathe. Can. 38, p. 107; and Leusden de Dialectis N.T., p. 162. 
Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

15. Dinjl (th'honi), snbs. com. water (in motion), the deep, the 
ocean. The vast mass of waters cii'cumfused around the globe, and 
Trhich were not then distributed into oceans, seas, lakes, rivers, and 
subterraneous receptacles. Bush, in loc. Verb D^lD to move. So 
Eng. noun, wave; verb, to wave. Xo dagesh lene in T\, seeXo.10. 
Accent, athnakh disjunctive. 

16. D^rHS D^ll (v'ricaM e lo-him), usually rendered, and the spi- 
rit of God ; but I prefer rendering it, and a very great, or a mighty 
wind. H^l comp. of ) Xo. 5 and H^H subs. com. 1. air in motion, 
wind y see chap. viii. 1. D**Tp W*l east wind, Ps.xlviii. 7. fi'H 
TiTli a great wind, Job i. 19. 2. Air inhaled into the lungs — breath. 
S. The spirit, soid, mind of man. 4. The Spirit of God. That the 
rendering here preferred is warrantable is beyond dispute. Wind is 
the primary notion involved in the word il^l, which is the onlv He- 
brew word by which it is expressed. The literal meaning is ivind 
of God. It must be known to, every one acquainted with Hebrew 
that the words ("HIT, 7&, D *TwR are often added to nouns in the 
construct state for the purpose of giving them a superlative sense, 
there being no superlative degree in Hebrew, formed hi the same 
way as hi more modern languages; thus, D\*l7$$ N*B50 a prince of 
God, a very great, or a mighty prince, Gen.xxiii.6; D-H7X v^MJ 
stragglings of God, i.e. very vehement, or violent, Chap.xxx. 8; and 
/^TID mountains of God, very high, Ps. xxxvi. 7; 7^ -> H^ vay 
tall cedars, Ps. lxxx. 11; and HIPP *XJJ trees of Jehovah, very tall 
trees, Ps.civ. 16; HI IT PrT\ a wind of Jehovah, a very strong wind, 
Isa. xl. 7. lix. 19. The same idiom obtains with the prep. 7 j thus, 
DTI /X7 TtriS TJ? a city great unto God, i.e. as it is well expressed 
in the Auth.Yers., an exceedingly great city, Jon. iii. 3; with which 
compare aareto^ rep 0eco, exceedingly beautiful, Acts vii. 20; and 
hvvara rco 0e«, exceedingly mighty 2 Cor.x. 4. The rendering here 
given of the words hi question is not new. They are thus, with 
those immediately following, rendered hi the Targuni of Onkelos, 
KJ& *3K S>? SOg^S I] Rife p XTfil) and a wind from before 
(from) Jehovah blew upon the face of the waters. Ainswortk, in his 
Commentary in Ioc.sb.js, "Later Jews (whom some Christians follow) 



6 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.i. 

expound this a winde of God, or a mightie winde-" to which ren- 
dering he objects, upon the ground that " ivinde (which is the moving 
of the aier) was not created till the second day, that the firmament 
was spred, and the aier made;" an objection which will not have 
much weight in the present day. 

The following is the vieAV taken of this passage by the younger 
B-osenmuller in the edition of his Scholia published in 1788: — 
D^P! — tl)1) ventas spiravit super aquam, D^H/X fPfl anthropo- 
pathica locutione, i.e. ventus ,qu& significatione hoc vocabulum etiam 
occurrit Num. xi. 31, Exod. xv. 10. LXX. vertunt irvevfia ©eov, 
ad quae vocabula bene Theodoretus (Quaest. viii. p. 13, ed.Halens). 
Tial SoKel to iravayiov nrvev/Jia ^oooyovovv tcov vBdrcov tt]V (pvacv — 
akrjOearepov [xev rot itcelvov ol/iai tov \6yov, on to Trvevjia evTavOa 
tov aepa /caKei, i.e. Quibusdam videtur fuisse spiritus sanctus, qui 
vivificabat et foecundabat aquarum naturam — verius autem puta- 
verim, quod hie aerem voeet spiritum. Sensus igitur horum duorum 
versuum hie est. Deus est creator universi; quod autem hunc 
terrarum orbem attinet, quern nos homines incolimus, fuit ejus 
conditio aliquando diversa ab ea quam nunc habet. Fuit enim 
aquis obtecta, et nullo modo habitationi hominum et animalium 
apta. Haec verborum Mosis interpretatio rei naturae optime con- 
venit. In mterioribus enim terrae multa vestigia vetustioris et 
diuturnioris cujusdam inundationis deprehenduntur, quam ilia 
Noachica fuit. Si terra enim effoditur, varia reperiuntur strata, se 
mutuo excipientia, quorum alia ab aliis longe sunt diversa, et eo 
quidem ordine, ut saepius levioribus graviora sint imposita ; quae 
satis arguunt terrain in interioribus suis magnam olim mutationem 
subiisse." At the commencement of verse 3, the same learned 
critic thus expresses himself : — ' ' Nunc porro refert Moses quo- 
modo Deus eundem terrarum orbem transformaverit vel renova- 
verit, omnibusque rebus ita instruxerit, ut commodum domicilium 
hominibus et animalibus esse possit." The justness of these views 
is remarkable, considering the period al which the author wrote. 
The ordinary rendering, viz. the spirit of God, has been for the 
most part given under different views of the meaning of the first 
and second verses of this chapter ; but that rendering certainly ap- 
pears to be less consistent with the whole scope of the second verse 



Ver. 2—3.] THE BOOK OF GEXESIS. 7 

than that which is here adopted. The wind sleeping- over the 
abyss heightens the idea of the dreariness and desolation of the 
earthy then indeed " a waste-howling wilderness ;" and its effects 
may have been preparatory to the separation between land and 
water, described in verse 9. Compare chap.viii. 1, " and God made 
a wind TVC\ to pass over the earth, and the waters assuaged." I con- 
fess I cannot understand what is meant by the spirit of God moving 
upon the face of the waters, amidst darkness, dreariness, and de- 
solation. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

IT. D*H 7$ see Xo. 3. Disjunctive accent, saJieph kaixm. 

18. n§rn£ (rn'ra-khe-phetli), fern. sing. part. pih. of ^jPH parad. 
2 and 8. See Gr. 11, 19. Only used here, in Dent, xxxii. 11, and 
Jer. xxiii. 9. Morendi , palpandi , intremiscendi, indeque et volandi 
et flandi, notiones quas verbo dare solent, egregie fateor aptas, 
tribus locis ; praeiveruntque ex veteribus, Gen. i. 1. LXX., 
Aquila, Symmaehus, liheod.Y13lga.tsL, ferebatur ; Chaldaeus, Sama- 
ritanus, uterque Arabs, flabat." Michaelis, Supp. ad Lex. Heb. 
sub voc. 

The first two verses, accordino- to the fore^oins: views, may be 
thus translated : — " In the beginning, God created the heavens and 
the earth. But the earth became waste and desolate, and darkness 
(was) upon the face of the deep, and a mighty wind moved upon 
the face of the waters." 

This word being of the segolate form, the accent, whieh is tiph- 
Jiha disjunctive, is upon the penult, syllable. Gr. 29. a. and f. 

19. ^39 /J? see 13 and 14. Accent, merka conjunctive. 

20. Q*!$n (liam-ma-yim), comp. of -PI Xo. 5. DVp in pause for 
D*£ Gr. 31.; water, waters, a noun masc. plur. not used hi the sin- 
gular. Pause accent, silluJi on the penult. Gr. 29. a. 

21. — Ver. 3. *©X*5 Uay-yo-mer), and said, comp. of •) cop. conj. 
Pointed before presents of verbs with pathakh and dagesh forte. 
Gr. 125. (7.), and IS*^ hi consequence of the removal of the accent 
for *I&K< Gr. 9. 10.' and 30. b. 3 pers. sing. m. pres. kal of T&X 
said, parad. 7. This verb here expresses present time, not abso- 
lutely, but relatively to the time of ("Ifi-Pl preceding. See 
this subject discussed in a philosophical and very able manner by 



8 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.i. 

Prof. Lee, Gr. Art. 231, et seq. See also a treatise upon the He- 
brew tenses by the same author, entitled "An Examination of the 
Grammatical Principles of Prof. Von Ewald of Tubingen." The 
accent is merka conjunctive on the penult. Gr. 30. b. 

22. D^Pl /$$ see No. 3. This word, though plur. in form, does not 
generally alter the number of the verbs and nouns connected 
with it, see chap. xx. 13, excepting when reference is not made 
to the true God. 

S3. VT (y'hi), let there be, 3 sing. m. pres. kal apoc. of PPPl was, 
parad.13.' The full form is PPIT, apoc. VT L.74.2. Gr. sY.; and 
VJ? Gram. 114. These apocopated forms, says Prof. Lee, are often 
used for the purpose of expressing command, prohibition, exhorta- 
tion, wishing , forbearance, and the like. See his Gram. Art. 233 ; 
and his doctrine of the Pi paragogic, and J epenthetic, in Arts. 
234, 235. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

24. ^Vltf (or), subs, m., once f. light. Accent, athnakh disjunctive. 

25. ~W) (va-y'hi), and was, comj). of), $ee21, and WIS o.23. The 
pathakh here is long by position, a dagesh being implied in the yod. 
The dagesh forte is probably omitted here, owing to the difficulty 
of the enunciation oiyod doubled with sttva under it. Gr. 125. 7. 

Euphonic accent, metheg, L. 127, 2.; and makkaph, Gr. 33. 

26. *t\tt see 24. Accent, silluk disjunctive. 

27. — Ver. 4. iO*5 (vay-yar), and saw, comp. of -1 No. 21, and 
3 sing. m. apoc. pres. kal of Pl&'l saw, parad.13; full form of 3 
sing. pres. kal PlK'T, apoc. N*V, euphoniae causa fcO! Gr. 115. 
Accent, darga conjunctive. 

28. "H&rrnfc* (eth-ha-or), fi£* for Ws No. 4, on account of the 
removal of the accent. Gram. 9. 10. The article Pi pointed with 
kamets before the guttural K, Nos. 5 and 7 ; and "fitf No. 24. 
Accent, tiphkha disjunctive. 

29. ";3 (ki), quod, that, is probably a contracted form of *\2 
Gr. 35, see Isa. iii. 24 ; the imperative of the obsolete Pl15 or Pl^5 
burned, branded, marked, and signifies mark, with the view of 
exciting attention to something following. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 
Dr. Gesenius traces a similarity between this word and the Sanscrit 
relativ e,jas,Ja,Jat, for qas, etc. Interrogative, kas, ka, kim; Lat. 



Ver. 3—5.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 9 

qui, quae, quod. See Lex. Accent withdrawn on account of the 
makkaph. Gr. 33. 

30. illfcp (tooh), originally an abstract noun, goodness, now used 
as an adjective, good; fern. rftl£9. Kholem immoveable. Gr. 58. 
Accent, athnakh disjunctive. 

31. /j35-3 (vay-yabh-del), and made or caused division, or separa- 
tion, comp. of •) No. 21, and i^_, contr. for ^JiT" L. 73. Gr. 35. 
apoc. from a^5!, 3 sing. m. pres. Hiph. of /& obsolete; parad. 1. 
Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

Note. — The tenses which express time relatively, are translated 
here according to the Engl, and not according to the Heb. idiom. 

32. j^3 (ben), between, const, form of j?3, Gr. 113; interval, 
separation, translated into our idiom by the prep, betiueen. It is 
found, with other words, in the singular and plur. constr. forms, 
and also in the fern. plur. : as, \J*3 separation (as regards) me, 
between me; ^3*3 between us; DH1^3 beticeen them; ^3*ffu3 
between us ; vid. inf. No. 2119. See Introduction, Part. III., on the 
subject of the prepositions. L. 171. 9. The vowel is immutable. 
Gr. 64. Accent, merka conjunctive. 

33. J^ (u-bhe)i), and beticeen, comp. of cop. conj . ), pointed ) before 
the labial ^. L. 173.4. Gr.l25.(2.) Accent, merka conjunctive. 

34. *s]KTin (lia-kho-shech), comp. of def. art. T\,\h.epathakJi under 
it being long by position before H, which does not admit of dagesh 
forte, Gr. 19; and ^^H No. 12. Accent, silluk on the penult. 

35. — Ver. 5. £Op*5 (tay-yik-rd), and called, comp. of ') No. 21, 
and K^PI 3 sing. m. pres. kal of fc^fj parad. 12. 1. cried, tcp&Qiv, 
verbum pr. onomatopoeticum, de bestiis etiam usurpatum (v. &Op)> 
cf. Gr. Kpatya (repay), Kripvacra) (/crjpvy); in linguis Germ, charen 
clamare, cliaro clamor, fletus, ssepius de clamor e bestiarum, ut 
kr alien, krachzen; Gall, crier; AngL to cry; praemisso sibilo skreian; 
Suec. skria, schreien ; see Ges. Lex. So also Engl, screech, and 
Scot, skreigh. 2. called. 3. named. The accent is not affected by 
the \ the penult, syllable being impure. Accent, kadma conj. 

36. 'llfcO (la-or), lit. to the light, "and God called to the light 
day;" " acclamavit Deus luci : dies." "TD? HlJ&g* $*)\?*) and he 
called names to all, chap. ii. 20 ; Kal i/cdXeaev 6 <9eo? rS <£am 



10 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.i. 

jjftipav, Theod. TlttS contr. for *f\tirl?, L. ?3. Gt. 35. Comp. of 
/, a particle, to, for, L. 171. 7. Ordinarily pointed with sh'va, 
L. 174. 3. Gr. 126, a. T\ def. art. No. 5 and 7; and "fltf No. 24. 
Accent, pashta disjunctive. 

37. DV (yom~), day, subs. ni. Accent, sakeph katon disjunctive. 

38. ^??p/l {tfla-kho-shecli), lit. «m# fo £Ae darkness ; contr. for 
WnriTI, comp. of ), before another sh'va \ L. 173. 3. Gr. 125, a. 1. 
Tbe article T\ is absorbed, and its vowel attached to the 7. See 
No. 36; see likewise No. 34. Accent, tiphkha disjunctive, upon 
the penult. See No. 10. 

39. fcOp T (ka-ra), called-, 3 sing. m. pret. kal, parad. 12. See 
No. 35. Accent, munakh conjunctive on the penult., because the 
penult, syllable of the word immediately following bears the tonic 
accent. L. 120. 

40. H/Jjj (la-y'lali), night, comp. of 7 V, ground form 77 with 
n — , parag. H/v, in pause n?W; in regard to the form of this 
word, see Gr. 113. As to the change of the vowel in consequence 
of the pause accent, see Gr. 31. Accent, athnakh disjunctive. See 
No. 20, and Gr. 29, a. 

41. "W1, see Nos.21, 23, and 25. 

42. i*iy (he-rebh), evening, subs. m. a segolate of the (a) class. 
From the notion of mixture involved in most of the derivatives of 
this word, it is probable that it contains the same idea, and em- 
braces that period of the night when the light and darkness 
become, as it were, intermixed. Accent, merka conjunctive upon 
the penult. Gr. 29,/. 

43. 7^_, see 41, etc. 

44. IM (bho-ker), morning, lit. opening (of day) ; see ^p5> co g- 
J7M and "133 °P ene d, cleft; morning being the period at which the 
sun bursts out from below the horizon. Subs. mas. seg. (0) class. 
Gr. 105, et seq. No dagesh lene in ^, Gr. 20. Accent, tiphkha 
disjunctive on the penult. See No. 7. 

45. *in$ {e-had), one; the cardinal is here used instead of the 
ordinal, as unus for primus in Latin. Mas. constr. Hn&, fern 
J"HJ[!N$j contr. T\n$- In all these cases, the vowels under the & are 
long by position. Accent, silluk on the ult. syllable. 



Ver.5— 7.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 11 

" Diem intelligendum naturalem, neque vero plurium sive 
dierum, sive annorum spatium, vix disertius declarari potuit hac 
formula." Ro-s. 

46 .Ver. 6. ^ft^, see No. 21. Accent, munakh conjunctive 

on the penult. Gr. 30, b. 

47. *PP, No. 23. Accent, merka conjunctive. 

48. JTkH ( ra -ki a h), expanse, sub. m. f. J^p^ 5e#£, struck, stamped 
(with the feet), expanded (by beating); hence JTlTj something 
beaten out, expanse. This word is rendered by the LXX. crrepeco/jLa, 
from its supposed firmness and strength, which idea is involved in 
the roots, in the cognate languages; hence the English word 

firmament. The Heb. gives intimation of form, the Greek of 
strength and solidity. The pathakh is furtive. Accent, tiphkha 
disjunctive on the ult. 

49. *T[in5 (b'thoch), in the midst of, comp. of 3 No. 1, and Ipfi 
const, of *$?, ground form ^H. L. 148. 9. and 87. 1. Gr. 112. 
and 50. 1. The middle, the midst. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

50. D^H, see No, 20. Pause accent, athnakh on the penult. 

51. *JJ*1 (vi-hi), and let there be, comp. of \ and TV, see Nos. 23 
and 24; contr. S T\\ Gr. 125. 3. Accent, merka conjunctive. 

52. 7^*755 (mabh-dil), id quod dwisionem faded, contr. for 
T?3H0, Gr. 35. Hiph. part. m. of bl%, No. 31. Accent, sakeph 
katon disjunctive. 

53. D?Q? (Ja-ma-yini), lit. in reference to the waters-, comp. of 
7, particle to, in reference to, see No. 36, pointed with kamets be- 
fore the tonic accent immediately preceding. L. 174.6. Gr. 126. e. 
Pause accent, silluk on the penult. See 20. 

54. — Ver 7. ES^l (vay-ya-has), and made, comp. of \, No. 21 ; 
and b*JT 3 sing. m. apoc. present; kal of H^J? made, parad. 13; 
and second, in full, H^y\ L. 74. 2. Gr. 37. Accent, munakh con- 
junctive on the penult., this being a segolate form, No. 7. 

55. JTiTlPrnN (eth ha-ra-ki a h),~T\X, No. 4, the vowel shortened 
in consequence of the withdrawal of the accent. Gr. 9, and 10. 
H def. art. pointed with kamets before 1, which is regarded as a 
guttural, see No. 7. JTp 1 ! No. 48. Accent, segolta disjunctive en 
the ult. 



12 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.i. 

56. 7^y_] See No. 31. Accent, r'bhi a h disjunctive. 

57. p5 (pen), No. 32. Accent, maJipach conjunctive. 

58. DV3P1 No. 20. Accents, pashtas disjunctive, that on the 
penult, being the tonic accent. Gr. 27. 

59. I^K ( a sher), relative pronoun he, who, that which, what, 
common to every gender and number. L. 177. Gr. 101. Accent, 
r 9 bhi a 7i disjunctive. 

Note. — The student will observe, that to complete the construction 
according to our idiom, the substantive verb must be understood 
between *0$ and the following word. See the same ellipsis in 
verses 2, and 4. 

60. rin£l£? (mit-ta-hhath), lit. from under (in reference to the 
expanse or firmament), comp. of £?' a fragment of }£?, the ground 
form of which is probably 3J£, signifying cutting off, division, and 
part, portion-, commonly used as a prep. from. L. 172. 2. Gr. 123. 
nn? originally a subs, of the seg. form, (a) class, inferior part ; 
likewise used as a prep, under, beneath ; ground form FirtPj with 
an affix iFiritt, lit. inferior place (in regard to) him, below him. — 
Gr. 105,106. Accent, munakh conjunctive on the penult. No. 7. 

61. V-*pi? Qa-ra-hWi), contr. for Wprh. Gr.35, comp. of *?, 
and the def. art. "Jl with kamets before 1 see No. 36, and JTEQ 
No. 48. Accent, sakeph haton disjunctive. 

62. 7^D (me-hal), from above, comp. of -lb No. 60, before the 
guttural letter ti. L.172.4. Gr. 123 b. and 7$£ No. 13. Accent, 
munakh conjunctive. 

63. p (chen), lit. reality, certainty ; hence the concrete being 
used for the abstract, substantial, true, right. Plur. ^^ probi, 
chap. xlii. 11. — p'TPI and it was right, rightly (done), done exactly 
as God commanded, and it was so. No dagesh lene in the 3, the 
preceding consonant being one of the *)f\H letters. Gr.20. Pause 
accent, silluk. 

64. — Yer. 8. £Op?1 See No. 35. Accent, darga conjunctive. 

65. STCTy? No. 61. Accent, tiphkha disjunctive. 

66. D£># in pause for Up#, See Nos. 5, and 20. Accent, 
athnakh disjunctive on the penult. No. 5. 



Ver.7— 10.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 13 

67. ^ see No. 42. 

68. Ipi see No. 44. 

69. *3fe? (she-ni), second. Pause accent, silluk. 

70. — Ver. 9. ^fo\ (yik-ka-vii), let be gathered together, contr. for 
^fip^. L. 76. Gr. 39. 3 pi. pres. ?z/p/i. of iTlp, parad. 13, root ljj or 
1[7, ground form HID, subs. m. a £&tft£ stretched out, a line, a cord, 
1. <? measuring line, 2. « boundary line, 3. a &W£: from hence the 
verb Hip derives — 1. the meaning of looking for , hoping, implying 
a stretching of the eyes or mind to distant objects, 2. that of bringing 
within limits, collecting, gathering together or the like: the word is 
here used imperatively. Accent, kadma conjunctive. 

71. "7X (el), which on the removal of the makkaph, and on the 
restoration of the accent, becomes 7& Gr. 9, 10 ; originally a noun 
of the ground form H/K Gr. art. 37 ; and is still found in the 
constr. forms both sing, and plur. Its primary idea seems to be 
that of motion towards any person, place, or thing. It is now used 
as a prep, signifying to, toicards, into; and when the motion 
towards is with a hostile purpose, against, see infra, No. 470. 

72. DIM (ma-koni), subst. m. place, lit. where one stands, place 
(of standing). Lat. statio a stando, existendo. L. 157. 17. Boot 
D^lp to stand, see Prof. Lee's. Lex. Accent munakh conjunctive. 

73. ^H^ see 45. accent sakeph-katon, disjunctive. 

74. n&OrT) (v 9 the-ra-eh), and let appear, comp. of cop. conj. \ 
and HNHn 3. sing. fern. pres. niph. of T\\$T\ saw pret. niph. HNnj 
was seen appeared, paradigms. 2, 3. 13. Accent, tiphkha disjunc. 

75. n^l'Tl {liay-yab-ba-shali), comp. of -Jl def. art. and «"!&f2l* 
the dry (land), a fern. form. Lat. aridum; Gr. rj %r}pd, to f^/oov Matt. 
xxiii. 15. opp. rj Oakaaaa ; forma intenska, See. Prof. Lee's and 
Dr.Ges.Lex. verb Bty was dry; and Tl&yh contr. for PlBtyPlS 

"T V J TT TT \ 

see ver. 10 and No. 36. Accent, athnakh disjunctive. 

76. p'W, Nos. 23. 24. and 63. In the LXX. there is the fol- 
lowing addition after jD^/T^ : koX <jvvr}yQri to vhoop to vttokcltw tov 
ovpavov ei? Ta? o-vvayooyas avTcov koX oocpOr) r\ ^rjpd. 

77. — Ver. 10. njK??^ (u-Vmik-veli), comp. of ) before sh'va ) 
L. 173. 3. Gr. 125. 1." and h, and 71)$% constr. form of Ttyp Gr. 96. 
subs.m., collection, from HID, No. 70. Accent, merka conjunctive. 



14 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. i. 

78. E3*j3* (yam-mini), seas, plur. abs. of DJ constr. D* ground form 
Q£?* verb DttJ, cogn. H^H raged, roared. Accent, athnakh dis- 
junctive. 

79. &0.5 No. 27. Accent, merka conjunctive. 

80. !litp"\3 Nos. 29, 30. Accent, silluk disjunctive. 

81. — Ver. 11. NBJHfl (tad-she), 3 sing. fern. apoc. present hiph. 
of fc$£?H ivas, became, grassy, in hiph. sent forth young grass ; full 
form fc^lsJH)} used here in an imperative sense, let bring forth, 
parad. 12. Accent, mahpach conjunctive. 

82. K&?H (de-she), grass, subs. m. segolate. Accent, sakeph katon 
disjunctive, on the penult. No. 7. 

In hoc commate quicquid emittit terra in tres veluti classes divi- 
ditur. — 1. Tenera herba sine semine saltern conspicuo. — 2. Quae 
semen profert majorque est. — 3. Arbores sub quibus arbusta con- 
tinentur. Ros. 

83. D^y (he-sebh), subs. m. seg. herba adultior, the larger de- 
scription of herbs, including vegetables, suitable for human food. 
See verse 29, and No. 82. Accent, ifthibh disjunctive on the pe- 
nult. No. 7. 

84. jrnTD (maz-ri a h), producing, seeding, yielding seed; part. 
Hiph. of JHT parad. 3 and 4, sowed; pret. Hiph. STITH caused to 
sow ; part. jTljnfo, contr. jT^Tfo. L. 73. Gr. 35. See similar forms 
of expression in chap. viii. 21 ; chap, xxvii. 3 ; and chap, xxviii. 
20 ; where such expressions are used as smelling a smell, hunting a 
hunting, vowing a vow. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

85. JTlI (ze-rah), subs. m. seg. (a) class with pathakh under the 
second radical. Gr. 106, seed. The phrase here is rendered by 
the LXX. cnrelpov airepfxa. Accent, sakeph katon on the penult. 
No. 7. 

86. TV (hets), subs. m. a tree. The cognate Arabic word sig- 
nifies baculus, os (ossis) ; Gr. o&s, a bough, and ocrreov (Sanscr. 
asthi) ; Lat. hasta. Ges. Lex. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

87. H5 Qp'n), subs. m. from iTlS; Sanscr. bhri; Gr. (frepco ; Lat. 
fero; Engl, to bear; Goth, bair-an; Germ. ant. b'aren ; Ges. Lex. 

From hence the Scottish word bairn, a child, because borne or 
carried in the womb. To bear (fruit) ; hence **}$ anything borne, 
fruit, and |E?3 **)$ ivhat the womb bears, fruit of the womb ; 



Ver. 10—14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 15 

H? YV. a tree of fruit, fruit tree-, ground form **)§ No. 23. Ac- 
cent, cfrashayim disjunctive. 

88. n^J? (Jio-seli), making, hearing, the phrase is rendered in 
the LXX. 7roLovv tcapirov. See also Matt. iii. 8. Part. act. kal. of 
<"1^JJ made, parad. 13. Accent, tfthibh disjunctive. 

89. H3 Xo. 87. Accent, pashta disjunctive. 

90. )l s u? (V mi-no), according to its kind, or species ; Dathe ren- 
ders the expression varii generis, the LXX. add icaO' 6/xoiOT7]Ta. 
Comp. of 7 to, according to, Xo. 36, and j*$ sub. m. kind, species, 
and the pron. afEx 3 sing. m. 1. Gr.99. Although the accent, 
sakeph katon disjunctive, is transferred to the affix, there is no 
change in the vowel. Gr. 58. 

91. "D'lyiT *!$$ (°sher zar-ho bhai), lit. which its seed in it (it- 
self), whose seed is in itself. This is a characteristic distinction 
between fruit and vegetables. Prof. Lee is of oinnion that the 
relative pronoun, in such cases as this, is "a sort of subordinate 
nominative absolute." According to this view, the rendering would 
be, according to the Hebrew idiom, as to which, — its seed (is) in 
itself. L. 216. 13. Accent, merka conjunctive, (a) 1JH? comp. of 
}T]T, ground form of JT)L a s ^g- of the («) class, Xo. 85, Gr. 106. 
And pronominal affix 1. Gr.99. (b) *Q comp. of 3 prep. Xo. 1, and 
pron. affix *j. Gr. 99, and 20. Accent, tiphkha disjunctive. 

92.— Ver. 12. KJinl (vat-to-tse), comp. of 5 Xo.21, and K^ifi 3 
sing. fern. apoc. pres. hiph. of K¥J or K¥l went out, in hiph. caused 
to go out , produced , parad. 8 and 12. Accent, kadma conjunctive. 

93. KWU? (Vmi-ne-hu) after its kind, comp. of 7 and \ s b Xo.90, 
and ^n,., another form of the pron. affix 1. Gr.99. Accent, sakeph 
katon disjunctive on the penult., L. 117. 2. Gr. 29 (&). 

94. itfty (sh'li-shi), m. third r\*wh& and JT^^ fern, from 
W/& three. Accent, silluk disjunctive. 

95. — Ver. 14. ]"DN£j *?T let there be lights, i. e. luminaries. The 
verb here, and noun connected with it, are of different numbers, as 
if it were said in Latin, sit luminaria, i. e. existat res, nempe lumi- 
naria. Eos. Somewhat similar are the French phrases, Qui'ly ait 
des lumieres, and il y a des homines. "With the exception of the 



16 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. i. 

3 pers. sing, pret., verbs in all the persons and numbers of the 
pres. and pret. tenses have nominatives in the prefixed or postfixed 
pronouns, and the apparent nominative maybe said to be a nominative 
absolute, or in apposition with the nominative involved in the verb. 
See Prof. Lee's Gr. art. 216. — (a) ftltiti written in full fthiKft. 
L. 72. Gr. 34. Plur. of litfft, which has likewise D^KJb m. that 
tvhich gives light, a luminary ; root "TlK No. 24. Penult, vowel of 
^ll&fo mutable — ult. immutable. Gr. 57. 63. 74. Accent, kadma 

T 3 

conjunctive. 

96. J?\T)3 (bir-ki a h), in the expanse of; comp. of 5 prep, before 
the following sh'va 3. L. 174. 3. Gr. 126 (b). and JPjyj constr. 
form of JTJ73 N°- 48- The reason for the change of the vowel, 
the same as in the case of the preceding word, the penult, being 
mutable, the ult. immutable. Accent, manakh conjunctive. 

97. 7^3l>? (Vhabh-dil), to make a separation, comp. of 7 prep, 
and T^On inf. hiph. of Sl| parad. 1. See Nos. 31 and 52°. Ac- 
cent, sakeph gadol disjunctive. 

98. VT]\ {fha-yu), lit. and let them be, i. e. that they be, or serve, 
comp. of ) cop. conj. and 3 plur. pret. kal of JlNl was, parad. 13. 
Dr. Lee thinks the pret. is in such cases used instead of the im- 
perative for greater emphasis. See his doctrine upon the sequences 
of the tenses, in his Gram. art. 231, 7, 8, et seq., and 233, 3, and 
particularly the example at the top of page 349, quoted from 
Exod. xxix. 1-3. See also Introduction, part III., on the subject 
of the tenses. Accent, mahpach conjunctive. 

99. hh^7 (Vo-thotli), for signs, comp. of 7 prep., and JVlfc 
contr. for fiirVlK Gr. 34, plur. of JTitf a sign, mark, vowel immu- 
table, Gr. 58. "And there shall be signs in the sun, moon, and 
stars," Lukexxi.25. Accent, pashta disjunctive. 

100. DHglfo? 5 ) (ii-V mo-h a dim), for periods, \. e. for marking stated 
periods of time, or seasons, such as the seasons of the year, fasts, 
feasts, or other religious solemnities. Pos. states that this passage 
has been rendered by some interpreters as follows : sint in signa tarn 
statis temporibus, quam diebus et annis. Comp. of ) conjunct, 
pointed ) before the following sh'va. Gr. 125. 1, and 7 prep., and 
Q^JJIfl plur. of HJ^Ift an appointed time, or period of time, from 



Ver. 14—16.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 17 

T^ or *"IJQ pointed out, defined, ult. vowel moveable, penult, im- 
moveable. Gr. 57. 75. Accents, munakh and saheph haton, the 
latter is the tonic accent. Gr. 27. 

101. Cpv^l (u-Vya-mim), and for days, comp. of ), 7 see 
No. 100, and D^, plur. of UV, contr. for QW L. 73, and Gr. 35, 
Accent, tiphJcha disjunctive. 

102. D'3E?1 (tfsha-nbri), and years, comp. of \ and plur. of T\^ 
fern, a year, another form of the pi. ffi^- Proprie iteratio, sc. 
cursiis solis, vel commutationum temporis, ut veris, messis, hiemis. 
Confer Lat. annus quod proprie orbem notat. Gr. iviavros- Ges. 
Lex. Accent, silluh disjunctive. 

103. — Yer. 15. VPfl (v'ha-yu), and he, or serve, see No. 98. 
Accent, mahpach conjunctive. 

104. jpilXu? (lim-o-rotli), for lights, luminaries, comp. of 7, 
pointed 7 before sh'va. Gr. 126. b. See No. 95, and 96. Accent, 
pashta disjunctive. 

105. yp15 {bir-hi a li), see 96. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

106. T^H? (Vha-ir), to give light. This is another use of the 
luminaries referred to in verse 14, viz., to give light to the earth. 
Comp. of 7 prep., and inf. hiph. of ^fltf in kal. to become light, in 
hiph. to give light, parad. 10, and 2. Accent, tiphhha disjunctive. 

107— Ver. 16. ^ - m {eth-sh'ne), two, as to ~X% see 28. *J# 
construct form of D*0&^- In Heb. the numerals are substantives, 

■I — ; J 

in Latin they are likewise occasionally so, as trias, decas; in Eng. 
triad, decad. Gr.49, and 128. L. 181. Accent, merha conjunctive. 

108. rnmr\ comp. of art. -n and nh^lb No. 95. Accent, 
tiphkha disjunctive. 

109. D vl^H (hag-g'do-lim), lit. the great, i. e. as respects the 
other luminaries, i. e. two greater lights. In regard to this mode 
of forming the comparative degree, see Introduction, Part III. 
Comp. of 'Jl art., and masc. plur. of /H|, mas. PlTHi!, f. plur. 
D vH5, contr. D Y& Gr. 34. In regard to the change of vowels, 
see Gr. art. 57, and 73. This word is mas., although the form of 
rnK£?(l agreeing with it is fern., the sing, of which, however, is 
masc. No. 95. Pause accent, athnakh. 

110. 7*l|n llN^rm^ (eth ham-ma-or hag-ga-dol), lit. the light, 

2 



18 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. i. 

the great, as respects the other, i.e. the greater light. See Introduc- 
tion, Part III. Accents, mahpakh conjunc, and pashta disjunc. 

111. Tw^tiu? (Vmem-she-letli), Lat. in dominium, for the ruling 
of; so sol omnium rector, Plin. ; and sol omnium moderator atque 
dux, Cic. Tusc. Qusest. Comp. of 7 prep, and TwWtiti subs, fern. 
seg. (a) class, from 7$fa ruled. Accent, munakh conjunctive on 
the penult. Gr. 29, f 

112. JCOpn (hak-ka-ton), the small, as respects the other, the 
smaller, or lesser. No. 109, 110. Comp. of -PI art. and )DP, in full 
p£3p Gr. 34 ; in fern. DJtpP, from the obs. form jfcpp, the ground form 
of which is probably POP Gr. 115, 116. Accent, pashta disjunc. 

113. (17^/1 (Jial-la-y'lah), the night; comp. of -7\ and PDv 
No. 40. Accent, sakeph katon disjunctive on the penult. See 
Gr 113 and 29, a. 

114. D^5513(l (hak-ko-cha-hhim), the stars, governed by &W1 
in the beginning of the verse ; comp. of -II and plur. of M*D a 
star. The root is obsolete in Hebrew. Prof. Lee thinks that the 
root is traceable in an Arabic word signifying a round cup, to which 
the stars appear to us to have some resemblance. The 1 is immu- 
table. Gr. 57. Pause accent, silluk. 

115. — Yer. 17. \P?.\{vay-tjit-ten), and gave, here placed-, comp. 
of J No. 21, and j£V 3 sing. m. pres. kal of JfO gave, parad. 5. 
Gr. 131, d. Accent, merka conjunctive. 

116. DHK (o-tham), them, comp. of fiX No. 4, quasi ab M1K or 
H1& and D , a fragment of DH, plur. of pers. pronoun 'lPl ; thus we 
have DHJ1& and DHH^ contr. DHX* Accent, tf'^V conjunctive. 

117. — Yer. 18. ^Wu?\ (v'lim-shol), and to rule, or to preside, 
comp. of ) cop. conj., and 7 before the following sKva 7 Gr. 126. h. 
and inf. constr. kal of 7£^£D parad. 1, ruled, No. 111. Accent, 
pashta disjunctive. 

118. BVJ (hay-yom), over the day, contr. for DrQC? see Gr. 35. 
comp. of prep. 3 art. *Jl and DV No. 37. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

118 (a). uT?^ (u-hhal-la-y'lah), and over the night, contr. for 
n^jTt& comp. of 1 before 1, I Gr. 125. 2. Art. 'H, see No. 118, 
and. PDJ7 No. 40. Accent, sakeph katon disjunctive on the penult., 
see No. 40. 



Ver. 16—21.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 19 

119. /^5u?^ (ii-Vhabh-dil), and to make a division or separation, 
comp. of ) cop. conj. which before 7 is \ Gr. 125 (1), and /^5T7 
Nos. 52, 97. Accent, sakeph haton disjnnctiye. 

120. Yer. 19. ^21 (r'bhi-hi), fourth, fern, form JVJ^yi, from 
yyifour. Pause accent, silluk. 

121.— Yer. 20. W~P\ (yish-rHsu), 3 plur. m. pres. hot., used 
here imperatively, of T*1^ 1. became numerous, 2. produced in great 
numbers, in which latter sense it is used here, parad. 3. Accent, 
munakh conjunctive. 

122. VTjjP (she-rets), subs. masc. seg. (a) class, abundance, mid- 
titude, swarm. A generic name for small animals, whether insects, 
reptiles, or fishes. Prof. Lee's Lex. Accent, tiphkha conjunctive. 

123. ^§3 (ne-phesli), subs. com. oftener fern., a seg. (a) class, 
breath, any thing that breathes, a living creature, an animal. 
Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

124. (TH (khay-yali), subs. fern, life, that tvhich hath life; Lat. 
animans, a beast, generally, a wild beast, see No. 149. Pos. thus 
translates this clause, " scateat aqua multitudine bestiarum anima- 
tarum." Accent, atlmakh disjunctive. 

125. flip'! (vlioph), comp. of ) conj., and SpJJ masc. a bird, collect. 
birds. Accent, pashta disjunctive. 

126. £)§1jr (fho-phepli), 3 sing. m. pres. pihel of t|1J? to fly, 
parad. 10. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

127. ^%ht, see Nos. 13 and 14. h$. is here used for ^X to, 
towards, see Exod. x. 21. The whole passage may be thus ren- 
dered, " and let the birds fly over the earth towards the firmament 
of heaven." Accent, tiphkha disjunctive. 

128. — Yer. 21. N^}5*1 (vay-yibh-ra), comp. of ') conj. and 3 sing, 
m. pres. kal of K'lSl created, parad. 12, see No. 2. Accent, munakh 
conjunctive. 

129. D^3pn Qiat-tan-ni-nim), comp. of 'Pi art., and plur. of pjfl 
Lat. aliquid externum, from JJft obs. which appears to have sig- 
nified tendo, extendo, compare Sanscr. tan; Gr. relvco, ravvco, 
titclIvw; Lat. tendo, from whence tenuis (Sanscr. tanu); Goth. 
thanjan; hence rjft a large fish, sea serpent, or other sea monster; 
Gr. raw la (a relvco), a, long fish; in old Germ, tanna, a fir tree, 



20 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. i. 



from its length.. See Ges. Lex. The words D^Jfi and 
appear to include the larger and smaller descriptions of sea ani- 
mals. Accent, tiphkha disjunctive. 

130. "73 (kol), "without the aspiration chol, shortened by the 
removal of the accent from 73 Gr. 9. 10 and 63. Subs. m. totality, 
universality; verb 773 perfected, completed, compare Gr. o\o?; 
Lat. ullus; Germ, all, alle, heil; Eng. all and whole. See Ges. 
Lex. n^nn fe^SJvS lit. the totality of the breath of life, according 
to our idiom, every living thing. See Introduction, Part III., on the 
subject of adjectives. Accent withdrawn, on account of makkaph. 
Gr. 33. 

131. Jl^DIll (lia-ro-me-setli), that moveth, or creepeth, comp. of 
■Jl which before 7 becomes H Gr. 19. And the fern, form of &^£?7 
part. act. kal of &?£7 parad. 2. T\^1TT\ T\T\T\ is applied to crea- 
tures whose legs are near the earth, and to those which move like 
serpents, and likewise to those that swim in the sea. Accent, 
pazer conjunctive. 

132. D^H *l¥7fcy 7^X ( a sher sha-r'tsu ham-ma-yini), quihus 
scatent aquce, Ges. Lex. ivith which the ivaters abound, ^7£j? 3 plur. 
pret. kal of V7fc^ see No. 121. Accent on 7^&, telisha ketanna 
conjunctive. 

133. dhytf? (Vmi-ne-hetri), according to their kind, comp. of 7 
prep, yti kind, species, see No. 90, and DH~ grave pron. affix, Gr.99. 
The tsere is the vowel of union; with the pron. affix fern. HJ^7 
ver. 24. Accent, r'bhiah disjunctive. 

134. W3 SpJJ (^ojoA ka-napli), lit. for^ of wm<7, or winged bird, 
see Introduction, Part III., on the modes adopted in Hebrew for 
qualifying nouns without the aid of adjectives. £]J3 subs. m. wing. 
Accent on £|33 pashta disjunctive. 

135. tf 7Q. see N°- 27. Accent, merka conjunctive. 

Note. — "We are induced at first sight to ask what connexion 
there is between the fishes of the sea and the fowls of the air, that 
they should occur together in the same verse. In point of external 
form there is no resemblance, but they are alike oviparous, and 
are alike equipped for rising in, and making their way through a 
fluid." Pictorial Bible, Gen. i. 21. 



Ver. 21—24.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 21 

136. — Ver. 22. *sp.J}?3 (va-y'bha-rech), and blessed; according to 
Ros., Bush, and others, " et indidit (illis) vim prolificam." Comp. 
of 3 conj. without dagesh, No. 25, and ^p.5!> pointed ^l^ owing 
to the removal of the accent to the penult, syllable, No. 21. 3 sing. 
m. -pres. pihel of *n*1|l parad 3, bent the knee, fell on the knee, from 
^j3 the knee ; in pihel, caused to fall on the knee (with a view to 
blessing) ; hence blessed. Accent, darga conjunctive. 

137. ibw? (le-mof), dicendo, his verbis, saying, contr. for "iDjtf/ 
L. 87 (5). Gr. 50 (5). ; comp. of / prep, before khatef segol 7 Gr. 
126. c. d., and ^IfoX inf. constr. kal of 15^ said, parad. 7. Accent, 
athnakh disjunctive. 

138. )1p (p'ru), be fruitful, 2 plur. m. imp. kal of 71*13 parad. 3 
and 13. See No. 87. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 

139. ! Q*1 ! I (ii-r^bhu), and multiply, comp. of ) conj. before sh'va 
*], Gr. 125 (1). ; and 2 plur. m. imp. kal of rft'l teas, became many, 
multiplied, parad. 13 and 2. Accent, r'bhiah disjunctive. 

140. IX/^ (u-mil-u), and fill, comp. of ) for ), see No. 139, and 
2 plur. m. imp. kal of fcwft filled, parad. 12. Accent, mahpach 
conjunctive. 

141. D^5 (bay -yam-mini), hi the seas, contr. for D^)l5 Gr. 
art. 35, comp. of 5 prep. -H def. art., and D^p* plur. of Q^, ground 
form D/^, the sea. Large pieces of water, such as the lakes of 
Genesareth, and Asphaltites, are, according to the Hebrew idiom, 
called seas. Accent, sakeph katon disjunctive. 

142. ^plp! ifha-hopli), comp. of \ conj. -Jl def. art, pointed with 
kamets before J? Gr. 19, and flty a bird, No. 125. Accent, tiphkha 
disjunctive. 

143. yV (yi-rebh), let midtiply, 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. kal of PD'I 
No. 139 ; used here as an imperative. Regular form JlS'T L. 74 (2). 
and 233 (2), (3). Gr. 37 and 115. Accent, merka conjunctive 
upon the penult, syllable. Gr. 29 a. 

144. F'lXIl (ba-a-rets), on the earth, contr. for j^ltfPQ, see 
Nos. 7. 36. and 141. Accent, silluk disjunctive on the penult. No. 7. 

145— Ver. 23. ^W (kha-mi-shi), fifth; root #Ql five. Ac- 
cent, silluk disjunctive. 

46.— Ver. 24. NJfiP. (to-tse), see No. 92. Accent, kadma conj. 



22 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.i. 

147. Pljbn? (Vhe-maJi), cattle, subs. fern, used collectively. 
" Under this term seem to be included all the ruminant animals, 
and perhaps certain others that resemble them in their herbivorous 
nature." Pict. Bible. Accent, merka conjunctive. 

148. GPfip} (va-re-mes), comp. of \ before a syllable bearing the 
tonic accent ), 125 (5), and tPtyi m. reptiles, used in a collective 
sense, see No. 131. "This designation was applied to all the ver- 
tebrate d animals that live upon the land, whether they run upon 
four feet, like the lizard and the iguana, or simply glide along the 
ground by means of abdominal scutella or scales, like the viper 
and the snake. They all agree in being oviparous." Pict. Bible. 
Accent, fbhir disjunctive. 

149. "IJTPfl (tfkha-y-tho), and beast, comp. of ) cop. conj. and 
JVH constr. form of PPPI, see No. 124, and ) paragogic. The penult, 
vowel is immutable, Gr. 62 ; the ult. being mutable is lost, Gr.75. 
" By this phrase we understand not only those animals which are 
properly carnivorous, as the lion and the wolf, but the rodentia or 
gnawing, the rabbit, mouse, etc., and the pachydermata or thick- 
skinned, the hog, the elephant, etc." Pict. Bible. No accent but 
makkaph. 

150. V*Ttf (e-rets), earth, No. 7. Accent, tiphkha disjunctive. 

151— Ver. 25. frp&K fc>j£1 so then God made. See No. 54. 
Accent on fe^?*l munakh conj.; on D^Pl/N tflishakHanna conj. 

152. JVn (klia-yatli), beast of, construct form of PlNl Gr. 95. 
See Nos. 124 and 149. Accent, kadma conjunctive. 

153. n^l^n (lia- a da-mah), the ground, comp. of -Pi before the 
gutt. Pi Gr. 19., and Pl£*Tfc$ subs. fern, ground, soil, land, probably 
from its reddish appearance, all the cognate words having the sig- 
nification of redness : thus, DPtX a ruby, or cornelian ; D1& red, or 
reddish brown ; D*T&$ tvas red ; ^to'ltf red-haired, etc. Accent, 
tiphkha conjunctive. 

154 — Ver. 26. PI 2^2 (na-h a seli), let us make, 1 plur. pres. kal 
of PI&?2J, parads. 2 and 13, see No. 54; used here as an imperative. 
Accent, merka conjunctive. 

" — Sanctius his animal, mentisque capacius altse 
Deerat adhuc, et quod dominari in caetera posset." — Ov. Met. i. 76. 
"Scias non esse hominem incogitatum opus." — Seneca. 



Ver. 24—26. THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 23 

155. D*7tf (a-dani), Adam, man. Josephus says, " This man was 
called Adam, which in the Hebrew tongue signifies one that is 
red, because he was formed out of red earth." Ant.b.i. c. 1. See 
No. 153. Accent, fbhir disjunctive. 

156. ^p7^3 (bHsal-me-nii), comp. of . prep., p?¥ ground form 
of uTi a seg. of the (a) class, l.a shadow; 2. an image. Gr. 73. 
And pron. affix )]— Gr.99, which has the accent tiphkha disjunc- 
tive upon the vowel of union, tsere. Gr. 29 (b). L. 117 (2). 

157. ^rfi£*75 (kid-mu-the-nii), comp. of 2 before the following 
sh'va 2 Gr. 126(5), like, as, according to, probably a fragment of 
some primitive noun from which we have 7X2 thus, L. 174 (2), and 
T\\l2T\ likeness, root 7\t2H teas like, and pron. affix )} — , see No. 156. 

XT JL •• 7 

^DTti&lS ^?j7¥3 ma y be rendered ad imaginem valde similem no- 
bis, in our express image, the two words being nearly synonymous, 
and being combined in order to strengthen the similitude. "Put 
on the new man, which is renewed in knowledge after the image 
of him that created him" (Col. iii. 10). Accent, athnakh disjunc- 
tive on the penult. Gr. 29 (b). 

"Quam (sc. tellurem) satus Iapeto, mixtam fluvialibus undis, 
Finxit in effigiem moderantum cuncta deorum." — Ov. Met. i. 82. 
<* 

158. ^y) (v'yir-dti), and let them have dominion, comp. of ) cop. 

conj. and 3 plur. m. pres. kal of HTJ parad. 2 and 13. 1. trod 
(with the feet), sc. a wine press, trampled (on any one); 2. sub- 
dued, exercised dominion. The pres. is here used imperatively, 
and the plur. is employed because the word lDHN! is used collec- 
tively, having reference to himself and his posterity. The number 
of words used in the singular, where, according to our idiom, they 
should be plural, which have been noticed in the preceding pages 
corroborates the view given in the Introduction, Part III., of the 
language being at one time without distinction of number by means 
of verbal terminations. Accent, flisha k'tanna conjunctive. 

159. T&X2 (bid-gaih), over the fish of (fishes), No. 158. Comp. 
of 2 prep, before sh'va 2 Gr. 126 (b), and constr. form of PU*J 
subs. fern, fish generally, large or small. As to change of vowels, 
see Gr. 94, 95. Accent, kadma conjunctive. 

160. Jl/briM 5 ! (u-bhab-Vhe-mah), and over the cattle, comp. of ) 



24 ANALYSIS OF 



[Chap. 



before the labial conson. } Gr. 125. 2. and Pl^HM contr. for 
n^D3L I 5 comp. of 5 prep. art. -h see No. 36, and HbH? No. 147. 
Accent, pashta disjunctive. 

161. fe?jb*lPl W%0'n (ha-remes ha-romes), lit. the creeper that 
creepeth, see Nos. 131 and 148. Each word has the article "H 
pointed with kamets before resh. Gr. 19. The accent on the former 
word is tiphkha disjunctive; on the latter, merka conjunctive. 

162.— Ver. 27. 1E>?¥3 (bHsal-mo), comp. of 3 prep. D7¥ ground 
form of D/¥ 156, and pron. affix 1 his. Gr.99. Accent, sakeph 
katon disjunctive. 

163. 1HK (o-tho), him, comp. of M& as if from ffitf see No. 4, 
and pron. affix 1 a fragment of fc^Pl Ae. Gr. 99. Accent, athnakh 
disjunctive. 

164. *1DT (za-chaf), male, a male, subs. masc. verb *DT remem- 
bered. The connection between the meanings of these two words 
is very obscure. Prof. Lee says that the male is called "DT " either 
because the man keeps up the memory of a family, or because his 
mental retentive powers are very great." See Lex. The noun is 
probably the primitive. Accent, merka conjunctive. 

165. rtlp}^ (u-n'ke-bhah), and female, and a female, comp. of \ 
before sh'va ), Gr. 125(2). and !"l!}j?2 f. female, used both of the 
human species and the lower animals, from ^p3 pierced, marked, 
distinguished. Accent, tiphkha disjunctive. 

166. — Ver. 28. Dil7 (la-hem), to them,^Te^. 7 before tonic accent 
7 Gr. 126 (e), and DPI 3 pers. pron. pi. Gr. 99. Accent, geresh 
disjunctive. 

167. "sp)}?! see No. 136. Accent, munakh conjunctive. Gr. 30. 

168. Plj^Ml (v'chibh-shu-ha), and subdue it, scil. f"J^Pl comp. 
of 1 conj., and S^33 with kibbuts vicarious for ^33 2 plur. m. 
imp. kal of ^5? parad. 1, trod down (with the foot), compare &^33 
a footstool, 2. subdued. Pause accent, athnakh on the penult. 
Gr. 29 (b). 

169. VTTrl (u-r'du), and have dominion, comp. of ) conj. before 
sh'va ) Gr.'l25 (2), and TT\ 2 plur. m. imp. kal of HTJ No. 158 
Accent, g'rashayim disjunctive. 

170. — Ver. 29. T\$T\ (hin-neJi), lo, behold, with H paragogic, for 



Ver. 26—31.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 25 

jil ground form JJP! Gr. r;v=|n and rjvt=T^yi; Lat. en. Gr. 115. 
Accent, flisha k'tanna conjunctive. 

171. *fifO (na-that-ti), I give, lit. I have given, 1 sing. pret. &aZ 
of jrO gave, par. 5, for WH^ Gr. 39. Accent, hadma conjunctive 
Gr. 29 b. 

172. ^E?$ (lie-sebh), see No. 83. Accent, munakh conjunctive. 
1~3. JJ^IT (zo-reP-li), sowing, seeding, yielding, part. act. m. kal of 

J?^T parad. 4. No. 84. pathakh furtive. Gr. IT. Accent, munakh 
conjunctive. 

174. PDpNt/ (Voch-lali), for food, comp. of 7 prep. i"l73X subs, 
fern, food, masc. form /JX seg. (o) class, ground form /?X 

Gr.110, and without the accent TOX. Pause accent, silluk. 

: : t ? 

175.— Ver. 30. p.XH Ipjjh&l supply WO No. 171. 

176. 1H""")^X lit. wAacA »* & (the breath of life), i.e. in which 
(is) the breath 'of life. See Prof. Lee's Gr.216. 13, and No. 91. 
Accent, pashta disjunctive. 

"At vetus ilia aetas cui fecimus aurea nomen, 
Foetibus arbor eis, et quas liumus educat herbis 
Fortunata fuit: Dec polluit ora cruore." — Ov. Met. xv. 96, et seq. 

177. [TV (ye-re7c) subs. masc. sing, greenness; p*Y/3"n$ the 
totality of greenness (of herb), i.e. every green herb. Prof. Lee, in 
his Lex., says, " the primary notion of this word seems to have 
consisted in throwing, shooting out, hence it is applied, 1. to green 
herbs (shooting out of the earth) ; 2. to spitting (as shot out of the 
mouth). Accent, merka conjunctive. Gr.29y. 

178. — Ver. 31. H^ (lia-sah), had made, see Introduction, 
Part III., on the pluperf. tense. 3 sing. mas. prset. kal of n^JJ 
made, parad. 2 and 13. Accent, sakeph katon disjunctive. 

179. HX£? (m'od), originally a subs. m. strength, vehemence; thus 
^HXft ?b? with all thy strength, Deut vi. 5, and 1XD ^V. usque ad 
vehementiam, Gen. xxvii. 33. It is generally used adverbially with 
the meaning of valde, in Lat. Accent, athnakh disjunctive. 

180. ^'^1 (hash-shish-shi), the sixth, comp. of art. -H and ^V 
sixth, from. WW six ; Sanscr. schasch; Slav, sch est; Gr. e£; Lat. 
sex; Eng. six. Ges. Lex. Pause accent, silluk. 

181. — Chap.ii. 1. \$y\ (va-y'chtd-lu), and were finished, comp. 



26 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.ii. 

of 5 conj. without dagesh No. 25, and 3 plur. m. pres. puhal, of 
H/3 parad. 13. accomplished, finished. 

182. DfcOV (ts'bha-am), comp. of #y& with the accent removed 
to the pron. affix SO? Gr.74. 1. «^ army; 2. any multitude ^ often 
applied to the heavenly bodies, and here to all created things. 
" Similitudo sumta est de militibus, uni duci subditis." Hos. 

183. — Ver. 2. ?3?1 (va-y'chal), for (God) had finished. God 
having finished all his work (on the sixth), rested on the seventh 
day. See Glass. Phil. Sac. 298. ed. Dathe, and Introduction, 
Part III., on the subject of the Plup. Tense. Comp. of ) No. 181 
and 25, and /5! apoc. for Hp3) Gr. 37. 3 sing. m. pres. pihel of 
rhl see No. 18i. 

184. DV3 (bay-yom), for tWQSl see No. 36. 

185. 73^5 (liash-sKbhi-hi), the seventh. The LXX. read 
T?5 e/crrj, and likewise the Sam., Syr., and others of later date ; but 
this change was probably made to avoid the difficulty which would 
have been felt, had not the preceding verb been translated as a 
pluperfect. Comp. of «Pl art. and W^fiP ordinal, masc. from J?3G? 
seven, card.; Sansc. sapta ; Zend, hapta ; Gr. sirra ; Lat. septem ; 
Goth, sibun ; Angl. seven ; Germ, sieben. Ges. Lex. 

186. IMiwO (m'lach-to), his work, comp. of pron. affix ) and 
Mfcwfc ground form of MN/6, another form of fiDN /fi, and used 
in the constr. state ; subs. fern, ministry, mission ; sed per meton. 
causae, the effect or end of a mission ; tvork, or business of any kind. 
Storr. Analog, p. 75. Koot ^IK7 sent, obs. 

187. H^ (ha-sah), had made. 

188. fiSBJ^l (vay-yish-both), and rested, comp. of ■) and 3 sing. 
m. pres. hal of T\2W rested, ceased, parad. 1. 

189— Ver. 3. fw see No. 136. 

190. K^M (va-y'kad-desh), and sanctified, comp. of •) pointed 
5, see No. 25 ; and 3 sing. m. pres. pihel of ffi*ljD parad. 1, was holy; 
in pihel, made or pronounced holy, set apart to a sacred purpose, 
sanctified. 

191. TW (sha-bhath), 3 sing. pret. hal of TW No. 188. 

192. TWT7 (la-h a soth). The words in the Hebrew literally 
translated into our language are, « which God created in reference 
to making ;" but according to our idiom, « which God had created 



Ver.l— 4.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 27 

and made." Lat. creando perfecerat. It is believed that this idiom 
is used to mark the perfect and thorough completion of the work. 
See similar idioms in Eccles. ii. 11 ; Jude xiii. 19 ; 2 Kings xxi. 6 ; 
Psa. cxxvi. 2. Comp. of 7 before the comp. sh\a 7 Gr. 126, c, to, 
for, in reference to, and inf. constr. kal of Plfc^JJ parad. 2 and 13. 

193. — Yer. 4. PI7K (el-leh), these, comp. ^N pi. of PIT demons, 
pron. and Pi parag. which is generally affixed to this word, but 
which does not take the accent. 

194. m^T/ifi (to-Vdotli), subs. pi. fern, from 17* which signifies 
both begot and brought forth. 1. births, generations ; 2. accounts 
of creation, generation, or production; 3. histories, or accounts (of 
families), genealogies, narratives of events. The sacred writer seems 
in this chapter to give additional accounts of the creation of the 
world, and to describe certain occurrences or incidents connected 
with it, not mentioned in the previous chapter. 

(a) DiO^rO (Vhib-ba-r'am), lit. in their being created, i. e. at 
their creation, when they were created ; comp. of 3 prep, and frO.SPl 
inf. niph. of K^5 parad. 12 and 3, and pron. affix D t which takes 
the accent, the penult, vowel kamets compensating for the absence 
of dagesh in *1, and which being a characteristic of the conj. is 
immutable, and the tsere which is mutable is lost. Gr. 75. 

195. nifc^y DV? (b'yom h a soili), lit. in the dag of the making of, 
i.e. when (God) made, HI^S? see No. 192; this word is in the 
construct, state with V*1NJ see L. 224. 9. These forms of construc- 
tion corroborate the view that Heb. infinitives are really nouns. 

196. D^PPX PHPP (ifho-vah € lo-him). It is to be here observed, 
that this is the first introduction of the word Jehovah which is 
kept up in this and the following chapter. Erom this, and from 
other internal evidences of its antiquity, it has been conjectured 
that the account of the creation, from the beginning of the first 
chapter to the end of the third verse of the second, was written 
anterior to the time of Moses, and was left by him in its original 
condition. What is said in reference to this title, which God is 
described as assuming to himself in Ex. iii. 14, and vi. 3, makes it 
evident that the word Jehovah could only have been introduced 
into those parts of the book of Genesis which were written or 
amended by Moses. 



28 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.ii. 

JllTP a term containing the abstract notion of existence, is a 
noun founded upon the 3 sing. pres. kal of JTPl or HJil was. 
Rab. Bechai, an ancient Jewish writer, says " these three times, 
past y present y and to come, are comprehended in this proper name 
as is known to all." See also Rev. i. 8. This word is pointed 
with the vowels of ^^HX Lord, which the Jews always read in- 
stead of njPV as they never, it is said, ventured to pronounce that 
sacred name. 

197. — Yer. 5. ITfe? (si a kli), subs. m. something shot forth ; hence, 
1. a shrub (issuing from the ground) as in this place; 2. a wordy 
speech, message (issuing from the mouth). Verb )T£? protulity 
produxit. 

198. DTtJ (te-rem), originally a subs, signifying resectio, cutting 
off; Y\l) D*ltP5 in resectione aestatis, i. e. cum aestas adhuc resecta 
esset (a praesenti tempore), i. e. nondum adesset ; hence it has 
passed into an adverb with the meaning of not yet. 

199. rn&^n (lias-sa-deli), the ground, comp. of -11 art. and T\lj^ 
subs. m. ground, a field, a piece of ground, generally under cul- 
tivation. 

200. V\iy&\ (yits-makh), in pause for H^V! Gr. 31 ; had sprouted, 
had sprung up ; 3 sing. m. pres. kal of H§^ parad. 4. 

201. ^VDpH (him-tif), had caused to rain, 3 sing. m. pret. hiph. 
of 1£?£p not used in kal, parad. 4 ; in hiph. rained, sent rain, 
caused to rain. 

202. J]K (a-yin), in constr. P$ Gr. 113; properly a subs. m. 
nihilum, defectus, vacuitas ; VW ^1^$\ an d a § f or man, deficiency ; 
tvant, there was want of man, man not, there (was) no man. This 
word is now used adverbially with the meaning of not. 

203. nhy.7 (la-h a bhod), for the tilling of, to till, comp. of 7 be- 
fore comp. sh 9 va I, Gram. 126, c, and 12$. inf. kal constr. of *ftj£ 
parad. 2. 1. worked, laboured; 2. tilled (the ground). 

204. rtbn&tPl see No. 153. 

T t — ; T 

205. — Ver.6. H&O (v'ed), and a vapour, or mist, comp. of 1 conj. 
and *75St subs. m. 

206. n7ir (j/a-h a leh), had ascended, 3 sing. m. pres. kal of PD^ 
ascended, parad. 2 and 13. 

207. npfc^ni (v'hish-kah), and had watered, comp. of ) conj. and 



Ver. 4—7.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 29 

3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of HD^ obsolete in AW, the same as ftftV? 
drank; in ^ //?/?. </«re to drink, watered. The object of the sacred 
writer in the fifth and sixth verses is to enhance the wonders of 
creation by shewing that plants and herbs were produced by a 
simple act of omnipotence, without their going through, the present 
established process of germination from seed, or being at all in- 
debted to the influence of rain, or of human tillage. Bush, who 
adopts this view, thus renders verse 6, " neither had there gone up 
a mist," etc. ; and adds, " the Heb. copulative \ and, is, in repeated 
instances in the scriptures, to be rendered nor, when the preceding- 
clause or sentence is negative ; see Exod. xx. 4, i Thou shalt not 
make unto thee any graven image, nor [Heb. and] any likeness ;' 
see also Ps. xliv. 19, and Isa. xlii. 8." Bush on Genesis in loc. 

208. — Ver. 7. ^$"\ (yay-yi-tsef), and formed, comp. of •) and 
3 sing. masc. pres. kal of *W formed, fashioned, made, parad. 8. 
L. 200. 4. 

209. "I^y (ha-phar), subs. m. earth, mould; hence dust. The 
expression in the text is literally, " God created man mould of the 
earth." Glassius says that the prep, [p is before n^l^n instead 
of "l£J? by the grammatical figure synehysis. Phil. Sacr. Tract ii. 
Obs.V4, p. 662. 

210. H3*5 (vay-yip-pakK), and breathed, comp. of 5 and 3 sing. 
m. pres. kal of P!53 breathed, blew, parad. 4 and 5. 

211. V3N? Qfap-pav), into his nostrils, comp. of 3 prep, and the 
dual of S)K contr. for t)JK. L. T6. Gr. 39 and 114 b. (3), and 116 ; 
and the pron. affix ) his. 

212. D^PI T\!2l&i (nish-math khay-yhn), breath of life, constr. 
form of IfJbfeSO subs. fern, breath. See Gr. 94. 95: and, 

D^H (khay-yim), life, plur. of s ft, ground foim "ft Gr. 114 5. ; 
hence the dagesh in the plur. Gr. 116. 

213. (TH G^SJ/ (Vne-phesh khay-yali), lit. into a being of life, a 
thing being ; Lat. vita praeditus. The same expression is applied, 
chap. i. 19, to the lower animals ; it here signifies an animated 
being, a creature possessed of life and sensation. The prep. 7 is 
in Hebrew used after verbs of existence, in the sense of becoming. 
The same idiom is sometimes transferred into the Greek of the 
LXX. and of the New Test. ; eyivero eh ^v)(rjv tjbaav, LXX. 



30 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.ii. 

Gen. ii. 7 ; and, eaovrai ol hvo eh adp/ca ptlav, for crapt; pula, Matt, 
xix. 5. 

214. — Ver. 8. J7t9*1 (vay-yit-tah), and planted, comp. of -1 and 
3 sing. m. pres. kal of yD3 planted, parad. 4 and 5. 

215. |1| {$ an )> subs, m. a garden-, more properly translated by 
the LXX. 7rapd$eLcro<;, which is a word not of Greek but of Persian 
origin. " The king of Persia takes particular care wherever he is, 
to have gardens or enclosures, which are called irapdSecoroi, full of 
everything beautiful and good which the earth can produce." 
Xenoph. (Econom. iv. 3., quoted by Bush in he. 

216. fiy.3 (b 9 he-den), comp. of prep. 5 an( i HK subs. m. seg. of 
the (e) class, delight, pleasure ; Greek rjhovr], here used as a proper 
name, Eden. 

217. fflBp (mik-ke-dem), lit. from, or at the east. Eden is sup- 
posed to have been a large tract of country, to the eastward of 
which the garden was situated. Comp. of •£? for |£? and EHD subs, 
m. pars anterior , frons ; hence it has passed into the adverb ante, a 
fronte, and is opposed to "nH^?- When the Hebrews describe the 
situations of places, they suppose their faces turned towards the 
east; hence D^D the front, viz. the east', 1)F\R the hack, viz. the 
tvest; pibj the right hand, viz. the south; and /Kfo&? the left hand, 
viz. the north. 

218. tiffi) (vay-ya-sem), and placed, comp. of 3 and tDjJ^ 3 sing. 
m. apoc. pres. hiph. of D^lfe? to place, settle, parad. 10: full form 
tPWI apoc. Djyj and with the accent removed DBP* see No. 21. 

219. d£J f (sham), there, adv. Chald. DJF1; Gr. ttj(jlo^ ; Lat. te; 
Ges. Lex. 

220. W (ya-tsar), he had formed, No. 208. 

221. — Ver. 9. H/bV^ (vay-yats-makh), caused to grow, produced, 
comp. of 3 and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. hiph. of H??5? 1- shot, or ^m^ 
wp ; 2. flourished. See Lee's Lex. Full form of pres. hiph. JT£?¥_ 
parad. 4. 

222. fflPP see No. 196. 

223. "TftFQ (nekh-mad), desirable, pleasant; according to the 
general rule, this would be ^03 part. niph. of 1$J£ parad. 2. This 
is what is called the rough enunciation. 

224. PlKltf? (Vmar-eh), in regard to aspect,- comp. of 7 and 



Ver. 7— 10. THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 31 

n^Hft subs, m., lit. what one sees : hence, 1. appearance, vision; 
2. view, sight, from HX^ saw. 

225. v^G? (Vma- a chal), for food, comp. of 7 prep, and /2W$ 
subs, m. icliat one eats, food, from TONi ate. 

226. YSfi comp. of ) and y # No. 86\ 

227. D^hn comp. of -Jl before 11, H. Gr. 19, and D\*H No. 212. 
It will be perceived, that according to trie Heb. idiom D^H has the 
article, according to ours W would have it. 

228. ^[IJl? (Vthocli), in the midst of, comp. of 3 prep, and 1J1H 
constr. form of ^pH of which the ground form is ^\)T\ Gr. 112. 
L. 148 (9). middle. 

229. HJf^ri (had-da-hatli), the knowledge of, comp. of -il art. 
and inf. constr. kal of J?T knew, inf. abs. J^IT, constr. J"lJ£T, con- 
tracted ]"1$H Gr. 39. This inf. is actually a noun, and subject to 
the same rides of syntax as nouns. 

230. JHJ (ta-rali), and evil, comp. of ) before a monosyllable 
with the tonic accent ) Gr. 125 (5). and J?7 subs, m., ground form 
J5?1; the primary notion conveyed by this word is probably that of 
breach; 1. breach (of law); 2. evil. Compare J?j£n broke, crushed, 
was evil. If JH is pronounced nz^, as it often is, it bears a simi- 
larity of sound to the Scottish word (w)rang, evil, from the verb 
wring; Germ, ring-en, to wrestle, twist. In our word wrong, or 
Scot, turang, would hence be involved the notion of tivisting or 
turning out of the right course. The passage is thus given by the 
Chaldee paraphrast Onkelos, " The tree, of whose fruit those who 
eat shall know the difference between good and evil." 

231. — Ver. 10. ^H^. (tfna-har), and a river, comp. of ) and 7H^ 
subs. m. 

232. &5T (yo-tse), lit. goer out, going out, written in full K¥V 
Gr. 34. sing. masc. act. part, hal of &W parad. 8, went out. 
"Participles (says Prof. Lee) include within themselves no par- 
ticular tense, and are very much like the present, to be construed 
either in the past, present, or future tense, as the context may 
require." See his Gram. art. 231 (8), note. In this case, the con- 
text requires the past, (was) going out, went out. The subs, verb 
though seldom, is sometimes expressed; e.g. PlJ3 WJ and he was a 
builder, and he built, Gen. iv.1T; see also Job i. 14, p'§3 HIlT Onk. 



32 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. ii. 

233. JTJ$J (me-he-deri), from Eden, comp. of -t2 for ffi from, 
before the guttural 2? Gr. 123 b. and }*$ 216. 

234. JTipEyrp (lliash-koth), to icater, comp. of 7 and inf. hiph. 
of M|^ No. 207, par. 13. 

235. ]3Pl (liag-gan), the garden, comp. of '»! art., and |5 in pause 
for |5No T . 215, and Gr. 31. 

236. D^JD^I (u-mish-sham), and from thence, comp. of \ before 
the labial \ "ft for p from, and D£> No. 219. 

237. TT^ {yip-pa-red), was parted, 3 sing. m. pres. rn^A. of Tl^ 
parad. 3, separated, parted. 

238. n^n 1 ) (vlia-xjah), and was, became, comp. of 1 and rPPl 3 sing. 
m. pret. hal of ITPl was, parad. 13. 

239. nSJ|PlNk? (Var-ba-hali), to or ?Vzfo, four, comp. of 7 and 
Piy^n^ fern., J?|p&? m - These numerals are substantives, and are 
either placed in apposition, as in this case, or in the definite state 
of construction, with the word signifying the thing numbered. 
L. 181 (2). Gr. 128. y*njK for JD*] with K prosthetic, which is 
omitted in ^21 No. 120; 'see also No. 213. 

240. D^SO (ra-shim), heads, id. qu. DHPlJ rivers, Eos. : contr. 
for D*fe&0 pLof Vfaft the head. L.73. Gr.35. "Multis capitibus 
in Oceanmn influit" (sc. Rhenus). Caesar. De. Bell. Gall. lib. iv. c. 10. 

241. — Yer. 11. Dfe? (shem), name, subs. m. plur. T))ti&- Gr. crrjfia, 
signum. 

242. in^n comp. of Jl art. before K, and IHiJ, see No. 45. 

243. p&^§ (Pi-shori), aqua diffusa, redundans, used as the name 
of a river. Eos. understands this to be the Phasis, and Havilah, 
the land of Colchis. 

244. MDP! K^in (huhas-so-bhebli), lit. it the encompasser; &0M 
3 pers. pron. masc. MDH comp, of -Pi article, and part. act. masc. 
hal of ^59 encompassed, par. 6. 

245. iT?*1hil (lia-kh a vi-lah), Havilah, joined with art. H, see 
No. 227. There seems to be great uncertainty about the situation 
of this country. 

246. C£> ^IgW ( a sher sham), which there = where. 

247. ^Htn (liaz-za-habh), gold, comp. of art. -Pi and ^PlT ; in 
French, /'or. 

248. — Yer. 12. SPU 1 ) (u-z a habh), comp. of 5 before sh'va \ and 



Ver. 10— 14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 33 

constr. of ^PlT. Tlie compound sh'm under a letter not a guttural 
is anomalous; according to the general rule, it would have been 
3HT, Gr. 94. 

249. X)?\T1 (ha-hiv), lit. the that, that, comp. of PI with pathahh 
long by position before PT, Gr. 19, and fcOP! pronoun, ancient form 

of^n. 

250. PI/73PI (hab-b'do-Iakh), comp. of -Pi and PtTH? subs. m. 
By the best authorities considered to be the pearl. 

251. j3^1 (v'e-bhen), comp. of ) and jlJSt subs. m. seg. (a) class, 

252. DPI&TI (lias -so -ham'), the onyx, ^apBovv^ Aquila, ovv% Sym. 
Theod. Comp. of -Pi and DPIE^ subs. m. 

253. — Ver. 13. JIITil (gi-hhon), Gihon, the name of a river; 
supposed by some, among whom are Michaelis and Eos. to be the 
Oxus; by others, the Araxes; by others, the Xile. 

254. B^D (hush), supposed to be the northern district of the 
region between the Caspian sea and the Persian gulf, and to have 
taken its name from Cush, the eldest son of Ham, and father of 
Ximrod, who founded Babylon. The districts included within the 
above boundaries are called the Cush country by Moses Choro- 
nensis, who wrote a history of it in the fifth century. See a 
learned note upon this subject in Prof. Stewart's Heb. Chrestomathy, 
sub voce. 

255. — Ver. 14. /('Tin (kliid-de-kel), universally believed to be the 
Tigris, which in Aramaean is called Diglah, and Diglath, whence 
Tiglith, Tigrith, Tigris. 

256. T?nn (ha-ho-lech), lit. the goer, that goeth, or JJoweth, comip. 
of H Gr. 19, and part. act. m. hal of ^HPI went, parad. 2. 

257. n5*Jp (kid-math), on the east of, construct form of Pl£*Tp 
obsolete, id. qu. D*7D Xo. 21T. 

258. *Wtf (ash-shur), proper name; supposed to refer, not to 
Assyria as understood in later ages, but to that region on the west 
side of the Tigris, over which Asshur reigned, and of which Xineveh 
was the capital. 

259. PH? (jp'rath), so called by the present inhabitants of the 
East ; the Euphrates, which being better known than the others, is 
not here described. 



34 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. ii. 

260. — Ver. 15. ftp*) (vay-yik-kakh), and took, comp. of 5 and 3 
sing. m. pres. kal of P!p7 took, parad. 5, of which it possesses the 
peculiarities. 

261. ^iPlll^l (vay-yan-ni-khe-hu), and placed him, comp. of 5 and 
pron. affix ^)H~ Gr. 99, which takes the accent on the vowel of 
union, Gr. 29 b., and !T1£, the path, furtive being removed on the 
addition of the affix; 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of TVti parad. 10 and 4. 
This verb has two forms of the hiph., H^H and ITlin, the former 
of which signifies, gave rest to, gave comfort to, caused to rest; the 
latter, placed, left (in a given state) ; between which meanings there 
is an obvious connection. 

262. ftl^yh fhobh-dah), to till it, comp. of 7 and. fern. aff. ftf 
Gr. 99, and 13J£, and with an accent "15^ ground form of *ft5?,, inf. 
const, kal of 1^}J parad. 2, tilled, cultivated. The fern. aff. H~ refers 
to J5 which is masc. This is accounted for by what grammarians call 
archaismus. See Introduction, Part III., on the subject of Gender. 

263. Pilpylh (Vshom-rali), to keep it, comp. of 7 and *P$, with 
accent ^fyW ; ground form of *)12W inf. const, kal of Ifoffl parad. 4. 
and pron. affix fern. H. See 262. 

264. — Ver. 16. )¥'!). (ya-iftsav), and commanded, comp. of \ 
without dagesh before yod and sh'va, and )¥\ f° r ^H*. 3 sing. m. 
apoc. pres. pihel of fljlf parad. 13, com?nanded, Gr. 37. 

265. 73&$Fl /3K (a-chol to-chel), lit. in eating thou shalt (may- 
est) eat, i. e. thou mayest indeed (or certainly) eat. This form of 
expression is used in consequence of the poverty of the language 
in qualifying words. See Introduction, Part III., on the subject 
of Adverbs; see also Glass. Phil. Sac. Tract iiL Can. 31, p. 276. See 
similar expressions, Gen. ii. 17 ; xxxvii. 33 ; and see likewise this 
idiom transferred to the Greek of the New Test. : iya a/covvres 
a/covcocri,, Mark iv. 12; 'ISoov elBov, Actsvii.34: fiXiirovre? fiXeyjrere, 
Acts xxviii. 26 ; evXoycov evXoytjcrco ae, Heb. vi. 14. 

/Dtf in£ abs.. kal, and /J&Fl 2 sing. m. pres. kcd of /28 ate, 
parad. 7. 

266.— Ver. 17. 73KH N7 (lo-tho-chal), thou shalt not eat; K7 a 
particle of negation, and occasionally of prohibition. Engl, no, not; 
used with every part of speech excepting the imperatives of verbs. 
7& is generally used, with the present apoc. of verbs, in a 



Ver.15.— 19.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 35 

prohibitory sense. Lee's Lex. TO^fl with pathakh, instead of 
tsere, see No. 265. 

267. ^1^f2(mim-men-?iu), of it. According to our idiom this word 
is redundant. Ges. regards it as comp. of ]£p prep. [ft subs, part, 
portion, and fr^Pl ; thus, K^H"^"^^ contr. ^S.O of a part of it— of it. 

268. ^7^. ( a chol-cha), lit. thy eating of; comp. of /2K with 
accent /iK infin. const, kal of 'Jtf No. 265, and pron. affix masc. 
2 person. ^j, Gr. 99. 

269. n^Jjl D)fo (moth ta-mutli), in dijing thou shalt die, thou 
shalt surely die. " Species pro genere coininemoratur." Mors 
pro mails, peccato conjunctis universe, per. synecd. Storr, p. 9. 
Qvrjros ear), Symmachus. Tw2 infin. kal, and H^H 2 sing. m. pres. 
kal of Tfifo to die, parad. 10. See No. 265. 

270. T\VT\ (1i e yotli), infin. constr. kal of ITPl teas, parad. 13 ; or- 
dinarily pointed with simple sh\a. 

271. — Ver. 18. 1^5/, (Vbhad-do), comp. of / prep., *T3 subs. 
separation-, and with 7, H?/ a part. Er. apart; with affix 1 in 
separatione sua ; we say, in the Scottish dialect, by his lane, i. e. 
alone. The ground form of H? is *H3 ; hence the dagesh. 

272. n^y.^ (e-teseh), I will male, 1 sing. pres. kal of Hbj£, 
parad. 2 and 13. 

273. ^lTJ^ (lie-zer'), help, helper, subs. m. seg. (e) class. 

273* 1^3? (k'neg-do), lit. like his front, i. e, like him, or his 
counterpart. LXX., in ver. 18, kot avrov ; in ver. 20, ojj.olo<; avroy. 
Comp. of 3 particle, according to, and "TO, ground form of "133. 
seg. (e) class, pars antica, or anterior, front; and pron. affix ) his. 
Gram. 99. 

274. — Ver. 19. 1^5 (vay-yi-tser), for (Jehovah) had formed; 
fully written, If*) No. 208, 

275. K3*l (ray-ya-bhe), and caused to come, brought, comp. of 5 
and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. hiph. of X13 to come, parad. 10 and 12; 
unapoc. N*3* 

276. HIXt? (lir-otli), to see, comp. of 7 before sh'ca 7, and inf. 
constr. kal of P1NH parad. 13, 2, and 3. 

277. P"£Op"nfo (mah yik-ra lo), ivhat he will (would) call it 
(every one), iH^D inter, pron. what, here used indef. ; ^ for persons, 
who. ' tCW No. 35. 



36 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. ii. 

278. n*rrE^53. The whole passage may be thus literally trans- 
lated, "and whatsoever Adam called it (everyone)/' viz. living 
creature, i. e. " whatsoever Adam called every living creature." 
11*11 fe^gj is, in substance, a repetition of the antecedent to w. 
Glass, p. 175. 

279. V2 s y (sli'mo), its name, comp. of D^ subs. masc. name, and 
pron. aff. ). Schrcederus says that monosyllables, with tsere formed 
from verbs of par ad. 13 (H7), usually have the tsere immoveable; 
but that Dfc? and |3 a son with affixes, on account of their frequent 
occurrence, lose tsere, which is retained in the plur. absolute ; see 
D)t2ty in the following verse. Schrcecl. Inst. Sect. vii. Reg. 114 a. 

280. D*!^/^ (u-Va-dam), hut for Adam (was not found a help 
meet for him). But stands here adversative to an idea implied, 
but not expressed, viz. that all the males of the irrational animals 
were supplied with mates ; hut for Adam, etc. Bush. 

281. — Ver. 20. K^D «? (Jo ma-tsa), (one) did not find, on ne 
trouvoit pas, there was not found. Storr, however, says, that the 
original meaning of #¥fo is ire, pervenire, and that such is its 
meaning here ; and thus renders this passage, " ad Adamum non 
pervenit auxilium." See ver. 19; and Isa. x. 10; Storr, p. 272, note. 
K¥£ 3 sing. m. pret. hal, parad. 12. 

282. — Ver. 21. /§?! (ray -yap-pel), and caused to fall, comp. 
of \ and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. hiph. of 7^ fell, parad. 5, unapoc. 

283. rtb*TT0 (tar-de-mali), a deep sleep, e/ccrraa-iv, subs. fern, 
from DTI in hal inusit. ; the primary notion of which consists in 
closing up, making fast-, in niph. became stupified, insensible, as in 
deep sleep. Lee's Lex. 

284. Jt^l (vay-yi-sha?i), and he slept, comp. of 5 and |B^ in 
pause for \W*\, 3 sing. m. pres. hal of J^J slept, parad. 9. 

285. 11(23 see 260. 

286. fiPlX (a-hhath), one, fern, of 1HK, in constr. "TlIX, fern. Wltf 
contr. for ITinN. See No. 45. 

287. VHyTSfib (mits-tsal-ho-thav), of his ribs, comp. of -12 for |5j 
of, from, r\y7£ constr. plur. of J/2X (id. qu. $?/??), seg. (a) class, 
ground form #?¥, hence in plur. constr. fflJ/?¥ and T\]}/)£, Gr. 34, 
a side, a rih, and V~ pron. aff. Gr. 99. 



Ver. 19—23.] THE BOOK OF GEXESIS. 37 

288. 'lilp*} (cay-yis-gor), and shut up, comp. of J and 3 sing. 
m. pres. kal of ^Up shut, parad. 1. 

289. *")E?5 (ba-sar), subs. m. flesh. 

290. PtiflPlPt (takh-ten-nah), comp. of PlHPl, ground form of PlPtPl 
subs, the lower part ox parts, that which is under, the place where 
one stands , place ; commonly used as a preposition^mefer, beneath; 
and n|— fern. pron. affix of the form usually attached to verbs ; in 
the place thereof, in the place from which, he had taken the rib. 

291. — Ver. 22. [3*1 (vay-yi-bhen), lit. and he built, formed, comp. 
of 5 and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. of PGS built, par. 13 ; unapoc. H^3!? 
which first becomes 33?, and with a furtive vowel, euph. causa J3*, 
with the accent on the penult, vowel. Gr. 37 and 29(a), and 115. 

292. yy$T\ Qiats-tse lah), the rib, comp. of -PI art,, and JH>^ id. 
qu. J^Ttf. Vo. 287. 

293. np7 (la-kakh), had taken, No. 260. 

294. n^^7 (Vish-shah), into a woman, lit. built the rib into a 
woman. Comp. of 7 and Plfc^X, another form of Plfc^K, fern, of 
#*X a man. Prof. Lee's Lex. The constr. of Pl&*& is T\ty#, ground 
form Plp*tf with pron. aff. )ftU/$ his icife. 

295. n^3 <l l (ca-y'bhi-e-ha), and brought her, comp. of \ and N*3* 
with the accent removed to the pron. aff. and by contraction fcO? 
Gr. 34 and 74. 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of X13 parad. 10 and 12, to 
come, in hiph., caused to come, brought, and fern. pron. aff. Pt~ 

296. — Ver. 23. DJJ3PI (hap-pa-hani), comp. of -Pi and QJ?£ subs, 
fern. seg. («) class; 1. a stroke; 2. a' stroke (of the foot), a pace, a 
step; likewise applied to time, as in this place, DJ??Pl hoc ictu, hac 
vice, on this occasion only; afterwards the ordinary mode of her 
production will be different. 

297. D^JJ (lie-tseni), bone, subs. m. seg. (a) class. 

298. *??¥$?$ (me-h a tsa-maiy, of my bones, comp. of •£? before the 
gutt. ft Gr! i23 (ft)," and DXU contr. for D*£?2 before the pron. aff. 
*~my, Gr. 49, another form of the plural is fi1ft¥^. 

299. nb>3£ (mib-Vsa-ri), of my flesh, comp. of ■£ and *)&Z flesh, 
No. 289, and with the accent removed to the pron. aff. ^3 Gr. 74. 

300. fi&?7 (Vzoth), to this, shall be called (the name) woman; 
i. e. she shall be called woman; comp. of 7 prep, and H^T demons, 
pron. fern,; masc. PIT this. 



38 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, ii.23 

301. 8*3(5^ (yik-ka-re), 3 sing. m. pres. m);A. of SOp called, 
parad. 12 and 3. 

302. nnp7 (lu-k°khah), teas taken, the ordinary punctuation 
would be nnjp7 3 sing. pret. puhal of Jlp-7 parad. 4, foo^. A con- 
nection similar to that between fc^fcS and H^K is discoverable in 

T 

Latin between vir and vira obsolete, and in Eng. between man and 
woman; that connection is lost in the LXX. translation, avrrj 
/c\r)07]aeTat yvyrj on etc rod avSpbs avTr\<$ e\r\<^6i]. 
303.— Ver. 24. }3"7j£ (hal-ken), wherefore. 

304. "3J2* (ija-h a zobli) shall leave, 3 sing. pres. kal of ^T^ left ; 
with the accent ^?$T Gr. 9 and 10. 

305. V5K (a-bhiv), his father, comp. of S& subs. m. father, 
plur. irreg. HDK: this word takes yod in the constr. state ^5^ 
No. 849, and before the pron. affixes in the sing., thus V5&J instead 
of M2& ; the original form of this word was probably ]2H or ]M. 
Gr.ll4(6). 

306. V2$ (im-mo), his mother, comp. of lK, ground form D£?K, 
subs. fern, mother, and pron. afT. ). This word, and the foregoing, 
are probably primitives, formed from the sounds uttered by a child 
in its first attempts to speak; hence UK Lat. av-us; Gr. canra^ 
TrcLTTTras ; Lat. papa, pappus; Eng. papa; so D& ; Gr. jjLdfjLfia; 
Kopt. mau; Germ. Mama, Amme: Eng. mamma; Scot, mammy. 

307. p5*J) (tfda-hhak), and shall cleave, comp. of \ and p5^J 
3 sing. pret. hal, par. 1. 

308. WK3 (b'ishto), to his wife, No. 294, VHI No. 98, and 

nn& nfea 1 ? No 213. 

TV T T J 

309. — Ver. 25. VH*1 (vay-yih-yu), and ivere, comp. of 3 and 3 
plur. m. pres. hal of PlVl toas, parad. 13; this verb and JlTl lived, 
generally take simple instead of comp. sh\as contrary to the 
general rule, Gr. 19. 

310. DD^ (sh'ne-hem), both of them, const, of ^W two, with 
the termination dropped before the grave pron. affix DiT Gr. 49, 
and Gr. 99. 

311. U1$fl£ Qfrum-mim), naked, plur. m. of D'hjJ, fern. TfiT\% 
as if from C±fjg, plur. D*$Vnfi = 0*£1fi, verb D*3JJ was wffiW; 
another form of this word is DTJ?, see No. 343. 

312. ^'fe^TV (yith-bo-sha-shu), were ashamed, 3 pi. m. pres. 



Chap. iii. 1— 2.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 39 

hith. of WS ashamed, put to shame, or confusion, blushed, in pause 
for ^B'HjV Verbs of this form sometimes take paihakh instead 
of tsere as their ultimate rowel, Gr. 31. 

313. — Chap. iii. Yer. 1. BSTljn'! (fhan-na-lxhasli),now the serpent, 
comp. of \ and, now, but, -H art., and ^HJ subs. m. a serpent, 
probably an onomatop. the sound of this word bearing a resemblance 
to the hissing of the serpent: the Latin word serpens points to its 
manner of motion. It is probable that the art called in Greek 
dcjziofiavreia arose from the tradition that a spirit resided in the 
serpent. 

314. D^HJJ (ha-rum), lit. nahed, and also cunning, crafty, subtle. 
The connection between these meanings arises from the idea of 
stripping, making bare by wearing or rubbing, implying long use, 
hence experience, icisdom y and in a bad sense subtlety, craftiness. 
See Heb. r. 14, " Haring their senses, yeyvfjuvacr/LLeva, made naked, 
exercised," free from impediments, unembarrassed, agile, flexible, 
etc. 

315. 7-Dfo E'HJJ (ha-rum mih-hol), lit. subtle from all, separated 
from all by subtlety, more subtle than any, the most subtle of all, 

(fipovL/jLcoTCLTos LXX. See Introduction, Part III., in reference to 
the Degrees of Comparison. Comp. of "D for J£? and 73 No. 130. 

316. 7ftX' ,, 3 ^S ( a ph hi-a-mar), itane zerum est dewn dixisse, 
or itane est I num Deus dixit? Hath God really said? 1. fc]K lit. 
embracing, concluding, compare £j§fc$ enclosed, Psal.xviii.. 5; hence 
used as a conjunction, also (including something else), moreover, 
2. ^ see No. 29. 

317. ^7p^n (tho-ch'lu), ye shall eat, 2 plur. m. pres. hal of 7£K 
parad. 7. 

318. — Yer. 2. *\12&P!\ (vat-to-mer), and said, comp. of 5 and 
3 sing. fern. pres. hal of 75&J parad. 7; the tsere in 7£&H shortened 
into segol, in consequence of the removal of the accent from the 
ult. to the penidt. syllable. Gr. 9, 10, and 30 (b). 

319. 7350 (no-chel), lit. we eat, i. e. tee shall (may) eat, 1 plur. 
pres. hal of 7?& parad. 7. Let the student notice the use of W 
in a collective sense in this verse, and several instances of the 
same kind in this chapter, as corroborating what was said on the 
subject of number, in the Introduction, Part III. 



40 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.iii. 

320.— -Ver. 3. 13 tyJH (thig-g'hu bo), shall touch it, 2 plur. m. 
pres. kal of J?y touched, par ad. 5, followed by the prep. ?. 

321 . pn^H"I§ (pen tfmu-thuri), lest ye die. The original meaning 
of J3 without accent |§ is seeing, looking towards, and guarding 
against a consequence ; whether that consequence is certain, seeing 
ye shall, or only probable, as seeing ye may, hence lest; Lat. videte 
ne. Compare PD£ looked, see Prof. Lee's Lex. ^H^tt written in full 
fVWbft Gr.34, comp. of J parag., and 2 plur. m. pres. hal of Tfifa 
to &/ parad. 10. L.235. 

322. — Ver.4. fiRfoF) ffil& &7 (7o motfA fmu-thun), ye shall not 
surely die, see No. 321, and No. 265. 

323. — Ver. 5. Jf!* (yo-de a h), knower, knoioing, knoweth, part. m. 
act. 7t<2/ of ^T parad. 4 and 8, knew, see No. 232. 

324. Qj?5^ (a-chol-chem), your eating, see Nos.266 and 268. 

325. ^Hp^l (v'niph-k'khu), then shall be opened. See Glass, 
p. 603, ed. Dathe. Comp. of ), and 3 plur. prset. niph. of Plp|p 
opened, parad. 4. 

326. D3^TJ£ (he-ne-chem), your eyes, comp. of D\T}? dual of |*2 
the eye, consti . py # Gr. 113, the dual termination is removed to 
make way for the grave affix DJ* Gr. 49 and 99. 

327. Dn^Jll (oih-yi-them), a?id ye shall be, comp. of ) before 
sftva \ Gr. 125 (3), and 2 plur.m. pret. kal of "Jl id. qu. /TH teas, 
parad. 13. 

328. DW&O (ke-lo-him), as Gods, contr. for DwKjD Gr. 126(6/), 
comp. of 5 before khateph segol 3, Gr. 126 (c), and D*Pl7fc$ No. 3. 
jyj^y^j 5i cw£ magnates, Onkelos Targ. Bush thinks that there 
is an intended ambiguity in the tempter's language; that he 
wishes the woman to understand that he speaks of God, while he 
actually means that they should really become as apostate angels, 
who knew the value of the good they had lost, and the amount of 
the evil they had incurred. It is to be noticed that D\*l /&$ is here 
construed with a plural verb, which is very rare where reference 
is made to the true God. In the preceding clause, where the true 
God is evidently intended, JTV is in the singular. 

329. *Jfl* (yo-d 9 he), lit. knower s of, knoioing, part. act. pi. constr. 
of JTT see No. 323 ; penult, vowel immoveable. Gr. 59. 

330. — Ver. 6. &0.-P1 (vat-te-re), and saw, comp. of \ and 3 sing. 



Ver. 3—6.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 41 

fern. pres. kal apoc. of PINH saw, parad. 13 and 3; unapoc. ("UOFl, 
according to Gr. 37 SOH and with a furtive segol &)p\, and euph. 
causa. trW, Gr. 105.' 106. 

331. 7588/ (l'ma- a chal), for food, comp. of 7 and /S&fo what 
one eats, food, from 7^& ate. 

332. K^nTll^n {tha- a vah hu), lit. desire it, i. e. " it (was) a most 
desirable object;" HIKi^ subs. f. desire, verb JlJNI desired. The 
abstract is here used instead of the concrete. What was said in 
Intro duction, Part III., as to the poverty of the Hebrew language 
in adjectives, is here corroborated; desiderium is here used for 
des id era tissimum . 

333. "IJDnj') (fnekh-mad), and desirable ; hence pleasant, de- 
lightful, comp. of \ and "TftrTj, No. 223. 

334. r^Tw (Vhas-kil), this word, along with the preceding, is 
rendered by Pos. aspectu jucunda (sc. arbor) ; by Ges. and Winer, 
delectabilis aspectu ; by the LXX. aypatov rod /caTavorjaat, ; by the 
Chalcl. Par. Onkelos, ad prudentiam consequendam per earn. I can 
see no reason for forsaking the rendering given in the English ver- 
sion. 7-5^ in Heb. (parad. 1), and 7wD in Chald. signify 1. to look 
attentively at anything ; hence arises the idea of consideration, pru- 
dence, wisdom. Hence, 2. to be wise ; in hiph. r*2&7\, inf. Tlp^D 
1. to cause to consider, or be considered, i.e. to provide for , care for 
the poor; 2. to cause to be prudent, wise, as in this passage. In 
the preceding clause, the tree is said to be " an object of great de- 
sire for the eyes," i. e. most desirable to look upon ; the succeeding 
clause, according to the rendering of Pos., Ges., Winer, and the 
LXX., is but a repetition of the same idea; whereas the sacred 
historian wishes to point to the inducements which led Eve to eat 
of the tree, which were, 1. its beauty; 2. its capability of render- 
ing her wise. This view is the more probable from the name 
given to the tree, and from the serpent's assurance that it would 
make mankind as gods, knowing good and evil, and from the fact 
that their eyes were opened after eating of it. 

335. PlpFfi (vat-tik-kakh), then she took, comp. of 5. and 3 sing. 
fern. pres. kal of Hp7 parad. 5 and 4. 

336. V*)$fo (inip-pir-yo), of the fruit of it, comp. of •£? and \*)$ s 
ground form of >ta ]^ Grr. 114, and pron. affix ), see No. 87. 



42 ANALYSIS OF Chap.iii. 

337. /SXfrl (vat-to-chal), and did eat, comp. of \ and 3 sing, 
f. pres. kal of 7-5^ parad. 7, another form of /JKft ; masc. 73X^ 
and with J, TDK*!.' 

338. JflHJ (vat-tit-ten), and gave, comp. of ) and 3 sing. f. pres. 
&«£ of JHJ gave, parad. 5. 

339. D3 (gam), ground form D&5 addition, heap-, hence it 
conveys the idea of addition to something going before, such as 
is implied in the conj. also, which is its ordinary meaning. 

340. njpj? (him-mah), with her, comp. of DJk ground form £?£?$?, 
conjunction, communion; used as a prep, with', compare Lat. cum, 
con, cum-uhis, cunc-tus (from cungo =jungo) ; Gr. ryd/xos ; an cl with 
a sibilant, Sanscr. sam ; Gr. afia, 6/jl6<$, ojjlov, etc. See Ges. Lex. 
under the word D^JJ. H— pron. affix fern. 3 pers. 

341. — Yer. 7. Pljnp3fl1 (vat-tip-pa-kakh-nah), and were opened, 
comp. of 5 and 3 pi. f. pres. niph. of HpJ3 opened, parad. 4, agreeing 
with ^J? fern. ; constr. of D^& see No. 326. 

342. 5)JH*1 (vay-ye-d'hu), and they kneiv, comp. of J and 3 plur. 
m. pres. kal of JTTJ, parad. 8 and 4. The tsere is immutable, being 
contr. for WH" Gr. 50. 3. 

343. D^J3^2 (he-rum-mim), naked, see No. 311. 

344. ^SW (vay-yith-p^ru), and sewed, comp. of 3 and 3 plur. 
m. pres. leal of H^n seived, parad. 4. 

345. H^n TDV(h<*lehth 9 e-nah), lit. leaf of Jig-tree; fTO constr. 
of n7^ masc. a leaf, Gr. 94. 96 ; here used in a collective sense. 
MIl&Fl subs. fern, a fig (tree). 

346. rf)in ^S?!5 (vay-ya-h a su kha-go-roth), 1. comp. of •) and 
3 plur. masc. pres. kal of H^J^ parad. 13 and 2, made; 2. plur. of 
rnin, contr. for mi-lfi subs. fern. 1. a girdle; 2. a covering for the 
loins ; verb 1^ (fort. 

347. — Yer. 8. Wtiffl) (vay-yish-mliu), and they heard, comp. of 
\ and 3 plur. masc. pres. kal of J?5&? heard; 1 sing. pret. £«/ *£$??$ 
ver. 10. 

348. Tlp~T^ (eth-kol), the voice ; fl&t before makkaph JIM, see 
No. 4; zip subs. masc. a wwra-; plur. fn/lp; when applied to in- 
animate things, noise, crash, thunder; compare Sanscr. kal, to 
sound; Gr. icaXeco, tceXofiai,, /cekevco ; Lat. calo, calare, obs.; whence 
calendae. 



Ver.6— 11.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 43 

349. *H pHf^? (mith-hal-lech), walking about, tvalking to and fro, 
part. m. kith, of Tpfl went. 

350. ||3 (bag-gan), in the garden, contr. for JSPl?, Gr. 35 ; comp. 
of 5 prep. -H def. art. and }3 No. 215. 

351. FfiT? (VrvPkli), comp. of 7 prep, and fl^H subs. m. wind, 
No. 16 ; bere applied to tlie cool air (of the day), the evening, see 
cbap. xxxi. 40 ; to SeiXcvov, LXX. ; in motu diei, Arab. vers. ; 
retrocedente die, Syr. 

352. &5nrH (vay-yitli-khab-be), and hid himself (tbems elves), 
comp. of 5 and 3 sing. m. pres. hith. of &J0 ^ ?< ^ parad. 2 and 12; 
in the sing, though referring both to the man and woman. 

353. Wtfl No. 294; ^3£ comp. of •£ and ^3 No. 14; 1J1H3 
No. 228. 

354. — Ver. 9. fl|*&? (ay-yek-kah), where (art) $ow, comp. of *&, 
ground form \\$, in constr. ^fc$ where ? primary meaning residence, 
place, residence ? = where ? compare *&$ habitation ; and PD"7 pron. 
affix with epenth. nun, which takes the accent. Lee's Lex. 

355. T?p (ko-Vcha), thy voice, comp. of 7p, in full zip, Gr.34; 
and pron. affix ^; the hholem in /ID is immutable. Gr. 58. 

356.— Ver. 10. ^W (sha-mah-ti), I heard, see No. 347. 

357. SOW (va-i-ra), and I tvas afraid, comp. of 5 before &, J, 
and 1 sing. pres. kal of fcO^ shook, trembled, feared, parad. 9. 

358. fcOfl&l (va-e-kha-bhe), and I hid myself, comp. of ), see 
No. 357, and 1 sing. pres. niph. of fcO<"J parad. 2 and 12. 

359. — Ver. 11. I s $H (hig-gid), caused to knoio, informed, told, 
3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of H^ in kal non occ. tvas before, see 1^1 
fore part of the body, front ; as a prep, before; in hiph. brought 
before, pointed out, declared, parad. 5. 

360. J£?PJ (li a mi)i), whether of, comp. of H interrog. part, whe- 
ther, and V2 of from. 

361. *pfi^l$ (tsiv-vi-thi-cha), I strictly enjoined thee, comp. of 
1 sing. pret. pih. of iY)^ commanded, enjoined, parad. 13. In this 
word there is a slight variation from the parad., which is ^fiVJl* 
Observe here the intensive meaning of the pih. conj. 

362. *ftW? (Vbhil-ti), comp. of ? and fH3, the ground form of 
which is T\7% seg. (1) class ; and \ parag., or perhaps an unusual 
form of the constr. state; cutting off, exclusion, abstinence; s Vy)% 



44 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.iii. 

PHD Isa. xiv. 6, lit. exclusion of intermission, without intermission ; 
lience the meanings, 1. without; 2. except; 3. not. This passage 
may be thus literally rendered, " in respect to the abstaining from 
eating of it," i. e. not to eat of it. 

363. tti£fcr^pN S ee No. 362. bhtf, with the accent removed, 
bzK ( a ch6l), Gram. 9. 10; infin. constr. kal of bit} parad. 7; ^@£ 
No.267. 

364. J^?5¥ (a-chal-ta), 2 sing. masc. pret. kal of 7^. Accent 
on the penult. Gr. 29 (5). 

365. — Ver. 12. PlPlPO (iia-that-tah,), thou gavest, 2 sing. m. (with 
il parag.), of pret., kal of |P0 parad. 5. 

366. *T3J? (liim-ma-di), comp., according to Prof. Lee, of the 
pron. affix ], and a form of the verb HfoJJ stood; "H^J? standing (as 
respects) me = with me. Lee's Lex., sub voce DJ?. 

36T. ^"Pi^PO {na-tKnal-li), gave me, 3 sing. fern. pret. hot of 
JH3 parad. 5. The dagesh in V &> ??^ is called dagesh euphonic. 

368. /Jfc) (va-o-chel), and I did eat, comp. of 5, before &, 1, and 
1 sing. pres. hal of /3&? parad. 7. 

369. — Ver. 13. M^^7 (la-ish-shali), to the xooman, contr. for 
TWXrb, see No. 3<5. 

370. Pl&T (zoth), this, this thing, fern, of PIT. There being no 
neuter gender in Heb., when attributives or pronouns do not refer 
to any particular noun or nouns, expressed or understood, they 
are generally in the fern, where in Lat. or Gr. they would be in 
the neut. gender, as in this case. See also Psa. cxviii. 23, Pl^5 
PlKT nJTPl PI1PI* "this (thing) is from the Lord." This peculiarity 
is preserved in the quotation from this passage by Matt. xxi. 42, 
irapa Kvpcov iyevero avrrj. The gender of the pronoun here can 
only be accounted for by a reference to the Hebrew idiom. 

371. PT^J? (Jia-sitli), thou hast done, 2 sing. fern. pret. hal of 
T&% did, parad. 13 and 2; 2 sing. m. JVfcty 

372. *T£Kni see No. 318. 

373. \J^£^Pl (hish-shi-a-ni), deceived, comp. of pron. aff. 0_ and 
3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of Nfe^J co o n - ""^i P r °bably, erred through 
forgetfulness, in hiph., caused to err, led astray, deceived. Accent 
on the penult,, Gr. 29 (a). 



Ver.ll— 15.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 45 

374. — Ver. 14. ^"Ifc? (a-rur), cursed, part. pass, hal m. of *Y)8 
cursed, paracl. 7 and 3 ; Greek apa, apdofiai. 

375. ^pHil (g'kho-n'cha), thy belly, conrp. of J1H5 contr. JJ15 and 
■with the accent removed to the pron. affix % JHJ), Gr. 74. 

376. "HyH (the-lech), thou shalt go, 2 sing. m. pres. hal of *Tj7^ 
parad. 8, cogn. ^/H. 

377. \t?? {if me), days of, constr. of EW, contr. for D^Jj plur. 
of UV aclmj, Gr.35. L.73. 

378. *P*ll (hhay-yey-cha), thy life, comp: of pron. aff. ^p— and 
ti^tl, plur. of ^Pt, ground form ^Jl with the termination lost before 
the affix. Gr. 49. 

379. — Ver. 15. PftW (tfe-bhaJi), and enmity, comp. of ) and i"£P^$ 
subs. f. enmity. 

380. IVBW {a-shith), I will put, set, 1 sing. pres. fa? of fW, 
parad. 11, compare Sanscr. sad; Gr. e^ofiat, fut. eSov/iac (root eS); 
Lat. sedere; Goth, satjan, to place-, Anglo-Sax. sattan; Eng. se£, 
etc. See Ges. Lex. under this word. 

381. ^SH! (zar-h a cha), thy seed, comp. of J?*TT, ground form of 
JHT, and pron. aff. ^ ; and HJH.T the same, with the pron. aif. fern. 
3 pers. n— . No. 99. 

382. £ ; Nh ^£T (fshuph'cha rosh), lit. sAa# ftrtiwe f/W, fe 
head, 3 sing. m. pres. hal of £]^ f to bruise, trample on, parad. 10, 
without the affix ^| which takes the accent Sftfc^ Gr. 74. According 
to the LXX. avros aov rrjprjaei, K€(f)a\r)V, ical av TrjprjcreLS avrov 
iTTepvav. Schleusner renders rrjprjcret, in this passage, insidiose 
obseruabit, insidias struet; he mentions, however, that others read 
for T7]pr)aec and r^p^cret?, Tecp^aet and reiprfcreLS, which verb sig- 
nifies to bite, pierce. This word is only found in other two passages 
of the Heb. scriptures, in Jobix. 17, and in Ps. cxxxix. 11. In the 
former of these, it is rendered in the LXX. i/crpl^g, in the latter 
KarairaT-qaei : there cannot be a question about the correctness of 
the common rendering. Some of the editions of the Vulgate 
render fc^H by ilia, and those who approve of this rendering, for 
which there is no authority, apply the prophecy to the virgin Mary. 
Both the pronoun and verb in Heb. are masc. 

383. ^H^tPFl (fshu-phen-nu), lit. shalt bruise him (the heel), i. e. 



46 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.iii. 

his heel, comp. of pron. aff. ) and J epenthetic, and 2 sing. m. pres. 
kal of *p#, see 382, with the accent ^lETjj. 

384. 33£ (ha-kebh), heel, subs. m. 

385. — Ver. 16. H^K HS^n (liar-bah ar-beli), hi multiplying I 
will multiply, I will assuredly multiply, Pl|n5 inf. Mph., and HS^ 
1 sing. pres. Mph. of T\2F\ was many, in hiph. made many, multi- 
plied. 

386. IpTll ^JQBJ? (hits-ts'bho-nech v'he-ro-nech), lit. % rfwfrw* 
and thy pregnancy, i.e. thy distress during pregnancy, the former 
word, comp. of ^J~ pron. aff. f. with accent, and }*ft!£$?, constr. of 
P'^S? subs, m., 1, heavy exhausting labour; 2, bodily distress, dis- 
tress generally, root ^K No. 387. ^Jini. comp. of ) and pron. 
aff. *5J— and pil, in full plH subs. m. conception, pregnancy, the 
tsere immoveable, the word being a formation from the pihel of 
ITin conceived, became pregnant. 

387. H5f5?3 (b'he-tsebh), in great pain, comp. of 3 and ^5?J? subs. 
m. seg. (a) t class, labour, violent pain. 

388. ^1/^ (te-Vdi), thou shalt bring forth, 2 sing. fern. pres. &z/ 
of \?l, which signifies both to bring forth, and to beget, par. 8, the 
tsere immoveable, contr. for *H ~>]F\ Gr. 50 (3). 

389. D^5 (bha-nim), sons, children, plur. irregularly formed 
from J3, verb H^ &w?7£. The Hebrews spoke of a house being 
built up when a man had children. 

390. ^fij^fi ^K"7itt {f el i-shech fshu-ha-thech), still towards 
thy husband (shall be) thy strong desire-, et tamen mariti tui con- 
suetudinem appetes, Dathe. It is here implied that the female sex 
could not avoid the divine judgment here pronounced, by shunning 
the married state; for, that a provision was made for the con- 
tinuance of the species, by the strong desire of marriage implanted 
in the female, and by the strength of the wife's passion for her 
husband, though it should occasion her the sufferings here 
denounced, and bring her under the subjection spoken of in the 
next clause. IjflD^Jl comp. of PlD^J? before the pron. aff. fern. 
1j— , nMKVl Gr. 95, subs. fern, the strong affection which subsists 
betiveen husband and wife, passion; Lat. appetitus; root plfc? the 
leg, thigh, the instrument of running, hence pW to run, to run after, 
to pursue, hence to desire eagerly. 



Yer.15— 19.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 47 

391. Ifi ;$fo\ (yim-shol bach), shall rule over thee, 3 sing. pres. 
kal of 7^£? ruled, parad. 1, with, accent /Wfo\' 3 *?j|l comp. of 5 ail( l 
fern. pron. aff. 3 pers. 

392.— Ver. 17. Sip? fijffi# (sha,mah-ta Vkol), thou hast heard 
the voice, given heed to the voice, obeyed, 2 sing. m. prset. kal of 
$?5&^ heard, parad. 4; in Latin, fuisti audiens dicto. 

393. Him (^ru-rah), curra?, fern, of "fiTO No. 374. As to 
change of the vowels, see Gr. 84. 

394. TtD23 (ba-h a bhu-re-chd),by cause of 'thee = because of 'thee, 
on thy account, comp. of 3 before comp. sftva 3, Gr. 126 (c), and 
the pron. aff. 2 pers. ; and ^VQtt pr. subst. transitio, transitus, quae 
notio transfertur ad causam (pr. transitum causae ad effectum), 
Ges. Lex. qu. vid. 

395. |in^J?3 see No. 386. 

396. n|73^rn (to-ch^len-naJi), thou shalt eat of it, comp. of 
2 sing. m. pret. kal of 73& parad. 7 ; fern, affix M— with 3 epenth. 
which takes the accent. Gr. 29 (b). 

397.— Ver. 18. flpl (Vfofc), comp. of 1., and, also, but; flp 
subst. masc. a thorn, here used collectively, thorns ; compare Y^p, 
cogn. VVj} cw£. 

398. *TTTll (v'dar-dar), and thistle, and thistles, comp. of ) and 
^1*5 subs, m., probably formed from an obs. word TT/l. 

399. 7TD¥Jrl (tats-mi a kh), shall it cause to spring up, shall it pro- 
duce, 3 sing. pres. hiph. of V\Jy& parad. 4, budded, sprang up. 

400. — Ver. 19. Tty)% (b'ze-hath), in the sweat of, comp. of 3 
and nj£T constr. form of hJ^T, Gr. 95 ; subs. fern, sweat, the effect 
of agitation, from Jftf to move-, the faere immoveable to com- 
pensate for the absence of the radical 1. 

401. ^P5^ (ap-pe-chd), thy face, comp. of pron. affix and constr. 
of D?3N, Gr. 49 ; dual of S|tf, ground form Sptt £Ae ?zose, £Ae /«ce, 
see No. 211. 

402. ^3^ ^5 (^^ shu-bh'eha), lit. ww^7 £% returning; ground 
form rTiy, compare mj? passed, advanced, properly passage; 
1. progress (in space), ^^^fo ; 2. progress (in time), «wft7, also before, 
No. 3217. ^[3^ comp. of pron. aff. and inf. &a/ of ^^ fo return, 
parad. 10. 



48 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. hi. 

403. Jjni^p (luk-kakh-ta), tuert taken, 2 sing. m. prset. puh. of 
HIT? par. 5 and 4. 

404. l^H (ta-shubh), thou shalt return, 2 sing. m. pres. kal of 
n^ parad. 10. 

405. — Ver. 20. nj.il (khav-vah), lit. £/*£ cawse of life, Eve, snbs. 
fern., id. qu. tl^Jl life. This word has a causative meaning, like 
many verbs of the pihel form, which it resembles. 

406. — Ver. 21. Hi 311 J) (koth-noth), tunics, garments, constr. plur. 
of n^nS fern., see Prof. Lee's Lex. ; compare Gr. %£tw, and Engl. 
cotton. See Schroed. Gram. Sect. vii. R. 106 (a). 

407. llj? (Jior), skin, shins, subs. m. shin (of a man) ; 2. shin, 
hide (of an animal), used here collectively. 

408. D^3/!l (vay-yal-bi-shem), and clothed them, comp. of ) and 
pron. affix D^ and #3^ fully written ^?^, Gr. 34; 3 sing. m. 
pres. hal of Wi? put on (clothing), parad. 1. 

409.— Ver. 22. jil (hen), lo; Gr. fy ; Lat. en. 

410. nj?l7 (la-da-hath), lit. m respect to the knoivledge of, to 
know, comp. of 7, before the accented syllable 7, Gr. 126 (e), and 
JlJTL contr. for HJfl* a Gr. 39 ; inf. constr. hal of J^T &wew, parad. 
8 and 4. 

411. nnj£\ (vHiat-tah), and now, or wow therefore, comp. of 1 and 
nnj?, comp. of HJJ subs. masc. time, and n~ parag. ; lit. 1. tempore; 
2. hoc tempore, note. 

412. TOW\ (yish-lakh), stretch forth, 3 sing. m. pres. kal of XtI^ 
sent, sent forth, stretclied out, or forth, parad. 4. See J§ in No. 321. 

413. IT (ya-do), his hand, comp. of T subs. fern, the hand, and 
pron. affix ). 

414. *PI1 (va-khai), and Ike, comp. of J and ^Jl, contr. for ^Jl id. 
qu. n^ll lived, 3 sing. m. pret. kal. parad. 13. 

415. u)y) (Vho-lam), comp. of 7 and D?J^ subs. lit. time (hidden), 
on account of its distance, whether it regards time past or future ; 
hence time everlasting, eternity. Root D7J? hid. 

416.— Ver. 23. VUl?^ (za-fshal-Vklie-hu), therefore sent him 
out, or regarding the ) pleonastic, sent him out. The passage may 
be thus rendered, (< Now, therefore, lest he should stretch forth his 
hand and take likewise of the tree of life, and eat and live for ever, 
the Lord God sent him out," etc. Comp. of 1, pron. affix ^T\—, and 



Ver. 19—24.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 49 

3 sing. m. pres. pih. of TOW, parad. 4. n^\ loses its ult, vowel to 
make way for the union vowel of the pron. 

417. *l^y.7 (la-h a bhod), in order to the cultivation of, to cultivate, 
comp. of 7 and infin. constr. kal of *13^ ? parad. 2. 

418. D&^ft nj^7 ^N5 ( a sher Ink-hatch wish-sham), lit. as to which, 
he was taken from thence, from whence he teas taken, see No. 91. 
nj57 3 sing. m. pret. puh. of tlpb ; DG$? No. 236. 

419. — Ver. 24. fc^H-IH (va-ifga-resh), and thrust out, comp. of 1 
and 3 sing. masc. pres. pih. of CT5 expelled, thrust out, parad. 3. 
Accent on the penult,, Gr. 30, b ; in consequence of which KHJ* 
becomes Bh;i* Gr. 9. 10. 

;-|t: 5 

420. J3K^ (vay-y ash-ken), and placed, comp. of 5 and 3 sing. m. 
pres. apoc. hiph. of J3^ dwelt; in /«j»A. caused to dioell, fixed, 
placed, parad. 1. 

421. D1J5& No. 217. 

422. D^3*l5ri (hak-k'ru-bhim), comp. of -Pi def. art, and plur. of 
^l^ cherub, plur. cherubim ; certain symbolical figures, described 
in Ezek. i. 6, seq. : each figure had four faces, that of a man, of a 
lion, of an ox, and of an eagle — symbolising, perhaps, the wisdom, 
fearfulness, power, and ubiquity of God. Lee's Lex. qu. vid. sub. 
voc. Derivation uncertain. 

423. 10(17 (la-hat), subs. m. flame. 

424. ^VlP! fcorp (la-hat ha-khe-rebh), lit. the flame of a sword, 
a flaming sword ; (pXoytyrjv popfyaiav, LXX. ^HH comp. of Pi, 
Gr. 19, and ^*T! subs. com. gend. a sword. 

425. PDiSPirLftn (ham-mitli-hap-pe-chetli), which turned itself, 
part. kith. fern, of *!J§PI turned, masc. ^j$P!riPl parad. 2. 

426. *lD^7 (lish-mor), for the guarding of, comp. of 7 before 
sli'va 7 and infin. constr. kal of *\12iW guarded, parad. 4. 

427. TlTl (de-rech), ivay of, subs. com. seg. (a) class, a journey, 
a way. 

428. D v nPl, see No. 212. 

Chap, rv — 

" Protinus irrumpit venae pejoris in aevum 
Omne nefas : fugere pudor, verumque fidesque : 
In quorum subiere locum, fraudesque, dolique, 
Insidiaeque, et vis, et amor sceleratus liabendi." 

4 



50 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.iv. 

" Victa jacet pietas : et virgo caede madentes 
Ultima caelestum terras Astraea reliquit." 

Ovid, Met i. 128 et 149. 

429.— Ver. 1. JTlJ knew, 3 sing. pret. kal of JHJ parad. 4 and 8. 

430. ^Plffl and she conceived, comp. of ) and 3 sing. fern. apoc. 
pres. of ("HI! parad. 13, 2, 3 ; in full HTJfi, apoc. Tift, Gr. 37. The 
new vowels arise as in the case of segolate nouns. Gr. 105 and 106. 

431. T?£fi and brought forth, comp. of \ and 3 sing. fern. pres. 
kal of T?; parad. 8. See No. 388. 

432. pp lit. acquisition, pr. name, CWw, and W^p 1 sing. pret. 
kal of POD possessed, acquired, parad. 13. 

433. nirP"fi^ BTtf *JV3p 7 7^ye ^etfterc a man (even) Jehovah; 
(i possedi verum Jehovam (i. e. possideo)," Glassius ; u I have 
gotten a man the angel of Jehovah," Targ. of Jonathan ; which 
was an established appellation of the Messiah during the latter 
period of the Jewish church. These renderings do no violence to 
the original, and the words may be considered as expressive of 
the woman's eager and pious, though mistaken, expectation that 
the promise in verse 15 of the preceding chapter was actually 
accomplished. I can see nothing very objectionable against this 
view of the passage. If there were so many misconceptions as to 
the nature and offices of the Messiah among the Jews under much 
clearer predictions, and even among his own apostles for a time, 
under his own instruction, I can see no improbability that the 
woman, who appears to have had strong faith in the promise of a 
deliverer, might have had misconceptions as to that deliverer, and 
as to the precise means of deliverance which he should adopt. It 
must be admitted, however, that the number and weight of the 
authorities, both ancient and modern, favour the common view. 

434. — Ver. 2. TVD/ tlDFfl an d she added to bring forth (his bro- 
ther Abel), she again brought forth. See this idiom in Introduct. 
Part III., on the subject of Adverbs. See Luke xx. 11. &]Dft1 
comp. of 5 and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal, written in full £)D^ft, Gr. 34; 
and with the accent on the penult. Sjp^ft, Gram. 9. 10. and 30, b. 
Of £]pJSt added, parad. 7. 

435. TV7/7 comp. of / thus pointed before the tone syllable, 
and inf. constr. of y>\ parad. 8 ; contr. for fiTT, Gr. 39. 



Ver. 1—4.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 51 

436. VHtf comp. of H^ subs. m. a brother-, constr. S V\R with affix 
VF1N instead of the usual form iPltf, see No. 305. 

437. /5n lit. vanity, a quickly vanishing vapour, pr. name, Abel, 
in pause for /^H. 

438. Pljfl a feeder, keeper of, constr. of DJp one keeping ; part, 
act. kal of njj"l parad. 13, jfa? (a flock). The view that the par- 
ticiple is actually a noun is here corroborated. 

439. JK¥ subs. com. a sheep or goat ; coll. sheep or goats. 

440. H3J? fo'fe" of, part. act. m. Z;a£ of *"QIJ parad. £ ; part, here 
used substantively. 

441. — Ver. 3. D*£?J j*j5?? lit. after the end of days, i.e. m process 
of time. Some render this expression, at the end of the year, see 
Lev. xxv. 29, where QW signifies year, and suppose that reference 
is here made to a yearly sacrifice offered in the antediluvian times, 
similar perhaps to that on the day of atonement among the Jews ; 
but this supposition is too fanciful, and is supported by no au- 
thority. The expression is quite indefinite, and there is nothing 
in the context to justify this rendering of Q*£?J, as in Lev. xxv. 29. 
T*P£ comp. of •& and YD subs, m.; ground form VVP end; compare 
VXD cui > en ds of a string, the parts cut. 

442. pp &OJ1 and; according to our idiom, that Cain brought, 
i. e. offered. See No. 275. 

443. nnj5 subs. fern, a gift, a gift (offered to God), an offering. 
Under the Jewish economy, this word was generally confined to 
bloodless offerings, called meat offerings, such as those of flour, etc.; 
see Levit. ii. 1. This distinction, however, is not here observed, 
since PlPD?? is applied both to Cain's and Abel's offerings. 

444. — Ver. 4, tV^n offered, see No. 441 ; 3 sing, prset. hiph. of 
JOS to come. 

445. IC^ntt) 13fcfeC rVnhSfc of the firstborn of his flock, and of 
the fat thereof. If sacrifices were of divine institution, as doubtless 
they were ; the reasons for their being offered, and the rites and 
ceremonies to be observed in offering them, must likewise have 
been made known. It should seem that the offering of the first- 
born, required under the Mosaic law, was founded on previous 
commands, and pre-existing consuetudinary usages : it is conse- 
quently probable, that in Abel's sacrifice, the whole burnt offering 



52 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. iv. 

was separate from the offering of the fat, as was the case under 
the Jewish dispensation (Lev. I. and III.); "All the fat is the 
Lord's" (Lev.iii. 16). 

446. nhb^ comp. of •£, and plur. of ft-pZ, in full iTJISJl, 
art. 34 ; the kholem immoveable, Gr. 56, 57, subs. fern, firstborn, 
from 155 deft, broke forth, cogn. ^M cleft, see Ex. xiii. 12. 

447. jri5?D^ comp. of ) before the labial \ and -t2 before the 
guttural £?, Gr. 123 (b), and 3/0 ground form of ^frfl, seg. of (e) 
class, m. the exterior coating of the flesh, i.e. fat; cogn. ^/0 the 
exterior coating of the milk, i. e. cream. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

448. J/2^1 ara<£ accepted, koX irip(f)0r), Symmachus ; ical eveirvpLaev 
Theod. Comp. of \ and HJ^, apoc. $^, Gr. 37 and 115, 3 sing. 
m. pres. kal of Ttyffl looked, regarded, looked at (favourably), ac- 
cepted, parad. 13 and 3. 

449.— Ver. 5. Wp comp. of pron. aff. 1 and ^Up No. 442. 
see Gr. 95. 

450. H^, see No. 447. 

451. 1&0 J^p7 in^l lit. and it burned to Cain exceedingly , namely 
^Ae anger, i. e. CWw ?#<zs exceedingly wroth, comp. of \, and 3 sing. 
m. apoc. pres. of rHFJ, parad. 13 and 3, see No. 447, burned. The 
word ?)K 1. the nose-, 2. anger, is understood: with this word 
supplied, the passage might be literally rendered and Cain's nose 
burned exceedingly. This idiom seems to have arisen from the 
understanding that a titillation or heat in the nose was an attendant 
on violent emotions of anger. The word tJX is sometimes expressed 
see Numb. xi. 33. 

452. V1B T?&) and his countenance fell, referring to that lowering 
of the brow or countenance, which proceeds from anger, disappoint- 
ment, or distress, see the opposite expression in Job. xi. 15, TK 
W3 K^ft "then indeed shouldest thou lift up thy face." Comp. 
of 5, and 3 pi. m. pres. kal of 7§3 parad. 5; and ) /§3 3 plur. pret. 
kal in v. 6. 

453. V3S comp. of pron. affix and 5^^, with the termination 
removed to make way for the afhx, Gr. 49, see No. 14 ; with pron. 
aff. of 2 pers. sing. ^£&; 

454. — Ver. 6. flip/ why, wherefore, comp. of 7 with accent and 



Ver. 4—7.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 53 

euph. dagesh 7, and T\12 iiiterrog. particle what ; T]u7 or TlD*? in 
reference to what? i. e. why ? wherefore 9 

455. rnri see 450. 

456. h$) see No. 451. 

457. SpilD see No. 452. 

458. — Ver. 7. K1/P1 lit. whether not, whether (is it) wo# (the 
case) ; Lat. nonne; comp. of ?1 interrog. particle, and &17 commonly 
written &7 see No. 266. 

459. etc. y&B DK lit. if thou doest well, DK ground form |£N 
certainty, truth, hence adverbially certainly, truly, really, and in 
oaths or vows which are laid down hypothetically, as putting a case, 
if-, Sax. gif i. e. grant : stating the matter as a fact taken for 
granted, see Prof. Lee's Lex. (a) ^*£pVj) 2 sing. m. pres. hiph. of 
%& was good, in hiph. did good, parad. 9. 

460. W& contr. for JW, and that for *W3, Gr. 39, inf. 
constr. of XG^J parad. 5 and 12; 1. lifted up-, 2. took away, 3. with 
J1JJ expressed or understood, took away (sin), and hence pardoned. 
The word in the text is used substantively, and conveys, 1. the 
ideas of elevation, raising ; hence 2. a height, a rising, as in the 
spot that indicated leprosy ; 3. excellence, dignity, majesty. I can- 
not find any passage in the Heb. scriptures where this word refers 
directly to the pardon of sin, although acceptance or pardon of 
sin may certainly be implied, as in this passage. 

461. nn§7 contr. for fin^H? at the door; MH5 subs. m. seg. (i) 
class, an opening, a door, an entrance. 

462. fiKfcSn subs. fern. 1. sin; 2. a sin offering; 3. the punish^ 
ment of sin; the original notion conveyed by this word, is that of 
missing a mark, hence of erri?ig, or ivandering , straying from the 
right path, compare frStpF!- 

463. yyi m. act. part, kal of ^5^ lay, crouched, as animals 
upon their breasts, with their legs folded, see Gen. xlix. 9. 

464. ^V&O comp. of ) cop. conj., and prep. 7$ to, towards, and 
pron. affix, 2 pers. sing. m. 

465. inp^Fl comp. of pron. aff. 1, and i1j?#JJI see No. 390, 
This word is only used three times in the Heb. scriptures, in 
Cant. vii. 10, in Gen. iii. 16, and in this passage. In the first of 
these passages it is thus translated and explained by Schleusner, 



54 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. iv. 

Lex. Yet. Test., sub. voc. iiricrTpofyr), " animi ipsius propensio erga 
me, seu prae amore et mei desiderio totus in me convertitur, ut 
solent amantes fixis oculis arnicas suas intueri." In Gen. iii. 16, it 
is obvious that this word signifies a woman's passion for her hus- 
band. In this verse I take it to bear the meaning of strong 
propensity, or lust; Gr. huQvtxia, as applied to the lusting after 
what is evil in many parts of the New Test., see Rom. vi. 12, 
Mr) ovv (3aG-Ckev€T<D r) d/Jbaprta iv rf 6vr)Ta> vfjbwv croo/jLaTL, eh to 
viraicoveiv avrfj iv rah iiriQv^iai^ avrov. I can find no ground for 
applying this word to fraternal affection generally, or to any sort 
of propension of a younger towards an elder brother, which was 
not reciprocal. 

466. /$for\ shalt, shouldest, must rule, 2 sing. m. pres. Teal of 
7^3 ruled. After a careful consideration, I am led to adopt the 
following view of this very difficult passage ; n^b Dfc$ if thou 
doest well, I conceive not to refer to Cain's general conduct, but to 
be restricted to the nature of the offering spoken of in the pre- 
ceding verse, to the mode of offering it, and to the offerer's faith, 
see Heb.xi. 4. The rendering of this expression by the LXX. 
exactly coincides with this view, iav 6p0w<; TrpoaeviyKrj^ si recte 
obtuleris. Tti$? I regard as opposed to VJ3 *) /§*J in ver. 5, and as 
signifying elevation, raising (of the countenance), and hence, by 
implication, acceptance, pardon. Y^h HK^H Hn^/ sin lieth at the 
door, I regard as idiomatical, and expressive of the contraction of 
guilt involving penal consequences. I regard the pron. aff. 1 
joined to np^JI as referring to fiKtSn, which is here construed 
as masc, as appears from the gender of Y^l, and I consider that 
IS" /^Dn JinK refers to Cain's obtaining the mastery over sin, 
and not to his dominion over his brother, for although primogeni- 
ture, at least in after-times, involved certain rights and privileges 
in regard to precedence, and succession to property, it no where 
appears that the expressions here used are applicable to fraternal 
relationship. The whole passage may be thus literally translated, 
" If thou doest well, raising (of thy countenance), and if thou 
doest not well, sin lieth at the door, and thine the lust of it, still 
thou mayest obtain dominion over it;" the scope of which is, "If 
thine offering be in faith, thy countenance shall rise, for thou shalt 



Ver.7— 10.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 55 

be forgiven; but if thine offering be not in faith, thy sin remaineth, 
to which thou hast a strong propensity, which, notwithstanding, it 
is thy duty to subdue." 

467.— Yer. 8. *??tH?K Pj2 "^J and Cain said unto Abel. 
And Cain talked to his brother, either quietly to lull him into 
security, or reproachfully as a prelude to the sin he was to 
commit. As what Cain said to Abel is not mentioned, it has been 
thought that there is an ellipsis in this passage, which has been 
thus supplied in the Sam. Pent. : ("H^il HD/jl, let us go into the 
field; in the Septuagint, SteXOcofjuev eh to irehlov; in the Vulgate. 
egrediamur for as ; in the Syriac Vers, eamus in desertum. In the 
Targum of Onkelos this ellipsis is not supplied. 

468. DJTPPlJl comp. of 3 before sh'va ? and the pron. aff. plur 
3 pers. and inf. constr. of iTPl was, parad. 13. See No. 270 ; lit. 
in their being, i. e. when they were. 

469. ITJJBEJ in the field (fields), contr. for TT$fi\%. See Nos. 
36 and 38. 

470. DD*1 and rose up, comp. of 5 and 3 sing. masc. pres. kal of 
D*lp, parad. 10, to rise; with the accent D'lpJ, or D1DJ* 

471. 7?ri"7^ against Abel. 7tf, see No. 71. 

472. ^iniJnPn and slew him, comp. of ), pron. affix ^H— , and IHrV, 
and with the accent removed to the union vowel of the affix and 
the ult. vowel lost, jTSV 3 sing. pres. kal of Sljl slew, parad. 
2 and 3. 

473. — Ver. 9. *« constr. form of W see No. 354. 

474. *ftJ?T / know, 1 sing. pret. kal of J?T parad. 8, 4. 

475. 10^5 comp. of interrog. part. H, and 1H2W keeper, act. 
part, kal masc. of 1!&P parad. 4, kept, guarded. 

476. — Ver. 10. H£ interrog. particle what, generally pointed Pl£- 

477. JVfcyg hast thou done ? 2 sing. m. pret. kal of H^JJ parad. 
13,2. 

478. ^OT, the bloods of, i.e. blood of, constr. of Q^^, plur. of 
ttl, subs. m. blood, Gr. 94, and 49. 

479. D*py¥, crying, (keep) crying, (are) still crying, plur. con- 
struct, m. of act. part, kal of pj?¥, cried, parad. 3 ; penult vowel 
immoveable, Gr. 59 and 75. This word agrees with ^OT instead 
of /1p, as might be expected, see Prof. Lee's Gr.215, 12. The 



56 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. iv. 

following is the rule there given ; " When the subject of any 
proposition is found in the definite state of construction with any 
word, the predicate is mostly made to agree in gender and number 
with the last of these, provided the sense of the predicate will 
apply to both (by the figure zeugma). The passage in the text is 
cited there as an example, see also 1 Sam. ii. 4. 

480.— Ver. 11. Ml nFlX'^X, cursed (be) thou from (or by) the 
ground-, in as far as the ground is concerned, it will not yield its 
strength to thee ; the very ground will curse thee. Glassius and 
E,os. thus understand the passage, "thou shalt be a cursed (exile) 
from the ground," etc. 

481. i"IflV$ opened, 3 sing. pret. hal of H^S opened, parad. 13. 

482. (TID its mouth, comp. of pron. aff. T\, and **$ constr. of if? 
the mouth, the formation of the const, form is irregular, and 
probably is founded upon some word of the same meaning, of a 
different form now obsolete ; the regular form would be Hip Gr. 96. 

483. Hllp7, lit. for the reception of, to receive, comp. of /before 
the tone syllable 7 Gr. 126(e), and fiTO inf. const, hal of ftp/, 
parad. 5, contr. for nflp/, Gr. 39. 

484. ^n^p from thy hand, in pause for ^H^, comp. of •£? and 
*T subs. fern, the hand, and pron. aff. ^. 

485.— Yer. 12. ihVTi *3 when thou tillest, ?3 see No. 29, here 
rendered when, see also Gen.xxxi.37. Glass, p. 375. 1^11, 2 
sing. m. pres. hal of I^Q, parad. 2. 

486. ^7 fini'Dri &]pKJVN7 lit. it shall not add to give its 
strength to thee; see the same idiom in No. 433. £]D&n 3 sing, 
fern. pres. kal of £]p& added parad. 7. 

487. HJn contr. for HJJn, and that for rQfD, Gr. 39, ground form 
PJFl, contr. Wl, hence fifl Gr.39, and Gr. 115; inf. const, hal of 
JfD parad. 5, gave. 

488. ftPtJD comp. of pron. aff. fern. H~ and ITS subs. m. strength. 
It hence appears that the land into which Cain removed was more 
sterile than that which he had left, and that the difficulty of pro- 
viding food was in consequence greatly increased. In this case, 
as was afterwards threatened in that of the Jews, the land was 
made barren, being cursed for the sin of its inhabitants. 

489. 1^3 J?^ these are participles used substantively; the former, 



Ver. 10— 14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 57 

J^ part. act. sing. m. hal of $^3 parad. 10 and 4. 1. to shake; 2. to 
be agitated, disturbed; 3. to wander (in distress and agitation). 
^OJ comp. of ) before the tone accent ), Gr. 125 (5), and part. act. 
m. hal of 1)1, cogn. fc^l Lat. m^-o ; 1. to shake; 2. to nod (the 
head); 3. fo 5e moved to and fro; 4. fo wander as a fugitive. It 
will hence appear that these two words are nearly synonymous. 
This idiom is frequently adopted in Heb. to express a sentiment 
in the superlative degree, or to give intensity to an expression, 
and is employed in consequence of the poverty of the Hebrew 
language in adjectives. See Introduction, Part III., on the sub- 
ject of Comparison. The meaning of the expression in the text is, 
a miserable vagabond, a very vagabond. 

490. — Ver. 13. \J12 comp. of pron. affix of the first person, and 
J1JJ, after the removal of the accent p2, Gram. 74 ; subs. masc. 

1. sin; 2. the punishment of sin. 

491. NiByj?? comp. of •£, which with /H|, forms a comparative; 
great from endurance, great beyond endurance, greater than I can 
bear ; NIES^ infln. constr. hal of &£^), ordinary form HK^. 1. bore; 

2. endured; 3. lifted up; 4. took away ; parad. 5; with Jl5£ took 
away (sin), pardoned it ; and likewise without J1J?, but with 7 of 
the person or crime forgiven. It should seem, however, that N&?0 
does not signify absolutely, and without J1JJ or 7, to forgive sin. 

1 consequently prefer here the common rendering of this passage, 
and likewise because this view is supported by what is said in the 
following verse, where the nature and insupportable circumstances 
of the punishment are described. Many commentators render the 
passage, " great my sin above forgiveness," i.e. "my sin is too great 
to be forgiven;" or, according to Michaelis' conjecture, "is my sin 
too great to be forgiven?" The LXX. render it, fiel^cov rj atria 
fjiov rod afadfjvaL jjl€. So Onkelos, Syr., Arab., and Vulgate. 

492. — Ver. 14. ")$) JjlfcfHil JP! lo thou drivest me this day out of 
this land. n^lKH appears to be here restricted to the region or 
district where Adam and his posterity resided ; the article Jl has 
the force of HK-H this, T\JT\^T\ ^ = 7\1TW\ see No. 14; fiBh-l 

j tt-:t": tt-:t J t : - •• 

2 sing. m. prset. pih. of KH2I parad. 3, expelled, extruded, and &SH-J^, 
No. 418. 

493. Ift&K ^53$! lit. and from thy face (i.e. from thee) shall 



58 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.iv. 

/ be hid, see No. 14. ""IfiDfr* 1 sing. pres. niph. of ^fiD parad. 4, 
hid. 

494. *tf%fo finding me, comp. of the pron. afF. 1 pers., which takes 
the accent, and W$fo, in full tfTlfo, part. act. masc. kal of K¥fo 
parad. 12, found ; as to change of vowel, see Gr. 75 and 59. 

495. ^lyirP comp. of pron. affix *0~ and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of 
H"l_n, see No. 471; and T)T\ part. act. m. hal of the same. 

496. — Ver. 15. p/ lit. in respect to certainty, in truth, where- 
fore-, comp. of /, before the tonic accent 7, and p, see No. 63. The 
LXX., the Vulgate, Syr., Sym. and Theod., seem to have read £w 
p. The LXX. have ov% ovrco, not so, i. e. this shall not be the 
case ; which rendering is approved by Dathe, Ros., and Schultens. 

497. ")y), 2n.iV /^ " quod attinet ad omnem occidentem Cainum, 
septies vindicabitur," sc. Cainus ; Storr. pp. 292, 293. 

498. D*riJJ3fc? seven times, dual of «"IJJ2$ f. seven. « Septuplum 
supplicium pro multiplice ut saepius," Psal. xii. 7 ; cxix. 164 ; 
Matt, xviii. 21, 22. " Dicit itaque Deus, eum qui Cainum Occi- 
dent gravissimas poenas luiturum." Ros. 

499. DJ5J 3 sing. m. prset. puh. of DD3 parad. 5, revenged, took 
vengeance. 

500. Um see No. 218 ; JYlK No. 99 ; ^3? No. 362. 

501. Jni^H iirfin. hiph. of T\^, parad. 5 and 13, struck, pierced, 
slew. 

502. )W$12 see No. 494 ; the affix here is of the third, there it is 
of the first person. 

503.— Ver. 16. XV) comp. of 5 and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of K2f J 
parad. 8 and 12, went out. 

504. 05??? from the face of, from before = from, see No. 14; 
comp. of -12 and ?, before stiva 7, and OS, No. 14. 

505. %Pt) and dwelt, comp. of 5 and 3 sing. pres. kal of ijjyj 
sat, dwelt, parad. 8 ; without the accent Hfc?* 

506. 10 Nod, pr. name, probably so called from its being the 
place of Cain's wandering or banishment. See No. 489. 

507. T\iyyp on the east of; see Nos. 257 and 217. 

508. — Ver. 17. JT51 and knetv, comp. of \ and 3 sing. pres. kal of 
J?T parad. 8. The guttural takes pathakh in preference to tsere 
or segol. 



Ver. 14—20.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 59 

509. *TJ1in pr. name. Enoch, i. e. dedication. 

510. nj3 7V1 lit. awe? 7ae was building, i. e. #ft<^ 7^e &tft&, see 
No. 232 ; P£fi part. act. hal, m. of H^ fatft. 

511. *VJ? « ctifyj subs. fern. 

512. 133 7z/s sow, comp. of pron. aff. 1 and [3 a sow, the vowel is 
lost on the annexation of the pron. affix, which takes the accent. 
See No. 279. 

513— Ver. 18. TVJTntf ^il? 1^1 were this literally render- 
ed, it would be, there teas born to Enoch (a son), note or mark, Irad. 
Excepting in the 3 sing. pret. and the 2 sing, imp., the nominative 
of the Heb. verb is incorporated with it, in the pronoun prefixed 
or suffixed. See Introduction, Part III., on the Yerb. The ap- 
parent nominative may therefore, in these cases, be said to be in 
apposition to the pronoun ; as, he (a son) teas born, that is, Irad. 
I have an impression that HX, in such circumstances, is the frag- 
ment of an imperative of some verb cognate with filX, derived 
from niX a signal, mark, and is designed to direct attention to the 
word with which it is connected. This conjecture in regard to 
fix I submit to the reader. I confess I am not satisfied with the 
ordinary explanation given, viz. that JlX marks the object of 
active, and the subject of passive verbs. See No. 4. The noun 
J3 a son, with T?J is often not expressed. T?1*1 comp. of 1 and 
3 sing. m. pres. niph. of i?* parad. 8. 

514. /X^inft or /X^Plfc pr. name. Ges. says, forte a deo per- 

cussus, from PlPlft struck, and /X God. 
i T T 

515. 7X^1H5 pr.name, i.e. vir Dei. Ges. 

516. "STD/ in pause for ^5? Lantech, i.e.Juvenis validus. Ges. 
517.— Ver. 19. D*g>J wives, plur. of H^'X, contr. for H^X, plur. 

D^3X, per aphaeresin D^3. See Ges. Lex. Prof. Lee takes a 
different view of this word, see Lex. 

518. PHJ£ pr.name, Adah, i.e. ornament. 

519. ???)£ pr.name, Zillah, i. e. shadow. 

520. — Ver. 20. /JJ W- name, Jabal, i. e. river. 

521. *3X constr. of IX, see No. 305. 1. father-, 2. ancestor-, 
S. founder (of a nation, or family) ; 4. inventor (of an art). 

522. %$* diveller, here used collect, dwellers, sing. m. part. act. 
fad of *1®\ parad. 8, dwelt. 



60 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.iv. 

523. a1& tent, collect, tents, subs. sing. m. seg. (o) class. 

524. i"Qj?& ! l comp. of ) before the labial ^1 and HJpft, subs. m. 
from M^p. 1. created; 2. possessed; 3. purchased. — 1. possession; 
2. wealth, consisting principally of cattle and sheep, which con- 
stitute the wealth of nomad tribes; 3. cattle. Compare Gr. fcrrjvos, 
pecus, and ktt) jxa, possession; d'is, ovis, and Lat. ops, plur. opes; 
and pecu, cattle ; pecunia, money. Ros. supposes *fe?0i$ men of, 
understood before i"ljp&j see the full expression in Gen. xlvi. 32, 
34. »"Qp?? ^fe?0N& men of cattle, herdsmen. The whole clause is 
thus rendered in the LXX. ovrbs r)v irarr^p oIkovvtcov iv c-fcrjvais, 

fCT€VOTpG<fi(DV. 

525. — Ver. 21. &&F\ part. act. masc. kal of b^H parad. 1, took, 
held, handled. 

526. 1)%3 subs. m. Gr. /civvpa, cithara, a stringed musical instru- 
ment. According to Josephus, "a musical instrument with ten 
strings, played with a plectrum." 

527. S^J/ subs. m. Some kind of musical instrument, the pre- 
cise nature of which it is impossible to determine ; by some it is 
thought to be a Pandean pipe, by others a lute. See Lee's and 
Ges. Lex. 

528. — Ver. 22. T\J%\ and as for Zillah (she also), etc.; the con- 
struction is here absolute. 

529. pp 73^ Tubal Cain, pr. name. Tubal Cain of the He- 
brews ; Telchini, mentioned by Strabo ; Dwallin, of the northern 
nations ; and Vulcan, of the Latins ; are all described as the first 
who taught the working of metals. 

530. $Q 7 part. act. m. kal of E^£p7 parad. 1, sharpened (a tool, a 
weapon) ; 2. applied to the instruction of any one in any art. 
$y? 1. a sharpener; 2. an instructor. "Fungar vice cotis," Hor. 
Ar. Poet. 304. Ges. renders &u? beat, hammered out. See LXX. 

531. ^"in part. act. kal masc. of ffi*tfl parad. 2 and 3, cut, fabri- 
cated, wrought; here, an artificer. Ges. renders this word, (( th!e 
instrument which is cut or formed," which is quite contrary to the 
analogy of such words. See Gr. 59. 

532. FWFO subs. com. seg. (o) class, brass, or rather copper. 

533. 7.P.3 subs. masc. iron, supposed to be of Chaldee origin. 
The rendering in our version is supported by the Targum of 



Ver. 20—23.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 61 

Onkelos, while that of Ges. is supported by the LXX., Vulgate, 
Sam. vers., Arab., and Syr., and is as follows : " a maker of every 
instrument of brass and copper." I see no good reason for aban- 
doning the view of the passage taken in our translation, which is 
approved by Prof. Lee, a most judicious critic, and whose opinion 
is entitled to great weight. 

534. ninKl comp. of 3 before the comp. sh'va -) and rYlP!J$,constr. 
form of HIPIX a sister, from H& brother. 

534*. )"lM3 Naamah, i. e. sweetness, 

535. — Yer. 23. JJ?£K* hear, apocop. imper. kal, 2 plur. fern, of 
yfeW heard; full form H^^, which first becomes ]V^P, Gr. 37; 
and then by the assumption of a furtive pathakh instead of segol, 
|J?5# Gr. 104. 105. 

536. *ltf? ^i, ye wives of Lantech, according to our idiom, my 
wives, see Introduction Part III., on the subject of the Pronouns; 
and Glass. Phil. Sac. pp. 150, 151, ed. Dathe. *&} constr. of D^J 
and Vfe?0 his wives, pi. of the same with pron. aff. see No. 517. 

537. n3TS$n, listen to, 2 plur. fern. imp. hiph. with J epenth. of 
JTK obsolete, used once inpih. and with this exception, only used 
in hiph. fT^H gave ear to, listened to, par ad. 7, root JT& the ear. 

538. Vn^Jtf, my word, ivords, comp. of pron. aff. \ and i"n?J{$ 
subs. fern, word, m. ^5^ se g- (*) class, id., ground form ^tf?^- 

539. *J, this particle has here its original meaning of mark, ob- 
serve, and is designed to direct attention to what follows; see 
No. 29. 

540. 'MTX I have slain, 1 sing. pret. kal of ^HPI, slew, parad. 2. 

541. *$?¥|j?j lit. for my wound, i. e. the wound that I have 
received, for wounding me; comp. of 7 prep., and ]}%& a wound, 
subs. m. seg. (i) class, ground form ^V?* anc l aff- !• 

542. TH^O /> comp. of 7 and rn?H id. qu. JTl^ll, a wound in 
which there is no separation, or incision in the flesh such as is 
made by a cutting instrument, but such as is inflicted by a stick or 
scourge, a livid mark in the flesh, root *ll2p joined, as opposed to 
an open wound; and pron. aff. \ WlSriy may be rendered for 
my blow or bruise, for the bruise that I have received. In such 
expressions there is an ambiguity, which can only be cleared up 
from the context; thus IDfoH Ps. vii. 17, signifies his injury, i. e. the 



62 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. iv. 23. 

injury which he inflicted; ^D^fl Gen.xvi. 5, my injury, i.e. which 
I suffer; so amor Dei, may either mean the love which God bears 
to me, or the love that I bear to God. 

543. \?\ even a young man, probably explanatory of fcS^X pre- 
ceding, comp. of \ and \?^ subs. masc. a youth. 

544 — Ver. 24. Dj5j No.*499, Djnj£j# No, 498. 

545. D*J?5?> seventy, plur . of J?3&?, ground form ^3^. The whole 
passage may be thus rendered, " I have slain a man for wounding 
me, even a young man for bruising me, if Cain shall be avenged 
sevenfold, then shall Lamech be avenged seventy and seven." 
Lamech here justifies the crime which he had committed, upon 
the ground, that he had done so either under great provocation or 
in self defence. He seems, likewise, desirous to allay the appre- 
hensions of his wives as to the consequences of the homicide, and 
to convince them that his case was not parallel with Cain's. 

546. — Ver. 25. *71J? iterando, hinc continuando, pergendo, dur- 
ando, h. e. iterum. Storr. pp. 310, 311 note. Originally a noun of 
the form of the inf. of verbs of parad. 10 ; *Tiy~73 " the whole 
duration," Job xxvii. 3. 

547. T^Sl see No. 430. 

548. SOprfi and she called, comp. of \ and 3 sing. pres. hal of 
fcOD, parad. 12 and 3. It appears, that children were generally 
named by the mother from the earliest times. See chaps, xxix. 
and 30. 

549. T0 prop, name, Seth, and T\$ 3 sing. m. pret. hal of Fh& 
placed, substituted ; the meaning of T0 is, consequently, position, 
substitution. 

550. IH^ another, cum dag. forte occulto. Ges. 

551. JJD linn *?, since Cain slew him, tvhom Cain slew; I^Hl! 
comp. of pron. aff. 1 and ^IH, and with the accent removed to the 
pron. affix ^TVl. Gr. 74. 

552. Yer. 26— ")X\ KVTD3 figfyl lit. and to Seth, also to him 
(Heb. he) was born a son ; we have here &OPI where we should 
have expected )/. 

553. *T ?J 3 sing. masc. pret. pah. of *P* parad. 7, begot, brought 
forth. 

554. t^l^NI Enos, i. e. man. 



Chap. v. 1.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 6S 

555. ttf a particle of excitation, Engl. 9 st, see, hehold. To 
establish, this view, Prof. Lee in his Lex. p. 17 quotes a passage 
from an Arabic author, which is thus translated, " I came to thee, 
behold Zaid stood," or " Zaid (was) standing," or " Zaid (then) 
stands." Hence it has the meaning of then, at that time, and the 
usage of an adverb. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

556. 7n^n 8 sing. pret. hoph. of 7/H parad. 6. 1. pierced, 
womided, slew ; from the idea of the separation of parts occasioned 
by boring ox piercing arises that of loosing, hence 2. loosed; hence 
the idea of freedom from restraint, and, consequently, that ofpro- 
faneness, dissoluteness, as in Engl, dissolute from dis-solvo ; hence 
in niph. S. was profane. The notion of perforating leads to that of 
introducing or beginning, thus in hiph. 4. began ; comp. Lat. initium 
from ineo. From the ord meaning, the following sense has been 
given to the passage in the text, tunc profanatum est in vocando 
nomine Jehovae, which is supposed to refer to the introduction of 
idolatry or of corruptions in the worship of God. From the 4th 
meaning the ordinary sense of the passage is deduced, which ap- 
pears to be the correct one, then it was begun (men began) to call 
upon the name of the Lord, which is supposed to refer to forms of 
public worship instituted at this period, and observed by the 
family of Seth. The passage is also thus rendered by Dathe, tunc 
coeperunt homines de nomine Jovae vocari. This being the period 
at which the family of Seth began to be called "the sons of God," 
see chap. vi. 2. In this translation, violence is done to the original 
by rendering K*"lp7 by vocari ; it is also to be observed, that in 
chap. vi. 2, the expression is p^H /KH"^?, not f"IirV"23. 

557— Chap. v.l. DIN nn?1fiS5b HJ, dbvq v '{3{/3\os yevivem 
av0pco7T(ov LXX.; hie est catalogus posterorum Adami; 1§D subs, 
seg. m. (z) class, ground form "lSD, 1. enumeration, 2. register, re- 
cord, S. book ; rrnlfl ^5P a genealogical table, see Matt. i. 1, 
/3//3\o? yevio-ews 'Irjcrov XptaTov. It is to be observed, that there 
is here a pause accent at the word D 1 !^, and that the above quo- 
tation is the title of the chapter, which some have supposed to be 
a portion of antediluvian history preserved till the times of Moses ; 
as in the first chapter, the word HI IT is not found here. 

558. "W DH£ WtpX *h3 DV3 lit, in the dag of God's creating 



64 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. v. 

man, in the likeness of God made he him, i. e. when God created 
man, he made him after his own likeness. The word D\*OK is 
here repeated where we shonld use a pronoun. See Introduction, 
Part III. on the subject of pronouns. See also No. 536. 

£OJ inf. constr. hat. of K^lll, see No. 2, used here substantively 
in the sense of creation, in die creationis Adami (sive) hominis. 

559. — Ver. 2. FW75 see No. 157, Dfo&?*, their name, comp. of 
W No. 241, and pron. aff. plur. D~ ; the tsere of D$ lost on the 
addition of the affix, which takes the accent. No. 279. 

560. D^in QV? lit. in the day of their being created, "ipso 
illo die creationis," Dathe; D^^tf No. 194 {a). 

561. *ITJ and lived, comp. of ) cop.conj.and 3 sing. masc. apoc. 
pres. hal. of iTPl lived, apocope and change of vowels, the same as 
in Nos. 23 and 25. 

562. Huh? plur. of Vh& three ; fern. r\%h$ infra. 645. The 
following rules are to be observed in regard to* the syntax of nu- 
merals, which are abridged from Prof. Lee's Grammar, Art. 226. 

1. The numerals in Hebrew being all substantives, are put 
either in apposition or in the definite state of construction, with the 
thing numbered, as in verse 7 of this chapter : T\M filX?? TX1120 
eight hundred year (years) ; see Introduction, Part III., on the 
subject of Number ; and in this verse, T\*§& V\*&l2t\ a hundredth of 
year, i.e. a hundred years ; in Lat. trias virorum, i. e. tres viri. 

2. The numerals from 3 to 10 inclusively, are mostly in the 
gender different from that of the thing numbered, for the sake 
perhaps of variety; as, d 4 ^? HJD^ or D^5? T\V-W seven male 
lambs ; Jll&PM V^ seven female lambs. 

3. In like manner, when the numeral signifies any number ex- 
ceeding ten, it may likewise disagree in gender with the thing, etc., 
to be numbered, while the thing, etc., numbered will be put in the 
singular ; e. g. E^tf flj^?^! ^$?3$? seventy and seven man (men). 
Prof. Lee's Gr. Art. 226.' 

4. The plurals of the numerals from 3 to 9 inclusively, make 
30, 40, etc., respectively. 

562*. D&fo) comp. of ^ cop. conj. and constr. of fltf?J a hundred, 
Gr.94,95. 

563. T?1*5 and begat, comp. of \, and 3 sing. apoc. pres. hiph. 



Ver. 1—12.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 65 

hiph. of ]?l parad. 8, full form 1 */J\, hence apoc. T?V, and with 
the accent removed to the penult. T7P Gr. 30 (b) ; inf. 1 v}n, contr. 
TSm, Gr.50(l), with affix iTm' 

564. Tiff), and died, comp» of \, and 3 sing. pres. kal of ]"Yl£, to 
die, here in pause with the accent on the ult. syllable ; when not 
in pause, it is Hfijl, the accent being on the penult., pronounced 
vay-ya-moth, Gr. 30 (&), see ver. 5. 

565. Mh$3 fflttnS, seeNos.162, and 156 and 157; pron. aff. 
1 of the 3 pers. sing. 

566. — Ver. 4. VT)% and toere, comp. of •) and 3 pi. m. pres. kal 
of JTH teas, parad. 13. 

567. ♦#, see No. 377. 

568. ^TllK, constr. of D^Pltf obsolete, plur. of ^IHK hinder part, 
JYjnn ^HfcO, ?nY/j Me ends (end) o/* Me spear, used as an adverb, 
and prep, of place, backwards, after. 

569. iT?iri, At* begetting, see No. 563. 

570. Hp^, e^A*, mas., T\±$ fern., and Hib^ constr. 

571. TW T\Xfo, a hundred year (years), plur.' of HNft, No. 562, 
II^ subs. fern, a year, sing, for plur. No. 562 (3). 

572. — Ver. 5. *H, &?<:/, contr. for ^H, id. qu. /TH lived, parad. 13, 
3 sing. pret. kal. 

573. l^n, constr. of J^fi rcme, m., and iT0ft fern., and P0ft 
constr. 

574— Ver. 6. D*Jg> ^DPT, >e ?/mrs, constr. ^ftPT, fern. ilWbn, 
constr. fern. fl&^n, plur. tPWfoVi fifty . 

575— Ver. 7. JD^, abs. *erew, constr. J^, and fij£# fern., 
^3^ constr. 

576— Ver. 8. HT^JJ D7?#, to?foe, DW by a contraction of the 
vowels for D>H&?, contracted for Dlfl^ fern, dual; D^fc? masc. 
fa^o ; rnfePJ?. fern, form of ^l&J^ ten, id. qu. ^^JJ. These forms are 
only used from 11 to 19 inclusively; in Lat. duodecim. 

577— Ver. 9. D^Kfa, frosefy, plur. of $7g>fl, ground form Jflftl, 
see Nos.573 and 562 (4). 

578.— Ver. 10. fi^ BteQ, i ^foe», Nos. 574 and 576. 

579 —Ver. 12. D*J?h# seventy-, plur. of Jtt&T, No. 562 (4), ground 
form 5??^. 

5 



66 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. v. 12. 

580. 7X7/l!5 5 Mahalaleel, i. e. praise of God, from /)T\ praised, 
and ;$, 

581 —Ver. 13. £3^5n& /or&/, plur. of JJ^K /owr, No. 562 (4), 
ngllK fern., nj?31^ constr. 

582— Ver. 14. i^JJ, also ^ m. ten, fern. H^J? and ^W, 
constr. T\*W% 

583.— Ver." 15. DW *«%, p£ of ## mas., HW fern., and 
WP see No. 180. 

584. TT, in pause for .TT pr. name, Jared, see Gr.31. 

585 Ver. 18. DW, see No. 576. 

586.— Ver. 21. tfovfaTp, Methuselah, lit. vir teli, from )ftfo wr, 
and ri7^ telum, see Ges. Lex., in pause for FD&J^fiO see ver. 22. 

587. — Ver. 22. ^vfilVi comp. of -J, and 3 sing. m. pres. hith. of 
**|?0 P ara 4« ^ W6ft£, walked-, in A^A., frequency or habit is implied. 
Walk, it is well known, is used in scripture to denote mode of life. 
(«.) DrH^rrn^, as it respects God, having a regard to God, see 
No. 4. The meaning of the passage is that Enoch (lived keeping 
God continually before him) toalked with God; " ambulavit Chanoch 
in timore Dei," Onkelos. The same expression is applied to Noah, 
chap. vi.9. 

588. ^^frO, comp. of \ and W constr. of \\<$ want, defect, used as 
an adverb, not-, and pron. aff. with J epenth., lit. and want of him, 
and he not, and he (was) not ; see a similar expression in Livy's 
description of the death of Romulus, "Nee deinde Romulus in 
terris fuit." Liv. Hist. lib. i. c. 16: and in Lysias, in regard to 
Hercules, ".Ef avOpooircov ^aviaOrj, Orat. 31, p. 494. 

589. D^K DTK HpJ? *3 for God took him. "Nee extitit 
(amplius) neque enim occidit eum Jehovah," Onkelos. "Et ecce! 
non amplius erat inter incolas terrae nam subtractus est, et ascendit 
in coelum per verbum quod est coram Deo," Targum of Jonathan. 
JJicTTei *Evw% fiereredrj rod fir) ISelv Odvarov, Heb. xi. 5. 

590.— Ver. 25. D^b^l and eighty; comp. of \ and plur. of T\)foP 
No. 570. 

591. — Ver. 29. ft 3 Noah, pr. name, rest. 

592. ib^S see No. 137. 

593. ^t?n3! shall comfort us; comp. of pron. aff. W" - us, and 
Qny the ult. vowel of which is lost on the removal of the accent ; 



Chap.vi.2] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 67 

3 sing. m. pres. pih. of DHi sighed, not nsed in kal: in niph. 1. be- 
came s/^/mV^; 2. was grieved; 3. repented; in pih. sighed (with), 
sympathised toith, comforted. Instead of the foregoing expression 
we might have expected OPP^ shall give us rest, from TV\] to rest ; 
with which compare PO in full Pi 13 rest, see No. 591. From the 
rendering of the LXX. hiavairavaei, it should seem that the 
translator had either found ^PP-5? in the text, or supposed that to 
be the right reading, which is more naturally connected with the 
prep. J£p following, than ^DbPO* vid. inf. No. 2006. Various con- 
jectures have been formed as to how Lamech expected comfort 
from Noah in reference to the ground which God had cursed ; 
some suppose that he invented implements of husbandry, and thus 
lightened human toil: others, that it was owing to the invention 
of wine, by which mankind were refreshed and comforted : others, 
that Lamech entertained the hope, that on account of Noah's 
piety, the curse, which had been occasioned by the fall, would be 
removed from the earth. 

594. Xfo^fofo comp. of -lb and tl&Vfe subs. masc. what one does, 
work, from ilG?J£ parad. 2 and 13, did, and affix ^— Gr. 99. 

595. pjlSfJfflUomp". of ) and -ft, before the guttural §, Gr. 123, b ; 
and constr. of jta^J?. See No. 386. 

596. ^"T our hands, comp. of pron. affix XP m and dual of *V; 
subs. fern, the hand. Gr. 49. 

597. PH'HK 3 sing. f. pret. pihel of TlK cursed, parad. 7 and 3. 
598— Ver.32. T\\V T\)Xft B%tr}3 son of five hundred years, 

i. e. fice hundred years old. 

599. Dfc^ Shem, i. e. name, re?ioion. 

600. DPI Ham, i. e. warmth, heat. 

601. T\& Japheth, in pause for T)5P m , i.e. enlargement. 

602. — Chap. vi. 1. /HP! began, 3 sing. pret. hiph. of 7 /PI. See 
No. 556. 

603. DH&Pl lit. the man, used collectively for mankind. 

604. ^ T? ft? midtiply, comp. of T 5 prep, and infin. kal of ^5^ 
parad. 6 and 2. 

605. *n ?J were &om, 3 plur. m. pret. ^>wA. of iT parad. 8. 

606. — Ver. 2. ^£0*5 an d (that) saw, comp. of -J and 3 plur. m. 
pres. kal of P1NH sow; parad. 13, 2, and 3. 



68 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. vi. 

607. D*nS$V*33 the sons of God. The sons of God are pro- 
bably the descendants of Seth, see chap.iv. 26, and No. 556; and 
the daughters of men, the descendants of Cain. The evil conse- 
quences of the marriages mentioned in this Terse, prove the wisdom 
of the prohibition of the Mosaic law against intermarriages with 
the heathen, and of the apostle Paul's injunction against being 
"unequally yoked." 

Upon this narrative are probably founded the mythological 
accounts among the heathens of intermarriages between gods 
and men : such as that between Uranus and Tithea, from which 
sprang the Titans, from rcralvco, men of great stature ; and as that 
between Anchises and Venus, Thetis and Peleus, etc. ; from which 
intercourse were said to be produced great heroes, giants, etc. 

607*. ]"Qb i. e. PNSHQ H^b lit. good (fair) of countenance, fern, 
plur. of itD, written in full ^ILD good, goodly, fair. 

608. ^T\VF\ comp. of •) and 3 plur. m. pres. kal of )"lp/ parad. 6 ; 
with dagesh implied in p, took. 

609. !HP!5 in pause for ^IfiS, Gr. 31 ; 3 plur. pret. kal of -©3, 
cogn. Jtt3, parad. 3 and 4. 1. explored; 2. examined-, 3. proved; 
4. chose; 5. liked, loved. Their choice seems to have been regu- 
lated by external appearance: Din rQtO *3 because they (were) 
fair. 

610. — Ver. 3. T^VH^ fi'T K/ nonjudicabit, sc. litigabit spiritus 
metis cum homine in perpetuum, dum err are facit eos caro, i.e. 
" frustra tamdiu hominum vitia redarguo, dum eos in varios libi- 
dinis errores abduxit corrupta eorum indoles," Pos.; with whom 
agree Ges. and Winer. "My spirit shall not continually keep up 
the process of judgment, rebuke, conviction, and condemnation," 
etc. Bush. The translators of the Septuagint seem to have read 
"ttTJ instead of p"T*, and render the passage, ov firj Karafjetvr] to 
7rvev/jLa fjuov iv tols avQpoairoi^, " My spirit shall not abide among 
men." " Non permanebit ista pessima generatio coram me in 
aeternum," Chald. Par. ; "habitabit," Arab, and Syr. pT 3 sing. 
pres. kal of p^, ordinary form ^1 parad. 10; judged, contended, 
strove. 

611. d-2^5 according to Eos., Ges., and Winer, comp. of 5 and 
%W, ground form $W error, sin, compare ^W erred; and pron. aff. 



Ver. 2—4 ) THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 69 

D— their; because of their si?i (sins). According to others it is 
comp. of 3 and •&, contracted for HEJ^$ pron. rel. that, and D3 also, 
in that also. The only solid objection to this view is that this con- 
traction of ")|?X is unknown in the Hebrew scriptures at this date ; 
indeed it is one of the peculiarities which marks the later style, 
and the only probability is that it might have been introduced on 
a revision of the scriptures by Ezra, or some other prophet, after 
the Babylonish captivity. The former view appears preferable. 

612. ^^1 subs. m. 1. flesh, generally; 2. mankind, implying 
the idea of weakness; 3. what is carnal or sinful, as opposed to 
what is spiritual— -flesh, as frequently used in Paul's epistles. The 
expression *")fe?5 ^^ ma y ^ e nere rendered he (being) carnal, i. e. 
on account of the corruption of his nature. 

613. VfoJ Vill still his days shall be, i.e. notwithstanding man's 
wickedness his time of probation shall be extended to the period 
of 120 years. See ) rendered as above in No. 490. 

614. — Ver. 4. D^$5PI comp. of art. -H and D V$J, only used in 
this passage and in Num. xiii. 32, in reference to the sons of Anak, 
and in both places translated by the LXX. yiryavTes, which is no 
doubt the proper rendering. There are great differences of opinion 
about the etymology. See Prof. Lee's note on Job xv. 25. 

615. nip^inKDJ 1 ! and likewise afterwards. "When the 
sons of God went in unto the daughters of men, then they brought 
forth (children) to them, these (are) the mighty men who in 
ancient times (were) men of renown." 

616. p~nnX const, plur. of liltf, see No. 568; p particle, 
already noticed. Aben Ezra supposes p^HX to refer to what 
took place after the deluge, and to the race of Anakims mentioned 
by Moses in Numb. xiii. 33. The context, however, seems to shew 
that p^^nX refers to what took place in consequence of the 
intermarriages between the family of Seth and that of Cain, who, 
it should seem, were remarkable for the greatness of their stature. 

617. ^h; 3 plur. pres. kal of KIS to enter, parad. 10 and 12. 

618. D^^in comp. of art. 'PI and plur. of *YD5 a strong, mighty 
man* applied to a hunter, Gen. x. 9 ; to a soldier or hero, as in this 
passage. Boot T2Z prevailed. 

619. D'J'P! ^^ men of name ; Fr. renommes, from nom name; 



70 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. vL 

see Job. xxx. 8, D&?"v5 \J3 lit. children (of those) without name, 
children of the infamous, ignoble, base born. 

620. — Ver. 5. Hjn great, f. of 37, ground form 337, verb 337. 

621. H$?7 construct form of 7JJ7 wickedness, subs. fern. ; if the 
J? admitted of dagesh, the form would be Pljf 1 ; the kamets in the 
penult, syllable is consequently immoveable. The ground form of 
the masc. form would be J?JH. Compare J?5?l ttftfs ew7, and see 
No. 230. 

622. 1¥\ subs. m. seg. (i) classs, ground form 7¥*, anything that 
is fashioned or formed, as a vessel of clay by a potter ; hence a 
creation ; (metaph.) of the mind, an imagination. See 7^ formed, etc. 

623. nh^H.3 constr. plur. of T\^ptlp, other form nSgTlJQ subs, 
fern., what one thinks, a thought, design, project, from 3^7 thought, 
devised, etc. 

624. 13/ his heart, comp. of pron. aff. 1 and 37, in full 33/, 
ground form of 5? contr. for 33/. P r °f- Lee's Gr. Art. 77, Gr. 
41, 115, the heart. 

625. p7, ground form pp*l subs., thinness ; compare pp7 &£<?£ 
ow£, «iW<? to^ now used as an adverb of extenuation, or restric- 
tion, only. 

626. JTl see No. 230. 

627. B1*rr 73 lit. totality of the day, throughout the whole day, 
continually. Ros. thus renders the passage, commencing with 
7¥w31, " et omne fi^mentum cosritationum cordis tantum malum 
(nihil aliud praeter malum) per omne vitae tempus; " oXrjv ttjv 
r)fj,ipav, Eom. viii. 36. 

628. — Ver. 6. D7>7 and it repented, comp. of •} and 3 sing. m. 
pres, niph. of DPll See No. 593. 

629. H^j; ^3 that he had made. 

630. 3^77 an d tt grieved him to his heart, comp. of -\ and S 
sing. m. pres. hith. of 3¥J? laboured, teas in pain ; as applied to the 
mind, icas grieved or distressed ; in hith., was grieved with one's self. 

631. ^h see No. 624. 

632.— Ver. 7. 77^ 1 sing. pres. hot of 77fc, parad. 13; 1. 
wiped out ; 2. completely destroyed. 

633. *fitf 73 /toe created, 1 sing. pret. Aw? of &73, parad 3 and 
12. No. 2. T 



Yer. 4— 9.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 71 

634. H&nS *1J? ^^?? lit. from man unto beast, i.e. both man 
and beast. 

635. ^n? 1 sing. pret. niph. of DHJ, No. 628 and 593, I have 
repented, I repent. 

636. tiN&y^ I have made them, comp. of pron. affix D~ before 
1 pers. sing. D to distinguish it from DJYt^J?. thou hast made them; 
and 1 sing. pret. hat of H^JJ parad. 13 and 2. 

637.— Yer. 8. XXJb /otmrf, 3 sing. pret. At// of K$? found, 
parad. 12. 

638. fH favour, grace, subs. m., ground form JJPl. 

639. ^$?.3 * w ^ e e y e5 0/" (Jehovah) ; comp. of 5 prep, and constr. 
of D.^S! Gr:49; etoZ. of |$. constr. |*g % eye, Gr. 50 (3). 

At tire close of the 8th verse of this chapter ends the first 
Parasha, or great section of the law, i. e. the portion appointed to 
be read in the Jewish Synagogue, Acts xv. 21. The five books of 
Moses were divided into fifty-four sections, because in their in- 
tercalated years, in which a month was added, there were fifty- 
four sabbaths ; but, in other years, they reduced them to fifty-two, 
by joining two together; thus the reading of the whole law was 
completed in the course of a year. Bush. 

640. — Yer. 9. fTPI^) PPX this is a record of the history (of 
Noah), for so rn/lfl is rendered by Bos., Ges., and Lee, here 
and in Gen. ii. 4. See No. 194. There is here no genealogical 
account of Noah's pedigree, with the exception of the mention of 
his three sons, of whom previous notice was taken. What follows 
contains an account of the remarkable incidents of his life. Dathe 
calls these words, " Inscriptio noti fragment!." This verse is the 
commencement of a new subject, of which the above words are 
the title ; and the sequel of the chapter has this peculiarity, com- 
mon to other supposed portions of antediluvian history, that the 
word mrV is not found in it. 

641. pH^ adj. m.j'ust, righteous; root pT¥ was righteous. 

642. D^pft adj. m. perfect, free from moral stain, upright, used 
only in a relative sense; verb Dftfi finished, perfected, or intrans. 
was finished , teas perfect. 

643. Vfmj comp. of 5, pron. aff. V~, and plur. of *\1, in full 
^TH subs. fern. 1. revolution, hence the period of a man's life, age, 



72 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. vi. 

a generation; 2. race (of men); "Noah was righteous, and upright 
in his generations/' i. e. throughout the periods in which he lived, 
Prof. Lee's Lex. According to Ges., Ros., and others, inter 
homines sui seculi — inter aequales suos. Dathe renders the passage 
" omnium illius aetatis maxime pius." The same meaning is given 
in the Arabic and Syriac versions. 

644. -ipnnn 3 sing. m. pret, kith, of T?Pl walked, see No. 587. 
645. — Ver. 10. D^l H^?^ lit. trias filii (flliorum), three sons. 
646. — Yer. 11. ftnfe^J?! comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. pres. niph. 

of f\n^ corrupted^ destroyed; in niph. teas corrupt, putrid, Jer. xiii. 7 ; 
vms corrupt (in a moral sense), parad. 3. The corruption here 
spoken of respects the state of irreligion, violence, and oppressive 
conduct. 

647. SvJ^ril and teas filled; comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. pres. 
niph. of «?D or N7D filled, used likewise intrans., in niph. teas 
filled; H^/fo 3 sing. fern, pret, hal, see ver. 13. 

64 5. DDH subs. masc. violence, injury, wiclzedness in general. 
There is no preposition here, as would be required by our idiom. 
When the relation between words was obvious from the context, in 
the infancy of language, probably no prep, was employed to point 
out that relation: e.g. and the earth 10 as filled violence, or tvicked- 
ness, i. e. with violence; see likewise Gen. ii. 7, God formed man 
dust of the earth. In both of which cases the relation is sufficiently 
obvious. 

649.— Yer. 12. PinH^J 3 sing. fern. pret. niph. olTsTM No. 646, 
out of pause fifing Gr. 31 ; and jVn&^!"I had corrupted, 3 sing. m. 
pret. hiph. of the same. 

650. ""^5 SUD ~ S - m.fiesh, here used for mankind, see No. 612. 

651. 13"R his (their) way, seg, of the (a) class, m. a path, aioay; 
here used in a moral sense; ground form "H"}^ verb. 1JTJ trod; and 
pron. aff. 1. 

652.— Yer. 13. T*p subs. m. extremity, end, end (of life) ; according 
to our own idiom, a man's end, and death are synonymous terms, 
see No. 440. 

653. ^^7 comp. of 7 prep, and pron. aff. *— , and D\D3 a plur. 
form, face ; the termination being removed to make way for the 
pron. aff. Gr.49. This clause may be thus literally rendered, 



Ver. 9—14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 73 

'•The end (destruction) of all flesh, hath coine to my face;" but as 
we set before our faces what is agreeable to us. *jS 7 has come to 
signify, or at least to imply, approval; see Ps. xix. 15. --Let the 
meditation of my heart (be) to, or before thy face/' i.e. approved 
by thee. But as God decrees what he approves, the passage may 
be more freely rendered, "the destruction of all flesh is decreed by 
me." the allotted term of 120 years having arrived: see verse 3 of 
this chap., and Xo. 613. X2 3 sing. m. pret. kal of N13 parad. 10 
and 12. 

654. D!Tj?/t? com j). of '£ prep., grave aff. EH and *j£ constr. of 
C^jB Xo. 14: lit. from their faces: according to our idiom the word 
05 i § redundant, and the meaning of the expression is from litem. 
i.e. by reason of them; on account of wickedness committed by 
them; air avrcov, LXX. ; propter eos, Sam. vers. 

655. Ojni and behold I; comp. of \ conj.. jH lo, ground form 
JJH. and pron. aff. \ 

656. Cn^n^/5 (I) destroying them, purpose to destroy them : comp. 
of rVnp-'5 part. sing. m. hiph. of T\n& Xo.646. and pron. aff. D — 

657. P'TOlTTlNt as respects the earth, see Xo. 5S7 (a), i. e. auferam 
eos e terra. 

658.— Ver. 14. ntV 2 sing. m. imp. kaloi T\W% parad. 2 and 13, 
made. 

659. J"D? an ark of, constr. of !"Qri the penult, vowel being 
immoveable : the full form is probably «"Q*n, in Chald. Nfi^Q^ri : 
only used here and in Ex.ii. 5, in reference to the vessel in which 
Moses was exposed. 

660. *!£$?. constr. plur. of YV. a t'*c?; wood, see Xo.86. 

661. *T§j| subs., only used in this passage: cogn. ^133 pitch ; here 
*")$3 may probably signify, not any particular species of tree, but 
pitchy or resinous wood in general, such as the fir, pitch pine, 
cypress, etc. Bockhart and Celsius regard it to be the cypress, 
from the resemblance of the words HJil and KvirdpLacTos. and from 
the resinous quality of that wood. 

662. D*3p plur. of [D, ground form jjp masc. a nest, dwelling; in 
the plur. cells, chambers, apartments, Gr. 115. 

66S. TWm 2 sing. m. pres. kal of ilbjj made. par. 2 and 13. 
664. niirirrri^ as respects the ark; thou shalt make chambers 



74 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. vi. 

(apartments) as respects the ark, i.e. in the ark: see No. 048. and 
No. 587 (a). 

66-3. jJHSD^ a nd shalt smear (pitch); comp. of 1 conj.. and 2 
sing. m. pret. hat of ^53 parad. 4. root *\S2 subs. m. pitch, hence 
the original meaning of the verb pitched', from the uses and pro- 
perties of pitch have arisen the notions of smearing, covering, 
compare ^§3 and cover; in pih. ^$5 covered (sin), i. e. expiated, or 
atoned for it. 

666. rV3/!? comp. of m U from, and )V3 constr. JV3 subs. m. a 
residence, a house, a moveable residence, a tent, Gen.xxvii. 15; 
residence (of a king), a palace, (of God), a temple-, (of the dead), <? 
sepulchre', 2. those contained in a residence, a family', 3. the mfe- 
rior part of any thing; hence it is used with the prep, j/!? adverbially 
in the sense of within, from within. 

667. l^Pf/!? comp. of 2? for •£? Gr. 19, and j^H subs. m. The notion 
involved in this word seems to be that of surrounding or enclosing ; 
hence the side or wall of a building, but always that which is 
external; hence out-fields. lands, etc.; and with the prep. V2 used 
adverbially, without, from without, outwards, see Prof. Lee's Lex. 

668. *1$3? contr. for HjJSrQ. comp. of J prep. art. -H, and *")$3 
No. 665. Gr. 35. 

669.— Ver. 15. llftX— *1gW Pljl lit. and this that thou shalt make 
it, i.e. this is how thou shalt make it. 

670. n^sS 4 cubit (cubits), see No. 562 (3); subs. fern, a cubit. 
The derivation is uncertain. 

671. ^p.^ subs. m. seg. (o) class, ground form ^"lK ; and without 
the accent *?pX (orch), length. 

612. WW^Ti fifty, see No. 574. 

673. <^5^H ^ s 1> Tea d>th, comp. of FT — pron. aff. and 5H^ (rokhbh); 
with the accent 3FH, ground form of 2H1 seg. (o) class, length. 
Gr. 110. 

674. nH/tplp &£s height, comp. of fern. pron. aff. T\— and ilDlp; 
before the aff. T)u)p stature (of a man), height, from D^lp fo r/se, to 
stand. 

675. — Ver. 16. "lPlX subs. masc. seg. (o) class, %A£ 3 aperture for 
the admission of light, a window; compare IH^* shone, and ^HT, 
^HtO, /Hi?, cognate words of the same meaning. Dual of thisTvord, 



Ver. U— 16.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 75 

^HOV noon, the brightest part of the day ; see ^PET. °ih from its 
pellucid appearance. Although this word is only used in the sing, 
in this passage, and nowhere in the plural, and only in the dual 
signifying noon, there can be little doubt that the meaning above 
given is correct, and that there is no solid ground for rendering it 
tectum, with Ros., Michaelis^ and Schultens. Neither can there 
be any doubt that Gesenius is justified in giving it a collective 
meaning, and rendering it windows. The reader is referred to 
many similar instances of singular nouns used collectivelv which 
have already occurred, and been adverted to ; to say nothing of 
the necessitv of more windows than one for the admission of li^ht 
into a vessel of such size, of three stories, and with many apart- 
ments. 

676. PlJpDJ?' thou shcdt finish, contract it, comp, of pron. aff. fern. 
T\~ it, referring to the ark, and f epenth., and <"1?5 J ? 2 sing. masc. 
pies.jrih. of !"l7,3 parad. 13, was complete, finished', hi pik., com- 
pleted, finished. 

677. n?y,57^? comp. of •,!? prep, before sh'ua ti, and /, and TVTpfo 
ascent, from Tr?]} parad. 13, ascended. This combination is used 
adverbially, and rendered upwards. The whole passage may be 
thus translated : " Thou shalt make windows in the ark, and thou 
shalt finish it [the ark] upwards to a cubit," i. e. thou shalt slope 
the roof upwards till the sides come within the distance of a cubit 
from each other. The roof consequently was not to be brought 
exactly to a point, but nearly so — the ridge of the roof being a 
cubit wide. " Ad cubitum consummabis," Sam. Vers. •• In 
cubito consummabis earn," Onk. iirurvvdycov TroLrjcreis r?]V fa{3a>r6v, 
<• colligens (i. e. contrahens superne) facies arcam," LXX. The 
whole pa-s sage, however, is very imperfectly rendered in the LXX. 
According to the above view, directions are given in this verse, in 
regard to the windows, roof, and door ; but nothing is said as to 
the dimensions of any of these. 

678. T\r\%) and a door, comp. of ) before the labial *l and Hn§ 
subs. m. seg. (?') class, Xo. 460. 

679. H^JV3 *h t ne side of it, comp. of 5 and F\~ pron. aff. fern.; 
IV; hi full IHVj ground form of H¥ subs. m. the side. Gr. 72, and 
115, 116. 



76 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. vi. 16 

680. QHJWI 2 sing. pres. £«Z of D^ id. qu. ttife> se£, ^ce^, 
parad. 11. 

681. D*Wft, in full D?WTF) lowest places (floors), plur. of W0 
obs. lower, lowest. Root HPtf? under. 

682. D'Jfi^ contr. as in the former case, second places (floors), 
plur. of *0|^ second. 

683. D*g6# third places (floors or stories), plur. of *B^ ^trrf. 
684. — Yer. 17. X*3§ lit. causing to come, (I) <&> 5nV?#, part. m. 

hiph. of &03 to come; in 7m}?A. to cawse to com*?, parad. 10 and 12. 

685. ^DEPl £/*<? ^oo<f, comp. of -T\ art. and 7^ft subs. masc. 
Root yi\floxoed. 

686. VTW*) comp. of 7 prep, and inf. pih. of HW, obs. in /«:«/, 
parad. 3, destroyed. 

687. JW 5/^// <://<?, 3 sing. pres. £«/ of JQ3 parad. 4, expired. 
688. — Yer. 18. ^bpHI «>?</ / WZZ establish, comp. of 1 before 

the comp. sh'va ); and 1 sing. pret. hiph. of D^lp to stand, parad. 10; 
in hiph. to cause to stand, to establish. 

689. WIS my covenant, comp. of pron. afT. \ Gr. 99, and JV^tSl 
subs. fern, a cutting-, and from the ceremonies used, a covenant, 
from PHS cut. It is obvious from Gen.xv. 10, and Jer. xxxiv. 18, 

XT " < 

19, qu. vid., that sacrifices were offered at the formation of solemn 
covenants, and that the animals were divided, and that the cove- 
nanting parties passed between the divisions ; on which occasions 
they probably imprecated certain curses against themselves in the 
event of their failing to fulfil the stipulated conditions — perhaps 
that they might be cut asunder, like the carcases of the victims 
through which they passed; hence the expressions, JV b ")33 ^^ to 
enter into the covenant, and TV133 ^DJ? he passed into the covenant, 
Deut. xxix. 11 ; and "in haec foedera veni," Yirg. iEneid. iv. 339; 
and fVIS rfi13 to cu t a covenant, i. e. make, form ; hence the ex- 
pressions among the Greeks and Romans, op/cia re/jivecv — refivecv 
<nrovhas, and scindere, icere,ferire, per cuter e foedus ; which ex- 
pressions bear allusion to the striking of the victim, to its division, 
and to the oaths taken on the occasion. See Eustathius' note upon 
opiaa irtcTTa ra/iovres, Horn. Iliad, lib. v. ver. 124; "Blcl to/jltjs facov 
6vo/jL€vcov ql eVt {Meyd\oi,<z op/cot iylvovro- per sectionem animalium 
mactatorum juramenta de magnis rebus fiebant." See a learned 



Chap.vii.2.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 77 

note by Prof. Lee in his Lex. under this word, where a different 
view is taken. 

690. ^FlX with thee, in pause for ^[JlN, comp. of pron. aff. ^ and 
fIX; in full Hiltf, ground form of HX No. 4. 

691. HX^ of^c? ^o?/ shalt go, comp. of \ before the labial 1 and 
2 sing, m.pret. kal of N1H to enter, go ; and N*3£l ver. 19, Mow shalt 
cause to enter, 2 sing. m. pres. hiph. of the same. See No. 684. 

692. — Ver. 19. JVPiri/ to cause to live, to keep alive, comp. of / 
prep, and inf. hiph. of JTH lived, in hiph. caused to live, parad 2 
and 13. 

693.— Ver. 21. tl^ take thou, per syncopen for HpS Gr.39; 2 
sing. masc. imper. kal of FlD^, parad 5. 

694. 7pX* ?s eaten, solet comedi, Glass, p. 203, may he eaten, 3 
sing. m. pres. niph. of TOX, parad. 7; and /D^D subs, masc, what 
one eats, food. 

695. PlSDNtt and collect, gather, comp. of ) and 2 sing. m. pret. 
kal of *]DX collected, used here imperatively and coupled with Pip 
preceding. No. 693. See Storr, p. 163. 

696. — Ter.22. 7N£ commanded. 3 sing. pret.^zA of i"Vl¥ parad. 13. 
697. — Chap. vii. 1. fcO in full N1H enter, 2 sing. m. imp. kal of 
K13 to enter. 

698. *rjn*3 f/ ? y house, household, comp. of pron. affix ^J and JV3 
constr. of JV3- See No. 666. 

699. ^HX thee, comp. of pron. aff. *?[ and J1X another form of HX 
See No. 4." 

700. 1H3 contr. for TPlPllJ comp. of 3 and "H def. art. and 
*i\1 generation, See No. 643. 

701— Ver. 2. r^T\^T\ comp. of def. art. 'T\ andfem.of *\T\topure, 
clean, likewise in a moral sense ; the penult vowel of this word is 
moveable — the ult. immoveable; hence fern. PniPltp Gr. 59, 60, 
and 74; verb IHD was bright, resplendent, clean, pure. This distinc- 
tion of animals into clean and unclean must have had reference 
to sacrifice, and not to food, as animal food was not allowed at 
this period. See chap. ix. 3. 

702. Plj£l^ fiSpG? seven, seven, by sevens, the mode adopted 
in Hebrew as a substitution for distributive numbers. 



78 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.vii. 

703. Ift&^frO feS^X lit. man and his wife, i. e. a male and a 
female (of each), seven pairs. 

704. ")%) n^n^ri ]fa) lit. and of the beast which not clean it, 
etc., i. e. of unclean beasts. 

705. l^£^ two twos, tivo of each kind. 

706. — Ver. 3. JlVl!/ to preserve alive, comp. of 7 and inf. pih. of 
IT!! lived, with a causative meaning, as in hiph., No. 692. 

707. — Ver. 4. "131 D^J J/ lit. as respects days yet seven, i. e. 
«/ifcr seve^ c&m/s. See / used in a similar sense, 2 Sam. xiii. 23. 

708. ^Ptpfoft causing to rain, am about to cause to rain, part. 
hiph. m. of 1D£p parad. 4, rained. 

709. WH^I tmc? / im7/ utterly destroy, lit. w^e oz^, comp. of ^ 
for 1 and 1 sing. pret. Jcal of HTO wiped out, utterly destroyed, 
parad. 3 and 13. 

710. D^iTn comp. of Jl for 'Jl before sKva; and D'ljT stantia, sub- 
stantia, anything that stands, exists, lives ; avdarrnia, LXX. ; an 
abstr. noun founded upon the 3 sing. pres. ~kal of D*lp fo stand, 
parad. 10. 

711. — Ver. 5. ^rW commanded him, comp. of pron. aff. ^IH and 
3 sing. m.pret.^'A. of PlV£ parad. 13, with the radical dropped to 
make way for the pron. aff. 

712. — Ver. 6. And Noah (was) son of 600 years, and the flood 
was, tvaters upon the earth, Heb. idiom, "And Noah was 600 
years old when the flood of waters was upon the earth," i. e. at 
the time of the deluge. According to the Hebrew idiom, two 
events are pointed out and coupled by the conjunction ) which 
shews them to be contemporaneous. In such circumstances, to 
suit our idiom, the ) is rendered tohen. I shall direct attention to 
these idioms as they occur, that the student may become familiar . 
with them. 

713.— Ver. 8. TCpS ?\W$ Tgfoi (and of beast =beasts) ivhich 
?iot it clean, i. e. and of unclean beasts ; Jl^K comp. of JNS5 constr. 
form of pX not, No. 202, and f parag. and pron. aff. H~ ; PHPlED 
fern, of T1D clean, Gr. 74. See No. 701. 

714— Ver. 10. TO DW ng3#7 Wl lit. and it teas after the 
seventh of days, and the waters of the deluge were upon the earth, 



Ver. 2—16.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 79 

i. e. " on the expiry of the seven days (see ver. 4) the waters of 
the flood were upon the earth." See No. 712. 

715. — Ver ,,11. n^'^H/ as respects the life of Noah, i.e. of the 
life, comp. of 7 and constr. plur. of ^tl, ground form ^(1 life. 

716. &HPI5 contr. for ^HPin^ in the month, conrp. of 5 P re P-.> 
H def. art., and W~\T\ seg. (o) class, m. a month, prob ably a primitive. 

717. ^P5? were opened, 3 plur. pret. niph. of J?M cog. *"]p|l 
cleaned, burst, opened, parad. 4. 

718. nirj?g> constr. plur. of $?§, plur. &*)$& and likewise 
J"fl^$^ the ultimate vowel only is moveable, which is lost in the 
constr. plur., Gr. 62, 75. 

719. DiriJ? see No. 15. 

720. PD 1 ! fern, of ^1, ground form 551 great. 

721. ri3"1^ comp. of ) before com]), sh'va 5 and H^l^? subs. fern, 
anything cancellated or woven up, to guard the aperture so wrought; 
such were windows, compare verb icind, past wound, so called, 
perhaps, from twigs thus wound before the use of glass, from ^5^ 
multiplied, Prof. Lee's Lex. ; according to Ges., from ^*¥J plexuit. 

722. ^inrnip} in pause for ^HF!?? were opened-, 3 plur. pret. niph. 
of njHB opened, parad. 4. 

723. — Ver. 12. Dg^Pl comp. of def. art. -PI and Dg^5 subs. m. seg. 
{%) class, heavy rain. 

724. — Ver. 13. DVJJ3 comp. of 5 and DXJ?. subs. fern. seg. (a) 
class; 1. a bone; 2. body, hence DVH E¥J?.5 m the body of the dan, 
i. e. tn ^pso die. 

725. — Ver. 14. ^TiiSX subs, com.; 1. « young bird, so called from 
the chirping noise it makes (Scottice cheeper') verbum onomatop. ; 
2. a sparrow; 3. a bird of any kind ; verb 1£K fistula v it. 

726. 5U3 <? ?n';?y, a bird, per synecd., Storr. p. 8, lit. the clause 
may be rendered, totality of bird, totality of icing, i. e. all hinds of 
birds. 

727. — Ver. 16. D^SlO lit. and as for the goers in, i.e. those that 
entered, comp. of ) conj. and Pi def. art. and plur. of &S act. part. 
fad of &1S to enter, parad. 10 and 12. 

728. HJS T\T\\ nilp*l «rcd Jehovah closed (the door) a/fer Atm. 

729. 15p*l comp. of -1 and 3 sing m. pres. hal of 13D sAw£. 

730. Hg3 comp. of pron. aff. 1 and HJ)? or 1JJ5, originally a 



80 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 



Vlli 



subs, signifying vicinity, but its usage shews that it refers to vicinity 
behind, and hence it is used as a prep, after, immediately behind. 

731. — Ver. 17. ti'VI comp. of *1 and 3 plur. masc. pres. kal of 
JlJ"! parad. 13, multiplied, increased. 

731*. tttfe^J comp. of -1 and 3 plur. m. pres. &*Z of Kgtt parad 5 
and 12, with dagesh implied in W. 

732. D*HJ^)5 °^ *# rose, comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of 
Ufl fo 5e /^A, ft? rase orce's se//", Zo me, with accent on ult. D"HP1- 

732*.— Ver. 18. )*)$)*) comp. of •} and 3 plur. m. pres. kal of "DA 
prevailed, parad 4. and V"l35 3 plur. pret. kal of the same. 

733. **w$) comp. of •) and 3 sing. f. of ^7H went with the 
accent on the ult. *H7Fl see Gr. 30 (b). 

734. — Ver. 19. IXfo HXfc lit. vehemence, vehemence, or excess, 
excess-, one of the modes adopted in Hebrew for the formation of 
the superlative degree, see Introduction Part III., and No. 179. 

735. ^y) comp. of -), and 3 plur. pres. m. puh. of HD3 covered, 
parad. 13. 

735*. D^PlPl the mountains ; comp. of -PI def. art. before kameis 
H Gr. 127 (c), and plur. of 111 subs. m. a mountain, ground form 
TlPl, and D^n is used for D^PI Gr. 19, constr. plur. *Tl No. 754. 

736. D^H^n (the mountains) the high, i. e. the high mountains; 
comp. of def. art. -Pi and plur. of Pft| or PPDil with the ult. vowel 
immoveable, and pathakh furtive, pi. D^PDll Gr.74. 

736*. — Ver. 21. tpj?5 lit. in bird (birds), all flesh in birds, in 
beasts, etc., died; cuncta animalia quae ad aves, etc., pertinebant, 
Ges., all kinds of birds, etc.; contr. for tpJ?Pl5 Gr. 126 (f). 

737.— Ver. 22. V§^|— "l^N hb lit. totality of which the breath 
of the spirit of life in its nostrils, i. e. every creature in whose 
nostrils (is) the breath of life. 

737*. V£K!l see No. 211. 

738. TW)i constr. form of PlfiBb subs. fern, breath, verb E303 

- ; • tx : J - T 

breathed, Gr. 93, 94, 95. 

739. HJ'inil in the dry (land) ; Lat. in arido ; contr. for H^TPD^ 
comp. of 5 prep. Jl def. art. for Pi Gr. 127(c), andl26(/); and 
("Dill subs, fern., verb ^IH tews <7n/. 

739*. ^jHjg c&erf, 3 plur. pret, Zr/Z of T\)fo to die, pra?t. Hfo instead 
of fitt parad. 10. 



Chap.viii.4.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 81 

740. — Ver. 23. )1ft*3 lit. and was wiped off, utterly destroyed) 
comp. of •} and 3 sing. apoc. pres. niph. of HH^ parad. 3 and 13, 
in full Tim*, 3 pars, pi. ^P!^.. 

741. PlDn5"nj2 E*1fcjS& lit. /rom man to beast; i. e. both man and 
beast. 

742. 1XG?*3 and was left; comp. of •) and 3 sing. pres. niph. of 
INK* parad. 3 and 4. 

743. ^K ground form ^DX originally a noun, exclusion, restrict 
tion, hence used adverbially, only. 

744. — Chap. viii. 1. *13J*1 awe? remembered; comp. of -5 and 
3 sing. pres. Ag/ of ^DT remembered, parad. 4, with the vowels of 
parad. 1. 

745. 132!3 lit- and caused to pass over ; comp. of •) and 3 sing, 
m. apoc. pres. hiph. of 13JJ passed, passed over, crossed; written in 
full "fag* parad. 2 and 4. 

746. )5&] «>*<:/ abated, comp. of -J and 3 pi. m. pres. kal of ^3^ 
parad. 6; 1. stooped, lowered itself ; 2. abated. 

747. — Ver. 2. ^35*3 #w^ ^0er6 s/?«^ up, comp. of -3 and 3 plur. 
m. pres. niph. of 13? parad. 1, cogn. *"0D sA*^ wjo. 

748. N/3*3 and teas restrained, comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. pres. 
niph. of fc*r?3 restrained, confined, withheld, parad. 12. 

749. — Ver. 3. ^w*J «;?<:/ returned, comp. of -3 and 3 plur. pres. 
kal of 2^ parad. 10, with kibbuts vicarious, regular form ^fc^, 
inf. abs. 21 # see No. 750. 

750. UIG^J "Hi /H lit. *w <7°^# and returning, indicating gradual 
decrease. The idea is probably conceived from the appearance of 
the advancing and returning wave, see Introduction, Part III., on 
the subject of adverbs : *H1 711 inf. abs. kal of *1/P! parad. 2. 

751. ^pny comp. of -3 and 3 plur. m. pres. kal of IDPl, 3 sing, 
m. IDfT irreg. ; the ordinary form of the 3 pi. m. kal is ^llpIT 
parad. 2, wanted, failed, were diminished, continued to abate ; inf. 
kal abs. liDH ver. 5. 

T 

752. PJ5?ffl? comp. of 12 with dagesh implied, and constr. of HJfD 
Gr. 94, 96, extremity, end, subs. m. 

753. — Ver. 4. 113)13 comp. of -3 and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of 11*0 
parad. 4 and 10, to rest. 

6 



82 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.viii. 

754. ^jl /J£ wpem me mountains, i. e. (one) of the mountains. 
See No. 732. 

755. fcDTltf Ararat, a district of Armenia: Cardu, Onk. Arab. 
756. — Ver. 5. ^"lj appeared, ivere seen, with dagesh implied in 

resh, 3 plnr. pret. niph. of HKT sat#, parad. 2, 3, and 13. 

757. *g>KT| constr. plur. of EftO *Ae Aeatf, plur. abs. D^SO, 
contr. D^iO, constr. ^*0, see No. 712. 

T 7 " T 7 

758. — Ver.6. I"IJ?&3 and opened, that opened, comp. of •) and 
S sing. m. pres. hat of HH^ parad. 4. See No. 240. 

759. jl^n subs. m. em aperture (of a building), <z tvindoio, 
from /?n pierced, etc., see No. 556. This word merely conveys 
the idea of a Ao/e or opening; lllR that of the admission of 
light, see No. 675. The absence of the def. art. confirms what 
was said as to the rendering of "TTC collectively, as windows. 

760. nbjj had made. 

761. — Ver. 7. Hp^l comp. of •), before god with sh'va ), but 
with dagesh implied in god, and 3 sing. pres. pih. of TwW parad. 4, 
serc£, sent forth; 3 sing. m. pres. hat T\?W\ ver. 9. 

762. ^nyprn^ the raven, the male raven, there being only one 
pair in the ark; comp. of «Pl before the guttural Jl Or. 19, and 
i"1J? subs. m. « raven, probably an onomatop. formed from the 
raven's cry horbh; Lat. cor^-us; French corb-e&a; Scot, corb-ie. 

763. y\W) KW ^?f!3 a ^ ^ e wera£ out going out and returning, 
i.e. and he went out and returned from time to time; N3?!3 comp. of 
-) and 3 sing. pres. kal of ^^ parad. 8 and 12; and N!¥j inf. Jcal 
abs. of the same, used as the Lat. gerund. 

764. T\V?*2\ HJ£ lit. until the being dried up of; inf. constr. kal 
of feJ^J* wa5 ^Tj parad. 8 ; the inf. here construed as a noun, Lat. 
exsiccatio. 

765. — Yer. 8. PO'PiVfiNI the dove, the presence of the article 
cannot be accounted for here upon the same grounds as in No. 762 ; 
comp. of "H and PI3V subs. fern, a dove, a pigeon, generally under- 
stood to be derived from MJJ oppressed, and the bird is supposed 
to be so called from its cooing as a cry of oppression, see Prof. 
Lee's Lex. From the resemblance of the cry of the dove to that 
of one in distress, voice of doves is used in scripture as synonymous 
with voice of mourning. 



Ver. 4—12.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 83 

766. Htf ]7 to see, ad videndum, comp. of prep. / and inf. constr. 
kal of PIK1 parad. 13. 

767. )vDTl an leviores factae essent, sc. aquae; comp. of H inter, 
particle, and 3 plur. pret, kal of ?7J2 parad. 6, was light, abated. 

768— Ver. 9. PlK?ft 3 sing, fern/ pret, AoZ of N¥ft /ottrc^ 
parad. 12. 

769. ni3fo a j^/ace o/" rest, rest ; subs. m. from H^ fo res£. 

770. &p/ comp. of 7 prep, and $0, ground form tp&p. lat. ca£-um, 
hollow part, (of the hand) palm, (of the foot) sofe. 

771. Pr?in Z^er foot, comp. of pron. affix PI — and /}*) ground 
form of 7^n seg. (a) class, the foot, subs. fern. 

772. ^^Tfi comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. -pies, kal of ^W to return, 
parad. 10 ; Avith the accent on the last syllable ^H^H or ^ll&^Pl see 
Gr. 30 (by 

773. T\\ his hand, comp. of *T subs. f. the hand, and pron. aff. 1. 

774. Jinj5*5 an( l took her, comp. of •) and pron. aff. Pl~ and 3 sing. 
m. pres. kal of Plp7 parad 5 and 4. The pathakh of the parad. is 
lengthened into kamets to make way for the annexation of the affix, 
Gr. 66 and 67. 

775. — Ver. 10. vPH and he united, comp. of •) and 7PP short- 
ened from /!T Gr. 30 (b) ; apoc. form of aH* 3 m. pres. kal of 
7IPI or ^Pl parad. 11, id. qu. 7PP waited. Prof. Lee's Gr. Art. 
202, 3, 4., 

776. lljp&y t]D*i a?zc? /*<? added to send forth, he sent forth again, 
see No. 433, comp. of -J and P|D*, in full *]p&^, and with the accent 
on the ult. &)DX* see No. 443, 3 sing. pres. kal of P|DX parad. 7, 
added. 

777. H W infin. ^A. of PlS# parad. 4. 
778— Ver. 11. rbyieafof. No. 345. 

779. PPT subs. m. constr. H\T £Ae o/u*e tree. 

780. tntp m. lit. thing taken forcibly; applied to a leaf, plucked; 
verb tpD tore. 

781. JTfi3 «72 Aer mouth, comp. of 3 prep. ; pron. aff. Pi; and *§ 
constr. of PIS ^e mouth. 

782. — Ver. 12. /Pl**l #wg? waited, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. m. pres. 
niph. of 7PT not used in kal ; in pih. /PP icaited, and with the same 
meaning in niph., of the form of parad. 8; but this and other 



84 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 



Vlll. 



tenses of this verb are declined like the regular paradigm, with 
the exception of the peculiarities of parad. 3. 

783. H|p^ lit. added, 3 sing. fern. pret. hal of S)D* parad. 8, id. 
qu. £]Dft added. 

784.— Ver. 13. ])$#*)% contr. for p#KTqi comp. of 5 prep., art. 
II pointed with hamets before resh, and pEW*} m.jirst; £2Hn 
month is here understood ; root &^&1 the head. 

785. *)p^ and removed, comp. of -\ and 3 sing. masc. pres. hiph. 
apoc. of 1*0 parad. 10. The regular form of the pres. is TD* 
apoc. ID*, when the accent is on the penult. ^lD* in preference to 
*")P^ owing to the *"l, which generally takes pathahh rather than 
segol ; in Jcal, went aside ; in hiph. caused to go aside, removed. 

786. npp£? constr. of HDpft Gr. 96, subs. m. that which covers, a 
covering ; root HD3 covered. 

787. )Tyn 3 plur. pret. hal of ^Ifl and yijl was dry, parad. 
2 and 3. 

788.— Ver. 14. Hgty 3 sing. fern, pret, hal of Bbj was dry, 
parad. 8. 

789. — Ver. 16. K¥ go out, per sync, for tt)j>\ 2 sing. masc. imp. hal 
of N£ parad. 8 and 12. Gr. 39. 

790. — Ver. 17. XVIH ordinary form XVIPI & sing. m. imp. hiph. 
of N¥J w?m£ ow£, parad. 8 ; in ^jtf/j. caused to go out. According to 
the **lp a marginal reading, the form is &WP1 2 sing. m. imp. AejpA. 
o/Xr! See parad. 9. 

791. )T)\ )1p) W*0) comp. of 1 cop. conj. and 3 plur. pret. hal 
of H^^ V$, r *^ respectively, used imperatively, or potentially, 
and let them breed abundantly, etc., or that they may breed abun- 
dantly, etc. 

792. — Ver. 19. Dr^nPlSfePJb/ lit. according to their families, i. e. 
after their hinds, Eng. Trans. ; comp. of / prep., pron. aff. DiV" 
and JinS^D constr. plur. of T\T\^12 subs. fern, a family ; the root 
uncertain. 

793. — Ver. 20. FlSJft subs. m. an altar, i. e. the place upon, or 
at which one sacrifices, from FQ| slew, sacrificed. The Latin 
word altare is derived from alius high, either because built on 
high places, or because artificially raised. See No. 794. 

794. ri/J? 7}M and offered burnt offerings, 7^*1 comp. of -) and 



Ver. 12— 22.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 85 

3 sing. m. apoc* pres. hiph. of ("HJJ ascended ; in hiph. caused to 
ascend; written in full ?V?W parad. 13 ; in this verb the forms of the 
pres. kal. and hiph. are the same. Tw^ pi. of Tw}} in full Twty sub. 
fern, a burnt offering, from i"l7j? preceding ; so called, probably, 
from its being raised upon the altar, and from its smoke ascending 
as " a sweet smelling savour " to God. 

795. — Ver. 21. FH* 1 ) and smelled, comp. of \ and 3 sing. m. pres. 
hiph. of PHI not used in kal, in hiph. H^H and pres. rP'T apoc. 
ITT parad. 8 and 4, smelled. 

796. IT") subs. masc. sme//. See No. 795. 

797. niTjn comp. of 'il def. art. and HITO subs. m. acquiescence, 
approbation, satisfaction, from Jl^ quiescere, with which Latin 
word compare acquiescence. 

798. 13/7X (lirp IfoK*} lit. and Jehovah said to his heart, i. e. 
determined with himself. 

799. &]DK in full f^Dltf 1 sing. pres. hiph. of f|D^ added, parad. 8 ; 
the hiph.il having here the same meaning with hat, id. qu. S]DK 

800. 7?p/ comp. of / prep, and inf. />?'/? of 7/D w<r/s /^/?i ; in 
pih, spoke lightly, contemptuously of one, cursed, parad. 6. 

801. V*\y%fofrom his youth, comp. of -12 from, and pron. aff. V~ 
and D^J^J pi. subs. masc. youth, with the termination removed to 
make way for the pron. aff. Gr. 49 ; root ^JJ J a boy, a youth. 

802. ^5 cdtho*. The meaning of the passage is : " Notwith- 
standing I see man's heart as wicked as before the flood." Glass. 529. 

803. ni^n? comp. of 7 prep, and inf. hiph. of PD^ parad. 5 and 
13 ; not used in kal. ; in hiph. struck violently, smote. 

804. Tl^J? 1^^5 «s I have done, comp. of 3 before comp. sh y va 
3, and IBta- T 

805. Ver. 22. HJ? in full ""fij? subs, repetition, continuance ; lit. 
the clause may be rendered : " continuance of all the days of the 
earth," i. e. while the earth endures; as an adv. again, still, etc. 

806. JHT subs. m. 1. seed ; 2. seed-time. 

807. T¥P subs. masc. 1. cutting ; 2. time of cutting, or harvest; 
root 1¥p cogn. T*^D cut. 

808. 1p) comp. of \ and ID subs. masc. cold, only found in this 
passage. 

809. DPH and heat, \ conj. before tonic accent ), and subs. masc. 



86 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, viii.22. 

DPI, ground form Qftll, verb DfcJl was hot. From this root is 
derived the Turkish word Hummums — Hot Baths, the names of 
hotels in Covent Garden. 

810. Y]p\ and summer, comp. of 1 and subs. m. Y\\), in constr. 
Y*pj ground form ¥?P Gr. 50 (3), probably a prim. 

811. ^pnj and autumn, comp. of \ before the tone syllable, ); 
and fcpFl subs. m. autumn. 

812. ^rfa^ *A«# cease, in pause for ^3^. Gr. 31, 3 pers. plur. 
m. pres. &#/ of H?^ rested, ceased. 

813. — Chap. ix. 2. DJNni^ comp. of *! and pron. aff. D3 and 
iOto subs. masc. £Aa£ which inspires fear, fear ; root XI* or XI* 
feared. Penult, vowel immoveable, Gr. 56. 75. 

814. DJprn comp. of \ and pron. aff. bj and J1PI, ground form 
fijlll of T\T\ subs. m. terror-, verb HttPl Gr. 115. 

815. Wtilft creepeth, 2 sing. fern. pres. hot of fe^ 

816. VH constr. plur. of $1 a fish. 

817. D3*1*J3 info your hand, comp. of ? prep, and grave aff. XJ2 
and "V, another form of T, constr. of 1* subs. fern, the hand. 

818. WW in pause for ttJ-0 Gr. 31. 3 plur. pret. niph. of JH3 
parad. 5, gave. 

819.— Ver. 3. ^iTX^n 1#X lit. as to which, it life, i. e. which 
hath life. 

820. Dj? p1!J3- In this verse permission is granted to man- 
kind to eat animal food, which, it is as evident as words can make 
it, was not previously allowed. 

821.— Yer. 4. &5tfri— ig>| ^X hut flesh with the life thereof, 
(which is) the blood thereof, shall ye not eat. This is the founda- 
tion of the Mosaic law prohibitory of the eating of blood, Levit. 
xvii. 14; Deut. xii. 23. V2H is here exegetical of 1^?3, see in the 
passage from Deut. above cited, fe^53!l X^lPl 0*111 as for the blood, 
it (is) the life (and thou shalt not eat the life with the flesh). 
This prohibition is established upon the general principle ap- 
plicable to the condition of mankind since the fall, that without 
the shedding of blood there can be no remission of sin. It was 
hence necessary to attach a sacred character to blood, which, as it 
is expressed in Levit. xvii. 11, was given to the people upon the 
altar to make atonement for the soul. This prohibition was like- 



Chap. ix. 10.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 87 

wise designed to giye both Jew and Gentile a sacred reverence for 
the precious blood of Christ which cleanseth from all sin. 

822 — Ver.5. PTIK — DSbTHN ^*0 lit. and I surely ivill 
avenge your blood as respects your lives, i. e. I will avenge your 
blood shed to the occasioning of the loss of life ; or, I will avenge 
the death of every one slain by a murderer's hand. 

823. DDOT comp. of DJ grave pron. aff. and D*l, ordinary form 
D*7, constr. of Q*l blood. 

824. D37J$p?? comp. of h prep. pron. aff. D^— and W$3, in 
full T))W5)} const, plur. of $53, ground form $53 seg. (a) class, 
life ; plur. abs. HI $33 Gr. 106, et seq. 

825. EH*7X 1 sing. pres. kal of KH*J parad. 3. 1 . trod, went over in 
search of something, cogn. Tl^; 2. enquired, searched after; 
S. exacted, avenged. BfSl KH/l the exactor, avenger of blood, the G'bel. 

826. to$TIK njTI"S3 lit? lit. from (or of) the hand of every least 
will I exact it, i.e. from (or of) every beast, etc. ^KH^X comp. 
of pron. aff. and J epenth, and £*T1X see No. 825. 

827. VPIX $*X Tft «* ^ ^^ °f ever V man's brother, i.e. 
according to Rosen, "cujusque sanguinem de eo qui ilium inter- 
fecerit repetam." VfiK £^X valere, unum alterum, salis notum. 

828.— Ver. 6. ^\W\ ^5$ as for him that sheddeth man's 

blood, by man, etc. *s|§fe? part. act. kal m., and ^t)&\ 3 sing. masc. 
pres. niph. of *^5^ parad. 1, poured out, shed. 

829 — Ver. 9. Ul ^JH ^^l aw<^ as ybr we, behold I establishing 
(establish). 

830. DV?5? part. AipA. masc. of U)p parad. 10, to stand; in hiph. 
to cause to stand, to establish. 

831. DJ^nX after you, comp. of pron. affix and constr. plur. of 
im No. 568.' 

832. D3S1! your seed, posterity, comp. of pron. aff. dp and $HT, 
ground form of JHT seed. 

833.— Ver. 10. *#¥*, in full **W lit. goers out of, constr. plur. 
masc. of the act. part, kal of X^ parad. 12 and 8. Penult, vowel 
immoveable, Gr. No. 59. 

834. JVp? 3 sing. pres. niph. of JT13 cut off, destroyed, parad. 3. 

835. ^0 comp. of •$ from, by, here implying instrumentality, 
% means of; *£} constr. of D^D No. 20. 



88 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 



IX. 



836.— Ver. 12. }£D a giver \ giving, give, make, part. act. masc 
hal of jrO parad. 5, gave. 

837. D3\J*3ft comp. of ^1 cop. conj. and pron. affix,, and constr, 
plur. of j^3, constr. sing. ^5 between, see No. 32* 

838, — Ver. 13. V^p my bow, comp. of pron. affix \ and ft^P, 
ground form of H^P subs, seg* («) class, f, a bow, a rainbow. 

839. *£\r0 1 sing. pret, hal of jfO parad. 5, #a#e, jt>w£, set* 

840. pjj| m *Ae cloud, 3 = D5 Gr. 1^6 (/), 117 (c), and JJjj m. 
841, — Ver. 14. }3J£ ^3HJ?3 on my clouding a cloud, i.e. on my 

bringing over a cloud ; iv t&> <rwv€<f>eiv fjue vecfrekas, LXX. ; comp* 
of 3 prep, and *J32 for *1JSL being the pron. aff. * and inf.. pih. of 
J3^ not used in hal. 

842. PlTlNtTJl few sAa/f/ appear, comp. of 1. and 3 sing. fern, pret, 
mjt?A. of T\W\ saw, parad. 2, 3, 13. 

843. — Ver. 15. WtDJ.1 then I shall remember, comp. of \ and 
1 sing, pret. hal of ^DT parad. 4, remembered. 

844. /)%n? D^n lit. the waters for a deluge, the same as 
bogn ^in 'ver. 11. 

845 — Ver, 16. PJ^P^TS comp. of ^ cop. conj., pron. aff. H it, 
and WfcS 1 !, and with the accent removed to the affix W&O, 1 sing 
pret. hal of HfcSI saw; and 3 plur, *|fcO ver. 23. 

846. ^H ybr the remembrance of > to call to mind; comp. of 7 
before sh'va 7 Gr. 126 (by, and constr. inf. hal of *ClT remembered.. 

847. b^H 7$ p3 between God,, according to our idiom betweenme. 
See Introduction, Part III., on the subject of pronouns. 

848. — Ver. 17. ^TlCpQl I have established, I establish, 1 sing, 
pret. hiph. of D*lp £o stand, parad. 10. 

849.— Ver, 18, ^K constr. of IX father, see No. 305. 

850. — Ver. 19. D*N¥*n lit. the goers out, who went out; comp, of 
•H and mas, plur. part. act. hal of N^ went out, parad. 8 and 12. 

850*. P!¥$3 3 sing. fern. pret. &«/ of fS} 1. flro&?; 2. dispersed; 
3. was dispersed: cogn. "piS which signifies to scatter as seed sown, 
hence most of the ancient versions render this word disseminata 
est. 

851.— Ver. 20. tTft — H3 Sn*3 lit. <md iVbaA %<m to be a hus- 
bandman, and planted a vineyard-. Noachus quum esset agricola 
vineas plantavit, Bos 



Ver. 12.— 24.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 89 

852. 7njl comp. of •) and 3 sing. apoc. pres. hiph. of /Oil 
parad. 5, see No. 556. 

853. J?E)*J comp. of -1 and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of J^D^ parad. 5 
and 4, planted. 

854. D^J in pause for D*1j Gr. 31 (3), subs. m. seg. (a) class, a 
vineyard. 

855. — Ver. 21. fi&^l comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. kal 
of TUlW cfronAj parad. 13, in full H$&\ Gr. 37 and 115. 

856. p*n £/ze wine; comp. of -H and [^ in constr. J\* subs. m. 
Gr. olVo?; Lat. vinum; Eng. Wwe and #me. 

867. 15^*1 in pause for H3fe?*J comp. of ■) and 3 sing. m. pres. 
kal of 1?^ parad. 4, drank an intoxicating drink, became intoxi- 
cated. 

868. /2in*l comp. -) and 3 sing. apoc. pres. hith. of )""H| made 
bare, uncovered, revealed, parad. 13. 

869. i"OnX (o-h°loh), his tent; comp. of pron. aff. H — instead of 
1 and /HN subs. seg. (o) class, a tent, Gr. 110. 

870. — Ver. 22. Hl^ nakedness of; constr. of HJ'IJ?. subs, fern., 
root n*"lj? naked. 

871. 12^5 #W fo/^7, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. m. pres. apoc. hiph. 
of 13} see No. 359. 

872. — Ver. 23. TOfoWll the garment, probably the hijke, used by 
trie Orientals to protect them from the inclemency of the weather 
by day, and to cover them when asleep, and resembling a Scottish 
shepherd's plaid; comp. of -H and TwfoV? subs. fern. 

873. D5£^ shoulder of, shoulders, subs. m. seg. (i) class, ground 
form p^^ the shoulder. 

874. DPP3&P lit. them two, comp. of pron. afr*. m. DH~ and constr. 

of D!2t?£M0/Gr.49. 

875. n^THX backwards, from 1HX offer. 

876. ^5^1 aW covered, comp. of -1 and 3 pi. m. pres. pih. of 
HD2 covered, parad. 13. 

877. — Ver. 24. Yp") and awoke, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. m. pres. 
kal of ypl awoke, parad. 8, form of G^T which latter however takes 
pathakh in the ult. syll. instead of tsere, which in the case of Y\?\ 
is changed into segol on account of the removal of the accent to the 
penult,, Gr. 30 (b). 



90 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. ix. 24, 

878. W^fofrom his wine, comp. of •£? and pron. aff. 1, and P* 
see No. 856. 

879. J3W? i n pause for J5223 P r - name. 

880. — Ver. 25. D^^S *"*51?. servant of servants, a slave of slaves , 
a most abject slave, see Introduction, Part III., on the subject of 
the comparison of nouns. 

881. *T3J?. subs. m. seg. of the (a) class, ground form of the sing. 
"132 and of the plnr. 11V Gr. 105, 106, 109. 

882. — Yer.26. ^ffll^ blessed, pass. part. m. kal of ^HS- 
883. lo? to him, or collectively to them, poetic form of !/• 
884. — Ver. 27. H§.v D*Pl /fc$ F\& Deus amplum spatium concedat 
Japeto, in quibus verbis notandus verborum lusus. Ges. Lex. ; F\&1 
S sing. m. pres. apoc. hiph. of HHS parad. 13, full form T\t\%\ 
Gr. 37, 1. opened, and intrans., 2. was open, and figuratively im- 
plying openness, simplicity, silliness, 3. was simple, silly : as a 
proof of the first meaning, Ges. quotes as kindred words tlT}^ and 
yn5 and compares the Sanscv.pad, pandere; Gr.7T6raw, ireTavvvfja', 
and Lat. pateo; and cites Prov. xx. 19, VH^fc^ PlHiS labia pandens, 
de homine garrulo, cujus labia semper patent, see Ges. Lex. under 
nn§- In a note on Job xxxi. 26, Prof. Lee says, he thinks this 
word has been entirely misunderstood. " It has been usually 
translated dilatet, etc., a sense quite foreign to this verb. It ought 
to be, Let God, or God doth, pronounce Japheth deluded, deceived, 
i. e. idolatrous. Then follows X2P* 1 } and He, i. e. God, shall reside 
in the tents of Shem. The prediction therefore goes to affirm, 
that Shem only shall retain the true religion." See on Job. 

885. pJ&^l. comp. of \ and 3 sing. pres. kal of p$ dwelt, 
parad. 1. 

886. vH^3 i n the tents of, comp. of 3 and constr. plur. of ;T)& 
see No. 859^ ' 

Chap. x. This chapter is entitled by Rosenmuller " The gene- 
alogy of the sons of Noah, and the division of the earth among his 
posterity." According to the same learned author, the names 
here mentioned are not all the names of men, but of nations, cities, 
and countries, which appears from many of them being in the 
plural number, see particularly verses 13 and 14. It is likewise, 
he observes, to be noticed, that all the nations are not mentioned, 



Chap.x. 1—3.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 91 

which then inhabited the earth, but those only who were imme- 
diately connected with the Israelites, and known to them, to the 
Egyptians, and Phenicians, as the Joktan Arabs, the colonies of 
the Egyptians and Phenicians, and the maritime regions of Europe 
which had been explored by the Phenicians in their naval expe- 
ditions. The greater part of what is contained in the following 
chapter rests upon the authority of Ros. and Ges. 

88T. — Ver. 2. ^$3 Gomer, from whom descended the Cimmer- 
ians, Gr. KtfjL/jbepiot, who dwelt between the mouths of the Danube 
and Tanais, and in the Tauric Chersonesus. Erom them the 
Cimmerian Bosphorus took its name. 

888. y\M!2 Magog, from whom sprang the people comprehended 
under the general name of Scythians. Mayooyr)<; tovs air avrov 
Maycoyas ovofiaadevTas coiaae, %kv6cls Be vir avro)v (tcov 'EXXrjvcov) 
TTpoaayopevofievov^. Joseph. Antiqq. i. 6. 

889. *H& from whence the Mecles. 

— T 

890. [V contr. [V Gr.*Ia>v, pi. "leave?, inhabitants of Ionia, one of 
the general names for Greeks. 

891. /^T\ the Tibareni, / and *1 being frequently interchanged, 
a people dwelling on the shores of the Euxine Sea, adjoining the 
Moschi. GcoftrjXos Q&jBrfkovs eWtcre, OiVtve? ev tols vvv, 'Ifiijpes 
fcakovvTcu. Joseph. 

892. ^u'ft Moschi, a barbarous people inhabiting a territory 
between Iberia, Armenia, and Colchis. Moao^qvol viro Mocroyov 
KTLaOivres, KairirahoKOL yitev aprc fce/<:\r)VTcu Jos. Antiqq. I. vi. 1. 
e H B' ovv Moo"%iK7] rpifiepy]^ iarc to puev yap eyovaiv avTrj<; KoXyoc, 
to Be Iffr/pes, to Be Apfiivioi. Strabo, lib. xi. 

893. D*Tn Gpa%. @ecpas Be Oeipas eKaXeaev, cov r/p^ev "EXXrjves 
Be Qpcucas avTovs fieTcovofiaaav. Joseph. Antiqq. 

894.— Ver. 3. ?33^K according to Bockhart, lib. iii. chap. 9, 
Phrygia Minor and Bithynia ; because in these regions were the 
Ascanian Gulf, the Ascanian Lake, the city and country of As- 
cania, and the islands of Ascania. The Black Sea is sometimes 
called ©dXaaaa A^eLvr], which latter word is supposed to be a 
corruption of Ashkenaz. 

895. nS'H supposed to be the inhabitants of the Riphean 
Mountains. 



92 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.x. 

896. n^ljn a people who traded with the Tyrians in horses 
and mules, Ezech. xxvii. 14, supposed to inhabit Armenia, which 
Strabo says is e l7r7r6/3aTo<$ a<j)68pa. In the history and traditions 
of the Armenians, they are said to be descended from Togarmah. 
Togarmah is mentioned in connection with Gomer, Meshech, and 
Tubal in this chapter, and in Ezek. xxxviii. 6, and xxvii. 13, 14. 

897.— Ver. 4. ftW'>% in the Samaritan copy &h$ "EX*?, the 
Peloponnesus of Greece. It is mentioned among the isles or 
maritime countries with which the Tyrians traded. Ezek. xxvii. 7. 

898. &^&JHFl supposed to be Tartessus in Spain. 

899. D*fl3 according to Michaelis/ Macedonia. In Maccabees, 
Alexander is said to have come i/c rrj<; 7% Xerrleifi. 

900. D*0T7 written also D*3"T1 supposed to be inhabitants either 
of Dodona, a city of Epirus, or of the island of Rhodes. 

901.— Ver. 5. Fwftfofrom these, comp. of •£? before the guttural 
£? and n?& these. 

902. ^1135 were separated or descended, comp. Gen. xxv. 23, 
fe Two nations (^I^.^J shall be separated from thy womb," i. e. 
shall be descended from thee ; 3 pi. pret. niph. of 1*\S parad. 3. 

903. **fc$ constr. of D**K plur. of *K ground form \\# 1. habitable 
land or country, whether a continent or island, as opposed to sea 
or river ; 2. the shore, or cowitries on the sea shore. 

904. D?12in article -Jl and plur. of ^IH subs, m., a nation generally, 
especially a foreign nation, as opposed to Israel, in the same 
manner as [3apftapot> is opposed to "EXXrjves. 

905. DfTCntf? comp. of 3, pron. aff. D~ and fi^tf constr. plur. 
of p» No. 7. 

906. 1^/7 fc^tf lit. man according to his tongue, i. e. according 
to their respective languages ; comp. of 7 before sh'va 7 pron. aff. 1 
and XWh contr. jfc/J, and with the accent removed to the pron. 
affix *0/ Gr. 74. This verse is thus translated in the first edition 
of Rosen. : " Ab his originem habent regionum exterarum incolae, 
lingua, genere, et natione diversi." 

Yer. 6. From ver. 6 to 20, Ham's posterity is recorded. 

907. 85^13 Ethiopia. From Gen. ii. 14 (see No. 254) it appears 
that there was an eastern as well as a southern Gush. It appears, 
further, from Jerem. xiii. 23, that this word is sometimes used in 



Ver.3— 8.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 93 

an extended sense to denote the country of all who have black 
skins. 

908. D^IVO universally understood to be Egypt. 

909. JO^lD from whence the Pliataei, supposed to be Libyans, 
who dwelt near Carthage. "E/cTtcre he /ecu $ovt7]s ttjv Aiftv-qv, 
<&ovtov<; air avrov KaXeaas tou? i<y%a>pLovs. Joseph. Antiqq. 

910. JJ2J3 from whom the Canaanites , in pause for [VIS. 

911. — Ver. 7. SOP Sabaei, who appear to have inhabited Meroe, 
an island in the Nile. £a/3a, ttoXls (3a<ri\eio<; 7% AiQiwirias yv 
varepov Ka/x/3v(Tr)<; Meporjv fxerwvofiaorev. Joseph. Antiqq. 

911*. 1*1*7 from whom Dedan, a city on the Persian Gulf, took 
its name, which is so called in D'Anville's Geography. 

912. !"l aIPI- There seems to have been two nations of this name, 
the one here spoken of, and the other descended from Joktan, 
ver. 29. The Havilah here mentioned is supposed to be that in 
Arabia Felix, called Chaulan. 

913. HMD from whom Sabotha, or Sabatha, took its name, a 
city of Arabia Felix, spoken of by Pliny as devoted to the worship 
of the sun. 

914. HfcJH R/iegma, a city of Arabia on the Persian Gulf. 

915. fcOrflp a region of Ethiopia; Targ. *X3JT Zingitani, in the 
eastern territory of Ethiopia. Ges. Lex. 

916. fcO^ from whom the people, Sabei, and the country 
Sabea, situated in Arabia Felix; abounding in frankincense, aro- 
matics, gold, and jewels. Ges. 

917.— Yer. 8. TT&J Nimrod, lit. relet, from lift rebelled. This 
is evidently the name of an individual and not of a people, and is 
noticed here by way of distinction. This circumstance renders it 
probable that the persons before named, are not persons in the 
strict sense of the word, but nations descended from Cush. It 
has been conjectured, with great probability, that many of the 
patriarchal names found in scripture, were surnames given either 
during life or after death, on account of something remarkable 
in their history or character ; and from hence, many discrepancies 
have arisen, in consequence of the confusion between the name 
and surname. Nimrod is supposed to have received his surname 
from his having been an instigator of the building of Babel, and 



94 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.x. 

from his having been one of the earliest idolators after the flood. 
Josephus says, Antiqq. lib. i. cap. 4 § 2, 'Egrjpev clvtovs irpos ttjv 
vftpiv rod &€ou fcal KaracppovrjaLV Ne{3pa)$r)<; " Nimrod stirred them 
up to insult and despise God." 

918. 1*^5 — 'DPI K1H he began to be mighty in the earth.. 
According to Michaelis, "hie coepit esse tyrannus in terra/' i.e. 
hie primus per vim tyrannide potitus est, humanoque generi liber- 
tatem eripuit. This is the view taken of the passage by Josephus. 

919. /HH 3 sing. pret. kal of /7H parad. 6, see No. 556. 

920. nVH7 comp. of 7 prep, before sh'va 7 and inf. constr. kal 
of ITn was, parad. 13. The H in the first rad. of this word com- 
monly takes simple sh'va, contrary to the general rule. The same 
is the case with IV H lived. 

T T 

921. ISi or *TD3 m. mighty, brave, intrepid, applied to warriors, 
etc.; pote?zs,Vulg. ; ylyas, LXX. ; ^j?J3 13^ O 11 ^.; fffyas terribilis, 
Arab. ; gig as bellator, Syr. 

922. — Ver. 9. PlJJT — (TH &OPI is fuit potens venationis ad con- 
spectum domini, i. e. potens venator. It is supposed that Nimrod, 
under pretence of hunting, collected bands of men whom he ren- 
dered instrumental to his ambitious designs of conquest. The pagan 
heroes of antiquity are described as commencing their career as 
hunters, and as acquiring fame by the destruction of those savage 
beasts which were a terror to mankind. Such heroes were Her- 
cules, Theseus, Castor, Pollux, Diomed, etc. They are called 
fiaOrjral fcvvrffeaicov, discipuli venationum. 

Various conjectures have been formed as to what is understood 
by the expression iTiPP s ).2? m Perizonius, as cited by Posenm., 
shews by quotations from Gen. xiii. 9 ; Ps. lvi. 14 ; and Ps. lxxii. 
17, that this expression is intended to give an intensive sense to 
objects spoken of, particularly in regard to what is done publicly, 
fortunately, confidently, securely, or the like. Wherefore, when 
Nimrod is said to be a mighty hunter before the Lord, it is im- 
plied that none on earth could be compared to him. 

923. *V¥ subs. m. venatio, hunting ; and T^""^ potens venationis, 
i. e. a mighty hunter, perhaps warrior. It is probable that Nimrod 
made encroachments upon the territories assigned to the posterity 
of Shem. 



Ver.8— 12.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 95 

924. *1??N£ 1 3 /J£ icher ef ore it is said, a usual form of announcing 
proverbial savings, see Gen. xxii. 14, where 1M?i$ is used instead 
of |3"^J?j ^ft^., ordinary form T&X* 3 sing. pres. ntjpA. of 7ftX, 
parad. T. 

925. — Ver. 10. *?W3 comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. apoc. pres. hal 
of rm, fuU form HV1PI parad. 13. See No. 23. 

926. rWX*"). beginning, see Xo. 1. 

92T. inp/pD comp. of pron. aff. 1 and PCDfofo, ground form of 
TO /l2fo, used as the constr. form of TODfofo subs, fern., what one 
rules over, a kingdom, from T?'p; root ,^[75 a ^*W 

928. /35 Babel, lit. confusion, for 73/3; root /?S confounded. 

929. *?nX Erech, lit. length, supposed by Bockhart to be Arecca, 
or Areca, a city situated on the confines of Babylonia and Susiana. 

930. *73X Accad, *Apxa$, LXX. It hence appears that the 
dagesli forte on this word compensates for the absence of \ 

931. PQ/3 Calneli, supposed to have given name to the district 
of Chalonitis, whose capital was afterwards Ctesiphon, on the Tigris. 

932. ^tyyp Shinar, universally acknowledged to be the country 
around Babylon, the extent and limits of which are unknown. 
Josephus speaks of the plain of ^evaap, in the territory of Babylon; 
and in the same quarter Pliny, Eutropius, Ptolemy, Ammianus, 
and others make mention of a city called Singara. 

933. — Ver. 11. I^N Asshur, from this word Assyria takes its 
name. 

934. ITJ)»3 Nineveh. 

935. y$ Him. Rehoboth Ir. Glassius says that T$? is here 
introduced to shew that PQPn which signifies platea, ampla spatia, 
is not here an appellative, but the name of a city. The word TJ? 
is supposed by others to distinguish this place from 7Pl|P! PQPH 
Rehoboth (by) the river. The situation of this place is uncertain. 

936. T\/2 Chalali, in pause for Pi y3, i. e. perfection ; a city of 
Assyria, supposed to be the same as that which is elsewhere called 
PI7PI 2 Kinscs xvii. 6. 

93T. — Ver. 12. ]D7 Resen, meaning bit, bridle. The situation 
of this city is uncertain. 

938. SOP! this, according to Glassius and Storr, referring to 
Nineveh ; according to Rosenm. to Resen, which is Plyl^H T$?n 



96 ANALYSIS OF [CJiap. x. 

tirbs magna, i. e. reliquarum maxima, Ros. in loc. See Introduct. 
Part III., on the subject of superlatives. 

939. D'H/1 7 Egyptianim coloniae sunt Ludaei, Ros., who adds> 
the names which follow in this and the succeeding verse, being: 
expressed in the plnr. number, are not names of individuals, but 
of nations descended from the Egyptians. Of most of these 
nothing is known, principally owing to onr ignorance of the history, 
and geography of the nations of the interior of Africa. Josephns 
says irkpa rcov ovo/udrcov ovBev Lcrfiev. 

940. D^p^S supposed by Bockhart to be a nomad tribe in the 
vicinity of the temple of Jupiter Amnion. 

941. D*3iT7 supposed to be a nome of Libya, inhabited by 
Egyptians, Mich. Foster. 

942. D^HFlSi supposed to be a people inhabiting the desert 
between Egypt and Asia. 

943— Ver. 14. DWHS, DV^ is spoken of by Jer.xliv. 1, 15, 
and Isa.xi. 11, and supposed to be one of the nomes of the Thebaid 
of Egypt. Pliny, in his natural history says, "Dividitur Thebais 
in praefecturas oppidorum quae nomos vocant, Ombitim, Hermin- 
thiten, Thiniten, Phaturiten." Lib. v. c. 9. 

944. D^rt/p3 according to Bockhart, the Colchians, who are 
supposed to be of Egyptian origin. According to Foster, a people 
inhabiting the district between Gaza and Pelusium. The people 
of this country are supposed to have coalesced with the Caphtorims, 
from whom sprang the Philistines. 

945. Dn'~£3 — %W X>Xlit. which went out from thence the 
Philistines and Caphtorims, i.e. from whom were descended, etc. 
In Deut. ii. 23, Jerem. xlvii. 4, and Amos ix. 7, the Philistines are 
said to be descended from the Caphtorims. 

946. D*p&?73 Philistines, i. e. strangers, ciXk6$v\oi : supposed 
to be a colony of the Casluhims and Caphtorims, who settled at a 
very early period in the south west of Palestine, from whom that 
country takes its name. 

947. D**lfl$3 supposed by Rosen, to be the ancient inhabitants 
of Cyprus. 

948.— Ver.15. fPX The builder of Si don, so called after his 
own name. 



Ver. 13—18.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 97 

949. 11^3 comp. of pron. afF. 1 and 1321 or "1153 firstborn, from 
13|1 cog. 1.55 anc ^ yp5 c ^ e fi} broke forth. 

950. Hll ground form Hnn, the progenitor of the Hittites. 
See Gr. 115. 

951. — Yer. 16. s tP\2\ the inhabitants of that district of Palestine 
of which Jerusalem was the capital, from whence they were ex- 
pelled by David. 

952. *T£X the Amorite, Amorites, a people originally inhabiting 
a district to the east of the Jordan, between the Arnon and the 
Jabbok ; part of them afterwards resided in a mountainous district 
within the territories of Judah. 

952*. ^|1^ Gergeseni, these are probably the people who are 
spoken of by Christ in the gospels of Matthew, Mark and Luke, 
as then dwelling on the eastern side of the lake of Gennesaret. 

953.— Yer. 17. ^H the Tluite (Hivites), described by Josh. xi. 3, 
as dwelling at the foot of mount Hermon, and afterwards, in 
Judges iii. 3, as residing in the neighbourhood of mount Lebanon, 
which change of abode probably arose in consequence of their 
expulsion from their original residence by the Israelites. 

954. *p^lj£ Arkite (Arkites), the name of a people from whom 
the city of Arce, in Phenicia, is supposed to have taken its name ; 
Gr. "Ap/cr). The ruins of this city are still to be seen in the neigh- 
bourhood of Tripoli, which are called Tel-Arha. 

955. s y*D Sinaei, a people of Canaan near Lebanon, '< a quo 
(Libano) haud procul alia civitas fait, nomine Sini." Hieron. 
These are not to be confounded with the Sinaei of Egypt, men- 
tioned in Isa. xlix. 12, Ezek. xxx. 15, 16. 

956. — Yer. 18. *HVl^ the Arvadi, a people inhabiting the island 
of Arades, on the coast of Phenicia, near the mouth of the river 
Eleutherus. The inhabitants of the adjoining coast are called in 
the Jerusalem Targum Antaradii. 

957. ***)!y& a nation of Canaan, inhabiting the western side of 
Mount Lebanon, the capital of which was probably the Simyra 
described by Strabo, and the ruins of which are mentioned in 
Shaw's travels, under the name of Sumra. 

958. S T\J2)T] Hamathenses , the inhabitants of a city on the Orontes, 
in Syria, called by the Jews Uamath, and by the Greeks Epimea. 

7 



98 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, x. 

There appears, likewise, to have been a district called Hamath, 
which extended to the northern boundaries of Palestine. 

959. \5333D — ^fiftSJ 1H&1 Postea vero dispersae sunt cognationcs 
Canannaei, i. e. eoruni familiae sese per yarias regiones difFude- 
runt. Ros. 

980. ^fij S plur. pret. niph. of Y^h parad. 8, dispersed themselves, 
were scattered. 

961. — Ver. 19. 7^Q3 subs. mas. limit, boundary of either sea or 
land, verb 7^3 bounded. 

962. rDKS lit. going of thee, thy going, i. e. as thou goest, comp. 
of Hp or ^ pron. afT., and &%, in full W2 inf. kal of K1S to come, 
or yo. 

963. iTTjIl comp. of what is called H— locale, having generally 
the meaning of versus, toioards, to, into, which is distinguished 
from the pron. afT. T\— by its not admitting of the tonic accent, 
which in words with which it is compounded, is invariably on the 
penult, syll., Gr. 29 (d). 

964. Hjy Gaza, i. e. strength, one of the five principal cities of 
the Philistines, said to be a place of great strength. 

965. n^Tlp towards Sodom. The situation of this city, and those 
of Gomorrha, Admah, and Zeboim, immediately following, are 
well "known; comp. of T\— locale, and D*lp- 

966. J?^7 ^ n P anse f° r $?&?7 supposed by Jerome to be the same 
as Callirrhoe, which was situated on the western side of the Dead 
Sea. 

967.— Ver. 21. ^HUH — *P* ti$h) according to our idiom, the 
^Pl in this verse should be I7, but this peculiarity has been already 
adverted to. The scope of this verse is as follows: "And Shem, 
the progenitor of Heber, and the elder brother of Japheth, had 
also (a numerous) posterity." Shem is here distinguished as the 
progenitor of the Hebrews, the chosen people of God, and as the 
brother of Japheth ; the sacred writer not choosing to couple his 
name with that of the accursed Ham. It has been doubted whether 
7il|n should be joined with *Pt&$ or with HID/ The syntax will 
admit of its agreement with either; but according to the usus 
loquendi, that with the former is preferable, which is confirmed by 



Ver. 18—26.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 99 

the circumstance, that in the enumeration of Noah's posterity, 
Shem is always mentioned first. 

968. — Yer. 22. Q TJ£ Elamitae, a people occupying a territory 
between Susiana and Media, called by the Arabian geographers 
Khusistan. 

969. I^K universally acknowledged to be the progenitor of 
the Assyrians. 

970. HT? Lydians, a people of Asia Minor. 

971. Ul\A Syria, when used alone, it generally signifies that 
district of Asia Minor which lies immediately to the north of 
Palestine, and which is sometimes called pWfcTn D^Tjtt Syria 
Damascena, or Western Syria; DJirO D*1^ is Syria inter amnis, 
or Mesopotamia. 

972.— Yer. 23. *p5? Ausitis, Avo-Itls, Job i.l, LXX. The name 
of a country and nation on the northern part of Arabia Deserta, 
between Palestine, Idumsea, and the Euphrates. The people are 
called by Ptolemy Alcrtrai, which perhaps should be read Avatrat. 

973. ;)T\ supposed by Eos. to be Ccelo-Syria, from its affinity 
with the Aram. «p*H a valley. 

974. 1T)% this people or region is unknown. 

975. $12 supposed to be the inhabitants of the Masian mountains, 
which lie to the north of Nesibis. Bockhart. Eos. 

976. — Yer. 24. Tw^ of this person, or his descendants, nothing 
is known. 

977. 135^ Heher, according to Bos. this name was not given by 
his parents or contemporaries, but by his posterity, "quod proge- 
nitor Transeupliratensium essetP ^QJ^ signifies passage, ^3JJ 
ireparrjs, LXX. 

978. — Yer. 25. Jr?3 Peleg, i. e. part, division. 

979. nj?$5 3 sing. fern. pret. niph. of T)^ not used in hal, in 
niph. was divided, parad. 1. 

980. Jtpp* the progenitor of the Johtan Arabs, who inhabit that 
part of Arabia called Yemen. 

981.— Yer. 26. TTHb7NI supposed to be a people of Arabia Eelix. 
982.- $w\*? supposed to be the ancestor of the Salapeni, a people 
of the interior of Arabia, mentioned by Ptolemy. 

7 * 



100 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. x. 26. 

983. fil/b^n supposed to be that region of Arabia which is at 
present called Hadramout. 

984. ITT out of pause ITT i. e. moon. "Hujus populi reliquiae 
sedes habent in Hadramoutae vicinia circa montem lunae." Pos. 

985. — Yer. 27. DTHPI Bockhart thinks that these were the Dri- 
meti of Pliny, who dwelt on the shores of the Arabian Gulf. 

986. /ft&$ understood to be Sanaa in Arabia, which Niebuhr 
learned was anciently called TJzal. 

987. H vp*l believed to be situated in Arabia; but it is not known 
in what part of it. 

988. — Ver. 28. ~De /^ty nil certi constat, Ros.; and the same 
may be said of 7$^5$$« 

989. fcCl^ see No. 916. Gesenius supposes that there were in 
Arabia two districts of this name; the one in the west possessed 
by the Joktan Arabs, the other in the north of the Arabian Desert 
toAvards the mouth of the Euphrates. 

990. — Yer. 29. *\u\tf supposed by some to be a region in India, 
by others in Arabia ; the arguments in favour of both views are 
concisely and clearly stated in Ges. Lex. 

991. Jl/^n Cliaulan, in Arabia. 

992. SJV the Jobahitae of Ptolemy. 

993.— Yer. 30. tTjj5Tj — W&\b \*TJ "Eorumque habitatio erat 
a Mescha usque ad Sepharam (et ultra usque ad) montana 
Arabiae." Ges. 

994. K&?§ the boundary of the Joktan Arabs, supposed to be 
Movaa or Mov^a, a splendid city with a harbour on the western 
shore of Arabia, described by Ptolemy, situated where Mauschid 
now stands. 

995. rnipp comp. of T\— locale, and "ISD supposed to be the 
capital of the country of Schehr, situated between the provinces of 
Hadramout and Oman. 

996. DTJ5Q "in mountain (mountains) of the East. These are 
supposed to be those mountains of Arabia running from the neigh- 
bourhood of Mecca and Medina to the Persian Gulf. 

997. — Chap.xi. 1. T\h& subs. fern. Up, language-, we should, 
according to our idiom, say of one tongue, and not of one lip. 



Chap xi. 3.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 101 

998. nriX in pause for TT\8 contr. for THtlH fern, of Ttltfl one, 

piur. nnm- 

999. DHPJX E^.5^ lit. and of the same words, of the scone lan- 
guage ; if there be a shade of difference of meaning between this 
and the preceding expression, it is that H^^ refers to the pronun- 
ciation or dialect, D'H-H to the language; the latter is plur. abs. 
ofWGr.86. 

T T 

1000. — Ver.2. DJJPJ3 in their marching, journeying, comp. of 
prep. 3 and pron. aff. D~ and J?D3, and with the accent yp3, ground 
form of JJD3 constr. inf. kal of J?D3 parad. 5 and 4. 

1001. PIJ7M subs. fern, a valley, from J^S cleft ; lit. a cleaving, 
or separation (of mountains). 

1002. tofe^J aW 7/j<?y dwelt, comp. of -\ and 3 piur. pres. kal of 
H^ sat, dwelt, parad. 8. 

1003— Ver. 3. ^T^K &X lit. maw to his neighbour, i.e. to 
one another. 

1004. ^IPIJH comp. of pron. aff. ^lH— and jTlj the pathakh being 
furtive, subs. m. a companion, a neighbour, friend, from PlJH y^^/. 
The connection is here seen between companionship and friendship, 
and men's eating or feeding together. The tsere is immoveable, 
as a compensation for the dropped radical. 

1005. PDPl comp. of T\— parag. and 3PI, with the vowel length- 
ened in order to the annexation of the assyllabic affix, Gr. 66. 6T ; 
contr. for ^PP Gr. 39 ; 2 sing. m. imp. ked of 3!T gave, parad. 8. 
PI 5? is used — 1. in the sense of give, concede, allow; 2. in that of 
come, go to, or the like. 

1006. D^57 ^J5/? lit- later ificemus later es, let us make 
brides. POS/J comp. of Pi— parag. and 1 plur. pres. kal of (57 
was ichite, parad. 1. The meaning here is taken from the folio wing- 
word. 

1007. E^ a? plur. of PD j? subs. fern, brick made of white clay, 
and of a white colour, from }j? or Xu) ichite. 

1008. i*l£rp? Pffl&O lit. let us bum them to a burning, let us 
thoroughly burn them — an additional evidence of the poverty of 
the Hebrew in qualifying terms, such as are used in modern lan- 
guages. See Introduction, Part III., on this subject. 

1009. PliDIt^ comp. of Pi— parage, which takes the accent, and 



102 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xi. 

1 plur. pres. kal of £p^ burned, parad. 3 ; tlie ult. vowel is lost, in 
consequence of the removal of the accent. 

1010. TteSith comp. of h before sh'va h and r\£TP subs. fern. 
burning. Herod, lib.i. chap. 179, says in regard to the builders of 
the walls of Babylon : 'EkKvo-avre^ he irXivOovs i/cava? loimja-av 
avras iv Ka^ivoiai) " after having dug up a sufficient number of 
bricks, they burned them in furnaces." 

1011. p&t in pause for pJNt subs. com. a stone, a seg. of the 
(a) class. 

1012. I^nn the bitumen, slime, that which was found upon the 
spot; comp. of Tl without dagesh, Gram. 19, and ")£)! aacpaXros, 
bitumen, compare *!&! aestuavit, rubuit. The best bitumen is said 
to be of a reddish colour. Diosc. i. 99, "Aa^aXros hia^epei rj 
*Iov8aifcr) t?5? XoiTrrjf;' e<JTi he KaXrj r\ 7rop<fivpoecha)S (JTiX^ovda. — 
Tevvarai Kal iv ^olvIkt) Kal iv ^ihcovi, Kal iv BaftvXcovt, Kal 
iv ZaKvvOw — The bitumen of Judea surpasses what is found 
elsewhere. That is most esteemed which is of a bright purple 
appearance. It is produced likewise in Phoenicia, in Sidon, in 
Babylon, and hi Zacynthus. 

1013. ""©PI clay, mortar, so called from its reddish colour, see 
No. 1012 ; seg. of the (o) class, m. 

1014. — Ver. 4. H35? let u $ build, 1 sing. pres. kal of HUH built, 
parad. 13, and ^2 3 plur. pret. kal, ver. 5. 

1015. /^0 subs. m. a tower, from its size, from slh greatness. 

1016. D^t^Jl l^^^l lit. and its head in the heavens, a figurative 
mode of expressing great height. So Horn. Odyss. v. ver. 239 : 
iXdrrj t rjv ovpavo/A7]Kr)$, " there was a fir tree which reached to 
the heavens." 

1017. Pl^tt let us make, 1 plur. pres. kal of »"IB?J£ made, parad. 
13 and 2. 

1018. S^ subs. m. 7iame, fame, renoion, compare Gr. arj/ma, a 
sign. The latter part of this verse is thus translated by Dathe : 
« quae eis signum esset, ne per orbem dispergerentur." 

1019. Y)^ 1 plur. pres. kal of V^ID to scatter; likewise, to be 
scattered. 

1020. — Ver. 5. *TJ*3 and descended, comp. of -J and 3 sing. m. 



Ver.3— 10.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 103 

pres. hal of *TV, parad. 8, descended; the ult. tsere shortened into 
segol, in consequence of the removal of the accent. Gr. 30 (b). 

1021. HK |7 a d videndum, comp. of / and infin. constr. hal of 
T\$T), parad. 2, 3 and 13. 

1022.— Ver. 6. Jll^gS SpHH Hf) lit. and this their beginning in 
reference to doing, i. e. and this is what they begin to do. 

1023. Dpnn comp. of pron. aff. D~ and /HH infin. hiph. of 
//Fl parad. 6 ; ground form //HH^ see No. 556. 

1024. TXZP. shall be restrained, 3 sing. masc. pres. niph. of 1^3 
ce^ o^ restrained. 

1025. ^r 3 plur. pret. Ital of DP. parad. 8, only used in this 
passage ; id. qu. cogn. D$T meditated, purposed, determined. 

1026. — Ver. 7. H^nj comp. of T\— parag. and 1 plur. pres. hal 
of TT descended, parad. 8. 

1027. pfelJ with H parag. for Hphj, without H parag. 7^ fe* 
?« confound, 1 plur. pres. AyzZ of 77^ confounded, parad. 6 : Lat. 
balbus, balbutio, barbarus ; Engl, babble; and /M, ver. 9, for 73/3 
confusion, Babel. 

1028. Dn§b> comp. of pron. aff. D— and Jl|)^ with the accent 
removed to the aff., and with Pi changed into T\, to coalesce with 
the assyllabic affix H|)B>, No. 997. 

1029. i|nj?n — typt^ kS *)gW lit. fto* £% may mrf tor 
(understand) maw £Ae lip (language) of his neighbour, i. e. that 
they may not understand one another's language ; tyti&\ 3 plur. 
pres. hal of ^feW heard, understood, parad. 4. 

1030. — Ver. 8. J*g*l and scattered, comp. of •) and |*§^ with the 
accent on the ult. syllable ^g^ apoc. for p§* 3 sing. pres. 7«)^. of 
p3 to scatter ; in 7«)jA. id. ; and S^^H scattered them , comp. of 
pron. aff. D~ and ^^H, and with the accent removed to the affix 
pgll 3 sing. pret. hiph. of the same. 

1031. ^THny and they ceased, comp. of •) and 3 plur. m. pres. 
hal of /in ceased, parad. 2. 

1031*. flbl ? comp. of 7 before sh'va /, and inf. constr. hal of 
i"T}5, parad. 13. built. 

1032. — Ver. 9. T\fe$ SOp (one) cffZM #s w«me 5 tfe w«me was 
called; Yi.on appeloit. 

1033.— Ver. 10. IBb^N supposed to be the progenitor of a 



104 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xi. 22. 

people who dwelt in a region near Armenia, called by Ptolemy 
Arrapachitis. 

1034.— Ver. 22. lifD Nahor, i. e. anhelans. 

1035— Ver. 25. ITTfl Terah. 

1036.— Ver. 26. D^JK Abram, exalted father, comp. of ]3K 
father, and D"J from D^H to exalt. 

1037. p T Jl iforo;?. 

1038.— Yer. 27. tib Lot, covering or veil. 

1039.— Ver. 28. 0§"72 before, used here in reference to time, 
see Nos.13,14. 

1040. IFPHlto comp. of pron. afT. 1 and t^\f\fe ground form of 
Ht^I^ seg. (a) class, fern., 1. nativity, birth; 2. place of birth; 
3. kindred; from 1/J or \7) peperit, genuit. 

1041. — Yer. 29. "H^ Sarai, i. e. princess. 

1042.— Yer. 30. IT^ &a?rm, fern, of njJJJ &OTm. 

1043. T7*) IT? TK lit. ?zo£ fo her child, i. e. sAe had no child. 
1/) subs. m. offspring, see No. 1040. 

1044.— Yer. 31. life comp. of pron. afT. 1 and Tr?5 subs., a 
bride, a daughter-in-laio. 

1045. *\W2from Ur, comp. of -ft before the guttural fc Gr. 19, 
and *Vl&$ a district of Chaldea. 

1046. T)j? 7 to #o, comp. of 7 prep, before the tonic accent 7 
and F\j*? contr. for 1"Q/* Gr. 39, inf. const, kal of 1]7J went, 
parad. 8. 

1047. i"!5p&$ towards the land, comp. of T\ locale, and ¥*]& 
ground form of y$& see No. 7. 

1048. — Chap.xii. 1. ^/~T? lit. go to thee, get thee, 1j7, with the 
accent T? per. sync, for *tp\ Gr.39, 2 sing. m. imp. kal of IJ7* we??^ 
parad. 8. 

1049. ^J&fefrom thy land, comp. of g before K for •£ Gr. 19, 
pron. afT. ^ and V1^ ground form of T*^ see No. 7. 

1050. ^ITHte^ from thy kindred, comp. of -t? and pron. afT. ^f, 
and tphfo see No. 1040, ^rftftefrl tfflfffi are perhaps equivalent, 
to WT? to "0^0 from the land of thy nativity, from thy native 
land, see Ch.xi.28. 

1051. ^]&n&$ / will cause thee to see, I toill shew thee, comp. of 
pron. afT. ^ and nun epenth. and HK^K, the T\ being absorbed in the 



Chap.xii.4.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 105 

following letter, 1 sing, -pres. hiph. of tl^l saw, in hiph. caused to 
see, shewed. 

1052.— Ver. 2. *}& ^\&%$) lit. and I will male thee to (into) a 
nation. 

1053. y&Vti) comp. of \ and prcn. aff., and Plfc>gK see No. 1051, 

1 sing. pres. kal of H^JJ ?nade. 

1054. "^pl^S? #^ I will bless thee, comp. of ) cop. conj., pron. 
aff. ^T, and ^.^^ with tlie accent TJJS 1 sing. pres. pih. of *H*13 

1055. Jl/^^5 and I wiU make great, comp. of ) and »1 parag., 
and /^J8 the faere being lost on the removal of the accent to the 
M parag. 1 sing. pres. pih. of TH| was great, in /z?};>/£. mfl(?e great. 

1056. rD1!!2 JlVO a/zc7 6e thou a blessing, i. e. most blessed, one 

t t : *• : v o j i 

of the modes of expressing the superlative degree, see Introduction 
Part III., or more probably a source of blessing, as being the 
progenitor, according to the flesh, of him in whom all the families 
of the earth were to be blessed; comp. of 1 for \ and 2 sing. m. imp. 
kal of rVH, ordinary form of the 2 sing. m. of the imp. T\)T\ parad. 

2 and 12, and hence 1 is pointed with segol, Gr. 125,4. 

1057. Up"!? subs. fern, from ^*D blessed. 

1058. — Ver. 3. TpJTJjlfi those that bless thee, comp. of pron. aif. 
Tp.7- and plur. m. part, pihel of ^T^, plur. abs. D^IH^? with the 
termination removed before the aff., Gr. 49. 

1059. *t[7?P^ and him that curseth thee, comp. of ^1 conj., and 
pron. aff. ^1 and part. pih. m. sing, of 7/D parad. 6, the tsere in the 
parad. shortened into segol on the removal of the accent; in kal 
was light, in hiph. made light, cursed. 

1060. I^K I will curse. 1 sing. pres. hal of "HK parad. 6, cursed. 

1061. ^D'lnJI and shall be blessed, see Gal. iii. 8, comp. of ) and 

3 plur. pres. niph. of *T]% blessed, parad. 3. 

1062. tin&$ti families, constr. plur. of T\XV2$ti subs, fern; 1. a 
household; 2. a family or clan. 

1063. — Ver. 4. *Q1 t had spoken, 3 sing. m. pret. pih. of "D^ 
spoke. 

1064. ifiKM lit. in his going out, tvhen he toent out, comp. of 3 
prep., pron. aff." 1 and MK¥ contr. for Hfrtt and that for n«£ Gr. 39, 
inf. constr. kal of fr^J parads. 12 and 8. 



106 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xii. 

1065. T?5! and went, comp. of •) and 3 m. pres. hal of Ij/J 
parad. 8, with the ult. vowel shortened into segol in consequence 
of the removal of the accent, Gr. 9, 10, and 30 (by 

1066. D^DI their property, comp. of the pron. aff. and fc^O*} 
acquisitum, something acquired, a noun of the form of the pass, 
part, hal of feSO*] acquired, parad. 2; and ^3*1 in pause for ^IfcJO'l 
Gr. 31 (2), had acquired; 3 pi. pret. hal of the same. 

1067. — Ver. 5. ^J 1^^ D'5Jn"Tl£0 cum servis quos acquise- 
verant, Eos. ; mancipia Charane acquisita, Ges. In Ezek.xxvii. 13, 
mention is made of certain nations trading with the Tyrians 
DH&n t^JDJ3 in human lives, human beings, slaves ; l^$3 subs. com. 
1. breath; 2. life; 3. the soul; 4. that which hath life, a living 
creature, a man; here, and in the passage quoted from Ezech., a 
slave; sometimes a dead body, Numb. v. 2, ix. 7, etc., where, how- 
ever, the full expression is fiQ ^JpJ ; ^§3 is here used collectively. 

1068. ^JJ lit. had made, in the same sense as we speak of 
making money, i. e. gained, acquired, 3 plur. pret. hal of H^JJ 
parad. 2 and 13. 

1069.— Yer. 6. Dlpfc constr. of fflp& see No. 72, the ult. vowel 
immoveable, the penult, moveable, Gr. 59, and 56, 57. 

1069*. rnift \b$ to the pine grove of Moreh, fb& subs. m. the 
terebinth or pine, a pine grove, here in the construct, state, and 
both vowels immoveable; from hence it is probable that the full 
form of the word is |1aK- In a country where trees were not 
abundant, they were naturally geographical marks: Moreh is 
probably the name of the planter or owner of these trees. 

1070. — Yer. 7. iO?.5 and appeared, comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. 
apoc. pres. niph. of M£0 parads. 2, 3, 13, full form PI^H* Gr. 131 (b~) 
and 37; and HSOin who appeared, comp. of -H and part. niph. m. 
of the same. 

1071. JFIX I 'will give, 1 sing. pres. hal of JHJ gave, parad. 5, 
Gr. 181(d).' 

1072. JM see No. 291. 

1073. — Yer. 8. priJ^J and he moved (his tent), comp. of •) and 
3 sing. m. apoc. pres. hiph. of pf^ was moved, transferred, in hiph. 
moved, caused to move, etc., parad. 2. 

1074. »"nnr! towards the mountain (the mountainous district 



Ver.4— 11.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 107 

which is to the East of Bethel), comp. -PI before resh Pi, and Pi 
locale, and *ul subs. m. a mountain, with the vowel lengthened on 
accoiuit of the assyllabic affix, Gr. 66, 67. 

1075. t3*3 and spread out (his tent), i. e. pitched, comp. of -1 and 
tol with the original vowel t2\ Gr.115, contr. for &¥ Gr.131 (c), 
apoc. form of Htp^ 3 sing. m. pres. kal of PlD3 spread out, parad.5 
and 13, also turned aside to lodge with any one, see eh. xxxviii. 1. 

1076. Pl/PlX id. qu.i/HjSt Ms tent, comp. of pron. afT. and 7PIX 
a tent, Gr. 105, et seq. 

1077. B*/tD on the icest, comp. of •/& and QJ lit. the sea, the Medi- 
terranean, the sea lying to the west of Palestine. 

1078. — Yer.9. Pl2l3JP]« — 5?i?*l and Abraham removed (his tent), 
going and removing towards the south, i. e. he removed his tent 
from time to time in a southerly direction, as the pasture failed. 

1079. J?D*J comp. of -) and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of J?pJ 1. pulled 
up or out (the stakes of a tent) ; 2. removed (one's tent) : 3. removed ; 
travelled; parad. 4 and 5 ; and J/D3 infin. absolute leal of the same; 
another instance of the poverty of the Hebrew language hi quali- 
fying terms. 

1080. PQJJPl comp. of -PI art. and Pi locale, and 1j), ground form 
of 333 subs. m. the south. 

1081. — Ver. 10. 3JH subs. m. famine, dearth of provisions. 

1082. TTJ] #W wewtf down, comp. of •} and 3 sing. m. pres. hal 
of TV went down, parad.8, see Gr.30 (b). 

108^. T\ft*$fo towards Egypt, comp. of 7\ locale and D^ttS 
see ver. 11. 

1084. *\)j? comp. of / before tonic accent 7 and inf. Iced of ^5 
ifo sojourn, reside, dwell, parad. 10. 

1085. Ill ni - h eai 'y, great, grievous, PIT}? fern., Gr. 74, constr. 

1086.— Ver. 11. TJ1 nnpPt 1##3 W)_factumque est, cum ap- 

propinqaasset, ut ingrederetur in Egypt um, i. e. when he had 
approached the confines of Egypt. 

1087. IHpPl 3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of !T)p parad. 3, approached, 
in /j/j>/j. the same, and caused to approach. 

1088. 8137 comp. of 7 prep, and inf. Ar/£ of K13 to enter, parad. 
10andl2,seeStorr, p. 304. 



108 ANALYSIS OP [Chap. xii. 

1089. *J?J?1J I have known, I know, 1 sing. pret. kal of]}*Vknew } 
paracl. 8 and 4. 

1090. n&Oft T\b\ lit. beauty of appearance, of a beautiful ap- 
pearance. 

1091. F&\ constr. of H3J fern, beauty, masc. form T\& Gr.94,95, 
96, the constr. form of H|JJ shews it to have been originally a subs. 
see Introduction, Part III., on the subject of Adjectives. 

1092. HkO^p xoliat one sees, a vision, sight, appearance, subs, m., 
from H^l saiv. 

■{ T 

1093.— Ver.12. DHjttpTj the Egyptians, comp. of -PI and plur. of 
**)*$?? an Egyptian. 

1094. ^n^Nft then shall they say, cornp. of ) and 3 plur. pret. kal 
of T55J said, parads. 7 and 4. 

1095. ^yyi) and ivill slay, comp. of ) and 3 plur. pret. kal of 
yiTl slew, parads. 2 and 3. 

1096. VPl* «rc7? sape «/^<?, 3 plur. m. pres. pih. of rPft /^eJ, in 
^>/A. caused to live, preserved alive, parad. 13. 

1097.— Yer.13. nfett 2 fern. imp. kal of Tb$ «m& 

1098. fcO Gr. vat / an interjection; used to express supplication, 
petition, or the contrary; not unlike the Eng. pray, for I pray, or 
prithee. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1099. *ftn&$ my sister, comp. of pron. affix ^~ and riiHK contr. 
fihft and with the accent fihtt contr. for filH^ Prof. Lee's Gr. 75, 

-: i t v -: ' 

Gr. 38, subs. fern, sister ; according to some grammarians, from 
*lFl$ the Arab, and Chald. forms of ^H^ a brother. Ges. Lex. 

1100. Wj? for IWt \yj?h Lat. eo consilio ut, to the end that, 
comp. of 7 an( l }5$? f° r ^35??? subs. fern, intent, purpose, JJ$?r to 
the intent, used adverbially, from T\$ T . 

1101. *D&\ may be well, 3 sing. m. pres. kal of ^£0^ w«s ^006/, 
was well, parad. 9. 

1102. ^§3 nn^n*) and my sold may live, i.e. and I may be 
preserved alive, comp. of \ and 3 sing. fern. pret. kal of I1JPI lived, 
parad. 13. 

1103. *pte3 comp. of pron. aff. *-- and #6Q ground form of ^J 
already noticed. According to our idiom this word is redundant ; 
it is, however, very significant and expressive. 

1104. ^177^3 for thy sake, comp. of 3 prep., and fern. pron. aff. 



Ver.11-17.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 109 

3 pers. and 7?Jj subs. m. with the accent removed to the aff. 77il 
cause, occasion, with the prep. 5 ty- or be-cause. 

1105. — Ver. 14. D"]5^ N*D3 as, or when Abram went, comp. of 
3 and X13 infin. kal of NIS- 

1106. i"13* see No. 1091. 

T T 

1107. — Yer. 15. ^^ princes, constr. plur. of *0 the vowel im- 
moveable, as if from H^- 

1108. V?7fT5 comp. of A and 3 plur. pres. pih. of 77)1 parad. 6, 
with a comp. sKva under 7 contrary to the general rule ; in kal 
shone, gave out light, in. pih. made to shine, celebrated, commended. 

1109. PljnS Pharaoh, i. e. the king, f O ^apacbv icar AlyvwTiow: 
ftaaiXea arjiialvei. Joseph. Antiqq. lib.viii. c.2. 

1110. njpJrfi comp. of -\ and 3 sing. f. pres. puh. of Hp7 fooZ;, 
par ads. 4 and 5. 

1111. — Yer. 16. l^Pl 3 sing. pret. hiph. of Sfc* was ^ood, in 
A^?A. tffo/ (700c/, treated icell, parad. 9. 

1112. ^ip^ lit. cutter, layer open, an 02; or coio, compare *"lp^l 
cogn. yp|l and *133 cleaved, opened. The o# is supposed to be 
called lp5 from his opening or ploughing the ground. In like 
manner Yarro derives armentum contr. for ar amentum, a herd, 
from aro; see Ges. Lex. 

1113. D^DHJ and asses, comp. of ) conj., and plur. of *ti2t\ in 
full 11^)1 <m ass, ult. vowel immoveable, Gr. 56. 

1114. D^5S1 an d men servants, or male slaves, comp. of \ and 
plur. of 15JJ subs, m., seg. (a) class, Gr. 109. 

1115. fflnS&^l and female servants, or slaves, conrp. of 1. and 
plur. of nJl^y subs, fern., from the masculine form H§|^; the plur. 
of the fern, is formed upon the ordinary principle applicable to the 
plurals of the feminine of segolate nouns, Gr. 109 (-J-). The ety- 
mology is uncertain. 

1116. nihfcj in full fiiiinX Gr.34, plur. of Jin« a she ass: the 
etymology is uncertain; the ult. vowel immoveable, the penult, 
moveable, Gr. 56 etseq., and 74. 

1117. D^?l&3 Camels, plur. abs. of %5 a camel, the formation of 
the plur. should be regularly Qv^- 

1118. — Yer. 17. J?|3^J and smote (with disease), comp. of ) and 
3 sing, -pves.pih. of JJJJ touched, struck, smote, parads. 4 and 5. 



110 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xii.17. 

1119. ^3 plur. abs. of J?33. subs, m., 1. a stroke, blow; 2. an 
infliction (of evil); a seg. of the (i) class, see Gr. 109. 

1120. 15^°7j2 on account of. 131 constr. of 111Gr.94, 1. word; 
2. thing; 3. cause; hence 131 ~7j? he-cause of; "Lai. propter, 

1121. — Ver. 18. Ffl^n 2 sing. m. pret. hipli. of 13} in ^ inusit. 
in A^>A. declared, see No. 359. 

1122. — Ver. 19. HjSNtJ comp. of ) and 1 sing. pres. kal of !"I|17 
took, par ads. 5 and 4. 

1123. "^7) ftp take (her) awmJoo* Up per «y»e. for Up? Gr. 39, 
£ sing. m. imp. ^a/ of hp7 and 17 for 17* Gr. 39, 2 sing. m. imp. 
Z;aZ of IT parad. 8, went. 

1124. — Ver. 20. 1¥1 and charged, comp. of A and 3 sing. m. apoc. 
■pies.pih. of nj!tf parad. 13, full form TlXi]- 

1125. ^H7^1 comp. of ) and 3 plur. m. pres.j^'A. of H?^ parad. 4, 
se^£, sm£ aiuay. 

1126. — Chap.xiii. nS^JIn towards the South, viz., of Canaan, see 
Nos. 1078, and 1080. 

1127. — Ver. 2. Itffo 133 ^- we W^t excess, very heavy, very rich, 
in Scotland wealthy men are sometimes called weighty men ; and 
the epithet weight, applied to influence, or character, is quite 
common in the English language. 

1128. nn-m M r\1pm contr. for fi»3h3 etc., the articles 
in these words must either have reference to the cattle, silver, and 
gold, with which Abram was enriched while in Egypt, or the 
articles may be used as in French, V argent, Vor, where we say 
silver and gold. 

1129. — Ver. 3. VJ$3tf? having respect to his stations, i. e. he pro- 
ceeded from the south of Canaan to Bethel, halting where he had 
halted onhis way from thence to Egypt ; comp. of 7 pron. aff. V~ and 
plur. of J?D?J with the plur. term, lost, Gr. 49, subs, m., 1. a pulling 
up (of the stakes of a tent); 2. a march, journey ; 3. the distance 
between one encampment and another; Gr. araOfioq; root J*p<5 see 
No. 1079, the penult, vowel of J?Dlb contr. for yp3$ is immoveable, 

1130. rPrtm at the beginning, contr. for HjWW Gr. 35, comp. 
of 5 prep., -1 and nplfr subs. fern, beginning; root 7)TPl hiph, of 
hhh see No. 556. 



Chap.xiii.9.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. Ill 

1131.— Ver. 4. tl'0 r had made. 

1132. iWVna contr. for njBWTft Gr.35, and 19, comp. of? 
prep. •(! and nj&^fcO fern, and pt^SO m. beginning, root WW\ the 
head. 

1133. — Ver. 5. DvH^ tents, i.e. many servants who lived in. the 
tents, plur. of htftt Gr. 109, and 109*. 

1134.— Yer. 6. pNPl Dn& &&) $h\etnon ferebat eos terra, i.e. 
f T^? ■"$*!?? pascuum terrae, Ros. ; &j?0 might have been expected 
to be fern, to agree with VTJjn but this anomaly is not uncommon 
in Hebrew syntax, particularly where the verb precedes its nomi- 
native. The gender of the verb in this case, however, may be 
accounted for on the supposition that njTl^?, which is masc, is 
understood. 

1135. T\11\y7 for the dwelling, comp. of 7 before the tone syllable 
7 and TO$ contr. for T)%$\ inf. constr. kal of *1$\ dwelt, parad. 8. 

1136. *nn^ or V^JIT together, comp. of pron. aff. plur. 3 pers. m. 
and *7JT ground form of *1PP a seg. of the (a) class; 1. union-, 
2. conjunction ; with the pi. aff. conjunction of than, hence together, 
compare HPP united. 

1137. D£W their property, Ike stock, see No. 1066. 

1138. ^H in pause for ^ ground form 5?H Gr.41, fl^H fern 
great. 

1139. ijy 3 plur. praet. kal of /DJ teas able; this form varies 
slightly from parad. 8, see Lee's Gr. 188(2). 

1140. — Ver. 7. SH subs. m. strife, contention, and )"ftH?? subs, 
fern., a derivative of the preceding, with the same meaning, ver. 8. 

1141. *$H fully written *JTH constr. plur. of HJH 1. a feeder, 
pastor, herdsman; part. act. kal m. of HjTl fed, used as a subs.; 
penult, vowel immoveable, Gr. 60 ; plur. with pron. aff. 1 pers. ^1 
my herdsmen; with aff. 2 pers. TJH thy herdsmen. 

1142.— Ver. 8. ttltlX D'HK D^K"\5 lit. for men brethren we, 
i. e. for we are nearly related. 

1143. — Ver. 9. KJ T"l&n separate thyself, I pray thee, 2 sing. m. 
imp. niph. of 1*155 broke asunder, separated (by breaking), separated, 
parad. 3, the accent being on the penult. Gr. 29(e), and 30(c), the 
tscre in the parad. ""OSPl is shortened into segol, Gr. 9, 10. 

1144. ?)kC$?7\ to the left hand, or northwards, see No. 217, comp. 



as re- 



112 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xiii. 

of -H and 7&D!^ subs. m. the left (hand), (foot), (side), etc., 
quired by the context, the etymology is uncertain; TQ^foWto I 
go to the left hand, or northwards, comp. of 1 parag. and 1 sing, 
pres. hiph. of 7^£?&^ obsolete, a quadrilateral root. 

1145. JWH to the right hand, southwards, see No. 217, comp. of 
•PI and }*JDJ the right (hand, side, etc.); F02?*&J I will take the right, 
i.e. go southwards, comp. of T\ parag., and 1 sing. pres. hiph, of jft* 
not used in kal, parad. 9. 

1146.— Ver. 10. KB*J comp. of A and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of &&% 
raised, bore, parad. 5, and 12, see No. 459. 

1147. }*T"!*n 133 the plain of Jordan, 133 constr. of 133 subs. 
com., contr. for 1313 anything round, a circle ; \.a tract of country 
from its appearance to the eye as limited within a circle (the 
new divisions of France are called circles) ; 2. a cake of bread, 
from its circular shape; 3. a talent of silver or gold, probably from 
the circular shape of the weight with which it was weighed, or of 
the measure in which it was contained: compare 13 a measure for 
solids or liquids, so called from its round shape; root 113 went in 
a circle, so /H7H from 7/il. 

" T • " - T 

1148. JTVPI comp. of -Pi and J11* lit. the river, the principal 
river in Palestine, the Jordan, from 11* descended; in like manner 
in Latin, fluvius from fluo; and Rhine, in Germ. Hhyn, Wiein, 
from rinnen, to run. 

1149. PP3 totality of it, all of it, comp. of pron. aff. H— and 73 
ground form 7/3 see No. 130. 

1150. npy'9 part. hiph. m. of T\T)& drank, parad. 13, used as a 
noun, 1. one that gives to drink, a cup-bearer -, 2. what has been 
supplied tvith drink, a well watered country, 3. drink itself. 

1151. fin^ inf. pih. of nnfe^ parad. 3, used here as a noun, lit. 
before Jehovah's destruction of, etc. 

1152. IjSf lit. smallness, Zoar, the name of a city lying to the 
south of the Dead Sea, called Zoar subsequently to the period at 
which the events here recorded took place, see chap. xix. 20, 22. 
The original name of Zoar was Beta. 

1153. — Ver. 11. 1131 and chose, comp. of -) and 3 sing. pres. 
kal of 1113 chose, parads. 3 and 4. 



Ver. 9—16.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 113 

1154 J?D* lit. palled up (the stakes of a tent), marched, journeyed, 
see No. 1129; 3 sing. m. pres. hal of yp3 parad. 4 and 5. 

1155. ^n*!^ 3 pi. m. pres. ra^pA. of *7H3 separated, parad. 3. 

1156. — Ver. 12. *TJ?3 ?;? ^ ie cities, sometimes in one and some- 
times in another ; comp. of 3 an( i constr. of U s ^j} contr. for D**V5} 
plur. of *VJ? a city, Gr. 114. 

115T. D*lp"*TJ2. /DS?J an d l ie removed his tent (from place to 
place) till (he came) to Sodom, 7n^ ft .l comp. of ■), and 3 sing. pres. 
hal of /P!NI moved his tent, parads. 2 and 3. 

1158.— Ver. 13. D^JT) wicked, plnr. of JH or JH, see No. 230. 

1159. D^XfcSn sinners, plnr. of Kt^ll a sinner; the primary idea 
in this word is that of missing a mark which, we shonld aim at, 
hence that of sinning. 

1160— Ver. 14. nPM see No. 568. 

1161. TljDPl the being separated, after Lot's having been separated, 
or after Lofs separation, inf. constr. niph. of 113. This, and similar 
expressions, have been often literally translated, to shew, that 
infinitives in the Hebrew language, are in reality abstract nonns. 

1161*. NE? lift up, contr. for &£0 imper. hal, 2 sing. m. of 
N*bOparads^5andl2. 

1162. nNH/l and see, comp. of ) and 2 sing. m. imp. hal of H^H 
parad. 13. 

1163. W nr^l^S* lit. as to which, thou there, i. e. where 
thou art. 

1164. HJ3V northwards, comp. of Jl locale, and j£¥ or p'S^ subs. 
m. f/*e north; supposed to be derived from j§^ /*/<:/, the Jews 
considering the north a hidden and impenetrable region. There 
is no change in the vowels, because there is no change in the 
place of the accent, which the H locale does not receive. 

1165. — Ver. 15. PlJJjTKSt I will give it, comp. of pron. aff. Pl~ 
and nun epenth., and JfifcJ 1 sing. pres. hal of [H^ parad. 5, the ult. 
vowel is lost on the removal of the accent. 

1166— Ver. 16. *ftbffl comp. of 1, and 1 sing. pret. hal of ttlfc> 
to place, to make. 

1167. 7%V be able, 3 sing. pres. hoph. of zDJ parad. 8, teas able. 

1168. filJtf? to number, comp. of 7 before sh'va 7, and inf. constr. 
hal of T\T2 numbered; and T\y&\ 3 sing. m. pres. niph. of the same. 

. 8 



114 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xiii. 16. 

1168.* 15$?. constr. of *T§g subs. m. c?ws^ Gr.94. 

1169. — Ver. 17. U)p rise, 2 sing. m. imp. kal of fflp parad. 10. 

1170. *n?nnn wa^; a5ow£, 2sing.imp.A^A. of ^/nweft^wa/fa?, 
parad. 2. 

1171. fi31«? comp. of 7 and pron. aff. Fl~ and *?Htf with, the 
accent *^pX, ground form of *^p&, seg. of the (o) class, sub. m. 
length, Gr. 105, et seq. 

1172. Jl^H j? comp. of 7, pron. aff. ft~ and 5^1 an <l with the 
accent 5t^ ground form of ^PH subs. m. seg. (o) class, breadth, 
width. 

1173. tf1Jb& \p$3 according to Eos. in quercetis Mamres; 
Ges. renders p?K quercus, and Lee j»me £ree. Mamre, the owner 
of this grove, is probably the person mentioned in the following 
chapter. ^7K constr. plur. of J7H, in full \h# see No. 1069. 

1174. J3*3 and built, see No. 291. 

1175. — Chap.xiv. 1. IJJJS? Shinar, see chap. xi. 2, the district 
in which the tower of Babel was built. From the circumstance 
that the reign of Amraphel is fixed upon as the date of this expe- 
dition, we may conclude that he was a person of some note, and 
that his kingdom was of considerable extent as compared with the 
others, who were probably petty kings in the north of Palestine, 
or in the district of Syria adjoining. 

1176. DTg Elam. There is little probability that this is 
Persia, as is supposed by some ; the distance, difficulties of the 
way, and petty nature of the expedition, scarcely justify such a 
supposition. 

1177. Diil ^fo king of Goim, i. e. of nations. This king's 
subjects may have consisted of people of different nations. The 
territory of that king was probably in Galilee, which is called by 
Isa. viii.23, D^JH 7vi», and by Matt.iv. 15, TaXCkala tcov idvcbv, 
and in 1 Mace. v. 15, TaXCkala 'AWocpvXcov. 

1178. — Ver. 2. 1J$ this city was originally called Bela, and did 
not receive the name of Zoar till the period of the destruction of 
Sodom, chap. xix. 20,22. 

1172 — Ver. 3. TS2!R joined (themselves), i. e. the confederate 
kings united their forces at the vale of Siddim; 3 plur.pret. kal of 
*"Dft joined, or in trans, was joined, joined one's self, parad. 2 and 4. 



Chap.xiv.5.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 115 

1180. pftJT7X at the valley, 7$ with the accent 7K, and p£# 
subs, com., seg. (i) class, 1. depth; 2. a valley. 

1181. II aDH D* &OH wfo' rcwrac est mare salsum, Dathe. n?foT] 
comp. of «n and n_?£ subs. m. salt. 

1182. — Ver. 4. ^JJJ served, i.e. were tributary to ; 3 plur. pret. 
£#/ of ^53^ parad. 2, served. 

1183. FTTfc, in pause for VTC&, Gr. 31 ; 2 plur. pret. &tf of TJ& 
parad. 3, rebelled. 

1184. InX comp. of pron. afT. 3 pers. and fiX; ground form 

nnx No. 4. 

1185. — Yer. 5. ]2P) and they smote, comp. of A and 3 plur. pres. 
hiph. of PDJ ; obsolete in hah 

1186. D*K3*1 Rephaims, a people of Canaanitish origin, of great 
stature, called by the Moabites, Emims, see Deut. ii. 11; ylyavrav 
LXX. ; nS^lil Hv 1 2 Sam. xxi. 16, 18. In a more extended 

3 T TT •* • ; * 

signification this word seems to have comprehended all the Ca- 
naanitish nations of gigantic stature — the Emims, Zamzummims, 
and Anakims, Deut. ii. 11, 20. Joshua, xv. 8, speaks of a place 
at the foot of Mount Moriah, called D*X§Tp/bJ£ the valley of the 
Rephaims. 

1187. D^lp rnfit^J?? in Ashteroth Karnaim, a city in Basan, 
comp. of prep. 5, and TT\PX^j_ statues of Astarte or Venus, constr. 
pi. of rnPlGPJJ « Quarta enim Venus Syria Tyroque concepta quae 
Astarte vocatur, quam Adonidi nupsisse proditum est." Cic. De 
Nat. Deor. lib. iii. cap. 23. 

1188. D^IP lit. two horns, dual of pp subs. fern. seg. (<z) class, 
ground form pp; Lat. cornu; Fr. come; Engl, corn; a horny 
substance on the foot. 1. the horn of an animal, by which he 
attacks others or defends himself; hence the ideas conveyed by 
this word, of power, honour, majesty; 2. the horn or peak at the 
corners of the altar, so called from its similarity in shape to a horn; 
3. the peak of a mountain, for the same reason, Isa. v. 1. So 
Schreck-horn, Wetter-Aorw, Aar-horn, mountains in Switzerland. 

The literal meaning of the expression is, Astarte ivith the two 
horns, a name given to the city, either from its containing a cele- 
brated statue of Venus with two horns (" Astarten enim cum capite 
bovino finxerunt Phoenices." Euseb. quoted in "Winer's Lex.), or 



116 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xiv. 

because the city was situated between two peaked mountains : the 
former is the probable reason 

1189. DH2 QTO1 and the Zuzimsin Ham. These and the fore- 

t ; ; 

going words are thus rendered in the LXX. : Kal tcareKo^rav reus 
rylyavras tol>? iv 'AarapcoO, kcu Kapval'v, Kal e6vr) la^vpa a/ia avrols. 
It will be perceived that D*X3*1 and D^ftT are here regarded as 
appellatives, and that DH5 has been read DHJ, comp. of prep. 5 
and pron. DPI* This view is adopted by Michaelis (see his Suppl. 
ad Lex. Heb.), who translates E*?^? thick, strong, as opposed to 
tall. According to this view the passage would be thus rendered, 
They smote giants in Ashteroth Karnaim, and men of smaller 
stature along with them. Eosen. prefers rendering these words 
as proper names. 

1190. DWlp m#3 DWKPI nXI et Emaeos (terribiles) in 

•tt j- "t ; • •■ t ■■ ; \ J 

planitie (urbis) Kirjathaim. 

1191. TW subs. m. a valley. 

1192. D7V*0 lit. two cities, or double city ; dual of Fl**fi subs. 
fern, a city, in pause for CT^lD' 

1193.— Ver. 6. ^HH the Horite (Horites), or Troglodytes; 1H 
signifying hole, Gr. Tp&r/Kr}. This people dwelt in Mount Seir, 
on the south of Judea, afterwards comprehended within the ter- 
ritories of Idumea. 

1194. DT1H3 in their mounted)}, comp. of 3 and pron. affix D~ 
and "Till ground form of 1H a mountain. 

1195. J1N3 h*% r;_ em rfc T€peplv9ov rfc $apdv, LXX. The 
word TJ£ should be regarded as a proper name ; to El Parein. 

1196. nrt?pH?32 1WX lit. which (is) beside the desert, a place 
bordering on the Arabian desert, out of which the Israelites came 
on their way from Egypt to Canaan. 

1197. I^'? subs. m. whither one leads out (cattle) ; 1. a tract of 
uncultivated land used for the purpose of pasturage ; 2. a desert ; 
root 1JH. The primitive notion of which word is that of putting 
or leading forth. Chaldee and Syriac ^5^. led ; applied to speech 
as something put forth, given out, enounced. Prof. Lee regards 
the Lat. dico and duco as cognate words. See Lex. under ^^1/ 

1198— Yer.T. £f4% J*# En Mishpat, i.e. fountain of judg- 
ment; rjj constr. of pjj ; 1. the eye; 2. a fountain. 



Yer. 5— 10.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 117 

1199. b£&>£ subs. m. judgment, from fo%& judged. 

1200. ^fcfiPl TT(P the land of the Amalekite (Amalekites), 
i. e. the people inhabiting the lands subsequently possessed by the 
Amalekites, Amalek at that period not having been born ; TVlW 
constr. of ("H^ afield, land. 

1201. Hbft pftjn? in Hazazon Tamar, translated by Bockhart, 
Tuguria in palmeto, cottages in the palm grove. This place was 
subsequently called Hil pj? Engedi, the kid's fountain. 2 Chron.xx.2. 

1202. — Ver. 8. ")%) ^^5*1 and set themselves in battle array 
against them, comp. of •) and 3 plur. m. pres. kal of 1HJJ parad. 2 
and 3; arranged, set in order, drew up ; hence Plin3& a body of 
men set in battle array ; in Lat. exercitus, implying training ; in 
Eng. army, implying the bearing of arms. 

1203. nforpft subs. fern, ivhat devours, consumes, war, from its 
destructive nature; from DH 7 ate, devoured; hence we speak of 
the devouring sword. Joshua says of the Canaanites, Numb. xiv. 9, 
DPI ^ftrH they (shall be) our meat, i. e. we shall consume them by 
war. 

1204. Dfttf with, or against them, comp. of D~ pron. affix and 
ftX ground form T\V\R see No. 4. 

1205. — Yer. 9. D*5/i& kings, plur. of *T^>Q ground form of the 
plur. *pti Gr. 109 J. ' 

1206— Yer. 10. Ibtl TT\^ mtf| (as to the vale of Siddim) 
tcells wells, or pits pits of bitumen, i. e. there were numerous 
pits of bitumen. The repetition of the word m$3 is an example 
of one of the methods used in Hebrew to compensate for the want 
of qualifying words, common in more copious languages ; plur. 
constr. of ^l&O subs. m. a well, a pit', the plur. is fern. 

1207. 5|DJ*1 comp. of •) and 3 plur. pres. kal of Dtt to flee, 
parad. 10; and ^IDJ 3 plur. pret, kal of the same. 

1208. ]/£P) and fell, comp. of -) and 3 plur. pres. kal of /^fell, 
parad. 5. 

1209. D^KBfoPl comp. of -n and plur. m. of part. niph. of *%W 
remained, tvas left, in niph. id. ITTI euph. causa, for rHPl comp, 
of Jl locale, and "IP! subs. m. a mountain. 

1210. — Yer. 11. S?pK their food, viands, comp. of pron. affix, 
and 73&? with accent /D&, ground form of 75& seg. (o) class, m. 
food. 



118 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xiv. 

1211. — Yer. 12. *)1tf constr. of UK a brother, the reason has 

. -. T 3 

been already given. 

1212. — Yer. 13. tO vSH one that had escaped, rcov avaacoSevroov ™?, 
LXX., comp. of «n artic. here used indefinitely, and lOvS) fugd 
elapsus, from £073 was smooth, slippery, id. qu. £07^3 hence the 
idea of escape, slipping out of one's hands, power, etc. 

1213. Itf) and told, comp. of •), and 3 sing. apoc. pres. hiph. of 
*T^5 was before, in ^?A. brought before, made knotvn, parad. 5. 

1214. pfc? (was) a dweller, i. e. ^tfas &^ dwelling, part. act. ^«? 
mas. of pfc? parad. 1. 

1215. D'TjlfcJ n^S j?25 lit. possessors, masters of a covenant, 
(league) of Abram, i. e. in alliance or in confederacy with Abram. 
constr. plur. of /J?5 seg. (a) class, m. 1. Lord, master, possessor; 
2. the God Baal; see similar expressions to that in the text, in 
chap.xxxvii. 19, Lord of dreams , addicted to dreaming, a dreamer; 
in chap. xlix. 23, Lords of arrows, i.e. archers; in 2 Kings i. 8, 
Lord of hair , a hairy man; in Prov. xxii. 24, Lord of anger, an 
angry man. 

1216. — Yer. 14. P1380 was taken captive, 3 sing. pret. niph. of 
rQw^ led captive, parad. 13. 

1217. p*V1 and he led out, comp. of •), S sing. m. apoc. pres. 
hiph. of p^ to evacuate, empty ; in hiph. to pour out, draw out, lead 
out (to battle), parad. 11, full form p*TJ, apoc. p*Tj, and with the 
accent removed p*V Gr.9 and 10, and 30 (&). 

1.218. 1*5^-50 his trained (ones, slaves), comp. of pron. aiF. V~ 
and plur. of T-?ft Gr. 49 and 74, from ^JJl put anything to the 
mouth, made one taste, imbued, instructed, prepared, trained, 
dedicated, from ^Pl the palate, ground form ^ll. 

1219. ifVl H V* lit. children of his house, born in his house. 
To such slaves only were arms entrusted, it being imagined that 
the fidelity of such slaves could be more relied on, than those who 
were not so. **!/?? constr. plur. of vT one born, a child, from 

*T begot, brought forth. 

1220. Sffi"1*! ai% d pursued; comp. of •) and 3 sing. pres. ^ of 
£]Tl pursued; with pron. afif. DiD^I*, ver. 15. 

1221— Yer. 15. tbh DH^ p^Pl*1 lit. awrf ^ rftwcfeeJ Amk- 
self against them by flight, i. e. and at night he formed his party 



Ver. IS — 18.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 119 

into divisions. p/fi*l comp. of •) and 3 sing. pres. niph. of p/Pl 



1222. V*liy. his servants, slaves, comp. of pron. aff. and plur. 
of 13JJ subs. m. seg. (a) class. Gr. 49, and 109J. 

1228. D3*l and smote them, comp. of •) and pron. aff. and *Sp 
apoc. pres. hiph. of PDJ parad. 13 and 5; full form J13IP and contr. 
according to the general rules applicable to parad. 5, 113! 

1224. pWfiT? 7tfft^ft lit. to the left, in reference to Damascus, 
i. e. to the north of Damascus. See No. 217. 

1225. p^pT? comp. of 7 and p^flpT, in pause for ptyWl., some- 
times written pE^ftTl Damascus. The dagesh in ft compensates 
for the absence of 1- 

1226. — Ver. 16. %&*) and caused to return, and brought bach, 
comp. of -I and 3 sing. pres. apoc. hiph. of *2W to return ; and 
^&?(1 3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of the same. 

1227. — Ver. 17. IHX'lp/ in occursum ejus, to meet him, comp. 
of 7 and pi on. aff. S and HfrOp, without the aff. H^p, Gr. 66. 67 ; 
and that contr. for fi^Hp, and that, owing to the gutturals, for 
^$*vp mnn - constr. of the seg. form, of K^P, cogn. TXlp met. See 
Prof. Lee's Lex. under X1p- 

1228. T\)3T]f2 from the smiting of, comp. of ft for -ft, Gr. 19; 
and inf. constr. hiph. of H^J, see No. 1223. 

1229.— Ver. 18. pl^Sft Melchizedek, i.e. either king of 
righteousness, or, if the * is regarded as a pron. affix, my king 
righteousness, i.e. my king (is) righteousness, i.e. righteous. See 
Glass. Phil. Sacr. p. 678 ; see also Eosenm. in loc, who assigns 
reasons for his preference for the former meaning. 

1230. D/G? Shalem, i. e. peace, subs. m. 

1231. N^!"! brought out, 3 sing. pret. hiph. of X^, parad. 8 and 
12, went out; in hiph. caused to go out, brought out, brought forth. 

1232. DH7 subs. c. seg. (a) class, bread. 

1233. J^J comp. of ) for -5, probably euph. causa, and J?* in 
pause for J^ wine. See No. 856. 

1234. |I1^ subs. m. The primary notion of this word seems to 
be that of doing the business of, or acting as the mediator for 
another ; hence, a priest, and, after the introduction of idolatry, a 
diviner ; hence, from the wealth and influence of such persons, 



120 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xiv. 18. 

a possessor of great wealth. See Prof. Lee's Lex., where an ex- 
cellent view is given of this word. 

1235. p vj?. most high, mas. from PHJ? ascended. 

1236. — Yer. 19. DJp the creator of, constr. of HJp part. act. kal, 
m. of Hip parad. 13. 1. created; 2. acquired ; 3. purchased. By 
the LXX. this word is rendered, o? eWtcre. 

1237. ^IPDI^I aw ^ blessed him, comp. of 1 and pron. affix ^H— 
and *T^\ 3 sing. pres. J9«A. of 1H3 parad. 3 ; the ult. foere lost on 
the removal of the accent to the union vowel. W^O part. pass, ^aZ 
of the same. 

1238. — Yer. 20. }|£? 3 sing. pret. j^'A. of j3£? parad. 1 ; not nsed 
in kal ; in pih. gave, delivered. 

1239. Tl¥ £Am<? enemies, comp. of pron. aff. 2 pers. and plur. of 
act. part, ^a? of 1^ parad. 10, fo tighten, bind, press, oppress. The 
expression of various kinds of trouble arises out of the notion of 
tightening, squeezing, binding ', pressing ; thus, straits, distress, stric- 
ture, from stringo ; torment, torture, from torqueo ; anxiety, from 
ango, etc. 

1240. bbfo ^1^35 a tenth part of everything-, 1$5??? subs. masc. 
tenth part, tithe, from *)ffiV. This is the first mention of tithes ; 
but from the manner in which the account is given, there can be 
little doubt, that priests were at this period in the habit of receiv- 
ing tithes. 

1241. — Yer. 21. J£l give, per sync, for |]"0 2 sing. masc. imp. 
kal of |f0 parad. 5. 

1242. $5,311 the life, the soul (souls), the people. 

1243. — Yer. 22. ^T *rtblQ 1 1 iam lifted up my hand, I have 
sworn, or / sivear. We hence perceive that the form of lifting up 
the hand in swearing is of great antiquity. 1 sing. pret. hiph of 
fi^l to be high ; in hiph., to make high, to raise, parad. 10. 

1244.— Yer. 23. hj& — WD DK i. e. Ttp$ D$. This and the 
preceding clause may be thus rendered, after filling up the ellipsis, 
i" have lifted up my hand to Jehovah (imprecating his judgments 
upon myself) if (I shall take) from thread (i. e. tie) even to shoe- 
latchet. The same form of expression is used in Psalm xcv. 11, to 
whom I sware in my wrath 1^2\ SK if they shall enter, i. e. that 
they shall not enter into my rest. The same idiom is adopted into 



Chap, xv.l.] THE BOOK OE GENESIS. 121 

the Greek in Heb. iii. 10, r /29 co/ioaa iv rfj opyfj fiov el elaekevcrov 
rat a? rr]v KaTCLiravdiv /nov. The full form of the expression may 
be seen in 1 Sam. xiv. 44, « God do so to me and more also/' etc. 

1245. fc^Ptt? comp. of £? Gr. 19, and fcD^Pl subs. m. a thread, a tie. 

1246. *VT\V? corrigia, a latchet, subs. masc. from ^T&P twisted, 
plaited, interwined. 

1247. 7$?3 subs. fern, a shoe, sandal, compare 7$?3 shut, fastened 
(with a holt), fortified; ?J?3 that into which the foot is fastened, or 
with which it is protected, a shoe, a sandal. 

1248. PipK 1 sing. pres. hal of Pip/ took, parad. 5 and 4. 

1249. Wll^Jjn I have made rich, 1 sing. pret. hiph. of I^JJ w#s 
ncA ; in 7^A. macfe ncA, parad. 2 and 4. 

1250— Ver. 24. *Tj£>3 comp. of ^ for 73 wo*, TJ, and * pron. 
aff. 1 person, lit. not as respects myself, i. e. I claim nothing for 
myself. 

1251. ^DJK Aflwra eaten, 3 plur. pret. A*#Z of /5^ parad. 7. 

1252. D^JJjn comp. of -Pi and plur. of *\]Q subs. masc. seg. {a) 
class, Gr. 109|, Greek irah, a boy, youth, servant, slave. 

1253. ^D/Pl 3 plur. pret. hal of ^]7Pl went, parad. 2. 

1254. 'iPlp? 3 plur. pres. A;«/, used imperatively, of Pip 7 parad. 5 
and 4, with dagesh implied in 7. 

1255. QP/Pl ^m' portion, comp. of D~ pron. aff. and P/Pl, 
ground form of p7Pl subs. m. seg. (<?) o^s, part, portion. 

1256.— Chap. xv. 1. PlptfPl D^JFJPI ")PlK lit. a/fer these sayings, 
things, ea de quibus sermo. 

1257. P1JPJ55 lit. in the vision, contr. for Pl.TPl&PlJ comp. of 3 
prep. -PI def. art. and PITPT& subs. m. what one sees, a vision, from 
PlTPl. The use of the article here probably arose out of the man- 
ner in which the patriarchs felt, and thought, and spoke upon 
such subjects. 

1258. Xyprhtifear not, K^fi 2 sing. pres. kal of ^ x feared, 
parad. 9. 

1259. litti — P9 *3JK lit. / (am) thy shield, thy reward (shall 
be) very great. This passage is correctly rendered in the LXX. 
'Eyco virepaorirl^a) crov, 6 fMtcrOos gov ttoXvs earai a<p6Spa. 

1260. JJtt subs. m. that which protects, a shield; ground form 
p3£? see Gr. 115 ; root \)& protected. 



XV. 



122 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 

1261. T? id. qu. T? to or for thee. 

1262. ^IJ^ comp. of pron. aff. and *\2W subs. m. hire, wages, 
reward. 

1262*. PI3T5 inf. ^A. of fi^H parad. 2 and 13, became much, 
was great ; used as an abstract noun, greatness, excess, i. e. accord- 
to our idiom, with 1X£?, exceedingly great. 

1263 — Yer.2. jfiPl W/£ ^ow ^u-e, 2 sing. masc. pres. ^aZ of [HJ 
<7a#e, parad. 5. 

1264. H*T2l v^ *3^1 ^^ -^ #° childless, i. e. sm'^ / am 
childless. Some render the word *n.?1Pl going, in the sense of 
dying, as we say in English, he is {/ewe, i. e. he is dead ; thus, 
" sine prole ex hac vita discedam," Dathe ; anroXvoyuai areicvos, 
LXX. This rendering, though allowable, seems to be unnecessary. 

1265. T?in part. act. masc. kal of ^[yH icent. 

1266. ^HJ? solitary, childless, from T1J7 cogn. PHJ? was naked. 

1267. Iffi yX — p^5"J3^ lit. tffttf 7 ^ sow of possession of my 
house, i. e. he who is about to possess my house, to be my heir. 
In the LXX. p&& is regarded as a proper name, and is understood 
to be Eliezer's mother, 6 Se vlbs Macre/c rrjs ol/coyevovs fiov. 

1268. pE^ft ; this word has greatly perplexed interpreters ; it is 
curat; \ey. The LXX., as has been shewn, regard it as a proper 
name. Some derive it from pj?^ discursitazit, and from the idea 
of running about and superintending others, attach the meaning of 

procuratio to it; hence the Yulgate renders it f litis procurations 
domus meae, i. e. my steward. But in the first place this derivation 
is quite at variance with the principles of the formation of the 
segolate nouns, which are not composed of any of the VJ^OEXH 
letters, but consist of three radicals, and, as I understand them, 
are all primitives. This view is objectionable in the second place, 
as it is not Abraham's intention to name his steward, but his heir. 
I prefer therefore rendering this word possessio, and p^ft"|3 
possessor, compare cogn. *$$fo possessed. This person is spoken 
of in the next verse as T^3" J3, who was to be his heir. It appears 
that then, as at present, in the East, a favourite slave was often 
made his master's heir in preference to his near relations. 

1268*. Tgp^J pb>OT Dammesek Eliezer, Prof. Lee's Lex. 
AaixavKos '.EXtefep, LXX., Damascus Eliezer, Jerome. 



Ver. 1—6.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 123 

1269.— Ver. 3. JTTJ werf, in pause for JTTJ Gr. 31 (3). 

1270. T\X G5HV lit. heiring me, i. e. is to 5e my heir, part. act. 
AaJ of t^T possessed, inherited, parad. 8. 

1271— Ver. 4. VTK — TH PI -HI lit. aw J fo, *Ae word of the 
Lord to him, "OH constr. of "OH a word. Gr. 94. 

1272. tJKH^ 5 ^#// ^ e / r ^^ shall be thine heir, comp. of pron. 
aff. ^, and 3 sing. pres. &«/ of G5HJ parad. 8, in pause *TC5H^. 

1273. ^Jffittyrom £% bowels, body, comp. of -fo, pron. aff., and 
U*J$D, plur. of nj£ft only used in the pi. mas. the intestines, the 
belly, the womb, the termination here lost, Gr. 49. 

1274.— Ver. 5. PfeftPlPl comp. of H art. Gr. 19, 11 locale affixed, 
and pn see No. 667. 

1275. fcO~t33Pl look, I pray thee, tOJII and with the accent b3H, 

2 sing. m. imp. Aa)?A. of \5*2,\, not used in kal, in A^pA. fcD*?Pl 
looked. 

1276. HD^^n towards the heavens, comp. of -Jl art., and Pi 
locale affixed, and D?D# heavens, with the accent on the penult., 
Gr. 29 (a). 

1277. "\h£ft and number, comp. of 1 before sh'va \ and 2 sing. 
m. imp. kal of H£jD parad. 4, scidpsit, insculpsit, numeravit, ab 
abradendo, puherem everrendo. Sic Latine pulverare, i. e. m 
pulvere numerare, et calculare, pro numerare ope calculorum. 
Solebant enim arithmetici calculationem inire in pulvere super 
tabula vel abaco, ut vocabant, tenuiter sparso, quern " eruditum 
pulverem," vocat Cic. Tusc. v. 23, vid. Winer's Lex., sub. voc. 

1278. zDV) thou canst, 2 sing. m. pres. AopA. of ?y potuit, in 
hoph. potens f actus est, parad. 8. 

1279. SjJpJ thy seed, in pause for tpp£ 

1280. — Ver. 6. JfiXPO aw*/ Ae believed, comp. of 1, and 3 sing, of 
J§NI only used in the Af^/i. leaned, rested upon, placed reliance upon, 
gave credit to, believed, parad. 7. 

1281. PQfc^n!! and he imputed it, comp. of •) and pron. aff. fern. 

3 pers., here used where we should use the neuter, see No. 370, 
and ^&?IT the kholem being lost on the removal of the accent to 
the aff., with the rough enunciation, 3 sing. m. pres. fad of 2ptl 
putavit, 2.putavit in the sense of habuitpro; 3. imputavit aliquid 
alicui. 



124 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xv. 

1282. — Yer. 7. ^fl^lJl I have brought thee, comp. of tlie pron. 
aff. 1 sing. pret. hiph. of &W went out, in hiph. caused to go out, 
brought out, parad. 8 and 12. 

1283. T\Tw to give, comp. of 7 before the accented syllable 7, 
and DT), contr. for Jljfl, and that for H^HJ, Gr. 39 ; Lee's Gr. 76. 

1284. frfl$ j? ^ possess it, comp. of 7 and pron. aff. ft— and 
fit£H, ground form of T\W*) mi contr. for flgh*, infin. constr. of Bhj, 
parad. 8. 

1284 .*— Yer. 8. PIJ&3 fy what, how. 

1285. nifeJH^ / shall inherit, possess it, comp. of pron. aff., J 
epenth., and 1 sing. m. pres. hal of Wit parad. 8. 

1286. — Yer. 9. Mllp take, comp. of T\ parag. and FljJ, the vowel 
being lost on the removal of the accent ; contr. for Plp7 Gr. 39 ; 
2 sing. m. imp, hal of Hp7 took, parad. 5. 

1287. Tw$l : a young cow, subs. fern. ; the masc. form not found 
in the Scriptures, probably a primitive. See the derivation given 
in Ges., Winer, and other Lexicons. 

1288. Ttifawft of three years old, puh. part. fern, of Vh& not in 
use; Vfcftlp pih. divided into three parts ; ip&rt.puh. m. &v&fo three- 
fold, three years old. Gr. 81. 82. 

1289. TJ$ and a goat, comp. of \ and ?$?, Gr. ail;; subs. fern, 
ground form TTJJ. Gr. 116. 

1290. /W. and a ram, comp. of \ and 7*K subs. masc. The 
original idea in this word appears to be that of might, strength, 
and the like ; hence it is applied to God, to false gods, to heroes 
or mighty men ; to the pine or terebinth trees ; to rams, as being 
the strongest of the flock ; and to the lintel or arch over a door or 
window, which supports the superincumbent wall. See Prof. 
Lee's Lex. 

1291. IT)) and a turtle dove, comp. of \ and ID or *f)F\ subs. m. 
tur-tur, a tur-tle (dove), so called probably from its cry. 

1292. /TO 1 ) and a young pigeon, comp. of ) and /TI3 subs. masc. 
According to Ges. and Winer, from an Arabic word which sig- 
nifies pipire. 

1293. — Yer. 10. IFd — 17"TO*1 lit. and he took all these and cut 
them through the midst, and he set, man his division to meet his 
neighbour, but the bird (birds) he did not cut in twain; i.e. and he 



Ver.7— 12.] THE BOOK OE GENESIS. 125 

took all these and divided each animal into two equal parts, and 
set the one half of each animal over against the other half, but the 
birds he divided not. See Levit. i. 17 ; Jer. xxxiv. 18, 19; and 
No. 689. 

1294. "lfO?! comp. of -) and 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of ^lHS, which 
see at the close of the verse ; dissecuit, parad. 4, only used in this 
verse. 

1295. 1in3 comp. of pron. an . 1 and ^\T\2, ground form of ^UftS 
m. seg. (i) class, section, division. 

1296. *li^n the bird, birds, comp. of «Pl article, and *13¥ masc. 
a bird, written in full TlSV No. 719. 

1297. — Ver.ll. b^H the bird of prey, i.e. birds of prey, comp. 
of H art., Gram. 19, and t0)2 subs. masc. a ravenous beast, or bird-, 
compare t3^ to rush with violence. 

1298. D^$)!l the carcases, comp. of -Jl and plur. abs. of "l^S? 
a carcase, dead body, ground form of the plur. 13$, Gram. 109 \ ; 
compare "l^ became languid, dull, lifeless ; and Lat. piger. 

1299. ^W*\ et exsujfflavit, comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. pres. apoc. 
hiph. of UKO blew ; in hiph. made to blow, he drove away by blow- 
ing, by a whistling noise. The mention of the birds of prey 
coming upon the carcases of the beasts sacrificed, is thought by 
some to have been ominous of the different enemies that would 
attack Abram's posterity. 

1300.— Ver. 12. frO^? WW H W lit. and the sun was to go, 
i. e. and the sun was on the eve of setting ; ire pi he rfklov Sva/xa^, 
LXX., which expresses the idea very correctly. 

1301. ^ftfc^n the sun, comp. of -H and $1$$ subs, m.; sometimes 
fern., the sun, seg. (i) class. 

1302. NIj? comp. of 7 before the tone syllable 7, andinfin. hal 

of aia- 

1303. 1y5J- — T\iy& T\^T\\ lit. and, lo, terror! great darkness 
falling upon him ; i. e. and, lo, it inspired him with terror : great 

darkness fell upon him. This terror was created by the prophetic 
annunciation, in the following verse, of the afflictions of his 
posterity in Egypt, and was increased in consequence of the 
thick darkness in which he was enveloped. It will be perceived 
that there is a disjunctive accent upon the word Pl^X, which 



126 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xv. 12. 

shews that it should be separated from rO^Pl, and that it is not in 
the constr. state, which the rendering of the Authorised version 
would require. 

1304. n^K subs. fern, terror. 

T 

1305. rO^H subs. fern, darkness ; root ^H. 

1306. H/§^ fern, of act. part, kal of 7^1 fell, parad. 5, masc. 7§3. 
1307. — Ver. 13. JTJ? JHJ in knowing thou shalt know, i. e. know 

for certain ; J£T inf. abs. and JHfl 2 sing. pres. kal of J?T parad. 8 
and 4. 

1308. 13 stranger, subs, m, verb 11H to turn aside from one's 
way with a view of resting, refreshing one's self, to sojourn as a 
stranger ; Lat. diversari, and noun, diversorium, a place to which 
strangers turn aside for rest and refreshment. 

1309. DH7 «? 1*1^? in a land not theirs, i. e. the land of 

1310. D^H!iy5 and they (thy posterity) shall serve them, i. e. the 
inhabitants of that land. Dlljfi for °Cv ^55J 3 P lur - P ret - ^ 
of 13J? parad. 2, served. 

1311. DH& ! lllj?1 <m^ ^Aey (the Egyptians) sAaZ/ <2^'c£ £^m (thy 
posterity) , ^ty\ comp. of ) and 3 plur. pret. pih. of HJ^ afflicted. 

1312.— Yer. 14, *lh$C 'shall serve, in pause for 115J£ 3 plur. 
pres. ,&«/ of 13J? parad. 2, served, Gr. 31. 

1313. *J3^ |1 lit. judging I, I judge, I punish, i.e. will punish ; 
fl part. act. m. £•«/ of pi, |11 or pi parads. 10, 11, to contend with, 

judge, punish, from the connection between the sentence of the 
judge and the punishment of the criminal. 

1314. 7113 ^?15 with great wealth, referring probably to their 
spoiling of the Egyptians ; comp. of 3 before sKva 3 and fcJOl, in 
full fc^DI, property, wealth, already noticed. 

1315. — Ver. 15. "TCDNt thy fathers, comp. of pron. aff. and 
constr. plur. of 3& a father ; the plur. is of the fern, form fi*D&$, 
constr. IYDX. 

1316. UT>^ peace, subs. m. 

1317. T\y'p subs. f. and y& m. whiteness, white hair, old age. 

1318. niltD fern, of 21tD good. 

1319. — Ver, 16. 111*1 comp. of ) and 111 subs. m. an age, gene- 
ration, a circle (of years) ; cogn. Ill a circle, a ball. It should 



Chap.xvi.2.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 127 

seem from what is said in ver. 13, that *VH in this passage, em- 
braces a period of one hundred years. 

1320. to^ shall return, 3 plur. m. pres. kal of 1W to return, 
parad. 10. 

1321. T\$r\ hither, comp. of Jf— versus, and |Pl see, behold. 

1322. tbw m. perfect, full 

1323— Ver. 17. HKIt &t$ H Wl lit. «wc? # came to j^ss, the 
sun went down, flXlIl W1 seems to be equivalent to frOFfi ; *"^? 
3 sing. fern. pret. hal of X1H ; had it been the fern, of the participle 
the accent would have been on the ult. syllable. 

1324. ntp7j!Q and thick darkness, comp. of ) and flippy subs, 
fern., no masc. form is extant. 

1335. *TlJ)J5 a furnace, subs, m., compare 1)} Chald.^rc. Some 
think that the furnace here mentioned is a symbolical intimation of 
the servitude which the Israelites were to undergo in Egypt, 
which is elsewhere called a furnace of iron ; and that the lamp of 
fire is an emblem of their deliverance. 

1336. y$h lamp, IStib Chald., XafMTr^ Gr., lamp, Eng.; j^J? 
sub. m. smoke. 

1337. m subs, com.fre. 

1338. ^53£ 3 sing. m. pret, kal of *\!l]£ passed. The lamp of fire 
passing between the divisions of the sacrifice, is a symbol of God's 
becoming a party to the covenant, of his ratification of it, and of 
his engagement to fulfil the promises embraced in it. 

1339. D^tiin the divisions , pieces (of the animals), plur. of *)!;}. 
segmentum, pars. m. not used in the sing., verb ^T5 cut. 

1339. — Ver. 18. JV15 — UTS cut a covenant, i. e. made a covenant. 

• ; -t 3 

see No. 689, 3 sing. m. pret. kal of JT13 cut. 

1340. ^lPlJ river of, constr. of lillj subs. m. a river, Gr.94. 
1341— Chap. xvi. 1. JVMb fern, of n#? an Egyptian. 

1342. *\%n lit. flight, fugitive, pr. name Hagar. A surname 
which probably arose out of the circumstances of her history, and 
not her original name, as frequently happened among the Hebrews. 

1443. flTplb — ^1¥g hath shut me up from bearing, i. e. hath 
made me to be barren. 

1344— Ver. 2. *JTMg comp. of the pron. aff. ^~T and 3 sing. m. 



128 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xvi. 

pret. kal of I^S? parads.2and4, the penult, vowel lost on account 
of the removal of the accent. 

1345. nf?ti comp. of -j& and TT^ per sync, for MH^ Gr. 39, 
inf. constr. of \7^ brought forth ; 3 sing. pret. fern, ill? verse 1, 
parad. 8. 

1346. K2 go, 2 sing. m. imp. kal of K1S to go, written in full 
K13- 

1347. *TlNcomp. of IK and ^ = ^, K 1 ?, tfS **>*» Prof. Lee 
translates the whole passage thus, Go in now, or I shall not bear by 
her, Lex., sub. voc. v*l&$. 

1348. nJ5^ 1 s i n g- pres. niph. of H^S, parad. 13, built. 1 shall 
be built up, i.e. have offspring through her. To build up one's 
brother's house, is to have a child by the widow of a deceased 
elder brother, who died without issue. See Deut. xxv. 9. See 
Introduction, Part I., in reference to Manners and Customs. 

1349.— Ver. 3. T)^ 1 ? comp. of S and T°\%$, contr. for fD^, 
Gr. 39 ; inf. constr. kal of ^^, parad. 8. 

1350. XP\T\\ comp. of A and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of |f0 gave, 
parad. 5. 

1351. — Ver. 4. "Hi?! and she conceived, or became pregnant, 
comp. of ■) and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal apoc. of TpH, parad. 2, 3, and 
13; full form HT^, Gr. 37. 

1352. fcOfll comp. of A and 3 sing. fern. apoc. pres. hal of M^O 
saw, parads. 2, 3, and 13; full form JlNHF), apoc. SOft, Gram. 37. 
According to the principles of the formation of segolates, £Ofa, 
Gr. 104. 105 ; and further, euph. causa. fcOJ^ Gr. id. 

1353. nn'T.n had conceived, in pause for np^.O^ Gr. 31 ; 3 sing, 
fern. pret. kal of PHil, No. 1251. 

1354. /pffl and was despised, comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. pres. 
hal of /7p, parad. 6, was /?^A£, was lightly regarded, was despised', 
and /P&, 1 sing. pres. >W of the same, ver. 6. 

1355. FTfllJ? her mistress, comp. of pron. aff. and Pfl^ ground 
form of rnjll subs. fern. seg. {%) class ; the masc. form not in use; 
root 155 vis, vires, hence vir ; with pron. aff. of 1 pers. ^fHJil ver. 9. 

1356. — Ver. 5. "TyJJ *P^0 lit. my wrong upon thee, or thine my 
wrong, i. e. thou art the cause of the wrong which I suffer, in that 
thou dost not discountenance and repress her insolence ; " tuum 



Ver. 2— 8.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 129 

est injuriam mihi illatam ulcisci/ 9 Dathe; 'ASucov/jlcli i/c gov, LXX. 
" inique agis contra me," Vulg. ^P^f] may either mean the wrong 
which I do, or the wrong which I suffer, No. 542; comp. of pron. 
affix 1 pers. and Dft)l subs. m. violence, injury, wrong. 

1857. TO^nj into thy bosom, comp. of 3 prep, and pron aff. *?[ 
and p*H. The primitive notion of this word seems to be that of 
surrounding, hence embracing, hence the bosom. 

1858. ^Jin^^ my maid servant, or slave, comp. of pron. aff. and 
7\n$& subs, fern., Gr. Art. 99 (5), constr. T\T\%P v. 8, Gr. 94, 95. 

1359. bb^J 3 sing. pres. kal of t05&> ^x^di.l, judged, 
1360.— Ver. 6. *PJj do, 2 sing. fern. imp. kal of Plfe>J£ parads. 2 
and 13, made, did. 

1361. rpSJJjftl and afflicted her, treated her harshly or cruelly, 
comp. of -J and pron. aff. 3 pers. fern., and 3 sing. fem. pres. pih. 
of PtiJJ parads. 2 and 13, full form Hllgfi. 

1362. n*l3P3 <wm^ she fled, comp. of -) and 3 sing. fem. pres. kal 
of rnS parads. 3 and 4. 1. passed, passed through ; 2. fled, 

1363. — Ver. 7. ftfc^frM and found her, comp. of •) and pron. aff. 
S pers. fem., and 3 sing. pres. kal of &¥ft parad. 12, found. 

1364. ^X/5 constr. of ^/9 subs. m. he whom one sends on an 
errand, a messenger, angel, from *H^/ obs. legavit. The angel here 
spoken of is called Jehovah in ver. 13. 

1365. *W — D^n yythjl by the fountain of water in the 
desert, by the fountain in the tvay of Shur, D^H PJJ[ would, accor- 
ding to our idiom, be D?Q P.3^* The situation of Shur is un- 
certain. 

1366— Ver. 8. 'TBK^ another form of 1&K*3 Lee's Gr. 199 (4). 

1367. nj??-*X lit. where from this, i. e. ichence, ''X constr. of *& 
originally a subs. sig. residence, see No. 354. 

1368. PlJ£? comp. of -12 from, and PlJ £A«s. 

1369. JlXl 2 sing. pret. kal of N13 to come, parads. 10 and 12. 

1370. fiJK adv. whither. 

1371. O/fl in pause for *5?fi Gr.31, 2 sing. fem. pres. &#/ of 
^ parad. 8. 

1372. nrni *}}« lit. J a fleer, I fleeing, I flee, TsXTp. fem. of 
the act. part, kal of TT^ fled. 

9 



130 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xvi. 9. 

1378.— Ver. 9. *5^ 2 sing. fern. imp. hal of M# to r^wm, 
parad. 10. 

1374. "U1 *3J8!W. ^^ humble thyself wider her hands, and submit 
thyself to her authority, comp. of 1 and 2 sing. fern, imper. hith. of 
Mig see No. 1361. 

13T5. — Ver. 10. HIHK Pl^nn in multiplying I tvill multiply, 
i. e. I will greatly multiply, see Introduction, Part III., on the 
subject of Adverbs; n^H inf. abs. hiph. of ("D^ parad. 13, and 
n^'lK 1 sing. pres. hiph. of the same. 

1376. 1|D£>? is?) and shall not he numbered, pro numerari non 
poterit, Storr, p. 16 (4) ; see chap, xxxii. 13; and Glass, p. 197 ; 
3 sing. in. pres. niph. of 1§B, see No. 1277. 

1377. 2,112 lit. from multitude, owing to its number, comp. of -12 
before 1, 12 Gr. 19, and 2T\ inf. hal of 221 parads. 2 and 6, here used 
as a subs. 

1378. — Ver. 11. "U1 PHPl T^Pl lit. behold thee pregnant, and the 
bringer forth of a son, and lo thou (art) pregnant, and shalt bring 
forth a son. 

1379. fnn fern. part. act. hal of Tl^l conceived. 

1380. firfe ground form of trff fern, of 1^ act. part, kal of 
*V* parad. 8, this form is very unusual. 

1381. JWjjj 2 sing. fern. pret. hal of tf1j3 parads. \2 and 3. 

1382. httyt$! , i Ishmael, i. e. GW heareth, comp. of J?&^ 3 sing, 
m. pres. hal of $12$ parad. 4, and /X God. 

1383. ^.55? (hon-yech~), thine affliction, comp. of pron. aff. 2pers. 
fern., and ^JJ ground form of ^ subs. m. affliction. 

1384. — Ver. 12. DTK &OJ5 onager homo, a man with the wild and 
roaming propensities of the wild ass. SO§ subs. m. a W/cZ ass. 

1385. pg» Vnjjf^l ^5 hjti and he shall dwell before the face 
of all his brethren, i. e. he shall dwell to the eastward of his 
brethren. "Constat Ismaelitas regiones Hebraeis orientales in- 
habitasse, unde XT]tT s ^2 filii orientis vocantur, E-os.; see No. 217, 
and chap xxv. 18, and Jos. xv. 8, quoted by Ros. to justify this 
rendering of ^W^_. 

1386. — Ver. 13. BOpftJ and she called, comp. of •) and 3 sing, 
fern. pres. hal of SOD. 



Chap.xvii.2.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 131 

1387. IJ^n lit. the speaker, i. e. who spoke, comp. of -H art. and 
part, act kal m. of 1^ spoke, parad. 4. 

1388. *K^J 7& HF\tf, thou God of vision, i. e. who revealest thy- 
self, Prof. Lee, *&*! subs. m. vision, in pause ^1 see ver. 14. 

1389. ")y\ W^ Q^l] do I still live after vision, i.e. after having 
seen God; according to Onkelos, "etiam ego mansi videns post- 
quam manifestavit sese mihi." The Jews, and the ancients 
generally, believed that they could not survive after seeing God: 
Hagar therefore mentions the circumstance here narrated, as a 
peculiar instance of God's mercy. See chap.xxxii. 31, Jud.xiii.22, 
Isa. vi. 5, etc. 

1390. TPfcO 1 sing. pret. kal of n&O saw. In other languages, 
as well as Hebrew, this word is used in the sense of living. See 
Ges. Lex. 

1391.— Ver. 14. IKbS fcnj5 (one) called the well, i.e. the well 
was called. Fr. on nommoit. 3 sing. pret. kal of $Op called. 

1392. 1K$S contr. for ^SH?, comp. of S art, -H and IKS a 
well. Gr. 35. 

1393. ^h *fl7 1&3 the tcell of life, of vision, i.e. where one 
sees God and yet lives ; ''Ft/ contr. for ^HiT?, Gr. 35 ; comp. of 7 
and -Jl and ^H life, subs. m. 

1394. — Ver. 16. JVf?5 *» the bringing forth of, comp. of 5 and 
tVlh contr. for tvh\ inf.'constr. kal of *1T parad. 8. Gr. 39.' 

1395. D'TjJfcjt? to Abram; according to our idiom, to him. See 
Introduction, Part III., on the subject of Pronouns. 

1396. — Chap. xviLl. **W m. Almighty ; root uncertain. See 
Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1397. ^pLinn walk (before me), 2 sing. m. imp. hith. of T?5l, 
parad. 2; the hith. form implies habit — to walk habitually before 
God (realising God's continual presence) is to lead a godly life. 

1398. (TH} and be thou, comp. of \ which is pointed with segol, 
on the supposition that stiva is here substituted for khatef segol, 
thus iTn}, Gr. 125. (4); and 2 sing. m. imp. kal of STH, parad. 13. 

1399. — Ver. 2. i"D£}&0 comp. of \ and l"I parag. and 1 sing. pres. 
kal of jrO gave, placed, used here in the sense of entered into. " I 
will place my covenant between me and between thee," i. e. I will 
enter into a covenant with thee. 



132 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xvii. 

1400. I&fe *T£$£?3 lit. with excess of excess, comp. of 5 before 
sA'm5andh^?,'No.l79. 

1401— Ver. 8. *\h$h contr. for ^S, Gr. 50. (5j; comp. of *? 
before the comp. sh'va 7, Gr. 126. (d); and *1DK inf. constr. hal of 
*"©^ said, parad. 7. 

1402. — Ver. 4. "1H1 n^H *JN lit. I, behold my covenant ivith thee; 
the pronoun 7" is in the absolute state of construction, which, as 
has been observed, is very common in Hebrew, and may be resolved 
into an expression somewhat similar to the Lat. quod ad me attinet ; 
or to the French, quant a moi; and to the Engl, as for me. 

1403. ")S\ 15w T\^T\\ lit. and thou shalt he for a father, i.e. a 
father; see Rom. iv. 17, 18. 

1404. Jl&n constr. of JtoPt subs, masc, from Jl^Pl- 1. fermented, 
as wine ; 2. moved, as the bowels by pain, affection, grief, anger ; 
2. roared, raged, as the sea — as an enraged people. Hence, the 
noun signifies — 1. moving of the bowels, affection; 2. musical 
sounds, expressive of the emotion of joy; 3. multitude, as in com- 
motion. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1405— Ver. 5. Dill?^ com P- of }taO" D T^ i.e. father of ex- 
altation of multitude, i. e. exalted father of multitudes ; contracted 

t t ; - 

1406. ^ftfO lit. I have given thee (to be), i.e. I have made thee, 
and the same as, shall make thee; comp. of ^ and 1 sing. pret. hal 
of Jfi3 parad. 5. The simple form is ^HJ, the kamets lost in con- 
sequence of the removal of the accent to the pron. aff. 

1407. — Ver. 6. W'lSni an ^ I ^ ave made thee fruitful, see 
No. 1406 ; comp. of \ and 1 sing. pret. hiph. of il^3, parad. 3 and 
13. See No. 87. 

1408. IKX* shall go out, descend, in pause for Wlf.j Gram. 31 ; 
3 plur. pres. kal of fcW, parad. 8, toent out. 

1409.— Ver. 7. WpHI comp. of 1, here ), Gram. 125 (4); and 
1 sing. pret. hiph. of ti)p, parad. 10, to stand; in hiph. to cause to 
stand, to establish. 

1410. DfiTP comp. of 7 and pron. aff. D~ and fiTl, in full 
fflTn, Gr. 34 ; plur. of *\)1 sub. m. a generation, which has like- 
wise the masc. form D^^, No. 643. 



Ver.. 2— 11.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 133 

1411. nVir? comp. of 7, here 7, and inf. constr. kal of ITM was, 
parad. 13. 

1412. — Ver. 8. V'TSfi lit. thy sojourning <s. The plur. perhaps is 
designed to express the idea of his unsettled mode of life, and his 
moving about from place to place. Comp. of the pron. aff. and 
plur. of l^fe with kibhuts vicarious; the penult, vowel being 
moveable is lost on the removal of the accent to the pron. affix, 
according to the general rule, and the pi. termination is dropped 
to make way for the affix, Gram. 49. *))%£ where one sojourns, a 
place of sojourning, from ^fiH to sojourn. 

1413. D/ty n-tn^7 for a possession of perpetuity, for a per- 
petual possession, to be limited only by their breach of the covenant 
made with them, and contrasted with the nature of the tenure 
under which Abraham had held it. D/1J? vid. infra No. 1774. 

1414. rWlX? comp. of 7, here 7, Gr. 125 (4); and constr. of 
PJC^ subs. fern. 1. seizure', 2. possession. See this word noticed 
at the end of Introduction, Part I. Root THK seized. 

1415. — Ver. 10. ")$] D37 /VSH lit. that be circumcised to you 
the totality of male, i.e. that all your males be circumcised. 
"Animadverti debetur, circumcisionis ritum, sicut apud Abra- 
hamidas, ita quoque apud iEgyptios, actum fuisse religiosum, 
signum et veluti tesseram singularis in religione puritatis et cas- 
timoniae : quare imprimis sacerdos, mysteriis religionis initiandus, 
ad circumcisionem tenebatur." Vid. Jablonski. Pantli. iEgypt. 
Prolegg. p. 14, quoted by Rosen. 

1416. 7lftH inf. niph. of 7^, parad. 10, cog. 7??J and 7?fo prae- 
cidere (praeputium). 

1417. ^l&BT) ye shall keep, 2 pi. m. pres. kal of ■")&$ parad. 4, kept. 
1418. — Ver. 11. DJfiy^J? — CDJR/Q^ lit. and you shall cut aivay 

the flesh of your foreskin ; tliis is explanatory of the last words 
of the preceding verse ; Dp/53 8 plur. masc. pret. kal of /fo}, see 
No. 1416. 

1419. bjHv^y comp. of pron. aff. S3 and constr. form of rH/JJ 
fern, the foreskin ; masc. form not in use. 

1420. DW J"0k#~J3 « son of an eighth of days, a male child 
eight days old ; because, probably, it was not sooner able to bear 
the operation. 



134 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xvii 

1421. b\& m 3 sing. pres. niph. of ^ti No. 1416, 
1422 — Ver. 12. h?| T 1 ?? see No. 1219; h?| in pause for JY5 
Gr.31. 

1423. 153 — ^)53 ftSpW lit. #ft^ the acquisition of silver from 
any son of a stranger, i. e. he that is purchased by money from 
any stranger. It seems from this and other passages of Genesis, 
that though gold was known at this time as a precious metal, and 
manufactured into ornaments, silver only was current as money. 
It appears, likewise, that at this period slaves were bought and 
sold. 

1424. fQp?? constr. of H3DD penult, vowel immoveable, Gr. 62 
and 95, subs. fern, what one gams, acquisition, purchase, from ftJP. 

1425. t)53 subs, com., ground form £jD3 see ver. 13, seg. (a) 
class : 1. silver; 2. money generally; hence, from the eagerness 
with which money is coveted, the verb S]D3 desired. I regard 
the former and not the latter word as the root. 

1426. 153 su b s - niasc. a stranger, foreigner. 

1427. — Ver. 13. DSI^OS — nJVfil and my covenant shall be in 
your flesh, i. e. the seal of my covenant; an evidence of the faithful 
fulfilment of its conditions on my part, and a memorial of the ob- 
ligations to be fulfilled by you. 

1428. I^l ASH- e t mas m i est praeputium, i. e. and the uncir- 
.cumcised male ; 7*TJ£ m. praeputiatus. 

1429. nri'lp^ 1 ) and shall be cut off, comp. of ) and 3 sing. fern, 
pret. niph. of rH3 cut off, parad. 3. 

1430. *\§T\ in pause for *)£?} 3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of *0& cogn. 
■"AS broke. 

1431. nb (as for) Sarai, see No. 1402, and ver. 9, where T\Ftog\ 
is construed in the same way. 

1432. rn&? Sarah. According to Rosen, the former signifies 
noble, the latter expresses the idea of the mother of a numerous 
offspring ; this meaning is drawn from an Arabic cognate word. 
According to Jerome, quoted by Ros. " Causa nominis immutati 
haec est, quod antea dicebatur princeps mea, unius tantum domus 
mater familias, postea vero absolute dicitur princeps" 

1433. — Ver. 16. MyO*]?^ and I will bless, comp. of ^1 and 1 sing, 
pret. pih. of IDS blessed, parad. 3. 






Ver. 11—20.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 135 

1434. — Ver. IT. pHV* in pause for p^V. 8 sing. m. pres. kal of 
pH¥ laughed. 

1435. IS?? *» &** heart y comp. of 5 and pron. aif. 1 and 2b, 
contr. for 33?j> ground form of ^7 the heart. Gr. 72. 

1436. iS'ft — !W HK?? |5^H lit. Shall (a son) Je horn to a son 
of an hundred year (years), and (as for) Sarah, shall a daughter of 
ninety years hear (a son) ; reference being made to the birth of a 
son, mentioned in the preceding verse. 

1437. J3?n comp. of H interrog. particle sometimes pointed as 
the article before words commencing with sli'va, etc. Prof. Lee's 
Gr. 179 (4 and 5); and / prep, and constr. of J3 a son. 

1437*. *T7J* 3 sing. masc. pres. niph. of y>\, parad. 8. Many of 
the forms of this verb suppose a cognate form \?) ; *!/J? 3 6ing. 
pres. kal of the same. 

1438. — Ver. 18. T? likewise written XV?, here used as an inter- 
jection, with the meaning of the Latin words, O si — utinam. 

1439.— Yer. 19. S^X adv. indeed, certainly. 

1440. T\y7^ lit. a bringer forth, i. e. is about to bring forth ; 
part. fern. act. hot of \)\ The renewal of the promise in this 
verse that Sarah should bring forth a son, appears to be for the 
purpose of removing a doubt from Abraham's mind, which was 
delicately expressed in the preceding verse in the words, « O that 
Ishmael may live before thee;" as if he had said, I have difficulty 
in bringing myself to believe that Sarah shall have a son, but I 
pray thee, Lord, to preserve and bless Ishmael. To which the 
Lord replies, " Verily thy wife Sarah shall bear a son," etc. 

1441. pn¥! Isaac, i. e. laughter, see No. 1434. 

1442.— Yer. 20. ^ft$?# I have heard thee, comp. of pron. aff. 
and 1 sing. pret. kal of J???^ the kamets under the first radical is 
lost on the removal of the accent to the pron. affix. 

1443. ^JVJflPlI an d I will multiply, comp. of 1, and 1 sing. pret. 
hiph. of PD*") parad. 2 and 13, ivas numerous, in hiph. made numerous, 
multiplied. 

1444. D&OI30 princes, plur. abs. of &$*M subs, m., one raised 
above another, a prince, from KBJO raised. 

1445. 1 vV shall he beget, 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of \?l parad. 8. 



136 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xyii.21. 

1446. — Ver. 21. D*W 1 sing. pres. hiph. of Q^p to stand, mhiph. 
to cause to stand, to establish, par ad. 10. 

1447. ")y\ njn Hjhu? lit. at this set time in the next year, contr. 
for Tgia-iT? Gr. 35. See No. 100. 

1448. nnHNn comp. of H for -H Gr. 19; and fern, of IHK erffor, 
with dagesh implied in hheth, Gr. 19. 

1449.— Ver. 22. S^J am? ewoW, cccfscrf. See No. 183. 

1450. — Ver. 23. /fijl ^^ circumcised, comp. of -5, and 3 sing. 
pres. AW of 7*© parad. 10; the ult. vowel shortened on account of 
the removal of the accent to the penult, syllable, Gr. 30 (b). 

1451.— Ver.24. 1&Z constr. of ^m flesh, Gr.94. 

1452. ^5^ had spoken, 3 sing. pret. pih. of 131 spoke, parad. 4, 
inf. pih. ^5^- Scottice, dabber, to talk much in disputing. 

1453. — Ver. 25. i/ftH? lit. in his being circumcised, i. e. when he 
was circumcised, comp. of 5 and pron. aff. ), and inf. hiph. of yS|& 
See No. 1450. 

1454. — Ver. 27. r?fo) were circumcised, 3 plur. pret. of an 
anomalous form of the niph. conjugation, apparently made up of 
the cognate verbs /Q3 and /)fo- 

1455. — Chap.xviii. 1. \R°f\ and appeared, comp. of -\ and 3 sing, 
m. apoc. pres. niph. of H50 saw, fully written Htf "V parads. 2, 3, 
and 13. 

1456. "Wl nn§ !l$* Will lit. awe/ Ae storcgr (in) £Ae entrance of 
the tent at the heat of the day. It will be observed that the pre- 
position is omitted before T\T& ; see Introduction, Part III., on the 
subject of Prepositions. 

1457. D'PI subs. m. heat. See No. 809. 

1458. — Ver. 2. D^5^3 standing, plur. masc. part. niph. of S¥3 
parad. 5, placed, in niph. placed o?ie ! s self, stood. 

1459. V'Tjl awe/ raw, comp. of -J and 3 sing. pres. AW of j^H 
parad. 10. See No. 1450. 

1460. ^iMp^l awe? bowed himself, comp. of -V, and 3 sing. m. pres. 
hith. of ingV another form of TtilW, contr. for. *jr7jn^^ Gr. 50 (2), 
and 46, dagesh is implied in kheth, Gr. 19, teA. being a dageshed 
conjugation. 

1461. — Ver. 3. "D^n 2 sing. masc. pres. AW of ^55? parads. 2 
and 4, 



Chap.xviii.6.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 137 

1462. — Ver. 4. Hj?? let there be taken, 3 sing. masc. pres. pah. of 
ftp7 P ara ds. 5 and 4. 

1463. fcjg? a little, subs. m. 

1464. WVl was/*, 2 plur. m. imp. £y?7 of T^PH washed, parad. 2 
and 3. 

1465. Dy7«T] your feet, comp. of pron. an ., and constr. plur. of 
Tj 1 ] the foot, com. seg. (a) class, ground form ^H- 

1466. WS^HI #W fean yourselves, recline, comp. of ), and 2 plur. 
masc. imp. niph. of |J?BP not used in kal, parad. 3; dagesh is here 
implied in JJ, Gr. No. 19. 

1467. pjp £Ae £ree, some particular tree, beside which the tent 
was pitched for the benefit of its shade. 

1468. — Ver. 5. Hllp^l (v'e-k'khaJi), and let me take, comp. of \, 
and J! parage and 1 sing. pres. kal of HD7 foo&, parad. 5. 

1469. HS a piece, Lat. frustum, subs, fern., ground form Hp^ 
a fragment, piece, verb fiflS Jro/se. See Gr. 115. 

1470. ^nyp refresh (your hearts), i. e. (yourselves), 2 plur. mas. 
imp. kal of iyjD parad. 3, supported, sustained, refreshed; bread is 
hence called the staff of life. 

1471. ^n^gf) ye shall pass (on), in pause for ^525 2 plur. m. 
pres. kal of ly^jxtssed, parads. 2 and 4. 

1472. ")$) |3~/JT^ Idcirco enim declinastis ad sermm tuum, 
i. e. opportune accidit ut meum tentorium transieritis j conf. cap. 
xix.8, xxxiii. 10, xxxviii.26, Eos. 

1473. £3^39 2 plur. m. pret. kal of 13£ 

1474. DJ^JS comp. of graye aff. and HJJJ, ground form of 13JJ 
seg. (a) class. 

1475. JjHS'l 2 sing. masc. pret. pili. of ll^' 

1476. — Ver. 6. "lPl/EM and hastened, comp. of ) and 3 sing. masc. 
pres. pih. of ^JPlft, parad. 3 and 4; dagesh is implied in the pathakh, 
Gr. 19 ; and 'HHft 2 sing. fern. imp. kal of the same. 

1477. D*KD measures, plur. of H^p subs, fern., supposed to con- 
tain the third part of an ephah. Dual D^H^D- Gr. adra. 

1478. fPD PlQD ]it. four of cleaning, flour of grain cleansed of 
the hx?m, fine flour, hj&p subs. m. flour. 

1479. ]yD subs, fern., expressive of the idea of cleansing, flour 
cleared of bran. 



138 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xviii. 

1480. *&& knead, 2 sing. f. imp. kal of GW to knead, parad. 10. 

1481. s 'm 2 sing. fern. imp. kal of Plfe^ parad. 2 and 13, made. 

1482. niUJ^ plur. of n|y subs. fern. ; iyKpvcfrtas, LXX.; panes 
subcinericii, Hieron. Cakes baked on the hearth. 

1483.— Ver. 7. *)$$! the herd, comp. of -H and *)$%, No. 1112. 

1484. V*) ran, 3 sing. m. pret, kal of YT\ parad 10, £o nw. 

1485. *sf*n ground form ^Ol, in fern, H^"] tender; compare Tp^ 
w#s £/w#, tender. 

1486. "lj^n lit. £/^ young man, the servant; Gr. 7rat<?, servant; 
comp. of -H and 1^1 Sanscr. nara, homo, vir; fern, nari, ndrz, 
femina ; Gr. avrjp. 

1487. — Ver. 8. Pl&ftH thickened milk, butter, or cheese, subs. f. 

1488. i/0^ either sweet or coagulated milk is probably here 
meant. Pict. Bible. Subs. masc. 

1489. ^iMrrjJ lit. son of the herd, vitidus, a young bullock. 

1490. 7VP% HJfa -which he had made (prepared). 

1491. %&% contr.for 7rtti?l5 comp. of 5 and -H, art. Gr.19; 
and 7ftX subs. m. « totf. See Gr. 35. 

1492. — Ver. 10. l^X ^1^ t» returning I will return, I will 
certainly return. 

1493. ITIl fij£3 /wc tempore vivente, i. e. reviviscente, redeunte, 
Ros. ; i.e. at this time the next year, see chap. xvii. 21. "Anno 
proxime sequent!." Dathe. 

Xaipe <yvvac (friXoTrjTL, TTepafKofievov 8' ivtavrov 
Te£et? ay\aa rUva. Horn. Odyss. xi. 248. 

Fruere, mulier, amore, circumvoluto autem anno, praeclaros paries 
filios. nj?3 contr. for HJST5, Gr. 35 and 19. See No. 1491. 

1493 (a). ty$2& hearing, heard, part. act. kal f. of J?^ heard, 
parad. 4. 

1493(5). /H^il Hjn§ lit. dW, or entrance of the tent; "post 
ostium tabernaculi." Eos. 

1493 (c). VTiK ^^(T! owef & (the door) (was) behind him, sc. the 
angel. 

14930).— Ver. 11. EPJjJT plur. abs. of fp? o/^; penult, vowel 
moveable, and therefore lost on the removal of the accent to the 
plur. termination. Gr. 63. 74. 

1493(e). D^5 0^5 ht. going in days; according to our idiom, 



Ver.6— 14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 139 

advancing in years. D*X3 plur. abs. act. part, kal of K\% parad. 10 
and 12; penult, vowel immoveable, as representing the dropped 
radical. 

1493 (/). "tfl iTlfc^nVn? Till desiemt esse Same via (con- 
suetude-) ut mulieribus. Eos. According to Glassius, p. 662, Ed. 
Dathe, D*8?|3 FHK is by the grammatical figure called synchysis 
particularism, used instead of Q^3 HlfcO secundum consuetudinem 
midierum. 

1493 (j/). H^ subs. m. icay, mode, custom, seg. (o) class. 

1493 (h). D^J3 contr. for D*#|n3, comp. of 3 and -H art. and 

1493 (t). /"Ill 3 sing. pret. kal of Till ceased, here used as a 
pluperfect. See Introduction, Part III., on the subject of the 
Pluperfect. 

1494. — Ver. 12. pn¥hl comp. of -) and 3 sing. fern, pres. kal of 
pTO laughed, parad. 2 ; 3 sing. fern. pret. kal HpTO and 1 sing. 

1495. n3*1p3 within herself, comp. of 3> pron. afT. fern., and ?1p, 
ground form of 2"!p subs. com. 1. middle; 2. inward parts (of the 
body) ; 3. heart, mind. 

1496. s t\ /3 comp. of pron. affix 1 pers. and infin. constr. kal of 
Pi 73 ^rreto o/<r/, parad. 13. 

Y497. T\T\% subs. f. pleasure; m. form }lg, No. 216. Gr. 7580W7. 

1498. *JHi$l awe? my /ore/, i. e. my husband. See 1 Pet. iii. 6, 
"even as Sarah obeyed Abraham, calling him lord." From the 
Heb. words /$% and |*H(tf lord, master, proprietor, are derived the 
names of the heathen deities, Baal and Adonis. 

1499. — Yer. 13. DJftK adv. truly, from JfoK supported, sustained; 
and intrans. w?as sustained, ivas firm, faithful, true. 

1500. nStf 1 sing. pres. kal of TT, parad. 8. 

1501. VflJDJ 1 sing. pret. £«/ of JDT was o/e?, parad. 1. 

1502.— Ver". 14. in"] nW?? K^T] sM/ a (any) thing from the 
Lord be (accounted) too arduous, i e. is there anything so arduous 
or wonderful as to be beyond Jehovah's power to accomplish. 
LXX. Mr) aSwarrjo-eL irapa T(p Geq> prjua ; ts. /S?l! comp. of 
interrog. part. Q and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of K /|), not used in kal ; 
niph. was difficult, arduous, marvellous. 



140 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xviii. 

1503. G^rOfQ and denied, comp. of -) and 3 sing. fern. pres. pih. 
of ^H3, parad. 8; with dagesh implied in tl, Gv. 19, failed, teas 
deficient; in pih. held bach, withheld; hence failed, deceived, de- 
nied, lied. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1504. yjpriy, see No. 1494. 

1505. n^'T in pause for HKT 3 sing. fern. pret. &a£ of &*V 
feared, parad. 8 and 12. 

1506. — Ver. 16. *I&PM em*/ arose, comp. of-] and 3 plur. pres. kal 
of D^p, parad. 10, with kibbuts vicarious. 

1507, }Sp#Q comp. of -I and 3 plur. m. pres. 7w>A. of W$, not 
used in A^Z ; in hiph. looked towards, took a prospect of, parad. 1 ; 
3 sing. m. apoc. pres. hiph. £jpfe^, chap.xix. 28. 

1508. DlT?|yV to send them (onwards) to convoy them, comp. of 
7 prep. pron. aff. D~ and Plpfe? \ vqSsxl. pih. of Tw$, parad. 4, sent; 
the ult. vowel being lost on the removal of the accent to the pron. 
affix. The ult. pathakh is pathakh furtive. Gr. 17. 

1509. — Ver. 17. flD3£?n lit. whether I a concealer, shall I con- 
ceal, comp. of the interrog. part. H and pih. part. masc. of np3, 
parad. 13, covered, concealed. 

1510. T\W)J ^H lit. I a doer, I doing, I am about to do, part. m. 

act. kai of n^j;. 

1511.— Ver. 18. TPjX[ VH in being he shall be, he certainly shall 
be; VH, ordinary form !Tn or PlVPl, infin. abs. kal of ?VPl; and 
ITIT 3 sing. m. pres. kal of the same. 

1512. D*l¥JJ strong, powerful, of the form of the pass. part. &a£ 
of DVJJ was strong, parad. 2. 

1513. ^133 3 plur. pret. mjoA. of ^H3 blessed, parad. 3. 

1514. **w constr. of D^lil, ordinarily DMil, plur. of Mil a nation. 
1515— Ver. 19. TJ1 1^« jjffll? VflJH? '3 /<*■ ^ ^now him that 

he will command his children and his household after him, and they 
shall keep, etc. Auth. Vers. This rendering is inadmissible with 
"ljJW JJ2§? 3 which must be rendered because that; the above ren- 
dering would require *3 that. V^y > '^ <, . should therefore be rendered, 
/ lorn, or respect, or have chosen him, because that he ivill command 
his children, etc., that they keep, etc. ; Jehovah's love for, and 
choice of Abraham, did not arise from the confidence that he would 
keep his children and household in habits of subordination, but 



Ver. 15—21.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 141 

because he was convinced that he would command them to keep 
the way of the Lord, etc. One of the grounds of the choice of 
Abraham, therefore, was, that he would keep his children from 
idolatry and wickedness. 

1515*. VJ?J?T. comp. of pron. aff. and ^J?T, the first vowel being 
lost on the removal of the accent to the pron. aff. ; 1 sing. pret. kal 
of J7T parad. 8 and 4. 1. perceived, teas conscious, or aicare of-, 

2. knew; 3. recognised, or acknowledged ; 4. approved, regarded, 
marked out, chose. See Prov. xii. 10 ; Ps. i. 6 ; xxxi. 8; Hos. viii. 2. 
See 7rpoiyvco, in Eom. viii. 29, and xi. 2; and Schletis. Lex. N. T., 
under irpoyivooaKw. 

1516. TN£\ 3 sing. m. pres.jw/?. of Pl}¥ commanded, parad. 13. 

1517. ^'"H subs. com. 1. a path', 2. a ivay (often trodden) ; met. 
manner, custom; hence 3. the icays,laws, institutions (of the Lord). 

1518. fiDny subs, fern., id. qu. p*7.5? 1. rectitude; 2. justice; 

3. rectitude of conduct in general, righteousness, piety. 

1519. 12&P12 subs, m., from £0§^ judged, decided; 1. what one 
judges or decides, a decision ; 2. the punishment awarded in the 

decision; 3. a court of justice in which the decision is given; 4. a 
cause for trial; 5. justice or equity; 6. any positive institution, 
whether civil or religious ; 7. a right claimed ; 8. custom; 9. manner, 
appearance. See Prof. Lee's Lex. sub. voc. 

1520. &rnn inf. hiph. of Klin parad. 10 and 12. 

1521.— Ver. 20. Dip HJ52I &« cry °f Sodom, i. e. either the 
report of the crimes committed there, or the cries of those who 
suffered from the violence of the people. 

1522. npST constr. of PlDJ^T subs. fem. a cry, the penult, vowel 
being lost, and the ult. shortened, and the Pi converted into T\, 
Gr. 93, 94, 95; a compound sh'ua is substituted under the guttural 
for the lost vowel, to which the preceding sh'va conforms. 

1523. Dn&tSH their sin, comp. of pron. affix D~ and nKtSPt- 
See No. 461. 

1524. rn?5 3 sing. fem. pret. kal of T?3 parad. 1, was heavy, 
grievous, great. 

1525. — Ver. 21. PlTltf comp. of Pi parag., and Tltf lsing.pres. 
kal of TV parad. 8, descended; the penult, vowel is immoveable, 
as forming a contraction, upon which the first radical disappears ; 



142 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 



XVlll. 



the ultimate, which is moveable, is lost on the withdrawal of the 
accent. 

1526. TjII PlN^Pl Pinpy¥3Pl Rosen, translates the verse thus: 

t t - t |t - ;- ; - 

descendi igitur ut viderem, num secundum querelas ad me perlatas, 
fecerint consummationem, i. e. plane seu omnino fecerint. See 
Introduction, Part III., in regard to Adverbs. 

1527. nnD2-?3D comp. of -T\ interrog. part., see Prof. Lee's Gr. 
179 (5), and 3,' and pron. aff. H- and nj^JJtf- See No. 1521. 

1528. n^L^ comp. of -H art., and act. part, kal fern, of X12 to go, 
to come, parad. 10 and 12. &* See No. 1933, infra. 

1529. ri73 subs. fern, perfection, consummation, used here ad- 
verbially in the sense of plane, omnino, prorsus. 

1530. njTj&jk in pause for Pljfltf, comp. of M parag., and 1 sing. 
pres. kal of J?T knew, parad. 4 and 8. Haec historia de Deo et 
angelis iter facientibus, sub humana specie, ethnicorum opinionibus, 
de Diis homines invisentibus occasionem dedisse videtur; vid. 
Horn. Odyss. P. v. 486, Eos. 

1531.— Ver.22. Ujft comp. of -1 and 3 plur. m. pres. kal of HJ3 
parad. 13, turned one's self to look, or to go away. 

1532. 'Ml VST® ^Tp^) lit. and Abraham (as for Abraham) 
still he standing before Jehovah, i. e. and Abraham still stood before 
Jehovah. While the two angels went forward to Sodom, Abraham 
remained with the third, who was Jehovah. 

1533. il-rjty comp. of TJJ? still, \ epenth., and \ for tflPl he. 

1534. itij} part. act. m. kal of *i£j? stood, parad. 2. 

1535. — Ver. 23. ffitf) and drew near, comp. of -), and 3 sing. pres. 
kal of £03 parad. 5. 

1536. — Ver. 24. n$Dfi tj^H numquid etiam perdes f Glass. 

1537. Pl3Dfl 2 sing. m. pres. &o£ of H£D parad. 13, 1. mme to an 
end, perished-, 2. brought to an end, destroyed. 

1538. Dlpo? tf feTTXT) a^ we7# ^Aow wo£ $p«re ^e j^c*?, J1JJ is 
here understood, wilt thou not take away (i. e. pardon) the iniquity 
to (of) the place. 

1539. Nj3>fi 2 sing. m. pres. kal of #&\ lifted up, took away, took 
away (sin), pardoned it. 

1540. ti)pu? contr. for DipftPT? comp. of 7 part., -ft def. art., and 
D1p/b subs.m. a place. 



Ver.£l— 28.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 143 

1541. H^IPS 2?l th e midst of it, within it. See No. 1495. 

1542. ")$] ^7 PIT?!! be it far from thee from doing (to do). 
1543. — Yer. 25. PIT?!! or PJ/yP1 with PI parag. according to 

the accents, but most probably a fem. noun; lit. pr of ane thing, used 
however as an interjection, profane] fie I forbid it I or the like. 
LXX. yjr) yevotro, root 77H 556. See Prof. Lee's Lex., sub. voc. 

rbhn- 

T * T 

1544. ftoft comp. of J£ for •£? Gr. 19, and inf. constr, kal of 

1545. JVJbri/ fo m#se to &, to destroy, comp. of 7 and inf. fojpA. 
of f$d fo die, parad. 10. 

1546. J/&H masc. wicked, here used collectively, wicked men. 

1547. &|D^n comp. of interrog. part. H and D§&^ part. act. £a/, 
m. of t0§^, parad. 1, judged; here used as a noun, a judge. 

1548. bSBto, see No. 1519 (5). 

1548(a).— Yer. 26. K$?K 1 sing. pres. kal of K¥i&, parad. 12, 
found. 

1548(5). D"VDJ}3 by cause of them, for their sokes. 

1549. — Yer. 27. Vjp^tlPl I have taken it upon myself, presumed, 

1 sing. pret. hiph. of /W, not used in kal, which is supposed to 
have Irad the meaning of beginning, or taking in hand anything ; 
in hiph. betook one's self to, undertook, began anything with alacrity, 
willingness. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1550. *\§k$\ ^§3£ dust and ashes. Formula proverbialis, de hu- 
militate et fragilitate naturae huniaiiae. Ges. Lex. 

1551. *\5$ subs. 111. ashes; this word is very similar in sound 
to "1^- Compare Lat. cinis, and Gr. kovls. 

1552. — Yer. 28. pIDPT shall be lacking, comp. of f parag. and 
3 plur. pres. kal of "IDH, parad. 2 and 4, lacked, was in need. 
^HDir is what is called the rou^h enunciation of 'HDPP, see the 
parad. 

1553. rVr!i£T)n wilt thou destroy, comp. of H interrog. part, and 

2 sing. 111. pres. hiph. of HH^, net used in kal ; in hiph. destroyed, 
■ruined; 1 sing. pres. hiph. fVn^K- 

1554. P^V§! comp. of } parag. and 3 plur. m. pres. niph. of K^£, 
parad. 1 2, found. 



144 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xviii. 28. 

1555. in\ see No. 450. 

1556. d^EPJJPI the twenty righteous persons referred to by 
Abraham. 

1557. rfp3 1^^5 after that he had ended; M ?3 3 sing. m. pret. 
pih. of n??* P ara( i. 13, finished, ended. 

1558. %$ 3 sing. pret. hal of -l^, parad. 10, to return. 

1559. Ittplb/ comp. of 7, before sh'va 7, pron. aff. 1, which takes 
the accent, and Dlpfo or DpD, Gr. 34; with the accent removed to 
the pron. afF. Eipfo subs. m. a place, already analysed. 

1560.— Chap. xix. 1. D^^JgO ^ the two angels who had left 
Abraham ; the numeral is construed as a subs, and is in the con- 
struct form. There is no word in our language that corresponds 
with this idiom. The Latin idiom is similar where trias and decas 
are used instead of tres and decern. 

1561. D*JN&/$ plur. of *HX^5 he whom one sends, a messenger, 
angel ; from ^!K7 obs. legavit. 

1562. DhD IJ^S H&T ®h\ and Lot (was) se#% a* the gate of 
Sodo?n. The custom of holding assemblies at the gates of cities 
for the transaction of public business is well known. In Homer's 
II. i. v. 148, the Trojan old men are described as convened at the 
Scaean gates. 

1563. QntfTpP, see No. 1221. 

1564. — Ver. 2. ^D 2 plur. m. imp. hal of "ttD, parad. 10, to go 
aside, to turn aside from the road. Lat. diversari. 

1565. W?\ and pass the night, comp. of \ and 2 pi. m. imp. hal 
? to pass the night, parad. 11. 

1566. ^511 and wash, comp. of 1 and 2 plur. masc. imp. hal of 
T*rn washed. 

1567. DpylH ij our feet, pron. grave aff. and constr. plur. of 7^H, 
£Ae /bo£, seg. (a) class ; ground form 7^H* 

1568. DptoS^ni. comp. of ) and 2 plur. masc. pret. hiph. of M^, 
not used in hal ; in hiph. rose early, parad. 1. 

1569. DST!^ Ep??n} and go your way ; DfpSn 2 plur. masc. 
pret. hal of T?H parad. 2, went. 

1570. D37T? comp. of 7 and pron. aff. 2 pers. and ^jl, ground 
form of TJl a way. 



of \h 



Chap. xix. 5.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 145 

1571. j v3 iirn^ i n the street tee ivill pass the night. There 
being no inns or lodging houses in these times, where food and 
rest could be obtained, as is very much the case even at present in 
the East, the angels, having no other invitation, must have either 
remained with Lot or slept in the street. See Job xxxi. 32, " the 
stranger did not lodge in the street ; but I opened my doors to the 
traveller." 

1572. ^H^ contr. for !lin*T!5j comp. of 5 an( i with kamets 
before 1, and ^1)1*1 fern, any broad, open, unenclosed place in a 
town, a square or street; compare 3PH 1. breadth, width ; 2. extent, 
expanse. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1573. \h\ 1 plur. pres. hal of \h, No. 1565. 

1574. — Ver. 3. D3 *1X|5*J and he urged, pressed 'them (to consent), 
constrained them, comp. of -\ and 3 sing. pres. hal of "WCS) parad. 4, 
pressed upon; W&2. ^¥5*5 and they pressed upon the man, ver. 9; 
D3 for DH3. 

T V T 

1575. T\T\Wfo subs. masc. where one drinks. 1. a banquet (for 
drinking), as the derivation implies ; 2. a feast in general, from 
riW drank. 

T T 

1576. fn^^ and unleavened cakes (as these could be most ex- 
peditiously prepared), comp. of \ and pi. of 7V£fo probably pressed 
(bread), not raised, unleavened, from T*Vp sucked, squeezed, pressed 
out ; hence bread much dried, without yeast or moisture. 

1577. H^K 3 sing. pret. kal, parad. 13, baked. 

1578— Ver. 4. !Q3#* in pause for ttp\ Gi.31; 2 plur. pres. 
kal of ^5^ 1 a y down, parad. 1, here used as a pluperfect. 

1579. ^p3 surrounded, 3 pi. pret. niph. of ^3D turned one's self, 
surrounded ; in niph. the same, parad. 6. 

1580. JpT 1]}) 1^50 ht. ^rom young even unto old (man), i. e. both 
young and old. 

1581. i"l¥M YA. from the extremity, i.e. from the extreme limits 
of the town or suburbs, i. e. all the inhabitants to a man ; comp. 
of •£? and nXp id. qu. Y0 an end, limit. 

1582. — Ver. 5. Dtf*tfin bring them out, comp. of pr on. affix and 
2 sing. m. imp. hiph. of £W parad. 8 and 12, went out; in hiph. 
caused to go out, brought out. PJ^Vltf with T\ parag. 1 sing. pres. 
hiph. of the same, ver. 8, and &^1H 2 sing. m. imp. hiph. ver. 12. 

10 



146 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xix. 

1583. DJTlX H^ISI, Xva crvyyevcbjjLeda avroU, LXX. ; comp. of 
\ and n parag. and 1 plur. pres. kal of ))*V knew, parad. 8 and 4. 
The ult. vowel of JT73 lost on the removal of the accent. 

1584. — Ver. 6. niin@n to the door, comp. of -H and M locale, 
and nr*5? perhaps through the influence of the pause accent for 
lin§, ground form of PinS m. seg. (i) class, an opening, entrance, 
a door, a gate. 

1585. nyini and the door, comp. of \ and -fi and Twl m subs. 
fern. seg. (a) class. 1. the valve or leaf oi a pair of folding doors; 
2. a door; comp. Twl turned backivards and forwards, vacillated. 

1586.— Ver. 7. ^JTjF) 2 plur. m. pres. hiph. of JJJJ'I parad. 6, was 
evil; in hiph. did evil. 

1587. — Ver. 8. JTD1 daughters, plur. of fiS, contr. for F03 or 
nil? plur. irreg. as if from i"1^5' ^ n a ^ languages those words in 
most common use are most liable to contraction and irregular 
formation. 

1588. |3 "7j£"\5 since for this cause, i. e. that they might be secure 
against injury. 

1589. ''Nip ,/X5 *w or wwdier ^e shadow of my roof (house); /$ 
ground form 7 7V subs. m. shadow. 

1590. s T\lp also ^rnip pron. affix and ("Hip from jmA. form of 
PHp met, tended towards, as one beam in a roof towards another. 

1591. — Ver. 9. ilK/iT^H come on, come more near, i.e. to the 
dispute ; W% with the accent GP|, contr. for fe^JD 2 sing. m. imp. AW 
of &^J parad. 5, drao near; and 3 plur. pres. kal *W%\ ver. 9. 

159£. nXyPl thence, further onward, as to time or place. Prof. 
Lee's Lex. 

1593. ^H^H this one (man), this one fellow. The point of 
reproach lies in charging Lot with the audacity of opposing him- 
self, a single individual, to the will and to the practices of the 
whole city. 

1594. DH?? tJ7 jnj i"J)?2 now shaM we d° injury to thee, separa- 
tion (as regards) them, or now shall we maltreat thee as dis- 
tinguished from them; i.e. now shall we maltreat thee more than 
them. See -12 or Jft in No. 60, and its office in the formation of 
comparatives, Introduction, Part III. 



Ver.5— 14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 147 

1595. J?l3 1 pliir. pres. hiph. of J7JJ1 parad. 6 and 4 ; in kal, was 
evil; in hiph. did evil, injury. 

1596. ^3^7 comp. of 7 before stiva 7 and infin. constr. kal of 
"DE* 6ro£e. " 

1597.— Ver. 11. JVSlI HHS ^K lit. w?Ao, £Ae door of the house, 
i. e. who (were at) the door of the house. See Introduct. Part III., 
on the subject of Prepositions. 

1598. DH\!JD5 ^H they smote ivith blindness. LXX. aopaaia. 

1599. ^H 3 plur. pret. hiph. of PDJ parad. 5 and 13; not used 
in kal; in hiph. struck, smote. 

1600. D^YDD pi. form, blindness, either temporary or permanent, 
Prof. Lee's Lex. ; a quadriliteral root, the etymology uncertain. 

1601. /H|'*TJ?^ j^PO from small even to great, both small and 
great. This Hebrew idiom is adopted into the Greek both of the 
LXX. and New Test., airo fiiKpov ecu? fxe^aXov. 

1602. *l&v*3 comp. of •) and 3 plur. pres. kal of HK 7- 1. laboured; 
2. teas fatigued; when construed with 7 and an infin. it signifies 
to attempt in vain, to be unable. 

1603. — Ver. 12. {HPT subs. m. son-in-law, plur. with aff. V^HH, 
ver. 14. 

1604— Ver. 13. tim« DTlPlBto *3 lit. /or we destroyers, destroy- 
ing, are about to destroy ; DTlH^ft written in full DWH&^P, sing. 
JVH^Q, see ver. 14, Gr. 34; plur. m. part. hiph. of T\V\W parad. 3; 
and nnn^7, comp. of 7 and fern. pron. aff. and HPfE^ infin. pihel of 
the same. 

1605. TxTft 3 sing. f. pret. kal of Tl| parad. 1, was great. 

1606. Dnj5$?5? the pron. aff. here refers to the people of the place 
and the fern. pron. affix in PinPl^^ refers to *VJJ in the preceding 
verse, and not to D1p/p in this, which is masc. 

1607. — Ver. 14. VfO? *Dp7 lit. takers of his daughters, who had 
taken (married) his daughters ; according to Bush, who were about 
to marry his daughters. *Ptp7 constr. plur. of act. part, kal of 
Hp7 parad. 4, took. 

1608. *IK¥ 2 plur. m. imper. kal of tf¥* went out, parad. 8 and 12. 

1609. pPl^M lit. as a mocker; comp. of 3 before sh'va 3, and 
part. pih. m. of DH¥ laughed, mocked, parad. 3; Gr. 19. 

10* 



148 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 



xix. 



1610. — Yer. 15. 1DJ a particle of nearly the same signification 
with 2, principally used in poetic style. 

1611. ^H^n conrp. of «Pl and ^Plfc^ subs.; seg. (a) class, the 
morning, 

1612. ^VWI comp. of •) and 3 plur. pres. hiph. of T*^ to urge; 
here construed with 5; parad. 10. 

1613. Pip Dip the former, the 2 sing. m. imp. hal of Dip ft? rise, 
parad. 10; the latter, the 2 sing. m. imp. hal of Hp7 foo&, parad. 4 
and 5. 

1614. n^Jb|n lit. that are found (with thee), i.e. that are with 
thee: see the same idiom in Matt. i. 18, evpeOr) iv yacrrpl eyovcia. 
See Luke xvii. 18; Heb. xi. 5. Comp. of -Pi and fern. plur. of niph. 
part, of XXfc parad. 12. 

1615. TJJPI p23 Pl£DPr|$ lest thou perish ivith the wickedness of 
the city, i. e. with the wicked inhabitants ; or, lest thou be involved 
in the punishment of (the inhabitants of) the city. 

1616. n§Dri 2 sing. m. pres. niph of PlSD parad. 13, erased, 
carried off, destroyed. 

1617. jig constr. of }1JJ 1. sin; 2. guilt; 3. the punishment of sin. 
1618. — Yer. 16. PJ/bHSTO and he lingered; comp. of -) and 3 sing. 

pres. hith. of PT/bPlQ a quadriliteral root, not used in hal; in hith. 
loitered, lingered, delayed. According to Prof. Lee this word is a 
redup. of T\l2 what; see Lex. 

1619. 1pVH*1 comp. of •), and 3 plur. pres. hiph. of p]Pl parad. 2, 
in hal, hound firmly , in hiph. laid hold of firmly. 

1620. PlijT rtenS lit. in £/^ mere?/ of GW (towards him), i. e. 
because God wished to save him and his family ; comp. of 5, and 
constr. of Pi A?Pl subs. fern, mercy. 

1621. *!PlPliP5 and placed, set him, comp. of -) and pron. aff., and 
3 plur. pres. hiph. of TO parad. 10 and 4. See No. 261. 

1622.— Yer. 17. DK*2fiPQ when they had brought (them) out; the 
5 here has a similar meaning to that of 5> on their bringing them 
out; comp. of D and pron. aff. D~ , and infin. hiph. of N¥* parad. 8 
and 12. 

1623. u?feTl 2 sing. m. imp. niph. of U?fo parad. 1, was slippery, 
but not used in hal; in niph. 1. slipped away; 2. delivered, saved 
one's self 



Ver. 15—22.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 149 

1624. ft*3£l 7X look not, 2 sing. m. imp. liipli. of £33? parad.5; 
not used in £a/, in hiph. £0*3"! looked", 3 sing. f. pres. 7«joA. £03£l; 
see verse 26. 

1625. rnnPl to the mountain, comp. of Jl art., Gr. 19; H locale, 
and 7H a mountain ; Gr. 66, et seq. 

1626. — Yer. 19. 7l$p} awe? Aas£ magnified, comp. of -J, and 
3 sing. pres. hiph. apoc. of zl| parad. 1. 

1627. T^pPl comp. of pron. aff. and "IDPI, ground form of lOtl 
subs. m. favour, % mercy, kindness. 

1628. ftVPiri/ ybr preserving alive, comp. of ?, and inf. constr. 
A?j»A. of PIT! parad. 12, lived; in hiph. caused to lite, preserved alive. 

1629. /3^ potens foetus sum, 1 sing. pres. 7*0/?/j. of /^potuit; 
parad. 8. 

1630. fcWtS comp. of 7 prep., and inf. niph. of &*?£ No. 1623. 

1631. *3p5"W comp. of pron. aff., and 3 sing. pres. kal of p3^, 
parad. 1; 1. cleaved to ; 2. overtook. 

1631*. Tl/bl a/^ i" f//e, should die, comp. of ) before the tone 
syllable ), and 1 sing. pret. kal of J"fift to c??e; parad. 10. 

1632.— Yer. 20. PQhp wear, fern, of ihp or STO; see Gr.74. 

1633. D^/ comp. of / prep., and inf. kal of 0*0 to flee. 

1634. *1JJV^ subs, littleness, smallness, liere used as an adjective, 
little; verb *1J?¥ was small, and *1J?1¥ smallness, Zoar, see ver. 23. 

1635. PltO/ftX ^ me escape, comp. of PI parag., and 1 sing. pres. 
niph. of H?6; see No. 1623. 

1636. ''Fir)) comp. of ), and 3 sing. fern. pres. AtJ apoc. of PPPl 
/uw/, parad. 13 j see No. 23. 

1637.— Yer.21. ^3 TtKEOlit. I have raised up thy face, which 
expression lias allusion to a superior's raising up a suppliant, who 
is prostrated before him, and whose request he has granted. The 
meaning here is I have accepted thy person, I accede to thy request. 

1638. *3$0 *P?3/ lit. * w respect to my not overthrowing , Tl/3/ 
see No. 362. \??0 comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers., and T]$P1 hophch 
ground form of ^ttTl, inf. constr. kal of ^SPl parad. 2, overthrew, 
destroyed; and 1IS/T3 sing. m. pres. kal; see ver. 25. 

1639. — Yer. 22. D7^Pl *)T)t2 make haste, escape, i. e. escape 
quickly; see Introduction, Part III., on the subject of Adverbs. 
*inj? 2 sing. m. imper. pih. of IHlb parad. 3 and 4, hastened. 



150 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xix. 

1640. SOD |3"*?J? therefore (one) called (the name of the city). 
This idiom has been already noticed. 

1641.— Ver. 23. "til K^ t $%$T\ lit. the sun went out upon the 
earth, and Lot came to Zoar; i. e. Lot entered Zoar at sunrise. 
It has been already observed, that according to the Hebrew idiom, 
events or circumstances may be shewn to be contemporaneous, 
merely by their being connected by the cop. conjunction )• 

1642. — "Ver. 24. B5W JVISllI brimstone and fire, ignited brim- 

•• t • : t J * o 

stone. 

1643. JVl$$ £j 1. pitch', 2. any kind of combustible material, 
such as sulphur, or brimstone; so ^§21 a kind of wood containing 
resin, the pitch-pine, or according to some KVTrap-Laaos ; see No. 661 ; 
cogn. 153 pitch, and ^1)3 v. pitched, smeared, covered. 

1644. — Ver. 26. "U1 )F\$& &3P1 and his icife from behind him 
looked (back), i. e. and his wife who was behind him. 

1645. HlpK) subs, m., anything setup, a pillar; from *2)ft placed. 

1646. fro subs, m., salt. 

1647. — Ver. 27. D3^*5 and arose early ; comp. of •), and 3 sing. 
m. pres. hiph. apoc. of DD^; not used in kal, in hiph. D^^H 
parad. 1. 

1648,— Ver. 28. ta )b*p subs, m., */»o£e. 

1649. JKQ^IPI comp. of -PI subs, m., a furnace for burning bricks, 
or fusing metals; "sic dicta (according to Winer) a domando 
ferro," etc. ; from fc?3? subdued. See Lex. 

1650. — Ver. 29. "'til Hh^S *fl*J /or w$£W God was destroying 
the cities of the plain, he remembered Abraham, and sent out Lot, 
etc. (delivered Lot). This verse seems to be introduced parenthe- 
tically, and to refer to the conversation which God had with 
Abraham, recorded in the preceding chapter, where he asks God, 
whether he will destroy the righteous with the wicked. 

1651. Pp$nri comp. of the art., and subs. fern, overthrow, from 
llSn overthrew; and *nSH3 comp. of 3 before ~:, %, Gram. 126 (d); 
and inf. constr. kal of the same. 

1652. ttfb JH5 *2#l 1^8 as to tohich, Lot dwelt in them; either, 
in one of which Lot divelt ; or, in lohich Lot occasionally dwelt. 

1653. — Ver. 30. ^n^l lit. in the mountain; in the mountainous 
district of the land of Moab, lying to the east of the Dead Sea. 



Ver. 22—34.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 151 

1654. PQ^? com P- °f f before the tone syllable 7, and inf. 
constr. kal of *2$}\ dwelt ; parad. 8. 

1655. PHJ^p subs, fern., a cave, from *V\]} cogn. "fill fo c%. 
1656. — Ver. 31. Pn ,, 33D the first-born, the eldw*; coinp. of -H, 

and n*VJ3 fern., niasc. obs., from 13? d e ft> broke forth, was or 
came first. 

1657. n*"3*J?yn the little, as compared with the other, minor natu ; 
see Introduction, Part III., on the subject of Comparison. Coinp. 
of fl art., and fern, of TJft &'#& 

1658. p.^5 p^ £^K1 am? (there is) wo man in the land (or this 
land), i. e. in the mountainous districts of the land of Moab. It 
should seem that they were then afraid to leave their retreat. 

1659. — Ver. 32. PD7 age, agedum, comp. of Pi parag., and 2 sing, 
imp. hal of \}\, with the accent T?; here used adverbially, and 
hence masc. instead of fern. 

1660. PlpfcPJ 1 pbir. pres. hiph. of PlDG? parad. 13, in hal, drank; 
mhiph. gate to drink; and JPp^fi for HYp&ft 3 plur. fern. pres. 
hiph. of the same, ver. 33, and ^UDKO pron. aff. ) and J epenth. and 
T\pPi, as above, ver. 34. 

1661. PD$?01 an d let us lie, comp. of ) and Pi— parag. and 

1 plur. pres. kal of ^3^ parad. 1, lag, lag down, the ult. vowel 
being lost in consequence of the removal of the accent ; and 
HSl^r) 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of the same. 

1662. Pl*n^ comp. of ) and 1 plur. pres.^A. of PPPI lived; in 
/>//?. preserved alive, propagated. 

1663. — Ver. 33. J?T N /I tf^fi? 7*e efo/ wctf &#ow ; sc. filiain suam 
esse quacum concumberet. Rosen. 

1664. Pl33v3 lit. in her lying down, i.e. when she lay down; 
comp. of ) and pron. aff. PJ— and 33^> ground form of MB* infin. 
constr. £«/ of ^3^ parad. 1 ; the ordinary form of this conj. is i3^, 
see the parad. ^33^ 1 sing. pret. kal of the same, and ^33^ 

2 sing. fern, imper. kal, and METfl comp. of ) and 3 sing. fern, 
pres. kal. 

1665. — Ver. 34. PHHftft on the morrow, comp. of -t2 and PHPl^ 
fern. The primitive meaning of this word, according to Prof. Lee, 
is that of proceeding forwards, which may designate morrow, or 



152 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xix.35. 

the day following some other day previously expressed. It is 
sometimes joined with DV. 

1666. fc^fo^t m. yesterday, including the following night. 

1667. WZft and go in, comp. of ) and 2 sing. f. imp. hat of &1£- 

1668. DD1J1 and arose, comp. of \ and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of 
D^lp to me, parad. 10; the ult. vowel shortened from Dpfi to Dpft 
(ta-kom), on account of the removal of the accent to the ult. syl- 
lable. Gr. 30 (b), and 9 and 10. 

1669. — Ver. 36. J^ntll, see 1660 ; comp. of -I and 3 plur. pres. 
kal of i"nri conceived, became pregnant, parad. 13, 2, 3. 

1670. — Ver. 37. 2K)ti Moab, perhaps a corruption of 2,812 from 
father. 

1671. DVrrlJJ sc. qui etiamnum Moabitae vocantur. 

1612. — Ver. 38. *teJ2"J3 i. e. son of my people, sc. son of my blood 
relation (father); see the word DJ£ in Ges. Lex. 

1672*. — Chap. xx. 1. *)$) and sojourned, comp. of •) and 3 sing. 
m. pres. kal of 1*111, parad. 10, to sojourn; see 1668. 

1673. 115 Gerar, a city of the Philistines between Kadesh and 
Shur. 

1673*. — Yer. 2. ni£?/&$ concerning Sarah. 

1674. 8)T\ Tl'Plg lit. my sister she. 

1675. Il/^l comp. of •) and 3 sing. masc. pres. kal of TwW, 
parad. 4, sent. 

1676. — Yer. 3. DPfiS comp. of 3 and tiOFj subs. m. a dream. 
Koot U?ft dreamed. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1677. T\l2 ^[5D lit. behold thee a dead man, i. e. if thou dost not 
restore Abraham's wife undefiled. Rosen. 

1678. T)f2 part, kal masc. of T\)t2 to die, parad. 10, irregularly 
pointed ; see the parad. 

1679. /JD npJJSl 8)T}) lit. and she the married one of a husband, 
and she another man's wife. ]"Y?JJ3 with kibbuts vicarious and 
dagesh forte for fi/^S constr. fern, of the pass. part, kal of ?JD- 
1. ruled, governed; 2. married, owing to the absolute authority 
possessed in early times by the husband over the wife, parad. 3. 

/JD subs. m. lord, possessor, husband. 
1680. — Yer. 4. JTJH 2 sing. masc. pres. kal of 3111 slew, parad. 
2 and 3. 



Chap. xx. 7.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 153 

1681. — Ver. 5. "DHJ comp. of 5 and DH (torn), with, the accent 
DM, ground form D£?H subs. m. integrity, uprightness, perfection. 
Verb DDJJI ivas perfect, etc. 

1682. J*p33 comp. of ^ and |*p3> constr. of JVM subs. masc. 
innocence, from PlDJ, par ad. 5 and 13, was pure. 

1683. ^33 my hands, comp. of pron. aff. and plur. of W, ground 
form S|§5 ^ hollow (of the hand or foot), £Ae hand, already 
analysed. 

1684. — Ver. 6. ^j^HKj moreover I restrained (thee), comp. of ) 
before tf , for -), Gram. 19, and 1 sing. pres. kal of ^j^H, parad. 2, 
restrained. 

1685. ItOPlIb for Nten© comp. of •£ Gr.19, and inf. const, kal of 
&£pH parad. 12 and 2, sinned. 

1686. *W1 *PJWJ &*? I have not given (permitted) £7ie<? to fowcA 
Aer, see ver. 3. 

1687. J?iD/ comp. of 7 and inf. constr. A*aZ of J^lj, parad. 5 and 4, 
touched. 

1688. — Ver. 7. 3£TI restore, 2 sing. masc. imp. 7^7*. of 3^ 
parad. 10, fo return; in 7??}^. to mwse fo return, to restore. 

1689. 'TO fcOP! K*3J ^5 ht. for he (is) m communication with 
God, and will intercede for thee, and live thou, i. e. and thou shalt 
be spared. 

1690. K*3J subs. m. one spoken to (by God): 1. one with whom 
God holds communion, and to whom he reveals himself — this is 
the primary and early meaning of the word ; 2. one to whom God 
reveals his will, as the instrument of making that will known to 
others, a prophet — this is its secondary meaning ; 3. a prophet, i. e. 
a foreteller of things to come. In this last acceptation, a prophet 
was called, in the earlier periods of scripture history, PITH seer, 
one who sees into futurity ; 1 Sam. ix. 9, " Come and let us go to 
the seer (HIP!), for he that is now called a prophet (tf*3J) was be- 
fore time called a seer (PITH)." Hence it is evident that fc^-J 
though often previously mentioned in the scriptures, is never used 
in the sense of seer !"IJPI i. e. foreteller of future events, till the time 
of Samuel. The word K^J in the passage under consideration, 
has no reference to the prediction of a future event ; and the pre- 
diction of what was future was not the main, but onlv an incidental 



154 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 



XX. 



part of the office of Moses, who is sometimes called X^3J. Abraham 
is here styled a prophet, on account of the frequent communica- 
tions made to him, and of the favour shown him by God, which 
justified his acting as an intercessor for others. See chap, xviii. 
Root iOJ spoke, prophesied. Such forms as K*'?^ are passive in 
signification, and similar to the Chaldee past participle : X*^ one 
spoken to, a prophet ; TD3 one set over, a governor, ruler; X^J 
one raised up, elevated, a prince-, "SP&50 something poured out, a 
libation. 

1690*. v?3JV5 si inter cesser it, Dathe ; comp. of •) and 3 sing, 
pres. hith. of 77^ not used in kal, parad. 6, cut, divided, separated; 
in pih. decided (from caedo), judged ; in hith. acted as an arbiter, 
interceded. 

1691. n.inj the ordinary punctuation of this word would be 
•"U0!; comp. of ) Gr. 125 (4), and 2 sing. m. imp. kal of HTl 
parad. 13. See Glass, vol. i., p. 286. 

1692. y$ti lit, about to restore, part. hiph. m. of ZtiW- 

1693. JH contr. for JJT 2 sing. m. imp. kal of $HJ knew, parad. 8 
and 4. 

1694. — Ver. 8. DiTJTXS in their ears, in their hearing; comp. of 
3 and grave pron. aflf., and constr. plur. of jIX f. the ear ; ground 
form 3TX, without the accent 3?X ozn. 

1694* ^T*5 and they were afraid, comp. of -), and 3 plur. pres. 
kal of i^T feared; parad. 8 and 12. 

1695. — Ver. 9. !""!£ pointed with segol instead of kamets, before 
kamets in the following word. 

1696. ^PO/fcft my kingdom, comp. of pron. aff., and ground form 
of JlD/O?? what one rules over, a ki?igdom; from ^/£? ruled; root 

5 a king. 

1697. ")X\ $b 1WX D^bjfib lit. works which are not done, i. e. 
which are unknown, unheard of. There being no potential form of 
the verb in Hebrew, the potential meaning is expressed as above ; 
in which case we should say works which should not be done. See 
Introduction, Part III. 

1698. D^glb plur. of Plg>S£ subs.masc. what one does, a work; 
from n^JJ ; and ^JT 3 plur. masc. pres. niph. of the same ; parad. 
13 and 2. 



Ver.7— 15.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 155 

1699— Ver.ll. JlKT constr. of Jl^|* subs. fern. fear. No. 1694. 

1700. ^inrn and they will slay me, comp. of ), and pron. aff., 
and 3 plur. pret. kal of TT\ slew; parad. 2 and 3. 

1701. — Ver. 12. nj£tt (pm-nali), subs, feni., masc. form tbht, 
ground form }5^j and without the accent }foH (omri), fidelity, 
security, truth', hence used adverbially, truly. 

Note. — Such marriages as that between Abraham and Sarah, 
were afterwards prohibited by the laws of Moses. It was allow- 
able at Athens to marry a sister german, a connection apparently 
unknown at Rome. See Preface of Corn. Nep., and likewise 
Vita Cim. cap. i. 

1702. — Ver. 13. ^fifl caused to wander, 3 plur. pret. hipli. of 
HJJft parad. 13, 3, wandered. It will be observed that O^PPNt in 
this passage has its verb in the plur., contrary to the general usage. 

1703. XliJ 1 plur. pres. kal of Kfa to go. 

1704. V ^12$ say concerning me, 2 sing. fern. imp. kal of *\til}; 
parad. 7 and 4. 

1705.— Ver. 15. *2$ f^JS ^5 lit. in the good (of the land) in 
thine eyes abide, i. e. dwell wheresoever it seemeth good to thee, 
or dwell in whatsoever part of it thou rcgardest as the most fertile. 
3b3 contr. for Sta? Gr.35; IV 2 sing. m. imp. kal of Sg>*; 
parad. 8. 

1706. nJlDhl — &)7K Wti njn lo, I haze given to thy brother 
(to him whom thou calledst thy brother) a thousand (shekels) of 
silver, let this be a covering of the eyes, as regards all that are with 
thee, and all other (others). Thus was she reproved. The words 
^.TV. ft^lD? have greatly perplexed interpreters; their literal 
meaning is quite apparent, but it is difficult to understand their 
purport ; the most probable view is that given by Schroederus, de 
Vest. Heb. Mulier., and adopted by Rosen, and Winer. It is 
observed, that at the time referred to, virgins betrothed, and 
married women, wore veils in public, but not virgins who were 
not betrothed; and that Rebekah's veiling herself on seeing Isaac 
is a proof of the custom. A similar custom among the Lacedae- 
monians is mentioned in Plutarch's Apophthegms, quoted by Ros., 
where it is said, « that virgins having husbands to seek, remained 
unveiled : but that married women veiled themselves for the sake 



156 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xx. 15. 

of their husbands." It appears that Rachel was unveiled when 
she appeared first to Jacob at the well; and Sarah likewise, when 
she went down to Egypt, pretending to be Abraham's sister. 
According to this view, the meaning would be, Lo, I have given 
to Abraham a thousand shekels of silver to purchase a veil for you, 
that not only those of your own household, but strangers also may 
know that you are a married woman, and that you may not ensnare 
others in time to come, and involve them in the calamities which I 
have suffered on your account. The words "and thus she was 
reproved," are thought to be a remark of the sacred historian, and 
not the words of Abimelech. The above interpretation gives a 
satisfactory and consistent meaning to the passage, and shews the 
grounds of the rebuke administered. Gesenius thinks the sum too 
large for the purchase of a veil: it is to be remembered, however, 
that it was the present of a king, who was desirous to conciliate 
Abraham; and that it was by no means necessary thus to expend 
the whole of it. Professor Lee thinks the proofs are too slender 
to establish the usage upon which the interpretation rests; and 
they are far from being all that could be desired : the interpretation, 
however, appears to be preferable to any of the others that have 
been offered. The principal difficulty that I feel, is in reconciling 
the view above given, with what is said in chap, xxxviii., where 
Tamar is described as having put off her widow's dress, and as 
having covered herself with a veil ; and it is added that Judah knew 
her to be a harlot, because she had covered her face. In the former 
case the veil was to shew Sarah to be a married woman, in the 
latter it was an indication to Judah that Tamar was a harlot. I can 
only reconcile these facts, upon the supposition, that the veil was 
designed in both cases to shew that the persons wearing them were 
not virgins ; and that there was something in the dress and manner 
of Tamar that convinced Judah that she was neither a betrothed 
virgin nor a married woman, but a harlot; which latter supposition 
is extremely probable. Prof. Lee adopts a view of this passage, 
founded upon the rendering of the LXX. ; see his Lex. under the 
word FAD?* 

1707. — Ver. 16. firOJ) lit. and she (was) reproved-, and thus she 
was reproved: comp. of \ and part. niph. fern, of H2J or J"D1 parad. 8 



Chap. xxi. 7.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 157 

and 4 ; part. m. PDu, contr. ft?}, f em - J"©3X m pause firO^' 
See No. 2469 ; chap. xxxi. 37. 

1708. — Ver. 17. fc^^VI and healed, comp. of A and 3 sing. pres. 
kal of K§^, parad. 12, healed. 

1709. VnnDNI his maid servants, comp. of pron. aff. and Hn£?&, 
constr. of HH^^ pi. of T\12& subs. fern, a maid servant, an unusual 

T -; J- T T 3 

formation of the plural. 

1710. *!¥$£ ""^JPJD for Jehovah in shutting had shut up every 
womb. According to Gesenius, *7J£3 ^J? is equivalent to circum- 
clusit. ^EfJJ infin. abs. kal and ")¥j£ 3 sing. pret. &a/ of TXJ sAw£, 
s^w£ «p, parad. 4. 

1711. ^5 nsed as a prep, after; what its original meaning was 
is uncertain. See the Lex. of Lee, Ges., and Winer. 

1712. Drn subs. m. the womb. 

1713. — Chap. xxi. 1. *Tp3 visited, had regard to, i. e. remembered 
his promise ; remembered. Onk. Syr. Tnis verb has a twofold sig- 
nification 1. visited, for the purpose of shewing mercy, especially 

in the fulfilment of promises; 2. visited, for the purpose of the 
infliction of judgments. 

1714. — Ver. 2. VJpf? }3 lit. a son to his old age, a son of his old 
age, comp. of 7 and pron. aff. and D*0pT pi. subs. Gr. 49. Koot jpT- 

1715. 7$$?, see No. 1447 and 100. 

1716. — Ver. 3. "1713H that teas born, comp. of -II and *1713, be- 
fore makkaph T?13 part. niph. m. of T?* parad. 8. 

1717.— Ver. 4. D^ TtiW~\Z lit. son of an eighth of days, on 
the eighth day of his age. 

1718— Ver. 5. T>JPI5 comp. of 5 and inf. niph, of IT parad. 8, 
the ult. vowel shortened in consequence of the removal of the 
accent to the penult. Gr. 9 and 10, because the monosyllabic word 
immediately following has the tonic accent. 

1719. phV inf. constr. kal of piy$> parad. 3, laughed. 

1720. — Ver. 6. J$?&TI who heareth, lit. the hearer, comp. of -Jl 
and part. m. kal of J7&GP, parad. 4, heard. 

1721. — Ver. 7. "U1 7?fo *jb lit. who hath said to Abraham, Sarah 
hath suckled children (a child). According to our idiom, who would 
have said to Abraham that Sarah would have suckled children. 

1722. 77$ 3 sing. pret. pih. of V?fo, parad. 6, spoke, said. 



158 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxi. 

1723. PlD^Pl 3 sing. fern. pret. hiph. of p3J parad. 8, sucked; in 
>^}?A. suckled. 

1724. — Ver.8. 7??|?5 #we? w#s weaned, comp. of *1 and 3 sing. m. 
pres. niph. of 7??3 parad. 1. Albert Schultens, on Prov. iii. 20, 
traces this word to an Arabic root, expressive of the notion of the 
fomenting of the body for the production of heat, and gives fovit 
as its primary meaning. 1. in reference to the ripening of fruits ; 
2. in reference to a weaned child ; 3. in reference to the bestowal 
of favours, recompensed ; and when used in a bad sense, revenged. 
See Bush on Genesis, at this place. 7??in m f« niph' of the above. 
It is said that Jewish mothers suckled their children for three 
years. Vid. 2 Mac. vii. 27; Joseph. Antiqq. ii. 9. 

1725. — Ver. 9. pF!^?; optime interpretatur vocem pTO/5? per 
iSlcofce Paulus Galat. iv. 29. Quae vox omnis generis injurias ex- 
primit quibus fortasse Ismael Isaacum affecit. Ros. Part. pih. 
masc. of pll^ already analysed. 

1726. — Ver. 10. £H| thrust forth, 2 sing. masc. imp. pih. of £$h| 
drove away, expelled, repudiated, parad. 3. 

1727. &y\ 3 sing. m. pres. kal of $y inherited, parad. 8. 

1728.— Ver. 11. JTJJ comp. of •) and 3 sing. pres. kal of f% 
parad. 8, cogn. J?JT) and J£H was in an afflicted, evil, condition ; 
grieved, pained. 

1728*. rni& 7J? on account of, a plur. form, from JTTj or TXV 
projecit; projects, means, cause, account. 

1729. — Ver. 12. ^l2p here construed with 2, 2 sing. masc. imp. 
kal of J?£?S? heard, parad. 4. 

1730. "Ijfi Kip! pHV?5 i n Isaac shall thy seed he called, i.e. thy 
posterity through Isaac shall inherit the promises made to thee ; 
and in preference to thine other offspring, he shall be called in a 
peculiar sense thy seed. 

1731. — Ver. 13. )^f2^H I shall make, constitute him, comp. of 
pron. affix J epenth. and 1 sing. pres. hiph. of D^ parad. 10, put, 
placed. 

1732. — Ver. 14. T\l2T\\ comp. of 1. and constr. of T\12P\ subs, a 
vessel made of skin, a leathern bottle. Prof. Lee supposes the root 
to be D^n, an Arabic word signifying to cover. We should, how- 



Ver. 7—16.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 159 

ever, suppose that T\fotl, like other segolates, is a primitive, and 
that according to analogy these letters are its three radicals. H£?D 
is an anomalous form as the constr. of fifeF) ; in such cases the 
constr. and absolute forms are the same. 

1733. n£?p&? her shoulder, comp. of pron. aff. and p3&^, ground 
form of D3&^, subs. mas. seg. (i) class, the shoulder. Hagar bore 
the bottle on her shoulder, according to the Egyptian custom. 
Herod, says, lib. ii. cap. 35, ra ayQea ol fjuev avSpe?, eVl twv Kecj^dkeSv 
(popeovat alSe yvvatfces eVl rcov co/jlcov, " the (Egyptian) men carry 
their vessels upon their heads, the women upon their shoulders." 
Pharaoh's chief baker is represented as carrying his basket upon 
his head. See Introduction, Part. I. 

1733*. JJnjrfl and she wandered, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. fern, 
apoc. pres. hal of PlJ^H, parad. 3 and 13 ; full form »"IJ?nF), apoc. 
J?nft, parad. 37, and euph. causa, first ^HH, and then ^T\P\. Gram. 
104. 105. 106. 

1734. J?3^ 1^5 Beer-Sheba, i.e. well of oath, so called by an- 
ticipation, ver. 31. 

1735. — Ver. 15. 1 TO?1 comp. of -1 and 3 plur. masc. pres. hal of 
J173, parad, 13, failed, roas consumed. 

1736. ^p$T\\ comp. of -1 and 3 sing. fern. pres. hiph. of y$, not 
used in kal; in hiph. cast, cast dozen; cogn. TwW* 

1737. DIT^H comp. of -H and plur. of T\ty m. a bush, shrub. 
1738.— Ver. 16. Iftti H7 ZWft) and she set herself doicn over 

against (him), agreeably to an idiom in our own language, now 
becoming obsolete ; comp. of -1 and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of 3^ 
sat, parad. 8. 

1739. "131 \1hbJb3 prjID lit- withdrawing herself as the drawers 
of a bow, i.e. withdrawing herself as far as the drawers of a bow 
could shoot an arrow, withdrawing herself to the distance of a 
bowshot. 

1740. plTl infin. hiph. (used as a gerund) of prH, parad. 2 
and 3, was distant ; in hiph. went to a distance. 

1741. *int5£5 comp. of 3 before sh'va 5 and constr. plur. part. 
pih. of Untp or IlltO, not used in kal; in pih. stretched, drew, only 
used here. 



160 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xxi. 

1742. fc^OTft and lifted up (her voice and wept), i.e. wept aloud, 
an idiom necessary in a language with, few qualifying words ; 
comp. of «5 and 3 sing. pres. kal of K250, par ad. 5 and 12, raised, 
lifted up. 

1743. ^5ffi and wept, comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. apoc. pres. of 
PD^ parad. 13, wept; masc. apoc. ID^ Grr. 115. 

1744. — Yer. 17. Tp"!"!^ lit. what to thee, what aileth thee. 

1745. *ijH*ft 2 sing. fern. pres. kal of M*V feared, parad. 8. 

1746. D^ WT\ *0K% lit. in which he there, where he is: not 
merely in the place, but in the condition. in which he is. 

1747.— Yer. 18. *#lp 2 sing. fern. imp. kal of Mp parad. 10, to 
am<?, ^o stand. 

1748. *Kfe? rmse w/>, 2 sing. fern. imp. kal of XKO parad. 5 and 12. 

1749. "U1 ^p^nni lit. and cause thy hand to hold him, according 
to Ros. confirma manum tuam in illo, i. e. ne eum deseras, cur am 
ejus age donee adoleverit: "Trust to him as your earthly stay, 
for," etc. Arab. 

1750. Winn 2 sing. fern. imp. hiph. of pTT\ parad. 2, was, became 
strong; in hiph. took a strong hold of. 

1751. — Yer. 19. n£\3*J and opened, comp. of •), and 3 sing. m. 
pres. kal of HHS opened; parad. 4. 

1752. Kp^rfl comp. of -J, and 3 sing. fern. pres. pih. of K/Q or 
tfhfo parad. 12, filled. 

1753. p^i?l and caused to drink, comp. of •), and 3 sing. fern, 
pres. hiph. apoc. of HD 2? drank ; in hiph. gave to drink. 

1754. — Yer. 20. "1J0 HJI \T1 <m<i Ae <7m# up a boioman. 

1755. ri3n part. m. act. of fD^ parad. 2 and 13, became much 
multiplied, increased, as applied to strength and stature; MXl VW 
<mc? 7^e became increasing , or growing; i. e. Ae grew wjt?. 

1756. fWp subs. m. <m archer, or bowman; from JlJjJVJ # 5ow. 
1757. — Yer. 21. '"S$\ w HjpflJ fl^c? to mother took a wife for him 

from the land of Egypt (her own country). It was usual in those 
times for parents to select wives for their sons. 

1758. — Yer. 22. ifcO^'l^ commander of his army ; ^ subs. m. 
prince, ruler, chief, captain ; see "flG? vowel immoveable. 

1759. itfJV comp. of aff. \ and tfll^ subs, m., Gr.74, an army. 

1760. — Yer. 23. Tty1lWT\ lit. be sworn, the oath being administered 



Vg ::—;:; the book of genesis. 161 



by anotlier in the terms I adj:, ■ thee. Comp. :: " parage and 
- sing. m. imp. niph. of yi'J'. ndy used in the pj iss part . in 
y^&2 according :: Ges. from "2 'J' - ; because seven was 

sacred number, and be ; ans : )aths wei -:- :onnrmed by seven vi ;::-_•_>. 
see ve: , v . n in presence :: seven witnc sses^ ;■_ j seTen pledgeSj 
HerocL iii. 8 : II. xix. 243 . When Abimelech s aw Al rahi m ' - pros- 
perity, he dreaded hi- increasing power, and was lesirous :: 
secure his friendshij by the covenant here referrc 3 : : . 

1761. TpBfcl IN hi f Q U 7 I falsely, Le. that thou wilt 

not deal falsely, see No. 1244 j 2 sing. m. pres. : I .: ""'J' ■ .-. ' ' s 
7. 4.. 

11 3. 0*Jp romp. :: " and pi hl iff and %, 1 subs m.j 

1763. * ~2-"* ramp. ;: * and > and pron an nd "T- ground 
form of "2^ sobs. m. - _ .".:. — . nearly synonymous with "1. 

with which it is always joined] ,XM 2l and '- - may signify sjenei 
' . 

1764 "T*^ commonly written P^O 2 sing, pret " - " :: "*> 
. I I w. 

1764,*— Vea 84 J£lB*< IwOls . Ising pres _ ". .: V?-':. 
nut used in 7 

1765.— Yer.25. hCfJTl : sing, pret bj I. of FD* No. 1707. 

1765.* Ufo 3 pL pret. I : 7?| ] - 1, took possessi 

ofhj violence. 

VI *T32 amstr. plirr. of "IV subs, m. seg. class, ground 

form T32 

IT »3T Ver. 88. IV.". -"•_"• comp. of A and 3 sing. m. 

pres. &£&. ;: 2*1. not used in fail : in 7. /_ I. set 3 / *. f .. 7. -3 : 

and -3 sing. pret. 7 7 " . 2 V V~ 

1768. ril'IZ : I ibs, pL constr. of hfi£!!t3, sobs. fern. ; jYlSQS 
plur. abs.; D'22 masc. «5. 

171 .— Va nyj37 " -" ■ " ; . comp. :: "2" No. 271, 

pron. fern, aff '— and J"i parag.: with pron. aft fern. JH. *"2"\ 

1770. — Yer. SO. TTTShfori mi ?ss,testi .:: ; 

comp. of 7 and "- "- " " " ■" ■ ■ ; ~- " s ~ '■'■ . ■ 

rrom *T>* subs. m. a >/:': .-: tst i immoveable. v ;: "*"■ The 
seven lambs were given by Abraham to Abimelech in order to 

11 



162 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xxi. 30. 

secure for himself inalienable possession of the property. This 
was probably a solemn ceremony, founded on an ancient usage, 
and somewhat analogous to that of taking instruments in our law 
courts. 

1771. TiHSh 1 sing. pret. kal of *\§H, par ad. 2 and 4, dug. 

1772— Ver. 31. ")Tl *nj5 |3"^g wherefore (one) called the place, 
i. e. wherefore the place was called Beer-Sheba, viz. well of oath, 
because both parties swore there. 

1772.*— Ver. 33. ?f% yt&) and planted a clump of trees, either 
for shelter from the sun, according to the practice of the Arabs, 
who pitch their tents, when practicable, under the shadow of 
trees ; or perhaps this was a grove for religious purposes, as it is 
said in the following clause that he called on the name of Jehovah. 
Such groves having in after-times been prostituted to idolatry, 
were, under the Mosaic law, prohibited as places of public worship. 

1773. /$$ subs. masc. 1. a species of tamarisk; 2. any large 
tree ; 3. a plantation of trees. 

1774. Uy\]} /K the eternal God, as distinguished from the gods 
of the heathen, who were of finite duration. DvlJ? subs. masc. 
1. eternity; 2. antiquity; 3. the duration of the earth, man, etc.; 
4. the whole life ; 5. future duration, indefinite but not endless. 
Lee's Lex. 

1775. — Chap. xxii. 1. JlDJ 3 sing. m. pret. pih. of HD3, in kal 
not used ; in pih. tried, tried the character of any one, etc. ; parad. 
5 and 13. 

1776.— Yer. 2. ^YY")ltf ^J3"fiK thy son, thine only (son). 

1777. ^p5 comp. of pron. afF. and |3 subs. m. a son. Gr. 117. 

1778. *PplY comp. of pron. afF. ^T and TW only, only begotten, 
Gr. 74. Root h!Y, cogn. Ifttfl one. 

1779. iY*S3!l Moriah 3 comp. of -H, which, according to the 
Hebrew idiom, is connected with T*TK; land of the Moriah, is, 
according to our idiom, the land of Moriah. The land of Moriah 
is universally acknowledged to be the district in which Jerusalem 
was situated. Moriah was the mountain upon which the Jewish 
temple stood. It is not, however, said that Isaac was to be offered 
upon Mount Moriah, but upon one of the mountains in the land of 
Moriah. The typical character of the transaction, viewed in con- 



Chap.xxii.6.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 163 

nection with, the special instructions respecting the particular 
mountain, renders it far from improbable that this mountain was 
Calvary. See note on ver. 14. " De ratione nominis ej usque sig- 
nificatione, haud certo constat." Ros. 

1780. ^7^11 offer him, comp. of pron. aff. and 2 sing. m. imp. 
hiph. of Jl/JJ P ara( i. 2 and 13, ascended ; in hiph. caused to ascend 
the altar, offered up ; and H /J? subs. fern, that which ascends, an 
offering, burnt offering. 

1781. D'HHn comp. of Pi, euph. causa for Pi, and that for •/!, 
Gr. 19, and plur. of ^H a mountain. 

1782. — Ver. 3. fc^lPl*! and saddled, comp. of •) and 3 sing. masc. 
pres. kal of £2011 parad. 2, bound, girt, saddled. 

1783. VlJJ} comp. of pron. aif. and plur of ^$?J subs. masc. boy, 
servant, seg. (a) class. Gr. 109. 

1784. $7M*5 and cleaved, comp. of -J and. 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of 
^M parad. 4,fdit; cogn. ^M- 

1784(a). ^2 wooo* of, constr. plur. of TO wood, here in the pi., 
perhaps from its having been cleft into pieces. 

1784(6) —Ver. 4. p'mft from a-far, comp. of ft for p, Gr. 19, 
and p!"n, likewise plITHsubs. interval, distance. 

1785. — Ver. 5. H3 Dj?"^^ ^. 5 ^ yourselves here, i. e. afoV/e 
7*ere. See the same idiom in chap. xxi. 16. *QG? 2 plur. m. imp. 
kal of 5$) parad. 8. 

1786. PDtJ comp. of PI parag. and 1 plur. pres. kal of ^7* ?#<?#£, 
parad. 8. The tsere is immoveable, having absorbed the radical 
yod. 

1787. Pl5"*72 iM uc usque. 

1788. PfiPlftKOI thative may worship; a general expression, in- 
tended to include the offering of the sacrifice, and the intercession 
that followed it: comp. of ) and Pi parag. and 1 plur. pres. hith. 
of 1HK* id. qu. riPlfc? bowed; in 7«Y/i. bowed one's self, worshipped. 
See No. 1460. 

1789. Pft^fc^ comp. of 1 and PI parag., and 1 plur. pres. kal of 
^^ to return. 

1790. — Ver. 6. H/S^Pl comp. of -Jl and subs, fern., that which 
eafc, devours, destroys, a slaughtering knife ; from zDK parad. 7, 
ate. 

11* 



164 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxii. 

1791.— Ver. 7. il|>l1 comp. of •!! art. and M£> id. qu. fi*g> a 
sheep or goat: it has no plur., the corresponding noun of multitude 
being |K¥- 

1792.— Yer. 8. Tlffi! lV?!#7. lit. will see for himself the sheep, 
i. e. will look out, or provide for himself. 

1793.— Yer. 9. }£J see No. 291. 

1794. ^p$?y comp. of -J, and 3 sing. m. pres. AwJ of "SpJJ parad. 2 
and 3, se£ ^V^ order, arranged. 

1795. *tp$J9 comp. of -J, and 3 sing. m. pres. hal of li^ parad. 2, 
bound. 

1796. — Yer. 10. tiTW? comp. of 7 before sh'va 7 and inf. £a£ 
constr. of ftH^ slaughtered, as a victim; parad. 3. 

1797— Yer. 12. fc^p 2 sing. m. apoc. pres. jfeo/ of HB^ Gr. 37. 

1798. il^Xto indec. anything, comp. of T\fo, ), Dp; compare Lat. 
quid quid = quicquid, anything. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1799. tf'T constr. of tf'Tj; Lat. timens, one who fears. 

1800. Jn?bn 2 sing. m. pret. hal of IjfeH parad. 2, restrained, 
withheld. 

1801. — Yer. 13. 7^ subs. m. a ram. 

1802. "lfiX supposed by Eos. to be an adverb of time, thereafter; 
many MSS. read 7H^ and render it as the indef. art. 1ft$ Ttt 
a ram, a very common use of Ifi^? with subsequent writers, but 
never adopted by Moses. The rendering in our translation would 
require V^HK- 

1803. JftNtt part. niph. mas. of THS* parad. 2 and S, caught. 

1804. ^]5?3 comp. of 5 and -H, and IJJD or *^3P subs. m. a 
thicket; see *Sj3p^femV. 

1805. VJlM by his horns, comp. of 5 and pron. aff., and dual 
of ftp a horn ; ' Gr. 49 ; see No. 1188. 

1806. — Yer. 14. TW\ S TWTP Jehovah Jireh; i.e. Jehovah will 
provide. See verse 8. 

1807. HiO* — *V$$! "^^ wherefore it is said in the present day 
on the mountain of the Lord it shall be provided, or a provision shall 
be made; "l^fc? has here the same meaning with |3 /J? chap. x. 9; 
see No. 924. The beauty and force of this passage is completely 
lost by the rendering in the Auth. Eng. Yersion. It is difficult to 
understand what is meant by the expression, " In the mountain of 



Yer. 7— IT.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 165 

the Lord it shall be seen/' nor can any good reason be assigned 
for altering in this passage, the meaning giyen to PlXI in ver. 8, 
and in the preceding clause of this verse; see Nos. 1792 and 1806; 
see likewise No. 1779. The context and the typical nature of the 
transaction, demand the rendering "which we have given to it. 
It is universally held among orthodox Christians, that Abraham's 
offering up of Isaac is typical of Gods' offering up his son — that 
the substitution of the ram in Isaac's stead, is typical of the 
provision which Christ made as his people's substitute, not im- 
probably on the very mountain on which Abraham's sacrifice was 
offered; see No. 1799; — that Abraham saw Christ's day in this 
typical transaction, which, with its prophetic import, was handed 
down among his posterity — and that in Moses' days, a belief was 
entertained among the faithful, that on the mountain of the Lord 
a provision should be made, by the sacrifice of Christ as a pro- 
pitiation for sin. 

1808. — Yer. 16. f^! 3 sing. apoc. kalipres. of fiJJMit, it, he, answers, 
means-, applied as a particle, because, because of; "l£?X jST because 
that. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1809. DfcO lit. declaration, dictum of; JTirP'DiO (it is) a decla- 
ration of Jehovah, saith Jehovah. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

1810— Yer. 17. ^J^K ^ in blessing I will bless thee, 1p| 
YD&pih. of *TV% parad. 3; and ^p^S comp. of pron. affix, and 
1 sing. m. pres. pih. of the same. 

1811. n^nil inf. hiph., used as a gerund, of Jl^ parad. 2 and 12, 
was many; in hiph. made many, multiplied; and HS 1 "]^ 1 sing, 
pres. hiph. of the same. 

1812. riDIM comp. of 5 and constr. plur. of ^13- See No. 114; 
Gr. 49 and 75. * 

1813. *1$#£> gate, gates, i. e. city or cities, with the adjacent 
territories, subs, m.; compare Syr. JHft and Gr. 6vpa. 

1814. 71PD contr. for /iHrp comp. of 5 and Pi, with pathakh 
long by position before hheth, Gr. 19 ; and /IP! subs. m. sand. 

1815. H§^ constr. of i"l£&P subs, fern., lip, i. e. edge of the mouth ; 
hence 2. lip (of the sea, or water), sea-shore, waters' edge ; S. lip 
of a garment, i. e. extremity, edge, or border of it. 

1816. V^£$ their enemies; comp. of pron. aff., and plur. of 2JX 



166 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xxii. 18. 

or ^Itf subs. m. an enemy, a participial form from SM, only used 

in Ex.xxiii.22; with. pron. aff. of the 2 pers., T^^ seech.xlix.8. 

1817.— Ver. 18. ttZftn 3 plur. pret. kith, of ^li blessed, parad. 3. 

1818. ^|$n?3 *w w ^° quodam poster orum, Dathe. 

1819. !lpj£ subs. m. 1. extremity, end, compare ^IDJJ & heel; 

2. hire, reward, the end or object for which labour is performed; 

3. consequence ; ^0^ !2pJ?. lit. consequence that, or because that. 
1820. — Ver. 20. IN) that it was made knoivn, told; comp. of -J, 

and 3 sing. pres. hoph. of *73!l parad. 5, already noticed. 

1821. — Ver. 24. ")N\ Pifop) WtbSh quod attinet ad pellicem ejus, 
cui nomenfuit Heumah, peperit etiam ilia, i. e. etiam pellex ejus 
peperit, Storr. p. 296. 

1822. ife^r?^ comp. of 1 before the labial ) and pron. aff., and 
&W?*3 ground form of fc^fc^S or &£l?S subs. fern, pellex; Chald. 
fr^p!? ,, §; Grr. TruXkat, 7ra\\afck, iraWa/crj, a concubine. 

1823. — Chap, xxiii. 1. **)! plur. constr. of *T\ contr. for **H life, 
plur. id. 

1824.— Ver. 2. JJSfiK fVlp? m J%M -4r5a, i. e. in the city of 
Arba; constr. of iTjIp subs. fern, a city. Arba was one of the 
family of the Anakims. 

1825. *T£p7 comp. of /, and infln. constr. hal of *1§D parad. 1; 

1. struck; 2. beat (the breast) as mourners do, mourned. 

1826. nnJDj/l and to iveep (for) her, comp. of \ and V, and 
pron. affix, and infin. Jcal constr. of i"D? parad. 13. 

1827. inb ^S TJg} lit. /rom before \he face of his dead. See 
Nos.13 and 14.' 

1828. )T)ti comp. of pron. aff. and part, hal m. of YNll the vowel 
of the part, irregular, see parad. 10 ; with aff. of 2 pers. ^M?, in 
pause ^H??; see ver. 6. 

1829. — Ver. 4. 13 subs. m. a stranger, see "AH- 

1830. i^lHI subs, m. a sojourner, with 1, prefixed; from !3|P* 
or ifcyj divelt, parad. 8. Abraham lived as it were by sufferance 
in Canaan, and had neither city nor land of his own. 

1831. ^tt give, 2 plur. m. imp. hal of JJT1} parad. 5. 

1833. JlIHN possession of, constr. of H-THK subs, fern.; 1. seizure; 

2. possession ; from TH^ seized. See the observations upon this 
word, Introduction, Part I. 



Chap.xxiii.10.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 167 

1834. — Ver.6. ^JJft^ hear us; comp. of pron. aff. ft— , and 
2 sing. m. imp. kal of ]}foW parad. 4. 

1835. D^n'/X &OBJO a prince of God, a mighty, or my #reotf 
prince ; see Introduction, Part III. X^J owe raised, or elevated 
above others, a prince, emir; see No. 4690; from Kfe?0 raised. 

1836. ^iPQft? comp. of 3 and subs. m. t#Aa£ owe chooses, choice; 
from ^IH^ cogn. JPD explored, examined, selected, chose. 

1837. W^15f? comp. of pron. aff., and plur. of "iM a burying 
place; subs, m., seg. (i) class; see Gr.49 and 109; with. pron. affix 
of 3 pers. sing. I^QP fc sepulchre. 

1838. ""Dp fo^ry, 2 sing. m. imp. kal of ^ftp buried, parad. 5. 

1839. ")y\ )ifi$ti fc^K lit. maw of us his sepulchre tcill not withhold 
from thee, from burying thy dead, i. e. that thou mayest bury thy 
dead. 

1840— Ver. 8. DJ^-JlS #?. DX lit. if it is with your mind or 
tcill, if it is your mind, or if you are inclined; Ps. xxvii. 12; 
Deut.xxi. 14; Ps.cv.22. 

1841. D5^53 comp. of grave pron. aff. 2 pers., and ground form 
of £^53 already analysed. 

1842. v ^5*1 then intercede for me, comp. of ), and 2 plur. m. 
imp. kal of J^3 parad. 4; 1. pepigit, construed with 3i 8. impegit 
alicui; 3. in bonam partem, adiit aliquem precibus, institit alicui, 
intercessit. See Ges. Lex. 

1843. — Ver. 9. y|JV! that he give me, comp. of 1, and 3 sing. m. 
pres. kal of jfO parad. 5 ; ult. vowel shortened before makkaph. 

1844. rn^p subs, fern., constr. of H^ft from Ity cogn. Tin to 
pierce, to o%; the penult, kamets is immoveable, as marking the 
absence of one of the radicals. 

1845. Pf7§5?? Machpelali, i.e. double, perhaps because it con- 
tained two separate apartments for bodies ; from 7§3 folded, 
doubled; to cnrrfkaiov to SittXovv. LXX. 

1846. 'iPn&y njfp? at the extremity of his field, comp. of ? and 
n^p, constr. of Pl^p subs. m. end, extremity. 

1847 Ver. 10. "SS\ Stf* \)1&$\ and Ephron (was) sitting among 

the sons of Hcth (whom Abraham was addressing). 

1848. ")y\ ftPPJll ^TX? lit. in the ears (hearing) of the sons of 
Heth, in presence of all who go to the gate of his city, i. e. forum 



168 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxiii. 10. 

ejus, Storr, p. 278 ; viz. those citizens who used to assemble at the 
gate of the city for the transaction of public business. 

1849. ^?^3 comp. of J prep, and constr. plur. of jTfcS the ear, 
seg. (o) class. 

1850. *K3 plur. constr. m. part, kal of W2, parad. 10 and 12, 
lit. enter ers, were there such a word; the kamets immoveable, to 
mark the absence of the middle radical. 

1851.— Yer. 11. ^_^3 *3*JT? Ht. oefore the eyes of the children 
of my people. It hence appears that in these times property was 
transferred in presence of witnesses, assembled for the purpose at 
the gate of the city. This was followed by possession (or, accord- 
ing to our legal term, seizing which completed the title. 

1852.— Ver. 13. )b Hfltf Dtf since thou (art he) I beseech (thee). 
Hephronem de facie non noverat, neque adesse putabat, cum vero 
ipsum loquentem audivisset, ver. 10, 11 ; jam ad cognitum sic 
loquitur. Glass, vol. i. p. 520. Ed.Dathe. 

1853— Yer. 15. "U1 nfcg JftnK pM lit. a land of four hundred 
shekels of silver, between me and thee ivhat (is) this, i. e. a possession 
estimated at four hundred shekels of silver, is of no importance 
between you and me, who are both wealthy. 

1854. /p& 1. a certain weight, used as a standard: a shekel 
usually reckoned at half an ounce-, 2. probably a silver coin of that 
weight. See Prof. Lee's Lex. ; and Introduction, Part. I. 

1855.- — Yer. 16. "lfiu? ^3P lit. passing as regards the merchant, 
i. e. current with merchants. 

1856. 13y part, kal act. m. of ^3^ parad. 2 and 4, passed. 

1857. ^T\U2 contr. for lO'DIl?, comp. of 7 and def. art. -Jl and 
part, kal act. of "lfiD, parad. 3 and 4, went about', part, here used 
substantively and in a collective sense, one that goes about for the 
purpose of trading, a merchant. Gr. e/uL7ropo<;, from irelpw. See 
Introduction, Part I. 

1858. /pfc^l comp. of ■) and 3 sing. masc. pres. kal of vfiEP, 
parad. 1, weighed. 

1859. — 'Yer. 17. ED*1 and it stood (the field, cave, and trees) to 
Abraham, i. e. were secured to Abraham, or became his. A similar 
expression, though conveying a somewhat different idea, is used 



Chap. xxiv. 3.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 169 

in Livy, lib. i. cap. 3, " Res Latina, et regnum avitum, et paternum 
puero stetit." 

1860. 1 7^5 its boundary, comp. of 1 pron. aff. and 7?3, written 
in full 705 subs. m. a &W£, a boundary. 

1861. — Chap. xxiv. 1. JpT DJTp^l lit. and Abraham (was) ^ 

1862. K5 part, act, masc. of X*£l, parad. 10 and 12, fo #o. The 
Heb. idiom is, going in days ; while ours is, advancing in years. 

1863. ^"13 had blessed, 3 sing. pres. pih. of ^H«^ parad. 3. 
1864.— Yer. 2. 1JV3 JJ3J H5Jf b« lit- to his servant the old man 

of his house; servo suo seniori, Ros.; to his principal servant, Lee. 

1865. |pT constr. of jDT subs. m. an old man, implying reverence 
and dignity. Sometimes the idea of age is completely lost, and 
that of dignity alone retained. It does not follow that this man 
was the eldest of Abraham's servants, although this may have been 
the case. Titles and offices of dignity have been adopted in other 
languages connected with the idea of age. Thus in Lat. from 
senex comes senator; Ital. signor ; French, seigneur; Span, senor; 
Engl. sir. 

1866. ")y\ tp£ M D^ put thy hand, I pray thee, under my 
thigh, a ceremony used in swearing, of which there is no other 
trace in sacred or profane history, excepting chap, xlvii. 29, where 
the same formality is used, when Jacob made Joseph swear that 
he would carry his bones out of Egypt, The reasons for this 
ceremony rest merely on conjecture. The probability is that it 
has some reference to the blessings promised to Abraham in his 
seed, and through him to all the nations of the earth. Of the 
Abrahamic covenant circumcision was the seal, and hence in token 
of Abraham's faith, the ceremony may have arisen of laying the 
hand while swearing on the part circumcised. 

1867. D*B> 2 sing. masc. imp. hal of D*fc> id. qu. tflfc>, parad. 11, 
to place. 

1868. s y\\ my thigh, comp. of pron. aff. and Tj'T subs. com. the 
thigh. Gr.74. 

1869— Ver. 3. "?|g*3#Nl comp. of \ and pron. aff. and 1 sing. 
pres. hiph. of J?3&5^ not used in hal; in hiph. caused to swear. 



170 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xxiv. 

1870.— Yer. 4. "|Jf| 5$Y *$$ *)$$ lit. (as to) whom, I dwelling 
in the midst of them, i. e. among whom I dwell. 

1871. — Yer. 5. rQ&D 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of M^^ was willing, 
parad. 2 and 13. 

1872. ftSz? comp. of 7 before the accented syllable 7 and inf. 
Z;a£ of ^7^ wm£, parad. 8. 

1873. H&JTlPl comp. of interrog. part, and infin. hiph. of ^l&P, 
parad. 10, fo return ; in AejpA. ft? cawse to return. % H W# 1 sing, 
pres. A^A. of the same. 

1874. — Yer. 6. I^^H beware, 2 sing. masc. imp. mj»A. of *1??^ 
parad. 4, guarded; in mj»A. guarded one's self, took care. Accent 
on the penult., and the ult. vowel consequently shortened. Gram. 
29(e), and 9 and 10. 

1875. — Yer. 7. ^DjT? took me, comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers. and 
3 sing. m. pret. kal of np> See Gr. 74. 

1876. y3Bfo 1 sing. pret. niph. of J?3^' See No. 1869. 

1877. jJW 1 sing. pres. £a/ of jrG <7av<?, parad. 5. 

1878. Tr?$\ 3 sing. m. pres. kal of nW, parad. 4, sent. 

1879. — Yer. 8. JVjPjl £Ae» sAaZtf ^ow be clear, comp. of 1 and 
2 sing. masc. pret. niph. of HP J was joare ; in m/>A. was innocent, 
clear. 

1880. *J"IJ£5(^£p y*rom m«/ oath, i.e. the oath which I have ex- 
acted of thee ; comp. of •£? and pron. affix 1 pers. and lHj£3fc^ or 
HJ^D^ subs. f. a thing sivorn, an oath. Root V3^, see No. 1869. 

1881. n^n 2 sing. m. pres. hiph. apoc. of $&] No. 1873. 

1882. Ip.fid. qu. "SpJ, No. 1868. 

1883. V^ISJ lit. te masters. Sic enim saepius nomina ap- 
pellativa quae dominium notant numero plurali pro singulari 
ponuntur. Ros. 

1884. — Yer. 9. HJIl ^5^ ^ ^ n l e g a l phraseology, as aforesaid. 

1885— Yer. 10. "U1 vflX $&*?$) [lit. for all his master >s goods 
in his hand, i. e. for all his master's property was under his charge. 
These words appear to be introduced parenthetically, to account 
for the facility with which the servant prepared for the journey. 
Kal e\a(3ev 6 irals Si/ca Kafjurfkovs airb rwv Kafjurfkonv tov Kvplov 
avrov, Kal airo ttclvtwv tcov ayadoov tov Kvpiov avrov peO^ eavrov. 
LXX. Ros. prefers the former interpretation. 



Ver.4— 14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 171 

1886. QHQ3 BIS"^ to Aram (Syria) of the two rivers, lying 
between the Tigris and Euphrates, viz. Mesopotamia. The district 
beyond the Euphrates, near Thapsacus, was called Syria by the 
Greeks : IvrevOev i^eXavvec Sea tj}? %vpia<$. Xen. Anab. lib. i. 
cap. iv. 19. 

1887. ^IPli *VJ? the city of Nalior, viz. Haran or Carrae. 
1888. — Ver.ll. *Jp5*l and he caused to kneel, (bend the knee), 

comp. of •}, and 3 sing. apoc. pres. hiph. of ^1^ oen t the knee, from 
^.3 the knee i and hence have arisen the senses of adoring, 
saluting, bidding farewell, and as happens in the case of those 
arriving or departing of blessing : and because those who went to 
salute others usually brought gifts, of bestoicing, Gen. xxxiii. 10, 11 ; 
and of doing good, as applied to God; and because bidding farewell 
implies separation, this word is supposed to have acquired the 
idea of renunciation of one's society, and hence of cursing, Job i. 5. 
See Storii Analogia, p. 38. 

1889. n«¥ contr. for n$¥ Prof. Lee's Gr. 137(2), and that for 
JIXV? Gr. 39; inf. constr. of 5W parad. 8 and 12, tcent out. 

1890. rQXKTl the female (water) draiuers, comp. of -H and fern, 
plur. act. part, kal of ^Xt^ drew (water), parad. 3. 

1891. — Yer. 12. 03/ XJ'^^jpn lit. cause to meet before me, or 
cause to come into my presence (the woman destined for my mas- 
ters' son) ; 2 sing. m. imp. hiph. of Jl^D parad. 3 and 13, met. 

1892. HDPl P!£?31 and do a kindness, comp. of \ and 2 sing. m. 
imp. kal of r\&V T parad. 2 and 13. 

1893. — Ver. 13. ^3 lit. placing myself, stand-, part. niph. mas. 
of y$} placed, parad. 5. 

1894. nXV* lit. goers out, plur. fern. part. act. kal of K¥\ 

1895. nN^comp.of S, and inf. constr. Mof 2X£>; see No. 1890. 
1896— Yer. 14. ^H 2 sing. fern. imp. hiph. of PltpJ parad. 5 

and 13, bent. 

1897. ^^D comp. of pron. aff. and 15 ground form *H5 subs, 
m., an earthen vessel used for drawing water; compare Gr. K&ho<$', 
Lat. cadus ; usually carried on the shoulder. 

1898. rWfrO lit. and I (shall) drink, or that I may drink', 
comp. of ) and 1 sing. pres. kal of HH^ parad. 13, drank, and Pin&? 
2 sing. m. imp. kal of the same. 



172 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxiv. 

1899. np&^K I tvill water, give to drink; 1 sing. pres. hiph. of 
np^ not used in kal, in hiph. watered; parad. 13. 

1900. FlfOn 2 sing. m. pret. hiph. of Hy parad. 8 and 4, was 
clear, manifest ; in hiph. made clear, declared, evinced, shewed. 

1901. jn$tf ft%) and by her I shall know (by the appearance of 
the woman); Pos. prefers this to the ordinary rendering. JH&$ 
1 sing. pres. kal of JTT parad, 8 and 4, kneio. 

1902.— Yer. 15. ths had ended, 3 sing. m. pret. kal of iTO 
parad. IS, finished, accomplished. 

1903. nK¥* contr. for ft$f see No. 1889; part. act. fern, kal of 
*W parad. 8 and 12. 

1904. Tvb* 3 sing. fern. W et.puh. of 1^- 

1905. — Yer. 16. HK^ fDfr lit. goodness of countenance, of a 
beautiful countenance. 

1906. l*Ob in full H^ltO constr. of fQltS subs. fern, goodness; 
masc. form Sift- See Introduction, Part III. 

1907. Pl&^fo subs. m. what one sees, aspect, appearance, coun- 
tenance ; from HHP saw. 

1908. ("H^nS subs. fern, a virgin; no Heb. root extant. 

1909. frjfj* had knoivn her, comp. of pron. afT. 3 pers. fern., and 
3 sing. m. pret. kal of J?T parad. 8 and 4. See Gr.74. 

1910. M^J?n to the fountain, comp. of art. -T\ before the gutt. il 
Gr. 19, and H— locale and J^, which loses its ult. vowel on the 
accession of the affix. 

1911. T^Pf) in pause for /Jtf?1, comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. apoc. 
pres. of TDJl parad. 2 and 13. See Gr. 37. 

1912. — Yer. 17. *i*$Ptt}Q make me to drink, give me to drink, 
comp. of pron. afT., and 2 sing. fern. imp. hiph. of KJ£5 parad. 12, 
not used, in kal, absorbed; in hiph. caused or gave to drink: 
compare Kftil the paper reed of the Nile, termed by the Latins 
bibida papyrus, from the quantity of moisture it absorbs. This 
word is only used here and in Job xxxix. 24. 

1913. TTtti ^lriDlyfi and she hastened and let down, i. e. and she 
quickly let down. See Introduction, Part III., and Lukexix. 5,7. 

1914. in§J?3 comp. of -1, and 3 sing. fern. pres. pih. of info 
hastened, parad. 3 and 4. Gr. 19. 



Ver. 14—22.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 173 

1915. Tlfil comp. of •), and 3 sing. fern. pres. hiph. of TV 
parad. 8 and 3, descended; in hiph. caused to descend, let dozen. 

1916. ^inptPffl and gave him to drink, comp. of -1 and pron. aff., 
3 pers. 3 and 3 sing. fem. pres. hiph. of Hp^ parad. 13 ; inf. A^?A. 
constr. rip^H. 

1917— Ver. 19. 3K#*? in pause for 3tttfh$, 1 sing. pres. kal of 
^Xfc? parad. 3, dreio water ; 3 singular fem. 3N£Tl and inf. constr. 

1918. /5tfl apoc. for ir?5£fi comp. of -J, and 3 sing. f. pres.^A. 
of !"173 parad. 13 5 ended, finished; and *l ?3 3 pi. pret. ^A. 

1919. — Ver. 20. "ljffll ^H&fii ond s ^ ie hastened and emptied, and 
she quickly emptied; see No. 1913. 

1920. "Tgrij apoc. for iTJJPO Gr. 37, comp. of -1, and 3 sing. 
pres. jo?7«. of ("HJ£ parad. 2. 3. 13, teas naked, empty ; in pih. emptied. 

1921. ttp&TJ comp. of "H and fip^ subs. fem. a trough of wood 
or stone, for watering cattle ; root Hpt^ drank. 

1922. p£JJ comp. of -J, and 3 sing. f. pres. kal of ^ parad. 10, 
to run; Gr. 30 (b). 

1923.— Ver. 21. ftgt&Q for r\0T\t$ Gr. 46, beholding, part.m. 
kith, of PlNtt^ id. qu. PIJ7&P parad. 3 & 13, looked upon, contemplated. 

1924. '1)11 ^"lnto &e/;?<7 struck dumb (with astonishment) «;?Y/i a 
»£e«J to kowjj part. /*//?/*. m. of KHH parad. 2 and 3; 1. cut; 2. cw£ 
(the ground), ploughed; 3. cut in reference to the faculty of speech, 
was dumb; compare Gr. k(d$q<; dumb, and kowtco to cut. See 
Ges. Lex. 

1925. PP75JPIP! whether had prospered , comp. of PI interrog., and 
3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of TyTi parad. 4, not used in kal; according 
to Prof. Lee the leading idea in this word is motion forward, 
advancement; hence in hiph. caused to advance, made prosperous. 

1926.— Ver. 22. &| had finished, 3 plur. pret. pih. of PlS| 
See No. 1918. 

1927. ^Pl? DJJ a nose jewel of gold; D?3 subs, m.; 1. a ring 
(worn in the nose) ; 2. a ring (worn in the ears) ; see ver. 47, and 
Ezek. xri. 11, 12. *n£)K /§_ DTJ a ring for thy nose; compare 
Prov. xi. 22. 

1928. h$$fc J?j2n half (a shekel) its weight, J?f?| subs. m. ; 1. a 



174 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxiv. 

half, compare J7Kl divided, cleft ; 2. the name of a weight, con- 
sisting of half (a, shekel); see Exod.xxxviii. 26. 

1929. lvDK?£) comp. of pron. aff. and /D$fo subs. m. weight; 
root 70- 

1930. D*TJ&¥ ligatures for the arm, bracelets ; plur. of T£?¥ 
subs. m. something tied, a bracelet. 

1931. "131 ^HT i"nfe?5? to (shekels) of gold, their weight. It is 
here to be observed, that at this period gold was used for orna- 
ments, but not as money. « Additur fabulae, quod vulgo Sabini 
aureas armillas magni ponderis brachio laevo . . . habuerint," Liv. 
Hist, lib.i. cap.xi. 

1932.— Ver. 23. H^5 tell, 2 sing. f. imp. hiph. of 1Q parad. 5. 

1933. fc^H is there? comp. of T\ interrog. part, and &?*, an in- 
declinable word, expressive of the notion of existence, real being ; 
hence, substance, firmness, wealth, have resulted as secondary sig- 
nifications. See chap, xviii. 24. D^bl! ^ vIN lit. if reality 

fifty, if there are fifty, with pron. aff. **$\, ver. 42. 

1934. fV3 subint. 5, Glass, vol.i. p. 585. 

1935. J 77 to pass the night, comp. of 7 and infin. hal of J v, 
parad. 11, id. qu. ]1/- 

1936. — Ver. 25. j3£) subs. masc. straw. Straw was not used in 
the East for litter. Bush. 

1937. tflfipft subs. masc. what nourishes or feeds cattle, com- 
prehending cut straw, beans, barley, or the like ; from &§?, a root 
found in the Chaldee, fed. 

1938. — Yer. 26. *Tj?*1 and bowed himself, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. 
m. pres. hal of TlD, parad. 6. 

1939. — Yer. 27. ^f\1l^ blessed ox praised, pass. part. m. of T^* 

1940. i?5? fe/£, withdrew, 3 sing. m. pret. ^z/, parad. 2. 

1941. l^pPl te kindness, comp. of pron. aff. 1 and ^Tpll, ground 
form of npn, subs. seg. (a) class. 

1942. 1Fl??&$1 and his truth, faithfulness, comp. of 1 and pron. aff. 
1 and F\fo#, contr. for ri}??^, Gr. 39 ; ground form of fD^, contr. 
)H£?&, from JfoSSS supported, sustained; used intrans. was supported, 
was firm, faithful, true. 

1943. ")y\ ^p/j3 *3^ as /or m#, Jehovah conducted me in (by) 



Ver. 22— 41.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 175 

£/«'s way to the house of my master's kindred. ^TPQ contr. for 
^55, Gr. 35. 

1944. "OfO comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers. and 3 sing. m. pret. kal of 
nnj, parad. 5, 3, 13. 

1945. — Yer. 28. H^ffl #^ ^^ comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. pres. 
apoc. hiph. of "T^J- 

1946. ilflSX tt^? <z£ A<?r mother's house, or apartment. Where 
polygamy prevailed, there were separate houses, tents, or apart- 
ments for each wife, in which her children likewise resided. 

1947. — Yer. 30. ftK 1 ")? *0?3 an d when he had seen, comp. of 3 
before sh'va 2 and inf. constr. kal of PlfcO parad. 2, S, 13. 

1948. IJ^pfe^fl and when he had heard, comp. of \ pron. aif. 1 and 
J$?fcP, and with the accent J?£?fc^, ground form of the inf. constr. 
kalofyfcW. 

1949. — Yer. 31. W1J3 I have prepared, 1 sing. pret. ^rc'A. of MJ3 
parad. 13, turned one's self; in ^%A. made to turn or depart, put 
away, prepared, by removing things that are in the way. 

1950. — Yer. 32. H£l§^ an d he (Laban) opened, i. e. loosed, un- 
girded, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of l"lfi|), parad. 4. 

1951. — Yer. 33. ")X\ Db>?*J read D&W, see the marginal reading, 
and there ivas set before him to eat, i. e. food, comp. of -) and 3 sing, 
pres. puh. of D^, parad. 10. 

1952. 73&7 comp. of 7 before the comp. sh'va 7 and inf. kal 
constr. of ?5&, parad. 7. 

1953. 1$1 speak (on), 2 sing. m. imp. pih. of "I?*! parad. 4. 
1954. — Yer. 36. MHipT ^PIK lit. a/iJey Aer 0?^ a^e, after she was 

far advanced in life. nnjpT comp. of rl~ pron. aif. fern, and HllpT 
subs. fern, old aye, Gr. 95. Root [pj- 

1955. — Yer. 38. ''131 K7"Q& certainly not, to my father's house 
shalt thou go. The Sam. copy has Dtf \3 but, but assuredly. 

1956— Yer. 40. WiOW 1 sing. pret. hith. of ^Sn id. qu. ^ 
went. 

1957. — Yer. 41. VyNftJ from my oath which I have exacted 
from thee, or from my execration or curse involved in the oath; 
comp. of •£? and pron. aff. and PDtf subs. fern, an oath, implying 
some mulct, damage, ban, or curse. Prof. Lee's Lex. 



176 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxiv. 

1958. ^M m. clear. 

1959. — Yer. 42. fctt^X 1 sing. m. pres. kal of &13 to go, parad. 
10, 12. 

1960. "\X\ Xi-^J-DN lit. J pray thee if there is with thee a 
causing my way to prosper, i. e. I beseech, thee if thou art inclined 
to make my journey prosperous. 

1961. irSttb part. m. hiph. of rfat, No. 1925. 

1962. — Yer. 43. T]u7}}jl the young woman, comp. of -Jl and 
^^?y sub. fern. D/J?. masc. « young man. 

1*963. Jttttftl contr. for M^TT, comp. of -Pi and act. part. &fl^ f. 
of fcW parad. 8 and 12, went out. 

1964. — Yer. 45. Hp3^ I had finished, 1 sing. pres. pih. of n?3, 
parad. 13. 

1965. — Yer. 46. flEWI and I drank, comp. of J and 1 sing. apoc. 
pres. kal of T\T\V2 , parad. 13. Gr. 115. T\T\$ 2 sing. m. imp. kal of 
the same ; and nnp^H, in pause for T\T\T^T\, Gr. 34 (2), 3 sing, 
fern. pret. hiph. of HpE^. parad. 13, drank. 

1966.— Yer. 47. hx&X) and I asked (her), comp. of •}, Gr. 19, 
and 1 sing. pres. kal of /&W, parad. 3, asked, enquired at. 

1967. Tti&$h$_ on (in) her nose. See No. 1927. 

1968. — Yer. 48. ^)F0H hath conducted me, comp. of the pron. aff. 
1 pers. and 3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of HPO, parad. 5, 3, 13. 

1969. H£X ^]T!3 in a ivay of truth, i. e. in a true or right way 
for the attainment of the object of my mission. Introduction, 
Part III. 

1970. — Yer. 49. itjf^ and I turn, shall turn, that I may turn, 
Introduction, Part III. ; comp. of ) and 1 sing. pres. kal of ilJS, 
parad. 13, No. 1949. 

1971. — Yer. 50. zM 1 plur. pres. hoph. of 7^£ parad. 8, was 
able; in hoph. id. 

1972. — Yer. 53. v3 constr. of D v5, apparently from an obsolete 
form Tw%, ordinary form v? subs. m. 1. anything made, finished, 
prepared ; 2. furniture ; 3. an instrument (of war) ; 4. an ornament 
(for the body). 

1973. D'HJjJ^ an d garments, raiment, comp. of ) and plur. of 
^5 subs. m. seg. (e) class. Gr. 108. 109. It hence appears that 



Ver. 42— 60.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 177 

raiment was used at this period as presents, as in after -times ; and 
that Eebekah was not purchased from her father, as were Leah and 
Rachel, and as is customary in the East even in the present day. 

1974. J"OTwlD a pi. form, precious things ; root *T5Q excellence, glory. 

1975 — Ver. 54. ^v*l and they passed the night, comp. of •) and 
3 plur. pres. kal of [y, par ad. 11. 

1976. *)n?$ send me away, comp. of pron. aff. and 2 plur. m. 
of imp. pih. of TOW, parad. 4. 

1977.— Ver. 55. I^JJ IN CMftJ about ten days, faepas axrel 84/ca, 
LXX. According to the Arab, and Onk. annum aut decern menses-, 
to which the former rendering is preferable. 

1978. — Ver. 56. ^nHXftvX do not detain (me), 2 plur. m. pres. 
pih. of nUX delayed, parad. 2, 3, 4. 

1979.— Ver. 57. "tfl *W? N^pJ lit. we s/^ZZ ca/Z (or let us call) 
the damsel and ash her mouth, i.e. and enquire what her wishes are. 

1980. &nj?J 1 plur. pres. hal of tfTj* 

1981. 'lyj commonly PHSJO subs, f., 1^5 ni. form, a young man. 

1982. ri7&$K0 comp. of PI parag. and 1 plur. pres. hal of 7$&, 
parad. 3, enquired. The Hebrews use the idiom, ask the mouth, 
because that is the organ of utterance. 

1983. — Ver. 58. ^/Hn wilt thou go, comp. of T\ interrog. part, 
and 2 sing. fern. pres. hal of TH^ parad. 8. 

1984. — Ver. 59. PTFlpJQ her nurse, comp. of pron. afF. and ripjb, 
ground form of Plpjft or HpJ^J, fern, of hiph. part, of p3* parad. 8, 
sucked; in hiph. suckled; hiph. part. fern, she that gives to suck, a 
nurse. See Introduction, Part I. 

1985.— Ver. 60. "til ^S^S "P| AN lit. 6e thou into thousands 
of myriads, i.e. be thou the progenitrix, etc. 

1986. *51 2 sing. fern. imp. &#Z of PPPI, parad. 13, teas. 

1987. *§/fi$ constr. of D^/X plur. of tQ# a thousand; ground 
form^Sx- 

1988. niHI fern., lit. many, used to express an indefinitely large 
number; a myriad, myriads. 

1989. tJH^l and let inherit or possess, comp. of 1 and 3 sing. m. 
pres. kal of EH* parad. 8. 

1990. V&OE? lit. their haters, those that hate them, comp. of 
pron. aff. and pi. of act. part, kal of fcO^ hated, parad. 12. Gr. 49. 

12 



178 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xxiv. 61. 

1991. — Ver. 61. ^TH"^^ and her maids, comp. of \ and fern, 
pron. aff., and plur. of ITT.23 subs, fern.; see No. 1981. It hence 
appears that Rebekah had taken other female attendants with her 
besides Deborah. 

1992. PIJ5I0J?! and they rode, comp. of -), and 3 plur. fern. pres. 
kal of ^5*1 rode, parad. 2. 

1993. — Ver. 62. S03D NS ptlW) lie. and Isaac came from coming, 
had just arrived^ venoit d'arriver. 

1994.— -Ver. 63. ftwh to meditate, comp. of 7 and tW inf. kal, 
parad. 10 and 4. 

1995. i'lJJ ni^§7 a t the turning of the evening, about even-tide; 
comp. of 7, and infin. constr. kal of JlllS, parad. 13. 

1996. i*)j; in pause for 21% Gr. 31 T (3). 

1997— Ver. 64. btiXl *?$?' Sbfil lit. <md she fell from the camel, 
i.e. lighted. Rebekah did not descend from the camel till she 
knew who Isaac was ; and she did so as a mark of respect, as is 
customary in the present day. 7&F\) comp. of -1, and 3 sing. fern, 
pres. kal of /^fell, parad. 5. 

1998. — Ver. 65. T\t?7\ this, comp. of -Pi, and 7 prep., and Hi- 
See Prof. Lee's Gr. 176 (2). 

1999. ")y\ VJ?2fQ n&Tfi and she took the veil and covered herself 
It should hence seem that the veil was a piece of dress always 
worn by women in similar circumstances : the use of the article 
here cannot be in any other way accounted for. 

2000. WyX subs. m. a veil, the Hebrew root obsolete. 

2001. D5nJ?fi comp. of -5, and apoc. pres. hith. of HD3 parad. 13, 
covered-, Gr.37. 

2002.— Ver. 66. ^gEH comp. of -1, and 3 sing. pres. pih. of 
*l§p recounted, parad. 4. 

2003.— Ver. 67. IIHyj and brought her, comp. of ) without 
dagesh, before sKva with yod, and pron. aff., and 3 sing. pres. 
hiph. of tf 13 ; see Gr. 74. 

2004. PDilfcn to the tent (of Sarah his mother), comp. of H art., 
J! locale, and 7Plfc; see No. 1946. 

2005. Il3n$*J and he loved her, comp. of -), and fern. pron. aff. 
3 pers., and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of 3HK parad. 2 and 3. 

2006. Dnj^J <m^ was comforted, comp. of 0, and 3 sing. pres. 



Chap. xxv. 16.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 179 

niph. of DHJ parad. 5 and 3, not used in hal. The primary meaning 
of this word is sighed, hence in niph. 1. sighed over the misfortunes 
of another, pitied-, 2. sighed over one's own errors or sins, repented; 
inpih. declared one's pity towards another, comforted; and in puh. 
found consolation, was comforted; in niph. id. 

2006*. teX ,ta inX lit. after his mother, i.e. after his mother's death. 

2007— Chap. xxv. 6. tfg^fiJl comp. of -H, and plur. abs. of 
fc^T? or ^p3 se g- ( a ) class, a concubine ; the plur. is here formed 
by the addition of the plur. termination to the ground form B5^D*$, 
which is contrary to the general rule, Gr. 109. See No. 1821. 

2008. rOFlft gifts, plur. of tl)P>fo subs, fern ichat one gives, a gift, 
from }r0 parad. 5. 

2009— Ver. 8. JJW comp. of \ and 3 sing. pres. hal of J?1| 
parad. 4, expired. 

2010. nrb>3 comp. of 3 and «t2^ fern., id. qu. yty m. ft* 
^oa/y hair of an old person, old age. 

2011. 23bl comp. of \ and jb^ constr. JD^ masc. /wtas, 
satiety, and /w//, satiated; the complete expression is found in 
ch. xxxv. 29, yiy* J?3^ fulness or satiety of days ; according to 
some the meaning is satiated, or wearied with life : I am inclined 
to think that it refers to the accomplishment of the full term of 
life, as opposed to premature death. 

2012. — Ver. 13. DrH/irP according to the order of their births. 
See No. 194. 

2013. — Ver. 16. DPP'lVW iv rats (nervals avrcov, teal iv rat? 
iiravXeaiv avrcov, LXX.; comp. of 3 and grave pron. aff. DJH, and 
constr. plur. of l^fl subs. m. ; moveable nomad villages, formed of 
tents pitched in a circle, now called Hordes. 

2014. DrVVt^ comp. of ) and 3* and pron. aff., and plural of 
(TVtp subs. fern. ; a shepherd's house, with accommodation for 
flocks and herds, collected there either for protection, or at the 
time of sheep-shearing. These appear to have been built at con- 
venient stations, and they are distinguished from tents, which are 
moveable : cognate "fttO order, row, compare tier, totver, turret. 
See Rosenm. 

2015. ^m princes, emirs, plur. abs. of N*B0; see Nos. 1690, 
and 1835. 

12* 



180 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xxv. 

2016. Dri^&O according to their families or tribes, comp. of 7, 
prcn. aff., and plur. of T\12>& subs, fern. 

2017— Yer. 18. SfiJ VTwhl ^&hjf see No. 1385; 7*ti here 
appears to have the same meaning with ]2W\ there. It is rendered 
KaTa)K7j(7e by the LXX., and fcOfc^ habitavit by Onkelos ; the full 
form is probably H pHJ? /§J See Ezek. xlvii. 22 ; Numb, xxxiv. 2 ; 
Josh, xxiii. 4 ; Ps. lxxviii. 55 ; Ps. xvi. 6. 

2018. — Yer. 19. fn/ltt history, historical account. 

2019. — Yer. 20. I^FtD^ in his taking (to wife), when he married; 
comp. of 5 and pron. aff., and P\T\T) ground form of Hnp, contr. 
for fiflp ?, inf. constr. hal of Hp^ parad. 5 and 4. 

2020. — Yer. 21. *")£$*! and earnestly supplicated, comp. of -), 
and 3 sing. pres. hal of ^JHJ^; 1. burned incense; 2. entreated, sup- 
plicated; prayer and supplication being offered to God after the 
incense was burned on the altar. 

2021. )F\m tl±hin behalf of his wife; ll±h comp. of ? and 
rD3 properly a subs, m., anything before the eyes, hence used in 
the acceptation of before, in front of, in behalf of ; Scot, anent. 

2022. injQ comp. of •), and 3 sing m. pres. hiph. of IH^; see 
No. 2020. 

2023. — Yer. 22. ")$) ^^HJ"1*5 et tutuderunt se invicem in medio 
(utero) ejus, Eos.; comp, of \ and 3 plur. m. pres. hith. of Y^, 
beat, bruised, crushed, parad. 6. 

2024. rpitf n? T\lh \$ D& lit. if (it is) so, why (am) / thus; 
El ovrco fioi fjueWei ytvecrOaL Xva ri /xoc tovto, LXX. " Si sic mihi 
futurum est, quid necesse fuit me concipere," Hieron. : according 
to Jarchi's interpretation, since the distress of pregnancy is so great, 
why was 1 so desirous to be in this condition. I am inclined to 
question the correctness of these interpretations ; I do not believe 
that Rebekah was so distressed in consequence of her sufferings 
during pregnancy, as to induce her to express regret that she was 
in that condition : the desire of offspring seems to have outweighed 
all regard to the sufferings of pregnancy or child-birth. There 
appears on this occasion to have been something unusual in her 
symptoms, of which she desired an explanation from God. 

2025 — Yer. 23. *?p£?35 in thy womb, comp. of 5 an cL fern. pron. 
aff. 2 pers., and 3£p5, ground form of }^3 seg. (i) class. 



Ver. 17—26.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 181 

2026. D^U nations, plur. of ''lil a nation-, nations are here used 
per meton. for heads of nations ; this is a much more forcible mode 
of expression than if the sacred historian had said, two sons from 
ivhom two nations were to arise. See Storr. p. 20. 

2027. DV^p^7 plur. of D«7, ground form D£?^ 7 a nation, people. 

2028. yyjiti comp. of ■£) and pron. aff. 3 and plur. of MJJb the 
bowels, intestines. 

2029. VT\§\ in pause for VT7§* Gr. 31 (2), shall he separated, 
3 plur. m. pres. niph. of *H3 parad. 3. Some modern commentators 
translate T\*)^\ Y-JffiO sna ll be separated from each other from the 
time they come out of thy bowels, i. e. from their birth. 

2030. ")%) D&7£ Dn? 5 ) lit. and a people shall be strong from 
(above) a people, i. e. one of the nations shall be more powerful 
than the other. See Introduction, Part III. 

2031. ffi^J 3 sing. m. pres. hal of f&K parad. 2. 

2032. TJ?i *n$£ ^11 lit. and the great (in point of age) shall 
serve the small (in point of age), i. e. the elder shall serve the 
younger. See Introduction, Part III. 

2033. y) m.; 1. multns; 2. magnus (natu). 

2034. *DJT 3 sing. m. pres. hal of H5J7 parad. 2, served. 

2035. *VJ?¥ m., parvus, parvus (natu). 

2036 .— V e T r.24. )&&) comp. of •)_, and 3 plur. pres. hal of tibfc 
fidfilled, likewise used intrans., parad. 12. 

2037. DWl contr. for D*&Kfl a plur. form, twins. 

2038— Ver. 25. V?3 ^tolS'cowrerf tot^ ra? tor, all of him. 

2039. 1^ n^^5 lit. like a garment of hair, like a hairy 
garment. See Introduction, Part III. 

2040. JYVTK subs. fern, a robe, garment-, where there are masc. 
and fern, forms of Hebrew nouns, with nearly, or exactly the same 
shade of meaning, one of the forms sometimes falls into desuetude, 
which is probably the case with the masc. form of this word. 

2041 lj?jg> subs. m. hair, fern, form PTO^- 

2042. 1&?J£ Esau, from the context it appears that this word sig- 
nifies hair, or hairy ; traces of this meaning, however, are only found 
in the cogn. dialects. See Win. Lex. Dathe renders this word obtectus. 

2043.— Ver. 26. "Ml nTHK T\ s \ lit. and his hand holding the heel 
of Esau, npltf fern, of act. part, hal of THK parad. 2 and 3. 



182 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxv.26. 

2044. !lpX5 comp. of 5 before the comp. sh'va 3, and constr. 
of ^DJ7 subs. m. the heel. 

2045. ^plT Jacob, lit. Ae sAa// supplant, or Ae supplants, of the 
form of the 3 sing. m. pres. kal of ^pj? parad. 3, took by the heel. 
Root MJ? £Ae /*€<?/. 

2046. — Ver. 27. *1;V JT"P knowing (in) hunting, skilled in hunting ; 
J£T act. part. m. £a? of JHJ parad. 8 and 4. 

2047. *V¥ subs. m. 1. hunting (venatio) ; 2. that which is taken 
in the chase, venison. 

2048. Tl*l& WW a man of the field, a man of field sports, a 
sportsman. 

2049. Dft $*&' This expression, which is descriptive of Jacob's 
habits, appears to be in contrast with the epithet *T5J JTT given 
to Esau, and probably means unskilled in any arts, unacquainted 
with field sports, and following the pursuits of a pastoral life. It 
does not appear to be the intention of the sacred writer in this 
place to contrast the moral characters of the two brothers. See 
Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2050. — Ver. 28. V£3 T¥ *3 \it. for venison in his mouth, i.e. 
for he was in the habit of eating his son's venison. 

2051. — Ver. 29. TT3 2pV s 11*) lit. et Jacobus coxit coctum, and 

T | -;- VT~ ' 

Jacob boiled a dish of food. 

2051*. TTJ comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. apoc. of TlT to 
boil; in. hiph. id.: from the tumid appearance of water boiling, has 
arisen the secondary meaning of this word in hiph., viz. behaving 
insolently, swelling against, presuming. 

2052. T?2j lit. something boiled, constr. Ttt, from the preceding 
word. 

2053. W£ m - worn out (by fatigue and hunger), exhausted. 
2054. — Ver. 30. ^tO^/H give me to eat, comp. of pron. aff. 

1 pers. and 2 sing. m. imp. hiph. of tDJ?7, not used in kal; in hiph. 
swallowed, gulped over, devoured greedily ; nowhere else used. 

2055. "IHI D^rrp lit. of this red, of this red (mess); the 
repetition shews Esau's extreme impatience and anxiety. 

2056. DhK m. red. 

T 

2057. — Ver. 31. ITlS^? sell, comp. of il parag. and ground form 
of ^Dfc 2 sing. m. imp. kal of *)2ti, parad. 4, sold. 



Chap.xxvi. 5.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 183 

2058. ^rnilp thy birthright, comp. of pron. aff. and TKfo subs. 
fern, the rights belonging to the eldest son, one of which was a 
double portion of the father's inheritance. Root *"D^j> hi kal 
inusit; cogn. ")M cleft, broke forth, ic as first. 

2059— Ver. 32. T\th 1|Sh S ±K lit. lam going to die-, in Fr. 
Je m'en vais moiirir ; a strong figure, expressive of his great hunger. 

2060.— Ver. 33. DVJ contr. for tf*n? lit. as to e%. Glass. 

accordingly thus renders this passage : "Jura mihi sicut hie dies/' 

i. e. tarn vere quani hunc diem existere. 

2061— Ver. 34. D*Bhtf TB « Jotfetf m^ o/ fewft'fes. B*Bh9 
. T _. . . ,/ T _. 

plur. abs. of £HJ£, not used in the sing, lentiles. 

2062. ?3*5 (7;?^ despised, comp. of -J and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. 
kal of PITS}, parad. 13, despised. See Gr. 115. 

2063. — Chap. xxvi. 1. H3r9 besides, comp. of -12 and / and 15« 
See No. 271. 

2064. — Ver. 2. NVJ a;?^ appeared, comp. of -\ and 3 sing. masc. 
pres. mjoA. apoc. of HiO saw, parad. 2, 3, and 13. 

2065. TTJV/N go not dozen, 2 sing. m. pres. kal of TV parad. 8. 

2066. p# dwell, 2 sing. m. imp. kal of p# <fo?e&, parad. 1. 
2067. — Ver. 3. "AH sojourn, 2 sing. m. imp. A'«Z of ^ttH parad. 10, 

fo sojourn. 

2068. ITniO comp. of 1 and 1 sing. masc. pres. kal of ITi"! was, 
parad. 13. 

2069. — Ver. 4. WS^/I 1 ! comp. of \ and 1 sing. m. pret. hiph. of 
PD^ parad. 2 and 13, teas numerous-, in hiph. caused to become 
numerous. 

2070— Ver. 5. 1WX 3j$ eo gifotf, see No. 1819, and Storr. 339. 

2071. *£n5fc^? ???*/ charge, i.e. all that I have required him to 
keep. This seems a general term, inclusive of the three branches 
that follow. Comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers. and ftlfoWfo, ground form 
of rnfofc^fc subs. fern. seg. (a) class, tchat one should observe, an 
appointed duty ; masc. form IfoWfo- Root T??fe? observed, kept. 

2072. TflVft my commandments, i. e. the special commandments 
given to himself; comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers. and pi. of PIJV5 subs, 
fern, tchat one commands, a commandment. Root iV)¥ commanded. 

2073. TUpPl my statutes, comp. of pron. aff. and plur. of Plj3n 
subs. fern, anything engraven, defined ; hence a statute, such as 



184 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 



XXVI. 



circumcision, sacrifices, etc. ; masc. form pl"I, ground form ppfy 
verb PpO" 

2074. ''Hlin my laws, i. e. the laws of God generally, comp. of 
pron. aff. and plur. of /"HD or TTNFS subs. fern. 1. instruction ; 2. a 
law, etc. Root PH* shot forth as an arrow; 2. put forth as instruc- 
tion, taught. 

2075. — Ver. 7. ^/X&^J comp. of •) and 3 plur. masc. pres. kal of 
7K^ parad. 3, enquired. 

2076. ^l^rV M/ me, comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers. and 3 plur. pres. 
kal of ^H, parad. 2 and 3, sfew, killed. 

2077.— Ver. 8. "Vll tt'TN *3 Wl lit. «w<? # happened, when the 
days were prolonged to him there, i. e. after he had lived a con- 
siderable time there. 

2078. )y)& 3 plur. pret. kal of 1p&, parad. 2 and 3, extended; 
and in trans, ^as /ow</. 

2078.* &|M£!3 comp. of •) and 3 sing. masc. apoc. pres. hiph. of 
£]p&^, not used in &«/; in niph. looked, looked over the parapet of a 
flat roof, looked down ; in hiph. id. Lee's Lex. 

2079. pDXO ht. sporting, using familiarities not to be expected 
in a brother towards his sister ; part. pih. masc. of pW parad. 3. 
There is a paranomasia in the words pn^£? P0¥*. 

2080 — Ver. 9. IjX exclusion ; hence only (excluding everything 
but the principal idea), she is nothing else but thy wife. 

2081. — Ver. 10. fij$?5 haud multum abfuit quin, lit. but a little, 
one of the people lay, i. e. one of the people was tvithin a little of, etc. 

2082. WK guilt; ayvoLav, LXX. 

2083. — Ver. 11. J££D comp. of -PI and act. part, kal masc. of J^J, 
parad. 5 and 4, touched. 

2084. JlftV in pause for fifoV 3 sing. masc. pres. hoph. of ffift, 
parad. 10. 

2085. — Ver. 12. JHT*1 arc<£ sowed, comp. of -3 and 3 sing. masc. 
pres. kal of JJ*T? parad. 3 and 4, sowed. 

2086. XX$*1 awe? found, i. e. reaped, comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. 
pres. kal of N¥£, parad. 12. 

2087. DHJJfc? measures, a plur. form ; rate, measure, only found 
here. 

2088. — Ver. 14. |N¥1"|J)fi$ property in sheep. 



Ver.. 5—20.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 185 

2089. rn5yi lit. and service, and servants, the abs. being used 
for the concr., conrp. of ) and subs, fern., from HJl? a servant. 

2090. ^3(5^1 and were jealous of, envied him, comp. of •) and 3 pi. 
jtres.jrih. of &Op teas jealous of, envied, parad. 12; dagesh is im- 
plied in J in this word. Gr. 19. 

2091— Ver. 15. Thfi$T\ comp. of -H and pi. abs. of "IKS a well. 
The plur. is probably formed from a fern, form in desuetude in 
the sing. 

2092. T®n had digged, 3 plur. pret. kal of ^H, parad. 2 and 
4, dug. 

2093. D^fip comp. of pron. aff. and 3 plur. pret. pih.; and D£lD* 
ver. 18, 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of DftD filled up. 

2094. — Ver. 16. ")$\ FMp¥J?"*5 f or th°u art far more powerful 
than tve. The Philistines were jealous of Jacob's fast increasing 
prosperity. 

2095. JJ&XJJ 2 sing. m. pret. kal of D^JJ was strong, parad. 2. 

2096. — Ver. IT. jn*J and pitched his tent, comp. of -J and 3 sing. 
m. apoc. pres. kal of >"0n, parad. 2 and 13. See Gr. 115. 

2097. /H33 ?'/* M/s valley, comp. of •?, contr. for -ilS and /H3 
subs. m. 1. a brook, a mountain torrent-, 2. a district through which 
a brook runs, a valley. 

8098.—- Ver. 18. "tfl pW 3J0J1 <md Isaac returned and dug, 
i. e. and Isaac again dug. 

2099. ISny comp. of -) and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of ^H, parad. 
2 and 4. 

2100. ^Sil £&e^ had dug, i.e. the servants of Abraham. The 
Sam., LXX., Syr., Vulg. read *H3J? servants of, instead of ^3 
in the days of. 

2101— Ver. 20. 0*?J comp. of •)_ and 3 plur. pres. kal of nn 
parad. 11, to dispute, argue, contend, quarrel with. 

2102. *Jfl lit./mfors, constr. plur. of PIJH masc. act.part. kal of 
^V^} parad. 2, 3 and 13, fed. 1. feeder of cattle, herdsman ; 2. feeder 
of sheep, shepherd. 

2103. D^H ^7 lit. fo us the water, i.e. owrs is the tvater. 

._ — T ^ 

2104. p|?j£ subs, contention. 

2105. ^p^ynn £ad contended, 3 pers. plur. pret. /??>/*. of pg>JJ, 
parad. 2, only used here. 



186 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xxvi. 21. 

2108. — Yer. 21. Jljb^ Sitnah, i. e. accusation, enmity, only used 
here. Root Jtpfe? accuser, adversary. 
ZIM.—Yer.lz. pPlJQ, see No. 1073. 

2108. JYOrn room, a plur. form, not used in the sing. See 
No. 2109. 

2109. ^0*1(1 made room, 3 sing. pret. hiph. of ^T\ teas large ; 
n hiph. made large, etc. 

2110. ^D^^l and we shall increase, comp. of \ and 1 plur. pret 
kal of n*HB) parad. 3 and 13, was fruitful, increased. 

2111. — Yer. 25. DgM^l lit. and spread out (his tent) there, i.e. 
and pitched (his tent) there. See No. 1075. 

2112. ^y) and dug, comp. of •) and 3 plur. masc. pres. kal of 
11^3, parad. 3 and 13, dug. 

2113.— Yer. 26. ^HJfib his friend, comp. of pron. aff. and JT|£ 
m. owe who feeds with one, quasi a J?JH id. qu. Tfy^Sfed. 

2114. lb* leader, chief, subs. m. 

2115. — Yer. 27. Jffafi wherefore, comp. of $£PP H& #mW edoctus f 
or ^wa ratione ductus ? rl fiadcov ; JflT part. masc. pass, ^a/ of 
J?T parad. 8 and 4. 

2116. DflX3 2 plur. m. pret. JtaZ of S83, parad. 10 and 12. 

2117. DpfcOb* 2 plur. m. pret. ZfeaZ of Njb hated, parad. 12. 
2117* ^Hy^ttl comp. of -) and pron. aff. 1 pers. and 2 pi. pres. 

pih. of n?^ sent, parad. 4. 

2118. — Yer. 28. WtVl I&O era seeing we have seen, we have 
indeed perceived ; 1£0 ordinarily written HiO, infin. kal absolute 
of H^*}, and ^yt>*1 1 plur. pret. kal of the same. 

2119. M*nfa*5 between us, see No. 32. 

2120. nn^pJI let there be cut (made), comp. of \ and 3 sing. 
fern. pret. niph. of rH3 cu ^- See ^°- 689. 

2121— Yer. 29. 'U1 ng>gErdK (f^Aow w^ efo ws m7, i. e. that 
thou wilt not do us evil. See the whole formula of the oath in 
No. 1244. 

2122. ^§33 have injured, comp. of pron. aff. 2 pers. and 1 pi 
pret. kal of J^3 parad. 5 and 4. 1. touched-, 2. touched so as to 
injure. 

2123. ^rfp&^li and sent thee away, comp. of •) and pron. aff. SJ 
and 1 plur. pres. jw'A. of H/^, parad. 4. 



Chap.xxvii.3.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 187 

2124. "1^1 ^1^5 Htt}? PlftNt £/eo2J woz# (art) blessed by Jehovah, or 
72010 ^Afltf thou art blessed of Jehovah. Gedcles. The reason is here 
given for Abimelech's desire to enter into covenant with Isaac. 

2125.— Yer. 30. ntf&Tft Urb B>J£1 and he made to them a feast, 
etc. It shonld seem from this passage, taken in connection with 
others, ch. xv. 10, and xxi. 27, et seq., that sacrifices were offered 
at the formation of solemn covenants, and that the covenanting 
parties feasted upon the victims. In some cases there is only 
allusion to the sacrifice, in others only to the feast after the cove- 
nant was made. 

2126— Ver. 31. DW3, jxera acoTrjpias, LXX., perhaps with 
assurances of Isaac's friendship. 

2127.— Ver. 33. i1Jp# Schibah, i.e. seven, fern, of JD^ id.; 
op/cov, LXX., quasi ITJJJJ^; compare J?3&? seven, with JD^ pret. 
kal of $73^0 sicore. "Numerus septenarius sacer erat, et jura- 
menta vel septem sacrifices," Gen. xxi. 28, seqq., " Yel septem 
testibus et pignoribus firmari solebant." vid. Herod, iii. 8, and 
Il.xix. 243. Ges.Lex. 

2128. — Ver. 35. fill ]"HD lit. bitterness of mind. "Formula pro 
molestae." Storr. p. 21. Sources of vexation, or distress. 

2129. T\1H2 constr. of PHD subs. f. bitterness, distress, vexation. 
Kholem immoveable ; verb *T\fo teas bitter. 

2130. — Chap, xxvii. 1. IPDJfil, ordinary form MyPOfil comp. of 
•1 and 3 plur. fern. pres. kal of J1PI3, parad. 3 and 13, was ivcak, 
languid, dim. 

2131. fiiOft ^t.from seeing, so that he could not see; comp. of 
ft for -ft, Gr. 19, and inf. constr. kal of HN^l. 

2132. /OH 1^5 h™ son the great (one), as compared with the 
other, his elder son. See No. 2030 and 2032. 

2133.— Ver. 3. X& contr. for XW) 2 sing. m. imp. kal of KgO 
parad. 5 and 12, raised, took up, took. 

2134. ^73 thy weapons, see No. 1972. 

2135. T*?n comp. of pron. aff. and vfi, of which the new form 
is probably vtt something suspended, supposed to be a quiver, but 
rendered by Onk. and the Syr. a sword, the former suspended 
over the shoulder, the latter at the thigh. Root TwP\ suspended; 
this word is cnra% \ey. 



188 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 



XXVll. 



2136 ^fl^pl and thy bow, comp. of pron. aff. and FiWD, ground 
form of T)ffip subs. fern. 

2137. NX1 comp. of ) and NX, per sync, for NX* 2 sing. m. imp. 
kal of NX* 

2138. HTX V PH^IX! lit. and hunt a hunting for me, i.e. and 
hunt venison for me. 

2139. TTVte comp. of T\ parag. and 2 sing. m. imp. kal of ^X, 
par ad. 10, to hunt. 

2140. n*TX comp. of H parag. and *7*X, in pause for 1*X subs. 
m. a hunting, per meton. for the thing taken in hunting, venison. 

2141. — Yer. 4. D*E>J?tp/b savoury (meats); Scot, tasty, a plur. 
form, from D]£b taste. 

2142. ("lN*3ni and bring it, comp. of \ and fern. aff. 3 pers. and 
2 sing. m. imp. hiph. of N1S, parad. 10 and 12. The accent is on 
the penult., in consequence of the accent on the word *7 imme- 
diately following. 

2143. PnDNl and I shall eat it, that I may eat it; comp. of \ 
and pron. aff. and 1 sing. pres. kal of /3^S parad. 7. 

2144. *^$3 ^15^ 1^S5 lit. £to my sow/ fes ^e<?, i. e. that 
I may bless thee. *?pTQri comp. of pron. aff., and 2 sing. fern, 
pres. pili. of ^15 °^ e8SeQl ", parad. 3. 

2145. — Yer. 5. "IHI ftj^jfe? PtMTl lit. «w^ Rebekah a hearer, in 
(while) Isaac speaking, i.e. and Rebekah heard what Isaac had said. 

2146. njW fern, of act. part, kal of #£>£>• 

2147. ^31 inf. jmA. of '"D^? and *n31.P part. m. pih. of the same. 
2148. — Yer. 8. 1$tih in reference to what. 

2149. rfiXft commanding, command, part. pih. masc. of MIX, 
parad. 13. 

2150. — Yer. 9. ")%) \V7il *3&^ two good kids of the goats, i. e. two 
fat kids. 

2151. \Vl5 constr. plur. of HI * ^ Gr. 113. 

2152. D*-?J? plur. of ?J£ com. a ^oatf, ground form TTJ?, Gr. 115. 
2152*. ^HN also written 3HN, 3 sing. pret. kal, parad. 2 and 3, 

loved. 

2153. — Yer. 10. H^ODI an d bring, comp. of \, and 2 sing. masc. 
pret. hiph. 

2154. 1$X 1595 to $e e^ec* &a£, t» on&r to. 



Ver.3— 19.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 189 

2155.— Ver. 11. 1JJB> in full *?$& m. hairy, from 1$? m. Adtr. 

2156. p7H smooth, as opposed to hairy. 

2157. — Ver. 12. s y&fo\feel me, should feel me; comp. of pron. 
aff., and 3 sing. m. presi'jfetf of B*|j& parad. 12, cogn. K ; ^§ fo /<?<?*, 
handle; and W&X pron. afF. T and 1 sing. pres. kal of the same. 
See verse 21. 

2158. 5M?5?ft£? as a deceiver, impostor, comp. of 5 before sKva 
5, and redup. part. pih. of J$Tl parad. 6, not used in kal, mocked, 
deceived; cogn. JlJJft- 

2159. — Ver. 13. H77p subs. fern. « curse; and with the pron. 
aff. 2 pers., with the accent removed ^\Tw?p the curse which should 
fall on thee, Gr. 74. 

2160. — Ver. 15. H-53 garments of, constr. plur. of ^3 m. a 
garment, ground form ^Q- 

2161. n^/briri comp. of II art. and fern. pi. of pass. part. Teal of 
*7ftn parad. 2, desired, coveted; the epithet here applied to Esau's 
garments is expressive of their value, and of the estimation in 
which they were held by Eebekah. Lit. garments of desires. 

2162. JV33 in the house, rather in the tent, contr. for JV^D?; 
JV3 being here in pause for J"V3- 

2163. ^37P5 and she put on, comp. of -), and 3 sing. fern. apoc. 
pres. hiph. of fc^T? put on (clothing); PlB^J?n 3 sing. fern. pret. 
hipli. of the same. 

2164.— Ver. 16. JYlJ? sAiim, in full rihty, plur. of ^ m. the 
shin ; the plur. is probably taken from a fern, form, now obsolete. 

2165. Vn&Ott npSn the smooth fpart) of the neck, constr. of 
rip?ri fern, form of p/H, ground form p/H smoothness. 

2166. in«3V comp. of pron. aff., and constr. plur. of IKJSf subs. 
m. £Ae ftec£. 

2167. — Ver. 17. HJnb^ in pause for HW}? A«<? ma</e, prepared. 
3 sing. fern. pret. £#Z of H^J?- 

2168. — Ver. 19. T\2W s^, s?V wp, comp. of H— parag., and 2 sing. 
masc. imp. kal of Sfej^ parad. 8; the vowel of the paracl. lost on 
account of the removal of the accent ; Gr. 74. 

2169. JTON (och-lah), eat, comp. of T\ parag. and ??&, with 
accent 7?&, ground form of ?bK 2 sing masc. imp. Atf/ of 7J& 
parad. 7. 



190 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxvii. 

2170.— Ver. 20. "tfl rnPlD ITfhfi lit. Aow ^ $ow to* to- 
fe/ze^ ft> ^we?, my son, i. e. how hast thou found it so quickly, my 
son. See Introduction, Part. III. JTM? 2 sing. m. pret. pih. 
with dagesh implied in H, of 'tPtfp parad. 3 and 4. 

2171. rnjXl 3 sing. pret. 7%>A. of PHD parad. 13 and 3, m^; in 
7^j?A. caused to meet, brought in one's way. 

2171*. ^[(£^0 comp. of ) and pron. aff., and 1 sing. pres. kal 
of \&yi2 parad. 10, to feel, handle. 

2172. — Ver. 21. Plfe^ll c/raw wear, comp. of H parag., and 2 mas. 
imp. kal of K^J parad. 5; and rl^H comp. of Jl parag. and 2 sing. 
m. imp. hiph. of the same, see ver. 25 ; and WW 3 sing. m. apoc. 
pres. hiph. of the same ; see verse 25. 

2173. — Ver. 23. 1T3PJ recognised him, comp. of pron. aff., and 
3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of *"D3 parad. 5 and 4 ; in kal obsolete ; in 
hiph. recognised an apparent stranger, recognised etc., root ^DJ a 
stranger. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2174. rHgte tor*/, plur. of Pnj?B>, fern, of TJ&> No. 2155. 

2175— Ver. 24. PlfiK for nfiKPl 'Glass, vol. i.p" 563. 

2176. — Ver. 25. PP5&) lit. and I eat, that I may eat, comp. of 
) and H parag., and 1 sing. pres. kal of /5^ parad. 7. 

2177. — Ver. 26. PlDfc? 7;m, comp. of H parag., and 2 sing. masc. 
imp. kal of pKO kissed, parad. 5 ; imp. 7-#Z pj£0 contr. p&^, and with 
the accent removed to the pron. aff. Hp^ instead of Hp^, the or- 
dinary mode of pointing ; and pW\ 3 sing. pres. kal of the same. 

2178. — Ver. 27. HTJ an d smelled, comp. of -J, and 3 sing. masc. 
apoc. pres. hiph. of Pl^H or Jl* 1 *!, not used in kal, parad. 10 and 11, 
and 4 ; and IT 1 ] ver. 27 subs, smell. 

2179. 13*13 comp. of pron. aff. 1, and 3 sing. m. pret. pih. of 
*sT*l3 parad. 3. Garments of the richest description seem to have 
been perfumed in these days, as is at present the case in the East, 
The garments worn by Jacob are compared to a field clothed with 
odoriferous plants in full blossom. Herodotus speaks of the soil 
itself in Arabia emitting a fragrant perfume. 

2180.— Ver. 28. ^D subs. m. dew. 

2181. *35S$? constr. plur. of j^TO m. fatness, used here in a 
superlative sense for richest, most fertile ; see Introduct, Part III. 
root }£B> oil. 



Ver. 20— 36.] THE BOOK OF GEXESIS. 191 

2182. yi m. abundance. 

2183. ]j! subs. m. com. 

2184. BHTH and icine, new wine, comp. of \ and EH TV Root 
uncertain. 

2185. — Ver. 29. T\)T\ 2 sing. m. imp. kal of Pl}fi id. qu. JTP1 m?a». 

2186. T?3 for<^. This word only occurs here and in ver. 37; 
verb *"D| teas power fid. Root "Dll/ 

2187. H^IHX ^pTHjw lit. as for those that curse thee, (be) cursed 
(every one of them); the former comp. of pron. afF. 2 sing, and 
constr. plur. of act. part, kal of THX parad. 2 and 6 ; and *$T\H part. 
pass. m. sing, of the same. 

2188. Ipnj ^5555 lit. as for those that bless thee, blessed (be 
every one of them); the former comp. of the pron. aff. 2 sing, and 
constr. plur. of part. pih. of *T)%; and *VF\% pass. part. sing. m. of 
the same, parad. 3 ; and *2D^5fl comp. of the pron. aff. and j epenth. 
and 2 sing. m. pres. pih. of the same ; and ^3^Q comp. of pron. aff. 
and 2 sing. imp. pih. of the same. 

2189. — Ver. S3. ")j\ TW.3 lit. and Isaac trembled a great trem- 
bling, trembled exceedingly. Introduction, Part. III. See the same 
idiom in Matt. ii. 10, 'E^dprjaav %apav /jLe<yd\7]v crcfioBpa. Comp. 
of •) and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of Till trembled, parad. 2 and S, and 
rHin subs. fern, trembling. 

T TT t/ 

2190. SttPl Ki£K % Quis tandem ? Eos. Who is he then ? K15K 
then, now then. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2191. *1^n comp. of «n and part. act. sing. m. of "IIV to hunt-, 
the hunter, or who having (hath) hunted, parad. 10. 

2192.— Ver. 3-1. "til Hj^p? pj#!l lit. one* erM o cry #re^ (loud) 
and bitter even to excess ; p52¥!l comp. of -J and 3 sing. m. pres. kal 
of pS# parad. 3, and Hj3$ subs. fern. 

2193. TXlft fern, of H2D fo"#er, around form lift ; the kamets in 
the penult, of PHD is compensative. Lat. amarus. 

2194. ^J$""D3 according to our idiom this should be T^ D3- 
2195. — Ver. 35. H^M comp. of 5 and Pl/b^H? subs. fern, craft, 

fraud, deceit, from T\l2T\ threw ; in pih. tripped up, deceived. 

2196.— Ver. 36. ")j) to^ fcTO ^H /s # that (one) /WA cafferf 
to name Jacob (supplanter) ? i. e. .H^s 7*e foew cafe/ supplanter f 



192 ANALYSIS OF [ Chap, xxvii. 36. 

he hath indeed supplanted me on these two occasions. Such, is the 
Heb. idiom, but the sense of the passage is sufficiently well ex- 
pressed in the Authorised Version. 

2197. ^5pJ??l comp. of •) and pron. aff. 1 pers. and 3 sing.- masc. 
pres. kal of !}pj? par ad. 2; took by the heel, supplanted. Root !2pJ£ 
the heel. 

2198. DWg lit. two strokes, twice, dual of DJ®- See No. 296- 

2199. HI sing, for plur. Storr. p 108. 

2200. 5?^ hast reserved, 2 sing. m. pret. kal of /¥&, parad. 7, 
laid up with self, held back, reserved. 

2201. — Ver. 37. VJfD£D I have bestowed upon him, i.e. I have 
predicted the bestowal, or my blessing carries the bestowal. Storr. 
p. 24, understands this, pro divini muneris praedictione. See Glass. 
Phil. Sacr. Can. xv. p. 216 ; and chap. xxx. 13, and xxxiv. 12. 
Comp. of pron. aff. and 1 sing. pret. kal of "H^D, parad. 1, placed one 
thing upon another, supported, sustained, bestoived. 

2202— Ver. 38. ")T\ HP!^ H^SPl Is this thine only blessing ? 

2203— Yer. 39. "Ml pXH *£&{#? lit. fatness of the earth, let 
thy dwelling be, i.e. let thy dwelling be in a rich land. Isaac 
could pray for a fertile country to each of his sons, but he could 
not give dominion over the other to both, nor change that part of 
the blessing which was given to Jacob on the supposition that he 
was the first-born. 

2203*. ^ni^ift comp. of aff. ^ and IgnJb subs. m. dwelling, from 
!lg» or ngi' dwelt. 

2204. — Yer. 40. "\^\ ^3*111 7JT) lit. and upon thy sword, i.e. upon 
the spoils taken by thy sword. 

2205. ")$) 'Vltt 1£?^$5 when thou wanderest (i.e. becomest a 
a free wandering people, such as the Arab descendants of Esau 
were) then shalt thou break his yoke, etc. 

2206. T^ft 2 sing, m.pres. hiph. of "PH to range freely, parad. 8. 

2207. Wl^ com P- °f \ before the labial ) and 2 sing. pret. kal 
of pl^ parad. 3, broke ; Lat. fract-um ; Engl, break. 

2208. V?JJ his yoke, comp. of pron. aff. ) and SjJ, in full ??J£, 
ground form of /$ subs. m. a yoke. 

2209. — Yer. 41. Dbfc??5 comp. of A and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of 
D£D|^, cogn. |b^ acted fiercely , harshly towards, hated, parad. 1. 



Clmp.xxyiii.5.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 193 

2209.* yyjffl 3 plur. masc. pres. kal of HID or jlp drew near, 
parad. 4. 

2210. — Yer. 42. DH3J1& consoling (consoleth) himself', part. hith. 
masc. of QPD already analysed. 

2211. ^IH? comp. of 7 and ij— in pause for ^\~ , and 5*111, 
with the accent SHU, ground form of 51Q, inf. constr. A'aZ of 51J1 
sfeztf, parad. 2 and 3. 

2212.— Ver.43. Hl?/^, 2 sing. m. imp. kal of (113. 

2213.— Yer.44. DHI1K D*fiJ]it dies unos,i.e.^ pas rtva?LXX. 
«owe fc, pi^T JW Onk. Syr. id. 

2214. Jlftil constr. of ilDll subs, f.; 1. heat; 2. anger, fury of a 
heated mind. 

2215. — Ver.45. fD^I comp. of \ and 3 sing. masc. pret. ZyzZ of 
rOt? parad. 4, forgot. 

2216. /2^K 1 sing. pres. XraZ of zD^ parad. 1, hecame childless, 
was bereaved. See Introduction, Part I. 

2217. — Yer. 46. ")Ti *il¥p I a ^ n weary of my lives (life). 
Rebekah does not here give Isaac the true reason of her sending 
away Jacob, but makes the dread of his intermarriage with the 
daughters of Heth a pretext for her conduct. 

2218. *Jl¥p 1 sing. pret. kal of j^lp to be wearied, etc., parad. 10. 

2219. — -Chap, xxviii. 3. ^C$l make thee fruitful, comp. of *?[ pron. 
aff., and 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of 1113 parad. 3 and 13, bore fruit, 
was fruitful. 

2220. ^J3*V in pause for "l?!^ comp. of pron. afT., and 3 sing. 
pres. hiph. of Hll was numerous, in hiph. multiplied, j)ara,&.2axi& 13. 

2221. //Ip7 comp. of 7 before sh'va 7, and constr. of /Hp subs. 
masc. an assembly, a multitude. 

2222. — Yer. 4. H?!? constr. of Jl^l? subs. fern, a blessing-, this 
word, and the principle of the change of its vowels, have been 
already noticed. Rebekah prays for the blessing of Abraham to 
Jacob ; in other words, that God would confirm the blessing vouch- 
safed to Abraham, which his father had transferred to him, to the 
exclusion of Esau. It was this blessing of Abraham wdiich Esau 
lost, and which he so bitterly deplored. 

2223. ^n&hS see No. 1284. 

2224. Spib see No. 1412. 

13 



194 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxviii. 6. 

2225. — Ver. 6. n]>$ 3 sing. m. pret. pih. of TV$ parad. 4, sc?^, 
sent aivay. 

2226. — Ver. 9. V&£rSj? m addition to his (other) wwcs. 

2227— Ver. 11. Dlp&3 J^J owe? Ac came to the place; %t\ 
3 sing. pres. £a£ of J?3§ parad. 4; 1. came fo a place, reached; 
2. met, fell in with. 

2228. P*1 and passed the night, comp. of •), and 3 sing. m. pres. 
#«£ of jv parad. 11. 

2230. £WH the sun, comp. of -H and #£# subs. m. 

2231. *35S?J °f th e stones of, comp. of ti for •£? Gr. 19, and constr. 
plur. of |5& seg. (a) class, masc. a stone. 

2232. 1 WKT9 at his head, comp. of pron. aff., and W^PJ? 
plur. form, what is at the head, from B?fcO ^c Acezc?. 

2233.— Ver. 12. tbT\*\ comp. of -1, and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of 
K?H parad. %>> dreamed. 

2234. D?D subs. masc. a ladder, from 7/D raised up. 

2235. K£3 sc£ up, part. j^wA. masc. of 3¥3 parad. 5 ; and i3p 
part. m}?7*. masc. ver. 13. 

2236. JT^? part. ^}?A. m. sing, of J^jJ parad. 5 and 4, touched. 

2237. *5X7?3 arc^efo c-/, constr. plur. of *m&/£? subs. m. <m angel, 
from *H&t/ scm£ o^ an embassy. 

2238. D vj? pi- m. of act. part, Mof PDJ£ parad. 2 and 13, ascended. 

2239. D*TT pi. m. of part. act. kal of TV parad. 8 and 3, descended. 
2240.— Ver. 13. SJ^' act. part. m. kal of ^3^ %, parad. L 
2241. — Ver. 14. T\1^ faXIM lit. and thou shalt break forth toivards 

T- -r ■ -T t/ 

the sea (the west). The increase of Jacob's posterity is compared 
to the breaking forth and spreading of waters. Comp. of \, and 
2 sing. m. pret. kal of V*13 broke, broke forth, spread, cogn. £*]£, 
parad. 3. 

2242. — Ver. 15. TpftTQB^ and I ivill guard thee, comp. of 1 and 
pron. aff., and 1 sing. pret. kal of *)fo& parad. 4. 

2243. TrO^Tfi and I will cause thee to return, bring thee back; 
comp. of \ and pron. aff. 1 sing. pret. hiph. of 2NP to return, parad. 10. 

2244. T3T5JK comp. of pron. aff., and 1 sing. pres. kal (with the 
ult. vowel shortened, owing to the removal of the accent) of 5JJ?, 
parad. 2, left. 



Chap. xxix. 1.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 195 

2245. — Yer. 16. j*p^5 and aicohe, comp. of -), and 3 sing. masc. 
pres. hal of TO^ par ad. 8. 

2246. irO^pyrom his sleep, comp. of •£? and pron. aff. 1, and 
n^fcy sleep-, with the vowels changed, according to rules already 
given. 

2247. — Yer. 17. #y s ) comp. of -1, and 3 sing. masc. pres. Ay?Z of 
ft*V parad. 8 and 12, was afraid; and K"YD part. masc. niph. of the 
same. 

2248. *W| rtj }*N Jacob thought this was the house of God, 
because he saw the Lord standing above the ladder ; and the gate 
of heaven, because he saw the angels ascending and descending 
on it. 

2249. — Yer. 18. n^V& a pillar, subs, fern., from 3$3j not used 
in hal, placed. 

2250. p2f*1 and poured, comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. pres. hal of p¥3 
parad. 5, now obsolete; the ordinary form is DXJ parad. S, poured. 

2251.— Yer. 19. U?)8 nevertheless. 

2252. T\pXrb contr. for T\pyb, comp. of 7 and T\ art. and 
subs. fern, beginning. Eoot ^X1 ^e head. 

2253. — Yer. 20. T13 Tl^ tfW voiced a vow, comp. of -) and 
3 sing. m. pres. 7irtZ of *H3 parad. 5 and 4, voiced ; and TlJ subs, 
m. a row?. 

2254. ^fotj^ a>?c7 s/*«# £e£p me, comp. of ) and pron. aff. with f 
epenth. and 3 sing. masc. pret. hal of 1D2& hept; the penidt. vowel 
being lost on the removal of the accent. Gr. 74. 

2255. fc^7? comp. of 7 and infin. constr. hal of W4? put on, 
parad. 1. 

2256. — Yer. 21. TO^ comp. of \ and 1 sing. masc. pret. hal of 
^fcy to return, parad. 10. 

2257— Yer. 22. tt'tfjft? "1^52 lit. in tithing I will tithe it; *)&V 
in.i. pih. of "l&y, parad. 2 and 4 decimavit; and ^.^J^ comp. of 
pron. aff. and J epenth. and 1 sing. pres. pih. of the same. 

2258— Chap, xxix.l. V9J1 3pg* Kg»l lit. and Jacob lifted up 
his feet ; XEP*J comp. of -J and 3 sing. m. pres. hal of N|?0, P ara( ^- 
5 and 12. 

2259. V 7^H comp. of pron. affix, and constr. plur. of 7^1 com. 
the foot. 

13* 



196 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxix. 

2260. D*3p-*35 soils or children of the East, i. e. the inhabitants 
of Mesopotamia, part of which lies to the eastward of Palestine. 

2261 Ver. 2. **yV£ constr. plur of T7§ subs. m. seg. (e) class, 

a flock; plur. D*TTg." 

2262. The words from ^fTp *3 to the end of ver. 3, should 
be within a parenthesis. 

2263. U^T) m. plur. of ph part. act. kal of \T), parad. 2, lay 
down. 

2264. — Ver. 3. *l£Dfc01 and were gathered, comp. of \ and 3 plur. 
pret. niph. of ?|D& gathered (together), parad. 7. 

2265. ^1 77^ with a comp. instead of a simple sh'va under /, 3 pi. 
pret. kal of 7y|, parad. 6, rolled. 

2266. }pK*?l 3 plur. pret. A?>A. of T\y$, parad. 13, <7nm&, in 
hiph. gave to drink, ivatered, and ^pt^n 1 plur. pret. hiph. of the 
same. 

2267. — Ver. 5. DriJTTn do ye know ? comp. of PI interrog. and 
2 pi. m. pret. kal of JHJ parad. 5 and 4, kneio. 

2268.— Ver. 6. ^ DWil is it well with him ? comp. of H 
interrog. and UwW subs. m. 1. peace; 2. prosperity ; 3. safety; 
4. soundness of body, etc. 

2269. !Fl5 /ms daughter, comp. of pron. aff. 1 and P&, contr. for 
fij?, ground form of P05, contr. Jl§. 

2270. P1X3 coming (cometh), part. act. fern, kal of &03, parad. 10 



and 12. 



2271. — Ver. 9. PISH a shepherdess, fern, form of Tty^S, part. act. 
kal of PlJH parad. 2, 3, and 13, fed. 

2272. — Ver. 10. 7^1 (mc£ rolled aivay, comp. of •] and 3 sing. m. 
pres. apoc. hiph. of 7/3, parad. 6. 

2273. *T[5?.l aw ^ wep^ comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. pres. apoc. kal 
of PO§, parad. 13. See Gr.115. 

2274.— Ver. 12. 7PH 1 ? apJP n|9/or Jck»5 Aa^ fo&J itoM, be- 
fore kissing her. 

2275. fTjJl «ra^ sAe ran, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. fern. pres. Ayz/ 
of YT\ to run, parad. 10 and 2 ; and Y^fX comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. 
pres. £a£ of the same. The ult. vowel in both cases is kamets 
khateph. 

2276. — Ver. 13. "ttl $?h#5 wte .Lata heard the report, account. 



Ver. 1—17.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 197 

According to Prof. Lee, when 5 is used with infinitives, as in this 
case, some such word as TO or dV is understood; thus, Vfo$2 = 
yfoV? TO5 at the time of hearing. See Lex. 

2277. gfa# infin. kal constr. of JW; and VW subs. m. seg. (i) 
class, a hearing, report, etc. ]}fo& W^P to hear a hearing, to 
receive accounts. 

2278. *l / pJITI and embraced him, comp. of -) and 3 sing. pres. 
pih. of p5H, parad. 2, folded, folded (in the arms), embraced. 

2279. l/p&W a/z< ^ hissed him, comp. of •) and 3 sing. -pres. pih. 
of pjvll — from the circumstance that this word takes 1/ instead of 
1JT1&, the probability is that the primary meaning is joined, joined 
(mouth to mouth) ; hence kissed. 

2280. 1§d*5 comp. of ) and 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of 1§p parad. 4, 
related, recounted. 

2281. — Ver. 14. "U1 ^¥52 lit. my bone, and my flesh, my blood 
relation, comp. of pron. afF. and dVJ? ground form of d¥J? a bone. 

2282. d*££ £Hn lit. a month of days ; dies unius mensis, Vulg. ; 
a full month. £HPT subs. m. seg. (o) class, lit. renewing ; applied 
to the moon, new moon ; likewise, the space between one moon and 
another, a lunar month. 

2283.— Ver. 15. 'ttl S T\& \?n art thou my brother (my blood 
relation)? and shalt thou serve me for nought? 

2284. d|H, augmented from jfl, grace, ground form pfi gratis, 
tcithout fee or reward. As gratis is a contraction for gratiis, for 
thanks (only), so d3H means literally by favour (only). 

2285. rTViin comp. of Il~ parag. and 2 sing. imp. hiph. of H33 
parad. 5, already noticed. 

2286. ^rfl5^b"i"[fo ^fltf thy hire-, comp. of pron. affix and 
£H5^?, ground form of T\l2&ti, subs. fern. seg. that which one 
pays as hire, icages, hire-, here in pause, from ^Sffl hired. 

2287. — Ver. 16. HJfcppn the small, as compared with the other, 
the younger, comp. of •»! and fern, of Jfep, the less usual form; new 
form JbD small. 

2288.— Ver. 17. TWT\ tender, pi. of T\T\, fern, of Ip tender. 

2289. U*l Itfrffifi* lit. beauty of figure, and beauty of counte- 
nance, of a beautiful form and countenance, abs. for concr. See 
Introduction, Part III. 



198 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxix.17. 

2290. ft§*1 comp. of ) and T\§\, constr. of fi^, fern, form of H&* 
heauty, beautiful. 

2291. *!&$£) subs. masc. form, figure. 

2292.— Ver. 19. "tfl HflK Wt ite lit. #006/ my giving her to 
thee, separation my giving her to another, i.e. it is better for me to 
give her to thee than to give her to another. See Introduct. Pt.III. 

2293. *Wl comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers. and Flft, contr. for tyft, 
euph. causa T\^P\, contr. for HJfOj contr. T\P\, infin. constr. of jHJ, 
par ad. 5. 

2294. n^, No. 2168. 

2295. — Ver. 20. D^HK DW3 sicut dies uni, like single days, 
like as many days. 

2296. nnk I^DDS? through his love of her, comp. of 3 and 
pron. affix ) and constr. of M^HK fern, infin. or verbal noun, love ; 
verb ill& parad. 2 and S, loved. 

2297.— Ver. 21. T\1T\, see No. 1005. 

2298. *fi* *!«?£? ^f or m V days (my stipulated period of service) 
are fulfilled. 

2299. PlfcONfi and I shall go, or that I may go, comp. of ) and 
Jl parag. and 1 sing. pres. kal of ^1^1 fo enter. 

2300. — Ver. 22. &)DX*J a^c? collected, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. m. 
pres. Z;a£ of WN», parad. 2. 

2301. — Ver. 25. ^fi^T 7^s£ £Aow deceived me, comp. of pron. 
aff. and 2 sing. m. pret. jtn'A. of T\12T\ tripped up, cast, cast down ; 
mpih. deceived. 

2302 —Ver. 27. ]"WT $2f K?ft fulfil the week of this, i. e. of 
Leah. This is the first notice of the division of time into weeks, 
and of the custom afterwards observed among the Jews of keeping 
marriage feasts for seven days . and of that of marrying daughters 
according to their seniority, tifrfo 2 sing. m. imp. kal of fcOp was 
full; and X £&* 3 m. pres. pih. of the same. 

2303. J£# written in full J£Q&£, constr. of Jffcg* subs. masc. a 
period of seven days, from ^5^ seven. 

2304. POrDI comp. of ) and 3 sing. f. pret. niph. of jfij, parad. 5. 
2305.— Ver. 31. fiXUfe' Atffc^ i.e. loved less than Rachel; fern. 

of \$W part. pass, kal of ti$P, parad. 11. 



Chap. xxx. 6.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 199 

2306. PlftPH her womb, comp. of pron. aff. and DITl, ground form 
of DH*"] m. the womb. 

2307. — Ver. 32. |3^1. Reuben, i.e. behold a son! comp. of 
2 plur. m. imp. hal of PlfcO and [§ a sow. 

2308. \*-5J?3 on my affliction, comp. of 3 and pron. aff. and 1)%, 
ground form of ^ subs. m. affliction. 

^309. ^JPJNJ to#Z fo^e me, comp. of *}— pron. aff. and 3 sing. 
m. pres. kal of ^P!&, parad. 7 and 3. 

2310.— Ver. 33. ))$&$ Simeon, i. e. hearing, from J?&B>. 

2311. — Ver. 34. T\)v) will be joined, 3 sing. masc. pres. niph. of 
Tlr? parad. 13, adhered, etc. 

2312. *r? Zm, i. e. junction, adhesion. 

2313.— Ver. 35. PPTJ& J ^7/ j)r« ; 1 sing. pres. hiph. of HT 
threiv, cast for wai'dy-p&T&di. 8 and 13; mhijih. 1. confessed-, 2. adored-, 
perhaps from the attitude of throwing out the hands whilst engaged 
in confession of sin, or in adoration. ^IV 3 pi. m. pres. hiph. See 
No. 3279. 

2314. PH-lPP Judah, i. e. praised, or celebrated. See chap.xlix. 8. 

2315. T\\?fo HDyPil lit. and she stood from bearing, stopped, 
ceased, comp. of •), and 3 sing. fern. pres. hal of *J?JJ? parad. 2. 

2316. nnp5 comp. of -ft and irk inf. constr. ferf of T^J parad. 8. 
2317— Chap. xxx. 1. fcnpn see No. 330. 

2318. fcOpPfi <2^6? was jealous, envious of, comp. of •), and 3 sing. 
fern. pres. pih. of &OD parad. 12, obsolete in kal. 

2319. ^?3& PlPtf? lit. 7 dying, shall die (of grief), sterility being 
accounted extremely opprobrious in these times : PIP© sing. fern, 
of HQ, part, hal of Pflft parad. 10, the form is irregular for F\fa. 

2320. — Ver. 2. J^£ /ifltfA withheld, 3 sing. pret. £«/, parad. 4. 

2321. }b3 HI T ov fcapirov tyjs KoiXias. See Luke i.42. 

2322. — Ver. 3. ^13 /J? T?tJl pariet super genua mea (i. e. ut 
filium ex ancilla natum pro meo excipiam, et super genua statuam) 
et aedificabor etiam ex ilia. See chap.xvi. 2. Eos. 

2323. — Ver. 6. **%Tl hath judged me; hath judged my cause, and 
freed me from the opprobrium of sterility : comp. of pron. aff. and 
j epenth., and J^ 3 sing. masc. pret. hal of JVl or jH to judge, 
parad. 10 and 11. 

2324. pj Dan, i.e. judge. It hence appears, as well as from the 



2G0 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxx. 

concluding part of the preceding chapter, that in these times the 
mother generally named the child. See Introduction, Part I. 

2325— Vex. 8. "tfl D*rPX ^n§3 lit. smugglings of God have I 
struggled, i. e. I have struggled with the most intense vehemence. 

2326. hlftpl &ira% Xey.; constr. of Q^nftf from ^HS parad. 1, 
twisted; and ^7§J|llJ I hoisted myself, indicative of the exertions 
of wrestlers; 2. struggled. Eachel's struggling arose from her 
extreme anxiety about having children as well as her sister, and 
about being equally respected by her husband on that ground. 

2327. vJj)$3 Naphtali, i. e. my struggling, from vTO vid. supra. 

2328. *F\/y I have prevailed, 1 sing. pret. kal of zDJ parad. 8, 
was able, prevailed. 

2329. — Ver.ll. 1^ in happiness, good fortune, i.e. it is an 
auspicious event ; comp. of 3 before the accented syllable 21? an( I 
13 m. fortune. According to the keri *1| tX2, happiness cometh. 

2330. — Yer. 13. ^^^3 *w my happiness, i. e. happy am I; comp. 
of 3 and pron. aff. and "IKW, and with accent *)&?&$ ground form of 
l&^K subs. masc. happiness. 

2331. ^J'HfcPK comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers., and 3 plur. pret. pih. 
of ^KW or *)&& parad. 7 and 4, was straight, walked straightly; 
hence, ivas prosperous, happy; in pih. declared happy . 

2332. IWt Asher, happy : the following are names 'of the same 
import ; Felix, Fortunatus, Eutychus, Tychicus, Macarius, Faustus, 
Faustulus, Felicianus, etc. Bush. 

2333.— Yer. 14. U%T\ wheat, plur. of HEft contr. for ^)T\ 
subs. fern, the masc. form obsolete. 

2334. D^fcH^n a plur. form, only used here and in Cant.vii. 14, 
some kind of root or plant, probably used as a love potion; Latin 
mandragoras, mandrakes, which is the rendering preferred by 
Professor Lee. 

2335. ^p 2 sing. fern. imp. kal of jfO parad. 5, gave. 

2336. — Yer. 15. ")X\ fcOJ^H Is thy taking my husband a small 
matter] but to take my son's mandrakes. This sentence is incom- 
plete, owing to Rachel's interruption. The deficiency might be 
thus supplied: but to take my son's mandrakes were an additional 
wrong. 

2337. ^50(2 comp. of fern. pron. aff., ^j— and Wp, ground form 



Ver.7— 80.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 201 

of Jlfip contr. for JlHp?, and before the tonic accent FlHp^ infin. 
hal constr. of ftp 7 parad. 5 and 4. 

2338— Yer.16. ffl'W lbfc> in hiring I have hired thee. The 
former, inf. abs. hal of *OW parad. 4, hired; and the latter, comp. 
of pron. aff. 1 pers., and 1 sing. pret. hal of the same. 

2339.— Yer. 18. 13&^ Issachar, comp. either of "lpfe* & is est 
merces, or contr. for 1^ #&\ affert mercedem, sc. Deus. The 
latter is a conjecture of Eos. 

2340. — Yer. 20. *in?? comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers., and 3 sing. m. 
pret. hal of 1?J parad. 1, hath given, endoiced; and 13! subs, m., a 
gift, a dowry. AeScoprjrai 6 0eo? \xoi Scopov /caXbv. LXX. 

2341. V?3J! wiM dwell with me, comp. of pron. aff., and 3 sing, 
pres. hal of /3J parad. 1, dwelt, cohabited. 

2342. IV?^? Zebulun, i. e. habitation. 
2343- Yer. 21. Pl^l Dinah, i. e. judgment. 

2344. — Yer. 23. £]DX lit. hath gathered together, as fruits; hath 
gathered, with a view to removal, hath gathered up; hence, hath 
removed, taken aivay. 

2345. *fi3in mxj reproach, comp. of pron. affix, and ("131(1 subs, 
fern, reproach, from fllH cropped, gathered (as fruit); Lat. carpsit, 
"whence the Enghsh word carped (at any one), reproached. 

2346. — Yer. 24. P|DV Joseph. This word may be derived from 
either of two roots, and has allusion to two circumstances, viz.; to 
the removed of Rachel's reproach, and to her belief that God would 
add to her another son: according to the former it is the same with 
*p& 3 sing. pres. hal of 5]DK, see No. 2344; according to the 
latter the 3 sing. pres. hiph. of 5]D^ parad. 8; probably the latter. 

2347. — Yer. 26. !"0Fl comp. of H parag., and 2 sing. m. imp. 
hal of |fU parad. 5, gave. 

2348. s *\>\ my children, comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers., and plur. of 
IT Gr.49. T ' 

VI" 

2349. — Yer. 27. s P$XXl olana-dfj^v, LXX. ; experimento didici, 
Hieron.; 1 sing. pret. pih. of fc^PG obsolete in hal; in pih. used 
divination, icatched, observed, proved; root ^H3 a serpent; No. 313. 

2350. — Yer. 28. i"ftpj com P- °f ^ P ara g-^ an d ^ sm g- masc - imp. 
hal of M3 1. pierced, bored through; 2. marhed, determined, named. 

2351.— Yer. 30. ^|? fo/ore me, i. e. before my arrival. 



202 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxx. 

2352. iy V^S?! «^ it hath hurst (spread) /br^A mfo abundance, 
hatli increased abundantly. 

2353. p3?) comp. of -1, and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of p£) parad. 3, 
burst, spread forth. 

2354. 1^1 HIPP ^5— an d Jehovah hath blessed thee at my foot, 
i.e. under my management; opera mea, Dathe. v3 j? comp. of 7 
and pron. aff. 1 pers., and /T\ ground form of ?T). the foot. 

2355. M^S^ ^T\12 when shall I do, i. e. provide ; we use the same 
idiom when we speak of doing for ourselves. 

2356. Tltt lit. extension, a space of time-, now used as the 
interrogative adverb, when. 

2357.— Ver.31. "tfl 7V%% ft^WX lit. I will return, I will feed 
thy sheep, I will keep (them), i. e. I will again feed and tend thy 
flocks. 

2358. rQ^Nt comp. of H parage and 1 sing. pres. kal of 2M& 
parad. 10. to return ; the accent is on the penult., and there is con- 
sequently no change of vowels. 

2359. nJHS 1 s^g. pres. kal of Pljft/erf. 

2360. *&fti$ 1 sing. pres. kal of Tftfi? kept. 

2361.— Ver.32. IDH apoc. form of I^DH inf. /«>/*. of "tiD to 5^ 
aside, or remove, used here as a gerund. 

2362. Ipll m. marked with small spots, spotted-, plur. fern. rffiM, 
ver. 34. See No. 2375. 

2363. fcte of the form of the pass. part, kal of K?fc parad. 12, 
plur. fern. Hk^/t? patched like a garment made of cloth of different 
colours, marked with large spots, as distinguished from those 
mentioned above. As applied to cattle, this is called by the 
Scottish peasantry fleckit. 

2364. 0^5^53 E^ft dark-coloured among the lambs, ENH is only 
used in this chapter. 

2365. ED*3fc>3 plur. abs. of Sg>3 id. qu. fc>M a lamb from one 
to three years old. 

2366. H^ masc. a sheep or goat. 

2367. — Ver. 33. ")%) *3"Pir0JJ| lit. erne? my righteousness shall 
answer for me in the day of to morroiv, i. e. my faithful fulfilment 
of this compact will be manifest in time to come (by a simple in- 
spection of my flocks). HH^ 3 sing. f. pret. kal of H JJ? parad. 2 and 13. 



Ver. 30—38.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 203 

2368. ")X\ ffin 3^| lit. stolen it with me, i. e. if found with me, 
it shall be regarded as stolen; part. pass. m. of X)3 parad. 1, stole. 

2369. ")%) &PjTp when thou comest (shalt come) to my hire, 
i. e. when thou shalt inspect the flocks assigned me for my hire. 

2370— Yer. 34. *H) T> be it. T> an adverb of willing, already 
noticed. 

2371. — Yer. 35. ^DJI comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. hiph. 
of*tiD. No. 2361. 

2372. d^W comp. of -H and plur. of &TF) m. a he-goat. 

2373. p7 m. white. 
I t t 

2374. D^pyn streaked, art. -II and plur. abs. of Hptf, probably 
another form of ^ttPi?, the kibbuts vicarious taking dag. forte as it 
often does ; thus, D^pJJ = D^PSk from T?$i> P ara( l. 2, bound. 
The streaked cattle had the appearance of having bandages of 
different colours wound round them. 

2375.— Yer. 36. ")X\ ^T? D^5 and he (Laban) set three days' 
journey betwixt himself and Jacob, that Jacob might not mix the 
flocks, and that spotted sheep might not be unfairly propagated. 

2376. mni^n comp. of -PI and fern. plur. of "llTO, part. niph. of 
^IfV parad. 8, was redundant, abounded, remained. 

2377. — Yer. 37. 7p£ a wand, constr. of 7pfo, in plur. MPP9, 
written also fil/p??. 

2378. Pljj? subs. m. the tchite poplar, from p/ ivhite. 

2379. Fl7 m. with c/a//. implied, moist, fresh (green). 

2380. Vw m. ^e almond tree, only found in this place. 

2381. p^J? subs. m. the plane tree, derivation uncertain. 

2382. ")$] |rH /¥&) lit. and he peeled in them, white peelings 
(streaks). 

2383. 7X&!) comp. of •) and 3 sing. masc. ipres. pih. of 7^3, not 
used in kal ; in pih. peeled; and HI/^5 fern. pi. peelings, streaks. 
These two words are only used in this passage. 

2384. ")$\ p ?PI Fpn£ lit. % $e 5arm# o/* the white which (was) 
^/ : /?07^ the wands (under the bark). 

2385. &|&^n£? subs. m. only used here, nudatio, decorticatio ; from 
fc]KTI parad. 2, bared, stripped off, as bark. 

2386. — Yer. 38. $$*) and placed, comp. of -) and 3 sing. pres. 
hiph. of 3¥J or X£) not used in &aZ; in hiph. made to stand, placed. 



204 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xxx. 38. 

2387. OT?i"P]!£l comp. of 3 contr. for HS and plur. abs. of tift*} a 
canal or pool for watering cattle. This word is more generic than 
that which follows it — this signifying small canals or ducts, through 
which water runs — that, ftinpjy troughs for watering cattle, the 
constr. plur. of T0&, irregularly formed. Root T\pW drank. 

2388. nj££l*3 et incaluerunt desiderio coitus, Ros.; conceived, 
Lee ; comp. of •) and 3 plur. fern. pres. hal of D1T was warm, in 
heat, parad. 8 and 3 ; the ordinary form of this word is r0foll?lj 
see the parad. 

2389. JfcOB comp. of 5 and pron. an°. fern. 3 pers. and infin. kal 
of fcO!U to go, to enter. 

2390.— Yer. 39. \W 3 plur. m. (instead of fern.) of pres. hal of 
of DIT No. 2388. 

- T 

2391.— Ver. 40. Til d*3B>3it| and (Jacob) separated the lambs 
(born by the foregoing artifice), lest Laban should complain that 
he had, to his prejudice, mixed the variegated sheep with the one- 
coloured. 

2392. T^H 3 sing. pret. hal m. of 1*)& parad. 3, separated. 

2393. T1 s %$ }fi*J and he set (turned) the faces of the sheep 
(comprehending the sheep and goats) to all the streaked and dark- 
coloured in Laban's flock. This is another artifice ; although Jacob 
divided his own from Laban's sheep, he placed the different flocks 
opposite to one another so as to produce the same result as he had 
attained by the peeled rods ; he turned the faces of the sheep that 
were in Laban's flock to the variegated and brown in his own. 

2394. T1 w T\$*) and he set his flocks apart hy themselves, and 
did not place these (sheep) near the flocks of Laban. In the be- 
ginning of the verse reference is made only to the variegated 
sheep produced by the contemplation of the rods ; in the succeeding 
part, to those that were produced by means of the second artifice — 
these likewise he placed by themselves. Ros. 

2395. — Yer. 40, 41. A third artifice is here mentioned. When 
the strong ewes were in season, he placed the peeled wands in 
the troughs ; but when the weaker were in that state, he removed 
them : so that he contrived not only to have a numerous, but also 
a strong and healthy flock. 

2396. DJT inf. pih. of D1T No. 2388 ; with pron. aff. 3 f. n?£fi\ 



Chap.xxxi.12.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 205 

2897. nn^p^PD hound, well knit, compact, strong, comp. of •!! 
and fern. plur. of the puh. part, of ^^5, parad. 4, bound. 

2398. tj*tpsri3 comp. of 3 and infin. hiph. of t|^g. 1. covered; 
2. covered (one's face in sorrow), was overwhelmed, languid, ex- 
hausted ; lit. in the sheep being feeble, when the sheep were feeble ; 
D*$tp2 plur. masc. of pass. part, kal of the same. 

2399. T\)2tl plur. fern, of *T] tender, agreeing logically, but not 
syntactically with jNX. 

2400.— Chap, xxxi.l. Wy$? ^#&W lit. and from what to our 
father, i.e. from our father's substance. 

2401. *"D3 subs. m. 1. weight ; 2. wealth ; 3. glory. 

2402.— Ver. 2. TiWlV) Slftn^ lit, as yesterday, and the day be- 
fore, i. e. as heretofore, formerly. 

2408. /ton$ per aphaer. /1£J? yesterday; the derivation is un- 
certain. 

2404. Di£^ the third day bygone, comp. of W nphtf. 

2405. — Ver. 5. M^h part. m. act. kal of HK^ saw;. 

2406. — Ver. 6. *P13 ??2?/ might, comp. of pron. afF. 1 pers. and 
rD subs. m. might, strength. 

2407. — Ver. 7. /HH Aatf/i deceived, 3 sing. pret. £«/, irregularly 
pointed. According to Ges. and Ewald, it is a new hip)hilic form 
of V/H, parad. 6, cast, threw down, deceived. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2408. ^/Hn 1 ! and hath changed, comp. of ) and S sing. pret. 
hiph. of tPHj parad. 2, passed by, implying change of situation ; 
in hiph. changed. 

2409. — Ver. 8. D*3D, only used in this chapter, parts, divisions, 
times, a form like the pi. of the act. part, kal of Hj2p divided, etc.; 
to times, in the sense of frequently. 

2410. jnjl or jnn infin. A*>A. of Jfipl, parad. 6, 3 and 4; in kal, 
was evil; in /2?}?7i. did evil. 

2411. — Ver. 9. /%*} and delivered, comp. of •) and 8 sing, m.pres. 
A?jt?7i. of 7¥J, not used in kal, parad. 5 ; in hiph. /^H delivered. 

2412. — Ver. 10. D*HW7 ^e he-goats, comp. of H and plur. of 

Hfi& in fuu wig. 

2413. D Y^H comp. of Jl and plur. masc. of act. part, kal of H7j£, 
parad. 2 and 13, ascended, mounted, etc. 

2414.— Ver. 12. D^TJ? for DHYl?, *po#erf, probably with white 



206 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxxi. 

upon some dark ground, as if hail had fallen upon it ; from *l' m fe 
hail. The same idea of colour is expressed in Lat. by spargere, 
thus, " Spar sis etiam nunc pellibus albo," Virg. Eclog.ii. ver. 41; 
and, spargere maculis, Tac. 

2415.— Ver. 13. W^l2 anointedst, 2 sing. m. pret. kal of iTgto 
parad. 4; hence JTt^ft Messiah, anointed. 

2416. J^TlJ ? srn g- pret. kal of Tl}, parad. 5 and 4, vowed. 

2417. 2ft& 2 sing. m. imp. >W of ^riW, parad. 10, fo return. 
2418. — Yer. 14. fJJ£fi 2 sing. f. apoc. pres. of H^, parad. 2 and 

13, answered, with .1 prefixed. 

2419. p/tl subs. m. seg. (e) class, portion. 

2420. iHn^ subs. fern. <m inheritance. 

2421. — Ver. 15. "1H1 nV^.p^ K1 ?Jl «r<? W6 wo£ regarded by him 
as strangers, for he hath sold us and hath completely consumed our 
money, i. e. he hath sold us for the labour given for us by our hus- 
band, and hath appropriated the gain thence derived entirely to 
himself. It would hence appear that husbands, even in these days, 
were in the habit of purchasing their wives ; but that it was cus- 
tomary for the father to make a present of some part of the price 
to his daughters as a marriage portion: and Laban's avaricious 
disposition in withholding this present is the subject of complaint 
by his daughters here urged. Such is the general opinion upon 
this subject. I am inclined, however, to suppose that the custom 
of fathers selling their daughters must have been then but recently 
introduced, at least in that part of the country, or in that family, 
there being no price paid for Rebekah ; and that if such was the 
case, Laban's daughters would be the more sensitive as to the 
harshness of their father's treatment of them. 

2422— Ver. 15. Mi^JJ plur. of iTtM, fern, of ^, foreign, a 
stranger, from T3J id. 

2423. ^5^HJ 1 plur. pret. niph. of $Pft, parad. 2, thought, 
regarded; with the rough enunciation. 

2424. ^"T^ comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers. plur. and 3 sing. pret. kal 
of *S2fo, parad. 4, sold. Gr. 74. 

2425.— Ver. 16. IgtyTl the riches, comp. of T\ and *)0, subs. m. 

2426. — Ver. 18. ^DW and led away, comp. of \ and 3 sing. m. 

pres. kal of 3PI3, parad. S. The process of contraction applicable 



Ver. 12—24:.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 207 

to verbs of parad. 5, does not take place where the second radical 
is one of the ^.Pl&J letters. ^\^P\ 2 sing. masc. pres. pih. ver. 26. 

2427. i3\?p comp. of pron. afF. and j\5p, subs. m. 1. creature ; 
2. acquisition, possession ; from H^p created, possessed. 

2428. — Ver. 19. Y?H \^b) Laban autem iverat. Ros. 

• L L 

2429. TTf? to shear, comp. of 7 and inf. constr. kal of Ttij parad. 6, 

ordinarily contracted into Til. 

2430. i33Fl1 comp. of A, and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of ^| parad. 1, 
stole; and ^33Fl & sing. masc. pres.; verse 26. 

2431. Q^'lfcp a plur. form, probably signifying small images of 
the human form, household gods; called D^ri/NI ver. 32. Rachel 
appears to have stolen these either on account of the value of the 
metal of which they were made, or from the belief that her pos- 
sessing them would conduce to the prosperity of her family, or 
because she supposed that Laban, by their means, would be able 
to discover Jacob's place of retreat. The etymology of the word 
is uncertain. 

2432.— Ver. 20. "|jfi Spg* Mfl and Jacob stole aicay as to the 
heart of Laban, i. e. without his knowledge, the heart being sup- 
posed to be the seat of knowledge ; compare etcXeyfre voov, Horn. 
II. xiv.217; see Prof. Lee's Lex. *fitf %^P\) and hast stolen away 
as regards me, i. e. from me, verse 27. 

2433. 17 1^/1 w^/V in that he did not inform him. 

L ' ' ' '' . . 

2434. v3 subs. m. ; 1. loss, destruction; 2. deficiency, and as a 

prep, tvithout; 3. adverbially not. 

2435. ri*!fi part. act. masc. of ft 1 ^} parad. 3 snid4:,fled. 

2436. — Ver. 21. "in^H the river, by way of eminence, the 
Euphrates. 

2437. V3£")°l& Qb^l and set his face toivards Mount Gilead, i. e. 
went straight forward to Mount Gilead. 

2438. — Yer. 23. p|H!l and overtook, comp. of •), and 3 sing. apoc. 
pres. hiph. of p3*!J parad. 1 ; in hal, adhered; in hiph. made to adhere, 
came up with, overtook (any one). 

2439. — Yer. 24. *\fe$T\ lit. keep thyself, be on your guard, take 
care, 2 sing. m. imp. niph. of *")5^ guarded, Gr. 29 (e). 

2440. JH'H^ ^te^P lit. from good to evil, sive bonum sive malum : 



208 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. 



XXXI. 



quo sciz. ipsum a proposito abstralias et ad te retrahas. Glass. 
Phil. Sacr., vol. i. p. 572. 

2441. — Ver. 25. HJj^l and overtook, comp. of •), and 3 sing. masc. 
pres. A?}?A. of HBO parad. 5; not used in ^a/; in ^j^A. 1. reached; 
2. attained; 3. overtook. 

2442. ypTI had pitched, 3 sing. pret. £a£, parad. 4; 1. struck; 
2. fixed (by striking) ; 3. pitched (a tent). 

2443. — Ver. 26. "Ul HV^? ^ e captives of the sivord, like cap- 
tives taken by the sword, prisoners of ivar; comp. of 3? and pi. fern, 
of pass. part, kal of 7V2W parad. 13, led captive. 

2444. .Tin in pause for 2lH Gr. 31, subs. com. seg. (<z) class, 
a sword. 

2445. — Yer. 27. fl^fti H§7 lit. w% didst thou hide thyself in 
ref erence to fleeing , i. e. why didst thou flee stealthily ; see Introduct. 
Part III. Htf 3HJ 2 sing. m. pret. niph. of &O0 ^'^ parad. 2 and 12. 

2446. ")y\ Utifo&Z ^nVpH) that I might have sent thee away 
with joy and with songs, with tabret and tvith harp. The people 
in the East still pay the same marks of honour to their friends on 
their setting out on a long journey. 

2447. T^tiW subs. fern. joy. 

2448. Dn# in full &y&, plur. of T# a song. 

2449.— Yer. 28. "DD *)fiptoj K^l awtf to not left (allowed) me 
to kiss my sons (grandsons). 

2450. \)£l5?&J comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers., and 2 sing. masc. pret. 
kal of fc^DJ parad. 5, left, alloioed. 

2451. pmh comp. of S, and inf. pih. of p#l 

2452. 1£>JJ Fl/SDH ^ow A<2s£ acted foolishly in doing (so), 2 sing. 
m. pret. ^}?A. of /3$ parad. 1, in kal, was foolish; in hiph. acted 
foolishly. 

2453. lfe>JJ ordinary form H^ inf. fa? abs. of nfcty 

2454. — Yer. 29. *V /$/ ffl it is in the power of my hand, i.e. 
in my power; /& subs. m. strength, power. 

2455. £^S& yesterday, including the following night. 

2456. — Yer. 30. ")%) ^/Tl HFlJJI lit. and now in going thou didst 
go, since in longing thou didst long after thy father's house ; why 
didst thou steal my gods ; i. e. But now as thou didst really go, as 
thou hadst intense longings after thy father's house, why, etc. 



Ver. 24— 37.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 209 

2457. £)D?J inf. niph. of S]D3 parad. 1, desired intensely ; Hftipp?) 
id. qu. JFI^COJ ^ sing. m. pret. niph. of the same. 

2458. — Ver. 31. "131 }J£1 in this verse Jacob gives his reasons 
for his sudden flight, and in the next he replies to the charge of 
theft. 

2459. /tt£l 2 sing. m. pres. hal of 7T| parad. 1, lit. 1. cw£ aicay ; 
2. carried off (by violence) ; ^33 as applied to Jacob conveys the 
idea of stealth in carrying off what he did; /\l as applied to 
Laban conveys the idea of taking by violence what he had no 
right to. 

2460.— Ver. 32. "131 ^?"^l) ascertain for thyself what (is) with 
me (of thine), 2 sing. m. imp. hijph. of *"D3 already analysed. ]N"o. 2173. 

2461. DrQJ? comp. of pron. aff. 3 pers. plur., with pathakh 
owing to the removal of the accent to the penult., through the 
influence of the pause accent, Gr. 9, 10; and 3 sing. fern. pret. hal 
of ^5. 

2462. — Ver. 34. 7fc3n ^55 in sella camelina, comp. of 5 and 
^5 subs. m. the haudaj, a small portable chamber in which the 
women in the East sit when riding on camels, furnished with cur- 
tains to screen them from inquisitive eyes, and from the rays of 
the scorching sun. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2463. B>$D? searched (by feeling), 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of &Wtj 
parad. 6, examined, searched (by feeling), cogn. &'1D to feel, in 
pret, &Wb, and 2 sing. m. FP&ti. 

2464. — Ver. 35. DN£0 *s[T7. **3 Quia via midierum (est) mihi, id. 
qu. D % E&e n>* No. 1490, f. ' See Introduction, Part I. 

2465. fc?5PP searched (carefully), 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of &§H 
parad. 2, searched. 

2466. — Ver. 36. |5<3 ^13 <^^ sharply reproved Laban, comp. 
of -1, and 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. apoc. of ^*1 parad. 11, to dispute, 
argue, quarrel, etc. 

2467. ^J?^? my transgression, comp. of \ pron. aff., and J?^$ 
ground form of J?^3 m., seg. (?) class, transgression. 

2468. 5Pi*1 ^ 0M ^ 5 ^ hotly pursued, 2 sing. m. pret. £a7 of pTH 
parad. 1; 1. burned; 2. burned (after owe), pursued hotly. 

2469. — Ver. 37. 1!T?V1 /e£ them adjudicate, act as arbiters be- 
tween us; comp. of 1 and 3 plur. pres. hiph. of TO\ parad. 8, not 

14 



210 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxxi. 

used in hal, in hiph. 1. argued; 2. judged; 3. convicted; 4. repre- 
hended ; 5 . punished. 

2470— Ver.3xS. TW DHWJ JlT lit. ^"s toenfy yeor: this is a 
Scottish, as well as a Hebrew idiom. 

2471. ^?rn thy ezves, comp. of pron. aff. 2 pers., and plur. of 
7rTl a ewe, pi. abs. Evil 1 "! Gr.49. 

2472. T?3W cast their young, in pause for *D5^ 3 plur. pret. jm'A. 
of /Jfe? parad. 1, became childless, in pih. made childless, cast 
(young). 

2473. vW «^c/ ^e rams of, comp. of 1, and constr. pi. of /*&? m. 
a ram. Jacob argues in justification of bis honesty and zeal 
for Laban's interests, that he did not, when pressed for hunger, 
exercise the shepherd's privilege of eating the males of the flock. 

2474 — Ver.39. HIT)?? fem. the torn, that which was torn (by 
wild beasts), a noun fem. from £p£p. It appears that shepherds 
were not answerable for what was lost in this way, provided they 
brought part of the carcase to their masters in evidence of the fact, 
unless on account of proved negligence, See Exod.xxii. 10, 13. 

2475. rlJ^riNt *JJNt I atoned for it, made it good by paying the 
value; comp. of pron. aff. fem., and f epenth., and 1 sing. pres. pih. 
of ^bH parad. 2 and 12, missed the mark, erred, sinned; in pih. 
atoned (for sin). 

2476. njt^pSri comp. of pron. aff. and j epenth., and 2 sing. m. 
pres. pih., with. dag. implied in p, of fc^M parad. 1, sought, required. 

2477. *JH5J5 stolen, comp. of yod parag., and pass. part, hal fem. 
of -^5 ; had it been the pron. affix, it would have been written 
TDM stolen from me. 

2478.— Ver.40. ")X\ DID WH I was (in this condition), the heat 
consumed me hy day, and the cold by night. This description of 
the alternations of heat and cold by day and night, exactly 
corresponds with that given in Niebuhr's account of the climate 
of Mesopotamia. ^v3& comp. of pron. aff., and 3 sing. m. pret. 
hal of 7?K parad. 7. 

2479. rnp subs. m. cold, frost. 

2480. I^Fll and fled, comp. of -), and 3 sing. fem. pres. hal of 
Ty parad. 6, moved, fled; cogn. H^. 



Ver. 37— 51.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 211 

2481. — Ver. 41. ^/HM and thou hast changed, comp. of -), and 
2 sing. masc. pres. hiph. apoc. of SHH changed, parad. 2. 

2482. — Ver.42. 1T\%) comp. of ) and subs. m. fear. God is 
here called the God of Abraham and the fear of Isaac, probably 
because Abraham was dead, and God was his unalienable portion 
for ever; but because Isaac was still alive and in a state of pro- 
bation, and actuated by the fear of God. Dr. Ad. Clarke, and Bush. 

2483. *5 before PIJJJ£ has the force of sane or utique in Latin. 

2484. DD^'H adv. empty-handed, from p* 1 *) to be empty. 

2485. rOVI and reproved, comp. of -1, and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. 
hiph. of 'ny parad. 8 and 4; vide supra No. 2469. 

2486. — Ver.43. ")X\ T01/1 but as for my daughters, what shoidd 
I do to them this day, i. e. do you think I have pursued you with 
so hostile an intention, as to induce me to injure and impoverish 
my own daughters and their children. 

2487. — Ver. 44. 1J? subs. m. an eye or ear witness, likewise ap- 
plied figuratively to inanimate objects. 

2488. — Ver. 45. fi^yYJ and set it up, comp. of ) and pron. affix 
fern., and 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of D^H parad. 2 and 10, to be high, 
to be raised; in hiph. to cause to be raised, to set up. 

2489. — Ver. 46. )\2p7 collect, gather, 2 plur. masc. imp. hal of 
t0p7 parad. 1. 

2490. 7| in pause for 73 subs. m. a heap. 

2491. — Ver. 47. fc^n^nn^ *1^ acervus testimonii, Syriac or 
Chaldee words. 

2492. njra Galeed, heap of testimony, see Nos. 2487 and 2490. 

2493. — Ver. 49. PT3¥£?n Mizpah, i. e. the watch toiver, from 
i"l£¥ parad. 13, watched; and &|V! 3 sing. m. apoc. pres of the 
same. Gr. 115. 

2494. ^lHDJ 1 plur. pres. niph. of IHp hid, parad. 4. 

2495. — Ver. 50. HJ^ri shalt afflict, maltreat, 2 sing. m. pres. pih. 
of n$l parad. 2 and 13. ' 

2496. P!Nn 2 sing. m. imp. hal of ("ISO saw. 

2497.—Ver. 51. W*V 1 sing. pret. hal of PHJ parad. 8, 3 and 13; 
1. cast out, sent forth; 2. cast as a foundation, raised up as a heap 
of stones, by casting one upon another. 

14* 



212 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xxxi. 52. 

2498— Ver. 52. "Wl K 1 ? *JN"DK Ma* J sM wo* jsass. This 
idiom has been already noticed. 

2499. TXgbfor evil, with evil intent. 

2500. — Chap.xxxii. 1. pWT. kissed, 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of p$!l 
already noticed. 

2501. — Ver. 2. ^§5 comp. of •), and 3 plnr. masc. pres. hal of 
J?3§ parad. 4, me^ totYft. 

2502.— Ver. 3. D^QO m pause for D^Plg), dual of Hjn^ subs. 
m. where one encamps, a camp, an army, a large body of people, 
constr. sing. rQHfo. Jacob called the angels an army on account 
of their number, and he calls the place Mahanaim in the dual, 
probably because they were ranged in two bands on each side of 
him. According to Dathe, the two bands are Jacob's own, and 
that of the angels who accompanied him. 

2503.— Ver. 5. JVT&Kn 2 plur. pres. hal of "JfcK parad. T and 3, 
with J parag. 

2504. *£P)| 1 sing. m. pret. hal of ^3 to sojourn, parad. 10 and 3. 

2505. "lHKJ and I have tarried, comp. of ), and 1 sing. pret.jwA. 
of ^HK parad. 7, 3, 4, delayed, put off, tarried. 

2506. — Ver. 6. 11$ V WJ lit. flw^ ^erc m *o me ox (oxen, 
cattle). Jacob sends this notice to his brother, lest he should 
imagine that he was in poverty, and that he was returning to make 
claims upon him in virtue of his birth-right. 

2507. *)W m., a generic term, applied both to male and female, 
like the Latin bos, an ox, or cow ; Chald. "lift ; Lat. taur-us ; with 
a sibilant, in Eng. steer. 

2508. nil/fe^O and I have sent, comp. of \ and il parag., and 
1 sing. pres. hal of T\W. 

2509 —Ver. 7. Wtfjlfl plur. pret. hal of K13 to go. 
2510.— Ver. 8. N'T*} comp. of •], and 3 sing. m. pres. hal of N*V 
feared, parad. 8 and 12. 

2511. 1/ 15?*1 «??c? *V distressed him, comp. of •), and 3 sing. m. 
pres. hal of 1¥J parad. 8 and 4; cogn. *Vl¥ bound, straitened, dis- 
tressed, here used impersonally. 

2512. Vn^5 <^<# halved, divided, comp. of •), and 3 sing. m. apoc. 
pres. of M^n parad. 2 and 13, halved. 

2513. — Ver. 9. ^PISHI and smite it, comp. of ) and pron. aff.,and 



Chap.xxxii.16.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 213 

3 sing. m. pret. hiph. of PD3 par ad. 5 and 13, not used in kal, in 
hiph. smote. 

2514. 1^|n comp. of T\, and part. niph. m. of 1K£> parad. 3 
and 4, «0«s /<?#, remained, in niph. id. 

2515. n^^7$7 lit. /or #;* escaping, Bush : comp. of ? and P!tpV?3 
subs. fern, an escaping, ichat has escaped, a remnant-, from u7B } 
escaped, parad. 1. 

2516. — Ver. 10. ni^W comp. of \ and PI parag., and 1 sing, 
pres. hiph. of 3bJ parad. 9, in kal, teas good ; in AtjpA. did good; 
inf. A*>A. nt?\l, ver. 12. 

2517. — Ver . 1 1 . "YJ) 73ft *F\)W lit. / am Jess than all thy kindness 
and all thy truth, lit. I am unworthy of all thy kindness, and of 
all thy faithfulness (in the fulfilment of thy promises made to me). 

2518. Ttfb£ 1 sing. pret. kal of |bp was little, parad. 1. 

2519. D^lDil plur. abs. of ^DP! m. seg. («) class, kindness; used 
here in the plur. to mark the extent of the kindness bestowed. 

2520. Vp£5 comp. of 5 and pron. afT. 1 pers. sing., and 7pft 
subs. m. a staff, dagesh being implied in p. 

2521. — Ver. 12, ^/^H deliver me, comp. of pron. afT., and 2 sing, 
m. imp. hiph. of v£l parad. 5, not used in kal. 

2522. ")y\ DK \p5rn and smite me, mother with children, i.e. my 
whole company, both mother and child; a proverbial expression, 
denoting the greatest cruelty. 

2523. 05Pfi comp. of \ and pron. aff. 1 pers., and 3 sing. pret. 
hiph. of PDJ parad. 5 and 13, already noticed. 

2524. — Ver. 14. Pinjtt subs. fern, a present. 

2525.— Ver. 15. rf#J?l he-goats, plur. of #fl m. Gr. 113. 

2526. — Ver. 16. rtp\}*§ \2 s ?fo%camels giving suck, or more gene- 
rally giving milk, and on that account the more valuable. Cornell 
lac habent, donee iterum gravescant; suavissimum hoc existimatur, 
ad unam mensuram tribus aquae additis. Plin. H. N. xi. 94. 

252T. D*p??il tne masc. form is here used for the fern., compare 
*N& in 2506 ; see Exod. xxxiv. 19. These cases of common gen- 
der bear traces of language without gender : feminine terminations 
for the distinction of gender were probably adopted to save the 
necessity of separate words, or other explanation, in cases of am- 
biguity. Of these cases of separate words for masc. and fern., may 



214 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxxii. 

be noted *VJJ a he-ass, and JlfiX « she-ass, found in this verse. 
See Storr. p. 8. 

2528. rnp\5^J fern. plur. of part. hiph. of pj* parad. 8, sucked; 
in hiph. suckled. 

2529. rt*l3 phir. of PJ*T3 fern. a young cotv, masc. 13 or ^IS (2 
young bull. 

2530. D^JJ plur. of ^VJ^ m - ow ass, a male ass. 

2531. — Ver. 17. TlJ? Tltydrove, drove, each drove; an expression 
used in Heb. instead of that used in other languages by means of dis- 
tributive pronouns. TTjjj subs. m. seg. (e) class, pi. d**YjJJ ver. 20. 

2532. T)^ pass over, 2 plur. imp. kal of ^3^ parad. 2 and 4. 

2533. hVl subs. m. a space. Jacob appears to have made his 
arrangements in this artful way, to give his present a greater 
appearance of value, to appease his brother's anger as he passed 
the several droves, and to give himself time to take whatsoever 
measures circumstances might render necessary. 

2534. — Ver. 18. W||^ shall meet thee, comp. of pron. aff., and 
3 sing. masc. pres. kal of fe^J3 parad. 1, met. 

2535. T?K^ and shall ask thee, comp. of \ and pron. aff, and 
3 sing. m. pret. kal of /Xfe? parad. 3, asked. 

2536.— Ver. 19. HPl^g* sent, fern, of pass. part, kal of !"W 
sent, parad. 4. 

2537. — Ver. 20. J^n^HF) comp. of j parag,, and 2 plur. m. pres. 
pih. of 15^ said. 

2538. DJNj^M on V our finding (him), on your meeting with 
him; comp. of 3 and grave pron. aff. 2 pers., and part. act. kal of 
&TC& parad. 12. ' 

2539. — Ver. 21. VJ£ ("Hi?^ lit- I shall cover his (angry) coun- 
tenance, I shall appease him. 

2540. iTTSDJJ comp. of T\ parag., and 1 sing. m. pres. pih. of 
"lM parad. 4; 1. smeared; 2. covered; 3. covered (sin), atoned for 
it, pardoned it ; 4. appeased. 

2541. TO H^*]^ P"**!!D81 ^^^ -^ way afterwards see his face 
(without its angry looks). 

2542. *33 NfeP? V^IX perchance he ivill raise my face. This idiom 
is probably founded upon the custom of superiors raising up in- 
feriors, who, as suppliants or otherwise, have prostrated themselves 



Ver. 16—29.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 215 

Pl¥*lNt D*j3Nt with, their faces to the ground, that is, when the} 
mean to receive them favourably. 

2543. — Ver. 22. J7 passed the night, 3 sing. m. pret. kal of j 5 !/, 
paracl. 10. 

2544. — Ver. 23. 138?? constr. of ^Vti where one passes, a ford, 
compare vadum and vado ; subs. m. from ^SJJ passed, parad. 2 and 4. 

2545. — Ver. 24. 0*138*5 an ^ ca ^sed them to pass over, comp. of 
•1 and 3 sing. pres. hiph. of *13J7. 

2546 — Ver. 25. IWI and was left, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. masc. 
pres. niph. of 1JT or IfVl, parad. 8. 

2547. p3N*l and wrestled, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. pres. niph. of 
p3^ parad. 7, not used in kal; in niph. wrestled, from p3^? dust. 
The Greeks in like manner use irdhaieiv and o-vytcovLovadai,, to 
wrestle, from irakr), small sand, and kovls, dust. The Romans 
used the expression descendere in arenam, when parties were going 
to wrestle. This word is used in the passive voice, like the French 
reflected verbs, and implies the wrestling together of the parties. 
Infin. niph. pSNH, and with 3 pref. and \ aff. ip3XH3, ver. 26. 

2548. TnJV infin. constr. hal of Tw§ ascended. 

2549. IH^n the morning, in pause for in^H, comp. of -PI and 
*1H^ in. the primitive idea of which seems to be darkness; hence, 
the beginning and end of darkness, the dusk, the twilight, both in 
the evening and morning, but especially the latter ; the dusk. See 
Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2550. — Ver. 26. *?y 3 111. pret, kal, was able, parad. 8. 

2551. *D*V his thigh, comp. of pron. aff. and *TV com. the thigh. 

2552. ypJ?] comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of J?p* parad. 
8 and 4, tvas loosened, became dislocated. 

2553. IPl&Tl Tvty *3- It was a prevalent opinion in these times 
that the Divine Being never appeared to mankind but during the 
night ; the same opinion has generally prevailed in later times 
among the superstitious in regard to ghosts and other apparitions. 

2554.— Ver. 29. ")X\ D^K D^ nng> ^ for thou hast contended 
succcssfidly icith God, how much more shalt thou prevail over man. 
Quoniam si contra Deum fortis fuisti, quanto magis contra homines 
praevalebis ; on ivia^vaa^ jmera 0eov, /cal /mera avOpooirutv hwarhs 
ear], LXX. See Dathe. Rosen., who supports the foregoing 



216 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxxii. 29. 

rendering, says that -) before /^)T\ is used Swerifcm, and is the 
same as 73*11"! *3 W D*&£)«?1. Jacob was thus exhorted to be 
under no apprehensions in regard to his brother. 

2555. rnfc> 2 sing. m. pret. hal of ?W&, parad. 3 and 13. 

2556.— Yer. 31. hiVfe Peniel, i.e. God's face. 

..... 3 J 

2557. s p%& V$%R) and my life has been preserved, see No. 1389; 
comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. niph. of /¥3 parad. 5. 

2558.— Ver. 32. mff) comp. of -J and 3 sing. pres. £«7 of rTTT 
parad. 3 and 4, arose. 

2559. JH¥ part. act. masc. hal of $??¥, parad. 4, sidled, went to 
the side, lamed. Root yTX the side. 

2560 Yer. 33. fl^Uri *Vil the ischiatic nerve or sinew. 

V T ~ 

2561. Til subs. m. a seWw or nerve. 

2562. n^|H comp. of -PI and Jl^ subs. m. the tendon which 
passes through the thigh and leg to the heel. See Prof. Lee's 
Lex. Only used here. 

2563. — Chap, xxxiii. 2. JiTT?* their children, comp. of pron. afT. 
fern. plur. 3 pers. and constr. plur. of *TyJ, ground form !?- j and 
OH-f *! com P- of 1 an( i pron. afT. PI and plur. abs. of the same. See 
Gr. 49. The constr. was used in the former case, because con- 
nected with the grave affix. 

2564. — Yer. 3. The bowing seven times was a token of marked 
reverence. 

2565. 1fi^5 his drawing near, comp. of pron. afF. 1 and Plfe^ 
ground form of T\&%, contr. for T\W$ inf. constr. of &&, parad. 5. 

2566. — Yer. 4. ^iPlpSPH an d embraced him, comp. of -1 and pron. 
afT. and 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of P3PI parad. 2, embraced. 

2567. ^iPlDfc^J and kissed him, comp. of •) and pron. aff. and 
3 sing. pres. hal of pfeJO parad. 5. 

2568. — Yer. 5. ")X\ \yn~1$t$ (as regards) whom, God hath shewed 
favour to thy servant ; f JH 3 sing. pret. hal, parad. 2 and 6. 

2569.— Yer. 6. JBtefll ordinarily written HJ^J?, 3 pi. fern. pres. 
^a/ of ^ J parad. 6, drew near, and ^5J 3 sing. m. pret. _pt A. 

2570. 2^n.5^J?l «ft^ bowed themselves, comp. of -1 and 3 plur. 
fern. pres. MA." of PlPl£> or 1Plg>. See No. 1460. 

2571. — Yer. 8. *fifc£l3 Jm^, in pause for Tl£^3, 1 sing. masc. 
pret. hal of fc^3, parad. 1, met. 



Chap.xxxiii.14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 217 

2572.— Yer. 9. T) 7 #) lit. there is to me much, I have 
abundance. 

2573. JT^Wtil ^7 *■?. lit. let there be ivhat (is) to thee, i.e. keep 
what thou hast for thyself. 

2574. — Yer. 10. In ver. 10 and 11, Jacob expresses great anxiety 
that Esau would receive his present, because after doing so Esau 
was prohibited by a point of honour, well understood then and 
even now in the East, from doing him any injury. See Intro- 
duction, Part I. 

2575. ^^Tfi com P- of *1 and pron. aff. 1 sing, and 2 sing. masc. 
pres. hal of H¥^), parad. 2 and 13. 1. approved', 2. received fa- 
vourably (an offering or present). 

2576. — Yer. 11. TD*13 ray present, comp. of pron. aff. \ and 
("0*13 subs. fern. 1. a blessing, an ascription of praise to God; 
2. a blessing also as received from him; 3. any present or favour 
received from man. See Prof. Lee's Lex. The principle of the 
change of vowels has been repeatedly pointed out. 

2577. HfrO"^ was brought, 3 sing. fern. pret. hoph. of K1S, parad. 
10 and 12. 

2578 — Yer. 12. i"l}?p3 comp of H parag. and 1 plur. pres. hal of 
^03, parad. 5 and 4. 1. departed; 2. set out on a journey, etc. 

2579. — Yer. 13. D\?H of tender age, plur. masc. of *T\, ground 
form ^5*1 tender. 

2580. ')y\ *\0tt) }X¥Pfl et oves et vaccas lactantes (scit dominus 
meus) esse super me, i. e. mihi, meae curae incumber e, ne quid, 
concitatiore gressu, detriment! capiant. Eos. 

2581. ni/JJ fern. pi. part, hal of sty, parad. 2 and 10, to be with 
young, to suckle ; probably here, with young. 

2582. D^pS*!*! comp. of \ and pron. aff. and 3 plur. pret. hal of 
p§^ beat, overdrove. Some such word as D^JH shepherds, herds- 
men, is understood here. It should seem that Jacob's present to 
Esau did not include cattle in the same situation with his own, 
otherwise Esau would have had the same plea as Jacob for driving 
slowly. 

2583.— Yer. 14. ^K? ri7njn# / shall lead on at my leisure, 
comp. of il parag., and 1 sing. pres. hith. of /HJ parad. 4. 



218 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxxiii. 14. 

2584. *&«? conip. of 7 and pron. aff. 1 pers., and DK, in full 
£?£?K, ground form of £2K Gr. 115, gentle pace. 

2585. np50£?D /Tw lit. according to the foot (the pace) of the 
property, i. e. (the cattle) which are before me. 

2586. rD&7p subs. fem. 1. ivork; 2. what is acquired by work 
or labour, acquisition, wealth, cattle. 

2587. — Ver. 15. il2j*Jft$ comp. of n parage and 1 sing. pres. hiph- 
of *%£\, cogn. y$^ parad. 5; 1. setup; 2. placed; 3. left. 

2588. — Ver. 17. H3D booths, which he had been before unable 
to make, owing to the circumstances of haste and fear he had been 
in; plur. of H3D fem. a booth. Root *H3p covered. 

2589. — Ver. 18. JP!*1 and pitched (his tents), comp. of A, and 
3 sing. m. apoc. pres. of ("OH parad. 2 and 18, Gr. 115. 

2590. ^VJjn ^3T18 before the city. 

2591. — Ver. 19. jp*J and purchased, comp. of •), and 3 sing. m. 
apoc. pres. of H3P parad. 13. See Gr. 115. 

2592. ftW'&p lambs; so translated by the LXX., Vulg., Chald., 
and Syr. Some modern interpreters suppose this word to mean a 
coin with a lamb engraved upon it, but there are no evidences of 
the use of coined money at that period. Gesenius, Prof. Lee, and 
others, suppose it to denote some kind of weight then in use for 
weighing bullion : they maintain that neither in Hebrew nor in 
any of the cognate languages is there any ground for rendering 
this word lamb, and that there is no evidence at that period of 
traffic by barter. See Ges. and Prof. Lee's Lex. ; see also Ros. in 
loc. ; and Alb. Schultens in Comment, on Job xlii. 11. 

2593. — Chap.xxxiv. 1. HINT? to see, to become acquainted with , 
comp. of 7, and inf. constr. kal of H^*!. 

2594. — Ver. 2. H^JH and humbled her (seduced), comp. of -), and 
pron. aff. fem., and 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of 7\ty parad. 2 and 13; 
1. led, brought out; hence 2. exposed, humbled, subdued, took captive. 
Prom the former of these meanings, viz. brought out (words), is 
deduced the signification answered. (The original notion conveyed 
by 1^1 a word, is that of setting in order as a flock, leading forth, 
driving out.) Prom the second arises the idea of humility, afflic- 
tion, etc. 



Chap.xxxiv.9.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 219 

2595. — Ver. 3. pSHfii comp. of -J, and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of 
P5^ parad. 1, adhered to, clove to. 

2596. ")T\ 1~> ?J£ ^31^ lit. and lie spoke to the young woman's 
heart, i. e. did every thing in his power to console her by renewed 
pledges of love, promises of marriage, and the like. 

2597.— Yer. 4. HT^Pl the young woman, comp. of -H, and fern, 
form of v?.. a young man, ground form \)\ 

2598.— Yer. 5. &££? had defiled, 3 sing. m. yret. pih. of Xfcti 
parad. 12, became, teas unclean, iiipih. made unclean, polluted, etc. 

2599. G^nni and kept silence, comp. of 1, and 3 sing. m. pret. 
hiph. of ^'IH already analysed. 

2600. — Yer. 7. DJS?t^3 when they heard, comp. of J3 and pron. 
aff., and $$$, with the accent V.ti&, ground form of J?b&> infin. 
constr. kaloi $£& see No. 2276. 

2601. ^Q^jyVJ and were greatly distressed, comp. of -J, and 3 pi. 
m. pres. hith, of ^¥J7 parad. 2, bound, tightened, pained, grieved, 
distressed. 

2602. M/5? su-bs- f em - worthlessness , disgrace, an act bringing 
disgrace on its victim, or the victim's family ; a disgraceful action, 
etc.; from /^ 1. became shrivelled and fell, as flowers, fruits, or 
leaves; 2. wasted away (with grief, misfortune); 3. acted as one 
whose intellects are wasted, acted foolishly . See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2603. 7fcO£^5 erga familiam patris sui Israel. Dathe. 

260-1. n&PJ^ N/ J51 for so it is not done, i. e. such a thing is 
unheard of; viz. to seduce a virgin in violation of the rights of 
hospitality, and one who considered herself safe in the society of 
her female friends. See Introduction, Part III. 

2605. — Yer. 8. ^3 E5^ as for Shechem my son, absolute form 
of construction. 

2606: 1^§3 ^P^O his soul burnetii after, delighteth in; 3 sing. 
fern. pret. kal of p£?H parad. 2; 1. burned (with love towards a 
woman) ; 2. adhered to (her), delighted in (her). 

2607. — Yer. 9. ^Fllinni and form alliances by marriage, comp. 
of ) and 2 plur. m. imp. hith. of Jnn, not used in kal, parad. 2 ; 
formed affinity, especially by marriage. Alliances by marriage 
were anciently considered a great bond of union between different 



220 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxxiv. 

nations, Caes. de Bell. Gall. cap. 24; as well as a particular mark 
of favour and distinction, Dem. de Corona. 

2608.— Ver. 10. Wl8?\) TlVTlD) and travel over it, and hold 
property in it. The former expression conveys the privilege of 
pasturage, and trading throughout the land, compare 1HD No. 1857; 
the latter that of purchasing and holding property in it. Hamor 
thus grants to the family of Jacob all the rights and privileges 
possessed by his own subjects. 

2609. rttiripl comp. of \ and pron. aff. and 2 plur. imp. hal m. 
of IHp, parad. 2 and 4. 

2610. ^iTn^ni comp. of ) and 2 plur. masc. imp. niph. of IH&, 
parad. 7 and 3, seized, possessed. See No. 1833, and Introduction, 
Part I. 

2611 — Ver. 12. "1)1*1 vJJ ^""lil lit. multiply on me exceedingly 
price and gift, i. e. demand of me as high a price for the damsel, 
and as many presents as you choose. 

2612. 1HD subs. m. price paid to the father for his daughter. 
jjjlo probably refers to presents given by the bridegroom to other 
relatives of the bride. See Introduction, Part I. 

2613— Ver. 13. ftlTpZ, see No. 2195. 

2613.— Ver. 14. "li 1 ) 'igW Bfyjf? lit. to a man, as to ichom, a 
foreskin to him, i. e. to a man who is uncircumcised. Jl /lj? subs, 
fern, a foreskin. 

2614. HiD'in subs. fern, reproach, see ^pfi. 1. kept the season of 
autumn : 2. stripped as a tree of its leaves ; when applied to men, 
3. stripped of honour, reproached. 

2615. — Ver. 15. T\)M we will consent, 1 pi. pres. niph. of H1X, 
not used in kal ; with Pi parag. Mn&O, ver. 23 ; and 3 plur. masc. 
VtiO, ver. 22. 
i 2616. a2Tw comp. of 7 and infin. niph. of /)ti, parad. 10, cogn. 
/7& and 7??J cut, circumcised; and D* 1 7^ part. niph. masc. of the 
same ; both forms being irregular. 

2617— Ver. 18. ^ft") comp. of -1 and 3 plur. pres. kal of 36) 
parad. 9, was good. 

2618. — Ver. 19. "Tltf delayed, 3 sing. pret. jw'A. of IHX, parad. 
7 and 3. 

2619. j^Df! delighted in, 3 sing. m. pret. kal, parad. 2. 



Ver. 9—30.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 221 

2620. Itt) honourable, part. niph. sing. m. of HJJD teas heavy, 
etc., already noticed. 

2621.— Ver. 21. &&$ peaceable, plur. abs. of D^. 

2622. D**IJ"rQPn lit, width of hands, extensive on each hand, 
sufficient in extent for supporting them and us. 

2623. ri5n , H constr. of rttFH fern, of 2PH ample, spacious. 
2624. — Ver. 23. DHftn? their cattle, comp. of pron. affix and 

fi£D3, ground form of T\J2T\^, constr. of n^H?. 

2625. — Ver. 25. D*3&$3 pained, and consequently weak and in- 
capable of self defence ; plur. abs. masc. of act. part, kal of ^3, 
parad. S, teas pained. 

2626. I^nn his sword, comp. of pron. aff. and ^Itl, ground form 
of i^n com. a sword. 

2627. ntD5 lit. confidence, while the inhabitants were unsuspicious 
of their intentions. 

2628. ^"in*! and sleio, comp. of ■) and 3 plur. pres. kal of ^H, 
parad. 2 and 3, slew ; 3 plur. pret. kal ^Tl. 

2629.— Ver. 26. ^t) *E? lit. with the mouth (edge) of the sword; 
hence the expression, the devouring sword. 

2630. — Ver. 27. ^pV*_ 'O? the sons of Jacob. Rosen, supposes 
these words to refer to the whole of the sons of Jacob; and that 
though Simeon and Levi were only implicated in the slaughter, 
all shared in the spoil. 

2631. D V?nn the slain, comp. of the art. and pi. of /7H slain. 

2632. VD^I and took the spoil, comp. of •) and 3 pi. pres. kal of 
TT5, parad. 6. 

2634. — Ver. 29. D7*H their wealth, comp. of pron. aff. and constr. 
of TH subs. m. 1. strength; 2.poiver; 3. toealth. 

2635. D£ft their child (children), comp. of pron. aff. and M?, 
ground form H3D infant, child, here used in a collective sense; 
so likewise FV|1 house for houses, at the end of this verse, in pause 

for r\% 

2636. !Q# captured, 3 plur. pret. kal of Ttt® , parad. 13. 

2637. — Ver. 30. DJlflJg ye have troubled (me) ; " ducta ab aquis 
metaphora: quum essem jam hac in regione tranquillus, meas 
omnes res atque animum turbastis," Ros. 2 plur. m. pret. kal of 
135J parad. 2 and 4. 



ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxxiv. 80. 

2638. ^fcJ^SOrn to cause me to stink, to make me loathed and 
detested, comp. of 7 and pron. aff. and inf. hiph. of &^&|1, parad. 3, 
was bad, corrupt, foetid. The notions of good, and good savour, 
and bad, and bad savour, are almost inseparable in the idioms of 
this class of languages. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2639. *l|)pto *T\fo \JfcO and (as for) me (and my family, we are) 
men of number, i.e. easily numbered, few. 

2640. ^nto constr. plur. of nto or nto, not used in the sing., 

unless vestiges of the sing, are traceable in the words with which 

it is compounded, as in 7^&^nto and M/j^nto. According to 

Ges. into is the constr. form of nto, as ^^ Chald. constr. totf and 

: . L ■ • . T ~ : 

D^, constr. ItoS^; hence /WifoW, so D^S, constr. sing. ^3 ; hence 

7K^$, Ges. Lex., under nto. 

2641. ^D^JI and they (the Canaanites and Perizzites) shall 
gather themselves together, comp. of \ and 3 pi. pret. niph. of £|DN&, 
parad. 7, collected. 

2641.* ^3?^ an d smite me, comp. of ) and pron. aff. and 3 pi. 
pret. hiph. of Plij, see No. 2523. 

2642. *JVTtot?01 #ft^ I shall be destroyed, comp. of ) and 1 sing, 
pret. niph. of Ito^, parad. 1, not used in kal. 

2643. — Ver. 31. ")%) n^iT^H does he use our sister as a harlot. 
See Introduction, Part III. Compounded of il interrog. particle 
and D an( i H^IT subs. fern, a harlot, fern, form of the part. act. kal 
of H3T, parad. 13, scortatus est. Prof. Lee says, that the primary 
idea in the cognate roots is that of feeding, adorning, trading ; 
and he gives innkeeper, hostess, as the primary sense of this word. 
So from irepdco, vendo, comes iropvr], a harlot; " femina quae cor- 
poris quaestum facit et quae se vendit." See Lex. 

2644. — Chap. xxxv. 1. rf?S go up, 2 sing. m. imp. kal of <"HJ£ 
went up, parad. 2 and 13. 

2645. nitf^jn that appeared, comp. of -Jl, and part. m. sing. niph. 
of H£0. According to our idiom, the article here and in similar 
situations requires to be translated as a relative pronoun ; but if 
all participles in Hebrew are nouns, as is undoubtedly the case, 
then according to the Hebrew idiom the article retains its usual 
force ; H503D would accordingly be rendered the appearer, were 



Chap.xxxv.4.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 223 

there sucli a "word in our language; thus also JlJ?!!! he who feeds = 
the pastor, lp211 he icho visits — the visitor. 

2646. lilil? lit- * w ^// flight, in thy feeing, when thou didst 
fee, comp. of ? and pron. aff., and Hill, with the accent Hli, 
ground form of 1115, inf. constr. Jcal of HIS- According to our 
theory all infinitives, are abstract nouns. Introduction, Part III. 

2647.— Ver. 2. *il7K~ttK ^llpPl put away the gods of the stranger, 
i. e. strange, false gods ; probably the Teraphim which Rachel had 
stolen from her father, and other idols of the same description, 
which may have been brought from Mesopotamia by others of 
Jacob's household, or obtained from the spoil of the Shechemites. 

2648. ^npH 2 plur. m. imp. hiph. of TlD parad. 10 and 4, to retire, 
in hiph. to cause to retire, to remove. 

2649. ID} subs. m. a stranger, a foreigner. 

2650. ")y\ ^/lIlO ^HiltS! purify yourselves and change your 
garments. See Exod. xix. 10, and Introduction Part I. 

2651. ^IPlfcSJl 2 pi. m. imp. niph. of *V)te t purifed, parad. 3 and 4. 

2652. ^ v,nn 2 pi. masc. imp. hiph. of 5] 711 parad. 2, changed. 

2653. SyrpfoW your garments, comp. of grave aff. 2 pers., and 
plur. of Twl2i& subs. fern, a garment. 

2654. — Ver. 3. Pl^p^. comp. of ) and H parag., and 1 plur. pres. 
kal of U)p parad. 10, to rise. 

2655. rtiyil icho answered, see Xo.2645; comp. of the art., and 
part. act. m. sing, kal of H^ parad. 2 and 13. See No. 2594. 

2656. TH^ comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers., and PI1V subs. fern, l.she 
who distresses one, adversaria ; 2. distress, affliction-, fern, form of 
1¥ or 1¥, ground form 11¥, verb 11¥ parad. 6; 1. bound; 2. pres- 
sed; 3. distressed. 

265T. — Ver. 4. D^TJJl the rings, comp. of the art., and plur. abs. 
of Q?3 subs. m. 1. a ring for the nose; 2. a ring for the ears, as in 
this passage. These earrings appear to have been used for super- 
stitious or idolatrous purposes, as amulets or talismans were in 
after-times, or they may have been employed by Jacob's household 
as materials for the making of idols. In reference to the former 
view, which is the more probable, Maimonides, de cultu pereg. 
cap.vii. sect. 10, says, « Si inveniantur vasa imagine solis, lunae, 
vel draconis signata, aut insculpta, sive in fibulis aut annulis, 



224 ANALYSIS OF [Cliap.xxxv. 

prohibita sunt." Hosea, chap. ii. 15, represents Jerusalem as having 
decked herself with the earrings of Baalim. 

2658. J£tJ*J and hid, comp. of •), and 3 sing. masc. pres. hal of 
|£D parad. 1. 

2659.— Ver. 5. ty&) in pause for ty&) comp. of -), and 3 pi. m. 
pres. hal of J?D!) parad. 5 and 4, departed, set out. 

2660. flfaPl constr. of H^H subs. fern, dread. This feeling of 
dread was to protect the Israelites from the vengeance of the 
surrounding nations for the destruction of the Shechemites. 

2661. DrPTYQ^p lit. surrounding places in regard to them, i. e. 
round about them ; comp. of pron, afF. and plur. of PQ*3P, £ form 
of 11*5!? subs, a circuit, a surrounding place, used as a prep, around, 
from ^3D surrounded. 

— T 

2662. ifiTl 3 plur. pret. hal of t|T| parad. 2, pursued. 
2663.— Ver. 7. btf"TV3 S& El-Bethel, God of Bethel; sacred to 

God who appeared to him at Bethel. 

2664. )/ti was revealed, revealed himself, 3 plur. pret. niph. of 
Tw% parad. 13. The word D s ri7^ri has here a plur. verb, which 
is very unusual ; this circumstance has consequently given rise to 
the conjecture that by Q^H/^ln is comprehended the whole of the 
heavenly host which Jacob saw at Bethel ; under this impression 
this word is rendered in the Targum of Onkelos by N*3K.^? ^ e 
angels : the word /$, however, immediately preceding shews that 
God alone is meant. 

2665. — Ver. 8. T\foP\) and died, comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. pres. 
hal of fflJb parad. 10. 

2666. \)pti> subs. m. Allon, i. e. an oah. 

2667. T))tt Bachuth, i. e. weeping. 

2668. — Ver. 1 1 . ^^tlf^from thy loins, thy body ; comp. of pron. 
afF., and prep, -fo before the gutt. fo Gr. 19, and rJPl m. lumbus. 

2669. — Ver. 14. JlS^ lit. what one sets up, a pillar, another 
form of fi!l-?5 an d used as its constr. state, compare T\W& and T\$& 
already noticed ; root ^JM not used in hal. 

2670. ")Ti T]pJ * Si ^5-5 lit. and he poured a libation upon it, 
and he poured oil upon it. It hence appears that libations of wine 
and oil, prescribed under the ceremonial law, were founded on 
pre-existing consuetudinary usages. 



Ver.4— 21.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 225 

2671. *?[D*5 comp. of -) and 3 sing. apoc. pres. m. sing, of ^]P3, 
parad. 5, poured out; in hiph. id. 

2672. Tjp3 subs. m. a libation. 

2673. — Ver. 16. rHM constr. of HIM fern, a certain measure 
o/* extent in length., but what, it is impossible to say. Prof. 
Lee's Lex. 

2674. — Ver. 17. nFH/J nnb'jXQ lit. in her having difficulty in 
her bringing forth, i. e. in her having hard labour. 

2675. Ptn&yprQ comp. of 5 and pron. aff. 3 pers. fern, and infin. 
hiph. of il^p, parad. 13, was hard, difficult. 

2676. PlJJfH? comp. of 5 and fern. pron. aff. 3 pers. and PTO, 
ground form of TTO, contr. for ITT?* inf. constr. kal of TT parad. 8 ; 
and JT!H*£?n, comp. of -H art. and fern. pih. part, of the same ; lit. 
she who causes a woman to bring forth, a midioife. 

2677. *KTfi 2 sing. f. pres. kal of KT parad. 8 and 12, /earn*, 
used here as an imperative. 

2678.— Ver. 18. ft#||] HXM lit. w tfta going out of her life 
(spirit), as her spirit departed, comp. of 5 and HX¥, contr. for 
HXV infin. constr. kal of NVJ parad. 8 and 12, went out. 

2679. \51N""|5 Ben-oni, i.e. son of my sorroio; \31N comp. of 
pron. aff. 1 pers. and J1X, contr. for JIN masc. 1. emptiness, vanity, 
2. wickedness ; 3. misfortune ; 4. sorroiv. 

2680. J7?^3 Benjamin, i.e. sew o/" n^£ hand. Some interpreters 
regard pfij as a Chaldee form of D*ftJ, which latter is found in the 
Sam. text and version, i.e. son of days, son of old age, as TrjXvyirrjs, 
sc. T7]\vyeTo<;, in Greek. This conjecture however rests upon too 
slender authority, and shews no contrast between this word and 
\|T)N'|3. It appears from hence, and from other passages which 
have been noticed, that names were, in these times, given to 
children from accidental circumstances connected with their birth; 
a custom, according to Eastern travellers, still prevalent in the 
East, 

2681. — Ver. 20. PirniSp her burial place, comp. of pron. aff. FT 
and JTTlp subs, fern., from ^Dp buried; constr. iTl^P- 

2682.— Ver. 21. ")}) h^}lS nxSnft lit. further 'onward in re- 
ference to the tower of Eder, ad turrim Eder, i. e. gregis, quia 
inde greges observari, tutique a periculis (latronibus, et bestiis, 

15 



ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxxv. 21. 

imprimis) praestari poterant. Euit aut Hierosolymis aut non 
procul ab ea urbe turris ejus nominis, ut patet ex Mich. iv. 8. Ros. 

2683.— Ver. 26. *fa? *)&?& according to the ordinary rules of 
syntax, VrpJ "l^?. ■' Quod (quicquid) natum est ei liberorum." 
Ros. 3 sing. m. pret. puh. of T?\ 

2684— Chap.xxxvi.2. jlTK T\2 rHJ£TlK. The names here given 
to the wives of Esau are different from those given in the end of 
the xxvi. chapter, and in the 9th ver. of the xxviii. This may be 
accounted for on the ground that these names were changed, as 
Abraham's, Esau's, and Jacob's were, from particular circumstances 
in their lives, although this is not recorded by the sacred his- 
torian. There might have been the same difficulty in regard to 
Eclom and Israel, had not the change been mentioned. 

2685.— Ver. 15. *§V?X constr. plur. of ?)T?ft subs. masc. 1. any 
person or thing to which one is accustomed or rendered familiar ; 
2. one confided in, because knotvn to be worthy, a head or leader of 
a tribe; in Gr. <£uAap^09. Root £HK became familiar with, learned. 

2686." — Ver. 20. Here follows the genealogy of Seir, the Horite, 
or Troglodyte, whose descendants had occupied the land of Edom 
before it was possessed by Esau. 

2687— Ver. 24. DW*Tl^ comp. of -H and D*#, only found in 
this place. This word is rendered by the Vulgate, warm waters, 
which is approved by Jerome. The LXX. regard it as a proper 
name, and render it 'Ia/juely. It is rendered waters in the Syriac 
version, which Prof. Lee thinks the right meaning. The discovery 
of springs in the desert being of such importance as to render it 
worthy of being recorded. 

2687*. — Ver. 31. Those who wish to see the disputed question 
ably treated, as to Moses' mention of kings of Idumea previously 
to the reigning of a king in Israel — and as to his mention first of 
dukes, then of kings, and then of dukes, are referred to Rosen. 
Scholia in loc. 

2688.— Chap, xxxvii. 2. ^pT T\YT>T\ HpK the following is a 
narrative of circumstances ivhich occurred in the family of Jacob. 

2689. QJllD^ comp. of pron. affix D~ and H|H subs, fern., lit. 
creeping, applied to secret scandalous reports ; hence calumny, ill 
report. 



Chap, xxxvii. 7.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 227 

2690. — Ver. 3. D^PI not used in the sing., old age, from |pT. 

2691. D*p5 AJfi?- Commentators have differed very greally 
in their interpretation of ^S%. It is rendered ttolklXov by the 
LXX., who have been followed by the Auth. Vers. (i Salios item 
duodecim Marti Gradivo legit, tanicaeqae pictae insigne dedit, et 
super tunicam aeneum pectori tegumen." Liv.lib. i. cap. 20. Among 
the most approved modern commentators, D*D§ J"0Fl? is under- 
stood to be a garment which reached to the hands and feet. According 
to Josephus, Antiqq. lib. vii. 8, § 1, a garment with sleeves, and 
reaching to the heels, so as to cover the tunica worn by persons of 
distinction. It appears from 2 Sam. xiii. 18, that such garments 
were worn by King David's daughters so long as they were virgins. 

2692. CD? plur. of D3 m. end, extremity, compare DD5 ceased, 
ended-, according to this view, D^pS r0fi3 is a garment of extremi- 
ties, reaching to the hands and feet, or Avith long skirt and sleeves. 

2693. — Ver. 4. VlEl lit. speak him; the same idiom is used in 
our own language, when we say to speak one fair, comp. of pron. 
aff. 1, and inf. pih. of ^5^J- 

2694. Di/^7 ht. for peace, peaceably. According to some com- 
mentators, Joseph's brethren could not even give him the ordinary 
salutation, peace be ivith you. 

2695. — Ver. 5. ^liDpl^ comp. of -), and 3 plur. pres. hiph. m. of 
t]P*, cogn. SlDtf added, parad. 8; they added to hate, i.e. they 
continued to hate. 

2696. — Ver. 7. D*o?K D*iu?K2? binding bundles (of corn), sheaves, 
plur. m. part. pih. of D7X parad. 7, tied, bound; and D*a?N with 
kibbuts vicarious for D*£?m?X, plur. of i"lft?tf, quasi Pl^PX some- 
thing bound, a sheaf, of the form of the fern, of the pass. part, kal 
of D^K; with pron. aff. of the 1 pers. Tlft7K. 

2697. PQSW in pause for PQV3* 3 sing. fern. pret. niph. of 3^ 
parad. h, placed; in niph. placed one's self, stood, was set, placed. 

2698. Pl3*5pn stood round, surrounded, 3 plur. fern. pres. kal of 
33D parad. 6. 

2699. yirjflKTl! and boived themselves, comp. of •}, and 3 pi. fern, 
pres. hith. of HP!^ bowed ; and D^nfifc??? plur. m. part. hith. and 
FflOJ??^ inf. hith, constr of the same. 

15* 



228 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxxvii. 

2700. — Ver.9. QTJ.Q comp. of -H and H^J subs. masc. the moon, 
prim. 

2701. — Ver. 10. 13 1J?^1 am ^ reproved him, comp. of A and 3 sing. 
m. pres. kal of IJ^ parad. 3, rebuked, reproved. 

2702. "TOKI and thy mother; perhaps Bilhah, Rachel's maid, 
who acted as mother to Joseph after R-achel's death. 

2703.— Ver. 13. PO? comp. of Pi parage and T? & s i n g- m - i m P- 
Z:aZ of T/^ parad. 8. 

2704. "TO/I^tf comp. of pron. afF. 2 pers., and 1 sing. pres. kal 
of n?W s<?^£; and ^PlPH^) comp. of -1 and pron. afF., and 3 sing, 
m. pres. kal of the same. 

2705.— Ver. 14. tfh&Ti$ HftJI lit. see ^e well-being (of thy 
brethren), see {f thy brethren are well. 

2706. ^3^ni and bring me (word), comp. of ), and pron. aff. 
1 pers., and 2 sing. imp. hiph. of 1W parad. 10. 

2707. — Ver. 15. ^PPK&^J and asked him, comp. of •) and pron. afF., 
and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of /NS&? parad. 3, asked. 

2708. njjn wandering, part. act. m. £#/ of PlJJp parad. 3 and 13, 

2709. fc^Mft 2 sing. m. pres. pih. of t?M sought, sought after ; 
and j^'A. part. sing. m. &^M£?- 

2710. — Ver. 17. PDtO /<?£ ws go, comp. of PI parag., and 1 plur. 
pres. kal of *H7^ parad. 8, wew£. 

2711. Pl^fn to Dothan, comp. of T\ locale, and }*JTT, contr. JfH. 

2712. — Ver. 18. ^ /?^n*1 comp. of -J and 3 plur. masc. pres. hith. 
of /55^ parad. 5, withheld, and used artifice for that purpose; 
in hith. plotted together against. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2713. irV£?Pn to put him to death, comp. of 7 and pron. aff., and 
and inf. hiph. of TNfo parad. 10, to die. 

2714. — Ver. 19. T\)fo 70PI 7$?3 master of dreams, who has dreams 
at command, dreamer. See No. 1215. 

2715. niEPHPl comp. of PI art., and pi. of DPP], contr. EPH sing, 
masc , plur. fern, a dream. 

2716. PlrpPl this, used in contempt. 

2717. — Ver. 20. ^Pl^Pl^ and let us kill him, comp. of ) and 
pron. affix/ and 1 plur. pres. kal of 2HPI parad. 2 and 4, killed. 
2718. ^PlJ/KOI a^<f /e£ ws cas£ him, comp. of 1 and pron. aff., 



Ver.9— 25.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 229 

and 1 sing. pres. hiph. of T?£? parad. 1; cogn. n?W not used in 
kal, in hiph. threw, cast', 2 pi. m. imp. hiph. *D vE^Il. 

2719. nil^n comp. of -H art., and plur. of ^113 m., 1. a pit, or 
cistern, or reservoir for rain water; 2. a prison; 3. a sepulchre. 

2720. ^/IfD^ /aatfA devoured him, comp. of pron. aff., and 3 sing. 
fern. pret. kal of /?tf parad. 7. 

2721.— Ver. 21. DTft ^rWI lit. owe? delivered him from their 
hand, i. e. attempted to deliver him ; the context shews that he did 
not deliver him. This ambiguity, which is generally explained by 
the context, arises out of the want of moods in the Heb. language, 
and of its poverty in auxiliary verbs. Inf. hiph. /"^H, ver. 22. 

2722. £>£3 ^Si ^7 lit. let us not smite him life, to the loss of 
life, comp. of pron. aff., } epenth., and euph. dagesh in kaph, and 
1 plur. pres. hiph. of HD^ parad. 5 and 13, already noticed. 

2723— Ver. 22. fcB$k 2 pi. m. pres. hot of ^§B> parad. 1, shed. 

2724. ^hS^I 2 plur! m. pres. hat of YUM parad. 4, sent. 

2725. \l s y?Tv2 to restore him, comp. of 7 and pron aff. i, and 
inf. hiph. of ^lW parad. 10, to return ; in hiph. to cause to return, 
to bring back, to restore. 

2726.— Ver. 23. ttD^gQ that they stripped him : see Luke xiv. 1. 
Comp. of •), and 3 plur. pres. hiph. of t0^§ parad. ^> P u ^ °ff ( a 
garment), in hiph. stripped off. 

2727. — Ver. 24 IftJJjO his garment, comp. of pron. aff., and 
fiJFl3, with the accent FOM, ground form of H^M, id. qu. HJh3. 
See T No.406. 

2728. pi written in full p*1 m. empty. 

2729.— Ver. 25. WTlfc constr. of Pirnfc subs. fern, a band of 
travellers, a caravan-, root TN& parad. 7 and 4, ivalked, ivent. See 
Notes in the Pictorial Bible on this verse. 

2730. D^tf bO bearing, plur. m. of act. part, kal of KfeSO parad. 5 
and 12. 

2731. HK^J only used here and inchap.xliii.il; storax, the 
gum of the styrax tree. 

2732. ^V 5 ! comp. of \ and **]¥, written also *TJ{, imisc. j mastich, 
a gum obtained from the Pistaccia Lentiscus. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2733. ED?) comp. of \ and U? masc, Lat. ladanum. See Herod, 
iii. 107, 112. "A sort of laudanum found adhering to the stem and 



230 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxxvii. 

leaves of certain shrubs, not unlike the honey dew among ourselves ; 
it forms a sort of resin which is burnt as incense, and hence used 
as a perfume." Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2734:. D^?/^ plur. abs. m. act. part, kal of T?il went. 

2735. nnin 1 ? comp. of h, and inf. hiph. of TV parad.8 and 3, 
went down, in hiph. brought down. 

2736.— Yei.26. f£§ subs. m. gain, profit. 

2737. ^p$ 1 plur. pret. jsn'A. of HD3 parad. 13, covered. 

2738— Yer. 27. ETJJW] comp. of Vand pron. afF. 3 pers. sing. 
and J epenth., and 1 plur. pres. kal of "Dtt parad. 4, sold; here 
used as an imperative. 

2739. — Yer. 28. CWHfo Midianites, called Ishmaelites in a pre- 
ceding verse, the former being an Ishmaelitish tribe. 

2740. DHHD plur. of IJlD subs. m. a merchant. See No. 1857. 

2741. tijtfbfj comp. of -j and 3 plur. pres. M of 1[gte, parad. 1, 
cogn. H^p (/rew ow£. 

2742. — Yer. 29. Sffl) and returned, comp. of A and 3 sing. m. 
pres. kal of M^ parad. 10, the ult. vowel shortened in conse- 
quence of the removal of the accent. 

2743. VH^'fltf VIP*.), and rent his garments. This is the first 
notice of this outward demonstration of grief. 

2744. JH|?. 3 sing. m. pres. kal of JHD parad. 3 and 4, fore; and 
VM comp. of pron. afF. and plur. abs. of *"$5 seg. (i) class. 

2745— Yer. 31. ttDQ#J comp. of -1 and 3 pi. pres. fa* of bfif*, 
parad. 3, killed, slaughtered. 

2746. *) /$tp?1 <m(# £A<?y dipped, comp. of -\ and 3 plur. pres. kal 
of /3b, parad. 1, dipped, immersed. 

2747. — Yer. 32. fcO"1|)!n pray ascertain, 2 sing. masc. imp. hiph. 
of *13J parad. 5 and 4, not used in kal ; in hiph. ascertained, recog- 
nised, considered. 

2748.— Yer. 33. I?T.V?3 comp. of -1 and pron afF. and 3 sing. m. 
pres. ^j»A. of the above. 

2749. SHtD fptO lit. (Joseph) £?/ tearing is torn to pieces, is 
assuredly torn in pieces ; fpfcp inf. abs, £«/ and ft'Tfi 3 sing. pret. 
puh. of fcptp, parad. 3. 

2750.— Yer. 34. pg> D^l o*<* jM ow sackcloth. The first 
instance of this practice on record. 



Ver. 25— 36.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 231 

2751. pW subs, niasc. 1. a coarse cloth, made of hair, worn as a 
mark of humiliation or mourning, sackcloth ; 2. a sack. 

2752. VJHM aboitt his loins, comp. of 3 and pron. aff. and 
D^jnS &e fok! Gr. 49. 

2753. /3N»fl*5 lit. et gessit se lugentem, comp. of -\ and 3 sing. 
pres. hith. of /3&, parad. 7, mourned; and /3& subs. m. mourning. 

2754. — Ver. 35. )t2Hiyp to comfort Mm, comp. of 7 and pron. aff. 
and infin. _p'A. of QHJ, parad. 3, see No. 593 ; and DrOHil inf. hith. 
of the same. 

2755. 1Kb*.] comp. of 1 and 3 sing. masc. pres. jpA. of JN£, not 
used in ^#Z; hi pih. }X£j, parad. 3, refused. 

2756. M?k^ to £A<? 0T«fle ; et? aSou, LXX. ; comp. of PI foca/e 
and /&$, in full 7l&£^ subs. masc. 1. a grave, generally a large 
subterraneous chamber or vault, in which niches were hewn out 
to receive coffins, these niches were called ^\\2 *Jn3*V> &F\M houses, 
apartments, sides of the pit ; 2. the abode of departed spirits. 
Gr. aSrjs ; Lat. orcus. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2757. — Ver. 36. MTJBPl the Medanites, called in verse 28, 

t t; ■ 

Midianites, from Medan the son of Abraham, the brother of 
Midian. Arabia Petraea was then inhabited by Ishmael, Medan, 
Midian, and the descendants of Abraham by Keturah. 

2758. Dn^ft- Stt ink !TO& lit. they sold him into Egypt, i. e. 
they carried him into Egypt and sold him. This is what is called 
by grammarians a constructio pregnans. 

2759. ^fcpteS to Potiphar. This word is supposed to mean, 
father of the king, an epithet applied to other officers of Pharaoh, 
see chap. xlv. 8, where it is said that Joseph should be a father to 
Pharaoh. The word ^/ft^tf means father of the king. That the 
Roman senators were called fathers is known to every one. 

2760. D'HP constr. of D^D. 1. a eunuch; 2. any chief officer. 
Ges. supposes this word to be derived from an obsolete word, 
DID, cogn. fe5H$ eradicavit castravit. 

2761. *~\W subs. m. a prince, ruler, chief, captain. 

2762. D^P!|&Pl comp. of -Pi and plur. of H|D subs. masc. 1. a 
slayer, a slaughterman ; 2. a cook, whose office it is to kill the 
meat which he dresses ; 3. hence, a servant of the household, 
perhaps a keeper, and probably an executioner of criminals. Lee's 



232 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxxvii. 36. 

Lex. This officer is called in France, Provost Marshall; and in 
Turkey, Kapidschi Pasha, 

Chap, xxxviii. The ? facts recorded in the beginning of this 
chapter must have happened soon after Jacob's return from Meso- 
potamia. Only twenty-two or twenty-three years intervened 
between the time of Joseph's being sold into Egypt, and Jacob's 
removal to that country. This period is by far too short for 
Judah's begetting three sons and giving them in marriage, and 
for his begetting children with Tamar after Shelah his youngest 
son was marriageable — one of whom, Pherez, had himself two 
sons when Jacob went down to Egypt. Chap.xlvi. 8, 12. Ros. : 
" Nee est infrequens (adds that learned critic) ut voces, tunc, in 
illis diebus, illo tempore, ad tempus aliquo ante intervallo praeter- 
lapsum, aut post futurum designandum adhibeantur." 

2763— Ver. 1. tD*J see No. 1075. 

2764— Ver. 8. "W SpflK t$#h§ NS go in to thy brother's 
wife and marry her (according to thy duty as her former husband's 
immediate younger brother), and raise up seed for thy brother. 
It hence appears that the Levirate marriage was sanctioned among 
the descendants of Abraham, and probably among the Canaanites 
likewise, long before the days of Moses. It was probably one of 
those practices established by consuetudinary usage, and involving 
a point of honour with which it was considered improper rashly 
to interfere. Although Moses lays down certain rules respecting 
the Levirate marriage, it should seem from his shewing in what 
manner it might be avoided, that he wished to discountenance and 
not to encourage the practice. See Introduction, Part I. 

2765. fcfcl in full 8% 2 sing. m. imp. kal of X13 to enter. 

2766. DSy comp. of ) and 2 sing. m. imp. of E2,\ pih., not used 
in kal, contracted the Levirate marriage, from DUP levir, a husband's 
immediate younger brother, who was bound to marry his widow 
if he had died childless ; of which marriage the first-born son was 
regarded as the son and heir of the deceased. It was on this 
account that Onan refused to raise up seed which would be 
accounted as his brother's. 

2767. DjXft comp. of ) and 2 sing. masc. imp. hiph. apoc. of Wp, 
parad. 10. 



Chap.xxxviii.14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 233 

2768.— Ver. 9. PIJH^ W&) perdidit (sunm semen effundendo) 
in terram ; constructio praegnans ; HH^ 3 sing. masc. pret. pih. of 
Plrt&, parad. 3. See Gr. 19. 

2769. '|r0 infin. Jccd constr. of J£0, parad. 5 ; the ult. vowel 
shortened before makkaph. 

2770.— Yer. 10. J?T! comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. pres. Teal of JTV 
was evil, parad. 8 and 4. 

2771. T\l2F\ lit. «/26^ caused him to die, comp. of -) and 3 sing. 
pres. kal of the apoc. pres. hiph. of H^, parad. 10 ; regular form 
J"V£?^ apoc. T\12P, with ult. vowel shortened on account of the 
removal of the accent T)&\ 

2772. — Ver. 11. in?3 his daughter in law, comp. of pron. aff. 1 
and 51^5 subs. fern, a daughter-in-law , a bride, a newly married 
woman, apparently derived from J"H5 or /jS accomplished, con- 
summated. The lexicographers have found difficulty in connecting 
the meanings of this noun and verb. 

2773. ^p 2 sing. fern. imp. kal of Sg^ 5 parad. 8, sat, abode, 
continued. 

2774. JV3 with the prep. 3 omitted. 

2775. P13OTK subs. fern, a widow, from D7K lit. tied, bound-, in 
reference to the tongue, was silent, dumb ; hence applied to the 
silence of grief and solitude — teas solitary, forsaken ; and ffijtfpX 
widoivhood. 

2776. — Yer. 12. nTlPP DrtlW and Judah comforted Imnself, 
when Judah's grief was over; comp. of -1 and 3 sing. masc. pres. 
niph. of DfO, No. 2754. 

2777. TO shearers of, constr. plur. masc. of part. act. kal of TT5, 
parad. 6, cut, sheared; inf. kal lh, and with prep. T^7. 

2778. — Yer. 13. T&H thy father-in-law, comp. of pron. aff. fern. 
3 pers., and *£j)l which is probably the original form of dft a 
father-in-law. 

2779. — Yer. 14. "U1 ^lDft} and put off the garments of her widow- 
hood. It hence appears that in these days a peculiar dress was 
worn by widows as at present. 

2780. ^pJJfi comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. apoc. pres. hiph. of tlD, 
parad. 10 and 4, to retire; in hiph. to remove, put off. 

2781. ^5?¥3 Djrfi lit. erne* covered herself with the veil, a well- 



234 ANALYSIS OF [ Chap, xxxviii. 

known and usual piece of dress worn in such circumstances; the 
article is consequently used. Speaking of a harlot, Petronius 
says, "mulier autem erat operto capite;" which shews that the 
custom was not peculiar to Canaanitish women. See ver. 15. 

2782. DJft apoc. for PlDDl? 3 sing. f. -pres. pih. of !"ID3, parad. 13; 
and JinD5j ver. 15, 3 sing. fern. pret. pih, of the same. 

2783. HpynFfi and became clothed (with other garments), dis- 
guised herself, comp. of A and 3 sing. f. pres. hith. of &1/JJ, parad. 2, 
covered, wrapped up. 

2784. D^y nn$5, npos -rah vrvXtm Alvhv, LXX. ; wear the 
gates of Aenan. According to Rosen, at the entrance to the two 
fountains, which is the preferable view ; see in ver. 21, D^M 

*nT?.D"72 at the two fountains by the way (side). Tamar had 
chosen that situation as favourable to her purpose, because she 
knew that Judah's route to his sheep-shearers lay in that way, 
and because she supposed that, like other travellers, he would stop 
at the fountains to refresh himself. 

2785. nn§3 comp. of 3, and V\T\h, an opening, entrance, door, 
gate. 

2786. — Yer. 15. "131 ilS^D!! and he regarded her as a harlot, 
comp. of -), and pron. aff. fern. 3 pers., and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of 
ifc^n parad. 2, thought, meditated, considered. 

2787.— Yer. 17. !"|Wk 1 sing. pres. pih, of th$ parad. 4, sent; 
and tJ|J7.K^ comp. of pron. aff. **[—, in pause for ^\~ , and inf. kal 
constr. of the same. 

2788. f\yi$ m a pledge; Gr. appafiwv; Lat. arrhabo; from ^TJJ, 
1. mixed; 2. mixed merchandise ; 3. became surety , pledged, 

2789. — Yer. 18. Sttjfth thy signet, comp. of pron. aff. and DHH, 
also Dnin, subs. m. a seal ring-, a ring fastened with an ornamental 
string, or worn on the finger, in which a seal is set, which every 
person of consequence in those times and in that country wore. 
Herod, i. 195, de Babyloniis, crcfrpaylSa 8' eKacrro^ €%€L Kal cr/crjiTTpov. 

2790. ^[TJl^ comp. of *l cop. conj., and pron. aff, and aHS 
subs. m. anything twisted; 1. a lace, thread, or cord; 2. an orna- 
mental string for a seal; from ;T\& twisted; pi. Dv^JlS, ver. 25. 

2791. ^t$fy\ and thy staff, comp. of 1. and pron. aff, and Jl^fo 



Ver. 14—24.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 235 

subs, m., 1. a branch; 2. a stick, a walking stick; from Pl£03, 
parad. 5 and 12, stretched out. 

2792. — Yer. 21. ngHITl the harlot, comp. of -Pi and subs, fern., 
m. £HD lit. consecrata ; one who had consecrated herself to Astarte 
(Venus), by prostituting her body in honour of that goddess. The 
etymology of this word shews that the practice referred to, was 
common in the days of Moses as a part of heathen worship. 

2793.—- Ver. 23. PlS'Pljpfi lit. let her take to her, 3 sing. fern. pres. 
kal of Pip 7 parad. 5 and 4. 

2794. ftj? Pl^Pl} J§ ne simus contemptui sc. ludibrio, lest we 
should be laughed at. 

2795. TVTti 1 plur. pres. kal of PTPl was. 

2796. ft J? comp. of ^ before the tone syllable 7, and M subs, 
masc. contempt. 

2797— Ver. 24. tTBHP! B^Bfej? afow* £fe?e wontf* (afterwards), 
for &?7&$?3 comp. of 3 and prep. •£, and constr. of #7$ ^ra?. 

2798. D*BHPI abs. plur. of DHPJ already analysed. 

2799. PlPOT 3 sing. fern. pret. kal of POT parad. 13, played the 
harlot. 

2800. ^WT\) T\Wt\T\ bring her forth and let her be burnt. It 
hence appears that burning was the punishment of adultery in 
those days, and that Tamar, on account of her being betrothed to 
Shelah, was regarded as an adulteress. It appears likewise, that 
the head of the family had absolute power of inflicting capital 
punishment upon his children and slaves, which power Judah was 
probably desirous to have a just plea for exercising in this case, 
as he seemed anxious to withhold Shelah from Tamar. Michaelis, 
however, thinks that stoning was the punishment of adultery, and 
that burning the dead body afterwards was only in aggravation of 
the punishment; see Joshua vii. 15, where the punishment of 
burning is denounced against the person who should be found 
guilty of " touching the accursed thing ;" it appears, however, from 
ver. 25, that Achan was stoned to death first, and that his body was 
afterwards burnt: see also Dan. vii. 11. 

2801. PftfcOyiP! bring her forth, comp. of pron. aff., and 2 pi. m. 
imp. hiph.ei K£ parad. 8 and 12; and T\WjN2 contr. for HK^D 
fern, of part. hoph. of the same. 



236 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xxxviii. 24. 

2802. ^I^Tfl comp. of ), and 3 sing. fern. pres. niph. of #iW 
parad. S, burned. 

2803.— Ver. 25. tt^Tthjl comp. of H, and f. form of DKPl No. 2789. 

2804.-— Ver.26. ttfijh*? comp. of £ and pron. aff. H~ andfijn, 
ground form of TtyH, inf. constr. /ca/ of JTT parad. 8 and 4, knew. 

2805. — Ver. 27. H^H/ her bringing forth, comp. of pron. aff. and 
FH /, ground form of T\\7, inf. constr. hat of \T parad. 8. 

2806. — Ver. 28. T"|JM nt - that he put out hand, i.e. that one of 
the twins put out his hand. 

2807. Ife^pl?! and bound, comp. of •), and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal 
of 1$0 parad. 4. 

2808. *}& for ^n Wft a thread of scarlet colour; *)& subs. m. 
scarlet, anything of a scarlet colour. 

2809. — Ver. 29. ^^5? ht. <zs Ae caused to return, i. e. as he drew 
in, comp. of 5? and part. m. hiph. of ^l&P parad 10. 

2810. Y*T& Y2& FfinSS'ilti how hast thou burst forth t upon 
thyself be the (consequences of this) breach. It appears that the 
midwife wished to justify herself against having been instrumental 
to the birth of the one before the other, to the prejudice of the 
rights of primogeniture of the later born. 

2811. Wl? 2 sing. m. pret. kal of pi? parad. S, broke, burst 
forth; and PT|), in pause for Y*)%, m. a breach. 

2812. — Ver. 28. ITTT, in pause for TT\\, Zerah, i.e. rising, or 
appearance, supposed to have been so called because he made his 
appearance first. 

2813. — Chap.xxxix. 1. TT-lil teas carried down, lit. was caused 
to go down, 3 sing. pret. hoph. of TT parad. 8 and S, went down ; 
and ^lrn'lin comp. of pron. aff., and 3 plur. masc. pret. hiph. of 
the same. 

2814. *injj?*J a?id bought him, comp. of •) and pron. aff., and 
3 sing. m. pres. kal of fOp. 

2815. — Ver. 2. Hv¥?? &?*&$ lit. a man causing to prosper (every- 
thing which he undertook) ; this word is often followed by 13^ 
his way, and SZFfl H vV5 ^^ is a man with whom everything 
prospers; part. hiph. m. of Pi 7^ parad. 4, 1. passed over a river; 
2. passed over to anything; 3. reached the object of ones' wishes; 
4. prospered. 



Chap.xxxix.15.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 237 

2816. — Ver.4. fn^! comp. of •), and 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of 
n*1^ parad. 3, not used in kal; in pih. acted as a servant, served. 

2817. WTfi&Q an d gave him charge (over his house), comp. of -1 
and pron. aff., and 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of ^pj^ parad. 1 ; in kal, 
visited; in hiph. caused to visit for the purpose of examining or in- 
specting, hence set over. Visit and examine, seem to have formerly had 
the same meaning in our own language ; and according to our church 
law phraseology, visitor and examinator are synonymous terms. 

2818. 'b'&'bl) sup. Igte after 7^, and everything (which) 
was his ; see the 1!&i$ supplied in the following verse, compare 
lJohniii. 12. See Glass. lib. i. Tractii. Canon xxv. p. 171. 

2819. — Yer.5. n313 Messing of, constr. of np^5 subs, fern. 

2820. — Yer.7. H^?^ lie, comp. of PI parag., and 2 sing. m. imp 
hat of *2!2$ parad. 1. 

2821. — Yer.9. ")%) 7H-3 *lU^&? he himself (is) not greater in the 
house than I (i.e. he hath conveyed his power and authority in the 
management of his house to me), and hath withheld nothing from 
me but thee, in that thou art his wife : quod dicit, ne te quidem 
mihi prohibuit in rebus domesticis, sed in hoc te mihi prohibuit, 
quatenus es ipsius uxor, ne te attingam. Ros. 

2822.— Ver.ll. Pl-JPl DVH3 is an elliptical expression for DVH? 
T\\y\ Pl?3 on this or that day, on a certain day. See Judges xviii. 4. 

2823. iMKSft see No. 186. 

2824. — Yer. 12. ^Plg^nFfi and took hold of him, comp. of A and 
pron. aff., and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of &^5Pl. 

2825. D3*5 and fled, comp. of •), and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of DU 
to fee, parad. 10. 

2826. — Yer. 13. WjW'TlJ ivhen she saio, comp. of 3 and pron. aff. 
fern., and inf. constr. kal of PlfcO saw. 

2827.— Yer. 14. HH^ WN7 ad domesticos suos. 

2828. fc^50 supply ( m y husband) hath brought. 

2829. DPIX? to mock, insult, comp. of 7, and inf. pih. of pfi¥ 
parad. 3. 

2830. — Yer. 15. *?¥*$ wiYA me, fosaYfe me, comp. of pron. aff. and 
?¥& ground form of 7X5$ a szcfe, and used as a prep, marking 
contiguity, beside = by-side. 



238 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xxxix.16. 

2831. — Ver. 16. HSJifi and left, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. fern. apoc. 
pres. hiph. of TO). See No. 261. 

2832. — Yer. 18. ^"Trjif) when I lifted up, raised, comp. of 3 and 
pron. afT. 1 pers. and infin. hiph. of DT), parad. 10 and 2. 

2833.— Yer. 20. t)DV ^K lit. ft* /on/s of Joseph, i.e. Joseph's 
master. 

2834. "lllDn JV5 lit. Ao2^e of roundness, round house, a guard- 
house or prison of a round form; comp. of -Jl and ^JlD, only used 
here and in the next chapter, probably because this word is only 
applicable to Egyptian prisons. 

2835. H1P& read *!*?& constr. plur. of 'VDX one hound, a 
prisoner, from "lptf, parad. 7 and 4, hound; pass. part. M "VlD^, 
and plur. D^Dg/ 

2836. — Chap. xl. 1. HD^Q constr. of Hp^fo m. one who gives to 
drink, a cup-hearer ; pi. D*pfe^§ hiph. part, of HD^ drank; in hiph. 
gave to drink. See Introduction, Part I. 

2837. HiD^n the haker, comp. of -H and part. act. masc. kal of 
ilStf, parad. 7 and 13, haked. See Introduction, Part I. 

2838.— Yer. 2. I^fpft comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of SjJJJ 
parad. 1, was angry. 

2839. VDHD comp. of pron. aff. 3 pers. and pi. of D^D, Gr. 49. 
See No. 2760. T 

2840. — Yer. 5. "U1 Jl^fiS? WNl man (each man) according to 
the interpretation of his dream, i. e. each man his dream as it was 
subsequently interpreted. 

2841. JliniS^ comp. of 5 and subs. masc. interpretation; plur. 
Q^l^n?, from *lfi3, parad. 4, interpreted ; part. act. £a£ 1H3 an 
interpreter , and 3 sing. m. pres. kal "lFli3\ 

2842. — Yer. 6. fi*$5?T lit. angry, distressed, in loio spirits, plur. 
m. act. part, kal of S]§T, parad. 3, was angry, etc. 

2843. — Yer. 7. EFJfl lit. ^z*«7^ overcast, gloomy. 

2844. ^lipD refofe, 2 plur. m. imp. pih. of ^50, parad. 4. 

2845. — Yer. 9. jiD^ # t^W, subs. m. seg. (a) class. 

2846. — Yer. 10. D^B? hranches, plur. abs. of ^1^ m. a hranch, 
from IH^ hoisted, twined together, like the branches of a vine. 
Kamets immoveable, as if compensating for a dagesh in "1, e.g. 



Chap. xl. 14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 239 

2847. nrHM ffift) lit. and it as budding, i. e. and it appeared 
to bud ; comp. of 5 and fern, of FH3 act. part, kal of PH3, par ad. 
3 and 4. 

2848. MSp ^0 /? its flower came forth, 3 sing. fern. pret. kal of 
rbti, parad. 2 and 13. 

Y849. iTCJ comp. of pron. aff. 3 pers. fern, and Vi in ^11 W3, 
ground form of VJ m. a flower. Gr. 115. 

2850. "Ul ^7^3(1 ^5 clusters brought the grapes to maturity, 
3 plur. pret. fojo/j. of /E^|l, parad. 1, boiled; in hiph. caused to boil, 
matured, brought to maturity. 

2851. yr&ZWX comp. of pron. aff. pi. of hb&X, in pi. n^ljft? 
or rVlz3i£^$ a cluster or bunch of grapes ox floivers. 

2852. ' D^g ^rap^ plur. of 33$? m. 

2853. — Yer. 11. Dl3} comp. of ) and D13 subs. m. a drinking cup. 

2854. "01 Dft& tOftEM and I squeezed them into the cup. Before 
the time of Psammetichus the Egyptians neither used wine for 
drinking nor for libations, in consequence of their having been 
taught by their priests to believe that it was a pestiferous inven- 
tion of a malignant deity. Hence Pharaoh's drink was the fresh 
and unfermented juice of the grape. See Introduction, Part I. 

2855. bPl^XJ comp. of \ and 1 sing. pres. kal of tD W, parad 3, 
only used in this place ; cogn. tOllD Chald. squeezed. 

2856. — Ver. 13. ^3"/^ lit. to thy base, position, station; 7j? as 
frequently elsewhere, and particularly after verbs of motion, is 
here synonymous with 7tf . 

2857. ^[53 comp. of pron. aff. and J3, in full p|)> ground form of 
j3 1. the base upon which anything is supported; 2. the hole into 
which the mast of a ship is fastened; 3. a place, situation, office. 
See Gr. 114 and 115. 

2858. ji&^On b|D^fo3 lit. after the manner the first, i. e. as 
formerly. See BSBfo, No. 1519. 

2859— Yer. 14. DK »| but, only. 

2860. *3tn5J comp. of pron. aff. and j epenth. and 2 sing. masc. 
pret. kal of 15?, parad. 4, remembered, here used imperatively ; 
and 2 sing. pret. hiph. with pron. aff. 1 pers. ^PH-??'?- 

2861. ^fitfVIPfi lit. and cause bring me out, comp. of \ and pron. 



240 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xl. 14. 

aff. 1 pers. and 2 sing. m. pret. hiph. of KW parad. 8 and 12, used 
here as an imperative. 

2862. — Ver.15. *£Q35 itf~*2 lit. for being stolen, I was stolen, 
for I was indeed stolen ; k\ott{} e/cXdirrjv, LXX. ; Hty imp. puh. 
and *££l£! 1 sing. pret. puh. of *2^, parad. 1, stole; Vulg. Eng. nab. 

2863. "TlM into this dungeon, *3 here contracted for -Jl?. 

2864.- — Ver. 16. ")%) ^H ^JpD baskets of white (bread) wjoo^ my 
Aeae/ ; ** pD constr. plur. of 7D, ground form 7/D m. a basket for 
holding bread. 

2865. *Hn subs, m., only used here, white (bread). 

2866. — Ver. 19. ("OHI and shall hang, comp. of ) and 2 sing. m. 
pret. hat, parad. 13, hanged. Hanging does not appear to have 
been a capital punishment in these times, but only an aggravation. 
The dead body was thus ignominiously exposed, and became the 
food of birds and beasts of prey. 

2867— Ver. 20. fiT?!! (the day of Pharaoh's) being born, i.e. 
the anniversary of Pharaoh's birthday ; inf. constr. hoph. of t7\ 

2868. ^l/iriS^i but forgot him, comp. of ■) and pron. afF. and 
3 sing. m. pres. hot of H^^, parad. 4, forgot. 

2869.— Chap. xli. 1. DW DTti# lit. two years days, DWs added 
to shew that the two years were fully completed; so Macc.i. 29, 
teal fiera hvco err) rj/jiepojv airea-TeCkev 6 (SacrLkevs. 

2870. ^SOn the river, always applied to the Nile, comp. of Jl art. 
and *\W, an Egyptian word signifying a river. 

2871 .—Ver. 2. riSj? plur. fern. part. act. kal of nSjJ parad. 2 and 13, 
went up. 

2872. rtfi} fern. plur. of HjJ/atr, etc. 

2873. n^n? plur. fern, of X^| /a*; according to Ges. from 
K^5> cogn. rTlS cw£ (with the teeth), ate-, hence in the derivative 

fat. See another view in Prof. Lee's Lex. 

2874. nyjflffft and they fed, comp. of •} and 3 plur. fern. pres. 
kal of TX%)fed. 

2875. ^PIXS comp. of 5 including the art., and T\# an Egyptian 
word, any green herb growing in marshy land, Nile grass. 

2876. — Ver. 3. fii|TT thin, lean, plur. fern, of pi, ground form 
pp\ compare verb pj?J beat or ground small. 



Chap. xli. 9.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 241 

2877. rtnfttffil and they stood, comp. of •] and 3 plur. fern. pres. 
hal of *TtoJJ parad. 2, stood. 

2878. ng^-Sg ty fe fc> o/, «fye o/, constr. of iTSfe* subs. fern. 

2879. — Ver. 4. nj?5Xn5 <2ft<# devoured, comp. of -1 and 3 pi. fern, 
pres. hal of 75^ parad. 7. 

2880. pp*3 comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. pres. hal of W parad. 8. 

2881.— Ver. 5. |# W J comp. of -1 and 3 sing. m. pres. hal of [#*, 
parad. 8, slept. 

2882. D v5^ irreg. plur., from 1T?3&? fern, aw ear o/ com, a 
stream; from 73^, parad. 1, 1. M?era£; 2. weft£ wj9, sprang up like 
an ear of corn, or like water from a fountain; hence 3. flowed. 

2883. ^H^ njM ofl owe sta/&, comp. of 3 and PlJD m. a cane, 
reed, stalk. 

2884.— Ver. 6. WWl?^ out %/ita? o/, or by, comp. of 1 and 
plur. fern. pass. part, of ^H^. 

2885. DHD lit. t6"/*«£ ts before, the east, the east wind. See No. 217. 

2886. nin^V lit. springing, or growing up, plur. fern, of )!??¥, 
part. act. £«/ of ftttt, parad. 4. 

2887. — Ver. 7. fttj^irfl and swallowed up, comp. of -\ and 3 pi. 
fern. pres. hal of y?|l, parad. 4. 

2888. ni^n comp. of -H and fern. plur. of tih ft full. 

2889. — Ver. 8. IPlVl DJ?.§j?J that his spirit teas disturbed, comp. 
of -) and 3 sing. fern. pres. niph. of D$£|) 5 parad. 3, 1. struck; 2. em- 
pelled, moved, disturbed; not used in £o£ 

2890. ^t^H constr. plur. of D^tpTl, not found in the sing., 
sacred scribes, writers of the hieroglyphic characters, compare tD^Pl 
engraved, probably an Egyptian word. The Egyptian priests 
were divided into three classes; 1. 7rpo(pi)rac; 2. lepoypa/jL/xaTeL^, 
those whose business it was to write and interpret the hieroglyphic 
characters; 3. veco/copoi, keepers of the temples. 

2891.— Ver. 9. ')!) »Jfc$ WlplTnN this day I call my sins to my 
remembrance. This refers, either to his ungrateful treatment of 
Joseph, or to the offence against his master which was the cause of 
his imprisonment. 

2892. T3!& part. m. sing. hiph. of *DT, parad. 4, remembered. 

16 



242 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xlL 

2893. — Yer. 12. ^SPJl and we related, comp. of •) and 1 plur. 
pres. pih. of ^iSp, parad. 4. 

2894. — Yer. 13. l^Pl he restored, i. e. he declared that I should 
be restored. This is the general understanding of this word, but 
Storr. p. 40, supposes the word HJ?^5 understood, see verse 9, in 
which case this word and H 7ft following will have their usual 
meaning. 

2895.— Yer. 14. ^y) for ^Pl^Tl lit. and they caused him to 
run, i.e. brought him quickly; comp. of ) and pron. aff. 3 pers. 
sing, m., and 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of YT), parad. 2 and 10, to run. 

2898. n^^\) and shaved himself, comp. of 5 and 3 sing. m. pres. 
pih. of rH|, parad. 4. The Egyptians did not allow their beards 
to grow like the Hebrews, excepting in seasons of mourning or 
captivity. Herod, ii. 36. 

2897. — Yer. 16. "HJJ/5 lit. beyond me, it is not in my power. 
See No. 1250. 

2898.— Yer. 19. Tihlpoor, i.e. lean, plur. of TT?% fern, of 71, 
ground form 77^, see //I. 1. teas weak, languid, thin, lean; 
2. vacillated, tottered from weakness. 

2899.— Yer. 21. n^jT^X rtitfhJjfl lit. and they went into their 
inside. 

2900. Hlljnp comp. of pron. aff. and 51p 3 ground form of ^lP., 
masc. the inward part, the entrails of an animal, etc. 

2901 . JTVD was knoivn, 3 sing. m. pret. niph. of JT7J, parad. 8 and 4. 
2902. — Yer. 23. T\)f2T$ plur. fern., only used here, dry, blighted. 

In Aramaic Kft}^ or ^^V signifies a rock; hence the ears are 
called arid, and such as might be expected to grow on an arid or 
rocky soil. 

2903. — Yer. 27. flipTl lit. the empty, as opposed to the full 
ears, comp. of PI art. and plur. of fiP^., fern, of pF% contr. lH, 
empty, worthless. 

2904.— Yer. 28. ftXTT} id. qu. IIKTl, 3 sing. pret. hiph. of H^T) 
saw, in hiph. caused to see, shewed. 

2905. — Yer. 29. J?5|? subs. m. plenty, abundance. 

2906.— Yer. 30. Pl3$l 3 sing. m. pret. kal of YO& forgot. 

2907. Pi ?J1 and shall consume, comp. of ) and 3 sing. m. pret. 
pih. of Tw^, parad. 13. 



Ver. 12—40.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 243 

2907*. — Ver. 31. JHV shall be known, 3 sing. m. pret. niph. of 
JTT, parad.8 and 4. 

2908.— Ver. 32. TJ1 MUS^I TjQ oimZ as /or die repetition of the 
dream, infin. w?}?7i. of njfej^ parad. 13, repeated. 

2909. [153 fixed, established, cwtain, part. w?jt?A. masc. of M, 
parad. 10. 

2910. ^irtb/M comp. of 1 conj., and part. jw'A. m. of ^Hfo, parad. 3 
and 4, hastened. 

2911. — Ver. 33. tf*V 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. of nX*H, used as an 
imperative. See Gr. 115. 

2912. ffti discerning, intelligent, prudent, part. m}?A. m. of T3 
or pa. 

2913. $Tn*JP*} and let him plane him, comp. of ), see No. 51, and 
pron. aff., and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of T\ s \&, parad. 11, to place. 

2914. — Ver. 34. DHf?§ P iur - °f *^p? subs. m - one sei over > an 
officer ; from lp|), Gr. 74. 

2915. &?©ni comp. of 1. and 3 sing. m. pret. pih., only used in 
this place; Lat. quintavit, took the fifth part. 

2916. — Ver. 35. ^H^V!! comp. of ) and 3 plur. masc. pres. kal of 
13^5 parad. 4. 1. heaped up ; 2. treasured up. 

2917. *D cfeflw (corn), separated from the chaff; compare Tl^l 
cleaned. 

2918. flJHlrT ^M ht. under the hand of Pharaoh, i.e. that it 
may continue in Pharaoh's granaries. 

2919.— Ver. 36. f^xS }Hp$S PVPfllit. and let it be for a deposit 
for the land, i. e. and let it be stored up for the people of the land. 
|*H557 comp. of 7 and jHp$ subs. m. a deposit, from ^p£- 

2920. rPDJl 3 sing. fern. pres. niph. of T\l^, parad. 3, cut, cut 
off, destroyed. 

2921. tt^p^D shall we find, comp. of 5 interrog. part, and 1 pi. 
pres. kal of tfX'b found, parad. 12. 

2922.— Ver. T 39. JHin infin. hiph. of JTT 

2923.— Ver. 40. W^| W\ ^%h#\ lit. according to thy mouth 
(order) all my people shall dispose themselves, i. e. all my pepole 
shall be subject to thy orders. 

2924. p$\ 3 sing. m. pres. kal of p£0, parad. 5. 1. joined; 2. set 
in order; and intrans. ordered or regidated one's self. 

16* 



244 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xli. 

2925. ")%) &55I1 as regards the throne, will I be greater than 
thou, I shall retain my royal dignity ; comp. of -!H and &53 1 m 
Chald. ^51^ a throne. 

2926 — Yer. 42. inySlD his ring, comp. of pron. aif. and ftj?3&, 
ground form of fij£3?? fern, a seal ring for making impressions, 
from J73?? sank in mud or any soft substance. The possession of 
the king's ring was an evidence of the delegation of royal authority. 
When Alexander, on his death bed, gave his ring to Perdiccas, it 
was regarded as an evidence of his wish that Perdiccas should 
succeed him. 

2927. &^"H33 garments of fine linen. As dresses of this ma- 
terial were only worn by persons of the highest rank, the bestowal 
of this present by the king must have been regarded as a mark of 
special distinction. 

2928. &2^ 1. white marble; 2. white linen, a very fine kind of 
linen, used for the dresses of priests and persons of high rank. 
See Prof. Lee's Lex. Eos. derives WW from Schensch, an Egyptian 
word. 

2929. 15*1 a chain, or other ornament hung about the neck ; 
Prof. Lee's Lex. : in full T31, constr. of TS1. 

2930 Yer. 43. ^3*f_1 and caused him to ride, comp. of -\ and 

3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of ^3^ parad. 2, rode ; whence H3IH2? a 
chariot. 

2931. T\^WT\ 1^53^3 i n the second chariot, i.e. in the chariot 
which immediately followed the king's in state processions, etc., 
and which was occupied by the person who was second in rank 
in the kingdom. 

2932. ^13^ °ou) the head, supposed to be an Egyptian word, 
aperek. 

2933. prOI, supply jrO, and in giving he gave, or in setting he 
set, comp. of \ and infin. abs. kal of JJHj. 

2934.— Yer. 44. ")T\ Pljng *JK / (am) Pharaoh (king) yet with- 
out thee no one in all the land of Egypt shall raise hand or foot, 
i.e. no one shall undertake anything of public importance — a 
proverbial expression. 

2935. — Yer. 45. H3J?S ft3$5? an Egyptian name, supposed to 
mean, Saviour of the age, i. e. the preserver of that generation. 



Ver. 41—56.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 245 

2936. jft or Jltf, an Egyptian word, On, i.e. light, the sun. On 
is universally understood to be Heliopolis. 

2937. — Ver. 47. f^KPl VfyN\ and the land made, i. e. produced. 

2938. D'¥2p|7? in handfids, in great abundance ; comp. of 7 and 
B*¥£@ plur. abs. of YOp the hand, a handful. D^V3? here is 
formed irregularly. 

2939.— Ver. 48. "Ml ^JflVrnB' h$t and he stored up within 
every city, the food (grain) which had been raised (in the fields) 
around it. 

2940. f^p?1 comp. of -J and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of Y5p } parad. 1, 
collected. 

2941. — Ver. 49. ^SHf!! comp. of -1 and 3 sing. masc. pret. kal of 
*DX, No. 2916. 

2942. — Ver. 50. \?\ there was born to Joseph (offspring), viz. 
two sons, 3 sing. m. pret. puh. of *TT, parad. 8. 

2943. — Ver. 51. Pl&SOO Manasseh, i.e. ivhich causeth me to forget, 
of the form of the pih. part, of HJ20 forgot', and *JG?0 comp. of pron. 
aff. 1 pers., and 3 sing. m. pret. pih. of the same, hath made me to 
forget, parad. 5 and 13. 

2944. vM my afflictive toils, comp. of pron. aff. 1 pers., and /ftJJ 
masc. 1. labour; 2. labour accompanied with sorrow or vexation. 

2945. — Ver. 52. D^SNt Ephraim, a dual form in pause, double 
fruitfulness, from TXT&bore (fruit), parad. 3 and 13; and *IH§il hath 
made me fruitful ', comp. of pron. aff. and 3 sing. masc. pret. hiph. 
of the same. 

2946. — Ver. 53. P0 v3Pl and were ended, comp. of -1 and 3 plur. 
fern. pres. kal of PP3, parad. 13. 

2947. — Ver. 54. Pl3\?PlPfl and began, comp. of •) and 3 plur. fern. 
pres. pih. of 7/Pl, No. 556. 

2948. Eft? in pause for DP!7 bread, Gr. 31. 

2949. ni¥^ri the lands, the neighbouring nations. 

2950. — Ver. 55. ^JD.P! comp. of •) and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal of 
iJD, parad. 2 and 3, suffered from famine ; from iJH famine. 

2951. — Ver. 56. 73~T\& S|DV HHS?! and Joseph opened all the 
(supply D^FD storehouses) which (were) among them. 

2952. , 1S^! and sold, comp. of •} and 3 sing. masc. pres. kal of 
*0?W, denom. of *)^$? a breaking, also a thing broken — corn, because 



246 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xli. 56. 

ground in the mill; Gr. fivXofckacrTos, broken in the mill; so a/crr/, 
1. broken ; 2. corn, from dyco, to break ; hence "DtP dealt in corn, 
bought or sold it; and ^5*^ but/, 2 phir. m. imp. kal of the same. 
Chap. xlii. 2. 

2953. pjnjl and was strong, prevailed, comp. of •} and 3 sing. m. 
pres. kal of DTP!, parad. 2. 

2954. — Chap. xlii. 1. ^itf'Vlfi 2 plur. m. (in pause) of pres. hith. 
of PlfcH saw, looked-, in A^A. looked at one another. 

2955— Ver. 2. 13$, No. 2952. 

2956. 'TFl go down, 2 plur. m. imp. kal of TV, parad. 8 and 3. 

2957. PCrO 1 ) aftJ we sAa// live, that we may live, comp. of ) and 
1 plur. pres. kal of P^Pf, parad. 13. 

2958. JTlft!) 1 plur. pres. £aZ of ffift to die. 

2959. — Ver. 4. ^fcHp 4 . comp. of pron. affix and J epenth. and 
3 sing. m. pres. kal of iOD id. qu. iTSj happened, befell; and J"HD 
plur. fern. act. part, kal of the same ; ver. 29. 

2960. pD^ subs. m. injury, accidental death. Root obsolete. 

2961. — Ver. 5. D*&$Pl ^ifi^ lit, in the midst of the goers, i.e. 
along with others who went down in a company or caravan, 
to purchase corn in Egypt. 

2962. — Ver. 6. ^y®T\ the ruler, governor, comp. of -Pi and 
&?$ a word of Chald. origin; cf. jteSl^ rider; Turk, sultan. 

2963. TJ^ftPl ^a£ caused to sell, that gave authority for selling, 
and settled the quantity and price in regard to strangers. 

2964. D*33*1 and recognised them, comp. of •} and pron. aff. 3 pi. 
and 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of "D3, parad. 5 and 4, teas strange, was 
strange in reference to anything, was ignorant ; in pih. treated as a 
stranger, rejected; in pih. and hiph. treated one as a stranger, received 
hospitably ; hence, oiuned as a friend or acquaintance, recognised ; 
in hith. behaved one's self as a stranger, disguised one's self, dis- 
sembled. See Storr., p. 44. 3 plur. pret. hiph. ^TSPl, and 3 sing, 
masc. pres. hith. "I^ft 4 . 

2965. T\WD harsh things, harshly, pi. fern, of fl^D masc. The 
fern. plur. is frequently used in Hebrew, where the neut. plur. is 
used in Lat. and Gr. 

2966. — Ver. 9. D*y{ft6 spies, plur. m. part. pih. of aH, denom. 
of 7-3*1 the foot; footed one, traced one' y s footsteps as a spy. 



Chap.xlii.21.] THE BOOK OF GEXESIS. 247 

2967. r\V")J?. constr. of nVTJ? lit. nakedness, defenceless condition, 
or perhaps, iceahiess, on account of the famine. 
2968— Ver. 11. Dj> % 5 2 plur. m. pret. leal of N 4 i!l. 

2969. W% all of us, conip. of pron. aff. and 7%, in full //%, 
ground form of a3. 

2970. D^5, in fuU &Y3, plur. of |*£ also written J3, rmJ 3 frw, 
jWf. See No. 63. 

2971.— Ver. 13. D^f contr. for D^. 

2972. — Ver. 15. ^fi3 J ?j> in pause for ^fi^fi, 2 plur. masc. pres. 
niph. of fh3 par ad. 3, explored, tried, proved. 

2973. NDSTDK *3 lit. to on the coming of 

2974. — Ver. 16. ^Hptffi 2 plur. m. imp. niph. of *&&, parad. 7 
and 4, bound ; and ^DfcT 3 sing. m. pres. niph., ver. 19. 

2975. DJJ-1K T\t$$7\ lit. wA^Aer fo-wtf* (is) with you. 

2976. *3 njn|) *ilj the meaning is, It is as true as Pharaoh 
liveth that ye are spies, by the life of Pharaoh ye are spies. 

2977. — Ver. 17. £)DX*5 and he collected, gathered, i.e. put them 
into ward; comp. of -) and 3 sing. m. pres. leal of *p$, parad. 7. 

2978.— Ver. 18. NT »3M lit. J a fearer, were there such a word, 
i. e. I fear. Joseph wishes to convince his brethren that he is not 
acting tyrannically or capriciously, but under a sense of duty; and 
that he is under the influence of the fear of God, who takes 
cognizance of right and wrong. 

2979.— Ver. 19. &31??Efc JV3? lit. in the house of your prison, 
i.e. in the house (place) where ye have been confined for the last 
three days. 

2980. D^lgEftp comp. of grave pron. afT. 2 pers. and constr. of 
*lH2w*ti subs. m. what guards, a prison, from *\fc& guarded. 

2981. p3S?1 *"Ov? lit. corn of famine, i.e. corn for allaying the 
famine. p^lH subs, m, famine, hunger. Root ^JH. 

2982.— Ver. 20. a&Nft comp. of 1 and 3 plur. pres. niph. of p$ 
supported, sustained, confirmed, parad. 7. 

2983.— Ver. 21. TA DW*5 %$ we are indeed guilty (bearing 
the consequences of our guilt) concerning our brother, ichose 
anguish of soul ice saw but disregarded when he implored our 
mercy, therefore is this distress come upon us. 



248 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xlii. 

2984. /%#, used as an adv., indeed, certainly. 

2985. D*£g*« plur. m. of DgW, Gr. 74, m. guilty. Root D^K 
guilt. 

2986. ]"H¥ constr. of PH^ id. qu. *"!¥ distress ; the middle radical 
•) being omitted, the penult, vowel is immoveable. Compare "flX 
fo foW, tighten. 

2987. *lijnnri|l comp. of 3 prep, and pron. aff. and infin. hith. 
of ph, parad. 2, acfee? favourably ; in A^A. supplicated favour, or 
Merc?/. 

2988 —Yer. 22. ^tOllfl 2 plur. pres. kal of Ktpn, parad. 2 and 
12, sinned. 

2989. &^*V!J /s required, 3 sing. m. pret. m}?A. of B^TJ, parad. 3. 

2990. — Ver. 23. f* vfoPl *Ae interpreter, comp. of -Jl and part. 
hiph. masc. of J^7, parad. 10. 1. to twist, to bend; 2. to hoist (the 
mouth), to mock; 3. ft? fows£ (one's discourse), to speak obscurely, 
enigmatically; 4. to twist or turn (the language of others), to 
interpret. Storr, p. 44. 

2991. — Ver. 24. ^D*1 and turned round, comp. of •) and 3 sing. 
m. pres. kal of MD, parad. 6. 

2992. lbW)_ comp. of -)_ and 3 sing. masc. pres. kal of ^DJtf, 
parad. 7 and 4, bound. 

2993. — Yer. 25. DH v3 their vessels, sacks, comp. of pron. grave 
aff. and plur. of v5, masc. a measure, a vessel, etc. Compare 7^3 
to contain. 

2994 —Yer. 26. Elti$ their corn, comp. of pron. aff. and 15^ 
ground form of *13^ corn. 

2995. Diypn their asses, comp. of pron. aff. and plur. of *\fotl 
an ass. Gr. 49. 

2996.— Yer. 27. JP&5 comp. of -3, contr. for .ft? and }pft, m. 
a />fce w/^re one passes the night, a lodging-house ; from J 1 )/ or J v 

2997. ifihjjtf?^ te sac&, comp. of the pron. aff. ') and fr!"!ft£K, 
ground form of HrM?K f. a sack, so called from its being extended, 
when it is being filled, and full, from i"in?? extended; constr. plur. 
nhttfttf, and with a pron. aff. WKn^^chap. xliii. 18, 22; only 
used in Genesis. 



Ver. 21— 38.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 249 

2998. — Ver. 28. ^JBJ^PI is returned, has been returned, 3 sing. m. 
pret. hoph. of *$&, parad. 10. 

2999. ")X\ TVl'n*!) lit. an d they trembled man to his brother, i. e. 
and they turned to one another in terror; comp. of •) and 3 plur. 
pres. kal of Tift, parad. 2 and 3, feared, trembled, was in terror. 

3000— Ver. 29. nhj-H, see No. 2959. 

3001.— Ver. 33. T\^T\ leave, 2 plur. masc. imp. hiph. of £M, 
No. 261. 

3002.— Ver. 34. HHpfl p^H «w J traverse ye the land, for the 
purposes of trade ; " emendi licentiam habeatis," Vulg. ; which 
appears to express the meaning very correctly, ^nilpft, in pause 
for Vttpfl, 2 plur. m. pres. kal of Tip, No. 1857. 

3003. — Ver. 35. D^p^p emptying, plur. m. of hiph. part. m. of 
p^ to empty, parad. 2 and 11. 

3004. ^YHV a bundle, subs. masc. a tying up, a thing tied up, a 
bundle, from TTV bound up ; cogn. *tf¥, plur. HI TV- 

3005— Ver. 36. DflSs^ 2 plur. m. pret. jpft. of h'2&, parad. 1; 
in kal, was childless ; in pih. made childless. 

3005* — Ver. 37. JVptt £/*ow s^aft (mayest) slay, 2 sing. m. pres. 
hiph. of rflft to die, parad. 10. 

3006. ^lUX^S comp. of pron. afF. and f epenth. and 1 sing. pres. 
7«joA. of $03 to ^o. What Reuben here says, seems to imply his 
belief that his father had suspicions that Benjamin might incur 
danger from his brothers. 

3007. n^H give, comp. of T\ parag. and 2 sing. m. imp. kal of 
1^0 gave, parad. 5 ; without the T\ parag. which takes the accent, 
\r\. Gr.74. 

3008. — Ver. 38. flip (is) dead, part, kal act. m. of TWfc, parad. 10. 
The regular form of this word, according to the parad., would 
beDft. 

3009. 7R0. is left, 3 sing. pret. niph. of 10, parad. 3 and 4. 

3010. ^PlK^p 1 ! deest DK, Glass, vol. i. p. 523; and if, etc., comp. 
of ) and pron. aff. and 3 sing. masc. pret. kal of SOD id. qu. ("HP, 
No. 2959, befell, happened. 

3011 Dnn^rTt £Am s/^a/Z ye 5nV?<7 cfoww, i.e. ye shall be the 
occasion of bringing down; comp. of \ and 2 plur. m. pres. hiph. of 
11 , parad. 3 and 8 ; in &aZ, descended ; in A«pA. caused to descend. 



250 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xlii.38. 

3012. TQ^ my hoary hairs, comp. of pron. aff. and Pft^ fern. 
whiteness (of the hair), old age, id. qu. ^fc?. 

3013. p^3 in (with) sorrow, comp. of 3 and p-£, masc. sorrow, 
from n^, not used in kal; afflicted, pained, parad. 8 and 13. 

3014. — Chap.xliii. 3. "$Pl Ity?) in solemnly declaring declared, 
i. e. made a solemn declaration ; ""J^P! infin. hiph., and HJ7P1 in full 
*^S& 3 sing. pret. A/^A. of I^IJ? ; not used in A;a?, except in the 
part, to be a icitness ; in hiph. called to witness, declared in presence 
of ivitnesses , solemnly declared. 

3015. — Ver. 4. ^X?\. comp. of pron. aff. and ffl already analysed, 
lit. thy being, thou art, opposed to WK in the next verse. 

3016. Pn*lJ comp. of PI parag., and 1 plur. m. pres. kal of Tl\ 

3017. PHlSlM comp. of Pi parag., and 1 plur. pres. kal of ^DK*. 
See No. 2952! 

3018.— Ver. 6. DfljnD 2 plur. m. pret. hiph. of JftH parad. 6, 
and 2, 3,4; in £«/, was m7; in A«}?A. eftV? m7, treated ill. 

3019.— Ver. 7. Sfettf inf. abs. kal of 7K.# parad. 3, enquired. 

3020. "U1 1 /7M1 lit. awe? we told him according to the mouth of 
these words, i. e. we gave him true replies to these questions. 

3021. JTI3 JZITl! ht. in knowing did we know, had we any means 
of knowing, the former comp. of T\ interrog. part, and inf. abs. 
kal of JTlJ parad. 8 and 4 ; and JPt) 1 plur. m. pres. kal of the same. 

3022.— -Ver. 8. PlPi/?^ comp. of PI parag., and 2 sing. m. imper. 
kal of TOW parad. 4. ' 

3023. H^pJI comp. of ) and Pi parag., and 1 plur. pres. kal of 
Eftp, parad. 10, to rise. 

, 3024. np/5*! comp. of 1 and Pi parag., and 1 plur. pres. kal of 
T?*, parad. 8, ivent. 

3025. — Ver. 9. ^^D^tf comp. of pron. affix, and J epenth., and 
1 sing. pres. kal of Tty, parad. 2 and 3. See No. 2788. 

3026. ViftJVrn an( l se t him, comp. of ) and pron. aff., and 1 sing. 
pret. hiph. of Ifl£), parad. 5, not used in kal; in hiph. set, placed; 
and 2 pi. m. Dp^Pl. 

3027.— Ver. 10. ^n&il&nP! 1 plur. pret. hith. of PlftPlfi, mhith. 
delayed, tarried, waited. See No. 1618. 

3028. ^3^ we should have returned, 1 plur. pret. kal of S 5 )^, 
parad. 10. 



Chap.xliii.14.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 251 

3029. D?/by§ in pause for HSJJJfc dual of D}?5, lit. stroke, time, 
in dual twice, a second time. See No. 296. 

3030. — Ver. 11. &13& with & parag., originally a subs, integritas, 
totum; and used adverbially, entirely, so, indeed; compare i"I^& 
1. boiled; hence 2. was ready, as meat dressed, was npe as grain; 
3. was complete, entire. See another view in Lee's Lex. 

3031. rn£T£? comp. of -ft and constr. of PH^?, fern, cropping, 
gathering, produce; from I^T, parad. 4, 1. cut, pruned; 2. sang, 
because songs were composed in a trimmed or pruned style of 
language, as distinguished from prose, which in Latin is called 
oratio soluta, i. e. freed from rythmical restraint. Those productions 
of Palestine were selected as a present to Joseph which were not 
common in Egypt. 

3032. fc^?* 7 ! subs, m., called by the Arabs dihs, syrup of grapes, 
about the thickness of honey. This meaning is preferable to that 
of honey of bees, or palm honey, neither of which is uncommon in 

Egypt- , 

3033. nitoj, &7, H& see Nos. 2731, 2732, 2733. 

3034. Q^£p3 nuts, the pistacia vera of Linnaeus; produced on 
a tree common in Palestine, but unknown in Egypt. This word 
is only used here. 

3035. DHp^l and almonds, comp. of ) and pi. of !p$, Gr.74, 
1. an almond tree; 2. an almond. 

3036. — Ver. 12. T)2Wt2 ^IPP*) et pecuniamiterationis, i.e. as much 
money as was taken on the previous occasion, and likewise the 
money that was returned by Joseph. 

3037. lE*ll&ri comp. of -PI and hoph. part, m. of 3*1$. 

3038. niTi'fo a mistake, subs, m., from PlJfc? errea 7 . 

3039. — Ver. 14. DWH a plur. form, 1. the viscera, considered 
as the seat of the affections ; 2. pity, mercy. 

3040. "131 <rh'3W 1^5 ^$5 and (if it should happen that 
Simeon and Benjamin are not restored to me) as for me, tvhen lam 
bereaved, I am bereaved, i. e. heavy indeed will be my bereavement. 
Some commentators suppose that Jacob says this in the anticipation 
of the loss of all his sons. ''ftybtf, in pause ^Pb^, 1 sing. pret. kal 
of TO^', parad. 1, the pause accent leads to the supposition of 
another form 73$. See Gr.31. 



252 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xliii. 

3041.— Ver.16. fcOil 2 sing. m. imp. kal of W3. 

3042. H3tp rDfcD*! lit. <mc/ slay a slaughter, i. e. slay the animals 
that are to be used ; Y\^$\ comp. of ) and 2 sing. m. imp. kal of 
ft^fiS, par ad. 4, the ordinary form of the imp. of this par ad. is Jljfc?, 
that in the text is of the form of parad. 1. 

3043. fi3£ subs. m. slaughter. 

3044. \2T\ prepare, 2 sing. m. imp. hiph. of J*l3, parad. 10. 

3045. D?Tl;jC3 at noon, comp. of -3 including the article, and 
dual of ^TVi, in pause 1. light; 2. an aperture for the admission of 
light, a window ; see No. 675 ; in the dual double light, the brightest 
part of the day, noon. 

3046.— Ver. 18. ftt^Pl were brought, 3 plur. pret. AopA. of Xfel, 
part. KJflfi, plur. tD^l^. 

3047. Mph^3 a£ £Ae beginning, on the previous occasion, comp. 
of -5 including the article, and M yHFI subs. fern, beginning, from 
7?ri see No. 556. 

3048. ")$) 7/inn? lit. (that Joseph and his servants) mag roll 
themselves, and cause themselves to fall upon us, i. e. that they may 
attack and seize us. 

3049. 773nri7 comp. of ?, and inf. hith. of 7?|, parad. 6, rolled. 

3050. SfiOniT?! comp. of ) and ?, and inf. hith. of 7§J, parad. 5, 
fell. 

3051. — Yer. 19. fl^H HH5 ^oor o/* £Ae Aowse, i.e. at the door. 
See Introduction, Part III. 

3052. — Yer. 20. ^3 an interjection used to excite pity or com- 
passion, rendered by the LXX. Seo/uueOa, according to Ges. contr. 
for ^3 precatio, rogatio, a conjecture extremely questionable, and 
contrary to the general analogy. 

3053. TV infin. kal absol. of TV, parad. 8 and 3, descended, 
1 plur. pret. kal W"IT, and 1 plur. pret. hiph. ^TllPl. 

3054. — Yer. 21. l7pfc^£?3 lit. in its weight, just as it was weighed 
comp. of jl and pron. aff. 1, and /Dt^D subs. m. weight; root 7p^. 

3055. i^p5 «wJ we Aawe brought back, comp. of -J, and 1 plur. 
apoc. pres. AzjpA. of H^, parad. 10. 

3056.— Yer. 23. ^Tfi in pause, 2 plur. m. pres. kal of NT, 
feared, used as an imperative. 

3057. DX> DiW es^e forco animo. 



Ver. 16—32.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 253 

3058. }tot?£ what one hides or conceals, treasure, from Jftft hid. 

3059. Kyi*1 comp. of •) and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. hiph. of &¥', 
w<?/^ ow£, parad. 8 and 12; in 7w}j/i. brought out. 

3060.— Ver. 24. D® {©1 and he set (down) water. It hence 
appears that at this early period the setting down of water by a 
host to his guests was regarded as a mark of kindness and hospi- 
tality. In these hot countries, this must have been both a comfort 
and a luxury. See chap, xviii. 4, and Luke vii. 44. 

3061. WftJ) comp. of -1 and 3 plur. m. pres. kal of ^TT), 
parad. 2 and 3, washed, applied to the human body. 

3062. — Ver. 25. Wy) and prepared, comp. of -\ and 3 plur. m. 
pres. hiph. of J^, parad. 10. 

3063. — Ver. 28. Vlp?} and they bowed (their heads), comp. of -\ 
and 3 plur. m. pres. kal of Tip, parad. 6, bowed (the head). 

3064 — Ver. 30. *^pDJ shew thee favour , be gracious to thee, comp. 
of pron. aff., 3 sing. m. pres. kal of JJH, parad. 6, common form JIT, 
with the penult, vowel lost on the removal of the accent JIT, and 
with the ult. vowel transposed and shortened JIT. 

3065. V^rn ^l^lMJ \5 lit. for his boivels became warm, 3 pi. pret. 
niph. of *)t?2, parad. 4, not used in kal, in niph. became warmed, 
affected with strong feeling. 

3066. Vftrp with pron. aff. See No. 3039. 

3067. fTTinn to the chamber, comp. of T\ locale, PI art., see Gr. 19, 
and *T]n, ground form of TlPl masc. 

3068. — Ver. 31. pSNMTJ and restrained himself '; and proceeded, 
according to Prof. Lee, who deduces the primary idea from an 
Arabic word; comp. of A and 3 sing. m. pres. hith. of p§K, only 
used in hith.; inf. pl^r^ chap.xlv. 1. 

3069.— Ver. 32. ")X\ JraV &7 For the Egyptians cannot eat 
bread with the Hebrews, for this (is) an abomination to the Egyptians. 
Owing perhaps to certain rules of caste, and to certain peculiar 
modes of preparing the food, which it appears Joseph was not 
subjected to: twv eove/ca ovr avrjp AI^vtttios ovre <yvvrj — yuayaipr^ 
av$pbs r/ EWr)vo<; ^prjo-erai, ovSe Kpioos naOapov fioos hearer /Jbrjfjievov 
'EKkqvucfj fiaxacpf} yevaerau Herod, ii. 41, quoted by Ollivant. 

3070. PQjfifi subs. fern, abomination, a thing to be abhorred. 
Root ^J?ft loathed. 



254 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xliii. 33. 

3071. — Ver.33. Itt^V? according to his youth, comp. of 3 and 
pron. aff., and ?"THJ?¥ i* 1 lull fiTS?^ f em - smallness, inferiority (with 
respect to age), youth, ^TJ^ masc. 

3072. ")X\ D^JNtll VTfiHtl lit. <mJ fe mew wondered, man to 
his neighbour, i. e. fey looked at one another with astonishment, on 
perceiving that Joseph had placed them at table according to 
their seniority. See Glass, lib.i. can. ii. Tract iii. : " In uno verbo 
quandoque duae significations concurrunt. Seu Brevitatis causa, 
unum quandoque verbum pro duobus ponitur." 

3073. ^indn^i comp. of *5 and 3 plur. masc. pres. hal of ftfeF\, 
tvondered ; Gr. Oav/m-d^co. 

3074.— Ver. 34. "til niN^O N^?5 lit. and he bore (caused to 
bear) portions from before himself (i. e. from his own table) to fern. 

3075. rtKfc>2, with dagesh implied in b, plur. of HN^&, contr. 
for H^to and that for flKB£&, constr. ft&to what one bears, a 
burden, portion, mass, mess, gift ; from &£0 Sore. 

3076. HHJ &^??FJ lit.^e hands, i.e. five times, parts. 

3077. ^")£fi comp. of -J and 3 sing. fern. apoc. pres. hal of J"EH* 
parad. 13, was great. See Gr. 115. 

3078. W20_ comp. of •] and 3 plur. pres. hal of 15$, parad. 4. 
1. drank an exhilarating or intoxicating drink ; 2. was exhilarated 
with drink; likewise, became intoxicated. 

3079. — Chap. xliv. 1. /J& (fill the men's sacks) food, i.e. with 
food. See Introduction, Part III. 

3080. I^p-IK, ver.l, and *)^6, ver.4. See Glass, lib.i. 
Tract ii. canon xxv. : " Relativum 1G5W antecedens suum haud raro 
includit, quod ex contextu est supplendum." See the same con- 
struction in Horn. vi. 21. 

3081. fittfc? carry, (as much as they can) carry. See No. 459. 
3082. — Ver. 2. *JP-H m V CU P> comp. of pron. aff. 1 sing. masc. 

and JT3|l, constr. $T53> m. a drinking cup. 

3083.— Ver. 3. J|hW 3 plur. pret. ^wA. of fiS^. 

3084. — Yer. 4. 131 *!&*¥* DH fey went out (as regards) fe city, 
probably for "H^^. See Introduction, Part III. 

3085. ^nTl tfb were not far distant 3 pi. pret. hiph. of pf?), 
parad. 2 and 3, was distant, kept at a distance, withdrew one's self 



Chap. xliv. 17.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 255 

8086. DJjtf &*Ttt and overtake, comp. of ) and 2 pi. pret. hiph. of 
JlfeJO, parad. 5, not used in hal; in hiph. reached, overtook, etc. 

3087. Dfto?^ have ye recompensed, 2 plur. pret. pih. of D/&P, 
parad. 1, was entire; in pih. preserved entire, completed, restored a 
thing, gave in return for a thing stolen, requited. See Prof. Lee's 
Lexicon. 

3088. — Yer. 5. 'U1 &^lQ fc^Pl lit. »n divining he divineth by means 
of it. $tyi infin. and $T\T 3 sing. m. pres.jwA. of S^H}, parad. 3. 
1. hissed, as a serpent ; 2. whispered, according to the practice of 
diviners, cogn. $Tw ; 3. used divination. Rosen, mentions divers 
modes of divination by cups ; and Norden gives an account of an 
art practised in Egypt called KvaOofiavrela. 

3089.— Ver. 7. ^H??*? »"6^0 ^ a l^ofane thing to thy ser- 
vants, TOwPi subs, i.profaneness; hence used as an interjection, 
profane! fie I forbid it I from /?n, No. 556. 

3090. ni&^y^ comp. of •& prep., Gr. 19, and infin. constr. hal of 
n^JJ, parad. 2 and 13. 

3091.— Yer. 8. Vb?$Q we brought bach, 1 plur. pret. hiph. of 
rW, parad. 10. 

3092. -132D ^^1 and icliy should ice steal, 1 plur. pres. hal of 

- T 

3093.— Yer. 10. W\7\ J3 lit. so ifc, so be it. 

3094. D*pi guiltless, plur. of *pl 

8095. — Yer. 12. &^$HH gw<:7 Ac searched carefidly, comp. of A 
and 3 sing. m. pres. jp^A. of £^$n, parad. 2. 

8096. /HH began, 3 sing. pret. /»}j>/j. of //C^ P^'ad. 2 and 6. 
See No. 556. 

3097. — Yer. 13. ^JTW r/;?r7 *Ae^ rerc£, comp. of •) and 3 plur. m. 
pres. hal of JHp, parad. 3 and 4, tore. 

3098. DD2*5 #>^ laded, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. masc. pres. hal of 
D£?JJ, parad. 2, laded. 

3099.— Yer. 16. p^3 sA«# we >«^ ourselves, for p^Jffl}, 
Gr. 46; 1 plur. pres. Ati£A. of p1¥. 

3100. — Yer 17. It is probable that Joseph put the cup into 
Benjamin's sack, and threatened to detain him, that he might make 
trial of the strength of his brothers' affection towards him, and of 
their regard for their aged father's feelings. 



256 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xHv.17. 

3101. ht 2pkir. m. imp. kal of H^. 

3102.— Yer.18. hjT]6? ^5 lit. «* *Aow so Pharaoh, for thou 
art even as Pharaoh, ^fe? comp. of pron. aff. 2 pers. and 1232 
id. qu. 3. 

3103.— Yer. 23. J^Dfl &7 lit. ye sAaZZ rco* a^ (to see my face), 
i. e. ye shall not again, etc. ; comp. of } parag. and 2 plur. m. pres. 
hiph. of t|DJ, parad. 8, id. qu. £)Dtf added. 

3104.— Yer. 30. n^^j5 bound up, pass. part. fern, hal of Ig^, 
parad. 4. 

3105.— Yer. 33. "^ 3 sing. masc. pres. hal oi 5$*, parad. 8, 
abode, remained-, the ult. vowel shortened on account of the 
makkaph following. 

3106. 7JT 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. hal of PPJJ w<?w£ w/>. 

3107.— Yer. 34. K¥&* *&*# 6<?/a//, YA.find, 3 sing. m. pres. fez/ 
of fcttttD, parad. 12. 

3108. — Chap. xlv. 1. D*3¥$n lit. the standers, those who stood, 
comp. of •}! and plur. of ^5p, part. m}?A. of ^5?J, parad. 5, placed ; 
in m}?/i. placed one's self, stood. 

3109. JHyiri? w* or °^ h™ making himself known, comp. of 5 
and infin. AeVA. of JTT , parad. 8 and 4, knew. 

3110. — Yer. 2. PpTlX JJfJfJ awe? Ae gave (forth) his voice in 
weeping, i. e. wept aloud. 

3111. ^333 comp. of 5 and ^^^tveeping; verb PD^ ^3P^ 

3112.— Yer. 3. JYDyS comp. of b and infin. constr. kal of HJJJ, 
parad. 2 and 13, answered. 

3113. ^/PftJ ^ re confounded, 3 plur. pret. niph. of Al|l, not 
used in kal; in w^A. became astonished, terrified, confounded, 
parad. 3. 

3114. — Yer. 4. ^5 draio near, 2 plur. masc. imp. kal of £0J a 
parad. 5 ; and ^|?, in pause, 3 plur. m. pres. £«/ of the same. 

3115. DPHSft ye sold, 2 pi. m. pret. kal of 13£ 50 ^; parad. 4, 
sold. 

3116. ttttgftvtf 6e rcotf distressed, 2 plur. m. pres. niph. of SV& 
parad. 2, grieved. 

3117. rVHo?/^ the preservation of life, comp. of 7 and iTHft 
fern. 1. what preserves life, food; 2. preservation of life; from PlTl 
^We?, in. pih. JTFJ preserved life. 



Chap.xlv.ll.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 257 

3118.— Ver. 6. pJXil Y)$2 in the midst of the land. i.e. in the 

land- 
Si 19. W^ltl m. ploughing, from VhTl 1. cut; 2. cut the ground, 

ploughed. 

3120. ^¥(2 m. cutting, reaping, from *!¥& 1. <?^; 2. <^£ corn, 

reaped. 

3121.— Yer. 7. Til 1VT88? D5*? D^S lit. to place for you a 

remnant on the earth, i. e. to cause you to survive the famine ; 

JVlNtfeP subs. fern, remnant, from HX^ remained. 

3122. ")X\ D3/ nvnri/ 5 ' an d t° preserve V ou a ^ ve for a great 
deliverance, i. e. that ye might be preserved in a -wonderful manner; 
comp. of \ and 7, and inf. hiph. of PlTt, parad. 2 and 13. 

3123. Hft^s? comp. of 7 and PIl^SS subs. fern, deliverance, 
from tO 75 escaped. 

3124.— Yer. 8. *ttl DfiX X7 nn$ Now it teas not you that sent 
me but God, i. e. ye were but instruments in the hands of God. 
This is kindly said by Joseph to comfort his brethren. 

3125. HJHS/ ^&b for a father to Pharaoh. Kings' councillors 
having been, in the earliest times, selected from the aged who were 
distinguished for their- wisdom and experience, were called fathers, 
which subsequently became a general name for councillors and 
senators (from senex) ; hence the members of the Roman senate 
were called patres, irrespective of their age. Joseph was next to 
the kino- in rank and dismitv. In the following clause he is called 
lord over all Pharaoh's household, and ruler over all the land. 

3126. 7$£ rider, part. act. m. kal of 7^£, parad. 1, ruled. 
312T. — Yer. 9. TVV) comp. of Jl parag., and 2 sing. m. imp. kal 

of *TT, parad. 8, went down. 

3128.— Yer. 10. |0 Goshen, called by the LXX. Teaev 'Apa/Stas. 
Supposed to be that northern district of Egypt lying between 
Philistia and the Tanaitic mouth of the Nile, and stretching to the 
present site of Damietta; see Ex. xiii. 17. In that district the 
pasturage is exceedingly rich, and it is called the best of the land, 
not as respects its agricultural capabilities, but in reference to its 
qualities for pasturage. It was consequently only of great value 
to a pastoral people. 

3129. — Yer. 11. ^/3?51 ancl - /«*'# sustain, support, comp, of ), 

17 



258 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xlv. 11. 

and 1 sing, of /<5?? redup. form of pret. pih. of ^3 to measure. 
My impression is, that the pih. form of the Hebrew verb is an 
abbreviation of the hal form redoubled — that in verbs of the 
ordinary form, the original traces of the reduplication have disap- 
peared, and are only exhibited in the dagesh, which gives emphasis 
to the utterance of the word — and that such forms as 7J7-5 repre- 
sent the original forms of the pih., and are not, strictly speaking, 
exceptions. See Introduction, Part III. 

3130. BHWVj® lest thou be brought to poverty, 2 sing. m. pres. 
niph. of fe^T , parad. 8 : — 1. was an heir to any one; 2. succeeded to 
another's property, by whatever title, occupied it; 3. by meton. 
ejected any one from his property, reduced to poverty. 

3131.— Ver.13. DjJTTJPfl DJTn^ lit. and ye shall hasten and 
bring down, and ye shall quickly bring down. See Introd. Part III. 

3132. DJJ^JTM comp. of \ and 2 plur. pret. pih. of IH^, parad. 3 
and 4, hastened. 

3133. bEn'Tini comp. of ) and 2 pi. m. pret. hiph. of TV. 
3134.— Ver. 16.' 2&") comp. of -) and 3 sing. m. pres. hat of *1W, 

parad. 9, was good, seemed good-, from hence ^>&fo chap.xlvii. 4. 

3135— Yer. 17. tigtD load ye, 2 pi. m. imp. hal of jjjtp parad. 3 ; 
only used in hal in this passage. 

3136. D3TJ?3 y°ur cattle, comp. of pron. aff. Dp, and TJ?? m. 
a beast, or cattle generally; from Ifl^fed. 

3137. — Yer. 18. Dyjfjfi your houses, i. e. your households. 

3138. J?ll m. fatness, richest productions . 

3139.-~Yer. 19. T\T\ S )$ T\P&\ and (now) thou art commanded, an 
address by Pharaoh to Joseph; 2 sing. pret. puh. of >"!}¥ parad. 13. 

3140.— Yer. 20. *W DhJPT^ D^Jfl lit. and let not your eye 
spare your furniture (property), i. e. be not reluctant to leave behind 
you any part of your property that cannot be easily transported. 

3141. Drift 3 sing. fern. pres. hal of D^H, 1. to compress, and 
intrans. to be compressed; 2. to compress or shut the eye; 3. to wink 
at, to indulge, to spare. Storr. p. 30. 

3142. fYTOJ) waggons, pi. of H/^S? fern, a waggon, fxom its being 
moved on wheels ; from the obsolete root 7^J? cogn. //J} rolled, 
turned like a wheel. 



Chap.xlvi.2.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 259 

3143.— Ver. 22. Ft^hf! changes of, plur. of H^Q, in full 
Pl£ VH f. ; from &HH, in kal, passed, passed by ; in hiph. changed. 

3144. — Ver. 23. jiffo 5 ) and food, comp. of 1 and f\lti subs. masc. ; 
from pT, to feed, nourish; only used in hoph. Jer.v. 8. 

3145. — Ver. 24. Wintt " /K be not alarmed on the way, i. e. fancy 
not that the kindness now shown you will subject you, as formerly, 
to false imputations, and to the danger of being brought back and 
punished as thieves. MiHfl 2 plur. m. pres. kal of T^H as parad. 1, 
shook, trembled, either from fear or from rage. The former is the 
more probable meaning in this passage. 

3146. — Ver. 26. *5 ^? ^^[and his heart failed him although, i.e. 
he fainted away although he did not believe them. This passage 
has likewise been thus rendered, and his heart continued cold, (was 
not warmed by the tidings) for he did not believe them. I prefer 
the former rendering, for : — I. if s *2 be translated although, as is often 
the case, the rendering thus given will be quite natural; for it is 
very easy to imagine Jacob strongly moved by the sudden and 
unexpected tidings he had received on a subject of such interest to 
him, although he did not believe them. II. Prof. Lee connects 
^13 with a Syriac root, which signifies defecit (animo); and this 
meaning is more suitable than the other to the passages in which 
this word is elsewhere found; see Ps.lxxvii. 3; Hab.i. 4; and its 
derivative 11^3 cessation, Lam. ii. 18 : and III. If the second 
meaning is adopted, viz. that he was in no wise affected by the 
tidings he received, there seems to be no point of contrast in what 
follows, Sp5?_ DVl *W0 an d the spirit of Jacob revived. 

3147. — Chap.xlvi. 1. l^PDT PftJ*! lit. and slaughtered slaughters, 
i. e. and offered sacrifices. This was done in order to consult the 
Lord as to the propriety of his going down to Egypt; God's 
answer is given in a subsequent verse. From Xenophon's Anabasis 
and elsewhere it appears that the Greeks undertook no step of 
importance without consulting the gods by sacrifice. 

3148. H3J*5 comp. of A and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of PH), parad. 4; 
and D^H^I plur. of TXl\ masc, 1. slaughter-, 2. meton. the thing 
slaughtered, a sacrifice. 

3149 —Ver. 2. DfrTlM comp. of 3 and plur. of fig^J fern, what 

17* 



260 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xlvi. 2. 

one sees, or rather, what one is caused to see, what one is shewn, a 
vision', from PlK*l saw. 

3150.— Yer.3. T/ 'U1 PlTt? NTPtSk lit. fear not from going, to 
go; see a similar constr. in Lukexii.4; jult) <^oBr)6rjTe airo twv 

a7T0KT€Lv6vTGdV TO (TCJ/jLa. 

3151. PlTlD comp. of •£? before resh 12 Gr. 19, and inf. abs. fern. 
kal of TY parad. 8 and 3. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

3152. — Ver.4. T?5^ comp. of pron. aff. 2 pers. sing., and 1 sing, 
apoc. pres. hiph. of PHJJ ; and Pi /J? inf. kal abs. of the same. 

3153. ")$\ IT PP£^ lit. shall put his hand upon thine eyes, shall 
close thine eyes when thou diest, a duty usually discharged by the 
nearest and dearest relative or friend. This intimation implies 
that Jacob was to continue in Egypt till his death. The following 
instance of this custom among the Greeks is quoted by Mr. Ollivant 
in his excellent analysis of the history of Joseph: £3}, Kal 6avovarj<; 
ofjbjjia av<yK\€Lo-€L to gov. Eur. Hec.430. 

3154. — Ver. 28. ")X\ rPflPl/ that he (Joseph) might point out 
Goshen to him, comp. of 7 and inf. hiph. of PIT, parad. 8, 3, and 13, 
threiv; in hiph. threio out the hand, pointed out, shewed, taught. 

3155. — Ver. 29. 1DX*3 and tied, bound, yoked, comp. of •) and 
3 sing. m. pres. kal of *")?&, parad. 7 and 4. 

3156. 1^55*"® his chariot, comp. of pron. aff. ) and PQ3T?, 
ground form of H^l^ constr. form of PQ^HD subs. fern, what one 
rides in, a chariot; from ^H rode. 

3157. KTI see No. 2064. *" 

T .._ 

3158. — Ver. 30. PlJTft^t let me die; comp. of Pi parag., which 
here does not take the accent, in consequence of which there is no 
change in the vowels; and 1 sing. pres. kal of PVlfi to die. 

3159. *fl1&$*1 my seeing, I have seen; comp. of pron. aff. 1 sing., 
and inf. constr. kal of TiHI saw. 

T T 

3160.— Ver. 32. Pljpfc ^Jtf men of cattle, herdsmen, see No. 524. 

3161. — Ver. 33. DJ^JJQ your occupations, comp. of pron. affix 
Clp, and plur. of Pl8?32? m. work, occupation ; from PlK^ did. 

3162. — Ver. 34. W^$$12 from our youth; comp. of -12 and pron. 
aff. 1 plur., and D^TJJJ a plur. form; from "")J£3 a young man. See 
Gr.49. 

3163 'Ml V1PT\ Tig? that ye may dwell in the land of Goshen. 



Cliap.xlvii.6.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 261 

Joseph instructs his brethren to tell Pharaoh that they had been 
shepherds from their youth up, that he might be aware that they 
could only follow a pastoral occupation, and that he might be in 
consequence induced to allow them to settle in the land of Goshen, 
which was only valuable to a pastoral people, and which being on 
the outskirts of Egypt, kept them apart from the Egyptians, to 
whom shepherds were an abomination. 

3164. Tfl Dn?0 nigirr^ for every keeper of sleep is an 
abomination to the Egyptians. This probably relates only to shep- 
herds who were strangers, since it is said in the following chapter 
that Pharaoh had cattle and herdsmen of his own. As Egypt 
generally speaking, was not suited for pasturage, shepherds were 
of the lowest caste among the Egyptians ; and their antipathy to 
that occupation may have been further increased by the remem- 
brance of the thraldom to which they had been subjected under 
the shepherd kings, and from the fact, that the Jews killed and ate 
animals in a way that was inconsistent with the superstitious notions 
held by the Egyptians. See Xo. 3069. 

3160. rayin constr. of nnjrtn. 

3166. — Chap.xlvii. 2. "\^S njfp/pl ex universo numero fratrum 
suorum, Ges.; from among his brethren, including probably their 
sons; comp. of \ and D with dagesh implied in p, and constr. of 
HVp subs. m. end, limit; see Xo. 1581, where PlXM means from 
one end to the other, the whole, and here, from the oldest to the 
youngest of those who were qualified for such an employment. 

316T. DJJS3 comp. of •) and pron. afT. 3 plur. m., and 3 sing. m. 
pres. hiph. of jtfj. See Xo.2386. 

3168. nJHi^ where we should sa } vS&*. See Storr. p. 107. 

3169. — Ver.3. jX¥ HJTl keeper (keepers) of sheep; according to 
a common Hebrew idiom, by which it was implied that every one 
of them was thus occupied; an idiom which may be regarded as 
an evidence of one of the methods used for expressing plurality, 
when there was no wav of doing so bv means of the termination of 
the word. 

3170. — Ver.4. HJflib subs. m. what feeds, pasture; from HJH. 

3171. — Ver. 6. It^ft? comp. of 3 and constr. of 2tp*ft m. good, 
choice, best place, or part; from HfcD\ Sec Xo.3134. 



262 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xlvii. 

3172— Ver.6. 3ghfl apoc. imp. /b>A. of 5g^ parad. 8, ^eft. 

3173. 7?P!"^5& ^^ o/* integrity, or activity; v]tl subs. m. may 
have either of the above meanings, and may express qualification 
generally, well qualified men. 

3174. *")jjP constr. plur. of IB? m. a prince, ruler, chief, overseer, 
the vowel immoveable, the word being of the form of the act. part. 
kal of W. 

3175. — Ver. 7. ^lTjj!J8-!! lit. and caused him to stand, comp. of 
A and pron. aff. and 3 sing. m. pres. hiph. of IfoQ stood, parad. 2. 

3176. — Ver. 8. MM ^. according to the what, how long, comp. 
of '3, including the article, and !"l£p tvhat. 

3177. — Ver. 9. *"Vl3£? my sojournings, i.e. my &jfe, a figure very 
suitable to the peculiarity of Jacob's situation as a sojourner in 
Canaan, and to the habits of pastoral life ; comp. of the pron. aff. 
^— and ^3£?, only used in the constr. plur., from *V)J1 to sojourn. 

3178. X^T\ have reached, 3 plur. pret. hiph. of $Wl, not used 
in kal. 

3179.— Ver. 11. DD&Jft probably that district of the land of 
Egypt in which the city of Khameses was subsequently built, and 
called by Moses by the name under which it was known in his 
own time. 

3180.— Ver. 12. VpT\ *$? ETQ, sup. 3 before Q)T?, lit. with 
food for the mouth of the child (children), i.e. for the whole of the 
descendants of his father, including young and. old. 

3181. — Ver. 13. Fy?F\) comp. of -) and 3 sing. fern. pres. kal apoc, 
Gr. 115, of i"lrfp, parad. 3 and 13, was faint, feeble, languishing. 

3182. — Ver. 14. £0j?.??} and collected, comp. of -1 and 3 sing. m. 
pres. pih. of fcDp/j parad. 1. 

3183. D^J^ purchasers, purchasing, purchased, plur. abs. masc. 
part. act. kal of ^3^. 

3184. — Ver. 15. DW and failed, and tvas spent, comp. of •) and 
3 sing. m. pres. kal; and QWl 3 sing. fern. pres. kal, ver. 18; and 
DFl 3 sing. m. pret. kal, ver. 18, of D£?JT), parad. 6. 

3185. *3 although, Glass, vol. i. p. 530. 

3186. — Ver. 16. ttijl give ye, 2 plur. in. imp. kal of iJV parad. 
8 and 3. 

3187. DK if seeing that, contracted for j£?&, properly a subs., 



Ver. 6—24.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 263 

rectitude, certainty; hence used adverbially, certainly, truly; and 
hypothetically, as putting a case, if; Sax. gif, i. e. grant, stating 
the matter of fact as taken for granted. See Prof. Lee's Lex. 

3188. D?X hath failed, 3 sing. m. pret. heal. 

3189. — Ver. IT. D*p^D5 for the (their) horses, comp. of -3, in- 
cluding the article, and plur. of DID m. a horse. 

3190. DyH^ and fed them, comp. of -1 and pron. a£F. and 3 sing. 
m. pres. pih. of 7H3 parad. 3 : — 1. led (to water) ; 2. led (to pasture, 
as a flock); 3. tended carefully; 4. fed. Prof. Lee's Lex. 

3191. — Ver. 18. HPID} X/ we will not conceal, 1 plur. pres.^wA. 
of 1H3, not used in kal; m. pih. kept bach, withheld, concealed. 

3192. D£l Dtf *5 Mr// &er% (the money) & ^e/^. See Xos. 3184 
and 3187. 

3193. MJV1JI <wr Joc/y (bodies), comp. of plur. pron. aff. 1 pers. 
and T\ s \^ fern, the body of man or beast, from )$, cog. ^ the back. 

3194. — Ver. 19. DBTl X/ &e ;?ctf desolate, 3 sing. fern. pres. £o2 
of EDS?) parad. 8, id. qu. Dft^ w«s desolate. 

3195. — Ver. 20. jp*5 com. of -1 and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. At// of 
PI3D parad. 3, purchased, Gr. 115. 
T 3 T 196. mp 3 pirn-, pret. At/Z of *lDft sota 

3197. pTH was strong, prevailed, 3 sing. m. pret. kal. 

3198.— Ver. 81. Tfl DS£m*1 lit. <wwZ <w/o>- the people, he made 
them pass to the cities, from end of the confines of Egypt to end 
thereof, i.e. he made the whole of the people of the land pass to 
their respective cities, that they might be the more conveniently 
supplied with corn. See a different view in Eos. and Xo. 3166. 

3199. — Ver. 22. ")Tl H^lX p*l the meaning of this verse appears 
to be : Only the land of the priests he did not purchase, because they 
received a fixed portion from Pharaoh which they used, and con- 
sequently were not under the necessity of selling their lands like 
the others. Herod, and Diodor. record that the lands of the priests 
were free in their days. D*jn3 plur. abs. of JPI3 a priest, Gr. 75. 

3200. pPI masc. anything engraven, defined, fired : — 1. a statute, 
law, custom, duty, privilege ; 2. a defined portion of labour, or food. 

3201.— Ver. 24. "tfl rfc-OftS mti lit. and it shall be, in the 
comings in (when the produce comes to be stored up) that ye shall 
give a fifth part to Pharaoh. 



264 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xlvii. 24. 

3202. rttfQflJ comp. of -5, including the article, and plur. of 
PlfcO^Jyi subs, fern., coming in, income, produce, fruit, from K13. 

3203. — Ver. 25. ^JVllPl thou hast preserved our lives, comp. of 
pron. aif. and 2 sing. m. pret. hiph. of ITF! lived. 

3204. KVft? 1 plur. pres. kal of WfiB, parad. 12,/owm*. 

3205.— Ver. 26. £>&hS, i.e. #£h JlTD (to give) the fifth part. 
WtiH subs, fifth part. 

3206. — Ver. 27. Fft "ITQK*) lit. awe? they seized themselves upon 
it, took seizin (a law term), took possession of it. 

3207. — Ver. 29. ^fllp?! and drew near, comp. of •) and 3 plur. 
m. pres. kal of ^TO, parad. 3. 

3208. "ttl T[T Wtt, see No. 1866. 

3209. "Ml *TJbj? H^j; 1 ! lit. arce? tfAow sA«# do with me kindness 
and truth, thou shalt deal with me kindly and truly. See Intro- 
duction, Part III. 

3210.— Ver. 30. ^HM^M . . .♦flMfc'l cum dormiero . . . tunc tolles, 
Glass, vol. i. p. 603. 

3211.— Ver. 31. TM$T\ Vfoh 7& upon the head of the bed. Eos. 
thinks that Jacob having exerted himself in speaking to Joseph, 
was so exhausted that he was obliged to lean upon his pillow 
while he adored God for the successful issue of his request. This 
interpretation is supported by most of the ancient versions. Aquila, 
irpocreicvv7](7ev iirl /cecfraXrjv rrjs Kktvfjs- Symmachus, irpocretcvvrjo-ev 
iirl to d/cpov icXivrjs- Vulg. « Adoravit Deum conversus ad lectuli 
caput." But the LXX., which has been followed by the apostle 
Paul, Heb. xi. 21, has TrpoaeKvvyjcrev ''laparjX iirl to aicpov tov 
pd/3Bou, reading T\t§ti for Tlfoti. 

3211.* ?\\£fo subs. fern, that on which one stretches one's self, 
a couch, bed, from nb3 stretched. 

3212. — Chap.xlviii. 1. Tv>T\ (is) sick, part. act. m. kal of H/H, 
parad. 2, 13, was sick. 

3213. — Ver. 2. IN) and (one) told, it was told, already analysed. 

3214. pJDTO and received strength, from the intelligence; comp. 
of -) and 3 sing. m. pres. hith. of pTH, parad. 2. 

3215. — Ver. 4. *f)|S?3 comp. of ^J— pron. afF. 2 pers., and part. m. 
hiph. of «T^3, parad. 3 and 13, w as fruitful ; in hiph. made fruitful. 



Chap.xlviii.16.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 265 

3216. — Ver. 5. D^TTtilPl that were born, comp. of -T\ and plur. of 
part. niph. of *TT or T?). 

8217. ^^2"*T2 lit. until my coming, before I came ; "TJ£ see No. 402. 

3218. H*3 in full K% comp. of pron. aff., and inf. /;«/ of Kfci. 

3219. pjtf?£>] |3%03 «5 iZew&erc emd &meof»j i.e. they shall be 
accounted as my own children,, and not as my grandchildren, and 
Joseph in them shall receive a double portion of the inheritance 
in Canaan, which Reuben forfeited in consequence of the sin 
mentioned in chapters xxxv. 22, and xlix. 4. See 1 Chron. v. 1, 2. 

3220.— Yer. 6. DnSpti? comp. of ? and pron. aff. D~ and nSptt 
subs. fern, an inheritance. 

3221.— Ver. 7. Mn? 3 sing. fern. pret. kal of H^. 

3222. Pn3p&$} and I buried her, comp. of ) and pron. affix, and 
1 sing. pres. kal of *"££, parad. 4. 

3223. — Ver. 9. tfJ~DPlp take them, I pray, comp. of pron. affix 
3 plur. m., and 2 sing. m. imp. kal of HP?, parad. 5. 

3224. — Ver. 10. jp-Tft 1^35 were heavy from old age, 8 plur. pret. 

kai of nai 

3225. |p-!,t? comp. of •£ and JPT m. o/a 7 r/^. 

3226. pt^*1 a^c/ /*<? kissed, comp. of •_ and 3 sing. m. pres. kal 
of pKO, parad. 5. 

3227— Ver. 11. Pl&n inf. fai abs. of HNH, ordinary form PIK 1 ]. 

3228. WJ3 I thought, 1 sing. pret. ^nA. of 77f, not used in kal 
in 7J>//> . judged, though t. 

3229— Ver. 12. V|^3 A«s feues, pron. aff. and dual of ^|, Me 
knee ; ground form Ipj. 

3230.— Ver. 13. \'&ti contr. for jWlft comp. of -lb, and constr. 
of jW Me r?y^ hand. 

3231.— Ver. 14. \3 VTTlK W placed his hands designedly 
although, 3 sing. m. pret. pih. of 72b> looked, was prudent, in pih. 
acted, placed designedly. 

3232. *3 although ; see Glass, p. 530; and Josh.xvii. 18. 

8233. — Ver. 15. ^1J^5 Lat. ex quo sum, from my birth, comp. 
of?? for -12 Gr.19, pron. aff., and *lij7 subs, repetition, continuance 
of an action; hence adverbially, 1. again-, 2. besides-, 8. still. 

3234.— Ver. 16. TJ1 SxiH ^«760 ^ «V«* ***** redeemed 
(delivered) me from all evil. The angel here spoken of is under- 



266 ANALYSIS OF [Chap, xlviii. 16. 

stood to be the same as he with whom Jacob wrestled at Peniel on 
the night before his interview with his brother Esau, and from 
whom he received the name of Israel. This Being is generally- 
known by the name of the Jehovah angel, and is believed to be 
the second person of the Godhead. 

3235. /Kin the redeemer, that redeemed, comp. of -Pi and 7^ 
subs. m. Prof. Lee says, " The leading notion here seems to be, 
as association implies a friendly relation of hospitality, and as this 
in the East calls for a participation in repelling the assaults of 
enemies as well as of social enjoyments; the person so named was 
considered as having a supreme regard for the interests of the 
society with which he was connected, as I. a near relation ; hence 
II. bound by the consideration of the law of retaliation, as an 
avenger, to vindicate any injury done to the family, particularly 
that of manslaughter; and hence he was styled the avenger of 
blood, D^Pt 7&H Num. xxxv. 19, 21: III. applied to God accom- 
panying, and avenging his people as Redeemer-, a title of Christ." 
See Prof. Lee's Lex. sub. voc. 

3236. y& ^Y 1 ) and let them multiply to abundance (abundantly), 
comp. of ) and 3 plur. m. pres. Teal of POT only used here; from $1 
a fish. The verb may signify to increase like fishes, a strong 
expression indicative of the numerous progeny of Ephraim and 
Manasseh. 

3231. — Ver. 17. ^Jl*1 and he took hold of, comp. of •) and 3 sing, 
masc. pres. kal of ^[??fr, parad. 1, 

3238. ypn? to remove (it), comp. of 7 and inf. hiph. of ^D. 

3239.— Ver. 19. D^PTfcPfo lit. a fulness of nations, i.e. a great 
multitude of people, K/£? subs. m. fulness, hence meton. multitude. 

3240— Ver. 20. TJ1 t f$2\ b$i&'! ^3 by thee shall Israel bless, 
saying, i. e. my descendants shall take a formula for imploring 
blessings upon those whom they most love, in these words, " God 
make thee as Ephraim and Manasseh." 

3241. — Ver. 22. TDK "72 ^ft$ &5& one portion above (more 
than) thy brethren, see No. 3219; DlD^subs. m. \.a shoulder; 2. a 
load carried on the shoulder; hence 3. a portion. 

3242. °\$\ *J?Plp? 1^& which I took from the hand oj *the Amorite 
tvith my sword and my bow. This probably refers to the city of 



Chap.xlix.3.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 267 

Shechem and the district adjoining, which Simeon and Levi 
acquired by force of arms, and which subsequently belonged to 
the tribe of Ephraim. Although that city and territory were un- 
justly acquired, they nevertheless became Jacob's property, and 
according to an ordinary figure of speech, are said to have been 
acquired by his own sword and bow. The Shechemites were 
Hivites, but Amorites may be used as a general name for the 
inhabitants of Canaan. 

3243. ^3^D3 comp. of 3 and pron. aff., and 3*0, ground form 
of ^n, a sword. 

3244. *J?£?M comp. of 3 and pron. aff., and ft^p, ground form 
of H^p, a bow. 

3245. — Chap. xlix. 1. ^D&n assemble yourselves, 2 plur. masc. 
imp. niph. of &]Dtf , paracl. 7, gathered, collected, assembled. 

3246. Pl*VilNft and I will tell, comp. of ) and H parag. and 
1 sing. pret. hiph. of 1^ , parad. 5. 

3247. &Op* shall happen, 3 sing. masc. pres. kal of fcOP id. qu. 
(Tip happened. 

3248. DWH JVlfiN? in after-times ; eV iaxdrcov tcov rjfjuep&v, 
LXX., Heb. i. 1 ; eV ea^aTat^ rj/jiepais, Jam. v. 3. All these ex- 
pressions generally refer to the times of the Messiah ; in the text, 
however, it is very obvious that no particular period is pointed 
out, and that Jacob's design is to refer to various periods and 
circumstances in the history of his posterity. 

3249— Ver. 3. *Jfe* JTB^ni TO) (the result of) my strength and 
the beginning of my manhood. These are epithets applied to 
Reuben as the firstborn, who is distinguished from D^P! *!/.) a 
child of old age. 

3250. *ft3 comp. of pron. aff. and H3 subs. m. strength, might ; 
robur virile quod in flore aetatis corpori inest ; Gr. clk/mt}, opposed 
to effoeta aetas. 

3251. *yitf comp. of pron. aff. and |1K subs. masc. strength. 
*}1K JVKW1 referendum est ad primam vim generandi. The same 
expression is used for primogenitus in Deut. xxi. 17. 

3252. TJ£ 1M fl^b IN excellency of dignity, and excellency of 
might, i. e. excelling in dignity and might. This was Reuben's 
privilege and condition as Israel's firstborn son. In the subsequent 



268 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xlix. 

clause the patriarch mentions the sin through which he forfeited 
the privileges and rights of primogeniture. Onkelos thus explains 
the passage : " Tibi enim conveniebat accipere tres partes, primo- 
genituram, sacerdotium, et regnum." 

3253. ^lfV subs. m. remainder, abundance, excellency. 

3254. r\m, see No. 459. 

3255. TJJ subs. masc. strength, vigour, might, the strength of 
manhood. 

3256. — Ver. 4. D^?3 THS) lit. lasciviousness as water, lascivious 
as water, a strong figure by which licentiousness is compared to 
water in motion. In our own language, we speak of the swellings 
of pride, and of lust, a figure borrowed from the appearance and 
motion of a wave. This rendering is much more suitable than 
that of instability, etc., and harmonises better with what follows. 
The succeeding words shew that it was Reuben's lascivious 
conduct, through which he forfeited his rights of primogeniture. 

3257. ?)!§ subs, m., probably boiling or running over, sivelling 
up ; hence pride, tvanto?t?tess , lasciviousness. 

3258. "Ifilft/N ne excellas, sc. dignitate et honore; ne plus 
habeto, Eos. 2 sing. m. pres. hiph. of ^tTV parad. 8 and 4; in kal, 
remained; in hiph. caused to remain, abounded, excelled. 

3259. ")$\ Fl vj£"*3 for thou wentest up to thy father's bed, then 
thou pollutedst (it), he went up to my couch. See chap. xxxv. 22 : 
" Nihil obstat, quo minus simpliciter vertamus : stratum s. thalamum 
meum ascendit, incestum illi intulit. Nam qui ira commoti sunt, 
saepe ita solent breviter quae ante dixerant repetere, atque ille 
ipse a persona secunda ad tertiam transitus, animo concitato ap- 
prime convenit. LXX. ov av6/3r)$. 2 pers. ut oratio membro 
priori conveniat." Ros. 

3260. *33&P£? constr. plur. of 33^^?, where one lies, a bed; from 
H&lay. 

3^61. ft7?r\ 2 sing. m. pret. pili. oiS_T\, No. 556. 

3262. WW comp. of pron. aff. and JFK* part. pass. m. kal of J^ 
placed, laid; in part. pass, something laid, placed; hence as a subs. 
a bed, a couch. 

3263— Ver. 5. D*f!K s h\ ])$!?& Simeon and Levi (are) brethren, 



Ver. 3—6.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 269 

so called on account of their joint participation in the acts of 
cruelty to which the patriarch is about to refer. 

"Affliction's sons are brothers in distress." — Burns. 

3264. DrPlVOb D/pH *73 instruments of violence (are) their 
stcords, i. e. they had used their swords not as weapons of self- 
defence, or against their open enemies, but wrongfully, trea- 
cherously, and cruelly. 

3265. DnTTdfc comp. of pron. aff. D!T— and plur. of iTTjfi, 
Gr. fjud^atpa, a sword, a word supposed to have been borrowed 
from the East by the Greeks. Root "fi2 to dig. PHM is hence 

an instrument for digging, cutting a sword. See chap, xxxiv. 25, 

where Simeon and Levi are said to have taken )^T\Jl E^X each 
man his sword. 

3266 Ver. 6. *tfl N2fi"Sx DIM into their secret (plottings) 

enter not, O my soul ; in their assembly be not united (implicated), 
O mine honour. Jacob thus gives expression to his abhorrence of 
the deed done to the Shechemites, by his protestations against 
being implicated in the secret plottings of his two sons, and against 
being present at the meetings, where the acts of cruelty were 
planned. 

3267. DTD? comp. of 3 and pron. aff., and *1D, in full TlD, per 
sync, for IID^, from *TD£ founded ; in niph. became fixed, projecting, 
deliberating, plotting, i. e. laying the groundwork of something ; 
hence TlD counsel, deliberation, machination, secret plotting. See 
Prof. Lee's Lex. 

3268. D7HP5 comp. of 5 and pron. aff. and /HD subs. masc. a 
congregation, assembly, meeting. 

3269. "W D3&?3 *3 for in their rage they slew men, in their 
wanton cruelty they houghed cattle. 

3270. £\S used collectively for D^«. 

3271. D^""D^ comp. of ) for \ and 3. and pron. aff. D~ and 
pn, in full Jl^, Gr. 74, subs. masc. 1. what delights or pleases, 
pleasure; 2. pleasure, as synonymous with arbitrium in Lat,, will, 
determination, as in French, 6* est mon plaisir ; 3. uncontrolled will, 
wantonness of will. In this passage, the word may bear the sense 
of wanton cruelty, from Pl¥1 . 



270 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xlix. 

3272. VpS 3 plur. pret. pih. of *Wj only used in the infin. of 
kal ; in pih. cut, cut the nerve, houghed, hamstringed. 

3273. w&, used collectively, subs. m. Chald. SOW; Gr. ravpos; 
Lat. taurus ; Eng. steer. 1. a hull-, 2. cattle in general. Prof. Lee 
and others use this word in a figurative sense, and apply it to 
Shechem, or collectively to father and son ; and understand &?*{$ 
as the common people, and Tife? as the princes or chief men. I 
prefer the literal meaning, in the first place, because p¥*1 which 
expresses extremely well the wanton cruelty of houghing cattle, 
is much less applicable in describing the vengeance taken by 
Simeon and Levi against the perpetrator of the crime against 
Dinah. Secondly, ^J? is applied to the houghing of oxen, not to 
the slaughter or mutilation of men. The fact that no mention is 
made of the houghing of the oxen in chap, xxxiv., affords no 
certainty that this was not done. It is there simply stated that 
they took the cattle ; and considering the conciseness of the 
narrative there, it need excite no surprise that an additional 
circumstance of cruelty is here introduced. This view agrees 
with the rendering of the LXX. : iv ry e7n6vp,iq avrcov evevpoKo- 
7T7](7av ravpov- 

3274. — Ver. 7. bJTVpJJ their wrath, comp. of pron. aff. and Pn55| 
subs, fern., which seems to convey the idea of passing a limit ; 
hence of excess; its usage is however limited to excess of anger. 
Koot "DJ^ passed over, exceeded. 

3275. hri^jj, in pause for HH^, 3 sing fern. pret. kal of T\W$. 
1. was hard; 2. was obdurate, unyielding, cruel. In our own 
language, hardness and cruelty are nearly allied. Thus there is a 
near connection between hard-hearted and cruel-minded. 

3276. ")$) MJT? Dj7?F!& 7 will divide them in Jacob and scatter 
them in Israel. The tribe of Levi was dispersed throughout the 
whole land of promise, forty-eight cities with their suburbs having 
been assigned to that tribe, in different parts of the country. 
Simeon's inheritance was in the heart of that of Judah, but as it 
increased in number it acquired additional territories from the 
Edomites and Canaanites, and was thus scattered in Israel. 

3277. dppHNI comp. of pron. aff. and 1 sing. pres. pih. of p/Pl 
divided. 



Ver. 6—9.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 271 

3278. DJ?*§K comp. of pron. aff. and 1 sing. pres. hiph. of ^3 to 
scatter. 

3279— Ver. 8. "tf| ^TP T\m !TW. as for thee, Judah, thy 
brethren shall celebrate thy praise, thy hand (shall be) upon the 
backs of thine enemies. There is here a paronomasia in PTOiT 
praised, and VlV, shewing that the name had been properly applied. 
See chap. xxix. 35, No. 2313. 

3280. £pj?? comp. of 5 and fcHJ?, subs. m. the neck, back of the 
neck, back ; LXX. vdoros. &pj?5 *|*7* is a figurative expression to 
describe chastisement of, or victory over enemies; the enemy 
being supposed to be flying, and the conqueror pursuing and 
smiting. 

3281. ")$) ^fittfe^ thy father's sons shall bow themselves before 
thee. The tribe of Judah was early signalised. It soon acquired 
precedence in the Israelitish army ; from it sprang the royal line ; 
and above all, the Messiah, before whom every knee shall bow. 

3282.— Ver. 9. PTHS Tti Judah (is) a lion's whelp. The com- 
parison of a brave man to a lion is common in Hebrew and also 
in other languages ; Deut. xxxiii. 20 ; Isaiah xxxi. 4 ; Horn. II. 
xii. 299 ; and is peculiarly appropriate on account of the noble 
mien, great strength, courage, and magnanimity of that animal. 

3283. 1)% subs. masc. a whelp. 

3284. DDK id. qu. n*}, masc. a lion. 

3285. ")Xi \JJ &p®?? from the prey hast thou gone zip, my son. 
The past tense is here and in many other parts of this chapter 
used for the future, a common usage in the prophetic style. From 
the prey shalt thou go up. See a similar instance in Virg. iEn. i. 
ver. 279 ; dedi imperium sine fine, for dabo. 

3286. tpfcp lit. rending, tearing to pieces ; hence the thing torn, 
prey, spoil. 

3287. ")%) yy~l $7*13 ? le oowe d> he fay down like a lion, and as a 
fierce she-lion, who shall rouse him ? Judah is here represented as 

a lion returning to his lair sated with prey, and though then 
indisposed to aggression, like a fierce she-lion sleeping in her den 
unwilling to brook provocation unrevenged, " In hac compara- 
tione est gradatio quaeclam : catulus leonis — leo adultus — leaena 



272 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xlix. 

quae utroque terribilius furit, qua imagine res fortiter gerendae 
a tribu Judae describantur." Eos. 

3288. JH3 3 sing. pret. hal ; by this word is described the 
position of an animal bending its legs before lying down in its 
lair. 

3289. ^5/?^ comp. of -) and 3 and ^5/ a fi erce she-lion, said 
to be more ferocious than the male. 

3290.— Ver. 10. "Ml £0^ "W K7 the sceptre shall not depart 
from Judah, nor a lawgiver from behveen his feet (from his posterity) 
until Shiloh shall come, to ivhom shall be the obedience of the nations 
(whom, the nations shall obey). 

3291. ^3^ m. a rod, a shepherd's staff, a rod of office, a hinges 
sceptre, a tribe. 

3292. ppHtt part. pih. m. of PfjH, parad. 6, used as a subs., one 
who cuts, engraves, decides (from caedo), decrees, legislates. 

3293. Tvyp. All commentators, ancient and modern, unite in 
understanding this word as referring to the Messiah, but there is 
great diversity of opinion as to its true reading and etymology. 
Prof. Lee states, on the authority of J aim (Heb. Bib. in loc), that 
the reading TvT'p was unknown till about the middle of the tenth 
century ; that till that time both Jews and Christians read T\y^ 
id. qu. 17^, contr. for w *)%?& which to him, i. e. to whom (apper- 
tained the dominion), viz. the Messiah. Compare Ezek. xxi. 32. 
fc^bn 17'^K Kb Ij; until he cometh to whom the right be- 
long eth. A great objection to this view is that this contraction of 
1£J^ is nowhere else used in the writings of Moses, and is one of 
the features of the later style. I prefer the understanding of 
(1 7^ as a proper name of the Messiah, signifying pacificator, or 
as Isaiah calls him, the Prince of Peace. See the different opinions 
upon this word fully set forth in Mr. Barretfs Synopsis of 
Criticisms ; in which work the student will find much valuable 
information from the best sources, which could not be otherwise 
obtained without much labour. 

3294. Dnjp^ fern, constr., only used here and in Prov. xxx. 17, 
in which latter text it evidently signifies obedience. This meaning, 
which is supported by that of a cognate Arabic word, is given by 
the Chaldee paraphrasts, in this passage. 



Ver. 9— 12.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 273 



3295. — Ver. 11. ")$\ ]ptO ^P^ binding his colt to the vine, mid 
his ass's foal to the choice vine. These words represent the fertility 
of the land of Judah as a wine country, where the inhabitants 
might allow their colts to feed among the vines ; and may like- 
wise be regarded as a figurative description of the blessings under 
Messiah's reign. 

3296. *1DX, with yod parag. for *)DX, part, act. hat m. of *1D^ 
bound. 

3297. ifVJ? a poetic form for Vl% comp. of pron. aff. and *\% 
with pron. an . TJ7 an ass, a young ass. 

3298 HDTfcy?! comp. of *l and -J, including the article, and 
HD 1 "!^ fern, form of pHW, a species of vine of superior quality. 

3299. 0? comp. of yod parag. and |3. 

3300. ")y\ 1^3/ D?3 he shall tvash his garments in wine, and 
his vesture in the blood of grapes. This is another example of the 
fertility of Judah's portion. The wine produced from it was to 
be so abundant as to be used for the same domestic purposes as 
water. 

3301. DJ? 3 sing. masc. pret. pih. of DM washed a garment; 
T*rn washed the body. 

3302. IfcnS comp. of ) pron. aff. and W&, in full 0»^, m. an 
tipper garment, from ^?7 put on clothing. 

3303. PlfflD comp. of H pron. affix for 1 and ftiD, either by 
aphaeresis for HID?, or a false reading of that word. The Sam. 
text has 1FVID3, from MD3 covered. 

3304— Ver. 12. \\*fc D?3S ^50 lit. refreshment of eyes by 
wine, abstr. for concr., refreshed of eyes, i.e. moderately exhilarated 
by wine, and hence fitted for great undertakings. See Prof. Lee's 
Lex. Hence the benefits of the wine possessed by Judah, if 
moderately used. The expression, " a giant refreshed by wine," 
is intended to indicate his great courage and strength. 

3305. vv3D only used hi this verse. The word is usually 
rendered redness, red ; but this rendering is obviously very un- 
suitable here. Judah's brethren could not be called upon to praise 
him for taking wine to excess, and such an idea is more unsuitable 
still in any figurative reference to the Messiah. Prof. Lee renders 

18 



274 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xlix. 

this word refreshed; Castell. and Golius, vino recreatus, nonprorsus 
ebrius ; LXX. x a P 07r0L0L 0i o<j)0a\fiol clvtov vTrep olvov. 

3306. nSfitt ^^"JS? 5 ! lit. and whiteness of teeth from milk, 
another figure designed to shew the rich abundance of Judah's 
inheritance in flocks and herds. The pointing of j57> constr. of 
|I}7, shews that it is to be regarded as a subs. 

3307. M# dual form of }g>, ground form )W ; the dual form 
probably indicates the upper and lower rows of teeth. 

3308. J?n subs. m. rich milk or cream. 

3309— Ver.13. "til ^ITT? JSWJJ Zebulun shall dwell by the shore 
of the seas. His territory extended from the lake of Gennesaret 
to the Mediterranean. 

3310. &pn? comp. of 7 and PSfl, m. a shore. 

3311. rV^tf &|in7 fctflMI lit. and he at the shore of ships, i.e. and 
he shall dwell at a shore frequented by ships (his boundaries 
reaching to Sidon). 

3312. n\?K plur. form of hjjfcj}, fern, form of W, a ship, a fleet 
of ships. 

3313. JT¥ 7g inpTI lit. and his side to Sidon, i.e. the side or 
boundary of his territory shall extend to Sidon. 

3314. fTV Sidon. 

3315. irOin comp. of \ and pron. aff. 1 and Hp^ fern, form of 
"TO* ground form ^pl* a seofe. 

3316— Ver. 14. dSu ifaTl *W&^ lit. Issachar an ass of bone, 
i. e. a strong-boned ass, and consequently able to bear burdens. 

3317. D*lJ, in pause for D 1 ^, m. a fowe. 

3318. DTlSBtePI p| pgi fy% fotfwem (within) the borders (of 
his inheritance) ; LXX. avairavofxevos ava fjbiaov rcov Kkrjpcov ; 
Vu]g. accubans inter terminos ; a figure drawn from pastoral life, 
and descriptive of cattle lying peacefully within their folds. It 
appears from what follows that reference is here made to Zebulun's 
peaceful and unwarlike disposition — to his confining himself 
within his own territories — and to his submitting patiently to 
injury and oppression. And he is compared to a strong ass from 
his capability of bearing burdens, and not from his warlike 
habits. 

3319. D?p$£fy?, in pause, a dual form, only used here. Of the 



Ver. 12—17.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 275 

various readings of this word we prefer that adopted by Rosen., 
who derives it from JlSfc^ placed, something placed, as a landmark. 
See No. 3318. 

3320.— Ver. 15. 131 HPOft tfl?] lit. <md 7*e saw the rest (resting 
place) that (it was) good, and the land (assigned to him) that it 
was pleasant, and lie bowed his shoulder to bear (the burden laid 
upon him), and he became a servant for tribute (a tributary servant). 
See No. 3318. Issachar's territory must have been greatly exposed 
to the incursions of the Syrians in their wars with the kings of 
Israel. 

3321. Plfi^?, in full nPl^fr, subs. fern, where one rests, a resting 
place, rest, from Pti3 to rest. The circumstance that SitO, which 
should agree with this word, is masc, affords a presumption that 
it is an abstract noun and not an adjective. See Storr., p. 82 ; 
Introduction, Part III. 

3322. n$tt, in pause for H/b^ 3 sing. fern. pret. hal of DJtt, 
was pleasant. 

3323. IMfe? his shoulder, comp. of pron. aff. and DJ^, ground 
form of D3^. 

3324. /2D / comp. of / and infill, constr. hal of 75p carried a 
load. 

3325. Do? comp. of 7 and Dft, ground form DD£?, masc. tribute. 
Gram. 115. 

3326. — Ver. 16. 1£J£ pT pj Dan shall judge his people as one of 
the tribes of Israel. On making mention of the first of the sons 
of the handmaidens, Jacob probably means to shew that these 
should not be regarded as degraded by their birth, or as inferior 
on that account to the other tribes. This privilege is inferentially 
conveyed to Naphtali, Gad, and Asher. 

3327. j^T 3 sing. m. pres. hal of J^ to judge, parad. 11. 

3328. *&3# constr.pl. oftO?^, ground form t?5^; see No. 3291. 
3329.— Ver. 17. "W Vni ppJT Ban shall be (as) a serpent by 

the highway, ready to spring upon the passer by. 

3330. rVT&H?g )&'{# a cerastes in the path. ]>>"%& subs, m., 
only used here, a kind of serpent, supposed to be the cerastes, 
nearly of the colour of sand, where it conceals itself and watches 
for an opportunity of springing upon its prey. 

18* 



276 ANALYSIS OF [Chap.xlix. 

3341. ")%) ^tiffZll that biteth the horse's heels, comp. of -H and 
part. act. m. kal of *tf&\ bit 

3342. ^3j5J?, with dag. euphon., constr. plur. of HDJJ the heel. 

3343. ""mIIK bph bk*) so that his rider shall fall backwards, 
from the horse's restiveness occasioned by the pain of the bite. 
This figurative description of Dan's craft in surprising and van- 
quishing his enemies, is well illustrated by his conquest of Laish, 
afterwards called Dan, recorded in the xviii. chap, of Judges. 

3344. *Q51 comp. of pron. afT. and part. act. hal of M'l rode, 
here used as a subs., rider. 

3345— Ver. 18. PliiT W}p ^HJfl^ / have expected (trusted 
in) thy salvation, Jehovah. These words seem to have no con- 
nection with what immediately precedes or follows, but to have 
been the result of a sudden burst of feeling, expressive of hope 
and trust in the promises of God. It could have been no temporal 
deliverance that Jacob expected for himself, and the words them- 
selves, and the solemn manner in which they were introduced, 
render it improbable that temporal deliverance for his posterity is 
referred to. The expression is similar to that used by Simeon 
when Christ was presented to him, "Mine eyes have seen thy 
salvation," i.e. the Saviour whom thou hast provided. Jacob's 
thoughts may have reverted to the Shiloh, to whom he refers in 
ver. 10 ; and he may have in consequence been induced to break 
forth in the expression of hope and trust in him, « I hope in the 
Saviour thou hast promised, O Lord." The following is Onkelos' 
paraphrase upon this verse, quoted by Bp. Patrick in Barrett's 
Synopsis of Criticisms : " I do not wait for the salvation of Gideon 
the son of Joash, which is temporal salvation : or of Samson the 
son of Manoah, which is also a transitory salvation ; but I expect 
the redemption of Christ the son of David." 

3346. ^HJW ,( ? comp. of 1 ?, contr. for h, pron. afT. and T0?\, 
fern, deliverance, salvation ; by meton. Saviour, from J?^* saved. 

3347. W^p 1 sing. pret.^'A. of Hip, parad. 13, hoped in, waited 
for, trusted in. 

3348.— Ver. 19. "til ti^J 1**7$ TJ (as for) Gad, a troop 
attack him, but he (in his turn) shall attack (their) rear. 



Ver. 17—21.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 277 

3349. 1)*l!\ subs. masc. : — 1. cutting, incision in the ground, a 
furrow ; 2. section, detachment of an army, troop. Root *H| cut. 

3350. ^iTl/liP comp. of pron. aff. 3 sing. masc. and J epenth., and 
3 sing. m. pres. kal of 1)%, cogn. TTil, ft? cw£, to penetrate, to rush 
into or upon, to attack. "TJP 3 sing. m. pres. W. 

3351. !2pJ? subs. m. £/*e heel, the rear of an army. 

3352— Ver. 20. "Ml P0£K> 1^«ft Ht. /row ^*Aer, Aw bread fat, 
and he shall give royal dainties, i.e. Asher's territory shall yield 
rich provisions ; it shall produce dainties for kings' tables. The 
fertility and richness of Asher's territory is figuratively described 
in Deut. xxxiii. 24, " by his dipping his foot in oil." 

3353. T\W& fern, of ]W, rich, fat, from }fi)B> oil. 

3354. tonS comp. of pron. aff., and Dh7, ground form of DH? 
bread. 

3355. *;Hy£? constr. pi. of D^Jfib what gives pleasure, delicacies, 
dainties, from |H$? pleasure. 

3356.— Ver. 21. "ttl fiS*N ^$3 Naphtali (is as) a toe? 7e* fooso, 
Ao giveth goodly words. We understand these words, which have 
greatly perplexed commentators, as referring to swiftness and 
eloquence, as characteristics of the tribe of Naphtali; although it 
cannot be ascertained from the subsequent history in what respects 
these qualifications were peculiar to that tribe. It is not known 
whether their swiftness was conspicuous in their freely ranging, in 
peaceful pursuits, the mountainous district where their inheritance 
was situated, or in fleeing from, or in pursuing their foes. Homer 
describes swiftness as one of the distinguishing qualifications of 
his bravest hero, ttoBcls odkvs M^tWeu? ; and David describes Saul 
and Jonathan as being "swifter than eagles." It is uncertain 
whether Naphtali's goodly words were conspicuous, in his tact in 
the management of public business, or in giving those soft answers 
that turn away wrath, or in over-mastering his opponent by the 
force of eloquence. Many commentators support an ingenious 
conjecture by Bockhart, which others of equal learning repudiate 
on account of the unwarrantable liberty taken with the text, and 
likewise upon other grounds. See Mr. Barrett's Synopsis of 
Criticisms. According to this conjecture, the reading and sense 
are as follow: *)%& n&K ]TfiT} T\rh& r»T« '?fi63 lit. Naphtali 



£78 ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xlix. 

(is as) a tree of shoot (with shoots) that produceth branches of 
beauty. The former view seems to be preferred by Patrick, Ros., 
Ges., Lee, and Schumann. 

3357.— Ver.22. "ttl tpV ft*p J3 lit. « fruitful son Joseph, a 
fruitful son by a fountain, i.e. a fruitful branch of a tree growing 
by a fountain. Compare Ps. i. 3. |3 which in this place represents 
PHNS) fern, a bough, is joined with rH3 fern., and as Ros. says, 
" Est igitur constructio sensu congrua, non voce." 

3358. n^jli) a peculiar form of PH3, fern, of part. act. kal of PHS, 
^<2s fruitful. 

3359. ^g constr. plur. of hll, No. 13. 

3360. "Ml n*j8Jf ftMS (whose) branches shoot over the wall. 
Allusion is made to a vine trained to a wall, by fastening the 
shoots that overtopped it, to a weight suspended on the other side. 
A plural noun is here, according to a common Hebrew idiom, 
construed with a singular verb when a distributive sense is im- 
plied ; every one of the branches overtopped the wall. 

3361. rn$?.^ 3 sing. pret. kal of *7J?¥, par ad. 3, proceeded, went 
up, etc. 

3362. W subs. m. a wall. 

3363.— Ver. £3. 'Ml )T)) ^fiTjfc?! the lords of arrows (archers) 
bitterly distressed him, shot (at) him, and spitefully treated him, 
a figurative description of his brothers' spiteful and cruel treatment 
towards him. 

3364. ^rrVj^l comp. of ) and pron. aff., and 3 plur. pres. pih. of 
1*112 ; in kal, was bitter ; Lat. amarus fuit ; in pih. became bitter, 
embittered, etc. 

3365. Eh) comp. of ) and 3 plur. pret. kal of 33*1 Mo*. By 
some this word is regarded as cognate with ^*] to contend with. 

3366. ^JlJbfcp^fJ comp. of -) and pron. aff. and 3 plur. masc. pres. 
kal of Dtob* /WeoJ to excess ; cogn. }t?BP. 

3367. D^rt plur. of ^Flj ground form VVfy o;^ arrow. 
3368.— Ver. 24. 1fi#j2 JJV&3 3#Jjl yet his bow abode in strength, 

continued strong, did not break, nor lose its elasticity; a figure 
descriptive of Joseph's courage and constancy in the midst of trials 
and dangers. 



Ver. 21—25.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 279 

3369. JH*X3 comp. of 3 and \N$, m. strength ; likewise used 
with the. prep, as an attributive, strong. 

3370. "Ml VT *jjl? tt£Jl lit. and the arms of his hands (his arms) 
were nerved by the hands of the mighty one (God) of Jacob. 

3371. 1-T££1 comp. of -1 and 3 plur. masc. pres. hal of ?]3, a word 
expressive of the complex idea of agility and strength, which cannot 
be easily expressed in our language without a circumlocution. 

3372. T3&? constr. of T3tf , m. strong, powerful one. 

3373. Pljp D&^ft /rem ^cwce the shepherd, the rock of Israel. 
Ros. understands D&^ft /rom that time, and thus understands the 
passage. From that time he (i.e. Joseph) was the feeder and 
stone of Israel, i. e. he fed his father and brethren in Egypt, and 
supported them as a pillar or foundation-stone. The word Dfc^ft 
however more naturally refers to God, from whom is Christ the 
Shepherd, who feeds his people, and who is the foundation-stone 
upon which their faith and hopes are reared. Of this word, 7Xft 
in the beginning of the next verse, seems to be exegetical. The 
word D^, besides, is very seldom used as expressive of time. 

3374— Ver. 25. "Ml ^3$ ^tfS from thy fathers' God and he 
(who) ivill help thee, and (from) the Almighty and he (who) will 
bless thee, i. e. who will continue to aid and bless thee, ft before 
7X is understood before HK, thus Htfftl. 

3375. ;p.TSr_l comp. of 1 and pron. aff. 2 pers. sing., and J epenth. 
implied in the dagesh in *1, and 3 sing. m. pres. hal of 1TQ helped. 

3376. "Ml ti\fo$ n3 , l3 (with) the blessings of the heavens above, 
with the blessings of the deep that lieth beneath, ivith the blessings 
of the breasts and womb. The meaning seems to be that his 
posterity should be planted in a very fertile soil, watered from 
above by the dew of heaven and showers of rain, and watered 
from beneath by springs and rivers ; and that they should have a 
numerous and thriving progeny, or a vast increase of cattle. 
See Mr. Barrett's Synopsis in loc. 

3377. r013 constr. plur. of rD*^ su ^ s - ^ em - a blessing. 

3378. ?J£ft comp. of ft for -ft, Gr. 19, and 7JJ, subs.: — 1. sum- 
mitas ; and, 2. per meton., the highest one, commonly applied to 
God ; 3. likewise used adverbially, as in this place. 



280 • ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xlix. 

3379. t3?W dual of *]p \ masc. : — 1. an animaVs dug; 2. a 
toomarts breast. 

3380. lDPT"J m. the womb, in pause for fiJl*]. 

3381.— Y Jr. 26. "Ml ¥"0| ^3« fib 1 "!? % /«^er'« blessings 
have prevailed above the blessings of my progenitors, even to the 
bounds of the everlasting hills, i.e. the blessings conferred by- 
Jacob on his son Joseph were greater than those conferred by- 
Abraham on Isaac, and by Isaac on Jacob himself, in as far as 
what was temporal was concerned; and their prevailing to the 
bounds of the everlasting hills, marks their perpetuity. This is 
the view taken by Ros. and others. There are some who, after 
the LXX., among whom is Ges., suppose **T,ifi to be an irregular 
plur. of n n, an old form of "in a mountain. By others, fil^H is 
rendered desire, what is most desirable, the richest productions of 
the everlasting hills, such as the vine, pasture for flocks, metals, 
and the like. The principal difficulty lies in the word ^Tiil. In 
regard to which Prof. Lee, in his Lex. sub. voc, says : " It is 
difficult to extract a tolerable sense when it is rendered mountains. 
The Jewish interpretation, progenitors, labours under this defect, 
that the verb rnn appears never to be applied in any other sense 
except that of conception by the female, which in this place is 
incongruous. Both therefore seem unsuitable here. Now we 
have in the Arabic (IIH) signifying, grex ovium, pec. ubi prae 
multitudine aliae in alias prolabuntur ; Kamoos. If then we apply 
this to our passage we shall have, the blessings of thy father have 
been great above my numerous flocks, even to the desire of the ever- 
lasting hills-, that is, the blessings which have attended me are 
far greater than the wealth which God gave me during the times 
of my hard servitude with Laban; they extended to the desire 
for him who is emphatically styled the stone, the rock of Israel 
(ver. 24, it. Psa. xciv. 4 ; cxxi 1 ; cxxv. 2), the everlasting hills. 
«P?nin such blessings, that is, greater than those bestowed upon 
Joseph during his hard servitude (VFfNt *VTJ) m Egypt shall rest 
upon him. This seems to me to suit the place well, comparing 
the circumstances of the father with those of the son, and carrying 
the blessing beyond the extent of mere temporal things. Compare 
ver. 18, and Deut. xxxiii. 15, where "\X\ ^THH KWlJ? from the 



Ver. 20—28.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 281 

head of the eternal mountains, and from the majesty of the ever- 
lasting hills, i.e. from God himself, seems to supply the best 
interpretation possible to the place in question." page 152. See 
an excellent Synopsis of Criticisms upon this very difficult passage 
in Mr. Barrett's work, already referred to. 

8382. rOKtt constr. form of PlJKJ?, sub. fern., according to the 
first view above given: — .1. boundary, from HXJn bounded, in which 
sense I can find it nowhere else used; 2. desire, an object of desire, 
from ill**. See No. 332. 

8383. *lp*jD7 comp. of 7 and ^P'l&j m. the crown of the head. 
3384. *W3 separated, referring to Joseph's residence in Egypt, 

before Jacob came thither ; likewise rendered distinguished, illus- 
trious; constr. form of 1 % JJ: — 1. one set apart as a Nazarite, 
separated; 2. distinguished, illustrious. 

3385— Ver.27. "til S\*p) 3gJ \%^ Benjamin (as) a wolf shall 
ravin i in the morning he shall eat the prey, and shall divide th. 
spoil till the evening. According to others, "the tribe of Benjamin 
shall be like a ravening wolf, who shall have his prey to eat till 
morning-light, after he hath divided it in the evening." See 
Barrett's Synopsis. Judah and Benjamin are described as great 
warriors; Judah's are the combats of the lion; Benjamin's the 
nocturnal attacks of the wolf. By these figures the characteristics 
of these two tribes are graphically pointed out. 

3386. 13XT subs. masc. a tcolf These animals are sometimes 
called y$ ^5^? tcolves of the evening, from their habits of prowling 
about at night in search of their prey. They were called by the 
Greeks, Xvkoi vvfCTeptvoi. 

3387. ti[p\ in pause for SptD*, 3 sing. masc. pres. kal of Cp&, 
parad. 3. 

3387 * p7?T 3 sing. m. pres. pih. of p7H, parad. 2, divided. 

3388. HJJ subs. masc. prey. 

8389. //?* su bs. masc. spoil, plunder. 

3390. — Ver. 28. ")X\ *1G?W B^X unicuique, quod secundum bene- 
dictionem suam benedixit illis, i. e. cuique, propria, privata, et 
conveniente benedictione benedixit, juxta id quod cuique even- 
turum esset. Bos. 



ANALYSIS OF [Chap. xlix. 29. 

3391.— Ver. 29. S|pKJ 1 sing. pret. nijph. of S|DK, parad.7, lam 
on the point of being gathered. 

3392. 'Ml ^bK"bs W FQp lit. Wy me to my fathers, to the 
cave. This is what is called a constructio praegnans : take me to 
my fathers, to the cave of Machpelah, and bury me there, i. e. bury 
me with my fathers in the cave of Machpelah. The Latin ex- 
pressions, abdidit sese in silvas, is somewhat similar, " he went 
into the woods to hide himself;" and, Haec nunciant domum 
Albani, "the Albans go home and communicate these tidings." 
Liv. lib. i. cap. 23. See also Matt. ii. 23 ; and Glassius, p. 452. 
Jacob now gives the charge to all his sons which he had before 
given to Joseph alone. 

3393— Yer. 33. t\W> comp. of ? and inf. pih. of fittf. 

3394. n^J?>rrS^ vSih *|DK*1 and he drew up his feet into the 
bed. Jacob was perhaps sitting upon his bed with his feet on the 
ground, but on feeling exhausted, and perceiving his end near, he 
drew his feet into the bed, placed himself in a recumbent posture, 
and expired. 

3394.*— Chap. 1.2. D^hft the physicians; LXX. evrafyiaaTas, 
those that fitted and prepared bodies for interment by embalming 
them. ee Mos est iEgyptiis cadaver a asservare medicata." Plin. 
lib.xi. cap. 37. See Mr. Barrett's Synopsis. Comp. of Jl and pi. 
of tf§1, part. act. kal of N^ 1 ! healed. 

3395. t0iri7 to embalm, comp. of 7 and infin. constr. kal of tDjll 
embalmed; Gr. apay^arl^eiv, Aq.; 3 plur. m. pres. kal ^tDjtC, and 
plur. m. of pass. part, kal D*fcp3fi. 

3396. — Ver. 4. 1JV55 comp. of pron. aff. and JVpSl, £ weeping, 
lamentation, from PD|1 wept. 

3397. V&y*\ comp. of •} and 3 plur. masc. pres. kal of 152, 
passed, passed away. 

3398. — Ver. 5. H/& *JJX / dying, I am about to die. 

3399. W*!? i" have purchased, 1 sing pret. kal of fn5 id. qu. 
POP purchased. 

3400. rH5p$! lit. and 1 bury, that I may bury, comp. of 1 and 
H parag., and 1 sing. m. pres. kal of ^Ojp, parad. 4. 

3401. ni^X'l comp. of \ and Pi parag., and 1 sing. pres. kal of 
M0 



Chap. 1.17.] THE BOOK OF GENESIS. 283 

S402. ^p? constr. plur. of JDJ, an old man, here used not to 
designate age, but dignity. In Arab, scheikh means senex. 

3403. — Yer. 9. ^37. subs. m. a chariot, here used collectively. 

3404. d*B5H3 horsemen, pi. of BH3, penult, vowel immoveable, 
quasi Kn$. 

3405. — Ver. 10. p5 subs, m.: — 1. <m o/?ew space-, 2. a threshing 
floor. 

3406. {*T"!*n "Dy.lSl "Beyond or ow ^5 s/cfe of fAe Jordan, for the 
word signifies both, and it may be taken either way here ; the one 
in respect of Egypt, the other in regard to the place in which 
Moses wrote. It is certain they fetched a great compass, whether 
for the commodiousness of the way for their chariots, and for 
convenience for so great a company, or to prevent all jealousies 
in the people, as if they came thither with ill design, is not 
material." Pool, quoted by Mr. Barrett. 

3407. *T5p£? subs, lamentation, wailing, from H$p lamented. 

3408. /5^ niasc. mourning. 

3409.— Yer. 11. DH3K? hltt, LXX. 7reV0o? Alylirrov, the mourn- 
ing of Egypt (of the Egyptians); 7?^ another form of /3K, 
No. 3408, but according to Ges. and Eos., plain. See Ges. Lex. 

3410. — Yer. 14. *H5p Am burying, comp. of pron. aff. and 1?&> 
with the accent *!5p, ground form of "Dp, inf. kal constr. of "Op. 

3411— Yer. 15.* W]H, in full Wy% comp. of •) and 3 plur. m. 
pres. kal of ^*1^, parad. 8, 2 form, feared ; and ^K'Vtt, in pause for 
'IX'I^, 2 plur. m. pres. kal of the same. 

3412. t|DV ^Ibtp^J ^17 should Joseph deal cruelly with us. See 
Prof. Lee's Lex. under }/. 

3413. ^Jbtp&P*. comp. of pron. aff. 1 plur. and 3 sing. masc. pres. 
kal of D&b ;' cogn. ?tDB>. 

3414. W&3 ive rendered (him), 1 pi. pret. kcd of 7??3 rendered, 
rendered like for like, recompensed, repaid ; 3 plur. pret. kal \ 7£?|, 
with the accent removed to the pron. aff. tL ^7^1, ver. 17. 

3415 Ver. 16. fc|DV"7i$ VlXJi lit. «we? £/^y commanded Joseph, 

i. e. they delivered a command to him, which they pretended had 
been given by their father ; constructio praegnans. 

3416. — Ver. 17. K3^, likewise written K3X, an interjection, 
I pray. 



284 ANALYSIS OF GENESIS. [Chap. 1. 19— 26. 

3417. WW forgive, 2 sing. m. imp. kal of &£0, parad. 5 and 12. 

3418— Ver. 19. "til nrWl *3 /or am / t£ \he place of God? 
viz. to take it upon me to execute vengeance ; and am I warranted 
to thwart his gracious purposes towards you by so doing. 

3419.— Ver. 20. EM^H 2 plur. m. pret. kal of 2£>n, parad. 2, 
thought, devised ; and H^^n comp. of mJ~ fern. pron. aff., which is 
generally found where the neut. would be required in languages 
which have that gender ; and 3 sing. masc. pret. kal of the same. 
Gr. 74. 

3420. T\m, the same with T\W% inf. abs. kal of Jlfcty 

3421. — Ver. 21. /j75&$ will support, 1 sing. pres. pilp. of /)2, 
already analysed. 

3422. — Ver. 23. W$y$ pi. m. posterity of the third generation, 
sons being reckoned as the first, great-grandchildren. 

3423. ")y\ s Sl l 2r7j!i ^TPj lit. were born upon Joseph's knees, a 
constructio praegnans, were placed when they were born upon 
Joseph's knees. "Apud antiquissimos Graecos deponebantur 
nepotes in avi genibus si adesset, uti liquet ex. Odyss. xvi. 401." 
Kos. Some think that by this expression it is to be understood 
that the children were reared in Joseph's house, and under his 
care. 

3424. — Ver. 25. $^3^*1 and caused to swear, and bound by an 
oath, comp. of *J and 3 sing. m. apoc. pres. hiph. of J?3^ not used 
in kaL 

3425. 0rn§rfi and ye shall carry up, comp. of 1 and 2 pers. pi. 
masc. pret. hiph. of Tw$. 

3426. — Ver. 26. DGJ^?1 and (one) placed him, his body teas placed, 
comp. of -) and 3 sing. m. pres. kal of D^ id. qu. D^. 

3427. p^5 in the chest, or coffin, which had been prepared for 
him, comp. of 3, including the article, and pllSI subs. m. a chest 
or coffin, in which bodies that were embalmed were placed. 



INDEX 



TOK 



N 





. INK 

T 


1901 . . 




T 


1883 . . 




T 


825. . 




. *3S 


826. . 




^58 


2152 (a). 




V5K 


523 . . 




^58 


869 . . 




tm* 


1133 . . 




f»M 


2313 . . 






1728 (a). 




Sax 


986 . . 




t -; 


990 . . 




■ m 


3251 . . 




ma 

V T • 


1582 . . 




dnraa 

x t ; — 


24. . 




TW8 


1629 . . 




VW 


1347 . . 




t ; — 


2251 . . 




T -; ; 


555. . 




TO**? 


45 . . 




DIN 

T T 


999 . . 




♦jfaiN 


3343 . . 




'3^8 


2043 . . 




W 


1833 . . 



[285] 



• JTW 


2475 . . 


T — • 


1211 . . 


. BhT$ 


435 . . 


ti#TBJ 


3278 . . 


t; t 
• t t; 


3263 . . 

2618 . . 

550. . 

568 . . 


. nnix 


615. . 


. rrria 


831 . . 


T 


1802 . . 


. ym 


550 . . 


. .^K 


1493 (c). 


T 


550. . 


X 


875 . . 

286. . 

998 . . 

1099 . . 


T 


472 . . 


T V 


1367 . . 


. T _. 


1816 . . 


T 


1816 . . 


. njnk 


903 . . 


• ntn^ 


354 . . 



raw 
• V$ 

D*P!K 

T _. _ 

X V 

t ; 

raw 



h* 



1801 . 


..,.!« 


3356 . 


XT - 


1195. 


. px| y$ 


1304. 


X " 


1145. 


. . maw 

T • 


202. 


/,.1» 


713. 


T V " 


1285 . 


T V T * 


472. 


. . na^ 


294, 


302, . . &$ 


390. 


. . ^k 


743, 


2080. . T|K 


930. 


. . .ISK 


265. 


. . .Sbx 


2939 . 


. . .>* 


1964. 


. . rt^ss 


2169. 


t : x 


1251 . 


. . sfepK 


268. 


. . i?£ 


324. 


. .arfaa 


3421 . 


. 3}j£ 


1210. 


x : x 


363. 


. ti$r?3*j 


2478. 


. • $38 


364. 


• • J? 1 ??*? 


2720. 


; xx—; 


2539. 


. ,m£OK 


71 . 


. . :-hi 


1500 . 


. . .-b« 


193. 


■ . ,nW 



2657. 
3 . 

2666. 
1069 (a) 

2685. 

897. 

981 . 
2696 . 
2775. 
2775. 
2696 . 
2696. 
1987. 

306 . 



INDEX. 



458,1761,3187.DK 



670. 
1946 . 

632. 
1709. 
3158. 

306. 

306. 
1955 • 
1635. 
1701 . 
1499 . 
1548 (a) 

316 . 

952 . 
2855. 



. nm 

x - 

T • 

VftlfiN 

x ; - 

X X 

. .tea* 

x ; t • 

x ; x 

x ; \ 

x ; v 

- X 



[286] 



1097 . 
21 . 

538 . 
1704, 
1942. 
2997. 
2997 . 
2936 . 
1370. 
3416 . 
3312. 

554. 

619. 
2960. 
2835 . 
2344. 

799. 
2153. 
2244 . 
3152. 
3025. 

272. 
2257. 
1967. 
1577 . 
3030^ 

401 . 
3278 . 

316. 
3188. 



• t ; * 

1666, &m 

• n £$ 
taring 

.> 

X X 
X X 

' t; 

.t)pfc 

km 

X — 

.rittt 

X X 

2190 . NiStf 



Dnaa 



INDEX. 



D^l 



2945 . . 


• X J V 


755. 


. . ana 

xx - : 


163 . 


. . .ink 


2945 . . 


. rtTi&s 


1731 . 


. A^'m 


235 . 


. }|rrnx 


2587 . . 


x • — 


380. 


X 


691 . 


• • T *m 


2830 . . 


» ■ * 


1144. 


T . . — 


699 . 


• • ^P 


2200 . . 


x ; - x 


1337. 


. . m 


2975 . 


. . &3fiK 


1446. . 


• bt?« 


1917. 


X J 


4, 116 . D11K 

* X 


1122 . . 


. .nj?K 


1764 (a) 


. JfiB>tf 


1204. 




2541 . . 


. nana 


1492. 


X 


2403 . 


. . bbm 


1051 . . 


. 3** 


2358 . 


X X 


1071 . 


. - . IfflJ 


385, 1811 


3 Hpfi 


258, £ 


m, ^m 


1071 . 


. . nin** 

x : •■ 


1824 . . 


JOTS 


1553 . . 


. n*nf a 


1116 . 


. . una 


581 . . 


D^K 


1873 . . 


• X 


2583. 


. ft^pnK 


1525 . . 


. stjtb 


2216. 


. hs&$ 


1165. 


. n^n*? 


956. . 




2851 . 


ri^W^ 


1116. 


. r\:m 


3427 . . 


.jm 


894. . 


. ni^« 






2187, 374 


, ** 


1773 . 


. ^*? 




n 


393 . . 


mm 

X ~J 


2787 . . 


. nWa 


1 . 


- • 4 


1493 (g). . 


.mfc 


2704 . . 


TD^ 


697, 1346, 2764 Ki3 


2729 . . 


nrnx 


2082 . . 


X X 


653, 1862. . K3 

7 X 


3284 . . 


JTTW 


2983 . . 


. D^aftf 


1323 . 


X X 


671 . . 


•T* 


2360 . . 


. *\hm 


2296. 


irdnxa 
T _. _ . 


929 . . 


■TK 


1899 . . 


. njg^8 


1491 . 


X 


2077 . . 


»1K 

; x 


59, 9 


l, . *>#*? 


886. . 


" t; x ; 


971 . . 


x — ; 


2332 . . 


•• X 


2875 . 


X X 


2359 . . 


STJTW 


176 . . 


ISngg 


3248 . 


rnrm 


1033 . . " 


x ; - ; - 


2331 . . 


. ^WK 


1849 . 


.. . x . 


8 . . 


■rw 


246. . 


x ••• ~: 


1694. 


on^TK? 


1047. . 


x ; ~ 


294. . 


. *nm 


1850 . . 


. . *K3 

*• X 


597. . 


x— ; •• 


294. . 


. y$ffe 


3218 . 


. . *tt 


2187. . 


Tt$* 


28, 5 

V 


13. . HK 

287] 


1493 (e) 


• X 



|r«tt 



3369 . . 

962 . . 

1173 . . 

962. . 

2509 . . 

211, 735 

3269 . . 

1393 . . 

3427 . . 

3280 . . 

144. . 

905 . . 
1734 

1206 . . 

1746 . . 

2330 . . 

308. . 

1369 . . 
2116, 2968 

2389 . . 

2973 . . 

2863 . . 

2025 . . 

2162 . . 

3111 . . 

928 . . 

44. . 

2646 . . 

1427 . 

2329 . 



njga 

T 
T 

VSNS 

t — ; 

.183 



Drtnxa 

t ; - ; 

n1$a 

^Btea 

• ; t ; 

m^3 
nxa 

T 

aaa 
.naa 



rvaa 
*aaa 

V T 

ipaa 



&31&?>33 



INDEX. 


nan 




2160. 


■ • '^5 


1676 . . . 


D1S53 


2743 . 


. . vnia 

TT • 


1620 . . 


nbftha 


1104. 


• «fci 


1201, T&fi 

3 T T 


p^.53 


350. 


. . 113 


2013 . . CD 


T1V53 


2145. 


• "1313 


738 .. . 


nanna 

T TT J 


159, 


. WIS 


3243 . . . 


'3153 


700. 


. ifaa 


609 .. . 


nnii 

T T 


157, 559 . rMTl3 


1705. . , 


atea 


1943 . 


• • TBI 


2627 . . . 


5£?3 


643 . 


.vrrna 

t ; 


2321 . . . 


. }£3 


194 (a) 


DNia53 


3034 . . . 


B*jpj 


1718 . 


v t • ; 


2446 . . . 


.*)b3 


467. 


.anvna 

t : • 


3052 . . . 


. '3 


1189. 


. .cna 

t ; 


3013 . . . 


m 


147 . 




817 .. . 


D 3T3 


1453. 


. . iSbn3 


118, 184 . 


. t^»i 


2624. 


.dmia 

t ; v ; 


3300 . . . 


.p 


2398 . 


. *)W53 


141 . • . 


pwa 


1651 . 


. "sprja 


32 . . . 


• rs 


2674. 


nnfewia 

t |: - : 


32. . : 


ITO| 


1653 . 


X T 


698 .. . 


. jvg 


1194. 


. 0*3153 


2827 . . . 


rura 

T *' 


3109. 


jT3SW3 


698 .. . 


'fVS 


2987 . 


ittnnna 

: r : • : 


2667 . . . 


rwaa 

T 


91 . 


. . IS 


3396 . . . 


ijvaa 


400. 


. fijy.3 


130 . . . 


.Saa 


716. 


. Bhha 


1425 . . . 


*]533 


790, 66 


7 . pna 


668 .. . 


i#aa 


2217 . . 


. **na 


2462 . . . 


.133 


1357 . . 


. 1(753 


949 .. . 


haa 



[288] 



*[naia 



rn^g 

nrnSa 

. D3 

T 

napa 

Ta&a 

n^a 

x - 

njnaa 



STJJ3W 

rtai&g 
vanaa 

t ; t ; 

.fi^a 

. tag 

T 

ntaa 

T 

«*ritaa 



19 



INDEX. 


2097 . . 


^M3 


3220 . . 


arfcma 


607. a^Krr;ig 


389. . 


.ma 

• T 


2680 . . 


rvm 


1777 . . . 


■ W 


1000 . . 


QJtwa 


1672 . . . 


W19 


821, 824 


i£?S33 


1682 . . . 


tm 


1804 . . . 


W 


3267 . . 


Dtba 

t ; 


3189 . . 


D^Da 


2864 . . 


■•» 


1598 . . 


cnoea 


394. . 


TJiaes 


1548 (6). . 


D^a^a 
T _ . — 


3406 . . 


"135?.? 


1711 . . 


• IB? 


724. . 


ma 


216 . . 


mi 


546 . . 


itya 


2144 . . 


tiaaa 


1615 . . 


. p$?.3 


734. . 


^ 


639 . . 


*31H 


1705 . . 


TW? 


3136 . . 


Da^ya 


1679 . . 


. '.y 


1215 . . 


. ^ai 



ypa 



[289] 



1679 

841 

2308 

840 

387 

395 

718 

2044 

1156 

3280 

576 

1187 

781 

2050 

2784 

2785 

438 

2678 

1064 

679 

3045 

1589 

162 

156 

2736 

2781 

3268 

2019 

2883 

1928 



fti>j?a 

■BBS 
a^g 

W? 



TSS 



W3 

rvsa 

T • ; 

.v$g 
nrisa 
nn§a 
p&a 
nxva 
inxva 
rma 

T • ; 

tnnra 

'■'% 

to 1 ?*? 
we^sa 

t)^a 
D7npa 
innpa 

mpa 



rgfb 



INDEX. 



+hl 



1001 . . 


• njp 


1057 


. . nrns 

t t ; 


1295 . 


. 


1846 . . 


• ilXj*3 


2179 


. . tors 




44. . 


• •*# 


3423 


. . '515 


* 


1112 . . 


• -m 


2322 . 


. . '515 


3118 . . 


• a i$? 


3229 


. . vna 

x ; • 


961 .. . 


1495 . . 


T :)• : 


2188 


. .. ~. T 


3082 . 




1824 . . 


▼ :|- : 


1314 


. . ^15 


3082 . 




1805 . . 


' n -1P? 


2222 


. . n515 


2186 . 




3244 . . 


• *titfpi 


3377 . 


. . rbi5 


3381 . 




2917 . . 


. is 

X 


2576. 


. . Tins 
. T . . 


1860 . 




2. . 


>i*ls 

TT 


96. 


. • SPj?1l 


921 . 




558 . . 


.Si| 


2719 . 


. . .-nil 


3381 . 




784. . 


ji#*na 


468. 


V X — 


1355 . 




1 . . J 


■v^lt 


2010 . 


T .. . 


1355 . 




1132 . . r 


w*ns 

x • X 


2446 . 


T I ' « 


1355 . 




2873 . . 


nana 


289, 


612 . I^i 

X X 


3349 . 




633 . . 


this 

XX 


1451 . 


. . ifa 


2150. 




2414 . . 


tflll 


611 . 




1605 . 




882, 1939 


•F* 


1190 . 


xx ; 


1605 . 




2124 . . 


I 5 "? 


1650 . 


. . nhfa 


1514. 




533. . 


bn» 


1664 . 


. ns^s 


1177. 




2212 . . 


nia 


2126 . 


. . di%s 

x ; 


3193 . 




2435 . . 


■ 0^ 


3202 . 


. rtwa#a 


2067, 32 


82. 


1572 . . 


srns 


2269 . 


. . . toa 


1765 . 




2387 . . 


• x ;t 


49, 


228 . 1J1H5 


2777 . 




1372 . . 


nrns 


1908 . 


. . n^na 


375 . 




1339 . . 


nns 


3047 . 




2561 . 




689. . 


WIS 


3137 . 


. . dsts 

v •• X 


253 . 




1810. . 


■T» 


1681 . 


. . -Dns 

x ; 


2490 . . 




1863 . . 


•111 


1294. 


. . .ins 

~ X 

[290] 


2265 . . 





una 



*v 


W 




INDEX. 


ym 


2492 . . 


• 'flfe 


1 






n 


339 . . 


. . D$ 




1 






1117. . 


. d^&i 






2056. 


. . Dnxn 

T T 


3414 . . 




1063 


. . . .1|^ 


153 . 


.T T "J T 


887. . 


. . iftii 


1953 


. ... .151 


2004 . 


. ronton 

t v; t 


215 . . 


. . fl 


2693 


. . . n3i 


28 . 


. . nton 

T 


2862 . . 


. . »b 


1271 


. . ^BR 


537. 


. . T)$m 


2477 . . 


•M3I 


1475 


T . - . 


1593 . 


• • 1080 


2368 . . 


T 


2689 


. . tanrr 

T T ' 


1448 . 


• rvjJiSO 


2862 . . 


^11 


3032 


. . ^ 


2975 . 


. r\mr\ 
... ...... 


2461 . . 


— T T • 


816 


... \ii 


3245. 




2845 . . 


. • m 


2183 . 


. . . |« 


2974. 




661 . . 


. i|i 


911 . 


• • -m 


1536 . 


• .*|*tfJ 


1643 . . . 


man 


900 . 


• T 


2837 . 


T 


1308, 1829 . 


. ^ 


2334. 


* T 


7 . 


• nw 


952 . . . 


• t ; • 


2343 . 




2949 . 


nixixn 

*—; t 


3317 . . . 


• B03 


2898 . 


3041 . 




3405 . . . 


. ri* 


2468 . 


• • #1 


1528 . 


T T ~ 


1673 . . . 


. inn 


477. 


. • . w 


2961 . 


. p*garj 


963 .. . 


TT ; 


823 . 


. • DJOT 


2091 . . 


rhxipri 


1726 . . . 


.#JJ 


1268 . 


. . pwnn 


2577 . . 




492, 418 . 


T . — .. 


1313, 


i 

2324. . fj 


250 . . 


nSn^in 


1764 . . . 


t ; — 


2323 . 


" — T 


1005 . . 


T T 


2504 . . . 


•J5T3 


1693 . 


. . . JT3 


3186 . . 


. . van 


2172 . . . 




987 . 


. • #! 


1275 . . 


• PW 


1591 . . HJ 


r ; t 


2876 . 


. . ni|Ti 


443 . . 


. 8*53 


3114 . . . 


. ^ 


426. 


. • -TO 


1520 . . 




3128 . . . 


• #1 


651 . 


. . \my 


2142 • . 


T • T 


2565 . . . 


in^ 


82 . 


• • Wft 


1656 . . 


t • : - 


974 .. . 


• iPI 


2711 . 


. . r\y.rh 


1483 . . 


It T - 



[291] 



DKW 


INDEX. 


npvn 


194(a), 560 d*n|fl 


1873 . . 


. n^nn 
.. T v 


1023 . . 


7 ' ~ 


2719 . . 


. nran 


91 . . 


. . tfin 


2714 . . 


r\)6bm 


2850 . . 


T&&PJ 


1549 . . 


♦j-tatfn 


2161 . . 


rn&rjn 


3234 . . 


. hxixn 


3046 . . 


. *Q« 


1012 . . 


T *' — 


733 . . 


d^nhin 


2922 . . 


. JPTB1 


2519 . . 


DHDPjn 


618 . . 


tnsin 


2185 . . 


. . njq 


1651 . . 


.rft&qn 


2132 . . 


. Sniin 

. T- 


556 . 


. ^h^ 


423 . . 


• 3733 


109 . . 


BvlSB 


245 . 


. nS"iq 


1193 . 


. HhTJ 


1121 . . 


T . - . 


569 . 


. n^in 


34. 


. ^nn 


904. . 


. tnri 


1264 . 


• ^in 


2803 . 


rvgfjm 


1339 . . 




790. 


• raffiJ 


2762. 


. T - — 


359 . . 


. Tin 


1582. 


. K>rtn 


701 . 


min&n 

t ; — 


2285 . . 


T * - 


1231 . 


. wjrtn 


2651 . 


. man 

— ; x • 


1932 . 


. n\ri 


1582. 


. dk w 


1896. 


. . w 


1997 . . 


TT - 


2801 . 


rfi«nrtn 

T 


3180. 


. ^n 


1724. 


•• x • 


1282 . 


. f w#n 


2870. 


. ik!& 


1912. 


W*M5 


2813 . 


. . Tjin 


75. 


X T 


235 . 


. . . JIO 


2813 . 


. ^innnin 


3021 . 


' SfrTSa 


1342 . 


. . -an 

T T 


2998 . 


. . n$n 


2267. 


. bfBTK) 


2172 . 


T * — 


3172. 


. . ~'sgnn 


1511 . 


. . . vn 

T 


717. 


• • SVfi 


246. 


T T- 


765. 


. . n^V^n 


1387 . 


. . wn 


2860 . 


• 'I513H 


270. 


. . rt*3 


1256 . 


* T ! — 


3067. 


. .rmnn 

.t : — 


1111 . 


. . ywn 


229 . 


. . njnn 


245. 


. .HTinri 


2516 . 


• . aw 


985. 


. . DTTPl 


1274. 


. . rtwrin 

X - 


1985 . 


. . . \*3 


249. 


. . Kinrr 


1750. 


• . *j?.TQ5 


856 . 




256. 


• . ^nn 


227. 


• • B**JJ1 


2597 . 


1574. 


• . snn 


3203 . 


• .^0930 


2687. 


. .Mtjffj 


195. 


■ 0^?3 


602. 


• . ^ffij 


1145. 


1 • X - 


732. 


. . Dnrtn 

" T V 


2631 . 

[ 


• t -; - 

292] 


1723 . 


|x • ■• 



tf 


ETC1 


INDEX. 


riKMMn 


1502. 




1998, 27 


16 . r\hr\ 


2990 . . 


• J"^88 


850. 


. OKfr\ 


113 . 


T •'. — 


360. . 


• . pa 


1963 . 


• . n*re*n 


2059 . 


• * 


2336 . . 


. &$?n 


710. 


. . tDyp 


750. 


. . .*, 


1093 . . 1 


3*1*80 


1148 . 
2700 . 




2428 . 
2754. 




2493 . . 

2378 . . 


. n§v&n 


1933 . 
9. 


T ; T 


750 . 
1253 . 


. . d?n 


2397 . . t 
1779 . . 


. nnfen 

T " — 


2178 . 


• * T 


2054. 


Wife 


2963 . . 


¥3#g© 


1649 . 


. |0»n 


110. 




3318 . ta 


. T . . . _ 


3199. 


WREn 


1790. 


n7?s$&n 


3036 . . 


njtflso 


1599 . 
114. 


. . . bn 

• T _ 


108 . 

685 . 




408 (a) 
1080 . . 


rraa-iri 

x ; v — 


501 . 


. rrisn 


1196 . 


x . . - 


2083 . . 


BiffiJ 


2643. 


. rrtTjo 


2757 . 


", T : ~ 


170. . 


.nan 


1900 . 


. nron 

T I ~ 


1415 . 


. Sten 


1321 . . 


.nun 

T " 


2196 . 


. . *55 


1404 . 


. }top 


2436 . . 


Tin 


2173 . 


. to 


3037 . 


X - 


1716 . . 


. "Itqo 


3044. 


■ . w 


3211 . 




3216 . . C 


• X — 


2925 . 


. KD^n 


424. 


njfoflfio 


2377 . . 


nhrtari 

x — 


1527. 


nrjjjfflRO 


201 . 


. vto$n 


2657 . . 


. T . — 


2460 . 


• .^n 


2676 . 


trkign 


1968 . . 


*#ffii 


421 . 


o*y$n 


20 . . 


. tr&n 

■ x - 


3001 . . . 


win 


2964. 
1592 . 
2163 . 
2385 . 
1437 . 
2867 . 
457 . 


. *TJS«J 

. r\vhr\ 
nfc^i&n 


1509 . 
2888 . 
3234 . . 
2585 . 
1181 . . 
1561 . 
1623 , 

[ 


•• T * 

293] 


796. . 
1723 . . 
1378 . . . 
1677 . . 
2649 . . 
2921 . . . 
1614 . . ) 


nrrin 

x •• — 

x : • — 

■town 



1486 . 




j 

1298 


.JNJJJ&A. 


1262 (a) 




1252 . 




2007 


t&hw 


2611 . 


. . arc 


614. 


. dtwb 


1030 




497 . 


. . . 3TB 


1067. 


. . #183 


1638 . 


• J T 


2628 . 


. . IXTI 


3108 . 


• T • — 


1212 . 


* T — 


551 . 




1070, 


2645 nifJKJ 


296 . 


. . CD255 


540. 


. . win 

• : -t 


1209 . 


• t ; • ~ 


1430 . 


. . .-*ao 


1209 . 


. . .nnn 

TV 


2514 . 


. . W33 


1143, 


ii6i . -nan 

• T * 


1379. 


. . .nnn 

T T 


2562 . 


. . ns&n 

V T _ 


2392 . 


. nnsn 


2109. 


. . yirp 


3341 . 


. . ijs&n 


2191 . 


T ~ 


3085 . 


. Apm$ 


3356 . 


. . jete 


1767. 


. . inn 


1740 . 


• • pB*B 


244. 


. . Mbn 


2521 . 


• • ^*5SD 


754. 


. . . nn 

*'T 


2834. 


. . nnbn- 


292 . 


• • sbttJ 


3381 . 


. . . nh 


2361 . 


ion 

'• T 


1999 . 


. . ym 


161 . 


V V T 


2647 . 


. . non 

• T 


1296 . 


. . nssn 


161 . 


T 


3198 . 


' ' ^W 


1657 . 


. nn^ 


131 . 


nfeehn 

V V T 


3014. 


• nj?n ny.n 


993 . 


• • °1^ 


1243 . 


• WD 


1910 . 




2792 . 


. nghjpn 


1037. 


• , no 


1297. 




112 . 


• • IhRB 


2410. 


. -W 


1780 . 


. • ^783 


2287 . 


. . niton 


3373 . 


■ KSF0 


2413 . 


. .ahff$ 


767 . 


. . #jiQ 


3018 . 


• tjnjrjj 


1962 . 


t ; «■ t 


848 . 


. . *nbpn 


3394. 




2655 . 


. . njyn 


1891 . 


• • n*pn 


2903 . . 


. nipnn 


1467 . 


. . -rso 


2171 . 


. . n}j?n 


55 . 


• vpi 


2375 . 


. wp&n 


1087. 


. . >*nj?n 


1353 . . 


. nnnn 

T T T 


762. 


• • *3W 


3000 . 


. . nijpn 


199 . . 


. nn^n 

VT - 


2425 . 


. . nafyn 


2904. 


. . nann 

T I V 


1791 . . 


. n|>n 


1556 . 


• »*##? 


2858 . 


. ji&ftnn 


3178 . . 


. ^ 


1249 . 


. vtjb^o 


385, 


1375, n^nn 


1737 . . 


, Dimn 


2412 . 


. snfiyn 


1811,] 


2452 . . 


rfafe>n 
T . _ . 








[294] 







bxbwn 


INDEX. 


TJPSBW 


1144 . . 


bxibffi 


1397 . 


^kfw 


1684 . . 


•pm) 


872 . . 


rhbwn 
T . . — 


1956 . 


•wkw 


1399 . . 


t ; v ; 


1890 . . 


rogWi 


3418 . 


. nnnn 


379 . . 


raw 
T .. . 


1688 . . 


. 3^0 


2372 . 


w&m 


2516 . . 


MNSft 


185. . 


yffift 


1983 . 


• ^Hl! 


1290 . . 


^1 


1760 . . 


njwn 


2407 . 


• ^$3 


2473 . . 


¥*$ 


252 . . 


T — 


3027 . 


aTHjfcflW 


588 . . 


W%\ 


649 . . 


jvwn 


129 . 


. 0}*MS1 


357 . . 


*nw 

T ' T 


1611 . . 


. Trtgn 


2754. 


. DpMW 


368 . . 


^^ 


2549 . . 


"~ T — 


1702 . 


. tynn 


2176 . . 


T I I 


373 . . 


•MFtfn 


3105 . 


*pWSW 


2143 . . 




2894 . . 


. ytffj 


1553 . 


n»n#rsi 


463 . . 


Y?$\ 


3091 . . 


.uh*0rj 






1709 . . ' 




180. . 


. n?Wh 




i 


306 . . 


^H\ 


2962 . . 


wb&n 


6. 


. , .1 


1094. . 


«e«j 


2268 . . 


T — 


1959 . 


TT 


2171(a). 


^fcSl 


1276 . . ? 


T J - T — 


2299 . . 


T r : 


1942 . . 


nm) 


1720 . . 


gQfe^l 


251 . . 


. \m\ 


1942 . . 


Smm 


474. . 


wn 


1348 . 


. naas« 

v t • ; 


695 . . 


T . - T . 


1874 . . 


V T ' 


1054 . . 


1?$?® 


1053 . . 


y&$$\ 


1301 . . 


tribal 


3246 . . 


? t * ~ • 


3278 . . 


vitvsb 


2908 . . 


T ' 


1055 . 


^?13S5 


1970 . . 


nMi 


1547 . . 


Bgifa 


205 . . 


• .^ : 


1550 . . 


V "T 


2266 . . 


*ptti 


1498 . . 


• *^i® 


3222 . . 


CH3p$ 


1921 . . 


r\\pn 


2068 . 


. rt^ : 


3400 . . 


T : 1 : •■ : 


1965 . . 


nrwn 

t |t ; 


2209(a) 


T .: — : 


1122 . . 


HBtto 

|- V T 


3068 . . 


pB8W 


2251 . 


T ; 


1468 . . 


rwipKi 

T l: • : 


664 . . 


. ram 

T " — 


358 . . 


• H3!«3 


715 . . 


. nSf^i 


1817 . . 


— l T J * 


534. . 


. rtn« : 5 


1642 . . 


••T 


644 . . 


^?8W 


2505 . 

V 


295] 


1869 . . * 


isaste'i 



3401 
2854 
2508 
2446 
1965 
1898 

1667 

691 

160 

1973 

3300 

11 

1128 

2014 

33 

526 

118 ( 

1250 

837 

1682 

838, 

1433 

3271 

2448 

1292 

307 

999 

1319 

2582 



a) 



msmi\ 

x t ; 

T I I V T 

. . .. T 

. M$\ 

T T 

♦ T 

. area 

TT — 

• IW 

3242 ^^l 

t ; * 

• ■^ 

• P5T! 

cnrni 



INDEX. 



398 

2610 

1280 

8 

2142 

721 
2153 
1585 

238 



. TTf*l 

t ; -; 

. wham 
_. T .. . 



1398,1056 . 

98, 613 b 

1403 • . . 



t • T : 

.D^arri 
• nKapn. 

rrcii 

t t ; 
t ; 



327 . 
1765 . 
2861 . 






3oii, 3133 bSTiffl 



omani 



2860 . 
1749. 
2408 . 
2652 . 
2599. 
2391 . 
2513. 
2641 (a) 
2523 • 
1569 . 
2493 . 

313 . 

655 . 

142 . 






wfcaini 
. T . — . 

t x - ; 

[296] 



3425 

1407 

3026 

3026 

2767 

1409, 

1443 

1095 

1700 

386 
2706 
2243 
2706 
3086 
1568 
1466 

207 
2607 
1374 

248 
1189 

843 
1523 

413 
1691 
1102 

149 

809 
1113 
2915 



whwit 

tajjisni 

• *m 

688 *nbpni 
. ami 

; t ; 

It : • : 

. .arm 

. wiari 
. _ T . 

dnrtsw 

t t - ; 

. . vn 

— T 

• nn*m 

• row 

. Dhi 

T 



nam 



INDEX. 



him 



1732. 

811 . 
12. 

814. 
3042 . 
2547. 
2005 . 
1157 . 
3206 . 
1612. 
2982. 
21 . 
2300, 29 
2992 . 
3155 . 

275 . 






i i 



t v x v; v— 

' T — 



295, 2003 . nxy) 



31,56 
2062. 
136 . 
1153 . 

2273 . 

2766 . 

291 . 

128 . 
1888 . 

136 . 
1237 . 
1374. 



7BQ 
TO 

■ pa 



20 



1294 . . 


T5M 


513 . . 


728 . . 


nw) 


2695 . . 


871 .. . 


.il) 


3059 . . 


1820 . . . 


• *il5 


2546 . . 


2009 . . . 


$W1 


3147 . . 


2272 . . 


VI — 


2051 . . 


2896 . . 


map 


744. . 


1724 . . 


— T — 


2558 . . 


2432 . . . 


^M 


2085 . . 


2701 . . . 


T2M 


2278 . . 


1672 . . . 


TT _ 


2566 . . 


418 .. . 


0"B2 


1782 . . 


1535 . . . 


#1*1 


1031 . . 


2172 . . . 


t^ia 


1619 . . 


2596 . . . 


TSf!2 


2953 . . 


2438 . . . 


psiii 


561 . . 


3236 . . . 


tf]!i 


775, 852 


508 .. . 


. JTii 


2233 . . 


342 . . . 


?rp 


1221 . . 


2253 . . 


t*j 


2388 . . 


25, 41 . 


. tm 


2096 . . 


51 . . 


. *rn 


751 . . 


309 . . 


vr-i*i 


2099 . . 


1108 . . , 


hbrt!) 


3095 . . 


1638 . . 


^5!3 


2512 . , 


471 . . 


ttiJTCK 


450 . . 


2628 . . 


wpa 


2189 . . 


2485 . . 


. nafes 


2999 . . 


2469 . . 


. jtovi 


1075 . . 


563 . . 


. ^ 


2746 . . 


[29* 


I] 





. $m 

. wi 
.. T ._ 

. rora 

. . nn 

VT" 

• ITffil 

• N'2 

• . Wl 
. .-^CC! 

• d*?rvi 

. p!?cb 

. nprn 
. IBM 

. pra 

. T*3 
. ^103 

• • &?J 

. him 



ptw 



2658. . 

214, 1772 
2617. . 


. jaw 


3134 . . 


. a&**.i 


1233 . . 

782. . 




208 . . 


. -vpn 


877 . . 
2245 . . 
2247 . . 


. m 

T •" 


1694 . . 


. my*) 


1989 . . 


. Wt) 


1951 . . 


T * — 


3426 . . 


. B^*J 


2881, 284 
1185 . . 




3062 . . 


. a^i 


2748 . . 


T " — - 


183. . 


. .<?M 


1735 . . 
181 . . 




1223 . . 


. B3!3 


731 . . 


. «£J 


876. . 


. »ap 


2112. . 


• W9 


2964 . . 
1602 . . 

408 . . 




543 . . 
1065 . . 





INDEX. 


^ 




. 


. 


. $i&\ 


776. . . 


• *P 


1975. 


. 


.* t ~ 


2002 . . . 


"Wl 


2228 . 


. 


■ -tei 


785 .. . 


-T— 


3182 . 


. 


• BJSM 


745 .. . 


^p- 


2755. 


. 


• vm 


3397 . . 


^?V- 5 


740 . 


. 


. rtga 


2545 . . . 


DW 


1476. 


. 


• ^P) 


3375 . . 


rm 


1450. 


. 


• ^ 


794 . . . 


.589 


748. 


, 


. *b%s 


3175 . . 


liTTWB 


2036 . 


, 


. whm 


3098 . . . 


objp 


2086 . 


• 


t ; "~ 


2458 . . 


. pes 


1363 . 


; 




2594 . . 


own 


3364. 


. 


^71^1 


2197 . . 


*»j3$p 


2741 . 


. 


• tt#W 


1795 . . 


Tp«b 


564. 


• 




1794 . . 


^sa 


2771 . 


. 


VT- 


1202 . . 


alb 


1118. 


. 


• VM) 


54,2125. 


&sa 


2426. 




. Etfil 


346. . 


$$2 


3190. 


. 


. 0*2033 


1073, 2107 


. p»9 


1621 . 




. ^ri-iy 


2020 . . 


^3 


261 . 


. 


. «H.3!l 


2022 . . . 


10K3 


628,! 


2006 


V T •"" 


3146 . . . 


XT - 


2825 . 


. 


. ...byi 

TT" 


2227 . . 


$m 


1207 . 






2501 . . . 


9*3 


2279 • 


. 


. p^3 


3370 . . 


«ta 


288, 


723 


. •lipji 


210 . . 


nay 


2991 . 




. ab!S 


282 . . 


■ .Sag 


2670 . 


. 


. ^i!5 


451, 1208 


. &IQ 


1079. 


. 


. J???l 


1531 . . . 


on 


2659 . 




. 999 


1030 . . . 


•W 




[298] 









*Wfi*1 


INDEX. 




pB»1 


2383 . 


. . ^p 


190 


, 


. ^5j?p 


3315 . 




1574. 


. . Twa 


260 . 


. 


nj5*3 


1728. 


. . .JTTQ 


1574. 


. . «be 


774 . 


. 


T V \T '- 


1708 . 


T . — 


1713 . 


. . npin 


608 . 


• 


^(?j 


1459. 


. . -r» 


2817. 


. *npw 


469, 


1859 


m 


2895 . 


. . «vn 


2353 . 


. . p#3 


1506 . 


• 


*e» 


1217 . 


• • -p» 


2726. 


. wpi&) 


2591 . 


. 


• m 


1146,3074. #m 


601 . 


V VT 


2090 . 




*tjj?p 


726 . 


. . atfcj 


2290. 


. . Wl 


2814. 




wsps 


2441 . 


. . .#3 


1950 . 


. . n©§t! 


2245 . 




m 


2209. 


. . Db^*3 


758, 2951 . njns?i 


2838 . 




*p\?h 


3366. 


. 5iri)bb^5 


503 . 


• . K£l 


35. 




*%H 


218, 2376 . Dg*1 


1767. 


. . .^3 


3207 . 




^Tj?J! 


2075 . 


. .&g$3 


2941 . 


. . ns^i 


2743 . 


. 


nJM 


2075 . 




2916 . 


. . rtyPl 


3097 . 


. 


W1j?*5 


742. 


" T — 


2386. 


. . . yw 


27. 


. 


tfia 


2098 . 


. . MM 

T T— 


3167. 


• . B3£l 


1070. 


. 




505 . 


• • ^ 


264. 


. . . irj 


606, 


3411. 


^J 


1299. 


. . MR1 


3415 . 


. . ayj 


2466 . 


. 


.n'ri 


1226. 


v i— 


1434. 


. pgw 


725 . 


. 


^7J 


1002 . 


. . to#*J 


2411 . 


. • • ^!l 


2220. 




^57-1 


749 . 




2721 . 


. • *n^£! 


1020. 




.^ii 


3424. 


. . ywA 


221 . 


. . n£V!l 


158 . 




n T! 


2952 . 


. . ih#j 


2192. 


• . pEJfJ 


1220. 




taWB 


188. 


. . nhtfy 


2250 . 


• • .j*9 


1220 . 


. . 


^7-5 


2745 . 


. vjn&h 


274. 


. . .T£5 


795,2178. 


"T~ 


2913 . 


. *tdh0*i 


2511 . 


. • TJ 


3061 . 


. 


«rn s j 


746. 


. . efc») 


2940 . 


• • Pih 


2101 . 




•T~ 


2868. 


•■ t ; • - 


1938. 


. . .y>) 


2488 . 




DVT3 


1647. 


. • ^WA 


3063 . 


■ ■ ^1 


2930 . 




SI"p 


419. 


. ■ \&& 








[299] 







F 


an 


IN 


DEX. 


1 


HM 


$85. . 


. p0_ 


115. 


. • . |55 


175. 


T • 


867. . 


t ; — 


1843 . 


... J83 


100 . 


. DH9WI 


3078 . . 


. ¥t3#?J 


2712.. 


. ^sarti 


77. 


• nipb^ 


1125 . . 


. vfwpi 


2964. 


. .^33**1 


117 . 


. .bWt£>) 


1675(a). 


. rb&\) 


630 . 


. .asyrw 


1763. 


. . ^3^ 


761 . . 


. nW-p 


2601 . 


. asBWl 


1336 . 


. . nW?i 


2704 . . 


^rhm 


1690(a) 


y?5rn 


3386. 


. ipyb) 


415 . . 


'inrip?^ 


344. 


. . snfttft 


263 . 


. Tvygfa 


347. . 


. WW*) 


2023 . 


. mhrvi 


3298. 


. njri^ 


447. . 


. .y#?i 


168 . 


t \ j • ; 


2400 . 


. .^Stofti 


3226 . . 


. p&i 


2853 . 


. . .DID") 


562 . 


. . miy 


2567 . . 


. Jin^i 


3289 . 


. .K^i* 


1974. 


. nira^i 


1858 . . 


. hpf>) 


2907 . 


t • ; 


3144 . 


. . pip 


2078 (a) . 


. ^p.#3 


3129 . 


• *WS731 


3131 . 


. myim 


1507 . . 


. top^a 


1948 . 


. tyft^' 


709 . . 


• T 


2816 . . 


. rn$*) 


665 . 


. . rowi 


813 . 


. djspsiw 


2394 . . 


. n^i 


280 . 


t t ; 


446. 


. joa^BJ 


855 . . 


• fi#3 


2030 . 


. p&Ti 


3292. 


. . pphpi 


1460 . . 


mw*) 


1826 . 


T • * • 


2791 . 


. . ^^ 




. viph 


3306 . 


• • •* 


140. 


. . »&» 


2753 . . 


^5«TO 


2486 . 


Tii39i 


2910. 


. ^©W 


3068 . . 


p§xn»3 


1043 . 


T T 


595. 


1*15*86* 


868 . . 


. ^1 


1123 . . 


• .^ 


493 . . 


. spjajrt 


587 . . 


^WJ 


119 . . 


S^3n?!| 


1576 . . 


. mm 


352 . . 


K5DW3 


3122 . . 


nvnrta 


1059 . . 


^j3» 


3214 . . 


. plQW! 


3050 . . 


Wirfe 


524. . 


. fijp^ 


3184 . . 


. Dhn 


38 . 


• y&rh\ 


1423 . . 


. njj?w 


3237 . . 


. ^Wl 


2733 . . 




3166 . . 


. ft*j?W 


3073 . . 


; ; • t 


101 . . 


. DW7I 


236 . . 


T 


1618 . . 


TOn^n-^ 


1565 . . 

[3 


00] 


1631 . . 


• - T 



1SDKJ1 



2264. 
1061 . 
3020. 

489. 
1583. 

231 . 

2717 . 
2957. 
1662. 

333 . 
1707 . 
2120, 1429 
3024. 
2738 . 
1418 . 
2893 . 
1991 . 

325. 

165. 
2654. 
1879 . 

842. 
3210 . 
3055. 
1789 . 
1661 . 
2123. 

2718 . 
2642 . 
1788 . 






x t ; 

. n^si 
• n*n^ 

. n&nji 

t ; v ; 

. TTl±\ 

, mail 

x ; ; • ; 

T ... . 

T .. _.- . 

■ rp|» 

. ow 

x _ ; : • ; 

. _ T . 

V T — 

naatfyi 



INDEX 

2933 . 
2304. 



rwi 



365 . 

2608. 
1277 . 
2089 . 

1310 . 
1114. 
2283. 

125 . 
1289 . 
3140. 
1324 . 

1311 . 
2367 . 

226 . 

1512. 

1428. 

1892. 

1360 . 

! 3209 . 

410 . 

I 1842 . 

2482 . 

1821, 1822 

791 . 

2110 . 

2241 . 

2207 . 

678 . 



x t ; 

mrun 
Drain 

X ~l~ 

orasn 

• t — ;- 

Knag! 
• $) 

T T -.— 

■TO 

*#&$ 

.'ra^i 

T 
• T 

t ; - t 



[301 



2790 

2137 

2138 

2732 

397 

808 

810 

3010 

2136 

1162 

845 

2032 

3365 

791 

139 

169 

16 

1566 

148 

230 

2011 

1166 

2535 

2256 

2884 

750 

2768 

3210 

2215 

1821 



■rR 
■na 



n$7i 
. ail 

T 
T 

.mil 

• sr55 

ai#i 

X 
- X ; 





♦nwn 


INDEX. 


\ftm 


2254. 


• - t : 


2184. 


. . Bhw 


2889 . . . d$£#! 


2242. 


. f fH£^ 


2130. 


. . pij3Jsi 


1494 . . . pftftij 


102. 


• t ; 


1503. 


. . wni® 


335, 1757 . npJ5l 


1115. 


t ; 


1918. 


. . bfll 


mo . . . nprii 


3035. 


. Dnpeft 


2946. 


. ny^jin 


1354. . . HfM 


791 . 


. . wrftf\ 


2781 . 


. . baft 


1668. . . HSMl 


337. 


. . ^toi 


2163 . 


. .#3%j 


2318 . . . KJpfil 


2879. 


t ; - 


430. 


. . *i!?85 


2552. . . ypPil 


318. 


. • I^KflJ 


729. 


. . #5 


548 .. . *opni 


2899. 


T T — 


2322 . 


. • T?tf1 


2807 • . . ^Wfift) 


1644, 1624 . tDjril 


2866. 


t t ; 


1291 .... ihl. 


1743. 


• • 1?« 


3181 . 


. . a?® 


330, 1352 . tf#fl 


2887 . 




1913 . 


. . "flftpi 


74. . . ntfini. 


1362. 


. . irftw 


647. 


•• x • - 


3077. . . SJHJ 


1945. 


. . Tlffi 


1752. 


. .OTfifl) 


1915 . . . Tift? 


1626 . 


. . ^jgii 


2665. 


. . nam 

x x - 


1992 . . n T 55")ft!l 


2430. 


. . aaapi 


2426. 


. . yr$$) 


727 .. . CTftl 


2569. 


. . |0«fi 


2831, 


753 . rofi) 


2950 . . . SJTW1 


2595. 


. . pirWJ 


2557. 


. . hvm 


1922, 2275 . f ^ftl 


2480. 


. . n^i 


433. 


. . *fift\ 


2575 . . . WW) 


925. 


, . ♦jjijj 


2780. 




2874. . f!?JfWl 


429. 


. . io&i 


1911 . 


. . n® 


2800 . . . tpfiWpJ 


1669. 


. . pitBl 


2315. 


. . tbaa 


1742 . . . Nfetol 


1278,2554. "bjVll 


2877 . 


T . -. — 


772. . . l^M 


92 . 


. . ajrinj 


2418. 


. . .#» 


1738, 3368 . S^fll 


1830. 


T 


1361 . 


. • DW! 


1546. . .nnra 


1636. 


. . <nr\) 


1920. 


. . TIffifl 


1664. . .*wm 


3146. 


. . *rijfl 


2937. 


. . &B6) 


2117(a). W^RI 


2947 . 


x •• • ; ■ 


1997. 


. . Sbn5 


1736. . .^ril 


2481 . 


. • tj?bw 


341 . 


r , : | -t • - 

[302] 


1660. . .p|#ei 

T . 



pBW 



INDEX. 



Ifcfi 






1753. 
1916 . 
2570 . 
2001 . 

1733(a) 
2481 . 
338,1350. 

2824 . . W 



.nxr 

• t?I 

• n J 
. TO 

T T 

♦arm 

• m 

.nit 



370. 
2340. 
2340. 
3147. 
2342. 

557. 

779. 

164. 
2860. 
2799 . 



1522. 
1865. 
3402. 
2690 . 
1493 (d) 
1954. 
1501 . 
2812. 



806. 

173. 
1269 . 

381 . 

91 . 

3370. 

381 . 
1279. 



436. 
1179. 
2202 . 

346 . 
1490 (/) 

255 . 



2798 . 

405. 

953. 

973. 

912. 
2364. 
3197 • 
2446 . 
2891 . 
1159. 
2333 . 

461 . 
1523. 



• n 

. isn't 



San 

V T 

ram 

: t 

i-iron 

T TT» - 

rhiri 

^n 

D*Bhh 

* t t i 

x — 

. *W 
."an 

. onn 

• plO 

; t 

— T ~ 

• x — 

X - 

Dnxtsn 



[303] 



2660 . . 

572, 536, 

124. . 

1823 . . 

378 . . 

3173 . . 

2634 . . 

212. . 

152. . 

3304 . . 

1488 . . 

3138 . . 

3212 . . 

759. . 
1543, 3089 

3261 . . 

3143 . . 

2419 . . 

2156 . . 

1255 . . 

2165 . . 

600. . 

1487 . . 

2778 . . 

145. . 

648,3264 

1356 . . 

3316 . . 

1013. . 

1206 . . 



2577 »h 

.rvn 

X — 

.ft 

X 

. rm 
hhsn 

'tin 

rbhn 

x • X 

•fw 

. an 

X 

x ; v 

WW 

X T 

Km 



annan 



INDEX. 



hit 



2995 . . 


Diyi&n 


2890 . 


. W?n 


198. 




574. . 


. ran 

"" T 


2864. 


. . nh 


780. 




574. 


• wwan 


3119 . 


. #nn 

' T 


2749 . 




574. . 


.nnston 


2614. 


. nsnn 

t ; v 


2749 . 




2214. 


. nan 


2345. 


• t ,; v 


2474. 




958. . 


. "nan 

• t -; 


531 . 


. Bhh 


2431 . 




638 . 


. • |D 


1800. 


. robn 




509 . 


• T® 


2718. 


tt4#n 


<» 


3395 . . 


. Mftpi 


3419 . 


dmbti 


2309 . . . 


1218 . . 


. win 


1611 . 


. ini^n 


694. 




2284. 


. .D3n 

T ' 


2606. 


. r\pm 


337 . 




2568 . 


• • w 


950 . 


. . nn 


2031 . 




1892 . 


V T 


2789 . 


• • ^nh 


294. 




1941 . 


. ftpn 


1603 . 


. , .jnn 


681 . 




2519. 


. tnbn 
. T _. 


2660. 


. . nnn 


951 . 




1627 . 


. ^.PD 






520. 




1627. 


. spjpn 




to 


1024. 




751 . 


. Tton 

T 


3043. 


. . n5£ 


3240. 




2619 . 


• • -r§o 


1624. 


. . fc^tp 


788. 




2092 . 


; x 


2926 . 


. . invito 


764. 




1771 . 


. vnwi 


1906 . 


. . rab 


3350. 




3367 . 


. . D^n 


607 . 


. . nhb 


687 . 




983 . 


JW»D 


713 . 


. . nnhtp 


3350 . 




3200 . 


•'•P h 


30 . 


. . . nib 


2491 . 




2073 . 


• flj?0 


2180 . 


.,,■«* 


2172. 




2444. 


V T 


2363 . 


. . *ttSb 


3114. 




2626 . 


. ta-in 


2363 . 


. nata? 


2596 . 




787. 


. smn 

; t 


2598 . 


. . Mgtb 


412. 




2204 . . 


- ^51D 


3135 . 


. use 


610 . 




454. 


^ "TO 


2635 . . 
[' 


304] 


3076 . . 





DT 



2622 . . 


■ DVt 


3327 . . 


• h: 


596 . . 


WT 

•*T 


1866 . . 


• -ft 


323 . . 


■ .tt 


428 . • 


■ -ft 


1307 . . 


'tt 


1909 . . 


m 


329 .. . 


■it? 


473 . . . 


*wt 


1515 . . 


tiftfV. 


196 . . 


mrv 


2314 . . 


htt 


23 . . . 


• W 


23,1511. 


nw 


495 .. . 


VtfW 


2076 . . . 


*#)&! 


992 . . 


.inv 


2313 . . 


. )1V 


3279 . . 


frrr* 


2907 . . . 


« 


890. . 


• IK 


1167 . . 


.*9» 


3069 . . 


fc* 


1437 . . 


•fr 


1445 . . . 


T^ 


37 . . . 


. DV 


2084 . . 


n&v 


2346 . . . 


.*pv 


1270 . . . 


Bhi* 



21 



2341 . 
1025 . 
1136 . 
1778. 
1096 . 
3387 (tf) 
2396 . 
2390 . 
3395 . 
3064 . 
1552 . 
2465 . 
1555, 450 
3387 . 
1101 . 
1727 . 
1272. 
2550 . 
1139 . 
2328 . 

834. 

553 . 
1904 . 

605 . 
2348. 
2563 . 
1440. 
1380 . 
2311 . 
1422 . 



INDEX. 

; t 

vtt 



■ &8! 
pnprv 

TT 



305] 



1219. 
2241 . 
1421, 1416 

377 . 
2298 . 

613 . 
78. 

440, 19 
2302 . 
1168 . 
3107 . 






1554. 

391 . 
2157 . 
2463 . 

593. 
3088 . 
2500 . 
3290 . 

783 . 
1376 . 
2034 . 
1312 . 

304. 
3106 . 

206. 
1808 . 

126 . 
2045 . 
2604 . 



ft 

-T 

m 

T T 

V x • 

'#&* 

TD* 

T 

t ; t 

•• T * 

• ft 

spy; 



wy 



INDEX, 



1M 



1698 . 


. W3£ 


3287 . . 


. Wf. 


522, 1847 . . Sg* 


2534. 


. *p$ft 


499 . . 


-m 


812. 


. . vfc$j 


2872 . 


. Mk) 


277,3247 


*%f. 


1320. 


T 


237 . 


. . tj&* 


1730, 301 


m 


382. 


' * W 1 ^: 


1155. 




2959 . . 


^T- 


3153 . 


' T 


2219 . 


■ * W~ 


2209 (a) . 


- ^T- 


1960. 


• • -W: 


601 . 


V T 


2978 . . 


"T 


1578. 


t ; • 


884. 


. .$R 


2911 . . 


. • **?. 


1385. 


. . ptft 


1091 . 


. ,r«; 


1799 . . 


. KY. 


411,1878. rhw\ 


2841 . 


. ^hs* 


1807 . . 


V T" 


2739. 


DTMJfttf 


232. . 


. . tf# 


1792 . . 


n$7. 


1029 j 


. . $Q|ft 


763. . 


T 


1505 . . . 


mv 

T "T 


1382 . . 


Snj^. 


1641 . . 


. .NIP 

TT 


1699 . . 


my. 


828. . 


. w. 


1408 . . 


• «K 


143. . 


• 3?. 


1359 . 


. tob#*„ 


3084 . . 


• ^ 


2220 . , 


1?T 


2923 . 


. .pg* 


833 . . 


. mtf 


584. . . 


. IV 

•••T 


121 . 


. mw\ 


1894 . . 


. nfc# 


3053 . . . 


. TV 

T 


3281 . . 


. ))mp\ 


1903 . . 


. mf 


2239 . . . 


.DHT 


312 . 


t ; • 


1516 . . 


. njsp. 


984 .. • 


. nv 

~T 


2964 . 


. t3sr 


3262 . . 


. $«♦ 


2497 . . . 


•T 


3252 . 


• • *© v 


1434 . . 


• m 


1882 . . . 


VI 




3 


200. . 


. nor 


2551 . . 


■ftf. 




2493 . . 


• ' W 


1868. . . 


.m 


2625 . 


. 0*|*P 


220. . 


TT 


1728 . . . 


■ V£ 


2039 . 


rrj|8J! 


622. . 


. . T^ 


177 .. . 


■ m 


328 . . 


QWH3 


70. 


. .«jr 


2542 . , . 


.ttw> 

T • 


45 . . 


. nnxjp 


1462 . . 


. ..n ( ?j 


3413 . . 


Wlfr. 


3282 . . 


• n?W3 


1254 . . 


. w»|?i 


2339 . . 


T T ' 


2205. 


. ^#83 


3294 . . 


. fi0j£ 


1840 . . 


#.* 


1085,11* 


27 . 151 


980. . 


• i^i?: 


3105, . 

[306 


3#! 

] 


2401 . . 


T 



1524 
3224, 

240, 
1105. 
3301 . 
2673 . 
3390. 
1768. 
1897 . 

157 . 
1622. 
2822 . 
1234. 
2832 . 

254, 

488. 
1814 
2406, 
1456. 

130 . 

931 . 
1529. 
1149. 
1557, 
1918 . 
2038. 

936. 
1972. 
2993 . 
2134. 



rran 
. . rtta 

t ; t 
; t 

3266 . H13 

. . . Kb? 
. - .'©ft 
. . W9I 

t ; • ; 

. . to 



907 



uwai? 
T . . 

. .pi 

T 

3250 . . "lib 
. . DP13 

. . .j?i 

. . rehs 
, . .rh> 
. . .»£ 

,& 



1902 



INDEX. 

2969, , , ^3 

1044,2772. in^5 

29, 539, 802 ♦$ 

2060 6i*J 



nm^S 



2295 



1472,1588 }3"^| 

1812. 

1147. 



3176, 
1610. 
3102. 
1741 . 
3256. 
2081 . 
1609 . 
2809. 
2797 . 
2858. 
2158. 
63 . 

273. 

526. 
2970. 
2857 . 

879. 

134, 720 
1493 (h) 
1706 . . 
2737 . . 

944 . . 
[30' 



tMM 



T — 

. . to? 
■ pP5»3 
• tt 



rviD:? 



1425. 
1493. 
1683 . 

668. 
2847. 
2840 . 

947(5) 

156. 
3071 , 
1947. 
2826. 
3399. 

854. 
3287 . 
1339. 
2443. 
2276 . 
2600. 

899. 
2402. 

406. 
2691 . 
2727. 



266. 

3125 . 

2400. 

86 . 

1414. 



b 



. >■■■%! 

.nrnaj 

.tnfo$3 
. to^ 

. ntrp 
nrAna 

. .oil 

. .shi 

. .ma 

-T 

. gb#3 

. niina 
. run? 






m 


h 


INDEX. 


n^ 1 ? 


2584 . . 


. w? 


3302 . 


. . swib 


234. . J 


y\pprh 


1952 . . 


. ^ 


289 


. . nfca 1 ? 


3048 . . 


Vinrh 


174. . 


. rhsvh 


1084 . 


. . mb 


2754 . . 1 


immb 


2454 . . 


. T * 


2429 . 


. . . mb 


1438, 1852 . 


T* 


1985, 1987 


• '^? 


3295 . 


• • wh 


970. . 


.^k 


2027 . . 


. Wx 1 ? 


1225 . 


. pmi? 


939 . . 


mh 


2016 . . 


nr\mb 


409. 


. . rmk 


2381 . . 


. & 


137 . . 


. nb*6 


2804. 


. .wijrp 


1038 . . 


. . tih 


2827 . . 


. v&h 


1570 . 


. • QjFfj? 


2312 . . 


. . <& 


239 . . 


nyj-iW? 


1410 . 


. . nrith 


1480 . . 


yih 


1171 . . 


. nanx 1 ? 


2805 . 


. . nm 1 ? 


300 . . 


. rwb 


294 . . 


. ng>W? 


106 . 


. . wrb 


846. . 


# 


369- . 


. r\mb 


2638 . 


W, K50 1 ? 


2643 . . 


. MJ'V 


2148. . 


• -$$b 


97 . 


• b^irb 


1714 . . 


• vafc 


99. . 


. nhfcS 


941 . 


• • wyrf? 


2380 . . 


. rh 


624. . 


. . £ 


2735 . 


,. .nninS 


542 . . 


♦ffjwf? 


1392 . . 


. n»» 


3154. 


. . rhin 1 ? 


3310 . . 


. wnS 


271 . . 


. H5 1 ? 


692,1628. riiirb 


1393 . . 


. Ttf 


1769 . . 


. n:raS 


422 . 


. . ftth 


706. . 


. nvn 1 ? 


624. . 


. : T * 


920 . 


. . nvr6 


715. . 


■sd& 


1088, 1302 


. m£ 


803 . 


. . rhsrh 


1232 . . 


■ -^D 1 ? 


2796 . . 




166 . 


• T 


2948 . . 




1946 . . 


. nw 


1545 . 


. .rfi&pf? 


3354 . . 


. tonS 


362. . 


. *& 


2713 . 


. irvftnS 


3205 . . 


. ^nS 


2374 . . 


• :# 


2616. 


. . <*$ 


3395 . . 


. ^bn^ 


2379 . . 


• n$h 


1630. 


. .^n 1 ? 


530. . 


. nS^i 


2383 . . 


• ^h 


3238 . 


. . TpnS 


2396 . . 


risaask 


1031(a). 


. n , aal? 


2211 . 


• :T*lS? 


40. . 


t ;'— 


1007 . . 


. &&b 


334. 


. . T3¥S? 


707 . . 




2445. . 


, rmzb 


2725 


[308] 


884 . . 


• ^t? 



yty&h 




INDEX. 




ppfr 


3346 . 


. wicrS 


1100. 


• • mi 


2515 . 


• nto'W? 


770 . 


. . :^ 


281 . 


.. . m$? 


653 . 


• . ^ 


1048 . 


. . .•% 


1540. 


. . DipaS 


1995 . 


• • F^th 


1048 . 


....-.+ 


1559 . 


. .. iJbp&S 


541 . 


• • s $®i 


1744. 


■ • .* 


224. 


. .nana 1 ? 


2919 . 


• -F# 


1659 . 


. . nh 


792 . 


tifrriiBfcb 


460 . 


. . r©|& 


496 . 


■ ■ ■ & 


2543 . 


:". ! .:"-fe 


3393 . 


• ■ fia"? 


2255 . 


. vmb 


1687 . 


. • vjf? 


2829. 


• • pDX 1 ? 


434 . 


. m& 


1633 . 


. . &h 


2221 . 


. • br\$f?. 


1935 . 


■ • .$ 


2754. 


. . toqy? 


293, 


589 . nph 


1046 . 


■ *4h 


1762 . 


. • * % j| 


417 . 


. . ri^S 


906 . 


.\wh 


2021 . 


. . n$h 


302 . 


. . nr$£ 


225, 3-: 


n Sygh 


1979, : 


L981 . T^9 

t-,- ; 


1607. 




104. 


rtrikh 


213 . 


. n»n tf$p 


1875 . 


• • ^ 


2682 . 


. ^mh 


824. 


Djrn^W? 


403 . 


• • W(B 


453 . 

883 . 


. .3 


2451 . 
3324 . 




483. 
3242 . 




1447 . 


• "rate? 


1857 . 


. . nnbS 


2489 . 


. . ttDp? 


2059 . 


. n^S 


1825 . 


. . nbpS 


800 . 


' ' * 


3117 . 


• Jtfifik 


203, 


416 . ih$h 


2938. 


• Mf$f& 


53. 


• B^fr 


262 . 


. .?na£? 


1227 . 


. towipb 


133 . 


. w&S 


3089. 


. Spaff? 


276 . 


. . rtarfe 


93. . 


• fl^fc 1 ? 


1770. 




2252 . 


T 'T 


133 . 


djt^S 


1851 . 


. . *2JD 


604. 


. . .rp 


516. 


. '# 


414. 


■ • t£$ 


2585 . 


. . hx4> 


Ill . 


t&flSip 


3112. 


. . nasi? 


2354 . 


• • ^ 


90. 


. fr^fc 


192. 


. . ni^yS 


351 . 


d«n nrb 


1168. 


. rtstfe 


2759 . 


. nBW^ 


1172 . 


. .nam 1 ? 


1129 . 


. 1*5^ 


2629 . 


. .".-^ 


2274. 


... T . 


3325 . 


. D^ 


1336 . 


[309] 


61 . 


• • TO 



n 


rp 


INDEX. 


fm 


2499 . 


• Wk 


2696 . . 


M&W» 


1476. 


. • *19l 


1284. 


. mfi? 


1957 . . 


• T&$? 


1670 . 


. . sxto 


1284. 


t . . .. 


1049 . . 


.^VI^Q 


1040. 


. .ifiT?to 


3121 . 


T 


95 . . 


. rtikp 


2801 . 


. ,nmm 


1994. 


— T 


2400 . . 


• "!#$? 


1069(a) 


. . rr$& 


1010. 


T ... . 


571 . . 


. nto 


2203 . 


. .y/ttto 


1895. 


. . ato57 


52. . 


. Hse 


269. 


. . .'rfo 


714. 


nysyh 


1993 . . 


. tfaii 


793 . 


. . ngp 


1596. 


. izyh 


684. . 


• *?W 


2892. 


. . ^JJB 


1135. 


V V T 


666. . 


. m® 


3031 . 


. . n-«3 


1796. 


. Bhp? 


444. . 


nVT&sp 


3225 . 


■ • -lfi* 


686 . 


. nn^? 


1058, 2188 


T^?£ 


84. 


■ ■ K*ffi 


1604. 


nnn^ 1 ? 


1015 . . 


. h*m 


514. 


. ^jWfc 


2694. 


. Dl^ 1 ? 


888. . 


. .atoo 


1245. 


. . tana 


1508 . 


t ; - ; 


3177 . . 


n«9 


667. 


. . yw 


425. 


. . ibf ? 


2236 . . 


. jws 


1685. 


• -ton?? 


263. 


t ; t ; 


1260 . i 


• • W 


3308 . 


T T " 


966. 


' ,"$ 


1238 . . 


. • I* 


2668 . 


J vt -; •• 


2012 . 


t ; • 


1412 . . 


V$fi 


2502. 


. njrjB 


1283 . 


•• T 


2115 . . 


j^fi 


2502. 


. bJHJB 






889 . . 


- T 


3292 . 


• F0*9 




^ 


2739 . . 


•t ; • 


1924. 


. #*$gj 


2231 . 


. ms®? 


277. . 


. HD 


623 . 


nhtfn^ 


179 . 


. nxft 


475 . . 


. n£ 


2385 . . 


. t|ferjfi 


634. 


T T •* 


1228 . . 


ntena 


3058 . . 


. }tot?£ 


1798 . 


. HD>W5l 


2682 . . 


n^ns 


2141 . . 


d^bw 


1045 . . 


. *tiK& 


580 . . h 


>87Effi 


3285 . . 


• *iip 


694. 




1639 . . . 


^8 


277. . 


. . m 


3374 . . 


• 7K£ 


. 


."fob 


3370 . . 


. .'T8 


901 . . 


■ n^jfi 


2170 . . . 
[310 


t ; — • 
] 


484 . . 


. fm 



DTD 



INDEX. 



WWti 



2721 
3134 
3304 

878 
1077 
3230 
2528 

130 

786 
1845 
2057 
2424 
2758 
3115 
3265 
2302 
2302 
3239 
2298 
1364 
2237 

186 
2030 
2063 
1345 
1646 
1203 
1034 
1205 
1229 



. . trwp 


1721 . 


. . Me 


. . a^e 


677. 


. rbsfbht? 


. • . \33 


504. 


. . ^afes 


. . tygj 


1050 . 


. ^T^te© 


. . . M3 

T * 


1665 . 


. h'TTttDO 

tt: t • 


. . |WJD 


708. 


. . Ttp&e 


. .nrwa 


835. 


. • . .■ *so 


. . !tt 


1696 . 


. ^ee 


. • fi??o 


927. 


. ta^fto 


t •• ; — 


267 . 


. . a^o 


. . sroo 

t ; • 


1273 . 


. • f^ 


tx ; 


2028 . 


. . ^SBO 


; t 


594. 


. a*fe^gfi 


. .&#135 


1173 . 


. . K*fiB 


. Drafts? 


60. 


. nnnfcjfc 


. . *&§ 


1738. 


. . njnj 


* . M^fi 


769. 


. . rtob 


. . K^Z? 


3321 . 


. . rtnia 

T \ ; 


. . W?& 


442 . 


. . nnao 


. . ^& 


448, 2524 . mpM? 


• • ^a 


2409. 


. . D^b 


. tapafe? 


2320 . 


. . .y$ 


. . DK*?fc 


3162 . 


. irsps? 


. . T3&& 


1580. 


. . ifib 


. . mk> 


801 . 


• • V"J$b 


. . n% 


1984. 




. n^Vfi 


2943 . 


. . n^a? 


. . nj^tp 


491 . 


. . Ktofc 


• t ; 


3407 . 


. • ^§P^? 


.prjspja^b 


1937 . 


[311] 



2639 . . 


t ; • 


2544. . 


. 15££ 


233 . . 


. m> 


3355 . . 


• TI3& 


3233 . . 


• Htyfc 


1463 . . 


. PVP 


718. . 


. ritysb 


1827, 1997 


. .iffi 


3378 . . 


. .h® 


298 . . 


_ T _ .. 


1655 . . 


■ rrm 


1844 . . 


. rm% 


1544, 3090 


. rwvp 


3161 . . 


tap*frjffli 


1697 . . 


. tfjpsfi 


1240 . . 


. ig^b 


654 . . 


. wb 


654. . 


P0W6 


336 . . 


. te*B 


3215 . . 


• T^ 


281 . . 


T T 


768. . 




502 . . 


. ix?b 


494. . 


. wi?b 


2235 . . 


. .aw 

T '• 


2249 . . 


. rasa 

T *• - 


2669 . . 


. ns^e 


2149 . . 


. ^JVO 


2072 . . 


. -nivo 


1725,2079 


• MEW 



rt^a 



INDEX. 



rbtt 



1961, J 


2815. rvSvft 


3156 . 


. *wm§ 


1929 . . 


. iSj*§ 


287. 


T r* ; — • 


3170. 


. • ng?p 


1923 . . 


•• t ; 


1634 > 


. • Tp» 


2113 . 


. . «ijrae 


1575, 21$ 


>5 . nw£ 


908 . 


. . &HS9 


2128 . 


. . nib 


1678, 30C 


>8. .it? 


1083. 


t ; - ; • 


3075 . 


. .nixto 


2319 . . 


. nna 

T " 


1341 . 


. . rW*» 


3075 . 


. . nxto 


349 . 


^?nn& 


217. 


• • tflj?? 


1224. 


. btitiipti 


739 . 


. .*§ 


72. 


. . BAp9 


2286 . 


. 5p37#«a 


1827 . 


. .'if* 


1601 . 


. . fbp 


975. 


. . "/ate 


586. 


rhfmb 


830 . 


■- • tfpJ 


994. 


T 


60 . 


. nnno 


2378 . 


. . s^ 


188 . 


. TljmfB 


2640 . 


. -W 


2378 . 


. . . npjaa 


3038 . 


. . n;^p 


2356. 


- T 


1059. 


• '$P? 


1604 . 


. .nt®fe 


1828 . 


. *f& 


3160. 


. . hp 


2415 . 


t : - t 


2611 . 


• -P 


1424. 


. . njfSa 


1604. 


. DW^D 


2210 . 


. oi&W 


440. 


. . .fi» 


656. 


. Drmbto 


2008 . 


T - 


752. 


• • nip? 


892. 


• • w£ 




fc 


1581 . 


. . rtscab 

V | T ' 


3260 . 


. . ^Ifi 




l 


1092, 


1907. nana 


3126 . 


. . h$to 


1098. 


. . *0 


2232 . 


. vn^is 


1288 . 


• ftuhwi} 


2615 . 


. rtN3 


2131 . 


. . n&ib 


2181, 2203 . W¥% 


2615 . 


T 


1377 . 


. . .*T5 


2979 . 


. D;ne$b 


1803 . 


• T 0$3 


2966 . 


. uhm 


2071 . 


. wp*§ 


319 . 


. ^Ml 


3151 . 


. . nn& 
T . .. 


3036 . 


. . njW 


1809. 


. .BW 


1183 . 


. . ma 

T T 


2246 . 


. . in^b 

t ; 


3391 . 


• • m 


2193 . 


. . ma 

T T 


1062 . 


. nhwftj 


3113 . 


. . tetP 


18. 


. n^PHb 


1519 . 




1703 . 


T 


1784. 


. . prrp 


1268 . 


• • ff® 


2912 . 


• • -W 


1140. 


. . nans. 

t • ; 


1150 . 


. . r\0i2 


1690 . 




3003 . 


. . nyp 


2836 . 


[312] 


2602 . 


r t ; 



rtaj 



INDEX. 



row 



1027 . 
1014. 

711 . 
1513. 
2664 . 
3092 . 
1119 . 
2122 . 

489 . 
3021 . 
2253 . 
2989. 
2416 . 
2795 . 
1340. 
1886. 

506 . 
2901 . 
1971 . 
2247 . 
2061 . 
2052 . 
3384. 
1927. 

591 . 
2445 . 
1034. 
2795. 
2420 . 

223. 



T : t 






-rn 

mm 

t ; -t 

. mi 
jrrta 

T 

.T?3 

.Ttf 

" T 

• D J3 
. hi 

naarD 

T " I — 

lim 

T 

row 



22 



635 . 
1944. 
3329 . 
2423 . 

532. 
2349. 
2449 . 

934 . 
2731 . 
2620. 
2909 . 
3191 . 
3065 . 
2722 . 
2457 . 
2457 . 
1426. 
2421 . 
1429 . 
1006 . 
1573 . 
1786. 
2958 . 
2738 . 
1454. 
3204. 
917 . 
1579 . 
1775 . 
2672. 



• #M 
«3#rg 

. n#ro 
. mwm 
W?to3 

. MKD3 

. *o?3 

. ^n?3 
. ^£?3 
. .^H 

• *PM 

. asms 

T " 

. nni5i 

■ :,, t j 

T 

. fijtt&3 

— T 



[313] 



2578 . 

1000 . 

2893 . 

2494. 

489. 

1247 . 

535 . 

3322 . 

1783 . 

154. 

1019 . 

2017. 

455 . 

979. 

1306 . 

850(a) 

960. 

902. 

123,278 

2722. 

2678 . 

1103. 

1841 . 

2326 . 

716. 

942. 

2327. 

2326 . 



T?3 

• h 

m. 

m 

n^$3 
ni?|3 

T : t 

T 

,2722^ 

V T 

T§3 

t ; • 



1893,2235. . 52fJ 
2697 . . . rOM 



mo 



INDEX. 



nny 



2848 . . 


X • 


1660 . 


■ . fij3#| 


995. 


x x ; 


3099 . . 


• p^V? 


1660 . 


• . ®0i 


2844. 


. ifiie 


1645 . . 


. y^ 


836. 


. .-joi 


2760 . 


. . Dnp 


1458 . . 


. MBS 

• T • 


2769 . 


. . in? 


2839 . 


X 'X 


2350 . . 


• *m 


367 . 


x ; x 


2093 . 


. . Dti3flp 


2362 . . 


■ -y; 


818. 


x • 






2362,2375 


■ fihj$ 


365 . 


x — X 




V 


1958 . . 


• • $ 


171, 839. Wfl 

J • -x 


439. 


• .^55? 


3094 . . 


• op 


1686,1406. YW3 


1182. 


■ . mn 


1979 . . 


• «$i 






1864. 


. . wse 


756. . 


• IK*]} 




D 


1766. 


. . ^fifi 


1026 . . 


T ... 


1477. 


. . D^p 


1222. 


xx — ; 


1595 . . 


• -jnj 


911 . 


x ; 


1474. 


. .QTTffi 


1134 . . 


. mi 

X X 


2661 . 


. nvihrap 


880. 


• x -; v*v 


2730 . . 


. twfeo 


2661 . 


D^nh^p 


977. 


■ • .^. 


1835 . . 


. Wm 


913 . 


. HMD 

x ; — 


1338 . 


. . .** 


1444 . . 


. DK^j 


915 . 


X J J - 


1856. 


. . .T# 


1637 . . 


T T 


965 . 


. ntiio 

x ; 


2532. 


■ • ^3J? 


1009 . . 


. nfj&q 


3189 . 


. . WD 


1473 . 


. .ZtfW. 


1982 . . 


T _. . . 


1564 . 


. r\m 


3274. 


. on^jj 


3009 . . 


t ; • 


3303 . 


. nh^iD 


1482. 


• ntaK 


1216 . . 


. na#j 


2740. 


. dnnb 


1287 . 


• n fe?H 


1876 , . 


. jjsift 


955 . 


. .*yp 


3142. 


x-; 


3017 . . 


t; ; • 


2588 . 


. niDD 


402. 


• ■ * 


649 . ■ 


T T J * 


2864. 


. .^ 


805 . 


. • if 


536 . . 


W ^ 


2234 . 


• 4? 


2487 . 


. . m 


517. . 


• X 


1479 . . 


. n!?b 


3388 . 


. . m 


2226 . . 


X X 


2201 . . 


Vfi|bp 


518 . . 


• •*& 


2906 . . 


. n$#} 


1470 . . 


. vtflp 


1787 . . 


n^TB 


212, 737 


. n§sft 


557 . 

V 


514] 


1497 . . 


• njnK 



Tip 



INDEX. 



ropy 



2531 . . 


•Tjg 


345, 2644 . . fi|?g 


1710- . 


. .TS? 


2261 . . 


♦Try 


3101 . 


. .*B 


1710. . 


. -^ 


2061 . . 




2208 . 


. . &i 


1344. . 


■ 7$8 


988. . 


TW 


2581 . 


. rihi 


384, 3351 


• -m 


527 . . 


ay? 


3359 . 


. .bz 


1819,2070 


■3jW 


546. . 


- lis? 


1235 . 


• fty 


3342 . . 


. *3f?5? 


1533 . . 


ti-jty 


2238 . 


. a^j? 


1042 . . 


**P 


1413, 1774 . 


DSij? 


3259 . 


. why 
t .■ t 


3272 . . 


i ■ ■ 


490 . . 


■ *5te 


303, 924. jrbg 


42 . 


■ m 


972 . . 


• .pv 


13,10;: 


S9 . *33"7J? 


2788 . . 


■ py. 


990. . 


-isiy 


794,28" 


ri . . riSy 


314, 315 


ann 


407 . . 


. . 115? 


2848 . 


• ™^ 


311 . . 


■ ca^y. 


3255 . . 


• « 


1534 . 


• • "W 


870, 2967 


• ftflk 


1940 . . 


•^ 


866 . 


TW 


1266 . . 


■ Tfl 


964 . . 


■ ^ 


2161 . 


• a$? 


2613 . . 


. rb-y 


2152 . . . 


• Oty. 


1851 . 


• • DVffi 


1419 . . 


2?nSnj; 


273 . . 


• IK 


2944 . 




2382 . . 


• pi 


2398 . . 




1180 . 


• -pw 


343 . . 


. D^K 


968, 1176 


org 


2852 . 


• T — . 


954. . 


. flS. 


326 . . 


• • IS 


1383 . 


• T-K 


2164 . . 


. . rvig 


2784 . . 


tt?fi 


3304. 


• .C3!3S? 


83 . . 


^ 


326. . 


dpyK 


940 . 


. D^ja 


88. . 


n^g 


1198 . . ft 


s&to pg 


1168 (a) 


. . "©a 


178 . . 


*** 


2053 . . 


" ■ ^ 


86. . 


• • yi 


3420 . . 


rrtyg 


511 . . 


. Tg 


386 . . 


. ^2$ 


658 . . 


n&?s?. 


3297 . . 


n'Tg 


1512 . . 


• B«SJ 


1068 . . 


.^ 


2530 . . 


D*Ttt 
. T -. 


660, 17< 


u(a) n?g 


2042 . . 


.% 


343 . . 


. D^Tg 


297 . 


• -owi 


2453 . . 


.wg T 


2637 . . 


DJT138 


2281 . 


. WB 


1977 . . 


T^g r 


1120 . . 


•TJT^B 


2095 . 

[ 


315] 


195 .. . 


nibg 



♦Btf 



INDEX. 



11W 



1360 . 

371 . 

476 . 

636 . 
2104 . 
2257. 

582 . 
1931 . 

576. 
2167 . 
1336 . 
2412 . 
1594. 






£ 



2571 . 

909 . 
3256 . 

482 . 

243. 

978 . 

1821 . 

1822 . 
3228 . 

946. 
321 . 
14. 
2556. 
456, 1637 
452 . . 



rrtet 
tWQSL 



• : - t 

X 

■ jfei 



1949 
2691 
2198 
3029 
2384 

481 
1713 
2914 
1384 

138 
2529 
87 
1109 
2811 
2810 
3404 

259 
3357 
2467 
1469 
1493 
2841 

943 



789 
1608 

438 
1889 
1759 



T^9 

t ; 

T : T 

T 



rims 

t ; -t 

CPBhS 

• TT 

.ma 

.mb 

T 

. n§ 






[316] 



182. . 


T T ; 


641 . . 


P*w 


1518 . . 


n |T* 


2367 . . 


. *njro 


675. . 


."TO 


2166 . . 


T T — 


696 . . 


x • 


711 . . 


T • 


3139 . . 


x •• ••. 


361 . . 


. ywtt 


1634 . . 


• 1ft* 


1719 . . 


• -P n $ 


1504 . . 


• 73pB| 


923, 2047 


. n*c 


2140 . . 


X •• 


948. . 


. fre 


1589 . . 


. \ 


519 . . 


.rAap 


2559 . . 


■ .J^ 


2886 . . 


rmtii 


1930 . . 


nnm 


957 . . 


• x ; 


2902 . . 


nto 


3360 . . 


T — X 


2192 . . 


np? 


2035 . . 


">W 


479 . . 


D'pss 


1606 . . . 


x | T -; - 


1152 . . 


.Tgi 


719. . . 


"to 



fi» 


2 


INDEX. 


TO 


1 


1164 . . 


T T 


1648 . . 


. Tb % j3 


858 ... . 


)Wfi 


2935 . rjjjjg mss 


431 . . 


• • rp 


838 . . 


*P#j2 


3004 . . 


TH? 


431 . . 


• -p:p. 






1239 . . 


rw 


3110 . . 


. . 4 


i 




2986 . . 


.rvrc 

- T 


2159 . . 


• nftj? 


2405 . . 


nan 


2656 . . 


• TT 


2159 . . 


•1#P 


2496 . . 


fi*?1 






1478 . . 


. .w^3 


3227 . . 


.nan 


P 




2938 . . 


• DTJ&j? 


2118 . . 


T 


1837 . . . 


•**p 


1236 . . 


. . njji 


2307 . . 


\W\ 


1838 . • 


.Tbj? 


1236 . . 


• .nj& 


1388 . . 


. ^jh 


1837 . . 


i"»?p 


662 . . 


. mp 


2118 . . 


wan 

• T 


3392 . . 


rop 


2427 . . 


• n»p 


1390 . . 


mm 

• T 


3410 . . . 


re$ 


432 . . 


. w $ 


757 . . . 


T 


1837 . . . 


BTJj? 


652 . . 


• • rp 


1 . . 


rwAri 


2681 . . 


nmap 


807, 3120 


• T^p 


3159 . . 


T»&1 


2885 . . 


mp 


2217 . . 


. *ttp 


1138 . . 


T 


2260 . . 


.dnj5 


3d, 39 


• -*il? 


2182 . . 


. . nh 


257 . . 


n#7j? 


1381 . . 


. rw$ 


1988 . . 


. mm 

x t ; 


3347 . . 


wp 


1632 . . 


• *5'T 


620 . . 


. .rta , i 


348 . . 


:"« 


2900 . . 


■ riWTj? 


1755 . . 


. . rqh 


355 . . 


w 


2479 . . 


• • n ^P 


620 . . 


. rtoi 


1169. . 


. rap 


1192 . . 


• -t :) • 


2929 . . 


. T31 


1747 . . 


♦a-ip 


1188 . . 


■ D?31j5 


120 . . 


• Wl 


674. . 


nnaip 


2959 . . 


rnp 


462 . . 


• .f»3 


693, 1123 . 


■ np 


1590 . . 


• ™p 


462 . . 


. -rah 


1286 . . 


• ™p 


2965 . . 


. ni^j; 


2263 . . 


D*»3h 


3223 . . 


. nnp 


3104 . . 


. nwp 


462,4731 


nyan 


2337 . . 


TO 


2592 . . 


. nbn^j? 


771 . . 


T ; - 


2287 . . 


• niep 


1756 . . 


. W'p 


1465 . . 


.DrrSri 


2517 . . 


. y=ofaj3 


3275 . . 

[31 


t t Jt 


2259 . . 





mi 



3127 . . . 


.nm 


2956 . . . 


. Vn 


2662 . . 


•rn 


2662 . . 


tern 

; T 


2533 . . . 


. nil 


610 .. . 


*itn 


673 .. . 


nam 

t ; t 


935 . . i*; 


i nhrn 


2108 . . 


nhrri. 


2622 . . 


ft3Qi 


2471 . . . 


Y^rn 


3380 , . 


am 

— T 


1712 . . 


• D Cn 


2306 . . 


awn 


3039 . . 


DW3 


3065 . . 


. v&rii 
T _. _ 


1464 . . 


wn 


1140 . . 


. nn 


796,2178. 


■ ITT! 


895. . 


nsn 


2484. ... 


opra 


1485 . . 


. . ^ 


3403 . . 


■•■V3 


3343 . . 


topi 


1066 . . 


D^tol 

T 


2288,2399 . 


ntei 


2579 . . 


• B'll 


1066 . . 


T T 


2301 . . 




937, . 


• -iei 



INDEX. 




TO 


1081 . . 


.njn 


1846 . 


. . ^imb 


2981 . . 


fosn 


1206 . 


. . DTO 


437 . . 


■ iijh 


2366 . 


. . . nf 


2271 . . 


• njn 


2491 . 


. Knnnb 

t •; t 


3373 . . 


■ njn 


2106. 




1004 . . 


• «ijn 


1317 . 


T " 


1141,2102. 


. 'sh 


3012 . 


• T " 


1141 . . 


. 'sh 


197 . 


. . n* 


1158,2843. 


w.-} 


1867 . 


. . .13* 


437 . . 


D'jft 


3231 . 


. • ^ 


914. . 


nan 


2338 . 


. . ibb 

T 


3179 . . 


vopift 


2338 . 




621 . , 


■m 


1262 . 


• • TS* 


1186 . . 


. wn5n 


2338 . 


. f^ 3 ^ 


1484 . . 


■ ■ n 


2447 . 


. . nri^ 


625 . . 


• i* 


2653. 


. Djwibb 


2728 . . 


• p* 


1990. 


. . WJfr 


625. . 


nij-n 


2117 . 


. dntof* 


48 . . 


jq$ 


2305 . 


. . nam 

t ; 


240. . 


• T 


2155 . 


. . vtfp 


1546 . . 


T T 


2174 . 


. . rirtfp 






2041 . 


. . i$? 


& 




997 . 


T T 


1161,2133 


-r 


1815,2878 . T\W 


1748 . . 


. w 


1028 . 


t t ; 


459 . . 


• *W 


2751 . 


• • • pB? 


2011 . . 


■ y?^ 


1758, i 


2114. . lb 


2905 . . 


• w£ 


1432 . 


T T 


1200 . . 


. rr\p 


1246. 


. . ^hfc 


1200 . . 


r\i& 


1041 . 


. . ■** 



[318] 





my 


INDEX. 


UJ» 


W 


1107 . 


• • ^ 


2417, 1373 . . M0 


3389 . 


T T 


2846. 


. . D\?nb> 


1492 .... W 


1230, 1322 . DS^ 


2554. 


T * T 


402 . . . ^tf 


2621 . 


. D^W 






3362 .... "1^ 


3087 . 


bmb& 




# 


2507, 3273 . . TW 


982 . 


• '$# 


3019 . 


. . h\m 


1151 . . . nw 


562 . 


. . r\vh& 


2756 . 


. . rh'm 


3293 . . . nW 


2402 . 


. tiwhp 


3121 . 


. .nnx# 


2240 . . . ttW 


562 . 


. D^W 


1558 . 


. . . ■& 

T 


2820 . . . nM# 

t ; • 


3422 . 


. D^W 


916, 


989 . K!3# 


1664. . . *??# 


683 . 


. D^tf 


1705. 


. . . 3# 


2472 . . . h$0 


219. . 


. •. d# 


2168 . 




3040 . . . *ibb0 


241, 59< 


),1018 Dfc? 


2636 . 


. . .»£ 


3040 . . . *rfa># 


1032 . . 


. ftfig 


1785 . 


. . .«# 


3005 . . DnSj# 


219 . 


. nag? 

T T 


3291 . 


• • ^ 


873, 2605,3241 DS^ 


279 . 


. to^ 


3328 . 


. . ^5^ 


1733 . . . ftM# 


6 . 


• — T 


2773. 


. . . *3# 


3323 . . . to^ 


559, 24: 


t ; 


2882 . 


. t; • 


1214. . . .ptr 


3253 . 


• -W 


2302 . 


. • VlP 


2066 . . . . ft& 


3353 . 


T .. . 


575 . 


. . J?5^ 


2225 . . . nW 


570 . 


. r\±& 


702, 


2127. njfttf 


2705. . . tifo? 


590 . 


. &&# 


545 . 


. . trjftp 


1316 . . . tihtf 


570 . 


. r\±f 


498 


. . tf.njja?* 


2536,3356 HhW 


1729 . 


. ybw 


3028 . 


. . ^30 


976 .. . nS^ 


2277 . 


. j»$ 


2952 . 


• • "Q? 


777 .. . nW 


2277 . 


. VW 


3183 . 


. . £H3fe> 


3022 . . . nnS^ 

T * • 


2310 . 


. }ij?^ 


2994. 


T ; • 


3083 . . . VT?# 


356 . 


. . $;££> 


191 . 


— T 


2787 . . . Sjrj^ 


1834. 


. 'W® 


1396 . 


. . ,*!# 


1976 . . . rjnW 


535. 


. • |Jffl# 


3379 . 


• - T 


94 . . . wty 
[319] 


1834. 


. . aS8# 



nj»p 



INDEX, 



D^n 



1493 (o). 


JTE&b" 


392. . 


$y.W 


356. . 


■ tojj&# 


1442 . . 


fwb# 


571 . . 


T X 


69. . 


• "MP 


107 . . 


■ • ^ 


2808 . . 


• T 


310. . 


. BP^ 


705. . 


Dy# 


682. -. 


p»j# 


2971 . . 


. D*3# 


3307 . . 


. d:5t^ 


932. . 


■'T?# 


2869 . . 


• — T ' 


449. . 


n?T 


1813 . . 


Tgg? 


2087 . . 


tnj$> 


1358 . . 


*nna# 


3340 . . . 


}fe^ 


828 . . 


^y 


3356 . . 


V T 


2177 . . 


n |T^ 


1854 . . 


Sw 


2448 . . 


d*i# 


122. . 


n? 


132 . . 


«i# 


2927 . . 


. WW 


583 . . 


&&$ 


549. . 


n^n&y 

T 







1898 
576 



1871 
332 

3382 

265 

266 

317 

396 

1978 

2503 

345 

486 

2289 

2369 

2369 

2972 

691 

1624 

1936 

2144 

2188 

2709 

2476 

659 

2459 

320 

896 



. . nntf 


1631 . . 


• . &w 


2537 . . 


n 


1307 . . 

81 . . 


. . nnKtt 


10. . 


T _. - 


15 . . 


. . ni«n 


3381 . . 


. n^orin 


1680 . . 
891 . •. 
529 . . 
529 . . 


. . ynnan 


1278 . . 


. .jHb&tn 

t •• ; 


194. . 
3070 . . 


• . ian 


3164 . . 
146 . . 


T 


3130 . . 


. . Kinn 

T 


3258 . . 


. . ansa 

" T • 


3266 . . 


• T 


2988 . . 


. . &*5n 


2204 . . 


. ^?1?n 


3141 . . 

60. . 

681 . . 


. . #j?3n 


290. . 


. n-i^prm 

t ••• j: - : 


458 . . 


. . rap 


1258 . . 


. . h)#\ 


3056 . . 


. . win 


2677 . . 


. . n&iih 

x ; — 


893 . . 


[320] 





. pi$in 

. Ngnn 

. .nh 
. Dinn 

• nw 

. 3'inn 
. £n 

. S^n 

. hm 
niiSto 
. n?$n 

. nntfin 
. m)ft 

■•T " 

. into 

T 

. inn 
. wtpi^i 
. nVin 
. Dhn 

X 

. nnn 
. S'nnn 
.n|nnn 
. n*t? ; n 
. *n*n 

x • 
x • 

. ♦£?!) 

. Di*n 



Bn*n 



INDEX. 



i«inn 



2184 . . 


eh*ri 


2698 . . 


nyatan 


1586 . . 


2525 . . 


. D*Ktyn 


3002 . . 


nnpn 


898 . . 


676 . . 


. n^5Fi 


1537 . . 


• nspri 


2074 . . 


2920 . . 


. man 


1616 . . 


V T • 


1539 . . 


1436, 1437 


.*b* 


485 . . 


. nhyn 


680 . ■> 


388 . . 


• H% 


1461 . . 


. ihtB 


1881 . . 


2135 . . 


. rbn 


1471 . . 


rbari 


3163 . . 


376. . 


f 


2708 . . 


.njjfo 


404 . . 


1371 . . 


'??£ 


2495 . . 


n$n 


383 . . 


2049 . . 


. . DM 

T 


3116 . . 


^V^ 


464 . . 


3192 . . 


. . DJ? 


1797 . . 


pyn 


390. . 


269 . . 


roan 

T 


663, 2121 . 


fiMFl 


2724 . . 


642 . . 


man 

" T 


525 . . 


fergh 


3194 . . 


2037 . . 


. D^h 


399 . . 


n^yp 


1417 . . 


3005 . . 


• T 


1153 . . 


^312? 


573 . . 


465 . . 


t ; • 


2793 . . 


npn 


577 . . 


321 . . 


pn&n 


2442 . . 


■5p0 


2723 . . 


1241 . . 


. . jn 


3145 . . 


Minn 


1761 . . 


2347, 3007 . 


. run 

T J 


2065 . . 


•Tie 


487 . . 


2426 . . 


^n 


283 . . 


T .. . _ 


2293 . . 


1831 . . 


. ari 


1035 . . 


niB 


1263 . . 


1235 . . 


. -nun 


2206 . . 


Tin 

• T 


2954 . . 


2335 . . 


• W 


815 . . 


b>bnri 




23 




T321 


l 





. VYTh 

T 
• T 

" T 

T 

dot 

ip#n 
. nn 



^nnn 



PRINTED BI J. WERTilEIMiiR AND CO., FiNSBCJRY CIRCUS, LONDON. 






-V ^ 



<f fry o^-* A 





* o > ^o* 







,v ' » * <# A ^ x c ° N c * ^b_ 









* <h 



: : 




v.. ,4* 






Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: June 2005 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 









'V' 



^ 










vO 









.\\ v 



A 









V# 






1« *bo* ; ^ 




